0% found this document useful (0 votes)

1K views1,027 pages

LightSpeed Series - English UM 2359740-1EN 10

The document is a Learning and Reference Guide for the GE Healthcare LightSpeed Series, detailing various models and their functionalities. It includes sections on safety, maintenance, hardware components, and protocols for operating the imaging systems. The guide serves as a comprehensive resource for users to understand and effectively utilize the LightSpeed imaging technology.

Uploaded by

Andrew Sinyagin

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

1K views1,027 pages

LightSpeed Series - English UM 2359740-1EN 10

Uploaded by

Andrew Sinyagin

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 1027

GE Healthcare

LightSpeed Series
Learning and Reference Guide
薬事承認番号 21100BZY00104000
GE Medical Systems does business as GE Healthcare

This Manual Supports the Following Product Names:

LightSpeed VFX Plus

LightSpeed VFX Ultra
LightSpeed VFX16
LightSpeed Pro16
LightSpeed RT
LightSpeed RT16
LightSpeed Xtra
HiSpeed QX/i
LightSpeed QX/i
LightSpeed Plus
LightSpeed Ultra
LightSpeed 16

0459
SFDA (I) 20043302512
SFDA (I) 20053311541
LightSpeed Series
Learning and Reference Guide, English
2369740-1EN
Revision: 10
© 2007 General Electric Company
All rights reserved.
Revision History

REV DATE REASON FOR CHANGE

0 03-03 First Release for LightSpeed Series
1 Additional information
2 04-03 Updated information
3 10-03 Updated information
4 03-04 Updated information
5 12-04 Updated information
6 05-05 Updated information
7 02-06 Updated information
8 07-06 Updated information
9 06-07 Updated information
Updated information from Hii Review Labeled
10 10-07
2369740r10_new_content_hii.doc

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) i-1

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Table of Contents
Revision History............................................................................................................................. i-1

Chapter 1: About This Guide

Purpose of This Guide................................................................................................................1-1
Prerequisite Skills.........................................................................................................................1-1
Chapter Format............................................................................................................................1-1
Introduction ...........................................................................................................................1-2
What Do I Need to Know About... ................................................................................1-2
How Do I... ...............................................................................................................................1-2
Graphic Conventions and Legend.......................................................................................1-2
Safety Notices ...............................................................................................................................1-4

Chapter 2: Safety
Introduction............................................................................................................................................2-1
What Do I Need to Know About....................................................................................................2-2
Warning Labels and Symbols................................................................................................2-2
General Safety Guidelines .......................................................................................................2-5
Radiation Safety...........................................................................................................................2-7
Authorized Users .................................................................................................................2-7
General Radiation Safety.................................................................................................2-8
Scans Acquired at the Same Tomographic Plane ...............................................2-8
CTDIvol .....................................................................................................................................2-9
X-Ray Tubes........................................................................................................................ 2-10
Electrical Safety ................................................................................................... 2-10
Mechanical Safety.................................................................................................................... 2-11
General Mechanical Safety ......................................................................................... 2-11
Patient Positioning........................................................................................................... 2-12
Reconstructed Image Orientation.................................................................................... 2-17
Data Safety.................................................................................................................................. 2-18
Application Specific Safety Topics.................................................................................... 2-18
Cardiac Imaging ............................................................................................................... 2-19
Patient Preparation ......................................................................................................... 2-20
Lung Algorithm.................................................................................................................. 2-21
Autoscan .............................................................................................................................. 2-21
SmartStep/SmartView Safety..................................................................................... 2-21
Interventional / Biopsy Scanning.............................................................................. 2-22
Radiation Therapy Planning........................................................................................ 2-23
Accuracy of Measurements ................................................................................................ 2-23
Measure Distance for Axial, Helical, and Cine Images ................................... 2-23
Measure Distance for Scout Images....................................................................... 2-23

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) TOC-1

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Measure Angle................................................................................................................... 2-24
ROI........................................................................................................................................... 2-24
Reformat Plane Thickness............................................................................................ 2-24
Operator Console Ergonomics........................................................................................... 2-24
Posture .................................................................................................................................. 2-24
Equipment Adjustments................................................................................................ 2-25
Accessories.................................................................................................................................. 2-26
GE Approved Cardiac Trigger Monitors ................................................................. 2-26
IV Pole Safety...................................................................................................................... 2-26
Table Tray Safety.............................................................................................................. 2-27
Systems With Metal-Free Cradles and Accessories......................................... 2-27
Limited Access Room Configuration....................................................................... 2-28
Emergency Devices and Emergency Egress ............................................................... 2-28
Emergency Devices......................................................................................................... 2-28
Emergency Stop................................................................................................................ 2-29
System Emergency OFF Buttons .............................................................................. 2-29
Emergency Patient Care During X-Ray ON: ......................................................... 2-30
Emergency Egress ........................................................................................................... 2-30
Maintenance and Cleaning.................................................................................................. 2-31
Environmental Concerns ...................................................................................................... 2-31
Name and Concentration of Hazardous Substances ............................................. 2-32
Explanation of Pollution Control Label................................................................... 2-32
Precautions ......................................................................................................................... 2-34

Chapter 3: Getting Started

Introduction............................................................................................................................................3-1
What Do I Need to Know About....................................................................................................3-2
Hardware Components............................................................................................................3-3
Power Distribution Unit (PDU)........................................................................................3-3
Gantry Controls....................................................................................................................3-3
Gantry Display ......................................................................................................................3-7
Hardware Components for LightSpeed 1.X Xtream Systems.................................3-8
Hardware Component: Gantry Controls ..................................................................3-8
Hardware Component: Gantry Display for 1.X Systems with Xtream..... 3-10
Internal Gantry Components...................................................................................... 3-11
Computer ............................................................................................................................. 3-13
Table....................................................................................................................................... 3-15
Monitors................................................................................................................................ 3-16
Keyboard and Scan Interface module ................................................................... 3-19
Mouse .................................................................................................................................... 3-22
Bright Box ............................................................................................................................ 3-23
Power Distribution Unit (PDU) ............................................................................................. 3-24
Users Conventions ................................................................................................................... 3-26
Tool Chest .................................................................................................................................... 3-29

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) TOC-2

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
HIPAA.............................................................................................................................................. 3-31
Understanding users and groups............................................................................. 3-32
Understanding groups and privileges.................................................................... 3-32
Product Network Filters - PNF ............................................................................................ 3-32
Software Download................................................................................................................. 3-33
OptiDose ....................................................................................................................................... 3-34
Dose Features & Technology * .................................................................................. 3-34
Dose Reports ...................................................................................................................... 3-35
How Do I................................................................................................................................................ 3-37
Shut Down and Start Up the Octane System.............................................................. 3-38
Shut Down and Start Up the PC Based System ......................................................... 3-39
Login and Logout ..................................................................................................................... 3-41
Configure Users for the System......................................................................................... 3-44
Enterprise Tab ............................................................................................................................ 3-47
Local User Management Tab.............................................................................................. 3-51
Group and Permission Mapping........................................................................................ 3-55
Use QuickSnap........................................................................................................................... 3-59
Use IQ Snap................................................................................................................................. 3-61
Use Anonymous Patient (Anon Pat. Level) .................................................................... 3-64

Chapter 4: Daily Maintenance

Chapter 5: Multi-Detector Information

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) TOC-3

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Helical Pitch and Scan Mode Definitions..........................................................................5-9
Helical Configurations 2 and 4 Row Mode Interleaved .............................................5-9
Helical Configurations 4 Row Mode Interspaced ...................................................... 5-11
Helical User Interface ............................................................................................................. 5-12
Guidelines For mAs.................................................................................................................. 5-13
Slice Profiles ................................................................................................................................ 5-14
LightSpeed™ Ultra ........................................................................................................................... 5-15
What Do I Need to Know About................................................................................................. 5-16
Hardware Components......................................................................................................... 5-16
Detector Configurations........................................................................................................ 5-17
Axial Configurations ................................................................................................................ 5-20
Axial User Interface ................................................................................................................. 5-22
Axial Signal Collection ............................................................................................................ 5-22
Axial Interval ............................................................................................................................... 5-23
Tilt Correction ............................................................................................................................. 5-23
Helical Pitch and Scan Mode Definitions....................................................................... 5-24
Helical Configurations 2 and 4 Row Mode Interleaved .......................................... 5-25
Helical Configurations 4 Row Mode Interspaced ...................................................... 5-26
Helical Configurations 8 Row Mode................................................................................. 5-27
Helical User Interface ............................................................................................................. 5-28
Guidelines For mAs.................................................................................................................. 5-29
Slice Profiles ................................................................................................................................ 5-30
Cardiac Helical Slice Profiles....................................................................................... 5-31
LightSpeed™16, Pro16, RT16 and Xtra Systems ................................................................... 5-32
What Do I Need to Know About................................................................................................. 5-33
Hardware Components......................................................................................................... 5-33
Axial Configurations ................................................................................................................ 5-34
Axial User Interface ................................................................................................................. 5-38
Axial Signal Collection ............................................................................................................ 5-39
Axial Interval ............................................................................................................................... 5-39
Tilt Correction ............................................................................................................................. 5-40
Helical Pitch and Scan Mode Definitions....................................................................... 5-41
Helical Configurations 8 and 16 Row Modes .............................................................. 5-42
Helical User Interface ............................................................................................................. 5-44
Guidelines For Building Protocols ..................................................................................... 5-45
Slice Profiles ................................................................................................................................ 5-46
Cardiac Helical Slice Profiles....................................................................................... 5-47

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) TOC-4

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6: Building Protocols
Introduction............................................................................................................................................6-1
What Do I Need to Know About....................................................................................................6-2
Helical/Axial/Cine ........................................................................................................................6-2
Prospective Multiple Reconstructions (PMR)...................................................................6-3
Full and Plus Recon Modes .....................................................................................................6-3
Building Protocols........................................................................................................................6-5
Using Protocols.............................................................................................................................6-5
Editing Protocols ..........................................................................................................................6-6
Viewing Protocols........................................................................................................................6-6
System Options ............................................................................................................................6-6
Noise Index Values......................................................................................................................6-6
AutomA.............................................................................................................................................6-7
Background ...........................................................................................................................6-7
AutomA Theory.....................................................................................................................6-9
AutomA FAQs ..................................................................................................................... 6-10
AutomA Interface............................................................................................................. 6-13
SmartmA....................................................................................................................................... 6-17
WideView...................................................................................................................................... 6-20
LightSpeed RT, SDAS/MDAS 4 slice scanners, LightSpeed RT16,
and LightSpeed Xtra Systems .................................................................................... 6-20
Pediatric Protocols................................................................................................................... 6-22
Protocol Numbers .................................................................................................................... 6-24
Anatomical Selector................................................................................................................ 6-25
ECG Trace (Option) ................................................................................................................... 6-25
How Do I................................................................................................................................................ 6-27
Build or Edit a Protocol........................................................................................................... 6-28
Record a Personalized AutoVoice..................................................................................... 6-46
Select Default Language for AutoVoice 1, 2, and 3.................................................. 6-49
Change Pre-Set Delay for AutoVoice .............................................................................. 6-52
Delete an AutoVoice................................................................................................................ 6-53
Copy and Paste Protocols .................................................................................................... 6-54
Delete a Protocol ...................................................................................................................... 6-57
Use ECG Trace............................................................................................................................ 6-59

Chapter 7: SmartPrep (Option)

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) TOC-5

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Scanning the Monitor Phase..................................................................................................7-2
Scanning the Scan Phase........................................................................................................7-3
How Do I...................................................................................................................................................7-4
Set the SmartPrep Parameters .............................................................................................7-5
Scan the Baseline Phase..........................................................................................................7-8
Scan the Monitor Phase ........................................................................................................ 7-10
Scan the Scan Phase .............................................................................................................. 7-12

Chapter 8: VariSpeed (Option)

Chapter 9: Prospective Gating (SmartScore) (Option)

Chapter 10: Cardiac Imaging

Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 10-1
What Do I Need to Know About................................................................................................. 10-2
Prior to Scanning ...................................................................................................................... 10-3
Cardiac Helical .................................................................................................................. 10-5
SnapShot Segment.......................................................................................................... 10-6
SnapShot Burst.................................................................................................................. 10-6
SnapShot Burst Plus........................................................................................................ 10-6
CardIQ SnapShot Window ........................................................................................... 10-8
ECG (or EKG) Waveform ............................................................................................. 10-10
Auto Detection of Heart Rate .................................................................................. 10-11
Manual Detect Heart Rate ........................................................................................ 10-11
Pitch..................................................................................................................................... 10-12
Phase Location............................................................................................................... 10-12
% R-Peak Value.............................................................................................................. 10-12
SnapShot Mode Usage ............................................................................................... 10-13
ECG Modulated mA ...................................................................................................... 10-13
Scan Preparation................................................................................................................... 10-15

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) TOC-6

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Patient Preparation .............................................................................................................. 10-17
Patient Skin Preparation & Electrode Placement........................................... 10-18
Alternate Electrode Positions for Signal Clarity............................................... 10-19
Scan Parameters Usage .................................................................................................... 10-20
Scout Scan........................................................................................................................ 10-20
Localizer Scan................................................................................................................. 10-21
Timing Bolus Scan......................................................................................................... 10-22
Cardiac Helical Scan.................................................................................................... 10-23
Cardiac Series Retro Reconstruction Numbering .................................................. 10-25
Single Phase Image Set.............................................................................................. 10-25
Multiphase Image Set ................................................................................................. 10-25
Cardiac ECG Gated Images are annotated with
either of the following: ................................................................................................ 10-25
ECG Viewer Overview .......................................................................................................... 10-26
How Do I............................................................................................................................................. 10-27
Set Up a Patient...................................................................................................................... 10-28
Scan the Patient..................................................................................................................... 10-33
Scout Scans .................................................................................................................... 10-33
Scan the Patient .................................................................................................................... 10-35
Localizer Scan ................................................................................................................ 10-35
Timing Bolus Scans ..................................................................................................... 10-36
Enhanced Cardiac Scan ............................................................................................ 10-38
Reconstruct Cardiac Scans............................................................................................... 10-41
Save ECG Trace ...................................................................................................................... 10-43

Chapter 11: Cardiac Imaging for LightSpeed Pro16

Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 11-1
What Do I Need to Know About................................................................................................. 11-2
Prior to Scanning ...................................................................................................................... 11-3
Cardiac Helical .................................................................................................................. 11-5
SnapShot Segment.......................................................................................................... 11-6
SnapShot Burst.................................................................................................................. 11-6
SnapShot Burst Plus........................................................................................................ 11-7
CardIQ SnapShot Window.................................................................................................... 11-8
ECG (or EKG) Waveform ............................................................................................. 11-10
Auto Detection of Heart Rate .................................................................................. 11-11
Manual Detect Heart Rate ........................................................................................ 11-11
Pitch..................................................................................................................................... 11-12
Phase Location............................................................................................................... 11-12
% R-Peak Value.............................................................................................................. 11-12
SnapShot Mode Usage ............................................................................................... 11-13
ECG Modulated mA ...................................................................................................... 11-13
Scan Preparation................................................................................................................... 11-15
Patient Preparation .............................................................................................................. 11-17

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) TOC-7

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Patient Skin Preparation & Electrode Placement........................................... 11-18
Alternate Electrode Positions for Signal Clarity............................................... 11-19
Scan Parameters Usage .................................................................................................... 11-20
Scout Scan........................................................................................................................ 11-20
Localizer Scan................................................................................................................. 11-21
Timing Bolus Scan......................................................................................................... 11-22
Cardiac Helical Scan.................................................................................................... 11-23
Cardiac Series Retro Reconstruction Numbering .................................................. 11-25
Single Phase Image Set.............................................................................................. 11-25
Multiphase Image Set ................................................................................................. 11-25
Cardiac ECG Gated Images are annotated with either of the following:11-25
ECG Viewer Overview .......................................................................................................... 11-26
How Do I............................................................................................................................................. 11-27
Set Up a Patient...................................................................................................................... 11-28
Scan the Patient..................................................................................................................... 11-33
Scout Scans .................................................................................................................... 11-33
Scan the Patient .................................................................................................................... 11-35
Localizer Scan ................................................................................................................ 11-35
Timing Bolus Scans ..................................................................................................... 11-36
Enhanced Cardiac Scan ............................................................................................ 11-38
Reconstruct Cardiac Scans............................................................................................... 11-41
Save ECG Trace ...................................................................................................................... 11-43

Chapter 12: Auto Applications (Option)

Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 12-1
What Do I Need to Know About................................................................................................. 12-2
Direct3D ........................................................................................................................................ 12-2
Direct3D Curves ........................................................................................................................ 12-2
VariViewer Interactive Review Window ......................................................................... 12-2
VariViewer Batch Prescriptions.......................................................................................... 12-6
Direct 3D WorkArounds......................................................................................................... 12-8
VariViewer WorkArounds...................................................................................................... 12-8
Direct Multi Planar Reformat (DMPR) (Option) ............................................................. 12-8
Session Setup Window .................................................................................................. 12-9
Scanning with DMPR............................................................................................................ 12-12
DMPR Review Controller..................................................................................................... 12-14
DMPR Manual Batch Prescriptions................................................................................ 12-17
How Do I............................................................................................................................................. 12-19
Set the Direct3D Parameters in the Scan Prescription........................................ 12-20
Select Preset Curves for Direct3D.................................................................................. 12-23
Select Rendering Control Selections on the Direct3D Setup Screen............. 12-26
View Direct3D in the Review Mode ............................................................................... 12-28

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) TOC-8

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Set Up For VariViewer.......................................................................................................... 12-32
View VariViewer Images..................................................................................................... 12-34
Set Up a VariViewer Batch Prescription...................................................................... 12-35
Set the Direct MPR Parameters in the Scan Prescription ................................... 12-38

Chapter 13: Performed Procedure Step (PPS) (Option)

Chapter 14: Exam Split (Option)

Chapter 15: SmartStep (Option)

Chapter 16: SmartView™ (Option)

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) TOC-9

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
SmartView Display................................................................................................................... 16-7
How Do I................................................................................................................................................ 16-8
Prepare for SmartView........................................................................................................... 16-9
Set Up SmartView Mode .................................................................................................... 16-11
Scan with SmartView........................................................................................................... 16-15
Display SmartView Images ............................................................................................... 16-18
Set SmartView Layout Preference................................................................................. 16-21
Set Window/Level Presets for the HHC....................................................................... 16-23
Create New Images from SmartView Scan Data ................................................... 16-25

Chapter 17: Scheduling Patients

Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 17-1
What Do I Need to Know About................................................................................................. 17-2
Patient Schedule....................................................................................................................... 17-2
Connect Pro................................................................................................................................. 17-2
New Records and Completed Records .......................................................................... 17-2
How Do I................................................................................................................................................ 17-3
Use the Bar Code Reader ..................................................................................................... 17-4
Update the Patient Schedule List...................................................................................... 17-6
Add a Patient to the Schedule............................................................................................ 17-8
Delete a Patient From the Schedule............................................................................. 17-10
Set Up Preferences in the Schedule.............................................................................. 17-11
Edit a Patient Schedule....................................................................................................... 17-14
Select a Patient from the Schedule............................................................................... 17-16
Check the Status of a Patient .......................................................................................... 17-18
View More Information About the Patient ................................................................. 17-19

Chapter 18: Biopsy Mode

Chapter 19: X-Y Table Accuracy Procedure

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) TOC-10

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Requirements..................................................................................................................... 19-4
Set Up Procedure ............................................................................................................. 19-4
Clinical table lateral motion verification procedure for PET-CT RT
and CT-RT..................................................................................................................................... 19-6
Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 19-6
Results ................................................................................................................................... 19-7
Clinical table lateral motion verification procedure for PET-CT RT
and CT-RT.................................................................................................................................... 19-9
Analysis of Results .......................................................................................................... 19-9
Clinical table elevation adjustment verification procedure for PET-CT RT
and CT-RT.................................................................................................................................. 19-11
Requirements.................................................................................................................. 19-11
Clinical table elevation adjustment verification procedure for PET-CT RT
and CT-RT.................................................................................................................................. 19-12
Procedure ........................................................................................................................ 19-12
Clinical table elevation adjustment verification procedure for PET-CT RT
and CT-RT................................................................................................................................. 19-14
Analysis ............................................................................................................................. 19-14
Results ................................................................................................................................ 19-14

Chapter 20: Patient Setup and Scout Scan

Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 20-1
What Do I Need to Know About................................................................................................. 20-2
Using Protocols.......................................................................................................................... 20-2
Using Contrast ........................................................................................................................... 20-2
Setting Up a Patient without an ID#................................................................................ 20-2
Emperor Era Birth Year Entry .............................................................................................. 20-3
Preset Descriptions.................................................................................................................. 20-3
How Do I................................................................................................................................................ 20-4
Set Up Patient Information .................................................................................................. 20-5
Position the Patient.................................................................................................................. 20-9
Selecting a Protocol ............................................................................................................. 20-11
Adjust the Localizer (Scout)............................................................................................... 20-13
Confirm the Localizer (Scout) ........................................................................................... 20-14

Chapter 21: Scan Series Setup

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) TOC-11

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
How Do I................................................................................................................................................ 21-4
Set Scan Parameters .............................................................................................................. 21-5
Adjusting Graphic Rx............................................................................................................... 21-9
Set Timing Parameters ....................................................................................................... 21-11
Set Display Factors ............................................................................................................... 21-16
Repeat a Series....................................................................................................................... 21-22
Enter Contrast Descriptions ............................................................................................. 21-24

Chapter 22: Automatic Filming

Chapter 23: Manually Filming Images

Chapter 24: Managing Images

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) TOC-12

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Network......................................................................................................................................... 24-3
Networking Terms ........................................................................................................... 24-4
Performed Procedure Step (PPS) ....................................................................................... 24-4
WorkArounds.............................................................................................................................. 24-5
Data Export ................................................................................................................................. 24-6
CD/DVD Interchange (Option).......................................................................................... 24-10
Media Requirements:................................................................................................... 24-11
Operation Requirements: .......................................................................................... 24-11
How Do I............................................................................................................................................. 24-13
Set up a Remote Host.......................................................................................................... 24-14
Select an Archive Node....................................................................................................... 24-16
Set an Access to a Local Host and Set Up a Custom Search ........................... 24-17
Select an Archive Device.................................................................................................... 24-18
Prepare a New Storage Media for Use........................................................................ 24-20
Save Exam/Series/Images to a Storage Media....................................................... 24-22
Retrieve Exams/Series/Images From a Storage Media....................................... 24-24
Restore Exam/Series/Images using CD/DVD Interchange Option................. 24-26
Save Exam/Series/Images using CD/DVD Interchange Option....................... 24-28
Transfer Exams/Series/Images to Another Computer......................................... 24-31
Retrieve Exams/Series/Images From Another Computer .................................. 24-33
Check Network History File............................................................................................... 24-36
Edit Patient Information ..................................................................................................... 24-38
Remove Patient Information From an Exam............................................................ 24-43
Delete Exams/Series/Images From the System...................................................... 24-44
Compose a Report in Data Export................................................................................. 24-46
Save a Report to CD-R......................................................................................................... 24-48
FTP a Report............................................................................................................................. 24-50
View a Report on a PC......................................................................................................... 24-51

Chapter 25: Viewing Images

Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 25-1
What Do I Need to Know About................................................................................................. 25-2
List/Select..................................................................................................................................... 25-2
Paging............................................................................................................................................ 25-2
Viewer and Mini-Viewer......................................................................................................... 25-2
Performed Procedure Step (PPS) ....................................................................................... 25-3
How Do I................................................................................................................................................ 25-4
View a List of Scanned Patients......................................................................................... 25-5
View a Patient’s Scan ............................................................................................................. 25-6
Advance One Exam/Series/Image At a Time in Image Works ............................ 25-8
Scroll Through A Set of Images.......................................................................................... 25-9
View Images in a Cine Loop ............................................................................................. 25-12

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) TOC-13

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Compare Exams/Series/Images..................................................................................... 25-15
View a Reference Image .................................................................................................... 25-18

Chapter 26: Image Display Viewing Area

Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 26-1
What Do I Need to Know About................................................................................................. 26-2
Autoview....................................................................................................................................... 26-2
Auto Link....................................................................................................................................... 26-2
Primary Viewport...................................................................................................................... 26-2
Secondary Viewport................................................................................................................ 26-2
Viewport........................................................................................................................................ 26-3
How Do I................................................................................................................................................ 26-4
Select a Single Image Display............................................................................................. 26-5
Select a Multiple Image Display......................................................................................... 26-7
Set Viewports for Images to Come Up in Order...................................................... 26-11
Set Viewports for Automatic Display of the Next Series ..................................... 26-13
Set a Primary Viewport ....................................................................................................... 26-14
Set a Secondary Viewport................................................................................................. 26-15

Chapter 27: Sort Examinations and Images

Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 27-1
What Do I Need to Know About................................................................................................. 27-2
Sorting Examinations ............................................................................................................. 27-3
Sort Examinations by Examination Number ....................................................... 27-3
Sort Examinations by Patient Name ....................................................................... 27-3
Sort Examinations by Date .......................................................................................... 27-3
Sort Examinations by Modality .................................................................................. 27-3
Sort Examinations by Archived Status ................................................................... 27-3
Sorting Images........................................................................................................................... 27-3
Sort Images by Image Number ................................................................................. 27-4
Sort Images by Location............................................................................................... 27-4
Sort Images by Echo....................................................................................................... 27-4
Sort Images by Trigger .................................................................................................. 27-4
Sort Images by Scan Time ........................................................................................... 27-4
How Do I................................................................................................................................................ 27-5
Sort Examinations .................................................................................................................... 27-6
Sort Images ................................................................................................................................. 27-7

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) TOC-14

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 28: Image Manipulations
Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 28-1
What Do I Need to Know About................................................................................................. 28-2
Gray Scale Enhancement ..................................................................................................... 28-2
Using Proview or Image Filters .......................................................................................... 28-2
DICOM Gray Scale Presentation State Object (GSPS) .............................................. 28-2
How Do I................................................................................................................................................ 28-3
Change the Orientation of an Image .............................................................................. 28-4
Make Images Sharper or Smoother................................................................................. 28-6
Improve the Brain/Bone Interface.................................................................................... 28-8
Restore an Image to its Original State......................................................................... 28-10
Reverse the Video.................................................................................................................. 28-11
Apply Mattes to an Image ................................................................................................. 28-12
How Do I............................................................................................................................................. 28-13
Change the Orientation of an Image ........................................................................... 28-14
Make Images Sharper or Smoother.............................................................................. 28-16
Improve the Brain/Bone Interface................................................................................. 28-18
Restore an Image to its Original State......................................................................... 28-20
Apply Mattes to an Image ................................................................................................. 28-21
Create a Gray Scale Presentation State Object (GSPS)........................................ 28-22
View a Gray Scale Presentation State Object (GSPS)............................................ 28-24

Chapter 29: Image Addition/Subtraction

Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 29-1
What Do I Need to Know About................................................................................................. 29-2
Image Addition .......................................................................................................................... 29-2
Image Subtraction ................................................................................................................... 29-2
Maximum Pixel Value Extraction....................................................................................... 29-2
Minimum Pixel Extraction ..................................................................................................... 29-2
Binding Series............................................................................................................................. 29-3
Accept Negative Pixels........................................................................................................... 29-3
The Difference Between "Proc" and "Comb"................................................................ 29-3
Ratio Slider Bar .......................................................................................................................... 29-3
How Do I................................................................................................................................................ 29-4
Add Images Together to Create a New Image........................................................... 29-5
Subtract Images to Create a New Image ..................................................................... 29-8
Combine Images from Different Series to Create a New Series ..................... 29-11
Use Existing Images to Create a New Image Using Only the Maximum
CT Number................................................................................................................................ 29-14
Use Existing Images to Create a New Image Using Only the Minimum
CT Number................................................................................................................................ 29-16

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) TOC-15

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 30: Magnifying Images
Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 30-1
What Do I Need to Know About................................................................................................. 30-2
Auto Enlarge ............................................................................................................................... 30-2
Auto Minify................................................................................................................................... 30-2
How Do I................................................................................................................................................ 30-3
Move the Image Around on the Screen in Exam Rx................................................. 30-4
Make the Image Smaller or Larger Real Time in Exam Rx .................................... 30-5
Specify a Zoom Factor in Exam Rx................................................................................... 30-6
Auto Enlarge and Auto Minify............................................................................................. 30-7
How Do I................................................................................................................................................ 30-8
Move the Image Around the Screen in Image Works ............................................. 30-9
Make the Image Smaller or Larger Real Time in Image Works ....................... 30-10

Chapter 31: Measuring Structures Within an Image

Chapter 32: Graphics, Text Pages and Commands

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) TOC-16

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Accelerator Line ........................................................................................................................ 32-2
User Preferences ...................................................................................................................... 32-2
How Do I................................................................................................................................................ 32-3
Annotate the Scout With Scan Lines............................................................................... 32-4
Type Text on the Image......................................................................................................... 32-6
Display the Exam Information............................................................................................ 32-8
Display the Parameters of a Scan Mode .................................................................... 32-10
Hide or Show Graphics ....................................................................................................... 32-12
Remove Graphics From the Image ............................................................................... 32-13
Save an Image Screen ........................................................................................................ 32-14
Type in Specific Accelerator Line Commands.......................................................... 32-15
How Do I............................................................................................................................................. 32-16
Type Text on the Image...................................................................................................... 32-17
Display the Exam Information......................................................................................... 32-18
Display the Parameters of a Scan Mode .................................................................... 32-20
Hide or Show Graphics ....................................................................................................... 32-22
Remove Graphics From the Image ............................................................................... 32-23
Save an Image Screen ........................................................................................................ 32-24
Type in Specific Accelerator Command Lines.......................................................... 32-25
How Do I Edit Default Settings in the Image Works Desktop.................................... 32-26
Edit Default Settings for Annotation............................................................................. 32-27
Edit Default Settings for Grid Preferences ................................................................. 32-30
Edit Default Settings for W/L Presets ........................................................................... 32-33
Edit Default Settings for Right Mouse Button........................................................... 32-35
Edit Default Settings for Tick Marks .............................................................................. 32-37
Edit Default Settings for Series Binding....................................................................... 32-39
Edit Default Settings for Square Viewports............................................................... 32-41

Chapter 33: Managing Scan (Raw) Data

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) TOC-17

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Pause Images From Reconstructing ............................................................................... 33-9
Resume Image Reconstruction ...................................................................................... 33-10
Remove Images From the Reconstruction List ....................................................... 33-11
Update the Reconstruction List ...................................................................................... 33-13
Save/Restore Scan Data to/from a Disk..................................................................... 33-14
Complete an Anonymous Scan Data Save ............................................................... 33-16
Reserve/Release Scan Data ............................................................................................. 33-18

Chapter 34: Reformat (Octane System)

Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 34-1
What Do I Need to Know About................................................................................................. 34-3
Reformat Detail and Reformat Standard...................................................................... 34-3
Reformat Layout....................................................................................................................... 34-3
Cursor Controls.......................................................................................................................... 34-4
Plane Orientation Indicator.................................................................................................. 34-4
View Types................................................................................................................................... 34-4
Render Modes ............................................................................................................................ 34-5
Batch .............................................................................................................................................. 34-5
Main On View Menu ................................................................................................................ 34-5
How Do I................................................................................................................................................ 34-7
Select and Build an Image Set ........................................................................................... 34-8
Move the Orthogonal View Locations.......................................................................... 34-10
Adjust the Oblique View Angle ........................................................................................ 34-12
Edit with the Active Annotation ...................................................................................... 34-14
Adjust the Cross-Reference Image ............................................................................... 34-16
Use the Main on View Menu Features......................................................................... 34-17
Create Measurements ........................................................................................................ 34-19
Measure Distance ........................................................................................................ 34-19
Measure an Angle ........................................................................................................ 34-22
Measure an Area .......................................................................................................... 34-24
Adjust Display Preferences ............................................................................................... 34-26
Choose Cursor Annotations ............................................................................................ 34-27
Show Annotations......................................................................................................... 34-27
Cursor Icon Function ................................................................................................... 34-29
Lock Cursor to Trace.................................................................................................... 34-29
XY Lock ............................................................................................................................... 34-31
Choose Graphic Options ........................................................................................... 34-32
Apply To ............................................................................................................................. 34-32
Show Graphics ............................................................................................................... 34-32
Graphics on Reformatted Views ............................................................................ 34-34
Free Hand Trace ............................................................................................................ 34-34
Choose Ruler Styles ..................................................................................................... 34-36
Reverse Black and White Display ......................................................................... 34-37

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) TOC-18

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Set Up Film Options ..................................................................................................... 34-38
Create Different View Types............................................................................................. 34-39
Create a Curved View Type ..................................................................................... 34-39
Create a Profile View Type ....................................................................................... 34-43
Create a Histogram View Type .............................................................................. 34-47
Create an X Section View Type .............................................................................. 34-52
Prescribe a Multi Projection Volume Reformation (MPVR) ........................ 34-56
Create and Save a Batch Protocol ................................................................................ 34-58
Set Up a Rotation Prescription ............................................................................... 34-60
Set Up an Oblique Prescription .............................................................................. 34-62
Set Up a Manual Prescription Using First and Last Views ........................ 34-64
Select the Output Device .......................................................................................... 34-66
Apply the Batch Prescription .................................................................................. 34-67
Save a Protocol ............................................................................................................. 34-69
Use a Protocol ............................................................................................................... 34-69
Delete a Protocol .......................................................................................................... 34-69
Save and Load a Model ...................................................................................................... 34-71

Chapter 35: Reformat (PC Based System)

Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 35-1
What Do I Need to Know About................................................................................................. 35-3
Requirements for Reformat................................................................................................. 35-3
Main Control Panel................................................................................................................... 35-4
Layout Presets ................................................................................................................... 35-5
Tools ....................................................................................................................................... 35-5
Rotate Translation ........................................................................................................... 35-6
Close....................................................................................................................................... 35-7
Review Controller ..................................................................................................................... 35-7
Display Tools............................................................................................................................... 35-9
Reformat Layout.................................................................................................................... 35-10
What are the Cursor Controls? ....................................................................................... 35-11
What is the Plane Orientation Indicator? ................................................................... 35-11
What are View Types?......................................................................................................... 35-11
What are Render Modes?.................................................................................................. 35-12
What is Batch?........................................................................................................................ 35-12
What is the Main On View Menu?.................................................................................. 35-12
WorkArounds........................................................................................................................... 35-14
How Do I............................................................................................................................................. 35-15
Select and Build an Image Set ........................................................................................ 35-17
Layout Presets ........................................................................................................................ 35-18
Using Layout Presets .................................................................................................. 35-18
Create a Layout Preset .............................................................................................. 35-18
Modify or Delete Layout Presets ........................................................................... 35-20

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) TOC-19

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Move the Orthogonal View Locations.......................................................................... 35-21
Adjust the Oblique View Angle ........................................................................................ 35-23
Edit with the Active Annotation ...................................................................................... 35-24
Adjust the Cross-Reference Image ............................................................................... 35-26
Use the Main On-View Menu Features........................................................................ 35-28
Create Measurements ........................................................................................................ 35-31
Measure Distance ........................................................................................................ 35-31
Measure an Angle ........................................................................................................ 35-33
Measure an Area .......................................................................................................... 35-35
Adjust Display Preferences ............................................................................................... 35-37
Show Annotations ....................................................................................................... 35-37
Trace .................................................................................................................................. 35-38
Choose Ruler Styles ..................................................................................................... 35-38
Identify Slices ................................................................................................................. 35-40
3D Cursor ......................................................................................................................... 35-40
Reference Image .......................................................................................................... 35-40
Paging Mode .................................................................................................................. 35-40
Set Up Film Options .............................................................................................................. 35-42
Set Up a Batch Protocol ..................................................................................................... 35-44
Set Up an Oblique Prescription .............................................................................. 35-46
Select the Output Device .......................................................................................... 35-48
Save a Protocol ............................................................................................................. 35-49
Use a Protocol ............................................................................................................... 35-49
Delete a Protocol .......................................................................................................... 35-50
Set Up a Manual Prescription Using Steps ....................................................... 35-51
Apply the Movie Prescription .................................................................................. 35-53
Create Different View Types............................................................................................. 35-55
Create a Curved View Type ..................................................................................... 35-55
Create a Profile View Type ....................................................................................... 35-58
Create a Histogram View Type .............................................................................. 35-60
Create an X Section View Type .............................................................................. 35-63
Prescribe a Multi Projection Volume Reformation (MPVR) ........................ 35-66

Chapter 36: Mobile CT

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) TOC-20

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Search For Sites...................................................................................................................... 36-21

Appendix A: Accelerator Line Commands 1

Appendix B: Legacy Precautions

System ..............................................................................................................................................B-1
Tube Warm Up/Fast Cal...........................................................................................................B-3
Tube Warmup and Fast Cal LightSpeed 5.X based systems ..................................B-4
Scan ...................................................................................................................................................B-4
Scan LightSpeed RT....................................................................................................................B-7
Scan H1 Systems.........................................................................................................................B-7
Patient Schedule.........................................................................................................................B-8
ConnectPro (Purchased Option) ...........................................................................................B-8
Performed Procedure Step (part of connect pro option) ..........................................B-8
Protocol Management ..............................................................................................................B-9
Reconstruction .............................................................................................................................B-9
Lung Algorithm.....................................................................................................................B-9
3000 Image Series ...................................................................................................................B-10
Display...................................................................................................................................B-10
Archive ..................................................................................................................................B-10
Network ................................................................................................................................B-10
DentaScan/Add/Subtract.............................................................................................B-11
Retro Recon.................................................................................................................................B-11
Recon Management................................................................................................................B-12
Volume Viewer (Option) .........................................................................................................B-12
CT Perfusion 2, 3 or Neuro on OC – Purchased Option...........................................B-13
CT Colon (Option) ......................................................................................................................B-13
SmartScore PRO – Purchased Option.............................................................................B-13
Advanced Vessel Analysis (Option)...................................................................................B-14
Dentascan....................................................................................................................................B-14
BMD.................................................................................................................................................B-14
CardIQ Snapshot – Purchased Option............................................................................B-14
Auto Transfer..............................................................................................................................B-15
Display (Applies to ExamRx Display and Image Works) .........................................B-16
Exam Rx Display........................................................................................................................B-17
Image Works Display..............................................................................................................B-18
Edit Patient Data.......................................................................................................................B-19
FILMING.........................................................................................................................................B-20

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) TOC-21

Appendix C: Operator Messages

Introduction........................................................................................................................................... C-1

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) TOC-22

Chapter 1
About This Guide

This chapter explains the purpose and design of this Learning and Reference Guide. It is an
introduction to the guide, providing information on the purpose, prerequisite skills, guide
organization, chapter format, and graphic conventions that identify the visual symbols used
throughout the guide.

Purpose of This Guide

This guide is written for health care professionals (namely, the technologist) to provide the
necessary information relating to the proper operation of this system. The guide is intended
to teach you the system components and features necessary to use it to its maximum
potential. It is not intended to teach imaging or to make any type of clinical diagnosis.
This guide should be kept with the equipment at all times. It is important for you to
periodically review the procedures and safety precautions. It is important for you to read
and understand the contents of this guide before attempting to use this product.

Prerequisite Skills
This guide is not intended to teach imaging. It is necessary for you to have sufficient
knowledge to competently perform the various diagnostic imaging procedures within your
modality. This knowledge is gained through a variety of educational methods including
clinical working experience, hospital based programs, and as part of many college and
university programs.

Chapter Format
Each chapter contains a consistent format. This consistency provides uniformity for content
delivery and a better learning environment for you. Listed below are the components for
each chapter.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 1-1

Introduction
The Introduction provides a short introduction to the chapter and a list of tasks to be
presented.

What Do I Need to Know About...

The What Do I Need to Know About... section lists and explains concepts necessary to
perform the tasks within the chapter.

How Do I...
The How Do I... section provides the detailed steps necessary to complete a given task.
These detailed steps not only provide the steps to complete a task, but also provide
additional information, as needed, related to a step.
Each task also includes a Quick Steps table. This Quick Steps table is intended to be used as
a quick reference by the experienced technologist and provides only the steps necessary to
complete a task. Be sure to read the detailed steps before using this table.

Graphic Conventions and Legend

The format of the page is such that you have room in the outer margin to make notes as
needed, except in the area where the In Brief table is located in the How Do I... section.
Table 1-1 describes the terminology used for the various mouse functions. Table 1-2
describes the conventions used when working with menus, buttons, text boxes and
keyboard keys.
Table 1-1 Conventions for Mouse Actions

Mouse Action Description

Clicking the left mouse button to select a

Click button or icon. The button can be pressed
in, not pressed in, or popped in/out.

Right-click Clicking the right mouse button.

Middle-click Clicking the middle mouse button.

Clicking and holding the left mouse button

Click and drag down while dragging the cursor to the
desired location.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 1-2

Mouse Action Description

Clicking and holding the right mouse button

Right-click and drag down while dragging the cursor to the
desired location.

Clicking and holding the middle mouse

Middle-click and drag button down while dragging the cursor to
the desired location.

Clicking the left mouse button twice in rapid

Double-click
succession.

Clicking the left mouse button three times in

Triple-click
rapid succession.

Table 1-2 Conventions for Menus, Buttons, Text Boxes, and Keyboard Keys

Example Describes

Selecting an option in a check box or radial

Select
button and selecting a tab.

Press Enter Pressing a hard key on the keyboard.

Pressing and holding down a hard key on

Press and hold Shift
the keyboard.

Click [Viewer] A button label or Interface button name.

Click (Exam Selecting an icon-based button.

prior)

The name of text box in which you can

In the Matrix text box,...
select or type text.

Type supine in the

Patient Position text box Text you enter into a text box.
(different font and bold)

The pathway of selecting option(s) in a

Select Sort > Sort by date
pull-down menu.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 1-3

Safety Notices
The following safety notices are used to emphasize certain safety instructions. This guide
uses the international symbol along with the danger, warning, or caution message. This
section also describes the purpose of a Note.

DANGER: Danger is used to identify conditions or actions for which a specific hazard is
known to exist which will cause severe personal injury, death, or substantial
property damage if the instructions are ignored.

WARNING: Warning is used to identify conditions or actions for which a specific hazard
is known to exist which may cause severe personal injury, death, or
substantial property damage if the instructions are ignored.

CAUTION: Caution is used to identify conditions or actions for which a potential hazard
may exist which will or can cause minor personal injury or property damage
if the instructions are ignored.

NOTE: A Note provides additional information that is helpful to you. It may emphasize certain
information regarding special tools or techniques, items to check before proceeding,
or factors to consider about a concept or task.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 1-4

Chapter 2
Safety

Introduction
This chapter provides information about safety precautions and procedures. It is important
for you to read and understand the contents of this chapter so the correct precautions and
procedures are followed.
This manual should be kept near the console for easy access.
If necessary, additional training is available from a GE Applications Specialist. Contact your
institution’s GE sales representative for additional information about further safety and
operational training.
United States Federal Regulation 21CFR 801.109

CAUTION: Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

The Learning and Reference Guide and Technical Reference Manual include information
required for the safe use of the equipment. This chapter summarizes the most important
safety issues. Some of the concepts you need to understand:
• Warning Labels and Symbols
• General Safety Guidelines
• Radiation Safety
• Electrical Safety
• Mechanical Safety
• Reconstructed Image Orientation
• Data Safety
• Application Specific Safety Topics
– Cardiac Imaging
• Accuracy of Measurements
• Operator Console Ergonomics
• Accessories
• Emergency Devices and Emergency Egress
• Maintenance and Cleaning
• Environmental Concerns
• Name and Concentration of Hazardous Substances

Warning Labels and Symbols

This chapter addresses three safety classifications:

DANGER: The most severe label describes conditions or actions which result in a specific
hazard. You will cause severe or fatal personal injury, or substantial property
damage if you ignore these instructions.

WARNING: This label identifies conditions or actions which result in a specific hazard.
You will cause severe personal injury, or substantial property damage if you
ignore these instructions.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-2

CAUTION: This label applies to conditions or actions that have potential hazard. You may
cause minor injury or property damage if you ignore these instructions.
This chapter uses the international symbol or icon along with the danger, warning or caution
message.
Table 2-1 IEC Standards

Symbol IEC Standard

Alternating current

Protective earthing point

ON / Power

OFF / Power OFF

Input Power

Output Power

Type B Equipment

Functional Earth Ground

Warning, Caution - consult accompanying documents

Electrical Shock Hazard

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-3

The following Warning Labels are used on the equipment:.

Figure 2-1 The following warning labels are located at the bottom of the gantry cover

Figure 2-2 Labels on the front of the gantry warn:

Figure 2-3 Table Caution Label for LightSpeed 1.X - 5.X systems

Figure 2-4 Table Caution Label for LightSpeed RT16 and LightSpeed Xtra systems

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-4

Figure 2-5 For Systems manufactured after June 10, 2006

Figure 2-6 For systems manufactured before June 10, 2006

WARNING: This x-ray unit may be dangerous to patient and operator unless safe
exposure factors, operating instructions and maintenance schedules are
observed. To be used by authorized personnel only.

General Safety Guidelines

• This product was designed and manufactured to ensure maximum safety of operation.
It should be operated and maintained in strict compliance with the safety precautions,
warnings and operating instructions contained herein, and in any other documentation
specific to the product.
• The system has been designed to meet all the safety requirements applicable to medical
equipment. However, anyone attempting to operate the system must be fully aware of
potential safety hazards.
• The owner should make certain that only properly trained, fully qualified personnel are
authorized to operate the equipment. A list of authorized operators should be
maintained.
• This manual should be kept at hand, studied carefully and reviewed periodically by the
authorized operators. The manufacturer or vendor of the equipment makes no
representation, however, that the act of reading this manual renders the reader
qualified to operate, test or calibrate the system.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-5

• Unauthorized personnel should not be allowed access to the system.

• Do not leave the patient unobserved at any time.
• Become familiar with the functional hardware so that you can recognize serious
problems. Do not use the scanner if it appears damaged or fails. Wait for qualified
personnel to correct the problem.
• If the product does not operate properly or if it fails to respond to the controls as
described in this manual, the operator should:
– First ensure the safety of the patient and then the protection of the equipment.
– Evacuate the area as quickly as possible in any potentially unsafe situation.
– Follow the safety precautions and procedures as specified in this manual.
– Immediately contact the local service office, report the incident and await further
instructions.
• The images and calculations provided by this system are intended as tools for the
competent user. They are explicitly not to be regarded as a sole incontrovertible basis for
clinical diagnosis. Users are encouraged to study the literature and reach their own
professional conclusions regarding the clinical utility of the system.
• Understand the product specifications, system accuracy, and stability limitations. These
limitations must be considered before making any decision based on quantitative
values. In case of doubt, please consult your sales representative.
• Make sure all covers are in place before you use the equipment. The covers protect you
and your patient from moving parts or electrical shock. The covers also protect the
equipment.
NOTE: Only qualified Service personnel should service the system with the covers off.
• Do not block the ventilation ports of the electronic equipment. Always maintain at least
6 inches (15 cm) clearance around the ventilation ports to prevent overheating and
damage to the electronic hardware.
• Use only GE approved equipment with this system.
• Do not load any non GE approved software onto the computer.

WARNING: CT Scans may cause interference with implantable devices such as

pacemakers or neuro stimulators and could cause operational changes to the
device. Consult with the Technical Service assistance/Hot line of the
Implantable manufacturer prior to scanning. The Operator Warnings and
instructions from the implantable device manufacturer may provide further
assistance.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-6

Radiation Safety

WARNING: Improperly used X-Ray equipment may cause injury. Read and understand
the instructions in this book before you attempt to operate this equipment.
If you fail to follow safe X-Ray practices or ignore the advice presented in the
manual, you and your patient risk exposure to hazardous radiation.

Authorized Users
This equipment incorporates a high degree of protection against X-Ray radiation outside the
useful beam. But this equipment can not substitute the essential requirement that every
user must take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any person carelessly,
unwisely, or unknowingly exposing themselves or others to radiation.
Everyone having anything to do with X-Ray equipment must receive proper training and
become fully acquainted with the recommendations of the National Council on Radiation
Protection and Measurements and the International Commission on Radiation Protection.
NCRP reports are available from:
NCRP Publications
7910 Woodmont Avenue
Room 1016
Bethesda, Maryland 20814

WARNING: Everyone having anything to do with X-Ray equipment must take adequate
steps to insure protection against injury.
All persons authorized to use the equipment must understand the dangers posed by X-Ray
exposure so that they can prevent any injury or damage that may result from such
exposure. GE Medical Systems urges you to use protective materials and devices to prevent
any injury or damage from X-Ray exposure.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-7

General Radiation Safety

WARNING: Never scan a patient with unauthorized personnel in the scan room. Warn
visitors and patients about potential for harm if they fail to follow
instructions.

WARNING: Never calibrate, test the scanner, or warm the tube with patients or personnel
present in the scan room.
– Stay behind a lead screen or lead glass shield during each X-Ray exposure.
– Use technique factors prescribed by the radiologist or diagnostician. Use a dose that
produces the best diagnostic results with the least X-Ray exposure.
– Amber indicator lights on the gantry display panel, and rear of the gantry, illuminate
during X-Ray exposure.

Scans Acquired at the Same Tomographic Plane

IEC standard 60601-2-44 section 29.105 paragraph states that you must be warned when
scans are acquired at the same tomographic plane, i.e. same scan location. The need for the
warning is to make users aware of the potential dose that can be given to the patient when
acquiring scans at the same table location.
When acquiring scans in this mode:
– Utilize the dose information displayed on the View Edit screen. The dose information
displayed is covered in the next section, CTDIvol.
– Use proper techniques for the application and anatomy you are scanning.
A warning message (Figure 2-7) is posted when [Confirm] is selected for the following scan
types:
– SmartStep
– SmartView
– SmartPrep Baseline and Monitor scans
– Cine scans
– Axial scans with zero table increment (interval)

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-8

Figure 2-7

After reading the message, if you wish to continue with the scan, click [Continue].

CTDIvol
As you setup the scan parameters from the view/edit screen, the Dose Information area at
the upper right of the scan monitor contains updated dose information. This dose
information is based on a measurement of the CTDI or CT Dose Index, which is the current
standard for CT dosimetry and performance. By using a measurement called CTDIvol, a
single value is provided to estimate the relative dose for an exam.
The CTDIvol is a weighted average measurement in a reference phantom. This dose is
expressed in milliGrays. For additional information on specific CTDIvol doses and their
calculations, refer to your Technical Reference manual.
The DLP or Dose Length Product is the product of the CTDIvol and the scan length for a
group of scans. This number can be summed over the entire exam to give an estimate of the
total dose. The value is expressed in milliGray centimeters.
The Projected Series DLP shows the DLP that would result from scanning the current group
or groups.
The Accumulated Exam DLP displays the total exam DLP up to the current point in time.
Scout dose is not included in the DLP totals since standards for reporting scout dose are not
yet defined. Scout dose is generally a very small part of the exam.
The dose information updates when technique values such as kV, mA, scan time, slice
thickness, and scan field of view are changed.
Dose information is saved as screen save image in Series 999 upon End Exam.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-9

CAUTION: Using accessories which are not GE options might effect dose and image
quality.

X-Ray Tubes
The scanner uses cooling and reconstruction algorithms specifically designed for GE X-Ray
tubes.
You risk three dangers when you do not use GE X-Ray tubes.
• A non GE tube could overheat and explode if the cooling delays do not meet its design
requirements.
• The images could exhibit artifacts if your X-Ray tube fails to conform with GE tube
performance specifications
• Radiation leakage may exceed GE specifications when a non GE X-Ray tube is installed
in the scanner.

CAUTION: We cannot guarantee performance or safety if you use a non GE X-Ray tube
because the cooling and reconstruction algorithms depend upon the tube
design. Radiation leakage may exceed GE specifications when a non GE X-Ray
tube is installed in the scanner.

Electrical Safety

DANGER: ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD. Avoid all contact with any electrical conductor.
Do not remove or open system covers or plugs. Internal circuits use high
voltage capable of causing serious injury.
An electrical hazard may exist if any light, monitor or visual indicator stays
on after the system is shut down. To prevent possible injury, turn off the
main power supply wall switch, and contact your service office immediately.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-10

DANGER: NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS. Refer service to qualified service personnel.

Only allow people who know the proper procedures, and use of the proper
tools, to install, adjust, repair, or modify the equipment.
To guarantee safe, reliable equipment performance, prepare the site
according to GE Medical Systems requirements. If you have any questions
about these requirements, contact GE Medical Systems.
Fuses blown within 36 hours of being replaced may indicate malfunctioning
electrical circuits within the system. Have the system checked by qualified
service personnel, and do not attempt to replace any fuse.

DANGER: ELECTRICAL FIRE. Conductive fluids that seep into the active circuit
components of the system may cause short circuits that can result in
electrical fires. Therefore, do not place any liquid or food on any part of the
system.
To avoid electrical shocks or burns caused by the use of wrong type of fire
extinguisher, make sure that only fire extinguishers approved for use on
electrical fires are used.
• Surplus length of power cords or other cables from mobile accessory units that may be
used with some patient scanning should be stored in safe and isolated areas, such as
individually in a figure eight at the base of stationary equipment. This discourages signal
interference and protect cables from damage due to traffic.

Mechanical Safety

General Mechanical Safety

• Check for any obstruction around the equipment before attempting to move the table
and gantry. When performing table or gantry motions, always monitor the progress of
the motion.
• Be especially careful when tilting the gantry or moving the table when the cradle
extender or head holder is in place to avoid driving these accessories into the gantry
covers.
• The (Cradle Unlatch Indicator) is illuminated in green when the cradle is
unlocked. An unlocked cradle could potentially move unexpectedly.
•The (Interference) light illuminates when the cradle has reached a travel limit or
encountered interference.
If the table reaches a limit while you are using the controls, the light is OFF when you
release the button.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-11

Clear an interference by changing the gantry tilt, moving the cradle, or adjusting the
table height.

WARNING: Do not use the table base as a foot rest. You could entrap and injure your foot
while lowering the table. Do not place your hands between the table base and
the table side panels.

WARNING: Do not place your hands inside the gantry cover when tilting the gantry. The
gantry can pinch or crush your hands!

WARNING: Implosion Hazard - do not subject the system to serious mechanical shock,
as the Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) can fracture if struck or jarred. This may result
in flying pieces of glass and Phosphor coating that can cause serious injury.

Patient Positioning

DANGER: DO NOT PLACE A PATIENT ON THE TABLE WEIGHING MORE THAN THE UPPER
LIMIT OF 450 POUNDS. THIS COULD CAUSE THE TABLE TO FAIL AND THE
PATIENT COULD FALL FOR LIGHTSPEED 1.X TO LIGHTSPEED 5.X BASED
SYSTEMS.

LightSpeed 1.X to LightSpeed 5.X based systems table load capacity:

– Up to 400 lb. (180 kg) with ±.25 mm positional accuracy guaranteed.
– 400 to 450 lb. (180 to 205 kg) maximum allowed with normal operation and ± 1 mm
positional accuracy.

DANGER: FOR LIGHTSPEED RT16 AND LIGHTSPEED XTRA SYSTEMS DO NOT PLACE A
PATIENT ON THE TABLE WEIGHING MORE THAN THE UPPER LIMIT OF 500
POUNDS. THIS COULD CAUSE THE TABLE TO FAIL AND THE PATIENT COULD
FALL.
LightSpeed RT16 and LightSpeed Xtra Table load capacity:
– Up to 500 lb. (227 kg) with ± .25 mm positional accuracy guaranteed.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-12

Temporal sampling for data acquired for use in CT Perfusion should not exceed 3.2 seconds
between data points for optimal results. As the temporal resolution increases an error in the
statistical accuracy of the information may be introduced.

CAUTION: When using the external laser alignment light for patient positioning
purposes, be aware that the patient's elevation may be slightly lower with the
cradle extended than with the cradle fully retracted. This is because the cradle
may bend slightly under a patient's weight. This difference should be taken
into consideration for applications where patient position information is
critical, such as radiation therapy planning. To minimize these affects, after
using the external laser alignment system to position the patient, advance
the patient to the CT scan plane. Turn on the CT alignment lights to determine
if they line up with the markers on the patient. If necessary, compensate for
the bend in the cradle by elevating the table. When the CT alignment lights
line up with the markers, set the landmark for the scan using the Internal laser
alignment light.
Please refer to X-Y Table Accuracy Procedure to assess the X-Y table accuracy
of your system.

CAUTION: When using patient positioning accessories that are not GE options, make
sure there are no areas which might cause a pinch point or interfere with
patient tubing or IV.

CAUTION: When using accessories, make sure all accessories are CT imaging
accessories. Do not use accessories from other modalities.

CAUTION: None of the accessories support the full weight of a patient. If you sit, stand,
or otherwise apply excessive pressure to these devices, they break or come
off the cradle and may cause an injury.GE cannot guarantee precise location
accuracy at the upper weight limit of 400 to 450 pounds (180 to 205 kg) for
LightSpeed 1.X - LightSpeed 5.X systems.

WARNING: None of the accessories support the full weight of a patient. If you sit, stand,
or otherwise apply excessive pressure to these devices, they break or come
off the cradle and may cause an injury.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-13

CAUTION: Check to make sure the power injector has enough IV tubing to allow free
movement of the table. Make sure the unit itself does not interfere with table
travel.
Ensure excess tubing length is secured to the table top. Do NOT loop
additional tubing in the patient's hand.

• Check the length of all patient health lines (IV tubing, oxygen line, etc.) and make sure
they accommodate cradle travel. Position these lines so they cannot catch on anything
within the patient vicinity or between the table and gantry during cradle travel or gantry
tilt.
• The concentrated weight of short, heavy patients can cause the cradle to make contact
with the gantry.
– Make sure you do not drive the cradle into the gantry cover.
– Make sure you do not pinch the patient's skin or extremities between the cradle and
the gantry.
• Avoid any patient contact with the gantry during tilt or cradle movement (manual or
software driven).
• Return the gantry tilt to the 0 degree upright position, latch the cradle, and adjust the
table to a comfortable height for patient loading and unloading.
• Latch the cradle before you load or unload the patient (the Cradle Unlatch indicator
illuminates when the cradle is unlatched).
• Physically assist all patients on and off the table and into position on the cradle.

WARNING: TO PREVENT PINCHING OR CRUSHING OF THE PATIENT'S EXTREMITIES, KEEP

THE PATIENT'S HANDS AND FEET AWAY FROM THE EDGE OF THE MOVING TABLE
TOP/CRADLE AND ITS SURROUNDING EQUIPMENT, OR BETWEEN TABLE BASE
AND SIDE PANELS OF THE TABLE. (TAKE SPECIAL CARE WHEN POSITIONING
PHYSICALLY LARGE PATIENTS).
• Check the length of all patient health lines (IV tubing, oxygen line, etc.) and make sure
they accommodate cradle travel. Position these lines so they cannot catch on anything
within the patient vicinity or between the table and gantry during cradle travel or gantry
tilt.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-14

WARNING: TO PREVENT PINCHING OR CRUSHING OF THE PATIENT'S EXTREMITIES, KEEP

WARNING: TO PREVENT PINCHING OR CRUSHING OF THE PATIENT WATCH THE PATIENT

AND EQUIPMENT CAREFULLY AT ALL TIMES DURING GANTRY TILT OR TABLE
MOVEMENT. IF UNWANTED MOTION OCCURS OR MOTION DOES NOT STOP,
PRESS THE EMERGENCY STOP SWITCHES ON THE CONSOLE OR GANTRY.
• Check the accessory attachment plate fixed to the end of the cradle. Repair or replace if
loose or damaged.
• Use the cradle extender to support the patient's head or feet during a scan.
• For LightSpeed 5.X, BrightSpeed and LightSpeed Pro16 the scannable range is not
indicated by the black mark on the table. The scannable range is indicated by the Tilt
and Travel limits button on the Gantry Controls.
Figure 2-8 LightSpeed RT16 and LightSpeed Xtra tables

• If the table is lowered with anything in the red X area as indicated above, the table could
be damaged along with the equipment or object under the table.

WARNING: The head holder may crack, possibly injuring the patient's head or neck, if the
patient tries to brace himself or herself on the head holder during positioning.
The head holder and cradle extender are only designed to support 75 pounds
(34kg). Ask the patient to move up into the head holder or manually help the
patient into position.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-15

To move the patient out of the gantry in an emergency, the cradle can be manually
withdrawn by applying a minimum of 60 lbs (276 N) of force for LightSpeed 1.X to
LightSpeed 5.X systems.
To move the patient out of the gantry in an emergency, the cradle can be manually
withdrawn by applying a minimum of 60 lbs (267 N) of force for LightSpeed RT16 and
LightSpeed Xtra systems.

CAUTION: The patient head holder or table extender should be adequately secured to
ensure stability. If they not secured properly, degradation of image quality
may result due to introduced motion of the head holder or table extender.

CAUTION: Use of any cradle extension accessories such as the table extension, head
holder, coronal head holder, and phantom holder are not accounted for in the
table gantry interference matrix. Therefore, additional care needs to be taken
to closely monitor any table up/down, in/out or gantry tilt movement to avoid
contact of the extended accessory with the gantry.
A laser alignment light system is available in order to accurately define the patient scan
region.

WARNING: THE LASER BEAM CAN CAUSE EYE INJURY.

- Tell all patients to close their eyes before you switch ON the alignment
lights.
- Instruct your patients to keep their eyes closed until you turn OFF the
alignment lights.
NOTE: Closely monitor infants and infirm patients, and prevent them from accidentally
staring into the beam.

CAUTION: THE DETECTOR AND DAS ROTATE TO POSITION THE ALIGNMENT LIGHTS OVER
THE LASER PORTS.
- Keep your hands away from the gantry opening.
- Make sure the gantry side covers are in place.

CAUTION: Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than

those specified herein, may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-16

• The indicator on the gantry display panel lights when you turn ON the alignment lights.
• Warning labels regarding laser safety are provided on the gantry, as described in the
Warning Labels and Symbols section.

Reconstructed Image Orientation

CAUTION: GE CT image reconstruction is in an orientation viewing from the patient's

feet. The reconstructed orientation is the orientation the image is installed in
the image data base and is the orientation images are networked with to a
remote viewing station.
Figure 2-9 Patient Orientation
A P

R L L R

P A
Head First Supine Head First Prone
A P

L
R L R

P A
Feet First Supine Feet First Prone

The patient position information stored in the image header correctly reflects the orientation
(RAS) information for the patient. Viewing applications will correctly reflect Right (R), Left (L),
Anterior (A) and Posterior (P) of the patient.
The reconstructed image orientation may differ from preferred anatomical viewing
presentation in which the patient's Right is on the viewers Left and patient's Left is on the
viewers Right. For example when the patient is scanned Head First and Prone the patients’s
Left is on the viewer’s Left and the patient’s Right is on the viewer’s Right. The image
presentation will need to be modified to display preferred anatomical viewing. Some
viewing stations may not have the capability to flip the image presentation, but if the
capability exists, you must use display tools such as Flip to change the presentation of the
image. Some remote viewing stations may have the capability to set default viewing
protocols, this is another tool that can be used to set an anatomical viewing presentation.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-17

Post processing applications such as Direct MPR, Reformat and Volume Viewer
automatically orient images in anatomical viewing orientation. These applications create
axial images in anatomical viewing presentation. Please see Auto Applications (Option) for
more information. The system also provides the capability to create Gray Scale Presentation
State Objects (GSPS) to flip the image orientation.

Data Safety
To ensure data safety:
– Verify and record the patient's identification before starting a scan.
– Observe and record the patient's orientation, position and anatomical landmarks
before starting a scan. Ensure that the patient is positioned within the scan
parameters.
– Maintain system image quality by performing Daily QA and other maintenance.
Connectivity - Always verify that the data transferred to another system has been correctly
received.

Application Specific Safety Topics

WARNING: Helical scanning has the inherent ability to produce artifacts when scanning
highly sloped anatomy (e.g. pediatric or adult heads). Factors which worsen
this effect are: faster table speeds, thicker image thickness, and gantry tilt.
In some cases these artifacts could be mistaken for a hemorrhage near the
cranium, or a thickening of the skull.
To reduce the occurrence of these artifacts you may prescribe slower table
speeds and/or thinner slices (such as 2.5mm) during helical scans near the
vertex of a pediatric or adult head.

WARNING: For helical scans, the Segment Recon Mode in Retrospective Recon may be
used to assess if there is an artifact or not. If questions still arise, then re-scan
the area with a 2 second Axial scan.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-18

WARNING: It has been documented in radiology literature than an artifact may occur in
the chest that bears the double margin of the great vessels, which emulates
a dissection of the vessel during 0.4 - 1.0 second scans. This can occur in axial
or helical scans. If you have scanned axially with a 0.4 - 1.0 second rotation
time and observe this phenomenon, re-scan the area with a 2 second axial
scan to verify if it is artifact or patient pathology. Segment recon mode may
be used in Retro recon to also assess if the areas is artifact or pathology.

Cardiac Imaging
A patient with any of the conditions listed below may require additional
attention. If patients are scanned with these conditions, the software may
not be able to detect the R-Peaks and the images therefore may be
produced as ungated segment images.
- Patients with multiple pre-contractions or extra systole (e.g. PVC, PAC)
- Patients with persistent or extreme arrhythmia
- Patients with bi-ventricular (dual chamber pacemakers)

CAUTION: ECG signal clarity and integrity must be confirmed prior to performing
ECG-gated acquisitions. Items which may require adjustment of equipment
settings or positioning, or patient set-up include:
- External Interference
- Atypical Patient ECG (e.g. elevated T-Waves, low ECG amplitude or signal
strength)
- Suboptimal Patient Connection
ECG lead placement should follow recommended guidelines to optimize
results.
If the ECG lead is disconnected during the scan, or the heart rate drops
below 40 BPM, the images will be reconstructed as non-gated segment
images. This is done to avoid inaccuracy of the z-location of images where
necessary.

CAUTION: Cardiac helical scan modes of SnapShot Segment, Burst, and Burst Plus are
optimized for specific heart rate ranges. Select the appropriate scan mode
for each patient's heart rate pattern. If the incorrect mode is selected,
temporal resolution may be insufficient and degraded image quality could
result.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-19

CAUTION: Patient motion, respiration, beat-to-beat variability of heart rate, heart

motion, or significant change in heart rate over the scan duration could cause
an ECG gated acquisition to have degraded image quality. It is important to
explain to the patient the pattern of breathing instructions to expect, the
warm feeling that can be felt from the contrast injection and to position the
patient comfortably such that the arms will not move with respect to the body
during the scan.

Patient Preparation
Practice hyperventilation breathing instructions with the patient.
• It is important to explain to the patient the events that will occur during the acquisition
of the contrast enhanced cardiac data. Make sure to explain the warm feeling that may
occur during the injection of the contrast material.
• Use hyperventilation technique for all the series in a cardiac exam. Practice the
hyperventilation instructions with the patient prior to scanning.
• During the practice breath hold, make sure to watch the ECG trigger monitor to
determine the average heart rate, minimum heart rate, and ECG pattern during the
breath hold.
• Position the patient's arm over the patient's head so they are comfortable and will not
move during the acquisition of data.

CAUTION: If, during the scan, the heart rate drops significantly lower than the prescribed
heart rate, there is a potential for gaps in the gated image location. To avoid
image location gaps, a non-gated image is reconstructed for the period where
the patient heart rate dropped below the expected or confirmed heart rate
at the start of the exam. A non-gated image may have more motion and may
not be reconstructed at the prescribed phase.

CAUTION: There is a possibility that the ECG signal may not be detected by the scanner
due to improper lead placements, or a lead falling off during the scan. It is
important to place new leads on the patient before the scan. Make sure the
leads are attached properly, and use only GE recommended ECG leads.
It is important to confirm ECG trace clarity before the scan.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-20

CAUTION: The heart rate displayed on the CT console is a 3-cycle average. You must
review the actual waveform pattern to determine ECG trace clarity, trigger
locations, and if any cycle to cycle variability or masked arrhythmias may be
present in order to adapt set up and conditions prior to proceeding with the
scan acquisition.

Lung Algorithm
• The Lung algorithm setting provides edge enhancement between structures with large
density differences, such as calcium and air, resulting in a sharper lung field when
compared to Standard algorithm.
• For best image quality, prescribe a 5 mm scan thickness when you plan to use the Lung
algorithm. If you plan to prescribe a High Resolution Lung study with 3.75, 2.5, or
1.25 mm, use the Bone algorithm.
• The Lung setting enhances the contrast of small objects. For best viewing and film
quality, select a window width of 1000 to 1500 and a window level of -500 to -600.
• The Lung algorithm setting increases the CT number values at the edge of high contrast
objects. If you plan to take CT number measurements of vessels or nodules in the lung,
please check and compare your results with Standard algorithm images. (ROI and
Histogram functions use CT numbers.)
• Remember: The edge enhancement provided by the Lung setting may not be
appropriate in some clinical cases. Please take individual viewing preferences into
account when you choose the Lung setting.

Autoscan
• Press and release move to scan from the console to advance the cradle during Auto
Scan.
• If you select Auto Scan during one group Rx, it remains ON for every group in that series.

SmartStep/SmartView Safety
The SmartStep/SmartView option adds several components to the scan room. These are the
In-Room Monitor, Hand Held Control for table movement as well as image review, and the
X-Ray Control Foot switch.
Each of the SmartStep/SmartView components are connected to the system by a cable.
When using the system, ensure that the cables cannot catch on anything when the gantry
or table is moved.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-21

Table Float
During SmartStep/SmartView the Clinician has the option to float the table between scans.
When the Table Float mode is selected, the table is unlatched and can be moved freely by
anyone at the bedside.

WARNING: UNINTENDED TABLE MOTION COULD CAUSE A SERIOUS INJURY. TABLE MAY BE
BUMPED OR JARRED DURING AN INTERVENTIONAL PROCEDURE. CARE MUST
BE TAKEN WHEN PERFORMING INTERVENTIONAL PROCEDURES IN THE FLOAT
MODE. IT IS THE CLINICIAN'S RESPONSIBILITY TO ENSURE THAT THEY HAVE
CONTROL OF THE TABLE WHEN IN THIS MODE OF OPERATION. TABLE MUST
NOT BE LEFT UNATTENDED WHEN IN THE FLOAT MODE. ENSURE THAT THE
TABLE IS LATCHED BEFORE LEAVING THE TABLE SIDE.

SmartStep/SmartView Scanning
SmartStep/SmartView scanning allows multiple scans at one location for interventional
procedures. The system allows up to 90 seconds of scanning in one place. After 90 seconds,
the operator must prescribe a new scan to continue. The accumulated scan time from a
procedure is displayed in the In-Room Monitor.

CAUTION: Prolonged exposure to x-ray in one spot may cause reddening or radiation
burns. User must be aware of the techniques used and exposure time to insure
safe operation.
Clinician's working in the scan room should wear appropriate protective clothing. Lead
aprons, groin and thyroid protection, as well as protective eye wear are available through
the GE Accessories Catalog.

Interventional / Biopsy Scanning

WARNING: When scanning for interventional (biopsy) studies the scan mode, image
thickness, number of images per rotation and the display layout used affect
the display of the images. It is recommended to use the Biopsy Mode provided
on the system. If manually prescribing biopsy scans, Axial 1i scan mode or
Helical scan mode with a slice thickness greater than 2.5 mm must be used.
Do not use Cine scan mode for interventional (Biopsy) imaging. Do not use an
Auto view layout with more than one Auto View image viewport.
Refer to Select a Multiple Image Display in the Image Display Viewing Area chapter
of the Learning and Reference Guide for more information on how to set up the
desired viewing options.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-22

Choose one of the following for the best auto view layouts

Radiation Therapy Planning

CAUTION: The manual cradle release feature is intended for emergency egress and small
movements during CT fluoroscopy procedures. In rare instances, if the cradle
release is used to move a patient out of the gantry, instead of using the table
control buttons as specified in the operator manual, a discrepancy of up to
6mm between the numerical display on the gantry and the actual position of
the table can be introduced.

Accuracy of Measurements

Measure Distance for Axial, Helical, and Cine Images

Measure error using the straight line distance graphic is less than 2 times the image pixel
size.

Measure Distance for Scout Images

Accuracy of measurements for scout images in the "X" direction varies with object thickness
and distance from ISO center in the "Y" direction. Note the orientations of the "X" and "Y" in
the diagram below assume a scout scan plane of 0 degrees. If the scout plane is rotated
then the "X" and "Y" orientation changes respectively.
• For measurements of anatomy in the "X" direction that are at ISO center ("Y"):
– The measure error using the straight line distance graphic is less than 5% of the
measured distance plus 2mm.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-23

• For measurements of anatomy in the "X" direction that are NOT at ISO ("Y"):
– The measure error using the straight line distance graphic is less than 5% of the
measured distance plus 2mm plus 3% of measured distance per centimeter from
ISO.
• For measurements of anatomy in the "Z" direction:
– Measure error using the straight line distance graphic is less than 2 times the image
pixel size.

Measure Angle
Measurement accuracy using the angle graphic is equal to the displayed angle value +/- 10
degrees for an angle measured between segments which are five times larger than the
image pixel size. Accuracy improves as the length of the segments increases.

ROI
Area measurement accuracy using a region of interest graphic (rectangle, smooth curve,
ellipse or free draw) is equal to the displayed area +/- the circumference of the region
multiplied by (image pixel size)2/2. Mean and standard deviation values for the intensity of
the pixels in the region are also affected by this accuracy. If the ROI is rotated, the area
measurement can vary up to 5%. Region of interest statistics are based on the pixels INSIDE
the graphic defining the region.

Reformat Plane Thickness

Reformat plane thickness equals 1 pixel.
• If each axial pixel represents 0.5mm or anatomy, then the reformat plane thickness
equals 0.5mm.
• If pixel size equals 0.9766mm (500mm/512), then the reformat plane represents a slice
of anatomy about one millimeter thick.

Operator Console Ergonomics

To optimally use your CT Scanner and reduce the chance of physical strain and fatigue, the
following steps are recommended regarding how you use your operator console.

Posture
Correct posture is very important. To ensure correct posture while sitting at your operator
console, follow these basic steps:
1. Face the monitors and keyboard without twisting your body.
2. Sit comfortably erect with the small of your back well supported.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-24

3. Position your forearms parallel to the floor, with your wrists straight.
4. Position the screen so that your eyes are nearly level with the top of the screen.
5. Keep both feet flat on the footrest, with your thighs parallel to the floor.
If you cannot comfortably maintain this position while working at your operator console, you
should make the necessary adjustments to your operator console environment.

Equipment Adjustments
Chair
Adjusting the fit and height of your chair is very important for comfort. Follow these basic
guidelines:
1. Fit the backrest snugly against your back. People with shorter legs might need a back
cushion.
2. Set your chair height to position your forearms parallel with the floor when your hands
are placed on the keyboard. If your feet dangle, you need a footrest.

Keyboard
Keyboard height is also important. When typing:
– Your wrists should be as straight as possible.
– Your forearms should be parallel to the floor.
– Your hands and fingers should float over the keys or mouse.

Screen
• The recommended viewing distance from the screen is 18 - 28 inches (45 - 70
centimeters).
• With your head straight, your eyes should be looking directly at the top of the screen.
• You should look at the screen straight-on, not at an angle from the side, top or bottom.
• Glare from the screen can disrupt your viewing and cause eyestrain. Do not face a
window, and position the screen at right angles to bright light sources.

Comfort
Comfort at your operator console indicates you've set up your work area correctly. However
even a well-designed area needs frequent adjustment, especially for different users. Take
the time when positioning yourself at your operator console to ensure your comfort.
It is also recommended that if you use the operator console for extended periods of use
(several hours at a time), that you take short breaks to get away from your operator console
and perform simple stretching exercises to reduce the chance of fatigue.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-25

Other considerations:
Keep the patient in view at all times.
– Never leave the patient unattended.
– Stay alert to your patient's condition.
– Use the speakers and microphones on the table, gantry, and console to stay in
constant communication, even while you sit at the console.
– Follow the exam procedures explained in the Chapters 13 and 14 of the Learning and
Reference Manual. Carefully enter patient information and position before
proceeding.

CAUTION: Incorrect data entries or procedures could result in misinterpretation or

misdiagnosis.

Accessories
Use only GE approved equipment together with this system.
With each use check all accessories for damage and remove them from service if
damaged or cracked.

GE Approved Cardiac Trigger Monitors

IVY 3150,
IVY 3100 with Ethernet,
IVY 3150-A, or
IVY 3100-A with Ethernet
IVY 3100
InVivo
The placement of the IVY cardiac trigger monitor should be on the monitor stand. The
monitor should not be placed on the CT table or table tray. It should be positioned so that it
is not touching the CT table or gantry when it is in use.

IV Pole Safety
Care should be taken in the amount of weight and ensuring that the pole is tightened prior
to use.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-26

CAUTION: The IV pole may bend when excessive weight is placed on the pole. Ensure no
more than 4.5 kg or 10 lb. is placed on the IV pole.

CAUTION: Ensure that the IV pole extension collar is tightened prior to use to avoid the
pole height to move on it's own.

Table Tray Safety

Care should be taken in the amount of weight and the objects that are placed on the tray.

CAUTION: The maximum allowable weight on the table tray is 9kg or 19.8 lbs

CAUTION: Objects that may be susceptible to tipping should be strapped down with the
Velcro strap provided.

Systems With Metal-Free Cradles and Accessories

CAUTION: Prevent damage to metal-free accessories! Carefully examine the metal-free

clasp assembly on the accessory and the catch on the cradle before
attempting to attach the accessory for the first time.
• To Latch an accessory:
– Align the accessory tongue with the pocket at the end of the cradle.
– Keep fingers clear of the cradle.
– Push the tongue all the way into the pocket until it latches into place.
– Rubber shims may have been installed on the head holder or foot extender to give it
a tighter fit. Please take care when latching the accessory to make sure that it is
completely latched. Push the latch forward until you hear a click. Verify that the latch
is fully latched.
• To Unlatch an accessory:
– Pinch the two L-shaped parts together and pull the accessory out of the cradle.
– An alternate method is to apply a light force to the catch in the direction to pull the
accessory out of the cradle.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-27

• Proper operation:
– Keep the accessory "tongue" and cradle pocket clean and free of fluids and debris.
– Keep the latch and cradle pocket area clear of sheets, drapes, pads or any item that
could interfere with proper latching and cause damage.
• Positioning
– Positioning patient anatomy over the area where the head holder or cradle extension
attaches to the cradle may produce images where the contrast be between 2
adjacent rotations is different. Make sure the area of interest especially the head in
properly positioned in the head holder or on the cradle extension.

Limited Access Room Configuration

CAUTION: Due to access limitations on the left side of the gantry, some procedures may
be affected when ancillary equipment is used. Assess the placement of the
equipment needed for the procedure before the placement of the patient on
the table. Access around the left side of the gantry may also be affected.

Emergency Devices and Emergency Egress

Emergency Devices
The system has two types of Emergency buttons:
1. Emergency Stop- when pressed, all table and gantry motions are halted, generation of
X-rays is stopped, laser alignment lights are turned off. The system aborts any data
acquisition in progress, and attempts to save all data acquired prior to the abort. Use
the Emergency Stop button for patient related emergencies.
2. System Emergency Off Button- when pressed, the power to all system components is
removed, stopping all table and gantry motion and generation of X-rays. The system
aborts any acquisitions in progress, and data obtained prior to the abort can become
corrupt or lost. Use the System Emergency OFF button for catastrophic emergencies,
such as fire or earthquake.

CAUTION: If you press the Emergency Stop or Emergency OFF buttons during a scan, the
system will abort the data acquisition.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-28

Emergency Stop
NOTE: Every operator should take a few minutes to locate the Emergency Stops on his or
her system before he or she scans the first patient.
The system has five Emergency Stop buttons:
– One on each control panel on the front of the gantry (Figure 2-10).
Figure 2-10 Front of gantry Emergency Stop Buttons

– Two on the rear cover of the gantry.

– One on the Acquisition Control (Figure 2-11).
Figure 2-11 Emergency Stop button on the Keyboard

Press an Emergency Stop button in the event of a patient related emergency or if the cradle,
table or gantry starts to move unexpectedly.
• Once an Emergency Stop button is pressed, the Reset gantry key, on the gantry control
panel, flashes about once every two seconds.
• Press the Reset gantry key to restore power to the gantry and table.
When Emergency Stop is applied, the moving cradle and tilting gantry may overrun by less
than 10 mm and less than 0.5 degrees respectively.

System Emergency OFF Buttons

In the event of a fire, flood, earthquake, or any other catastrophic emergency, all power to
the system should be turned off. Pressing the System Emergency OFF button immediately
removes all power to the system by removing power to the Main Disconnect Control (MDC).
Because the system has no time to save data, or shutdown in an orderly fashion, pressing
the System Emergency OFF button can corrupt system files or result in loss of patient data.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-29

The facility designer determines the quantity and locations of the Emergency OFF buttons.
GE recommends placing an Emergency OFF button near the doorway of every room in the
system scan suite. Ask your supervisor to show you the location of all the Emergency OFF
buttons in the system suite. Follow facility guidelines to report an emergency.
Press the System Emergency OFF button (red, circular button located on the wall) in the
event of a catastrophic emergency, such as fire or earthquake.

Reset the Emergency OFF Button

1. Press the Start button on the Main Disconnect Control.
Power to the Power Distribution Unit (PDU), operator console and system electronics
will be restored.
2. Press the Reset gantry key on the gantry panel.
Power to the gantry drives, X-ray system and table drive will be restored.

Emergency Patient Care During X-Ray ON:

• Press STOP SCAN to abort x-ray and stop gantry/table movement.
• Press PAUSE SCAN to pause scanning after the current scan completes.
• During an exam, the system pauses between scans if you Press any button on the
control panel other than the alignment lights. It stops X-Ray if you Press the same
button(s) during a scan.
• Select Resume on the screen to continue the exam.

Emergency Egress
System operation may be stopped due to power failure or a safety event (something coming
into contact with the collision sensors), or the system may be halted by the operator in
response to emergency conditions.
The Cradle unlatch button should only be used in two situations.
1. In Emergency Egress situations.
2. When using the SmartStep/SmartView scan type.

To safely remove the patient:

1. Press the Cradle Release gantry key or the Emergency Stop button to disengage the
clutch.
2. Pull the cradle to its out position, using the Cradle Lip or Cradle Release Handle (Figure
2-10).
3. Assist the patient off the table.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-30

Maintenance and Cleaning

• To guarantee safe, reliable equipment performance, the site must be prepared
according to GE Medical Systems requirements, as specified in the Pre-Installation
Manual.
• There are no user serviceable parts in this system. The product should be installed,
maintained and serviced by qualified service personnel according to procedures laid
down in the product service manuals.
• The system in whole or in part should not be modified in any way without prior written
approval by GE Medical Systems.
• Keep the equipment clean. Remove body fluids and/or IV spills to prevent a health risk
and damage to internal parts. Clean the equipment with warm water and soap or a mild
antiseptic.
• Planned maintenance must be carried out regularly to ensure safe operation of the
equipment.
• For user maintenance of the system and performance tests, refer to the maintenance
and calibration information in the Technical Reference Manual.

Environmental Concerns
This symbol indicates that the waste of electrical and electronic equipment
must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste and must be collected
separately. Please contact an authorized representative of the manufacturer for
information concerning the decommissioning of your equipment.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-31

Name and Concentration of Hazardous Substances

Explanation of Pollution Control Label

This symbol indicates the product contains hazardous materials in excess
of the limits established by the Chinese standard SJ/T11363-2006
Requirements for Concentration Limits for Certain Hazardous Substances in
Electronic Information Products. The number in the symbol is the
Environment-friendly Use Period (EFUP), which indicates the period during
which the toxic or hazardous substances or elements contained in
electronic information products will not leak or mutate under normal operating conditions
so that the use of such electronic information products will not result in any severe
environmental pollution, any bodily injury or damage to any assets. The unit of the period is
"Year".
In order to maintain the declared EFUP, the product shall be operated normally according to
the instructions and environmental conditions as defined in the product manual, and
periodic maintenance schedules specified in Product Maintenance Procedures shall be
followed strictly.
Consumables or certain parts may have their own label with an EFUP value less than the
product. Periodic replacement of those consumables or parts to maintain the declared EFUP
shall be done in accordance with the Product Maintenance Procedures.
This product must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste, and must be collected
separately and handled properly after decommissioning.
Table 2-2 Table of hazardous substances' name and concentration

Hazardous substances' name

Component Name
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr(VI)) (PBB) (PBDE)
Operator Console X O O X O O
Gantry X O X X X X
LCD Monitor O X O O O O
ECG Cardiac Trigger X O O X X X
Power Distribution Unit X O X X X X
Patient Table
LightSpeed RT16 X O X X X X
LightSpeed Xtra
Patient Table X O X X O O

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-32

Hazardous substances' name

Component Name
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr(VI)) (PBB) (PBDE)
• O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the
homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.
• X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the
homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in
SJ/T11363-2006.
– Data listed in the table represents best information available at the time of
publication
– Applications of hazardous substances in this medical device are required to
achieve its intended clinical uses, and/or to provide better protection to human
beings and/or to environment, due to lack of reasonably (economically or
technically) available substitutes.

This product consists of devices that may contain mercury, which must be recycled or
disposed of in accordance with local, state, or country laws. (Within this system, the
backlight lamps in the monitor display contain mercury.)
The X-Ray Collimator contains the following potentially hazardous materials:
Lead: Lead salts are toxic and their ingestion may cause serious problems. The
manipulation/ handling of lead is subject to regulations.
The Performix Pro X-Ray Tube Assembly contains potentially dangerous materials but does
not present any danger as long as it is neither opened nor disassembled.

WARNING: Do not discard the X-Ray Tube Assembly among industrial waste or domestic
garbage.

WARNING: A damaged X-ray Tube Assembly should not be dispatched through the
national postal service.
The X-Ray Tube Assembly contains the following potentially hazardous materials:
Lead: Lead salts are toxic and their ingestion may cause serious problems. The
manipulation/ handling of lead is subject to regulations.
Oil: Univolt 54 and Crosstrans 206 mineral oil are not toxic, but the prevailing
environmental regulations should be observed for their disposal or recuperation. For
example, it is forbidden to dispose of these oils in the wastewater or sewage system or
in the natural environment.
Your local GEMS field service will advise you on the suitable means of disposal.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-33

The X-Ray Tube Assembly to be discarded should be forwarded to the GEMS Service
network, and it will be disposed of in a GEMS recycling center.

Precautions
Take all the necessary precautions for the personnel handling the recovery or destruction of
X-Ray Tube Assemblies, and in particular against the risks due to lead.
These personnel must be informed of the danger involved and of the necessity to observe
the safety measures.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 2-34

Chapter 3
Getting Started

Introduction
The Getting Started chapter provides you with information about the hardware components
and users conventions, as well as the shutdown and startup procedures of the system. The
chapter is broken into three parts: hardware components, users conventions, and shutdown
and startup. The purpose of this chapter is to provide the necessary background information
about the system that may be important in understanding other topics presented in
subsequent chapters.
This chapter explains the process of shutting down and starting up the system. It provides
step-by-step instructions to learn how to:
• Shut Down and Start Up the Octane System
• Shut Down and Start Up the PC Based System
• Login and Logout
• Configure Users for the System
• Enterprise TabEnterprise Tab
• Local User Management Tab
• Group and Permission Mapping
• Use QuickSnap
• Use IQ Snap
• Use Anonymous Patient (Anon Pat. Level)
As stated in the About This Guide chapter, it is necessary for you to have sufficient
knowledge to competently perform the various diagnostic imaging procedures in
computerized tomography. This guide is not intended to teach computerized tomography.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to successfully set up a patient for scanning.
Some of the concepts you need to understand are:
• Hardware Components
– Power Distribution Unit (PDU)
– Gantry Controls
– Gantry Display
– Internal Gantry Components
– Computer
– Table
– Monitors
– Keyboard and Scan Interface module
– Mouse
– Bright Box
• Power Distribution Unit (PDU)
• Users Conventions
• Tool Chest
• HIPAA
– Understanding users and groups
– Understanding groups and privileges
• Product Network Filters - PNF
• Software Download
• OptiDose
– Dose Features & Technology *

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-2

Hardware Components

Power Distribution Unit (PDU)

The Power Distribution Unit or PDU supplies power to the table, gantry, computer, and
monitors. This unit is a separate piece of hardware normally located in the same room as
the table and gantry.

2 3
1
13 14
12
15
11
5 16

4 8 6 17

7
18

9 10

Gantry Controls
The numbers on the above picture correlate to the numbered explanations below.
1. Prep Delay Timer- Displays the prescribed prep delay before scan starts.
2. Stop Scan- In the event of an emergency situation, pressing (Stop Scan) stops the prep
delays as well as any X-ray exposure in progress.
3.Start Scan - In the event that you want to stand by the gantry and start
the scan, you can press this button after you have confirmed the
prescription and the table has been moved to the start scan location. Start
Scan will flash for 30 seconds before it times out. Press the solid green
Start Scan button again to bring the system back to ready to scan state.
4. Cradle In - Pressing (Cradle In) moves the cradle in, towards the gantry.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-3

5. Table Up - Pressing (Table Up) moves the table up and towards the gantry. While
moving the table up, with the laser alignment light on, the cradle adjusts horizontally to
maintain the anatomic reference point.
If you step on the up pedal, it raises the table up and move the cradle in.
6. Cradle Out - Pressing (Cradle Out) moves the cradle out, away from the gantry.
Cradle In or Out can be used to move the patient to the scan location after clicking
confirm. Cradle In or Out LED will flash for 180 seconds before it times out.

7. Table Down - Pressing (Table Down) moves the table down and away from the
gantry. While moving the table down, with the laser alignment light on, the cradle
adjusts horizontally to maintain the anatomic reference point.
If you step on the down pedal, it moves the cradle out and lower the table down. It
also tilts the gantry back to zero.
8. Fast Speed - Pressing (Fast Speed) in conjunction with Up/Down or In/Out causes
those functions to operate at a faster speed.
9. Superior Gantry Tilt - Pressing (Superior Gantry Tilt) tilts the gantry towards the
patient’s head, regardless of his/her position.
NOTE: Maximum tilt depends on the table height and interaction with interference matrix.
Use the Tilt and Table Travel Limit button to determine limits.
NOTE: The Remote Tilt button on the Scan Control Interface Module can be use to return the
gantry to zero once all prescribed scan for the exam have been acquired.
10. Inferior Gantry Tilt - Pressing (Inferior Gantry Tilt) tilts the gantry towards the
patient’s feet, regardless of his/her position.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-4

11. Breathing Lights Demo- Pressing allows you to demonstrate to the patient how
to use the breathing lights and countdown timer.
Blinking green breathe light indicates to get ready to hold your breath.
Solid yellow light indicates to hold your breath.
Count down indicator counts down the seconds to breathe tim
Solid green breathe light indicates to breathe.

Breathe Light Breath Light

Hold Your

Count Down Indicator

12. Tilt and Table Travel Limits- Pressing allows you to view the current gantry tilt
range and scannable range, based on table position, on the gantry display panel.
NOTE: The Tilt and Table Travel Limits displayed are calculated based on a limit and collision
matrix that takes into consideration the table height and landmark location on the
cradle when providing the information displayed.
13. Internal Landmark - Pressing (Internal Landmark) establishes the table’s reference
point when positioning the patient, using the internal laser alignment light. This
reference point is normally the anatomic reference point to be used when positioning
the patient. For example, if the patient’s anatomic reference point is the sternal notch,
then the sternal notch would be centered to the internal laser alignment light, and you
would press (Internal Landmark). The gantry display would then show a table
location of 0 mm. The reason for the table location of 0 mm is because the CT system
calculates its table location numbers based on the internal laser alignment light. Either
(Internal Landmark) or (External Landmark) has to be used before you can click
[Confirm].

14. External Landmark - Pressing (External Landmark) establishes the table’s

reference point when positioning the patient, using the external laser alignment light.
This reference point is normally the anatomic reference point to be used when
positioning the patient. For example, if the patient’s anatomic reference point is the
sternal notch, then the sternal notch would be centered to the external laser alignment

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-5

light, then you would press (External Landmark). The gantry display would then
show a table location approximately 240 mm, depending on table characterization. The
reason for these location numbers is that the CT system calculates its table location
numbers based on the distance between the external and internal laser alignment
lights. Either (Internal Landmark) or (External Landmark) has to be used before
you can click [Confirm].
NOTE: External Landmark - for LightSpeed RT, LightSpeed RT16 and LightSpeed Xtra
systems only - who have external laser alignment lights affixed in the scan room can
have the system configured to use the position of these alignment lights as the
external landmark location. If configured to use the externally fixed laser alignment
lights, the external landmark position will reflect the distance from these lights to
isocenter.
The external laser lights affixed to the gantry will still be displayed on the patient even
though the system is configured to use the externally mounted laser alignment lights
in the room for the external landmark position.
The system can only have one external alignment light configured as the external
landmark distance. This is part of the system installation process. Consult with your
local service representative to define which configuration is best for your institution.
15. Laser Alignment Light - Pressing (Laser Alignment Light) turns the laser alignment
on. Pressing it again turns the light off.

CAUTION: For patient safety, it is important to always have patients close their eyes
anytime the laser alignment light is on.
16. Cradle Lock - Pressing (Cradle Lock) once unlocks the table cradle, making it "free
floating". This means that the cradle can be moved freely with your hands. This can be
useful to move the patient out of the gantry in an emergency. Pressing (Cradle
Lock) a second time returns the cradle to the locked position and the landmark
established is maintained.
NOTE: If Cradle Lock is used during a SmartStep acquisition, the cradle must be locked state
to make an exposure.
17. Table collision sensor indicator/reset- (Reset) is used if (Emergency Stop) has
been pushed, (Reset) flashes approximately once every two seconds. Pressing
(Reset) re-engages the table and gantry.
If the power has been turned off to the gantry, the Reset button must be pressed to
restore full communications to the gantry and console.
NOTE: If the table stops moving, clear the obstruction and continue moving the table.
18. Home - Pressing (Home) simultaneously moves the cradle out of the gantry and
return the gantry tilt to zero degrees. Once the cradle has been removed from the
gantry, the table begins to lower to its lowest allowable limit.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-6

Gantry Display
4 1 2 3

5 6 7

The numbers on the above picture correlate to the numbered explanations below.The
Gantry display indicates the table and gantry’s current status.
1. Laser Light Indicator - The (Laser Light Indicator) is illuminated anytime the
laser alignment light has been turned on. Normally, this light is only on when
positioning a patient.

CAUTION: For patient safety, it is important to always have patients close their eyes
anytime the laser alignment light is on.
2. Collision Indicator- The (Collision) light illuminates when there is a possibility that
the table, cradle, and gantry comes in contact with each other. There are tilt/elevation
collision sensors on the front and rear covers at the top of the gantry opening. The
collision sensors are active during table elevation and during tilting of the gantry. The
light also illuminates if there is ten pounds of resistance during cradle motion in/out or
when reaching the travel limits of table, cradle, and gantry motion. In the case of
interference, you may need to raise or lower the table, check the gantry tilt, or
determine if resistance is being caused by any patient restraints, accessories, or by the
patient. If you need to tilt the gantry after a collision has been detected, the gantry only
tilts in 0.5 degree increments. You can also check the Table collision sensor
indicator/reset button on the front of the gantry. The light will go out if you continue to
hold the button.
3. Cradle Unlocked Indicator - The (Cradle Unlocked Indicator) is illuminated,
indicating the cradle is unlocked. When the cradle is unlocked, it is "free floating".
4. Vertical Height Indicator - The (Vertical Height Indicator) displays the
vertical height of the table in relation to ISO center.
5. Horizontal Cradle Position - The (Horizontal Cradle Position) displayed
is the position of the cradle based on the established anatomic reference of the patient.
This reference is established using the internal or external landmarks. The number is
preceded by an S if the position is superior to the reference point or an I if the position is
inferior to the reference point.
6. Gantry Tilt Indicator - The (Gantry Tilt Indicator) shows one of two
displays. One display, which is the normal display, indicates the current gantry tilt. If the
gantry tilt is superior, the number is preceded with an S. If the gantry tilt is inferior, the
number is preceded with an I.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-7

7. Exposure Indicator - The (Exposure Indicator) illuminates amber when an actual

exposure is taking place.
8. Heart Indicator - The heart is lit whenever there is an ECG gating signal seen by the
scanner.

Hardware Components for LightSpeed 1.X Xtream Systems

Hardware Component: Gantry Controls

3
8 1

6 7 5

9 10
4
2

14 13 12 11

The numbers on the above picture correlate to the numbered explanations below.
1. Emergency Stop - In the event of an emergency situation, pressing (Emergency
Stop) will stop all table and gantry motions, as well as any X-ray exposure in progress.
NOTE: For additional information on the emergency shutdown procedure, see Chapter 1,
Safety.
2. Reset - (Reset) is used in two situations. First, if (Emergency Stop) has been
pushed, (Reset) will flash approximately once every two seconds. Pressing
(Reset) re-engages the table and gantry. Second, if one of the table’s tape strips has

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-8

been pressed causing the table and gantry motions to be stopped, (Reset) will flash
every other second. Pressing (Reset) restores power to the table and gantry.
3. Table Up - Pressing (Table Up) moves the table up and towards the gantry. While
moving the table up, with the laser alignment light on, the cradle will adjust horizontally
to maintain the anatomic reference point.
4. Table Down - Pressing (Table Down) moves the table down and away from the
gantry. While moving the table down, with the laser alignment light on, the cradle will
adjust horizontally to maintain the anatomic reference point.
5. Cradle In - Pressing (Cradle In) will move the cradle in, towards the gantry.

6. Cradle Out - Pressing (Cradle Out) will move the cradle out, away from the gantry.

7. Fast Speed - Pressing (Fast Speed) in conjunction with Up/Down or In/Out will
cause those functions to operate at a faster speed. Also, you can press and hold
(Fast Speed) alone to view the current gantry tilt range and scannable range,
based on table position, on the gantry display panel.
8. Home - Pressing (Home) will simultaneously move the cradle out of the gantry and
return the gantry tilt to zero degrees. Once the cradle has been removed from the
gantry, the table will begin to lower to it’s lowest allowable limit.
9. Inferior Gantry Tilt - Pressing (Inferior Gantry Tilt) will tilt the gantry towards the
patient’s feet, regardless of their position. With a single touch of the button, the gantry
will tilt one-half degree at a time, then stop. To continue tilting the gantry, you must
release the button and press again. When held in conjunction with (Superior
Gantry Tilt), the gantry will move automatically to the prescribed tilt.
10. Superior Gantry Tilt - Pressing (Superior Gantry Tilt) will tilt the gantry towards
the patient’s head, regardless of their position. With a single touch of the button, the
gantry will tilt one-half degree at a time, then stop. To continue tilting the gantry, you
must release the button and press again. When held in conjunction with (Inferior
Gantry Tilt), the gantry will move automatically to the prescribed tilt.
11. Cradle Lock - Pressing (Cradle Lock) once will unlock the table cradle, making it "free
floating": this means that the cradle can be moved freely with your hands. This can be
useful to move the patient out of the gantry in an emergency. Pressing (Cradle
Lock) a second time will return the cradle to the locked position.
12. Internal Landmark - Pressing (Internal Landmark) establishes the table’s reference
point when positioning the patient, using the internal laser alignment light. This
reference point is normally the anatomic reference point to be used when positioning
the patient. For example, if the patient’s anatomic reference point is the sternal notch,
then the sternal notch would be centered to the internal laser alignment light, and you
would press (Internal Landmark). The gantry display would then show a table
location of 0 mm. The reason for the table location of 0 mm is because the CT system
calculates its table location numbers based on the internal laser alignment light. Either

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-9

(Internal Landmark) or (External Landmark) has to be used before you can

select [Confirm].
13. External Landmark - Pressing (External Landmark) establishes the table’s
reference point when positioning the patient, using the external laser alignment light.
This reference point is normally the anatomic reference point to be used when
positioning the patient. For example, if the patient’s anatomic reference point is the
sternal notch, then the sternal notch would be centered to the external laser alignment
light, then you would press (External Landmark). The gantry display would then
show a table location between 310 mm and 317 mm, depending on table
characterization. The reason for these location numbers is that the CT system calculates
its table location numbers based on the distance between the external and internal
laser alignment lights. Either (Internal Landmark) or (External Landmark) has
to be used before you can select [Confirm].
14. Laser Alignment Light - Pressing (Laser Alignment Light) will turn the laser
alignment on. Pressing it again will turn the light off.

CAUTION: CAUTION: For patient safety, it is important to always have patients close their
eyes anytime the laser alignment light is on.

Hardware Component: Gantry Display for 1.X Systems with Xtream

2 3 5
5
8
6 7
1 4
The numbers on the above picture correlate to the numbered explanations below.
The Gantry display indicates the table and gantry’s current status.
1. Laser Light Indicator - The (Laser Light Indicator) will be illuminated anytime
the laser alignment light has been turned on. Normally, this light is only on when
positioning a patient.

CAUTION: CAUTION: For patient safety, it is important to always have patients close their
eyes anytime the laser alignment light is on.
2. Cradle Unlocked Indicator - The (Cradle Unlocked Indicator) is illuminated in
orange, indicating the cradle is unlocked. When the cradle is unlocked, it is ’free floating’.
3. Cradle Locked Indicator - The (Cradle Locked Indicator) is illuminated in green,
indicating the cradle is locked. This is normal mode of operation.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-10

4. Interference - The (Interference) light will illuminate when there is a possibility that
the table, cradle, and gantry will come in contact with each other. The light will also
illuminate if there is resistance during cradle motion or when reaching the limits of table,
cradle, and gantry motion. In the case of interference, you may need to raise or lower
the table, check the gantry tilt, or determine if resistance is being caused by any patient
restraints, accessories, or by the patient themselves.
5. Vertical Height Indicator - The (Vertical Height Indicator) will display the
vertical height of the table in relation to ISO center.
6. Horizontal Cradle Position - The (Horizontal Cradle Position)
displayed is the position of the cradle based on the established anatomic reference of
the patient. This reference is established using the internal or external landmarks. The
number is preceded by an S if the position is superior to the reference point or an I if the
position is inferior to the reference point.
7. Gantry Tilt Indicator - The (Gantry Tilt Indicator) will show one of two
displays. One display, which is the normal display, indicates the current gantry tilt. If the
gantry tilt is superior, the number will be preceded with an S. If the gantry tilt is inferior,
the number will be preceded with an I. The other display, when (Fast Speed) is
pressed, will indicate the allowable gantry tilt based on current table position.

Internal Gantry Components

6 1
5 3

4 4

DANGER: Information on internal gantry components is provided for user education.

The gantry contains dangerous voltages and moving parts. TO PREVENT
ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR CRUSHING INJURIES, DO NOT REMOVE COVERS OR
ENTER THE GANTRY. ONLY TRAINED, QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONEL MAY
REMOVE GANTRY OR OTHER EQUIPMENT COVERS.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-11

The numbers on the above picture correlate to the numbered explanations below.
1. Tube and Collimator - The anode heat capacity with a Performix tube is 6.3 million
heat units (MHU) and the cooling rate is 840,000 heat units per minute (KHU/min).
The anode heat capacity with a Performix Pro 100 tube is 8 million heat units (MHU) and the
cooling rate is 1782 kilo heat units per minute (KHU/min).
Performix Pro for the 4 slice LightSpeed RT system is limited to 53kW.
Performix Pro 80 is limited to 80kW.
Performix Pro 100 is limited to 100kW.
Performix Pro 100 is limited to 100kW for LightSpeed RT16 and LightSpeed Xtra systems.
2. Detector/Data Acquisition System - The detector is comprised of a solid scintillator
material known as HiLight. HiLight, using a 20 channel 16 X 1.25mm matrix design 4
slice and 8 slice systems (combined with 1 mm channel width) provides 99 % dose
efficiency. The 16 slice systems have 14 channels for the 16 X 0.625 and 8 X 1.25 modes.
3. Tube Controller - The tube controller regulates the tube’s rotor start and stop time.
4. High Frequency Generator - The high frequency generator is composed of the cathode
and the anode tanks. Each tank occupies one cubic foot within the gantry. Together the
cathode and the anode provide 53.2 kilowatts (kW) of power with the Performix tubes
and 100.2 kilowatts (kW) of power with the Performix Pro 100 tubes. Performix Pro 80 is
limited to 80kW. Performix Pro for LightSpeed RT is limited to 53kW. Performix Pro 85 is
limited to 85kW for LightSpeed RT16 and LightSpeed Xtra systems.
The LightSpeed Pro16 high frequency generator is composed of inverter and high
voltage tanks.
5. Onboard Computer - The onboard computer regulates the KV and mA and provides the
mechanism for information input and output across the slip ring.
6. Stationary Computer - The stationary computer provides the mechanism for input and
output exchange to and from the operator console.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-12

Computer
Figure 3-1 GOC1 Octane Based Computer Console

4 3
1

The numbers on Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2 correlate to the numbers in Table 3-1.
The computer is located at the base of the console and it contains all the hardware
necessary to operate the system and perform image generation.
XtreamTM Technology
The operator console issues a PC based computer system running a Linux based operating
system. The system supports a gigabyte network port. The system supports 3000 image
series and has on-system storage for 250,000 images.
Xtream FXTM Technology
The operator console issues a PC based computer system running a Linux based operating
system. The system supports a gigabyte network port. The system includes a 511 GB disk
(system, image, scan disks) stores up to 250,000 512 images and 3,369 scan rotation data
files.
GRE Recon
The Global Reconstruction Engine (GRE) hardware provides faster reconstruction times of up
to 6 images per sec. or up to 16 FPS (Option) based on hardware configuration. The faster
times enhance the capabilities of SmartPrep to provide more precise timing in the delivery
of contrast material for a wide variety of examinations.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-13

Applications on Operator Console (OC)

Common user interface with Advantage Windows for improved productivity. The OC now
supports an expanded list of Advanced Application packages such as Volume Viewer,
Advanced Vessel Analysis, CT Perfusion 3 - Multi-Organ or Neuro only, CT Colonography or
Advantage CTC Plus or Pro, CardIQ Xpress - Plus or Pro, CardEP, Auto Bone, and DentaScan.
Volume Viewer is a prerequisite to support Advanced Vessel Analysis, CT Colonography or
Advantage CTC, CardIQ Xpress, CardEP, and AutoBone.
Located on the top of the console table top is a media tower with two drives.
Table 3-1 Device Descriptions

Device Name Description

Located at the top of the media tower is the MOD drive used
for image archiving and restoring. The MOD disks are
erasable and re-writable and 1.2 or 2.3 GB media can be
Magnetic Optical utilized. The MOD can store 1800 (1.2GB) or 6000 (2.3GB)
1 lossless JPEG compressed 512 x 512 matrix images per side.
Disk Drive (MOD)
Actual number may vary by stored image type.
NOTE: PC based systems only save images files to MOD, scan
data is saved to DVD RAM for these systems.
Located at the bottom of the media tower is the DVD drive
which supports writing to the following media types
DVD-Ram, CD-R and DVD-R.
The DVD drive can be used to access the electronic copies of
Digital Video the Operator Manual titled "The Learning and Reference
Disk-Random Guide" and the TiP Simulator.
2
Access Memory The DVD can also be used for saving scan files, protocols, and
(DVD-RAM) service files to DVD-Ram. The CD/DVD option (Interchange) in
the Browser on the Image Works desktop can save images to
CD-R or DVD-R. The CD/DVD option can restore data from
CD-R, and DVD-R. The Data Export option in the Browser on
Image Works desktop can only save information to CD-R.
Connections for
Located on the front of the computer are connections for
iLinq and service
3 iLinq and service computer functions
computer
This is intended to be used by trained service personnel only.
functions
Located on the front of the computer is the computer power
on/off switch. If power is turned off via this switch and the
Main Disconnect Control (A1), then power cannot be restarted
Computer power to the computer unless the on/off switch is turned on after
4 power to the Main Disconnect Control is restored.
on/off switch
NOTE: In a typical workflow the system would be shutdown
by clicking [Shutdown] on the right monitor prior to
disabling power.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-14

Figure 3-2 GOC2 and GOC3 PC Based Computer Console

3
4

1
2

Table
The table has a weight limit of 450 pounds (205 kg) with an incremental accuracy of ± 1 mm.
At 400 pounds (180 kg), incremental accuracy increases to ±.25 mm. The vertical range of
the table is 51 to 99centimeters. The scout view range is 1,000 mm and the scan range is
1,700 mm.
Figure 3-3 Table

Figure 3-4 Tape Strips

Tape Strips

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-15

Located underneath the table are the collision sensor strips. These strips are located in
areas where there is potential for the table to come into contact with foreign objects, such
as a wheel chair or a stretcher. If one of the tape strips is touched, the table and gantry
motion stops immediately. Raise the table and clear the obstruction. You can now continue
moving the table down.
NOTE: The maximum scan range and gantry tilt depends on the table height. The mark on
the cradle for maximum scannable range is based on the table center at isocenter.
Make sure the patient is positioned with the scannable range and use the Tilt and
Table Travel Limit button on the gantry control panel to check limits.
NOTE: LightSpeed 5.X based 4, 8, 16 slice systems, LightSpeed Pro16, and LightSpeed RT tape
switches are only activated when downward motion of the table elevation
encounters an obstruction. They are not activated when touched.

Monitors
There are two monitors for the system (Figure 3-5). The monitor on the left is the Scan
monitor and the monitor on the right is the Display/Image monitor.
Figure 3-5 Monitors

CRT Monitors

1 2

LCD Monitors

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-16

NOTE: If the power is turned off to the monitors by either console off or using the power off
button on the monitor, it takes 15 min for the monitors to stabilize to their set
brightness and contrast levels. During this warm-up time, do not make any
adjustments to the brightness or contrast levels.
1. Scan Monitor - The Scan monitor contains the user interface that controls all aspects of
scanning from entering patient information to ending the patient exam. The interface
also includes scan protocol control, scan data manipulation, and system maintenance,
such as tube warm-up and calibrations.

Top Level Features (from left to right):

¾ New Patient - To start a new patient.
¾ Patient Schedule - To pre-program patient information and to get information
from DICOM HIS/RIS.
¾ Protocol Management - To create, edit, and delete scan and voice protocols.
¾ Retro Recon - To reprocess scan data to create new images.
¾ Recon Mgmt - To pause, resume, or delete reconstruction. Also used to
save/restore or reserve/release scan data.
¾ Daily Prep - To perform tube warm-up or fast calibrations.
¾ Scanner Utilities - For Field Engineer to perform phantom calibrations.
¾ Operator Console Message Area - Located above the buttons, it is a raised white
bar in the middle of the white line. Clicking on this bar gives you a list of various
messages related to the scan monitor.
NOTE: The details about each of the features, except the Operator Console Message Area,
is covered in various chapters in this manual.
2. Display/Image Monitor - The Display/Image monitor contains the desktop selection
area and the feature status area at the top left, the function buttons for the currently
selected desktop directly below feature status area, and the image display area to the
right.
This section focuses more attention to the desktop selection area and the feature
status area. These areas are visible on all desktops except Learning Solutions.
The function buttons (Figure 3-6) for the current desktop and the image display area are
covered elsewhere in this manual.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-17

Figure 3-6 Display Desktop

2
3
4
5
6
7

The numbers on the above picture correlate to the numbered explanations below.
1. Desktops - The desktops can be thought of as a work environment. When a
desktop is open, all the functions related to that desktop are placed on the
display/image monitor. The available desktop selections are:
¾ Exam Rx - To view images as you scan, auto film, manual film, and to apply
measurements and other features to an image.
¾ Image Works - To view other exams, archive, network, remove, manual film, apply
measurements and other features to an image, perform 2D reformations, and
access optional software features.
¾ Learning Solutions - CD-ROM based operator information.
¾ iLinq - To gain on-line access to GE Online Center engineers and Answerline
Applications Specialists for the purpose of sending and receiving information
related to the scanner. Within this desktop, you also have access to the ten most
frequently asked questions and a searchable database.
¾ Service - Used mostly by field engineers to save scan and/or voice protocols and
to perform system diagnostics.
¾ Shutdown - To restart the system, shutdown for power cycle of the system, or
User log out for HIPAA
2. Feature Status Area - contains the following areas:

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-18

3. Date/Time/Image Space - Shows current date, time, and the remaining 512² and 256²
matrix image space on the system disk.
4. Reconstruction - Shows the current or most recent exam, series, and image
reconstruction status. This status includes prospective or retrospective reconstruction.
On the Xtream and Xtream FX systems, recon shows the exam, series, image range
and percent complete.
5. Archive - Shows the current or most recent exam, series, and image archive status. This
status includes Save or Restore.
6. Network - Shows the current or most recent exam, series, and image network status.
This status includes Send or Receive.
7. Filming - Shows the current or most recent filming status.
8. Current Message - This area serves two functions. First, when you click on the area, you
can see a list of the system messages. These messages are not necessarily error
messages but can simply be any informational message generated by the system. The
second purpose is to leave messages about the system for the field engineer by using
[Memo]. When you click [Memo], a pop-up menu appears. Making sure the cursor is in
the menu area, you can then type a message, then click [Save]. The message now is a
part of the log files. The field engineer can look at this message at a later date by
viewing the log file via [View Log]. You can also view the error log through [View Log].

Keyboard and Scan Interface module

The keyboard and scan interface module exist of a typical alphanumeric keys, 10 number
keypad and buttons specific to initiating scan, remote tilt of the gantry and communication
with the patient.
Figure 3-7 Keyboard

1 2 10 11 12 3 4 5

9 6 7 8
13
14
15

The numbers on the above picture correlate to the numbered explanations below.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-19

1. Emergency Stop - In the event of an emergency situation, pressing emergency

stop stops all table and gantry motions, as well as any X-ray exposure in progress.
2. Exposure Indicator - The (Exposure Indicator) illuminate amber when an actual
exposure is taking place.
3. Start Scan - The (Start Scan) indicator flashes green once the tube has reached
exposure speed. Simply press the button to start the scan. Start Scan will flash for 30
seconds before timing out. Press the solid green Start Scan button again to bring the
system back to the ready state.
4. Pause Scan - Pressing (Pause Scan) causes the system to pause scanning, once
the current scan is completed. You can resume the scan by selecting [Resume] from the
view/edit screen.
5. Stop Scan - Pressing (Stop Scan) aborts the scan immediately. You can resume
the scan by selecting [Resume] from the view/edit screen.
6. Move to Scan - The (Move to Scan) indicator flashes green indicating that the
system is ready for you to advance the cradle into the starting position. Simply press the
button to advance the cradle. Move to Scan will flash for 180 seconds before timing out.
7. Stop Move - Pressing (Stop Move) stops cradle motion in/out. You can resume the
scan by selecting [Resume] from the view/edit screen.
8. Remote Tilt - Press (Prescribed Tilt) and hold the button down until the prescribe
tilt is achieved.
NOTE: The Remote Tilt button on the Scan Control Interface Module can be used to return
the gantry to zero once all the prescribed scans for the exam have been acquired.
NOTE: Remote Tilt is not available on LightSpeed 1.X Xtream systems.
9. Talk - Pressing (Talk) and speaking towards the intercom above the
button allows you to communicate with the scan room.
10.Volume Control (operator to patient) - The (Volume Control Operator Voice
to Patient) dial is located just below the indicator on the front of the keyboard.
This dial controls the volume of the operator’s voice to the patient. An upward
adjustment of the dial increases the volume while a downward adjustment of
the dial decreases the volume. The dial does have numbers on it to let you
know what volume level you have set.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-20

11.Volume Control (autovoice to gantry)-The (Volume Control Autovoice to

Gantry) dial is located just below the indicator on the front of the keyboard.
This dial controls the volume of the autovoice to the gantry. An upward
adjustment of the dial increases the volume while a downward adjustment of
the dial decreases the volume. The dial does have numbers on it to let you
know what volume level you have set.

12.Volume Control (patient to operator) - The (Volume Control Patient to

Operator) dial is located just below the indicator on the front of the keyboard.
This dial controls the volume of the patient’s voice to the operator. An upward
adjustment of the dial increases the volume while a downward adjustment of
the dial decreases the volume.The dial does have numbers on it to let you
know what volume level you have set.
13.Filming Keys - The F1-F4 function keys can be used for filming to the
Manual Film Composer. The F3 function key in conjunction with Shift, and the
F12 function key can be used for filming to the AutoFilm Composer.
Table 3-2 Function Keys

F Key Description Translated Text

F1 Film Image
F2 Film Screen
F3 Film MID
F4 Print Series
F12 Auto Film Image

14. Preset Window Width/Window Level Keys - The F5 - F11 function keys are used to
apply the preset WW/WL values stored in User Prefs in Image Works. The keys can be
used to set the WW/WL using the preset values in viewports on ExamRx, in the Viewer
and Mini-Viewer in Image Works and in Reformat.
Table 3-3 Function Keys

F Key Description Translated Text

F5 Previous W/L
F6 Abdomen W/L
F7 Head W/L
F8 Lung W/L
F9 Mediastinum W/L
F10 Spine W/L

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-21

F Key Description Translated Text

F11 Vertebra W/L

15. Page Up/Page Down - The Page Up and Page Down keys allow you to review the next
and prior images in a viewport or viewports from the Exam Rx or Image Works desktops.
16. Window Width/Window Level Control Keys - You can use these keys to manually
change the WW/WL settings for images in the Exam Rx and Image Works desktops. The
(Up/Down) keys increase/decrease the window level and the (Left/Right) keys
decrease/increase the window width.

Mouse
The mouse is used extensively to make selections on the scan and display/image monitors.
It is a standard three button computer mouse that is set up to work with the system.
Figure 3-8 Mouse

left right
middle

The three mouse buttons are referred to as the left, middle, and right mouse buttons. In this
manual, the term "click" refers to pressing and releasing the left mouse button. The term
"double click" refers to quickly clicking and releasing twice on the left mouse button. The
term "triple click" refers to quickly clicking and releasing three times on the left mouse
button.
Most of the selections required during the scan and review process require a single click on
the left mouse button. This is the primary button for selection. The middle mouse button is
used primarily for adjusting window width and window level. The right mouse button is used
infrequently for scrolling images, magnification, and for accessing hidden menus.
NOTE: For specific terminology and mouse descriptions used in this text, refer to Table 1-1
in the About This Guide chapter.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-22

Bright Box
The Bright Box (Figure 3-9) is a separate piece of hardware that can be utilized to review
images without having to fully utilize the mouse or keyboard. Using the Bright Box allows
someone to review an image or images while someone else utilizes the mouse and
keyboard to set up or continue the scan series.
The Bright Box can be used only in the Exam Rx desktop with any "free" viewport. The term
"free" refers to a viewport that is not utilized for autoview or autofilm. It can be used in the
Autolink viewport, although, when the first image of another series is reconstructed, that
image is displayed in the viewport, taking the place of the series you are currently reviewing.
It is recommended to click the review screen, bottom left viewport, as a "free" viewport.
You can only work in one viewport at a time. Before you begin, you should put the desired
viewport in primary focus, with a double click in the viewport, so it does not affect the other
viewports.
NOTE: To get additional information about primary and secondary viewports, refer to the
Image Display Viewing Area chapter.
Figure 3-9 Bright Box

1 3 2

The numbers on the above picture correlate to the numbered explanations below.
1. Prior Button - Pressing this button displays the prior image in the set. This button is
inactive while in the paging mode.
2. Next Button - Pressing this button displays the next image in the set. This button is
inactive while in the paging mode.
3. Trackball - The trackball has two functions. The first, while not in the paging mode,
adjusts the window width and window level of the image. Moving the trackball to the left
decreases the window width while moving it to the right increases the window width.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-23

Moving the trackball down decreases the window level while moving it up increases the
window level. While in the paging mode, moving the trackball up pages through the
sequence from beginning to end at a rate dependent on the speed at which you move
the trackball. Moving the trackball down pages through the sequence from end to
beginning at a rate dependent on the speed at which you move the trackball.
4. Paging Button - The paging button is used to page through a sequence of images. Once
the viewport of interest is in primary focus, you can click the paging button twice to
initiate paging. You notice the letter "P" displayed in the lower right of the viewport
indicating the paging mode is active. Once you are in the paging mode, the next/prior
buttons are disabled and the trackball is used for paging through the sequence of
images. While in the paging mode, you can click once on the paging button to switch to
the window width and window level mode. This is designated by a "WL" replacing the "P"
in the lower right of the viewport. The trackball now controls the WW/WL settings.
Clicking the paging button again returns you to the paging mode. To exit the paging
mode, click twice on the paging button. The "P" in the lower right corner of the viewport
disappears indicating you are out of the paging mode.

Power Distribution Unit (PDU)

The PDU supplies power to various part of the system which includes components in the
gantry, table and operator console. On the front of the PDU are controls to indicate that
power is on to the unit, a push button to turn power on/off to the gantry and table, and an
Emergency Stop button.
Figure 3-10 Front Panel of Power Distribution Unit

3
1 2

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-24

Function Description
1. Power Indicates power is On/Off to the unit
2. Gantry Enable Enables/disables power to the gantry and table
When pressed, all table and gantry motions are halted,
generation of x-ray is stopped, laser alignment lights are
turned off. The system aborts any data collection
3. Emergency Stop
acquisition in progress and attempts to save all data
acquired prior to the abort. Use the Emergency Stop for
patient related emergency.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-25

Users Conventions
The following users conventions are used throughout the user interface. Most of them apply
to the process of scan set up.
• Functions that are active are highlighted in blue.

• Functions that are not available because another function is open are gray.

• If one function is open and then a second is opened, the first open function is
highlighted green with a folded corner, indicating the function is still open and active.
The second open function is the current active function.

• Once a new patient exam has been started and you are setting up the scan parameters
from the view/edit screen, the scan parameters are listed in columns. If you click a
column heading, the parameters within that column, including all groups (indicated by

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-26

individual rows), are changed. To change a parameter in a specific group, click the
desired parameter below the column heading.

• Parameter selections that have a raised button appearance, when selected, displays a
pop-up menu prompting you to click or type in the desired parameter.

• Parameter selections that have a sunken/depressed, light background appearance,

when selected, allows you to type in the desired value.

• When a parameter is highlighted orange, this indicates that a parameter has been
adjusted by the system from the original preset value. Changing one parameter may
affect other parameters. In this case, you may have more than one parameter
highlighted orange. (In this example, the scan type was changed from helical to axial.
The ISD changed, as well as something in the recon tab card. You will be able to

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-27

continue, however, you should review parameters to make sure they are as needed for
the clinical protocol.)

• When a parameter is highlighted red, you cannot continue scanning until a correction is
made. (In this example, the techniques selected for the exam are too much for the
system to handle, so we need to change a parameter to continue.) Once the correction
is made, you can then continue.

• When you input an invalid parameter, the system defaults to the closest value possible
and a brief message explaining this change displays in the scan message area. If you
wish to see the message again, click on the parameter that has been changed. (In this
example, 400mA was input but the system changed the value to 380mA.)

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-28

Tool Chest
The tool chest is located on the right monitor in the upper right corner of the screen on the
Image Works desktop. Many items can be selected from this area.

Table 3-4 Tool Chest

Clicking this allows you to set the autovoice volume

levels in the scan room.
1 Autovoice Volume

2 Check Security This area is used by your service personnel.

Displays a unix shell on the left screen. This area is used
3 Unix Shell Left
by your service personnel.
Displays a unix shell on the right screen. This area is
4 Unix Shell Right
used by your service personnel.
Clicking this turns on extended Houndsfield Units. For
5 Turn On Extended HU
more information, refer to: Expanded CT Number Range.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-29

Clicking this take a snapshot of all the parameters you

have prescribed and information for processes touched
by the prescription. Use this when you are having
system issues for Service Personnel to recall the system
issues.

6 Quick Snap

CAUTION: Do not use Quick Snap while you are

acquiring data.
Refer to: Use QuickSnap detailed steps on using the
feature.
Clicking on this after selecting a set of images that have
been made anonymous takes a snapshot of the images
and reserves the scan data file related to the images as
well as recon files for service to review.

7 IQ Snap

CAUTION: Do not use IQ Snap while you are acquiring

data.
Refer to: Use IQ Snap detailed steps on using the feature.
Using a blank CD-ROM placed in the CD drive of the
Operator Console, you can click this button to save the
8 Save ECG Trace
directory of existing ECG files from specific ECG gated
scan types directly to the CD-ROM.
Use this feature if the scout or lines do not appear in
9 Restart Show Loc Show Localizer. If Restart Show Loc does not resolve the
issue, a reboot of the system will be needed.
Clicking this determines if the anonymized patient
information is saved with full annotation or partial
annotation. This is a toggle button.The pop-up message
10 Annon Pat. Level
indicates current state and state to transition to.
Refer to: Use Anonymous Patient (Anon Pat. Level)
detailed steps on using the feature.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-30

HIPAA
The Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996 (HIPAA) was signed by
President Clinton on July 21, 1996 and has the general objectives to:
– Guarantee health insurance coverage of employees.
– Reduce health care fraud and abuse.
– Introduce/implement administrative simplifications in order to augment
effectiveness and efficiency of the health care system in the United States.
– Protect the health information of individuals against access without consent or
authorization.
Administration Simplification regulations of HIPAA have been in effect since early
2001.
GE Medical Systems has a longstanding reputation of providing customizable, clinical
solutions to protect the privacy and security of your organization's unique clinical workflow,
as well as your patient's confidentiality. Our scanner, software and services already
incorporate many of the core HIPAA requirements. We are committed to working with you,
our customer, to provide additional value to help you meet the continuing HIPAA challenge.
Please recognize the intended use of the product when determining how critical any privacy
risk is, relative to patient care and safety. GE is very concerned with providing the best care
to the patients; and in some cases we have determined that patient care is more important
than the risk to privacy. In these cases we take every precaution to minimize the privacy risk.
Security and Privacy are maintained across a Healthcare system. Any product that is placed
into an uncontrolled environment will not be secure and can not protect privacy. As we
design scanners we design them to be implemented in a "Secure Environment". A secure
environment is based on multiple layers of security, a concept known as defense in depth.
For example: a Best Practice that is gaining much attention places firewalls between
departments, as well as at a DMZ, between all extranets, and the external Internet access
point. In this example a radiology firewall may allow DICOM and HL7 traffic through, but no
other protocols. These DICOM and HL7 protocols would be blocked at the DMZ and again at
the Internet Firewall.
HIPAA requires you to log on to the scanner and log off when you are done scanning for a
period of time. If you do not log off the system will log you off and you will have to log back
on.
HIPAA contains the following permissions. You can have Administrator, GE Service,
Standard User, or Limited User. Standard User can perform scanning functions and modify
protocols. Administrator can set up and delete users. Limited users can perform all
scanning functions. GE Service can do all functions. You must have Administrator
permission to add or delete users.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-31

When you are adding users for local databases, certain rules apply. You must use the
following parameters.
Users/Groups - Lower case letters and numbers only
Users/Groups - Can not start with a number
Users/Groups - No limit on length
Passwords - Must be at least one character long, no NULL
Passwords - Can contain uppercase letters, numbers, and special characters
Administrator and Limited User permissions have different abilities when logging on. The
Administrator permission can add users. The Standard User permission can scan and
modify protocols. The Limited User can only scan. Emergency User login has Limited User
permission.
NOTE: HIPAA is an option that can be turned on or off by your Field Engineer.
NOTE: HIPPA is only available on PC based systems.

Understanding users and groups

Every person who has permission to use the system is a user. Users are set up by system
administrators. These administrators may be IT personnel in an enterprise environment, or a
site manager or lead tech in stand-alone environments. The administrator adds new users
and assigns the users to a group, which dictates the level of privileges a person will have.
For example, a person named Sue Smith could belong to a group called technologists,
radiologists, administrators, or any combination.

Understanding groups and privileges

The group to which a person belongs has privileges. If you do not have an enterprise system,
the assignment of group privileges will probably be limited to those who have administrator
privileges and those who don't. Additionally permission for protocol edit may be assigned to
groups. If your system is set up for enterprise login, your IT person or administrator will be
using more of the features.

Product Network Filters - PNF

Product Network filters provide the capability to place a personnel firewall in front of the CT
scanner. Filters may be configured to restrict which system services are allowed to be
controlled by other devices trying to access the Operator console such as ftp, telnet and
rlogin and which computers may access the system. This access is determined by
configuring which IP addresses are allowed to access the system. DICOM access to the
system can also be configured.
The system default is for no services enabled, no IP addresses authorized and DICOM port
4006 enabled.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-32

Your Field Engineer can assist you and your IT Department in configuring PNF.

Software Download
Software Download provides the capability for Broadband connected systems with a
Service Contract to automatically down load software updates to the scanner. These
updates can be configured to Auto Install or Manual install.
A pop up indicating that this capability is installed on the system will be displayed for the
first 3 weeks after a software load from cold at every reboot.
Figure 3-11 Automatic Software Update Window

As updates become available a pop up will be displayed informing you of the update.
Figure 3-12 Automatic Software Update download

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-33

A progress bar indicates the progress of the install.

OptiDose
For years GE has followed the ALARA principle (As Low As Reasonably Achievable) in helping
our customers optimize dose. GE has provided many tools to help the clinician minimize
dose while achieving clinically diagnostic image quality.
GE CT is a proven leader in delivering dose efficiency in every scanner category. GE has
achieved this position through a "total system" approach.
Here you will learn about just some of the features which contribute to our "total system"
approach. To learn much more about this subject, please ask for our comprehensive
brochure, Dose in Computed Tomography: Basics, Challenges, Solutions (01-7192) located
on our web site at: http://www.gemedicalsystems.com/rad/ct/optidose.html.

Dose Features & Technology *

Pediatric Protocols
A full range of pediatric protocols is available based upon a child's size, age, and weight to
tailor the dose or treatment to the size of the patient.
The Head and Orbit categories are aged based. The rest of the categories are height and
weight based protocols.

Smart mA Enhanced
Smart mA modulates X-ray tube mA to account for specific patient anatomy – based upon
data gathered from the scout image. The system will predict the optimal setting for the
exam and adjusts mA to these settings. This maintains the best image quality at the lowest
dose.
ECG Modulated mA
ECG modulated mA provides flexible prospective control of mA values over the cardiac cycle
for ECG gated helical exams. This enables you to maintain optimal image quality for
vascular analysis coupled with dose savings for the remaining portions of each cardiac
cycle.

SmartHelical
SmartHelical is integrated into all LightSpeed systems. It decreases image noise and
increases image quality or allows a 20 – 35% decrease in mAs (with the same/original image
quality).

Automated Reviewer for Faster R&D

This specialized reading tool automatically reviewed millions of images to help GE engineers
optimize algorithms and pitch settings for the LightSpeed Ultra and is still in use today.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-34

Presented as RSNA Paper 2001

Advanced Artifact Reduction (AAR)

A low-signal magnification tool that allows low-dose protocols to be used in highly
attenuating regions. AAR is automatically enabled as needed.

Advanced Noise Reduction (ANR)

A low-signal correction algorithm that allows low-dose protocols to be used in highly
attenuating regions. ANR is automatically enabled as needed.

HiLight Matrix Detector

The HiLight Matrix Detector material was developed by GE specifically for CT scanning,
offering a 99% absorption efficiency. It also offers the capability of more slices without
increasing dose.

No Post-Patient Collimation
GE uses only pre-patient collimation, providing 44-52% better detector efficiency in
sub-millimeter mode than our competitors.

Tracking Collimator
Developed for the LightSpeed systems, the tracking collimator keeps the beam focused only
on the active detector cells, and makes sub-millimeter scanning possible with high dose
efficiency.

Protocol Wizard
Automatically adjusts affected parameters to keep image noise constant, dose optimized
and within specifications of the scanner.

Prospective ECG Gating

Reduces dose in cardiac ECG gated scanning for cardiac calcium scoring and contrast
enhanced cardiac angiography applications by triggering the X-Ray tube on only during a
specified cardiac phase or phase range for each cardiac cycles throughout the acquisition.
NOTE: * Not all features are available on each system.

Dose Reports
CTDIvol, DLP (Dose Length Product), and Dose Efficiency is displayed during scan
prescription and provides patient dose information to you. The CTDIvol, DLP and Phantom
size used to calculated dose is automatically saved once you select End Exam. It is saved as
Series 999. It can be filmed, archived, and networked after the scan is completed.
SmartStep or SmartView accumulated exposure time is displayed on the Dose Text Page.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-35

Figure 3-13 Dose Information

Dose Information Area

Dose Text
Page

Scan Technique

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-36

How Do I...
This section provides the step by step instructions for shutting down and starting up the
system. Specifically, it describes how to:
• Shut Down and Start Up the Octane System
• Shut Down and Start Up the PC Based System
• Login and Logout
• Configure Users for the System
• Enterprise Tab
• Local User Management Tab
• Group and Permission Mapping
• Use QuickSnap
• Use IQ Snap
• Use Anonymous Patient (Anon Pat. Level)

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-37

Shut Down and Start Up the Octane System

As mentioned earlier, to keep your system operating at optimal performance, you need to
shut down and start up the system every 24 hours.
1. From the desktop selection area, click [Shutdown].
A pop-up attention box appears.

2. From the pop-up attention box, click [OK].

Restart brings the system software all the way down and then automatically reboots
the system.
Shutdown brings the system all the way down to the power off prompt. You can then
turn power off to the system.
3. From the restart message box, click [Restart] or press any key on the keyboard.

As the system starts up again, there is a series of screens that appear. Please wait until you
see the "Scanning hardware reset successful" message in the current message area before
continuing. This message indicates that the system is now ready.

Quick Steps: Configure Users for the System

1. From the desktop selection area, click [Shutdown].
2. From the pop-up attention box, click [OK].
3. From the restart message box, click [Restart] or press any key on the keyboard.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-38

Shut Down and Start Up the PC Based System

To keep your system operating at optimal performance, you need to shut down and start up
the system every 24 hours.
1. From the desktop selection area, click [Shutdown].
A pop-up attention box appears.

2. From the pop-up attention box, select the option you wish to do if HIPAA is enabled.
Logout User allows enables you to login as a different user.
NOTE: For information on how to Login and Logout, refer to: Login and Logout.
Restart brings the system software all the way down and then automatically reboots
the system.
Shutdown brings the system all the way down to the power off prompt. You can then
turn power off to the system.
3. Click [OK].
4. If you selected Shutdown or Restart a series of menus and messages appear.
If Restart was selected the system automatically restarts the system.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-39

NOTE: The LightSpeed Pro16 system has software and hardware installed called SmartID.
This software verifies the tube ID at startup. If the tube ID fails, the following screen
appears. You may continue scanning however, you do need to call your Field Engineer.

If Shutdown was selected, turn off the OC power, if not already off with the power
switch on the front of the console and then turn the power switch on to restart the
system.
– Wait two minutes before cycling power on after a power interruption.
5. To power up the system push the power switch on the front of the operator console and
the system will automatically restart.

Quick Steps: Shut Down and Start Up the PC Based System

1. From the desktop selection area, click [Shutdown].
2. From the pop-up attention box, select the option you wish to do if HIPAA is enabled.
3. Click [OK].
4. If you selected Shutdown or Restart a series of menus and messages appear.
5. To power up the system push the power switch on the front of the operator console
and the system will automatically restart.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-40

Login and Logout

The login feature requires you to login to access the system and can be turned on or off by
your administrator or Field Engineer.
How your site uses this feature depends on if your site has a central user repository to which
the system is connected. Sites with networks are referred to as Enterprise systems, those
without are referred to as stand-alone systems. This feature can be used with either
configuration, although some features are more applicable to enterprise systems.
1. At the login screen, type your assigned login name.
This name is assigned by your system administrator.
NOTE: If you need to log in quickly for emergency purposes only, click [Emergency Login].
NOTE: Logging off does not prohibit other users from logging in. Logout is designed to
protect patient privacy, not stop approved users from logging in. When you or another
user logs back in, the system returns to its last known state.
2. Click in the Password area and type in your password.
3. Click [Login]

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-41

Figure 3-14 Login Window

If you have administrator privileges, when you log in you are asked if you want to
perform administrative tasks or scan.
Do not click the button next to the Enter admin screen if you are ready to scan. Click
[Login] to login to the scanning area.
4. To logout of the system, click [Shutdown].
The Shutdown window appears.
5. Click [Logout User].
6. Click [OK].
The system logs you out and waits for the next login.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-42

Quick Steps: Login and Logout

1. At the login screen, type your assigned login name.
2. Logging off does not prohibit other users from logging in. Logout is designed to protect
patient privacy, not stop approved users from logging in. When you or another user
logs back in, the system returns to its last known state.
3. Click in the Password area and type in your password.
4. Click [Login]
5. To logout of the system, click [Shutdown].
6. Click [Logout User].
7. Click [OK].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-43

Configure Users for the System

To add users to the system for use, you must be a user whom has administrative
permissions assigned to your user group in order to complete this procedure. For a brand
new system the root user will be used initially by your field engineer to add users. Normal
users do not have permission for this area. System administrators can perform a number of
tasks that affect what users can do or will see. From this screen, administrators can set up:
– How many minutes the system can be inactive before it locks the screen.
– If the Emergency button and username prompt will be displayed on the start up
screen. If the emergency prompt is not displayed, users cannot log on unless they
have a valid account.
– Coordination with the system network.
1. At the Login window (Figure 3-14), enter your login ID.
For information on how to login to the system, refer to: Login and Logout.
2. Enter your Password.
3. Click the box next to Enter admin screen.

4. Click [Login].
5. Click the [Configurations] tab.
This brings up the Configuration Screen.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-44

Figure 3-15 Configuration Tab

6. Select the choices you wish to have selected.

Inactivity Timeout Prompt. - Enter a the number of minutes before automatic
logout will occur next to the Inactivity Timeout Prompt. For example if you enter 10
minutes, the system will display the splash screen after 10 minutes of inactivity (no
keyboard entry or mouse movements), requiring you to log in. When logging back in,
the system is returned to it’s last know state.
– You can enter 0 and the system will never logout automatically.
Display Emergency Button - Click the box next to the Display Emergency Button.
The Emergency Login prompt will be displayed on the splash screen. If this prompt is
not displayed, only those users with a valid account can log onto the system.
Display Emergency Prompt - Click the box next to the Display Emergency Prompt
to require emergency users to enter their name. If you do not turn on Display
Emergency Prompt, this prompt is never displayed.
Cache Enterprise Users - allows all users previously set up on the system the ability
to log in even if the site network is down.
Enable Authorization and Enable Enterprise Authentication are used to verify who
you are and what privileges you have based on the network settings at your site.
7. Click [Apply Configurations].
8. Click [Apply Now].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-45

Quick Steps: Configure Users for the System

1. At the Login window (Figure 3-14), enter your login ID.
2. Enter your Password.
3. Click the box next to Enter admin screen.
4. Click [Login].
5. Click the [Configurations] tab.
6. Select the choices you wish to have selected.
7. Click [Apply Configurations].
8. Click [Apply Now].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-46

Enterprise Tab
The Enterprise Tab is used by the site’s IT (Information Technology) or GE Service personnel.
It provides connectivity to the site’s user database. If you do not have a network established
in your hospital or clinic, this tab will not be used.
Things to consider:
Utilize the enterprise capability whenever possible.
Make sure the enterprise groups are granular enough to restrict protocol edit access.
The inactivity timeout should be turned on.
1. At the Login window, enter your login ID.
For information on how to login to the system, refer to: Login and Logout.

2. Enter your Password.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-47

3. Click the box next to Enter admin screen.

4. Click [Login].
5. Click the [Configurations] tab.
This brings up the Configuration Screen.
6. Select Enable Enterprise Authentication.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-48

Figure 3-16 Configuration Tab

7. Click the [Enterprise] tab.

This displays the Enterprise screen.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-49

8. Enter the parameters needed.

Your Network Administrator can help with these parameters.
9. Click [Apply Configuration].
10. Click [Exit].

Quick Steps: Enterprise Tab

1. At the Login window, enter your login ID.
2. Enter your Password.
3. Click the box next to Enter admin screen.
4. Click [Login].
5. Click the [Configurations] tab.
6. Select Enable Enterprise Authentication.
7. Click the [Enterprise] tab.
8. Enter the parameters needed.
9. Click [Apply Configuration].
10. Click [Exit].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-50

Local User Management Tab

To add users to the system for use, you must be a user whom has administrative
permissions assigned to your user group in order to complete this procedure. For a brand
new system the root user will be used initially. Normal users do not have permission for this
area.
System administrators can perform a number of tasks that affect what users can do or will
see. From this screen, administrators can set up:
From the Local User Management Tab, you can:
Add a user
Assign users to groups
Assign permissions to groups
Show protected users
Change passwords
Remove users
1. At the Login window, enter your login ID.
For information on how to login to the system, refer to: Login and Logout.
Figure 3-17 Login screen

2. Enter your Password.

3. Click the box next to Enter admin screen.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-51

Figure 3-18 Enter Administrator screen

4. Click [Login].
5. Click the [Local User Management] tab.
Figure 3-19 Local User Management Screen.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-52

Table 3-5 Local User Management

Local User Management Tab

a) Click [Add User].
¾ A second screen is displayed from which you continue adding
information (Figure 3-20).
b) Enter a user name.
¾ Enter a user name.
– Add first and last name in lower case.
– The first and last name will be shown in the audit log.
c) Enter a password and retype to confirm.
Adding Users d) Click [Submit].
When you are adding users for local databases, certain rules apply. You
must use the following parameters.
Users/Groups - Lower case letters and numbers only
Users/Groups - Can not start with a number
Users/Groups - No limit on length
Passwords - Must be at least one character long, no NULL
Passwords - Can contain uppercase letters, numbers, and special
characters
All groups set up on your system are displayed on this tab. Here you
assign each user to a group. That user will then have all the privileges
assigned to the group.
Assign Users to a) Find the user’s name along the left side of the tab (Figure 3-19).
Groups b) Click the check box under the group heading.
c) Click [Apply User Settings].
d) At the Apply user settings? prompt, click [Apply now].
a) Click on a username and click [Change Password].
Changing b) In the New password field, enter a new password, and retype in
Passwords the Confirm password text field.
c) Click [Submit].
a) Click on a username and click [Remove User].
Removing a User
b) At the Remove User xxxx, prompt, click [Remove now].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-53

Figure 3-20 Add User Screen

6. Enter the changes you wish to make.

7. Click [Submit].
8. Click [Exit].
This returns you to the login splash screen.

Quick Steps: Local User Management Tab

1. At the Login window, enter your login ID.
2. Enter your Password.
3. Click the box next to Enter admin screen.
4. Click [Login].
5. Click the [Local User Management] tab.
6. Enter the changes you wish to make.
7. Click [Submit].
8. Click [Exit].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-54

Group and Permission Mapping

Groups, not individuals are assigned privileges. Individuals get their privileges from groups.
From this tab you can:
Give groups permissions
Add a group
Remove a group
Show protected groups
1. At the Login window, enter your login ID.
For information on how to login to the system, refer to: Login and Logout.
Figure 3-21 Login screen

2. Enter your Password.

3. Click the box next to Enter admin screen.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-55

Figure 3-22 Enter Administrator screen

4. Click [Login].
5. Click on the [Group and Permission Mapping] tab.
Figure 3-23 Groups and Permission Mapping tab

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-56

Table 3-6 Group and Permission Mapping table

Group and Permission Mapping Tab

There is a class of users identified as Protected Users.
Show Protected
Groups a) To view this group, click the checkbox next to Show protected
users.
All groups and permission levels set up on your system are displayed
on this tab. Here you assign permissions to a group. That user will then
have all the privileges assigned to the group.
a) Find the group name along the left side of the tab.
b) Click the check box under the permission heading.
Assigning c) Click [Apply Group Settings].
Permissions to
d) At the Apply group settings prompt, click [Apply now].
Groups
NOTE: In a non-enterprise system (one without a site network), only the
users with Administrator or Standard User permission have
unique privileges. On an enterprise system, other permission
levels can be added. The privileges extended to standard and
limited users are identical in the CT environment. The GE Service
permission is for use by GE service personnel.
a) Click [Add Group].
b) Enter a group name at the Group name to add prompt.
Add a Group – No spaces can be used.
– All group names must be lower case letters.
c) Click [Submit].
a) Click on a group name.
Removing a
b) Click [Remove Group].
Group
c) Click [Remove Now] at the Remove Group xxx prompt.

6. Enter the changes you wish to make.

7. Click [Apply Group Settings].
8. Click [Apply now].
9. Click [Exit].
This returns you to the login splash screen.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-57

Quick Steps: Group and Permission Mapping

1. At the Login window, enter your login ID.
2. Enter your Password.
3. Click the box next to Enter admin screen.
4. Click [Login].
5. Click on the [Group and Permission Mapping] tab.
6. Enter the changes you wish to make.
7. Click [Apply Group Settings].
8. Click [Apply now].
9. Click [Exit].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-58

Use QuickSnap
QuickSnap provides the ability to collect data for trouble shooting system issues. QuickSnap
is found in the Tool Bar on Image Works desktop.
1. Click [QuickSnap].
This is located on the Image Works Desktop Toolbar.
Figure 3-24 Toolbar

Selecting QuickSnap displays a pop-up menu on the right monitor.

Figure 3-25

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-59

2. Click [OK].
The pop-up menu goes away when the snap is complete.
3. Make note of the time and date of the QuickSnap for later use in debugging by the
service engineer.
NOTE: Do not initiate a QuickSnap if the system is actively collecting data with x-ray is on.

Quick Steps: Use QuickSnap

1. Click [QuickSnap].
2. Click [OK].
3. Make note of the time and date of the QuickSnap for later use in debugging by the
service engineer.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-60

Use IQ Snap
IQ Snap provides the ability to reserve the scan data files related to images with IQ issues for
further investigation.

CAUTION: Do not initiate an IQ Snap while the system is actively scanning or

reconstructing data.
The maximum number of images that can be selected for IQ Snap is 500 images. All the
images need to be in the same series. If there are IQ issues in more than one series, each
series needs to be done separately.
The corresponding scan data files will be reserved for images in the anonymous exam. You
can verify the scan data is reserved by selecting Recon Mgnt; then selecting Release Scan
Data. For Helical, the scan data reserved is for the group or scan the group the images are
related to. For Axial mode, the scan data reserved will be the axial rotation the images are
related to. For Axial mode, you may want to select a group of images on either side of the
image where an IQ issue is seen to make sure enough scan data will be available later.
1. Select the images that you want to reserve the scan data files in the Browser on Image
Works desktop.
2. Make an anonymous series or a set of anonymous images for the series with IQ issues.
If the images selected are not anonymous, a pop-up will appear instructing you to
make the data anonymous.
Figure 3-26

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-61

3. Select the anonymous Exam in the Browser.

Selecting by exam or series will only save the first image in the list. In the Anonymous
Exam highlight all the images so they will be available for investigation of the issue.
4. Click [IQ Snap] on the Tool Bar in Image Works.
Figure 3-27 Toolbar

The IQ Snap pop-up is displayed on left monitor.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-62

Figure 3-28 IQ Snap Pop-Up Window

5. Click [OK].

Quick Steps: Use IQ Snap

1. Select the images that you want to reserve the scan data files in the Browser on
Image Works desktop.
2. Make an anonymous series or a set of anonymous images for the series with IQ
issues.
3. Select the anonymous Exam in the Browser.
4. Click [IQ Snap] on the Tool Bar in Image Works.
5. Click [OK].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-63

Use Anonymous Patient (Anon Pat. Level)

Selecting Anon Pat. Level provides the ability to change the annotation level to Full or
Partial modes for Anonymous Patient by Exam, Series, or Image in Utilities on the Browser in
the Image Works desktop.
Table 3-7 Full or Partial Modes

Field Full Mode Partial Mode

Exam Number ANON or ANONYMIZED ANON or ANONYMIZED
Patient ID ANON or ANONYMIZED ANON or ANONYMIZED
Patient Name, ANON or ANONYMIZED ANON or ANONYMIZED
Exam Description ANON or ANONYMIZED Shown
Series Description ANON or ANONYMIZED Shown
Birthdate Removed Removed
Age Removed Removed
Weight Removed Removed
Operator Name Removed Removed
Site Name Removed Shown
Sex Blank Blank
Referring Physician Blank Blank
Accession Number Blank Blank

Full mode is the most HIPAA compliant mode.

Screen Save images such as Exam or Series Text pages or Dose Report text page are not
anonymized.
1. Click [Anon. Pat. Level].
Selecting Anon Pat. Level in the Tool Bar on Image Works will display one of two
messages depending on the current mode the software is set to.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-64

Figure 3-29 Full mode

2. Click [OK] to change from Full Level to Partial Level.

Click [Cancel] to remain at Full Anonymous Level.
3. Click [OK] to change from Partial Level to Full Level.
Click [Cancel] to remain at Partial Anonymous Level.
Figure 3-30 Partial mode

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-65

Figure 3-31 Image examples

Quick Steps: Use Anonymous Patient (Anon Pat. Level)

1. Click [Anon. Pat. Level].
2. Click [OK] to change from Full Level to Partial Level.
3. Click [OK] to change from Partial Level to Full Level.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 3-66

Chapter 4
Daily Maintenance

Introduction
This chapter explains preparing the system for daily use and calibrations. It contains the
step-by-step instructions to help you learn how to:
• Perform Tube Warm-Up
• Perform Air Calibrations (Fast Cals)
NOTE: When performing the tube warm-up or calibrations, it is essential that the gantry area
be clear of any objects. Any obstruction in the gantry most likely lead to artifacts in
scanned images.

CAUTION: No personnel or patients should be in the area of the gantry during warm-up
or calibrations without adequate radiation safety precautions being utilized.
For important information regarding safety, please refer to the Safety chapter.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 4-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to successfully prepare the scanner for daily
use. Some of the concepts you need to understand are:
• Performing Tube Warm-Up
• Performing Daily Calibrations
• Performing Full System Calibrations

Performing Tube Warm-Up

The system operates most efficiently within certain parameters. These parameters are
established by warming up the tube using a preset group of exposures. When the operator
performs a tube warm up at least once per 24 hour period and at any system prompt, the
tube warm-up reduces the possibility of artifacts and may aid in prolonging the life of the
tube.
NOTE: GE recommends that you warm up the tube after two hours of non-use. Only the tube
warm-up scans need to be done at this time. Tube warm-up scans are completed in
72 seconds.
Figure 4-1

NOTE: If the detectors are cold due to the A1 power being off, turn the system on and wait
two hours before performing a tube warm up. This allows the detectors to return to
their operating temperature.
NOTE: Failure to perform tube warm-ups when requested by the system may result in
serious damage to the tube and system.
NOTE: For LightSpeed Pro16, LightSpeed RT16, and LightSpeed Xtra, failure to perform
requested tube warm-up will result in reduction of the maximum mA possible for the
exam after a tube warm-up has been cancelled or skipped.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 4-2

Figure 4-2

Desired mAs can be achieved by changing rotation time (mAs = mA x rotation time).

Performing Daily Calibrations

The system requires that all kV and mA settings be within specific ranges. These ranges are
established and maintained by performing calibrations. There are two types of calibrations
within the system. Air calibrations and generator calibrations. The air calibrations and
generator calibrations are done by you as part of the daily system preparation following a
tube warm-up procedure.
NOTE: If the detectors are not at operating temperature, a message will post indicating a
time when the detectors will be at operating temperature.
NOTE: If you experience a large shift in room temperature (+/-10 degrees), it is advised that
a FastCal be done to maintain optimum IQ and once the room temperature has
stabilized another FastCal should be run.

Performing Full System Calibrations

Full system calibrations are normally performed by a qualified engineer following a tube
change or as part of preventative maintenance. Generator calibrations are a detailed and
precise tool using phantoms, detectors, and exposure factors that affects image quality and
radiation dose.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 4-3

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for warming-up the tube and performing
air calibrations. Specifically, it describes how to:
• Perform Tube Warm-Up
• Perform Air Calibrations (Fast Cals)

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 4-4

Perform Tube Warm-Up

For optimum performance and consistent image quality, perform a tube warm up if your
system has been inactive for two or more hours. The system notifies you at the three hour
time limit with a warning dialog box. It is desirable to perform a tube warm-up procedure
along with fast calibrations once per 24 hours.
1. From the scan monitor, click [Daily Prep].

The screen changes and the system displays blue colored button features for Tube
Warm-Up and Fast Cals (air calibrations) in the upper left corner of the screen. There
is also a message area in the upper right corner of the screen.
2. Click [Tube Warm-Up].
The system displays a warning dialog box. This is because the tube cooling
algorithms are established for GE specific tubes. If any other tube is installed, you are
responsible.
NOTE: Refer to the Safety chapter regarding using non-GE-specific tubes.
3. Click [Accept & Run Tube Warm-up] to proceed.
The system displays a message area detailing each slice concerning kV, mA, slice
thickness and exposure duration.
NOTE: Make sure gantry area is clear of all objects and personnel.
4. Press Start Scan on the top of the keyboard.
The system automatically performs all three tube warm-up scans. This procedure
takes approximately 72 seconds.
The system returns to the Daily Prep menu when scans are completed.
5. Click [Quit] or proceed to Fast Calibrations.
Choosing quit ends the Daily Prep screen.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 4-5

Quick Steps: Perform Tube Warm-Up

1. From the scan monitor, click [Daily Prep].
2. Click [Tube Warm-Up].
3. Click [Accept & Run Tube Warm-up] to proceed.
4. Press Start Scan on the top of the keyboard.
5. Click [Quit] or proceed to Fast Calibrations.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 4-6

Perform Air Calibrations (Fast Cals)

Air calibrations, also called Fast Cals, must be performed following a tube warm-up
procedure. These calibrations ensure consistent image quality and radiation exposure.
1. After completing the tube warm-up, click [Fast Calibration].
Once Fast calibration is selected, the system performs a Check DAS converter
board/Check collimator cal. This assures that the correct DAS converter board is
installed.
For LightSpeed Pro16, LightSpeed RT, LightSpeed RT16, and LightSpeed Xtra, a gantry
balance check is automatically run upon selecting Fast Cal. The balance check takes
about 2 minutes. A pink pop-up is displayed indicating the balance check is
in-progress.
The Cold Warm-up Scan list screen appears.
NOTE: No objects can be allowed in gantry during Fast Cals. No phantoms are used during
this procedure.
2. Press Start Scan.
This procedure can take up to 30 minutes to complete.
This function does a warm-up if the tube temperature is less than 200 degrees
Celsius and then generator cals follow.
Next, the dirty Mylar Window check is done. The mylar window must be kept clean.
Dirt could corrupt the calibration files.
If a dirty window is detected, a warning message appears and you must clean the
window and click [Clean and Retry].
Click [Continue] if mylar windows are clean and do not need attention.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 4-7

Following the initial warm-up, and dirty Mylar Window check, the warm-up screen
appears and the system does additional warm-up scans if the tube is between 474
and 590 degrees Celsius.
Auto mA, which is a generator cal runs every 18 hours.
The Warm-up II screen appears and the system does another set of warm-up scans
if the tube temperature is between 590 and 777 degrees Celsius.
The system performs the Inter connectivity Map scans that check the Detector/DAS
sub-system for problems. If the check fails, a pop-up window appears stating to call
your Service Engineer.
Then a Mini Scan is taken that checks the focal spot position. This ensures the proper
operation of the Z-Axis beam tracking.
The system finishes the Fast Cal procedure by performing the actual Fast Cal scans
from the Fast Cal screen. The default is to perform the Fast Cal scans for 120 and 140
kVp.
3. Click [Quit].
The system closes the Daily Preparation screen.
NOTE: If you experience any scan aborts with resumes during Fast Cal, be sure to notify your
Field Engineer.

Quick Steps: Perform Air Calibrations (Fast Cals)

1. After completing the tube warm-up, click [Fast Calibration].
2. Press Start Scan.
3. Click [Quit].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 4-8

Chapter 5
Multi-Detector Information

Introduction
The LightSpeed series has three different detector configurations. It is important for you to
know which detector configuration your system has. Your system should have the name
displayed on the gantry. Select your system from the list of links.
• LightSpeed™ Plus and RT
• LightSpeed™ Ultra
• LightSpeed™16, Pro16, RT16 and Xtra Systems

LightSpeed™ Plus and RT

This section explains the multiple detector hardware and detector configurations. The
step-by-step instructions to help you learn how to set these factors is located in Building
Protocols. It is important to understand how the detectors work in order to choose the
correct technical factors for the exam.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to understand multi-detector utilization. The
concepts you need to understand are:
• Hardware Components
• Detector Configurations
• Axial Configurations
• Axial User Interface
• Axial Signal Collection
• Axial Interval
• Tilt Correction
• Helical Pitch and Scan Mode Definitions
• Helical Configurations 2 and 4 Row Mode Interleaved
• Helical Configurations 4 Row Mode Interspaced
• Helical User Interface
• Guidelines For mAs
• Slice Profiles

Hardware Components
Changes have been made to several pieces of hardware that make this scanner different
from other scanners you may have used in the past. These changes are:
• Collimator
– The collimator consists of three independently controlled tungsten cams. The rotation
of the cams provides continuous variable slice thickness and Z-axis position.
• Scan Geometry
– A shorter scan geometry allows for a 20 % mAs reduction from HSA CT/I single slice
axial scan techniques. The gantry aperture is 70 cm. The Focal Spot to Isocenter
distance is 54 cm. The Focal Spot to Detector distance is 95 cm.
• LightSpeed RT
– A shorter scan geometry allows for a 20% mAs reduction from HSA CT/i single slice
axial scan techniques. The gantry aperture is 70 cm. The Focal Spot to Isocenter
distance is 60.6 cm. The Focal Spot to Detector distance is 105.87 cm. This longer
scan geometry requires ~ 30% increase in mAs compared to other LightSpeed
systems.
• Matrix Detector
– There are 16 detector cells in the Z direction. The outside four rows located on each
side of the detector cells is 1.25 mm in the Z direction. The center 16 rows are 0.625

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-2

mm in the Z direction. Up to four signals are gathered per gantry rotation. Each signal
can be collected from an individual detector row or a combination of two detectors.
Four signals can be taken from 16 cells (or four slices per rotation of the gantry).
• Other Changes
– Changes in the DAS, Slip Ring and Scan/Recon Unit have been made. There are also
new reconstruction algorithms for the multi-slice data.

Detector Configurations
The Detector Configurations are 4 X 1.25 mm, 4 x 2.5 mm, 4 X 3.75 mm, 4X 5.0 mm, 1 X 1.25
mm, and 2 X 0.625 mm.
• 4 X 1.25 mm- Four signals (axial) or interleaving or interspaced helices (helical) can be
collected from four 1.25 mm detector rows.

• 4 X 2.5 mm- Four signals (axial) or interleaving or interspaced helices (helical) can be
collected from eight 1.25 mm detector rows with two detector rows contributing to each
signal (axial) or interleaving/interspaced helix (helical).

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-3

• 4 x 3.75 mm- Four signals (axial) or interleaving or interspaced helices (helical) can be
collected from 12- 1.25 mm detector rows with three detector rows contributing to each
signal (axial) or interleaving/interspaced helix (helical).

• 4 X 5.0 mm- Four signals (axial) or interleaving or interspaced helices (helical) can be
collected from 16- 1.25 mm detector rows with four detector rows contributing to each
signal (axial) or interleaving/interspaced helix (helical).

• 1 X 1.25 mm - One axial signal can be collected from one - 1.25 mm detector row with
one detector row contributing to the signal.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-4

• 2 X 0.625 mm - Two signals (axial) or interleaving helices (helical) can be collected from
two 1.25 mm detector rows with two detector rows contributing half of each signal
(axial) or interleaving helix (helical).

Axial Configurations
The Axial Configurations are 4 X 1.25 mm, 4 X 2.5 mm, 4 X 3.75 mm, 4 X 5.0 mm, 1 X 1.25
mm, and 2 X 0.625 mm.
• 4 x 1.25 mm -1.25 mm is the minimum slice thickness. 5 mm of anatomy are covered per
rotation of the gantry.

– Four slices at 1.25 mm slice thickness each.

4i mode
1 2 3 4

– Two slices at 2.5 mm slice thickness each.

2i mode
1 2

– One slice at 5.0 mm slice thickness.

1i mode
1

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-5

• 4 x 2.5 mm -2.5 mm is the minimum slice thickness. 10 mm of anatomy are covered per
rotation of the gantry.

– Four slices at 2.5 mm slice thickness each.

– Two slices at 5.0 mm slice thickness each.
– One slice at 10 mm slice thickness.
• 4 X 3.75 mm -3.75 mm is the minimum slice thickness. 15 mm of anatomy are covered
per rotation of the gantry.

– Four slices at 3.75 mm slice thickness each.

– Two slices at 7.5 mm slice thickness each.

• 4 X 5.0 mm - 5.0 mm is the minimum slice thickness. 20 mm of anatomy are covered per
rotation of the gantry.

– Four slices at 5.0 mm slice thickness each.

– Two slices at 10.0 mm slice thickness each.

• 1 X 1.25 mm - 1.25 mm is the minimum slice thickness. 1.25 mm of anatomy are covered
per rotation of the gantry.

• 2 X 0.625 mm - 0.625 mm is the minimum slice thickness. 1.25 mm of anatomy are

covered per rotation of the gantry.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-6

Axial User Interface

The User Interface demonstrates slice thickness choices, number of images per rotation,
and retrospective options. The parameters selected to set the slice thickness and speed
determine the detector configuration.
• Axial thickness choices range from 0.625 mm thick to 10.0 mm thick.
• Number of images per rotation are 1i, 2i, and 4i.
• Retro recon choices are the result of slice thickness and number of images, i.e. selecting
one image at 5 mm thickness allows retro choices of 1.25mm thick, 2.5 mm thick, and
5.0 mm thick. Prospectively, the choices are 10.0 mm at 1i or 5.0 mm at 2i or 4i.
• Button colors change to indicate options.
– Light yellow- current selections.
– Blue with black text- Available parameters.
– Light gray with black text- Available parameters (choosing changes other
parameters)
– Light gray with gray text- Not available.

Axial Signal Collection

Four signals/channels are collected per gantry rotation. Each of the four signals can be
collected from an individual detector or a combination of two, three, or four detectors. Once
a signal from multiple detectors has been combined into a channel, it cannot be separated.
• The number of detectors combined per signal/channel affects the minimum slice
thickness.
• One, two, or four slices can be generated per slice rotation.
• The slice thickness can be changed retrospectively.
• The detector configuration at the time of acquisition affects the retrospective choices.
• Multislice axial scanning is faster than single slice helical scanners using a 1:1 pitch.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-7

Axial Interval
The interval is equal to the number of images per rotation x slice thickness, i.e., in the 4 x 2.5
mode- four images are generated, each 2.5 mm thick for a total of 10 mm of coverage per
rotation. The interval per rotation would be 10 mm.

If an interval skip were needed, the above formula would be used plus the gap desired.

Tilt Correction
Tilt correction for the multiple detectors is done automatically when axial or Helical
scanning. In axial scanning the interval changes to keep the inter slice distance equal when
the gantry is tilted. In Helical scanning, table speed increases as part of the tilt correction.
This is to keep the row data lined up for reconstruction. The image annotation reflects the
table speed.This allows the slice thickness to remain the same when measured
perpendicular to the slice edges.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-8

Helical Pitch and Scan Mode Definitions

Scan modes for helical are expressed in terms of pitch. Helical pitch is defined as the ratio of
table travel per rotation in millimeters divided by the beam collimation. Previous LightSpeed
systems expressed scan modes with names and defined pitch as table travel per rotation in
millimeters divided by the detector row width. In you can compare the old scan mode
names to the new names.
Table 5-1 Scan modes

Old Scan Mode

New Scan Mode Name
Name
HQ 1 1:1 2 Row
HQ 3 0.75:1 4 Row
HS 6 1.5:1 4 Row

Helical Configurations 2 and 4 Row Mode Interleaved

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-9

a pitch of 3:1, (i.e., 3.75 mm speed divided by three equals 1.25 or a 4 X 1.25 mm detector
configuration). This mode allows you to have interleaved helices, that is 1.5 to 3.0 times
faster than single slice helical scans, minimizes helical artifact, and gives the best detail.
• 2 Row Mode 2 x 0.625 mm.
– 2 x 0.625 detector configuration.
– 1.25 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 1.25 mm beam collimation.
– Pitch 1:1.
– Fixed 0.625 mm prospective/retrospective slice thickness.
• 4 Row Mode 4 x 1.25 mm. All images use data from all four helices.

– 4 x 1.25 mm detector configuration.

– 3.75 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 5 mm beam collimation.
– Pitch 0.75:1.
– 1.25 and 2.5 prospective/retrospective slice thickness.
• 4 Row Mode 4 x 2.5 mm. All images use data from all four helices.

– 4 X 2.5 mm detector configuration.

– 7.5 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 10 mm beam collimation.
– Pitch 0.75:1.
– 2.5 mm, 3.75 mm, and 5.0 mm prospective/retrospective slice thickness.
• 4 Row Mode 4 X 3.75mm. All images use data from all four helices.

– 4 X 3.75 mm detector configuration.

– 11.25 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 15 mm beam collimation.
– Pitch 0.75:1.
– 3.75 mm, 5.0 mm, and 7.5 mm prospective/retrospective slice thickness.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-10

• 4 Row Mode 4 X 5.0 mm. All images use data from all four helices.

– 4 X 5.0 mm detector configuration.

– 15 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 20 mm beam collimation.
– Pitch 0.75:1.
– 5.0 mm, 7.5 mm, and 10.0mm prospective/retrospective slice thickness.

Helical Configurations 4 Row Mode Interspaced

The helical configurations are: 4 x 1.25 mm, 4 x 2.5 mm, 4 x 3.75 mm, and 4 x 5.0 mm. All
configurations are acquired when in 4 row mode at a pitch of six. Table travel is 6x the
detector configuration or a pitch of 6:1, (i.e., 7.5 mm table speed divided by six equals 1.25 or
a 4 X 1.25 mm detector configuration). This mode utilizes interspaced helices and is 2x to 6x
faster than single slice helical scans. Interspaced helices mean more interpolation of data
and increased helical artifact when compared to interleaved mode.
• 4 Row Mode 4 X 1.25 mm. All images use data from all four helices.

– 4 X 1.25mm detector configuration.

– 7.5 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 5 mm beam collimation.
– Pitch 1.5:1.
– 1.25 mm and 2.5 mm prospective/retrospective slice thickness.
• 4 Row Mode 4 X 2.5 mm. All images use data from all four helices.

– 4 X 2.5 mm detector configuration.

– 15 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 10 mm beam collimation.
– Pitch 1.5:1.
– 2.5 mm, 3.75 mm, and 5.0 mm prospective/retrospective slice thickness.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-11

• 4 Row Mode 4 X 3.75 mm. All images use data from all four helices.

– 4 X 3.75 mm detector configuration.

– 22.5 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 15 mm beam collimation.
– Pitch 1.5:1.
– 5.0 mm and 7.5 mm prospective/retrospective slice thickness.
• 4 Row Mode 4 X 5.0 mm. All images use data from all four helices.

– 4 X 5.0 mm detector configuration.

– 30.0 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 20 mm beam Collimation.
– Pitch 1.5:1
– 5.0 mm, 7.5 mm, and 10.0 mm prospective/retrospective slice thickness.

Helical User Interface

Parameter selections within the thickness/speed areas on the view edit screen determine
the detector configuration. There are three main parameter selections for helical.
• Speed- Number of millimeters of table travel per gantry rotation. Speed choices range
from 1.25 mm to 30.0 mm.
• Scan Mode- Determines the speed of the table travel per gantry rotation. Scan mode
choices are 2 or 4 row.
• Image Thickness- Determines the prospective and retrospective image slice thickness.
Slice thickness choices range from 0.625 mm to 10.0 mm.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-12

• Button Colors- Change to indicate choices.

– Yellow- Current selections.
– Teal with black text (thickness)- Prospective and retrospective slice thickness choices.
– Blue with black text (Scan Mode/Speed)- Available parameters.
– Light gray with black text- Available parameters (choosing changes other
parameters).
– Light gray with gray text- Not available.

Guidelines For mAs

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-13

Selected Slice
Table
Speed 0.625
Scan Mode 1.25 mm 2.5 mm 3.75 mm 5.0mm 7.5 mm 10.0 mm
mm
(mm/rot)
Axial N/A 0.85 1.09 2.34 3.59 4.84 7.34 9.84
Helical 1:1 1.25 0.95
3.75 1.30 2.50

Helical 7.5 2.60 3.75 5.0

0.75:1 11.25 3.90 5.0 7.50
15.0 5.20 7.50 10.0
7.5 1.60 2.50

Helical 15.0 3.20 3.75 5.0

1.5:1 22.5 6.40 7.50
30.0 6.40 7.50 10.0

The indicator FWHM stands for Full Width Half Max. It is used to describe the slice thickness
represented by the image on the screen or film.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-14

LightSpeed™ Ultra
This section explains the multiple detector hardware and detector configurations. The
step-by-step instructions to help you learn how to set these factors is located in Building
Protocols. It is important to understand how the detectors work in order to choose the
correct technical factors for the exam.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-15

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to understand multi-detector utilization. The
concepts you need to understand are:
• Hardware Components
• Detector Configurations
• Axial Configurations
• Axial User Interface
• Axial Signal Collection
• Axial Interval
• Tilt Correction
• Helical Pitch and Scan Mode Definitions
• Helical Configurations 2 and 4 Row Mode Interleaved
• Helical Configurations 4 Row Mode Interspaced
• Helical Configurations 8 Row Mode
• Helical User Interface
• Guidelines For mAs
• Slice Profiles

Hardware Components
Changes have been made to several pieces of hardware that make this scanner different
from other scanners you may have used in the past. These changes are:
• Collimator
– The collimator consists of two independently controlled tungsten cams. The rotation
of the cams provides continuous variable slice thickness and Z-axis position.
• Scan Geometry
– A shorter scan geometry allows for a 20 % mAs reduction from HSA CT/I single slice
axial scan techniques. The gantry aperture is 70 cm. The Focal Spot to Isocenter
distance is 54 cm. The Focal Spot to Detector distance is 95 cm.
• Matrix Detector
– There are 16 detector cells in the Z direction. Each of the detector cells is 1.25 mm in
the Z direction at isocenter. Up to eight signals are gathered per gantry rotation. Each
signal can be collected from an individual detector row or a combination of two
detectors. Eight signals can be taken from 16 cells (or eight slices per rotation of the
gantry).

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-16

• Other Changes
– Changes in the DAS, Slip Ring and Scan/Recon Unit have been made. There are also
new reconstruction algorithms for the multi-slice data.

Detector Configurations
The Detector Configurations are 4 X 1.25 mm, 4 x 2.5 mm, 4 X 3.75 mm, 4X 5.0 mm, 1 X 1.25
mm, 2 X 0.625 mm, 8 X 1.25 mm, and 8 X 2.5 mm.
• 4 X 1.25 mm- Four signals (axial) or interleaving or interspaced helices (helical) can be
collected from four 1.25 mm detector rows.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-17

• 1 X 1.25 mm - One axial signal can be collected from one - 1.25 mm detector row with
one detector row contributing to the signal.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-18

• 8 X 1.25 mm - Eight helices collected from eight 1.25 mm detectors with one detector
contributing to each helix.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-19

• 8 X 2.5 mm - Eight helices collected from 16 1.25 mm detectors with two detectors
contributing to each helix.

Axial Configurations
The Axial Configurations are 4 X 1.25 mm, 4 X 2.5 mm, 4 X 3.75 mm, 4 X 5.0 mm, 1 X 1.25
mm, 2 X 0.625 mm, 8 X 1.25 mm, and 8 X 2.5 mm.
• 4 x 1.25 mm -1.25 mm is the minimum slice thickness. 5 mm of anatomy are covered per
rotation of the gantry.

– Four slices at 1.25 mm slice thickness each.

4i mode
1 2 3 4

– Two slices at 2.5 mm slice thickness each.

2i mode
1 2

– One slice at 5.0 mm slice thickness.

1i mode
1

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-20

• 4 x 2.5 mm -2.5 mm is the minimum slice thickness. 10 mm of anatomy are covered per
rotation of the gantry.

– Four slices at 2.5 mm slice thickness each.

– Four slices at 3.75 mm slice thickness each.

– Two slices at 7.5 mm slice thickness each.

• 4 X 5.0 mm - 5.0 mm is the minimum slice thickness. 20 mm of anatomy are covered per
rotation of the gantry.

– Four slices at 5.0 mm slice thickness each.

– Two slices at 10.0 mm slice thickness each.

• 1 X 1.25 mm - 1.25 mm is the minimum slice thickness. 1.25 mm of anatomy are covered
per rotation of the gantry.

• 2 X 0.625 mm - 0.625 mm is the minimum slice thickness. 1.25 mm of anatomy are

covered per rotation of the gantry.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-21

• 8 x 1.25 mm - 1.25 is the minimum slice thickness. 10 mm of anatomy are covered per
rotation of the gantry.

– Eight slices at 1.25 mm slice thickness each.

8i Mode
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
• 8 x 2.5 - 2.5 mm is the minimum slice thickness. 20 mm of anatomy are covered per
rotation of the gantry.

– Eight slices at 2.5 mm slice thickness each.

8i Mode
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Axial User Interface

The User Interface demonstrates slice thickness choices, number of images per rotation,
and retrospective options. The parameters selected to set the slice thickness and speed
determine the detector configuration.
• Axial thickness choices range from 0.625 mm thick to 10.0 mm thick.
• Number of images per rotation are 1i, 2i, 4i, and 8i.
• Retro recon choices are the result of slice thickness and number of images, i.e. selecting
one image at 5 mm thickness allows retro choices of 1.25mm thick, 2.5 mm thick, and
5.0 mm thick. Prospectively, the choices are 10.0 mm at 1i or 5.0 mm at 2i or 4i.
• Button colors change to indicate options.
– Light yellow- current selections.
– Blue with black text- Available parameters.
– Light gray with black text- Available parameters (choosing changes other
parameters)
– Light gray with gray text- Not available.

Axial Signal Collection

Four or eight signals/channels are collected per gantry rotation. Each of the four or eight
signals can be collected from an individual detector or a combination of two, three, four, or
eight detectors. Once a signal from multiple detectors has been combined into a channel, it
cannot be separated.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-22

• The number of detectors combined per signal/channel affects the minimum slice
thickness.
• One, two, four, or eight slices can be generated per slice rotation.
• The slice thickness can be changed retrospectively.
• The detector configuration at the time of acquisition affects the retrospective choices.
• Multislice axial scanning is faster than single slice helical scanners using a 1:1 pitch.

If an interval skip were needed, the above formula would be used plus the gap desired.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-23

Helical Pitch and Scan Mode Definitions

Old Scan Mode

New Scan Mode Name
Name
HQ 1 1:1 2 Row
HQ 3 0.75:1 4 Row
HS 6 1.5:1 4 Row
UQ 5 0.625:1 8 Row
UM 7 0.875:1 8 Row
UF 10.8 1.35:1 8 Row
US 13.4 1.675:1 8 Row

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-24

Helical Configurations 2 and 4 Row Mode Interleaved

The helical configurations are: 2 x 0.625, 4 x 1.25 mm, 4 x 2.5 mm, 4 x 3.75 mm, and 4 x 5.0
mm. In these modes, configurations are acquired at a pitch of either one or three. Table
travel is 1X the detector configuration or a pitch of 1:1 and 3X the detector configuration or
a pitch of 3:1, (i.e., 3.75 mm speed divided by three equals 1.25 or a 4 X 1.25 mm detector
configuration). This mode allows you to have interleaved helices, that is 1.5 to 3.0 times
faster than single slice helical scans, minimizes helical artifact, and gives the best detail.
• 2 Row Mode 2 x 0.625 mm.
– 2 x 0.625 detector configuration.
– 1.25 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 1.25 mm beam collimation.
– Pitch 1:1.
– Fixed 0.625 mm prospective/retrospective slice thickness.
• 4 Row Mode 4 x 1.25 mm. All images use data from all four helices.

– 4 x 1.25 mm detector configuration.

– 4 X 2.5 mm detector configuration.

– 7.5 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 10 mm beam collimation.
– Pitch 0.75:1.
– 2.5 mm, 3.75 mm, and 5.0 mm prospective/retrospective slice thickness.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-25

• 4 Row Mode 4 X 3.75mm. All images use data from all four helices.

– 4 X 3.75 mm detector configuration.

– 11.25 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 15 mm beam collimation.
– Pitch 0.75:1.
– 3.75 mm, 5.0 mm, and 7.5 mm prospective/retrospective slice thickness.
• 4 Row Mode 4 X 5.0 mm. All images use data from all four helices.

– 4 X 5.0 mm detector configuration.

– 15 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 20 mm beam collimation.
– Pitch 0.75:1.
– 5.0 mm, 7.5 mm, and 10.0mm prospective/retrospective slice thickness.

Helical Configurations 4 Row Mode Interspaced

– 4 X 1.25mm detector configuration.

– 7.5 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 5 mm beam collimation.
– Pitch 1.5:1.
– 1.25 mm and 2.5 mm prospective/retrospective slice thickness.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-26

• 4 Row Mode 4 X 2.5 mm. All images use data from all four helices.

– 4 X 2.5 mm detector configuration.

– 15 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 10 mm beam collimation.
– Pitch 1.5:1.
– 2.5 mm, 3.75 mm, and 5.0 mm prospective/retrospective slice thickness.
• 4 Row Mode 4 X 3.75 mm. All images use data from all four helices.

– 4 X 3.75 mm detector configuration.

– 4 X 5.0 mm detector configuration.

– 30.0 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 20 mm beam Collimation.
– Pitch 1.5:1
– 5.0 mm, 7.5 mm, and 10.0 mm prospective/retrospective slice thickness.

Helical Configurations 8 Row Mode

The helical configurations are: 8 x 1.25 mm and 8 x 2.50 mm. In this mode, configurations
are acquired at a pitch of either 0.625:1, 0.875:1, 1.35:1, or 1.675:1. Table travel is 5x times
faster in the 8 row mode or at a pitch of 0.625:1. The 8 row mode allows you to have
interleaved or interspaced helices, that is 5 to 13.4 times faster than single slice helical
scans.
In one helical scan eight interspaced helices are collected from eight detectors to form a
volumetric data set.
Helical weighting algorithms tailored to each pitch mode allow mAs reduction and reduce
helical artifacts compared to interspaced modes.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-27

Slice thickness is affected by the detector configuration and the helical reconstruction
algorithm. Slice thickness can be changed retrospectively.
• 8 Row Mode 8 x 1.25 mm. All images use data from eight helices.

– 8 x 1.25 mm detector configuration.

– 0.625:1 mode 6.25 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 0.875:1 mode 8.75 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 1.35:1 mode 13.5 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 1.675:1 mode 16.75 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 10 mm beam collimation.
– 1.25 mm, 2.5 mm, 3.75 mm, and 5 mm prospective/retrospective slice thickness.
• 8 Row Mode 8 x 2.5 mm. All images use data from eight helices.

– 8 x 2.50 mm detector configuration.

– 0.625:1 mode 12.5 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 0.875:1 mode 17.5 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 1.35:1 mode 27.0 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 1.675:1 mode 33.5 mm of table travel per rotation.
– 20 mm beam collimation.
– 2.5 mm, 3.75 mm, 5 mm, 7.5 mm, and 10 mm prospective/retrospective slice
thickness.

Helical User Interface

Parameter selections within the thickness/speed areas on the view edit screen determine
the detector configuration. There are three main parameter selections for helical.
• Speed- Number of millimeters of table travel per gantry rotation. Speed choices range
from 1.25 mm to 33.5 mm.
• Scan Mode- Determines the speed of the table travel per gantry rotation. Scan mode
choices are 2, 4, or 8 row.
• Image Thickness- Determines the prospective and retrospective image slice thickness.
Slice thickness choices range from 0.625 mm to 10.0 mm.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-28

• Button Colors- Change to indicate choices.

– Light yellow- Current selections.
– Blue with black text (thickness)- Prospective and retrospective slice thickness choices.
– Blue with black text (Scan Mode/Speed)- Available parameters.
– Light gray with black text- Available parameters (choosing changes other
parameters).
– Light gray with gray text- Not available.

Guidelines For mAs

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-29

Selected Slice
Table
Speed 0.625
Scan Mode 1.25 mm 2.5 mm 3.75 mm 5.0mm 7.5 mm 10.0 mm
mm
(mm/rot)
Axial N/A 0.85 1.09 2.34 3.59 4.84 7.34 9.84
Helical 1:1 1.25 0.95
3.75 1.30 2.50

Helical 7.5 2.60 3.75 5.0

0.75:1 11.25 3.90 5.0 7.50
15.0 5.20 7.50 10.0
7.5 1.60 2.50

Helical 15.0 3.20 3.75 5.0

1.5:1 22.5 6.40 7.50
30.0 6.40 7.50 10.0

Helical 6.25 1.25 2.50 3.75 5.0 7.5 10.0

0.625:1 12.5 2.50 3.75 5.0 7.5 10.0

Helical 8.75 1.25 2.50 3.75 5.0 7.5 10.0

0.875:1 17.5 2.50 3.75 5.0 7.5 10.0

Helical 13.5 1.60 2.50 3.75 5.0 7.5 10.0

1.35:1 27.0 3.20 3.75 5.0 7.5 10.0

Helical 16.75 1.70 2.50 3.75 5.0 7.5 10.0

1.675:1 33.5 3.20 3.75 5.0 7.5 10.0

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-30

Table 5-5 Slice Profile Table for Recon Plus Mode

Selected Slice
Table
Scan Mode Speed 1.25 mm 2.5 mm 3.75 mm 5.0mm 7.5 mm 10.0 mm
(mm/rot)

Helical 6.25 1.50 3.0 4.50 6.0 9.0 12.0

0.625:1 12.5 3.0 4.50 6.0 9.0 17.0

Helical 8.75 1.50 3.0 4.50 6.0 9.0 12.0

0.875:1 17.5 3.0 4.50 6.0 9.0 15.0

Helical 13.5 2.0 3.0 4.50 6.0 9.0 12.0

1.350:1 27.0 3.0 4.50 6.0 9.0 12.0

Helical 16.75 2.0 3.0 4.50 6.0 9.0 12.0

1.675:1 33.5 3.0 4.50 6.0 9.0 12.0

The indicator FWHM stands for Full Width Half Max. It is used to describe the slice thickness
represented by the image on the screen or film.

Cardiac Helical Slice Profiles

Slice profile measurements for Cardiac helical scans are complicated by the fact that a
variable helical pitch is chosen based on the patient’s heart rate. For helical pitches greater
than 2.0, the full width half max of a slice collimated at 1.25 is approximately 1.6 mm. The
full width half max of a slice collimated at 2.5 mm is approximately 3.2 mm.
When a pitch value significantly below 2.0 is chosen, the slice profile may vary significantly
from image to image in a single helical scan. The profile will depend on the location of the
prescribed image with respect to the detector locations. The variation in the slice profiles
can be understood by thinking of an axial scan. In an axial scan, an arbitrary image location
is not permitted. However, an attempt to create an image at an intermediate location could
be performed by using data from adjacent detector rows. This would result in an increased
slice profile. As the pitch becomes much less than 2.0, the helical scan data becomes more
and more like axial scan data.
At a pitch of 1.4, for example, which is the prescribed pitch for a Cardiac Segment scan with
a patient heart rate of 60 bpm and gantry period of 0.5 sec, a 35% variation in the nominal
FWHM is possible.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-31

LightSpeed™ 16 , Pro 16 , RT 16 and Xtra

Systems
This section explains the multiple detector hardware and detector configurations. The
step-by-step instructions to help you learn how to set these factors is located in Building
Protocols. It is important to understand how the detectors work in order to choose the
correct technical factors for the exam.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-32

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to understand multi-detector utilization. The
concepts you need to understand are:
• Hardware Components
• Axial Configurations
• Axial User Interface
• Axial Signal Collection
• Axial Interval
• Tilt Correction
• Helical Pitch and Scan Mode Definitions
• Helical Configurations 8 and 16 Row Modes
• Helical User Interface
• Guidelines For Building Protocols
• Slice Profiles

Hardware Components
Changes have been made to several pieces of hardware that make this scanner different
from other scanners you may have used in the past. These changes are:
• Collimator
– The collimator consists of two independently controlled tungsten cams. The rotation
of the cams provides continuous variable slice thickness and Z-axis position.
• Scan Geometry
– A shorter scan geometry allows for a 20 % mAs reduction from HSA CT/I single slice
axial scan techniques. The gantry aperture is 70 cm. The Focal Spot to Isocenter
distance is 54 cm. The Focal Spot to Detector distance is 95 cm.
• Matrix Detector
– There are 24 detector cells in the Z direction. The outside four rows located on each
side of the detector are 1.25 mm in the Z direction. The center 16 rows are 0.625 mm
in the Z direction. Up to sixteen signals are gathered per gantry rotation. Each signal
can be collected from an individual detector row or a combination of detectors.
Sixteen signals can be taken from 24 detector cells (or sixteen slices per rotation of
the gantry).
• Other Changes
– Changes in the DAS, Slip Ring and Scan/Recon Unit have been made. There are also
new reconstruction algorithms for the multi-slice data.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-33

Axial Configurations
The Axial Configurations are 16 X 0.625 mm, 16 X 1.25 mm, 8 X 1.25 mm 8 X 2.5 mm, 4 X 3.75
mm, and 2 X 0.625 mm.
• 16 X 0.625 mm - 16 signals are collected from sixteen 0.625 mm detectors with 1
detector contributing to each signal.
– 0.625 mm is the minimum slice thickness. 10 mm of coverage per rotation.

• Detector Cells can be combined to form 16 slices at 0.625 mm

– 16i mode = 1 row. Each detector cell is a slice at 0.625 mm each.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
• 8 slices at 1.25 mm
– 8i mode - eight signals from two 0.625 mm detector cells combined is 8 slices at 1.25
mm each.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

• 4 slices at 2.5 mm
– 4i mode - four signals from four 0.625 mm detector cells combined is four slices at
2.5 mm each.

1 2 3 4

• 2 slices at 5mm
– 2i mode - two signals from eight 0.625 mm detector cells combined is two slices at
5 mm each.

1 2

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-34

• 1 slice at 10 mm
– 1i mode - sixteen 0.625 mm detector cells combined is a slice at 10 mm.

• 16 X 1.25 mm - 8 signals are collected from sixteen 0.625 mm detectors with 2 detectors
contributing to each signal and 8 signals are collected from eight 1.25 mm detectors.
– 1.25 mm is the minimum slice thickness. 20 mm of coverage per rotation.

• 16 slices at 1.25 mm each

– 16i mode = 8 signals from two 0.625 mm detectors combined and 8 signals at
1.25 mm becomes 16 slices at 1.25 mm each.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

• 8 slice at 2.5 mm
– 8i mode = 4 signals from four 0.625 mm detectors combined and 4 signals from two
1.25 mm detectors combined becomes 8 slices at 2.5 mm each.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

• 4 slices at 5 mm
– 4i mode = 2 signals from eight 0.625 mm detectors combined and 2 signals from four
1.25 mm detectors combined becomes 4 slices at 5 mm each.

1 2 3 4

• 2 slices at 10 mm
– 2i mode = 1 signal from 8 detector cells combined from 0.625 mm detector and 4
detector cells combined from 1.25 mm detector plus 1 signal from 8 detector cells

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-35

combined from 0.625 mm detector and 4 detector cells combined from 1.25 mm
detector becomes 2 slices at 10 mm each.

1 2

• 8 X 1.25 mm - 8 signals collected from sixteen 0.625 mm detectors with 2 detectors

contributing to each signal.
– 1.25 mm is the minimum slice thickness. 10 mm coverage per rotation.

• 8 slices at 1.25 mm
– 8i mode - eight signals from two 0.625 mm detector cells combined is 8 slices at 1.25
mm each.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

• 4 slices at 2.5 mm
– 4i mode - four signals from four 0.625 mm detector cells combined is four slices at
2.5 mm each.

1 2 3 4

• 2 slices at 5mm
– 2i mode - two signals from eight 0.625 mm detector cells combined is two slices at
5 mm each.

1 2

• 1 slice at 10 mm
– 1i mode - sixteen 0.625 mm detector cells combined is a slice at 10 mm.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-36

• 8 X 2.5 mm - 4 signals from four 0.625 mm detectors combined and 4 signals from two
1.25 mm detectors combined become 8 slices at 2.5 mm each.
– 2.5 mm is the minimum slice thickness. 20 mm coverage per rotation.

• 8 slice at 2.5 mm
– 8i mode = 4 signals from four 0.625 mm detectors combined and 4 signals from two
1.25 mm detectors combined becomes 8 slices at 2.5 mm each.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

• 4 slices at 5 mm
– 4i mode = 2 signals from eight 0.625 mm detectors combined and 2 signals from four
1.25 mm detectors combined becomes 4 slices at 5 mm each.

1 2 3 4

• 2 slices at 10 mm
– 2i mode = 1 signal from 8 detector cells combined from 0.625 mm detector and 4
detector cells combined from 1.25 mm detector plus 1 signal from 8 detector cells
combined from 0.625 mm detector and 4 detector cells combined from 1.25 mm
detector becomes 2 slices at 10 mm each.

1 2

• 4 X 3.75 mm - 2 signals are collected from four 1.25 mm detectors along with four 0.625
detectors and 2 signals are collected from twelve 0.625 mm detectors.
– 3.75 mm is the minimum slice thickness. 15 mm coverage per rotation.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-37

• 4 slices at 3.75 mm
– 4i mode = 2 signals from six 0.625 mm detectors combined and 2 signals from two
1.25 mm detectors and two 0.625 mm detectors combined becomes 4 slices at 3.75
mm each.

1 2 3 4

• 2 slices at 7.5 mm
– 2i mode = 1 signal from 8 detector cells combined from 0.625 mm detector and 2
detector cells combined from 1.25 mm detector plus 1 signal from 8 detector cells
combined from 0.625 mm detector and 2 detector cells combined from 1.25 mm
detector becomes 2 slices at 7.5 mm each.

1 2

• 2 X 0.625 mm - 2 signals are collected from two 0.625 mm detectors with 1 detector
contributing to each signal.
– 0.625 mm is the minimum and maximum slice thickness. 1.25 mm coverage per
rotation.
– You can get 2 slices at 0.625 mm which is a image from each row or you can
combine the 2 rows and get 1 image at 1.25 mm slice thickness.
– This detector configuration is used for Sub mm and HiRes scanning.

Axial User Interface

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-38

• Button colors change to indicate options.

– Light yellow- current selections.
– Blue with black text- Available parameters.
– Light gray with black text- Available parameters (choosing changes other
parameters)
– Light gray with gray text- Not available.

Axial Signal Collection

Eight or sixteen signals/channels are collected per gantry rotation. Each of the eight to
sixteen signals can be collected from an individual detector or a combination detectors.
Once a signal from multiple detectors has been combined into a channel, it cannot be
separated.
• The number of detectors combined per signal/channel affects the minimum slice
thickness.
• One, two, four, eight, or sixteen slices can be generated per slice rotation.
• The slice thickness can be changed retrospectively.
• The detector configuration at the time of acquisition affects the retrospective choices.
• Multislice axial scanning is faster than single slice helical scanners using a 1:1 pitch.

Axial Interval
The interval is equal to the number of images per rotation x detector thickness, i.e., in the 8 x
1.25 mode - eight images are generated, each 1.25 mm thick for a total of 10 mm of
coverage per rotation. The interval per rotation would be 10 mm.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-39

Images per Rotation x Detector Thickness = Interval

10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm

First Rotation Sec. Rotation Third Rotation Fourth Rotation

If an interval skip was needed:

Images per Rotation x Detector Thickness + Gap = Interval with Skip
10 mm 10 mm

First Rotation Gap Third Rotation Gap

20 mm Interval 20 mm Interval

Tilt Correction
Tilt correction for the multiple detectors is done automatically with axial or Helical scanning.
In axial scanning the interval changes to keep the inter slice distance equal when the gantry
is tilted. In Helical scanning, table speed increases as part of the tilt correction. This is to
keep the row data lined up for reconstruction. The image annotation reflects the table
speed.This allows the slice thickness to remain the same when measured perpendicular to
the slice edges.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-40

Helical Pitch and Scan Mode Definitions

Scan modes for helical are expressed in terms of pitch. Helical pitch is defined as the ratio of
table travel per rotation in millimeters divided by the beam collimation. Previous LightSpeed
systems expressed scan modes with names and defined pitch as table travel per rotation in
millimeters divided by the detector row width.
For example: 13.75/10mm = 1.375: 1
Table Speed (13.75) divided by the Beam Collimation (10 mm) equals a Pitch of 1.375
Table 5-6 Beam Collimations

Detector Beam
configuration collimation
2 X 0.625 1.25 mm
4 X 3.75 15 mm
8 X 1.25 10 mm
8 X 2.5 20 mm
16 X 0.625 10 mm
16 X 1.25 20 mm

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-41

Helical Configurations 8 and 16 Row Modes

The helical configurations are: 8 X 1.25 mm, 8 X 2.5 mm, 16 X 0.625 mm, and 16 X 1.25 mm.
For LightSpeed RT16/Xtra systems, the helical configurations are: 16 X 0.625 mm and 16 X
1.25 mm
In the 8X mode the preferred pitches are:

0.625:1 interleaved helices

0.875:1 interleaved helices
1.35:1 interspaced helices
1.675:1 interspaced helices

In the 16X mode the preferred pitches are:

0.5625:1 interleaved helices

0.9375:1 interleaved helices
1.375:1 interspaced helices
1.75:1 interspaced helices

Interleaved helices minimizes helical artifact, and gives the best detail. Interspaced helices
has more interpolation of data and increased helical artifact when compared to interleaved
mode.
• 8 Row Mode 8 X 1.25. All images use data from all eight helices.

– 0.625:1 mode--6.25 mm table travel per rotation—5 x detector thickness

– 0.875:1 mode—8.75 mm table travel per rotation--7 x detector thickness
– 1.35:1 mode--13.5 mm table travel per rotation—10.8 x detector thickness
– 1.675:1 mode—16.75 mm table travel per rotation—13.4 x detector thickness
– The helical algorithm can reconstruct 1.25 mm, 2.5 mm, 3.75 mm, 5.0 mm, 7.5 mm,
and 10 mm slice thickness.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-42

• 8 Row Mode 8 X 2.5 mm. All images use data from all eight helices.

– 0.625:1 mode—12.5 mm table travel per rotation—5 x detector thickness

– 0.875:1 mode—17.5 mm table travel per rotation--7 x detector thickness
– 1.35:1 mode--27 mm table travel per rotation—10.8 x detector thickness
– 1.675:1 mode—33.5 mm table travel per rotation—13.4 x detector thickness
The helical algorithm can reconstruct 2.5 mm, 3.75 mm, 5.0 mm, 7.5 mm, and 10 mm slice
thickness.
• 16 Row Mode 16 x 0.625 mm. All images use data from all 16 helices.

– 0.5625:1 mode - 5.625 mm table travel per rotation—9 x detector thickness

– 0.9375:1 mode - 9.375 mm table travel per rotation--15 x detector thickness
– 1.375:1 mode - 13.75 mm table travel per rotation--22 x detector thickness
– 1.75:1 mode - 17.5 mm table travel per rotation--28 x detector thickness
– The helical algorithm can reconstruct 0.625 mm, 1.25 mm, 2.5 mm, 3.75 mm, and 5.0
mm slice thickness.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-43

• 16 Row Mode 16 X 1.25 mm. All images use data from all 16 helices.

– 0.5625:1 mode - 11.25 mm table travel per rotation—9 x detector thickness

– 0.9375:1 mode - 18.75 mm table travel per rotation--15 x detector thickness
– 1.375:1 mode - 27.5 mm table travel per rotation--22 x detector thickness
– 1.75:1 mode - 35 mm table travel per rotation--28 x detector thickness
– The helical algorithm can reconstruct 1.25 mm, 2.5 mm, 3.75 mm, 5.0 mm, 7.5 mm,
and 10 mm slice thickness.

Helical User Interface

Parameter selections within the thickness/speed areas on the view edit screen determine
the detector configuration. There are four main parameter selections for helical.
• Speed- Number of millimeters of table travel per gantry rotation. Speed choices range
from 5.625 mm to 35 mm.
• Pitch- Determines the speed of the table travel per gantry rotation. There are four pitch
selections each optimized to 8 and 16 row acquisition.
• Helical Thickness- Determines the prospective and retrospective image slice thickness.
Slice thickness choices range from .0.625 mm to 10.0 mm.
• Detector Rows- You can choose between 8 or 16 rows of detectors.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-44

• Button Colors- Change to indicate choices.

– Light blue- Current selections.
– Teal with black text (thickness)- Prospective and retrospective slice thickness choices.
– Teal with black text (Scan Mode/Speed)- Available parameters.
– Light gray with black text- Available parameters (choosing changes other
parameters).
– Light gray with gray text- Not available.

Guidelines For Building Protocols

Refer to known techniques or technique charts for proper techniques, as adequate
technical factors must be used to ensure image quality. The system is delivered containing
protocols that helps users learn adequate technical factors. The system automatically
updates mA based on changes made to rotation time, scan type, helical pitch, and slice
thickness to maintain equal image noise. There are many considerations for the anatomy
you a scanning. Timing is very important when administering contrast or for long breath
holds. Considerations are the slice thickness, coverage time, how you wish to view the data,
and what artifact can be tolerated. Trade-offs should be made to fit these considerations.
The basic rules are: Interleaved pitches will have less helical artifact especially when slice
thickness is equal to the detector. Interleaved pitches will have better slice profile when
thickness is equal to the detector.
– Interspaced to Interleaved = 30% decrease in mAs.
– Changing from Full to Plus recon allows a 15-20% decrease in mA.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-45

Slice Profiles
Because the data for a helical image is weighted over more than one rotation, to provide the
best possible image quality the nominal image slice may differ slightly from the user
selection dependent on table speed, pitch, and slice selection. The nominal FWHM slice
widths are given in the following table.
Table 5-7 Slice Thickness- Full Modes
Scan Mode Image Thickness
Helical Table
Pitch Speed 0.63mm 1.25mm 2.5mm 3.75mm 5.0mm 7.5mm 10mm
(mm/rot)
Axial N/A 0.60 1.09 2.34 3.75 4.84 7.35 9.84
0.563:1 5.625 0.63 1.25 2.50 3.75 5.00
11.25 1.25 2.50 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00
0.938:1 9.375 0.85 1.25 2.50 3.75 5.00
18.75 1.60 2.50 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00
1.375:1 13.75 0.80 1.25 2.50 3.75 5.00
27.5 1.60 2.50 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00
1.750:1 17.5 0.85 1.25 2.50 3.75 5.00
35.0 1.60 2.50 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00
0.625:1 6.25 1.25 2.50 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00
12.5 2.50 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00
0.875:1 8.75 1.25 2.50 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00
17.5 2.50 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00
1.350:1 13.5 1.60 2.50 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00
27.0 3.20 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00
1.675:1 16.75 1.70 2.50 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00
33.5 3.20 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00

Table 5-8 Slice Thickness- Plus Modes

Scan Mode Selected Slice
Helical Table
Pitch Speed 0.63mm 1.25mm 2.5mm 3.75mm 5.0mm 7.5mm 10mm
(mm/rot)
Axial N/A 0.60 1.09 2.34 3.75 4.84 7.35 9.84
0.563:1 5.625 0.75* 1.50 3.00 4.50 6.00
11.25 1.50 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00
0.938:1 9.375 0.92** 1.50 3.00 4.50 6.00
18.75 1.90 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00
1.375:1 13.75 1.0 1.50 3.00 4.50 6.00
27.5 1.90 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00
1.750:1 17.5 1.0 1.50 3.00 4.50 6.00
35.0 1.90 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00
0.625:1 6.25 1.50 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00
12.5 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00
0.875:1 8.75 1.50 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00
17.5 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-46

Scan Mode Selected Slice

Helical Table
Pitch Speed 0.63mm 1.25mm 2.5mm 3.75mm 5.0mm 7.5mm 10mm
(mm/rot)
1.350:1 13.5 2.00 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00
27.0 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00
1.675:1 16.75 2.00 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00
33.5 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00

NOTE: * Head SFOV 0.95 mm.

NOTE: ** Head SFOV 1.0 mm.
For more information on Full and Plus Recon, refer to: Full and Plus Recon Modes.
This is used to describe the slice thickness represented by the image on the screen or film.

Cardiac Helical Slice Profiles

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 5-47

Chapter 6
Building Protocols

Introduction
This chapter explains the process of building, viewing, and editing protocols. It contains the
step-by-step instructions to help you learn how to:
• Build or Edit a Protocol
• Record a Personalized AutoVoice
• Select Default Language for AutoVoice 1, 2, and 3.
• Change Pre-Set Delay for AutoVoice
• Delete an AutoVoice
• Copy and Paste Protocols
• Delete a Protocol
• Use ECG Trace
NOTE: A protocol must be selected in order to initiate the scanning sequence. Protocols are
used as a basis for routine or established procedures. Once chosen for use, any
protocol may have any factor modified as needed for individual case purposes. While
the individual case is being set up in the New Patient Area, any changes needed may
be made. This changes the protocol for that particular patient only, it does not change
the established protocol. The system comes with several common protocols ready
for you to use. If you wish to change the established protocols, you must follow the
directions outlined in this chapter for editing a protocol.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to successfully build and use protocols for
scanning. Some of the concepts you need to understand are:
• Helical/Axial/Cine
• Prospective Multiple Reconstructions (PMR)
• Full and Plus Recon Modes
• Building Protocols
• Using Protocols
• Editing Protocols
• Viewing Protocols
• System Options
• Noise Index Values
• AutomA
• SmartmA
• WideView
• Protocol Numbers
• Anatomical Selector

Helical/Axial/Cine
Helical or spiral scanning is a method of acquiring images in a continuous data set. The
x-ray tube and Digital Acquisition System (DAS) expose and rotate continuously through 360
degrees while the patient is passed through the area of exposure at a set rate of movement
(pitch). The information gathered is then reconstructed into images of the prescribed slice
thickness and interval.
Axial scanning is the traditional “step and shoot” method of acquiring data. The x-ray tube
and DAS expose and rotate one 360 degree loop. The table and patient move a preset
distance (interval) and the process is repeated.
Cine is a method of scanning that uses full or partial rotations of the gantry while gathering
input from one location over time. You may set the acquisition in groups expanding the time
to be scanned. This is especially beneficial when determining the function of anatomy and
physiology (i.e., hemangioma).

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-2

Prospective Multiple Reconstructions (PMR)

The system allows you to have additional reconstructions of your scan groups that uses any
portion of a group to change several of the scan parameters. These parameters include
Display Field of View (DFOV), Algorithms, Image Center, Start and End Locations (each group),
Image Interval, and Slice Thickness. Rather than relying on retrospective reconstruction for
additional data sets, you are able to create these sets prospectively.
For Cardiac Helical acquisitions, PMR parameters include phase % and recon types of
SnapShot Segment, SnapShot Segment Plus, SnapShot Burst, SnapShot Burst Plus and
cardiac noise reduction filters - C1, C2, C3.

Full and Plus Recon Modes

The system provides the ability to manage dose, slice profile, and helical artifact through the
Full and Plus recon modes. Full mode provides a thinner slice profile but requires 10-15%
more milliampere (mA) than Plus mode with equal image noise. Plus mode has up to a 20%
wider slice profile than Full, but requires 15-20% less mA with equal noise. At the same mA,
Plus mode provides reduced image noise. Reduction of helical artifacts can be seen with
Plus mode. Plus mode uses additional views of data to reconstruct an image. When
acquiring images in Plus mode, exposure time increases slightly to assure that enough
views are collected to reconstruct all image locations prescribed. Both modes can be used
prospectively and retrospectively including Prospective Multiple Reconstructions (PMR). Data
acquired in Plus mode can be retrospectively reconstructed in full mode or data acquired in
Full mode can be reconstructed in Plus mode.
In general, every data channel will contribute to at least one image during helical image
reconstruction. Some data channels are not used at the beginning and end of helical scan
due to the physics of multi-slice scanning and helical view weighting algorithms.
NOTE: Plus recon is only available for 8 slice and 16 slice helical scan types.
NOTE: Full mode is disabled for scans with 0.625 mm and 1.25 mm thick from 16 X 0.625
and 16 X 1.25 detectors when the SFOV used is Head or Ped Head.
During helical image reconstructions, some data channels in the middle of the helical scan
are not used if the image interval prescribed is greater than the values listed in Table 6-1
and Table 6-2 below.
For example, all data channels are used for 1.25 mm images, 0.75:1 pitch, if the image
interval is less than or equal to 1.3 mm.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-3

Table 6-1 Channel Utilization Table Recon Full Mode

Scan Mode Image Thickness in MM

Detector
Table Speed Row
Helical Pitch 0.63 1.25 2.5 3.75 5.0 7.5 10.0
(mm/rot) Collimation
(mm)
5.625 0.625 0.68 2.18 4.06 5.92 7.85
0.563:1
11.25 1.25 1.62 4.48 6.35 8.20 12.08 15.70
9.375 0.625 0.62 2.27 4.24 6.14 8.17
0.938:1
18.75 1.25 1.87 4.73 6.73 8.59 12.27 16.33
13.75 0.625 0.93 2.57 4.53 6.47 8.48
1.375:1
27.5 1.25 2.49 5.34 7.32 9.36 13.16 16.96
17.5 0.625 1.24 2.58 4.54 6.44 8.47
1.750:1
35.0 1.25 2.49 5.34 7.33 9.21 12.88 16.93
6.25 1.25 1.24 1.24 4.45 6.80 5.74 8.10 10.60
0.625:1
12.5 2.5 2.49 6.78 11.03 15.70 16.72
8.75 1.25 1.24 4.38 6.94 5.74 8.11 10.61
0.875:1
17.5 2.5 2.49 6.79 11.04 15.70 16.72
13.5 1.25 2.50 6.24 7.18 7.23 9.60 11.98
1.350:1
27.0 2.5 4.99 9.47 11.69 14.98 14.02
16.75 1.25 2.49 4.97 6.33 7.81 9.57 11.92
1.675:1
33.5 2.5 4.97 9.60 9.43 14.64 13.96

Table 6-2 Channel Utilization Table Recon Plus Mode

Scan Mode Image Thickness in MM

Detector
Table Speed Row
Helical Pitch 0.63 1.25 2.5 3.75 5.0 7.5 10.0
(mm/rot) Collimation
(mm)
5.625 0.625 1.30 2.66 4.76 7.00 9.28
0.563:1
11.25 1.25 2.68 5.22 7.48 9.65 14.20 18.57
9.375 0.625 1.65 2.73 4.98 7.36 9.48
0.938:1
18.75 1.25 3.41 5.60 7.91 10.10 14.71 19.46

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-4

Scan Mode Image Thickness in MM

Detector
Table Speed Row
Helical Pitch 0.63 1.25 2.5 3.75 5.0 7.5 10.0
(mm/rot) Collimation
(mm)
13.75 0.625 1.98 3.07 5.34 7.64 9.66
1.375:1
27.5 1.25 3.97 6.20 8.47 10.73 15.34 19.31
17.5 0.625 1.96 3.04 5.28 7.65 9.76
1.750:1
35.0 1.25 4.02 6.22 8.50 10.71 15.29 20.03
6.25 1.25 2.24 6.17 8.24 10.23 10.79 12.72
0.625:1
12.5 2.5 4.67 8.35 11.47 15.46 18.09
8.75 1.25 2.36 4.72 8.47 10.24 10.80 12.73
0.875:1
17.5 2.5 4.84 8.48 11.22 15.95 17.73
13.5 1.25 3.87 6.45 9.25 10.61 12.98 13.86
1.350:1
27.0 2.5 7.35 9.99 13.47 15.83 16.60
16.75 1.25 3.97 6.42 9.29 10.67 13.04 13.91
1.675:1
33.5 2.5 7.93 10.18 13.28 15.52 16.75

Building Protocols
The protocols are built using the Protocol Management feature. There are four protocol
selections to choose from: User, GE, Service, and Most Recent. The protocols contain all of
the scan parameters. User protocols can be built in either adult or pediatric models. There is
space for 90 protocols in each of the ten anatomical regions for adult protocols and 90
protocols for each color area of the pediatric protocols. There are nine different weight
classifications in each of the seven color areas plus three additional areas for you to build
pediatric protocols in. You have a total of 6,840 available user selected protocols to build.

Using Protocols
After entering the patient information in New Patient, you have several options for choosing
a protocol. There are four protocol selections to choose from: User, GE, Service, and Most
Recent. Once you choose the area you wish to get the protocol from, then you select an
anatomical area and the protocol you wish to use. Once the protocol is chosen, the
scanning sequence is activated. All parameters for scanning a patient can be set up in a
protocol. This saves you time when prescribing scan parameters for each patient.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-5

Editing Protocols
Once a protocol is chosen, any factor in the individual exam may be adjusted without
affecting the established protocol. If an established protocol has a factor or factors you wish
to permanently change, this can be done by clicking the [Protocol Management] button,
selecting the user tab and going to the appropriate area, entering or choosing the desired
value changes, and clicking on the [Accept] button. If your system has been configured for
HIPAA Login you must have permission to accept any changes in Protocol Management.

Viewing Protocols
To view a protocol click the [Protocol Management] button, User or GE, then select the
appropriate area or protocol. Every series can then be viewed by using the [Next Series]
button. Values may be changed to see effects on other values or other available options.
When finished, the [Cancel] button cancels any possible changes made and closes the
window. It does not cancel the established protocol. The established protocol remains as it
was built.

System Options
There are several option packages that may be purchased and installed on your system
which include setting up various protocols. You need to have some understanding of their
functions if you are to use them in your protocols. These options include: SmartPrep,
VariSpeed, Prospective Gating, Cardiac Imaging, and Auto Applications. For details on these
options refer to the specific chapters, SmartPrep (Option), VariSpeed (Option), Prospective
Gating (SmartScore) (Option), Cardiac Imaging, SmartStep (Option), SmartView™ (Option)
and Auto Applications (Option).

Noise Index Values

The system has three different tables of Noise Index values. Table 1 is configured to deliver
lower noise in the images at a higher mA value. Table 2 is configured to deliver average
noise in the images at a average mA value. Table 3 is configured to deliver higher noise in
the images at a lower mA value. The system defaults to Table 2 but can be modified by your
GE Service Engineer. The default Noise Index values for each table are optimized for the
anatomical area and slice thickness you choose to scan. The higher the Noise Index value,
the lower overall mA is required. These images are noisier with lower mA values. The lower
the Noise Index value, the higher the overall mA is required. These images have less noise.
The Noise Index value table is only used when building a protocol from Create New Series or
when Reset is selected in the Auto mA pop up.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-6

AutomA

Background
A significant factor in the quality of a CT image is the amount of x-ray quantum noise
contained in the scan data used to reconstruct the image. Most technologists know how the
choices of x-ray scan technique factors affect image noise. That is, noise decreases with the
inverse square root of the mAs and slice thickness. Noise also decreases approximately
inversely with kVp. For example, increasing the mA from 50 to 400 (a factor of 4) will
decrease quantum noise by a factor of 2 (the square root of 4). Quantum noise also
increases with increasing helical pitch; however, the exact relationship is dependent on the
details of the helical reconstruction process.
The most significant factor that influences the quantum noise in the scan data is the x-ray
attenuation of the patient section being scanned. The x-ray attenuation is related to the size
and tissue composition of the patient section. Figure 6-1 shows a distribution of patient
attenuation area values (PAA) for adult abdominal images that ranges from 19 to about 41
with a mean of 27.6 (for this patient sample set). The patient attenuation area (also called
the Patient Attenuation Indicator, PAI)1 is computed for the patient section as the square
root of the product of the sum of raw pixel attenuation values times the pixel area.
Figure 6-1 Adult abdominal patient distribution in terms of average patient attenuation

1.T Toth, Z.Ge, and M. Daley, "The influence of bowtie filter selection, patient size and patient centering on CT
dose and image quality", Poster SU-FF-I42, 2006 AAPM Conference (MedPhy, Vol 33, No.6, June 2006)

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-7

Figure 6-2 Example small patient (PAI = 20) with factor of 5 noise increase (simulated)

For a given fixed scan technique, the quantum noise varies by about a factor of 5 from the
smallest to the largest patients attenuation (PAI range of 17 to 41). Figure 6-2 shows an
example of a five times noise increase simulated for a small patient (20 PAI). With a fixed mA
scan protocol, the technologist must select the mA using a qualitative estimate of the
patient attenuation. This is may be accomplished using patients weight, diameter
measurements, body mass index, or just as a qualitative visual classification. Because these
methods provide very rough x-ray attenuation estimates and do not account for
attenuation changes within the patient region being scanned, the technologist must use a
high enough technique margin to avoid the possibility of compromising the diagnostic
quality of the images with too much noise. Since dose is inversely related to the square of
the noise, many patients are likely to be receiving more dose than necessary for the required
diagnostic quality using such manual methods.
Automatic tube current modulation: AutomA is an automatic tube current modulation
feature that can make necessary mA adjustments much more accurately than those
estimated for the patient by you and thereby can obtain a more consistent desired image
noise in spite of the wide range of patients. Since image noise variability is substantially
reduced, a significant overall patient dose reduction is possible with proper scan parameter
selection.
AutomA (Z-axis modulation) adjusts the tube current to maintain a user selected quantum
noise level in the image data. It regulates the noise in the final image to a level desired by
you. AutomA is the CT equivalent of the auto exposure control systems employed for many
years in conventional X-ray systems. The goal of AutomA is to make all images contain
similar x-ray quantum noise independent of patient size and anatomy.
The AutomA tube current modulation is determined from the attenuation and shape of
scout scan projections of the patient just prior to CT exam sequence.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-8

SmartmA (angular or xy modulation) has a different objective than Z-modulation. It adjusts

the tube current to minimize X-rays over angles that have less importance in reducing the
overall image noise content. In anatomy that is highly asymmetric, such as the shoulders,
x-rays are significantly less attenuated in antero-posterior (AP) direction than in the lateral
direction. Thus, the overwhelming abundance of AP x-rays can be substantially reduced
without a significant effect on overall image noise.
Angular modulation was first introduced on GE single slice scanners in 1994. 1, 2

AutomA Theory
AutomA is an automatic exposure control system that employs Z axis tube current
modulation and is available on all GE LightSpeed scanners. A noise index parameter allows
you to select the amount of X-ray noise that will be present in the reconstructed images.
Using a single patient scout exposure, the CT system computes the required mA to be used
based on the selected noise index setting. The noise index value will approximately equal
the standard deviation in the central region of the image when a uniform phantom (with the
patient's attenuation characteristics) is scanned and reconstructed using the standard
reconstruction algorithm.
Figure 6-3 Example noise variation with fixed mA and mA variation with AutomA with a
Noise Index setting

1. L. Kopka and M. Funke, "Automatically adapted CT tube current: Dose reduction and image quality in phantom
and patient studies," Radiology 197 (P) , 292 (1995) .
2. D. R. Jacobson, W. D. Foley, S. Metz, and A. L. Peterswen, "Variable milliampere CT: Effect on noise and low con-
trast detectability," Radiology 210(P), 326 (1996)

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-9

The system determines the tube current using the patient's scout projection data and a set
of empirically determined noise prediction coefficients for a reference technique. The
reference technique is the selected kVp, and an arbitrary a 2.5 mm slice at 100 mAs for an
axial reconstruction using the standard reconstruction algorithm. The scout projections
contain density, size and shape information about the patient. The total projection
attenuation (projection area) contains the patient density and size information and the
amplitude and width of the projection contains the patient shape information. These patient
characteristics determine how much x-ray will reach the detector for a specified technique
and hence predict the image standard deviation due to x-ray noise for the standard
reconstruction algorithm.
To predict the image noise at a given z position for the reference technique, the projection
area and oval ratio are obtained from the patient's scout. The oval ratio is an estimate of the
patient asymmetry that is determined from the amplitude and width of the projection data.
The expected x-ray noise for the reference technique (reference noise) is then calculated as
a function of the projection area and oval ratio from the scout using polynomial coefficients
that were determined by a least squares fit of the noise measurements from a set of
phantoms representing a clinical range of patient sizes and shapes.
Knowing the reference noise and the difference between the reference technique and the
selected prescribed technique, the mA required to obtain the prescribed noise index is
calculated using well know x-ray physics equations. That is, the noise is inversely related to
the square root of the number of photons and the number of photons is proportional to the
slice thickness, slice acquisition time, and mA. In the GE AutomA design, an adjustment
factor for helical pitches is also incorporated in the calculation to account for noise
differences that scale between helical selections and the axial reference technique.

AutomA FAQs
1. What suggestions do you have for a new AutomA user?
If you are not familiar with the concept of noise index (image noise) you can use the
GE default protocols as a starting point or consult the literature until you find the
highest noise index value that provides acceptable diagnostic quality. Experiment by
scanning some phantoms with different noise index values to gain some confidence.
A 30 cm diameter water phantom or a 35 cm diameter low density polyethylene
phantom have an attenuation similar to the average adult abdominal patient (27.6
PA).
Check the mA table on the scan Rx menu to see what mA is actually being used. If
you see that it is frequently at the max mA range, consider increasing the noise index
or increase the max mA limit if it is not at the maximum limit of the x-ray generator.
Each dose step decrease will increases the Noise Index by 5% and reduces the mA in
the mA table about 10%.
If you normally reconstruct images with thin sections for 3D reformatting and thicker
slices for axial viewing it is important to understand that the first prospective
reconstructed slice thickness is used for calculating AutomA. Generally you would
want to set the noise index for the thicker slice images. For example, you might want

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-10

a noise index of 10.0 for 5 mm thick images for viewing but you may also want 0.625
mm slices for 3D reformatting. If you prescribe the 0.625 mm slice recon first
followed by the 5 mm recon, AutomA will calculate the mA needed to obtain an
image noise of 10 for the 0.625 mm slices since it is prescribed first. In this case, to
avoid excessively high mA and high dose, you need to readjust the noise index using
the following approximation;

ViewingSliceThickness
RxNoiseIndexthin = RxNoiseIndexthick ×
FirstRxSliceThickness

Example:

5mm
28.3 = 10 ×
0.625

2. Why is the standard deviation I measure in the image some times different than the
noise index I selected for the scan?
There are many factors that can account for this. But, first consider that the noise
index setting you make only causes the tube current to be adjusted so that the
system projects a similar X-ray intensity through the patient to the detector. Hence it
regulates the X-ray noise or quantum noise in the scan data. The noise in the image
depends on other factors as well. The selection of reconstruction algorithms,
reconstructed slice thickness selection (if different than your prospective selection),
and the use of image space filters will also change the noise in the image. In addition,
it is very difficult to make standard deviation measurements on patient data since
the standard deviation is affected by small CT number variations of the anatomy and
by patient motion or beam hardening artifacts. Even with uniform phantoms,
standard deviation measurements will produce some variability in measured results
because of the inherent nature of quantum statistics.
Another situation that can cause significant differences between the selected noise
index and the image standard deviation is when very large patients provide
insufficient detector signal. In these cases, electronic noise sources can become the
dominant image noise source instead of X-ray noise. In these cases at various
threshold levels, special projection data dependent filters begin to be applied to help
preserve image quality. The highest kVp is recommended when excessively large
patients are to be scanned.
Another factor is how well the patient is centered in the SFOV. Image noise can
increase significantly if the patient is mis-centered. This occurs because the bow ti
filter projects maximum x-rays intensity at isocenter since this is the region of
maximum attenuation if the patient is centered. If the patient is mis-centered, there
are fewer x-rays projected to the thickest part of the patient, and hence image noise
will increase. The optimum strategy is to find the highest noise index sufficient for the
clinical task and let AutomA select the mA without using significant constraints.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-11

3. Will I get a dose reduction when I use AutomA?

AutomA will use a dose that depends on the noise index you select and the size of the
patient you are scanning. If, you do not obtain a dose reduction over a population of
patients, you may have selected a lower noise index than you really need and this
results in higher mA values on average than your fixed mA protocols. One strategy to
avoid using more dose is to set the max mA parameter to the same level as your
fixed mA protocols. This will cap the maximum dose to the same level as your fixed
mA protocol. Hence, AutomA will never be allowed to use more dose then you
previously used. However, image noise will increase in regions where the mA is
limited by the max mA selection and the IQ will degrade with increasing patient size.
The optimum strategy is to find the highest noise index sufficient for the clinical task
and let AutomA select the mA without using significant mA limits.
4. Why do my images seem noisier when I use AutomA?
AutomA will produce an x-ray intensity to maintain the noise index you select. Thus,
you may need to use a lower noise index. This may be the case if you find that the
average mA for your population of patients is generally lower than your previous
fixed mA protocols. This situation indicates you are using lower dose and hence
higher noise levels would be expected.
Certain patient images may also be noisier than your experience suggests. For
example, your experience tells you to expect significantly lower noise in thin patients
than obese patients. Since AutomA makes the image noise approximately the same
for all patients, you may have to re-learn what to expect. What is most important, is
to find the highest noise index that allows you to make a confident diagnosis for the
clinical problem since this results in the lowest patient dose.
If you desire somewhat lower noise in small patients, you may want to create Small,
Nominal, and Large patient protocols. You can use the slightly a slightly lower noise
index for the small patients and a slightly higher noise index for large patients.
A conditional noise limiting strategy you can employ, is to increase the low mA range
parameter. If you find that images are generally not acceptable to you below some
minimum mA value, then you may set this value as the low mA range limit. This will
prevent AutomA from using lower mA values than you desire. Note, however, that this
defeats the purpose of AutomA and causes the image noise to decrease below the
selected noise index and thereby increases the dose.
Yet another possibility for higher noise than you might expect is if you are looking at
multiple reconstructed images that have thinner slices than the prospective scan Rx
slice thickness. AutomA uses prospective slice thickness as a factor when the mA
table is generated. You need to be sure the noise index is set for the first prospective
image based on image thickness you will use for axial image viewing (see FAQ 1). This
caveat applies equally for fixed mA as well as AutomA scanning.
Higher noise images can also occur when patients are not well centered in the scan
field of view. The bowtie filter attenuation increases with distance away from
isocenter. Hence the thickest part of the patient should be approximately centered in
the scan field of view. Otherwise image noise will increase since the patient thickness

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-12

adds to the bowtie filter thickness. This is especially important for highly asymmetric
anatomy such as through the shoulders. Again, this effect is no different with AutomA
than with fixed mA.
Recognize also that there are some obese patients that exceed the capabilities of the
tube and generator to satisfy the selected noise index. This is also no different than
fixed mA scanning. For such obese patients, one strategy is to select a higher kVp
setting when possible.
5. Why is the mA that is annotated on the image sometimes slightly different than the mA I
see in the mA table?
The mA displayed on the image is determined by measuring the generator mA during
the scan and averaging the measured result over the total number of views used to
reconstruct the image. The number of views used to produce the image may be more
than one gantry rotation for a helical scan. Hence the annotated value is a
combination of the mA table values that depends on how many views from each
rotation were used for the image. In addition, the generator is automatically
adjusting the filament current to account for changing conditions during the scan to
keep the mA within the desired tolerance of the commanded mA table. For example,
this is why you may see an mA value of 41 in the image where the mA table indicated
40.
6. I understand that noise in the image noise changes with reconstruction parameter
selections, but why is the noise sometimes different when I retro reconstruct the same
scan data at a different display field of view?
When you select a reconstruction algorithm, the system may sometimes re-adjust
the actual filter kernel. This readjustment will change the image standard deviation.
This will happen if the display field of view selection exceeds a certain size and is
especially apparent with higher resolution algorithms such as bone and edge. The
change in kernel is required when the DFOV selection makes the pixel size too large
to support the intended spatial resolution. This characteristic is independent of
AutomA.

AutomA Interface
AutomA is selected for a group of scans. When you select AutomA (Figure 6-6), this enables
the feature. The system uses the data collected from the most recent Scout scanned for the
exam.
When possible, the kVp setting for the scout should be taken using the same kVp that the
axial or helical scan is taken.

Function Description
Default or baseline Noise Index for the given protocol.
Any changes to Dose Steps, Slice Thickness or Noise
Reference Noise Index
index are referenced to this value. This value can only be
prescribed while in protocol management.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-13

Function Description
Default or baseline Noise Index for the given protocol.
Noise Index Any changes to Dose Steps or Noise index are referenced
to this value.
Adjusts Noise Index by steps of 5%. Dose steps can be
increased or decreased + values decrease image noise
thus increasing required mA. Minus values increase
Dose Steps
image Noise index, thus decreasing required mA. A Dose
step value of 0 indicates that the prescribed Noise index
is equal to the Reference Noise index for the protocol.
Resets the Reference Noise Index to the GE Target Noise
Reset Index Default for the anatomical area and slice thickness
chosen in the protocol.

The Noise Index value displayed is updated automatically as you change the Relative Dose.
The Noise Index change is relative to the Default Noise Index. You can prescribe your own
Noise Index value. The mA range area is used for entering a Min and Max mA value. The Max
mA value sets the clipping mA value. This mA value can also determine the focal spot size.
You need to enter the proper mA value for the focal spot size you wish to use.
Table 6-3 Focal Spot Size

Performix Performix Pro

Large Focal Large Focal
kV Small Focal Spot Small Focal Spot
Spot Spot
Min mA Max mA > mA Min mA Max mA > mA
80 10 300 300 10 300 300
100 10 240 240 10 310 310
120 10 200 200 10 335 335
140 10 170 170 10 335 335

When AutomA is selected, the mA annotation on the view/edit screen is annotated with the
maximum mA in the mA range prescribed for the scan group. See Figure 6-4. You can view
the list of mA values that will be used for each rotation for the acquisition if you select [mA
Table].This is a read-only table showing the mA for each rotation or scan separated by
groups. Refer to Figure 6-5. AutomA is automatically turned off and can not be enabled if the
orientation for the series does not match the orientation for the scouts. The calculation of
the mA table is based on the last scout so the series much match the scout. If there is no
scout, AutomA will also be unavailable.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-14

Manual mA
The Manual mA mode allows you to scan without enabling the AutomA mode. You can enter
a mA value for each group prescribed. When building protocols, make sure the Manual mA
value field has a reasonable mA entered in it even if the protocol will use AutomA in case
AutomA is turned off.
The Manual mA mode allows you to scan without enabling the AutomA mode. You can enter
a mA value for each group prescribed.
Figure 6-4 mA Annotation

Max mA Selected

Noise Index

Figure 6-5 mA Table

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-15

Figure 6-6 mA Control Window

Reference Noise Index

Default or baseline Noise Index for the given protocol. Any changes to Dose Steps or Noise
index are referenced to this value. This value can only be prescribed or changed while in
protocol management.

Noise Index
The noise level required for the study. As the Noise Index increases the required mA
decreases and image noise increases.
Dose Steps
Adjusts Noise Index by steps of 5%. Dose steps can be increased or decreased. Plus values
decrease image noise thus increasing required mA. Minus values increase Noise index, thus
decreasing required mA. A Dose step value of 0 indicates that the prescribed Noise index is
equal to the Reference Noise index for the protocol.

Reset
Reset returns the Reference Noise Index to the GE Target Noise Index default values for the
anatomical area and slice thickness chosen in the protocol. Reset is available while in
Protocol Management.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-16

SmartmA
SmartmA is variable mA in the X-Y direction. For each rotation along Z, the system calculates
each X and Y mA value from the ratio of the long and short axis of the patient and is shown
in the SmartmA head and body examples (Figure 6-7).
Figure 6-7 SmartmA Tables

Head Table Body Table

The low and high mA are calculated from the long and short axis ratio. The SmartmA tables
(Figure 6-7) show examples of low and high mA values per scan.
The noise increase from using SmartmA compared to AutomA is no more than 7 %. The dose
reduction from using SmartmA is approximately 15 %.
Figure 6-8 Dose Tables
AutomA Dose Information SmartmA Dose Information

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-17

SmartmA modulates four times during a rotation. Because of this the mA varies four times
during each exposure. The mA ramp up time is about 100 milli-seconds.
Figure 6-9 Modulation Example

Quadrant 1

Quadrant 4 Quadrant 2

Quadrant 3

The images are annotated with a tilde sign (~) marking next to the noise index number
indicating SmartmA was used (Figure 6-10).
Figure 6-10 SmartmA Annotation
AutomA Annotation SmartmA Annotation

NOTE: SmartmA is only available on LightSpeed 5.X Gantries.

You can select SmartmA by clicking on the mA value on the view/edit screen.
NOTE: AutomA must be selected first, then SmartmA is available.
NOTE: AutomA and SmartmA will be disabled if patient orientation does not match the
orientation of the scout. Once the orientation for the series matches the scout,
AutomA and SmartmA can be selected.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-18

Figure 6-11 View/Edit Screen

The mA control window opens and you can click on [SmartmA].

Figure 6-12 SmartmA Control Window

Manual mA
The Manual mA mode allows you to scan without enabling the SmartmA mode. You can
enter a mA value for each group prescribed.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-19

Reference Noise Index

Default or baseline Noise Index for the given protocol. Any changes to Dose Steps or Noise
index are referenced to this value. The Reference Noise Index value can only be prescribed
while in protocol management.

Noise Index
The noise level required for the study. As the Noise index increases the required mA
decreases and image noise increases.

Dose Steps
Adjusts Noise Index by steps of 5%. Dose steps can be increased or decreased. Plus values
decrease image noise thus increasing required mA. Minus values increase Noise index, thus
decreasing required mA. A Dose step value of 0 indicates that the prescribed Noise index is
equal to the Reference Noise index for the protocol.

WideView

LightSpeed RT, SDAS/MDAS 4 slice scanners, LightSpeed RT16, and

LightSpeed Xtra Systems
The WideView feature is an algorithm that allows a CT image to be reconstructed with a
Display Field of View (DFOV) that is larger than the Scan Field of View (SFOV), defined by the
detector arc. For LightSpeed, the SFOV is 50 cm and, therefore, the maximum DFOV has also
been 50 cm. With the WideView option, the maximum DFOV can be greater than 50 cm.
When using graphic Rx the scout image will be automatically minified when the DFOV is 40
cm or greater. This minification will keep the DFOV handles for Graphic Rx visible.
When the WideView option is installed, a DFOV of up to 65 cm may be entered in
prospective or retrospective reconstructions. Although the maximum DFOV will be 65 cm,
the default DFOV shall be 50 cm when Large SFOV is chosen. The algorithm is used when a
DFOV of 50.1cm or greater is entered.
NOTE: WideView is a standard feature on the LightSpeed RT, LightSpeed RT16, and
LightSpeed Xtra systems. For all other 4 and 8 slice LightSpeed systems, WideView is
a purchased option. WideView is not available on LightSpeed16 or LightSpeed Pro16
systems.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-20

Since the image quality in the area beyond the SFOV may not be as good as that within the
SFOV, you are alerted when the WideView algorithm is being used. The DFOV entry becomes
"orange" when a value greater than 50.0 cm is entered and a message in the message box
is displayed informing you that the WideView reconstruction will be used ("WideView
processing enabled").
If a DFOV value greater than 65 cm is entered, the value will be changed to 65 cm and
highlighted in orange. A message is displayed in the message box informing you that "DFOV
set to maximum value available with WideView processing”.
The [Recon Type] field updates with the algorithm you have chosen and it is annotated with
WideView on in the column.
Recon time increases when Wide View mode is selected.
Figure 6-13 Recon Type Choices

NOTE: Edge algorithm is not available with the WideView option.

A goal of the WideView algorithm is to help the radiation therapy planner to accurately
(within a few millimeters) locate the air/skin boundary.
The image quality in the region beyond the Scan FOV is not expected to be as good as that
within the Scan FOV, and is not intended for diagnostic imaging.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-21

Pediatric Protocols
The [Pediatric] button brings up a screen that allows you to select an anatomical area. The
anatomical areas are indicated by text.
Figure 6-14 Pediatric Selector

Once the anatomic area is selected, a window containing rainbow bars appears. This
indicates you are using weight based protocols designed for pediatrics. Choose the color
category for your patient and the protocol list is displayed accordingly. If there is no
weight-specific protocol associated with the selected anatomical area, the Protocol
Category window appears (Figure 6-16). The default weight/color selector will show the
patient weight entered in the patient information screen, or the last weight/color selection (if
no patient information was entered). If you enter a patient weight on the patient information
screen and select a color/weight selector that is not consistent with the entered information,
an error message appears (Figure 6-15) and you must acknowledge that you have chosen a
protocol that does not match the patient size. Selectors on the color/weight bar are labeled
with the zone ranges for weight and length, with the word of the selected color and with the
weight/color zone number as indicated in Table 6-4. Weight-specific protocols are enforced
for all anatomical areas except head, orbit and miscellaneous. Protocols in the head and
orbit categories are usually defined based on patient age as opposed to patient
weight/height.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-22

Table 6-4 Color Code Table

Zone Zone
Zone Weight (kg) Zone Weight (lb) Zone Length (cm)
Number Color
1 Pink 6 - 7.4 13 - 16.4 59.5 - 66.5
2 Red 7.5 - 9.4 16.5 - 20.4 66.5 - 74
3 Purple 9.5 -11.4 20.5 - 25.4 74 - 84.5
4 Yellow 11.5 - 14.4 25.5 - 31.4 84.5 - 97.5
5 White 14.5 - 18.4 31.5 - 40.4 97.5 - 110
6 Blue 18.5 - 22.4 40.5 - 49.4 110 - 122
7 Orange 22.5 - 31.4 49.5 - 69.4 122 - 137
8 Green 31.5 - 40.4 69.5 - 88.4 137 - 150
9 Black 40.5 - 55 88.5 - 121 --

Figure 6-15 Protocol Category Warning

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-23

Figure 6-16 Protocol Category Window

Protocol Numbers
The protocol numbering systems enable you to easily enter a protocol number in the patient
information screen when you are setting up a scan. The first number indicates the protocol
area you are using. The second number indicates what weight zone you are using. This
shows up on pediatric protocols. The third number indicates which protocol you selected
out of that area. If only two numbers are displayed, this means you are using an adult
protocol and the second number indicates which protocol you selected from that area
(Figure 6-17).

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-24

Figure 6-17 Protocol Numbers

Area Number Color Weight Zone Number Protocol Number

For pediatric scans only
GE Area Numbers
Adults Peds
21-30 31-40

User Area Numbers

Adults Peds
1-10 11-20

Anatomical Selector
The Anatomical Selector area lets you decide if you want to
use a GE defined, User defined, Service defined, or a Most
Recent protocol. GE defined protocols are a list of protocols
the factory installs on your system. These protocols have been
used by physicians and radiologists on this type of system and
have worked well. User protocols are a list of protocols that you and your radiologist or
physician have built into your system. These protocols are custom protocols that your
radiologist or physician likes to use. Service protocols are used when your GE Service
Engineer needs to perform routine maintenance on your system. The Most Recent protocol
tab is an area where the parameters from the last 90 exams scanned are stored. Protocols
under GE and Most Recent tabs cannot be modified or deleted, but they can be copied into
the user selector in any of the adult or pediatric anatomical areas.

ECG Trace (Option)

ECG Trace provides the capability to display and view the ECG waveform on the operator
console. The ECG waveform is sent from the IVY 3150/IVY 3100 with Ethernet or IVY
3150-A/IVY 3100-A with Ethernet cardiac to the operator console. When the IVY monitor is
set in Ethernet mode and Ethernet cable connection exists between Ivy Monitor, gantry and
Operator console. The ECG Trace display is defaulted to off for Scout Scans unless enabled
on in a protocol. Then the ECG Trace is displayed in minimized format. Select the ECG Trace
button below the Gating button to enable display of the ECG Trace. The ECG monitor must
be set to Ethernet mode, not floppy mode for the ECG trace to display.
The ECG Trace display can be minimized or expanded (maximized) by clicking the size bar at
the front of the ECG Trace display.
The trigger point on the ECG Trace for each R-R interval will be displayed in red, the point or
percent in the R-R where the images are reconstructed is displayed in white, (Figure 6-18).

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-25

ECG Traces can be saved to CD-Rom using the Save ECG Trace feature in the Tool Bar on the
Image Works desktop when the IVY monitor is connected to the gantry, set in Ethernet mode
and ECG Trace/Viewer option is installed.
The ECG Trace for the last 500 cardiac gated series is stored on the system.
Figure 6-18 ECG Trace (waveform display)
Re-size Icon

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-26

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for building, viewing, or editing protocols.
Specifically, it describes how to:
• Build or Edit a Protocol
• Record a Personalized AutoVoice
• Select Default Language for AutoVoice 1, 2, and 3.
• Change Pre-Set Delay for AutoVoice
• Delete an AutoVoice
• Copy and Paste Protocols
• Delete a Protocol
• Use ECG Trace

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-27

Build or Edit a Protocol

Every scan must start by selecting a protocol. Protocols save time by using preset
established factors, allowing you to start the scanning sequence as soon as possible. All
aspects of the exam including scanning, filming, and storing images can be established as
part of your protocols. Use the following instructions to complete new protocols or edit
existing protocols within the system.
1. From the scan monitor, click [Protocol Management].

The AutoVoice and Protocol Management window appears.

2. From the window, click [Protocol Management].
You now see the anatomical selector.

NOTE: There is space for 90 protocols in each of the Adult anatomical areas. In the Pediatric
anatomical areas, there is space for 90 protocols each in Head, Neck and
Miscellaneous. For the seven color coded Pediatric anatomical areas, there is space
for 90 protocols in each of the nine different weight classifications. You have a total
of 6,840 available user selected protocols to build. If you wish to create, edit, or view
protocols in the pediatric selector, click [PEDIATRIC]. To return to the adult protocols,
click on the adult model.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-28

3. Click [User].
This is used to build custom protocols for your site.
4. Select an anatomical region.
A space for up to 90 protocols opens (there may be existing protocols listed).
You can click the arrow up or down to view a list of 15 protocols at a time.
You can use the scroll bar to move quickly through all 90 protocols.
5. Click [New] or [Edit].
Select [New] if you have not built this protocol before.
Select [Edit] if you are making changes to an existing protocol.
6. Select an open area in the list and enter the name of protocol.
Any name may be used. It is helpful if you choose a name that reflects what the
protocol is meant to be used for (e.g., Routine Head, Trauma Spine, Chest/Abd/Pelvis).
If the protocol being built is to be the default (most commonly used) protocol, click
[Set As Default]. Only one protocol in each list can be set as the default.
NOTE: Default protocols can not be set in the pediatric color coded areas.
7. Select the type of series to be built from the window that appears.
In most cases, a scout series is built first because this allows for more precise
scanning. A scout must be programmed first if it is to be displayed automatically with
Show Localizer.
Auto mA and Smart mA require a scout to be acquired in order to generate a mA
table.
8. Click [OK].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-29

9. Set the proper patient position.

Place the mouse cursor at the head or feet of the model and click once to change
orientation. Place cursor over the abdomen area and click once to rotate model 90
degrees.
10. Select anatomical reference point.
Click [Anatomical Reference] and a window appears from which you may choose
one of the preset center points, or designate with a two letter abbreviation your
centering or 0 point.
11. Click [AutoStore] and/or [AutoTransfer].
Selecting [Auto Store] automatically transfers the image to a local storage device
such as Magnetic Optical Disk (MOD) media or remote storage device such as PACS,
when [End Exam] is selected.
Selecting [Auto Transfer] automatically sends images to one or up to four
destinations. The transfer can occur by image, by series or by exam
– When selecting By Image, the transfer occurs in groups of 10 images. Only
prospective images are transferred when using this mode.
– If transfer By Series is selected, the entire series is transferred when [Next Series]
or [End Exam] is clicked.
– If transfer By Exam is selected, the entire exam is transferred when [End Exam] is
clicked. The series of images that are contained in the exam are transferred. This
means any Screen Save, Reformat, 3D, Navigator, Dentascan, Retrospective,
DMPR, Direct 3D, Neuro3D Filter images created before the exam is ended are
transferred. The Dose Report is automatically sent when Auto Transfer By Exam
is selected.
Selecting [Dose Report Auto Transfer] automatically transfers the dose information
to up to four different locations. [Dose Report Auto Transfer] is used to transfer the
dose information when Auto Transfer By Image and By Series are being used
opposed to By Exam.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-30

NOTE: If you do not want the Dose Text Page auto transferred, select Auto Transfer By
Image or By Series. Do not select Auto Transfer by Exam.
12. Set Scout Parameters.

NOTE: Scout Parameters include Scout Image number, Start and End Locations to set the
length of the scout, technique factors of kV and mA, scout plane, and use of the
AutoVoice feature. Selecting an individual cell under a parameter column allows you
to adjust only the factor in that group. Selecting the parameter column from the top
row highlights all of the factors directly below the selected column and allows you to
adjust that factor in all of the images.
The number of scouts may be added to or deleted by selecting the scout number and
using the [Add Scout] or [Delete Scout] buttons.
Start Loc./ End Loc. are to set the amount of anatomical coverage needed for the
scout. The S designation stands for superior (toward the head) from the center point.
The I designation stands for inferior (toward the feet) from the center point,
regardless if the patient is oriented head first or feet first to the gantry.
Technique Factors for scout images are set low because scouts are normally used for
planning purposes only. 120kV and a low mA are common factors.
Scout Plane designates what type of scout is being acquired. Zero designates an AP
(supine) or PA (prone) scout. Ninety designates a lateral scout.
AutoVoice is used if you want the system to give the patient breathing instructions
while the scouts are acquired.
– Click [AutoVoice] and a window appears.
– Click the desired pre-recorded message.
– Select Pre Set Delay if desired.
NOTE: The Auto Voice language displayed at the time the systems is booted up is the
defaulted language set by your Field Engineer initially.
If the Auto Voice Language is changed to use one of the preset autovoice
multi-language messages, the system will return to the default language once you
have clicked on [End Exam].
Auto Transfer by Series automatically transfers the series to the selected
destination.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-31

Figure 6-19 Scout Window

13. Click [Create New Series].

A window appears.
In most cases, you do not need another scout series, although this is an option.
14. Click [Axial] and [Create After].
This places the axial (or helical) series to follow the scout series in the protocol.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-32

15. Set Scan Parameters.

NOTE: The Scan Parameters include Patient Position, Anatomical Reference point,
AutoFilm Setup, AutoStore, AutoTransfer, Show Localizer, and Series Description.
The data acquired for all other series is different than data acquired for scout images.
This means that features such as Patient Position and AutoVoice must be set or
activated again for this series.
Set the proper patient position by placing the cursor at the head or feet of the model
and click to change the head first/feet first orientation. Place the cursor over the
abdominal area of the model and click to rotate the model in 90 degree increments.
Click [Anatomical Reference] and a window appears where you can choose one of
the preset center points or designate with a two letter abbreviation your center or 0
point. This should be set the same as your scout images.
Click [AutoFilm Setup] and a window appears where you may establish how the
filming is going to be set up.
NOTE: refer to the Set the Film Parameters for Automatic Filming task for more details.
Set Auto Store/AutoTransfer. If these features were set for the scout image, they are
automatically set for this series. If they were not selected for the scout series, they
may be activated in this series and the scout image(s) are included in the
storage/transfer. Click [AutoStore] and it automatically sends the image data to the
system storage device. Click [AutoTransfer] and a window appears. Click the IP
address to which the images are to be sent, click [OK].
Click [Show Localizer]. This will display a scout image on the display monitor in a 1 on
1 format with graphic representation of the start and end locations as well as
displaying a line for each image that is reconstructed. This allows for graphically
adjusting the protocol (adding or deleting slices).

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-33

16. Set Technical parameters.

NOTE: Technical Parameters include Scan Type (axial/helical/cine-full/segmented/Cardiac

Option), Start and End Location, Number of Images, Thickness Speed (collimation),
Image Interval, Gantry Tilt, Scan Field of View (SFOV), kV, mA, Total Exposure Time,
Prep Group, interscan delay (ISD), Breath-Hold, Breathe Time, Auto Voice,
Voice/Lights/Timer. Selecting an individual cell under the parameter column allows
you to adjust only the factor for that group. Selecting the parameter column from the
top row highlights and change the parameters in all groups.
The Scan Type can be Axial, Helical, or Cine.
NOTE: If your scanner has CardIQ SnapShot cardiac option installed, the Scan Types will
include SnapShot Segment, SnapShot Burst, SnapShot Burst Plus and SnapShot
Pulse.
NOTE: If your system has the option VariSpeed installed the rotation times will include 0.4
seconds, 0.5 seconds, 0.6 seconds, 0.7 seconds, and 0.9 seconds.
Axial scans may be acquired at gantry rotation times of 0.8 second, 1, or 2 seconds.
NOTE: If your system has the sub 0.4 second option installed, the 0.4 second time is added
to the other scan times.
NOTE: If your system has the SnapShot option installed, the rotation times will include 0.425,
0.45, and 0.475 seconds.
NOTE: The LightSpeed RT support gantry rotation times of 1 second, 2 seconds, 3 seconds,
or 4 seconds.
Typically, axial scans are used for routine head studies using a two second rotation
time. Axial scans may also be done as a sub-millimeter (0.625 mm) slice or with a
single 1.25 mm slice, which is useful for studies such as Hi-Res chests.
Helical scan type is used most frequently for a wide range of exam types.
NOTE: LightSpeed RT supports 1 second rotation speed.
Cine mode is used when one location needs to be scanned over a period of time such
as for a hemangioma.
NOTE: LightSpeed RT supports 1 second rotation speed.
Start and End Locations are set in millimeters superior to, and/or inferior from, the
anatomical reference point. The locations designate the points of anatomy to be
scanned. If specific numbers are known, select the correct button (Start or End) and
enter the value. The numbers must be preceded by the correct designation of “S” for

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-34

superior (towards the head) from the centering point, or “I” for Inferior (towards the
feet). The easiest way to set Start and/or End Locations is to graphically adjust
them. The slices are represented as a group of lines on the scout image. The start
location is demonstrated with a solid square in the middle of a line. The end location
is demonstrated by an open square box in the middle of a line.
– To adjust, click and drag the appropriate square to the desired location. When the
mouse is released, the system automatically updates the value to the nearest
0.25 mm in the start or end location, depending on which value was adjusted. If
the entire group of lines is to be adjusted, click and drag the X annotation in the
center of the lines to move all the lines together.
– + and - may be used as a substitute for S and I. S equals + and I equals -.
The Number of Images is determined by the combination of Start and End Location,
Slice Thickness, and Image Interval and set automatically by the system.
– If a specific number of images are needed, select that cell and enter the desired
value. The system automatically adjusts the End Location for you and highlight
the End Location area in orange to let you know a change was made to the
parameters.
– To set the slice thickness and speed, click [Thick/Speed] and a window appears.
Choose a slice thickness of 0.625 mm, 1.25 mm, 2.5 mm, 3.75 mm, 5.0 mm, 7.5
mm, or 10 mm. For axial scans, you choose between 1i, 2i, 4i, 8, or 16i depending
on system configuration. For helical, you choose between 2, 4, 8 or 16 Row Modes
depending on system configuration.
NOTE: For details on the different modes, refer to the Multi-Detector Information chapter for
your system.
The Image Interval is for helical scans only and is automatically set to match the
slice thickness by the system. This is known as contiguous (back to back) scans. If an
overlap or spacing (skip) is desired, click the image interval cell and enter the correct
value.
NOTE: If any of the values in Start/End Location, Number of Images, Slice Thickness, or Image
Interval are changed from the original value, the system automatically adjusts any
necessary values to maintain the scan. For example, if the number of images is
decreased, the system automatically adjusts the end location. The system highlights
any adjusted value in orange and changes any necessary graphic representations
on the scout. Refer to the Getting Started chapter for details.
The Gantry Tilt can be set manually or graphically to a maximum of 30 degrees in
half degree increments. The most common way to set the tilt is graphically. On a
lateral scout, you see circular handles on the Start and End locations.
– Click and drag the circle to adjust the lines on the scout to the desired tilt. If a
specific tilt is wanted, select the feature button and enter the desired value.
– C may be used in the Tilt field. Typing C enters the current gantry tilt in degrees.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-35

NOTE: Maximum degree of tilt depends on the height of the table and interaction with
interference (collision) matrix. Use the Tilt/Table Travel button on the gantry keypad
to observe the min/max values for gantry tilt and table travel for the current
landmark.
The SFOV is set by selecting the SFOV parameter column or cell. A window appears
and the different SFOV values are there. The values are: Pediatric Head, Head, Small,
and Large. The Pediatric Head and Head SFOV are 25 cm in diameter with special
processing, Iterative Beam Operation - IBO noted in image annotation after the
reconstruction algorithm, to correct for beam hardening effects. The Pediatric Head
SFOV is limited to a technique that cannot exceed 24kW. The Large SFOV is 50 cm.
Click the appropriate SFOV or click cancel and the window closes.
To set the kV, select [kV] and a window appears. The kV values of 80, 100, 120, and
140 are displayed. Select the desired factor or cancel and the window closes. The
most common kV factor used for routine scanning is 120kV.
To set the mA, click [mA]. Any mA value in increments of 5 starting at 10 and going to
440 for 53 kW systems, 670 mA for 80 kW systems and systems, 700 mA for 85 kw
systems, systems 800 mA for 100 kW systems may be entered in Manual mA.
AutomA can be selected to provide consistent image quality.
– To use AutomA, enter the AutomA values. Refer to AutomA for more information.
As with any x-ray exposure, mA x time is the mAs value. Appropriate exposure
values must be used to maintain image quality.
– Select [SmartmA] if you wish to use this. A scout must exist and the orientation for
the series must match to be able to enable AutomA or SmartmA. For more
information on SmartmA refer to: SmartmA.
The Total Exposure Time is automatically set by the system and is determined by the
number of images and type of scan. This setting can only be changed by resetting
one of the other factors. The Total Exposure Time is useful for determining
breath-hold times, and contrast injection timing. If the scan type is helical, the
displayed Total Exposure Time is exactly what is shown. The Total Exposure Time lists
the x-ray on time only and does not reflect any ISD applied. When calculating
breath-hold times for axial scans, the ISD for each scan must be added to the
Exposure Time displayed to reflect the total amount of time the patient would need
to hold his/her breath.
The Prep Group feature is used to establish how long the system waits before turning
the x-ray on for a given group of scans. This delay can be used during initial contrast
injection, timing of auto voice instructions, or a delay to wait for structures to fill with
contrast.
– To set the Prep Group, click the [Prep Group] parameter column or cell and enter
the appropriate value in seconds. The system starts to acquire the images after
the [Start Scan] button is selected and the Prep Group Delay counts down. It is
important to start the injection at the same time as starting the scan to insure
accuracy of when the IV bolus arrives in the appropriate anatomy. The valid

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-36

ranges for Prep Group delays are: 1st group 0-300 seconds, group delay for axial is
1-600 seconds and helical is 5-600 seconds.
When the scan type selected is Axial, the feature ISD (Interscan Delay) is available.
– To set the ISD, click the ISD parameter column or cell and enter the appropriate
value in seconds. This feature allows time for the table to move the correct
amount of millimeters set for the Image Interval. It can also be used to help with
tube cooling by increasing the value, extending the time between exposures
allowing the heat units to dissipate. Typically, the ISD is set at 1 second so the
exam is done as fast as possible. The valid range for ISD is 1-300 seconds. If
Helical or Cine scan type are selected, this feature is not available.
Breath-Hold is the setting for how long the patient must hold his/her breath for each
exposure.To set the breath-hold, click the [Breath-Hold] parameter column or cell
and enter the appropriate value in seconds. Breath-Hold and Breathe Time can be
used in conjunction in order to cluster scans within a group. The valid range for
Breath-Hold is N (None) or 0-60 seconds.
The Breathe Time is the setting to allow the patient to breathe normally between
breath holds.
– To set the Breathe Time, click the [Breathe Time] parameter column or cell and
enter the appropriate value in seconds. If there is IV contrast being injected, it is
important to consider the appropriate length of this delay and its effect on patient
comfort. Breath-Hold and Breathe Time can be used in conjunction in order to
cluster scans within a group. The valid range for Breathe Time is N (None) or 0-60
seconds.
The Voice/Light/Timer feature is used so that the system will automatically give the
breathing instructions to the patient according to the Breath Hold, Breathe Time, and
Total Exposure Time. If the Total Exposure Time is less than the Breath Hold time, the
system uses only the time needed for the exposure. The Light and Timer features will
be visible on the gantry if these two features are selected for use. For more
information on the Voice/Light/Timer feature, see Set Timing Parameters. If the
Voice/Light/Timer feature was selected for the scout series, it must be selected for the
axial series as well.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-37

17. Set Recon Parameters.

NOTE: The Recon Parameters include DFOV, Right/Left Center (R/L), Anterior/Posterior
Center (A/P), Recon Type (algorithm), Matrix Size, Recon Mode, and Auto Applications.
The DFOV allows you to target a particular piece of anatomy for display on the
screen. The smallest DFOV is 9.6 cm. The maximum DFOV is always the same as the
selected SFOV.
– To set the DFOV value, click the [DFOV] parameter column or cell and enter a
specific value. The DFOV may also be set graphically by using the diamond
handles on the Show Localizer Image. Click and drag the diamonds to expand or
contract the DFOV. The system automatically updates the value in the feature
area.
NOTE: With WideView recon option, the maximum DFOV is 65 cm. In GraphicRX as the DFOV
is increased beyond 50cm, the Scout image is minified to allow display of the
prescribed DFOV.
The R/L Center allows you to offset the center of the image for display. This is useful
if the patient is not positioned normally or if an offset structure such as the spine or
kidney is what you want centered.
– To set the R/L Center, click the [R/L] parameter column or cell and enter a value in
millimeters starting with the correct designation of R or L. The range of values can
be from 0 to one-half the SFOV. Typically, you would not want the offset to exceed
one-half the DFOV or the resulting image does not show a right or left marker, it
does show markers as R-R or L-L. The R/L Center may also be set graphically by

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-38

using the X annotation on the AP scout image reference lines. Hold down the Shift
key first, then click and drag the X to center over the area of interest.
– + and - may be substituted for R and L. R equals + and L equals -.
The A/P Center works the same way as the Right/Left Center using the lateral scout
image.
– + and - may be substituted for A and P. A equals + and P equals -.
The Recon Type sets the algorithm for reconstruction of the images.
– To set the Recon Type, click the [Recon Type] parameter column or cell and a
window appears.
– Select the appropriate algorithm. This sets the algorithm for the primary or first
reconstruction. The algorithms going from left to right increase spatial resolution
and decrease low contrast detect ability. The Bone Plus algorithm can be used for
any study that normally used bone algorithm but is very useful in cases where the
Edge algorithm was used. This is because the Bone Plus algorithm has no
reconstruction penalty and is very close in standard deviation to Edge. The Chest
algorithm provides Soft tissue resolution when viewing images in soft tissue
window width and window level and Hi Resolution when viewing images in Lung
window width and window level.
NOTE: The system allows you to program up to three reconstructions of data and Cardiac
phases from one exposure. To set up the other reconstructions and phases (if needed),
click [Show Recon 2] and enter appropriate values in the parameter columns or cells.
The [Show Recon 3] button is now available if needed.
• If you want to transfer Recon 2 and Recon 3 to another workstation, you can select
[Series Auto Transfer].
All three recons can be sent to a different place than set in the exam level transfer.
A Host window will pop-up.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-39

• Up to four locations can be selected.

The Matrix Size is a 512 matrix.

The Recon Options area is where you can select Recon Mode (Full or Plus) for the
acquisition, select IQ Enhance, set the window/level and for Cardiac acquisitions
select a Cardiac Filter level. For more information, refer to Full and Plus Recon Modes
covered earlier in this chapter.
NOTE: Full and Plus recon modes are available only in the 8 and 16 row (detector) helical
modes.
NOTE: This selection is available on all Xtream based systems.

Recon options window contains, Recon Mode, Window Width and Window Level
settings, and Cardiac Noise reduction filters if scan type is set for Cardiac Helical.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-40

NOTE: Window Width and Window Level values entered in the Recon Option window is also
added to film Set 1 in the Auto Film Tab Card.
– Window/Level can be defined for the different groups on the Recon Tab.
If Helical scan type is selected, IQ Enhance will be available if the slice thickness is
0.625 mm or 1.25 mm and the interval for these slice thicknesses is equal to the slice
thickness (0.625 or 1.25) or one half the slice thickness (0.312 or 0.625).
If Cardiac scan type is selected, cardiac noise reduction filters C1, C2, C3 can be
selected to reduce noise in the images for SnapShot Segment, SnapShot Burst,
SnapShot Burst Plus, or SnapShot Plus acquisitions. Full and Plus recons are available
only in the 8 and 16 row (detector) modes.
The Auto Apps feature allows you to build 3D models with Direct 3D or to create thick
slice axials from thin data sets without image reconstruction using VariViewer while
the scan is in progress. If you have Direct Multi-Planar Reconstructions (DMPR)
installed, it can be used to create axial, sagittal, and coronal slices from thin data
sets, then VariViewer will not be a available. VariViewer features are incorporated
into DMPR. For details, refer to the Auto Applications (Option) chapter.
18. Set the filming parameters.

NOTE: The Filming Parameters include AutoFilm (On/Off), Frame Format, Interval, Flip,
Window Width, Window Level, Mag. Factor, Rotate, User Annotation, Filter, and GSE
(Gray Scale Enhancement).
The AutoFilm feature must be turned on if the system is to display and film images in
the AutoFilm Viewport on the Display Monitor. The system defaults to off, so in
building new protocols or editing existing protocols it must be turned on.
– To turn AutoFilm on, click [AutoFilm] then click the [AutoFilm] parameter column
or cell, and click [YES].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-41

NOTE: If the selection is left in the Off position, images have to be filmed manually. Refer to
the Manually Filming Images chapter.
The Frame Format sets how many images are placed in each frame of the film
composer. You have the option of choosing 1 on 1, 2 on 1(vertical and horizontal), or 4
on 1 formatting. Any option chosen is used for the entire film series, there is no option
to change format once the filming starts.
The Interval is used to tell the system which images is to be filmed. For every image
reconstructed to be filmed, enter 1. For every other image, enter 2. For every third
image, enter 3 and so on. The range is 1-5.
The Flip feature allows you to flip images Top/Bottom, Left/Right or both. This is
helpful when a patient is scanned in a prone or “hanging head” (i.e., supine coronal)
position.
– To set Flip, click the [Flip] parameter column or cell and a window appears from
which you can choose the appropriate option.
The Window Width allows you to set the width level for filming. The image appears in
the AutoFilm viewport with this setting. It may be used or adjusted in the filming
viewport.
– To set the Window Width, click the [Width 1] parameter column or cell and enter
the value desired. This setting is also stored in the image header for transfer to a
network receiving station. The range is ± 3072. If you have the Expanded CT
Number Range enabled, the range is ± 31743.
The Window Level allows you to set the window level for filming. The image appears
in the AutoFilm Viewport with this setting. It may be used or adjusted in the filming
viewport.
– To set the Window Level, click the [Level 1] parameter column or cell and enter
the desired value. This setting is also stored in the image header for transfer to a
network receiving station. The range is ± 3072. If you have the Expanded CT
Number Range enabled, the range is ± 31743.
NOTE: Recon Option is only available on Xtream based systems. The values entered for Film
Set 1 of each Recon is added to the Recon Option Window Width and Window Level
area or the values entered in the Recon Option window of each Recon is added to
Film Set 1 Window Width and Window Level area.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-42

NOTE: For information on expanded CT number range, refer to: Expanded CT Number Range.
The Magnification Factor (Mag. Factor) allows you to establish a preset
magnification for each image for filming. The range is 0.5-2 (in 0.1 increments e.g.
1.1/1.2/1.3).
– To set the Mag. Factor, click the [Mag. Factor] parameter column or cell and enter
the desired value.
The Rotate feature allows you to rotate images Right/Right or Right/left. This is
helpful if the patient is scanned in a decubitus position.
– To set Rotate, click the [Rotate] parameter column or cell and a window appears
where you can choose the appropriate option.
The User Annotation (User Anno) feature allows you to place annotation(s) on each
image in a film series. This annotation appears in the middle of the cell above the
image. This is helpful to denote delayed studies or other unusual film sequences. It is
commonly used on spine studies to denote vertebral levels.
To set User Annotation, click the [User Annotation] parameter column or cell and a
window appears in which you can enter appropriate text.
The Filters feature allows you to use edge enhancement filters (to sharpen images)
or smoothing filters (to soften images) on every image in a film series.
– To set Filters, click the [Filters] parameters column or cell and a window appears
where you can choose the appropriate option.
NOTE: For more information on filters and their use, refer to the Image Manipulations
chapter.
The Gray Scale Enhancement [GSE] feature allows you to change the gray scale
curve to enhance areas of low contrast such as the gray/white matter interface in
brain tissue, on every image in a film series.
– To set the GSE click [GSE] parameter column or cell and a window appears from
which you can choose the appropriate option.
19. Use Additional Feature Buttons.

NOTE: These features cannot be built as a portion of a protocol. They can be used when
actually scanning a patient.
The Add Group feature allows you to insert another set of images following the prior
group with all of the same factors, except for Start/End location within the same
series. The start location of the new group automatically set contiguous to the end of

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-43

the prior group. The end location is determined by the number of slices, slice
thickness, and image interval.
– To add additional groups, click [Add Group] and the new group is inserted. Every
click inserts another group.
The Split Current Group feature allows you to split a selected group into separate
groups. This is helpful for tube cooling issues or breath-holds.
– To split a group, you must first highlight which group you wish to split by clicking
on the first box (with image numbers) at the start of the group. It highlights in a
bright blue color.
– Click [Split Current Group] and a window appears from which you may choose to
split between selected slices or by location.
The Delete Selected Group feature allows you to remove an entire group from the
series.
– To delete a group, you must first highlight the group to be deleted by clicking on
the first box (with image numbers) at the start of the group. It highlights in a bright
blue color.
– Then click [Delete Selected Group] and the highlighted group is deleted.
The Smart Prep feature can be built into a protocol. Smart Prep is an excellent tool
for monitoring the peak enhancement of IV contrast injections. For details on the
SmartPrep option, refer to the SmartPrep (Option) chapter.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-44

Quick Steps: Build or Edit a Protocol

1. From the scan monitor, click [Protocol Management].
2. From the window, click [Protocol Management].
3. Click [User].
4. Select an anatomical region.
5. Click [New] or [Edit].
6. Select an open area in the list and enter the name of protocol.
7. Select the type of series to be built from the window that appears.
8. Click [OK].
9. Set the proper patient position.
10. Select anatomical reference point.
11. Click [AutoStore] and/or [AutoTransfer].
12. Set Scout Parameters.
13. Click [Create New Series].
14. Click [Axial] and [Create After].
15. Set Scan Parameters.
16. Set Technical parameters.
17. Set Recon Parameters.
18. Set the filming parameters.
19. Use Additional Feature Buttons.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-45

Record a Personalized AutoVoice

The system has three pre-recorded voice message sets in 9 selectable languages that
cannot be deleted. You may record up to 17 additional messages on your system. This
allows for consistent breathing instructions which assists in more precise timing in the
exam. Your system also comes equipped with microphones at the console and gantry for
communication with the patient.
1. From the Scan Monitor, click [Protocol Management].

A window appears with the choices of AutoVoice and Protocol Management.

2. Click [AutoVoice].
The AutoVoice menu appears with the three pre-recorded voice messages and 17
blank areas.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-46

3. To record a message, select a blank area, enter a name and press Enter.
Every selection must have a name. You probably want to title it so it is easily
identifiable (i.e., Mary S. Inspiration), that way you know whose voice is being used
and the content of the message, especially if the message entered is in another
language.
4. Click [Record] and begin message.

Click and hold [Record] until you are ready to begin your message. Normally, you are
recording a pre-message first, e.g., “Take in a breath and hold it.” When you release
the mouse button, the recording starts as indicated by the clock to the right of the
[Record] button. Begin your message right away. Speak clearly toward the
microphone located on the computer keyboard. Click [Stop] as soon as you finish
speaking. The total time of the message is displayed in the clock. If you make a
mistake, simply click [Stop] and then repeat these steps.
NOTE: It is very important to try to start and stop the recording as quickly as possible to
avoid adding time to the beginning or end of a message.
5. Click [Pre-Message].
Select the [Pre-Message] button next to the name you just entered. This highlights
the feature in blue.
6. Click [Save Message].
This enters the message to the system and enters the time in the Pre-Message Area.
7. Click [Record] and begin Post-Message.
Repeat the steps to record a message for post instructions (e.g. Breathe normally).
8. Click [Post- Message].
This highlights the area in blue.
9. Click [Save Message].
This enters the message to the system and enters the time in the Post-Message area.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-47

NOTE: If you wish to hear any recorded message, click on the selection’s Pre- or Post-
message to highlight it in blue. Go to the lower right corner of the screen to the
Message Management area and click play.

Quick Steps: Record a Personalized AutoVoice

1. From the Scan Monitor, click [Protocol Management].
2. Click [AutoVoice].
3. To record a message, select a blank area, enter a name and press Enter.
4. Click [Record] and begin message.
5. Click [Pre-Message].
6. Click [Save Message].
7. Click [Record] and begin Post-Message.
8. Click [Post- Message].
9. Click [Save Message].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-48

Select Default Language for AutoVoice 1, 2, and 3.

The system has three pre-recorded voice message sets in 9 selectable languages that
cannot be deleted. You can select the desired language to use on your scanner.
1. From the Scan Monitor, click [Protocol Management].

A window appears with the choices of AutoVoice and Protocol Management.

2. Click [AutoVoice].
The AutoVoice menu appears with the three pre-recorded voice messages and 17
blank areas.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-49

3. Click [English-Male] and select the desired primary language from the AutoVoice
Language Selection window.

You can choose from nine different languages.

– English-Male
– English-Female
– Japanese
– French
– German
– Spanish
– Mexican Spanish
– Italian
– Korean
– Chinese
NOTE: The Auto Voice language displayed at the time the system is booted up is the
defaulted language set by your Field Engineer initially.
If the Auto Voice language is changed for the current exam, the system will return to
the default language once you have clicked End Exam.
4. Click [OK].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-50

Quick Steps: Select Default Language for AutoVoice 1, 2, and 3.

1. From the Scan Monitor, click [Protocol Management].
2. Click [AutoVoice].
3. Click [English-Male] and select the desired primary language from the AutoVoice
Language Selection window.
4. Click [OK].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-51

Change Pre-Set Delay for AutoVoice

The Preset delay adds a delay between the completion of the Auto Voice Pre-scan message
and X-ray on. This delay can be set per protocol.
1. To set the preset delay before the auto voice message is played, click the time next to
Preset Delay Time.

2. Click the desired preset delay from the popup window.

3. Click [OK].

Quick Steps: Change Pre-Set Delay for AutoVoice

1. To set the preset delay before the auto voice message is played, click the time
next to Preset Delay Time.
2. Click the desired preset delay from the popup window.
3. Click [OK].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-52

Delete an AutoVoice
It may be necessary to remove old or unwanted messages from the system as employees
change or as different languages are required.
1. From the scan monitor, click [Protocol Management].
A window appears with the choices of AutoVoice or Protocol Management.
2. Click [AutoVoice].
The AutoVoice menu appears with three pre-recorded voice messages and any that
have been saved to the system.
NOTE: The three pre-recorded messages cannot be deleted.
3. Select the title of the message to be deleted.
This highlights the selection in blue.
4. Click [Delete Set].

Quick Steps: Delete an AutoVoice

1. From the scan monitor, click [Protocol Management].
2. Click [AutoVoice].
3. Select the title of the message to be deleted.
4. Click [Delete Set].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-53

Copy and Paste Protocols

Use this procedure to copy protocols from the GE anatomical selector or Most Recent scans
into the User anatomical selection area. You can also copy a protocol within the User
anatomical selection window. Copy protocol can be used as a template to create different
protocols with minor adjustments.
1. From the scan monitor, click [Protocol Management].

The AutoVoice and Protocol Management window appears.

2. Click [Protocol Management].
You now see the anatomical selector.

3. Select the anatomical selector you wish to copy from.

You can choose between GE, User, or Most Recent.
4. Select the protocol you wish to copy.
5. Click [Copy].
6. Select the anatomical selector you wish to paste to.
You can only paste to User protocol selector. The [Paste] button is not available for
the GE or Most Recent selectors.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-54

7. Select the area you wish to paste to.

8. Click [Paste].
The protocol is now copied to this area.
You can now use or edit this protocol.

NOTE: If you copy a protocol from the Most Recent area, check features like; Smart Prep,
Show Localizer, and other choices are good choices for the protocol.
9. To change the name of the protocol, click on the protocol to be renamed.
10. Enter the new name.
The protocol is renamed.
11. Click [Done] to exit.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-55

Quick Steps: Copy and Paste Protocols

1. From the scan monitor, click [Protocol Management].
2. Click [Protocol Management].
3. Select the anatomical selector you wish to copy from.
4. Select the protocol you wish to copy.
5. Click [Copy].
6. Select the anatomical selector you wish to paste to.
7. Select the area you wish to paste to.
8. Click [Paste].
9. To change the name of the protocol, click on the protocol to be renamed.
10. Enter the new name.
11. Click [Done] to exit.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-56

Delete a Protocol
Use this procedure to delete a protocol from your user defined list. This allows you to keep
your protocol list current by deleting any unnecessary protocols.
1. From the scan monitor, click [Protocol Management].

The AutoVoice and Protocol Management window appears.

2. Click [Protocol Management].
You now see the anatomical selector.

3. Select the anatomical selector you wish to delete from.

You can only delete from the User or Service protocol selectors.
4. Select the protocol you wish to delete.
5. Click [Delete].
The protocol is deleted.
6. Click [Done] to exit.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-57

Quick Steps: Delete a Protocol

1. From the scan monitor, click [Protocol Management].
2. Click [Protocol Management].
3. Select the anatomical selector you wish to delete from.
4. Select the protocol you wish to delete.
5. Click [Delete].
6. Click [Done] to exit.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-58

Use ECG Trace

ECG Trace provides the capability to display and view the ECG waveform on the operator
console. The ECG waveform is sent from the IVY 3150/IVY 3100 with Ethernet or IVY
3150-A/IVY 3100-A with Ethernet cardiac monitor when the IVY monitor is set in Ethernet
mode and Ethernet cable connection exists between Ivy Monitor, gantry and Operator
Console. The ECG Trace display is defaulted to off for Scout Scans unless display is turned on
in the protocol. Select the ECG Trace button below the Gating button to enable display of the
ECG Trace.
The the ECG Trace display can be minimized or expanded (maximized) by clicking on the
arrow on the left side of the display.
The trigger point on the ECG Trace for each R-R interval will be displayed in red, the point or
percent in the R-R where the images are reconstructed is displayed in white, (Figure 6-18).
The BPM heart rate shown on the console is updated every 3 heart beats. The BPM heart
rate shown on the IVY 3150/IVY 3100 with Ethernet updated every 10 heart beats and on
the IVY 3150-A/IVY 3100-A with Ethernet every 3 heart beats.
1. From the scout View/Edit page, click [ECG Trace].
This will enable the trace.

2. Click the Minimize/Maximize icon.

3. Make sure the IVY 3150/IVY 3100 with Ethernet or IVY 3150-A/IVY 3100-A with Ethernet
is to is set to “ethernet” mode.
If not, cycle power to the monitor after changing from data mode to ethernet mode.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-59

Minimize/Maximize icon

Quick Steps: Use ECG Trace

1. From the scout View/Edit page, click [ECG Trace].
2. Click the Minimize/Maximize icon.
3. Make sure the IVY 3150/IVY 3100 with Ethernet or IVY 3150-A/IVY 3100-A with Ethernet
is to is set to “ethernet” mode.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 6-60

Chapter 7
SmartPrep (Option)

Introduction
This chapter explains SmartPrep. It contains the step-by-step instructions to help you learn
how to:
• Set the SmartPrep Parameters
• Scan the Baseline Phase
• Scan the Monitor Phase
• Scan the Scan Phase

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 7-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to successfully utilize SmartPrep. Some of the
concepts you need to understand are:
• SmartPrep
• Setting SmartPrep Parameters
• Scanning the Baseline Phase
• Scanning the Monitor Phase
• Scanning the Scan Phase

SmartPrep
SmartPrep is a purchasable option. It is a feature that allows real-time monitoring of IV
Contrast enhancement in one particular section of anatomy that is in the area of interest.
The contrast flow is monitored by low dose scans until the contrast enhancement reaches
the preferred point and the operator initiates the scan prescription.
If SmartPrep is enabled for a series, the system cancels the AutoView display for any images
in the recon queue when the SmartPrep series is started. These images are selected from
the browser for review once they have been reconstructed. Only images from the series with
SmartPrep and those after the SmartPrep series are displayed in AutoView viewport.

Setting SmartPrep Parameters

When utilizing SmartPrep parameters controlling scan location, time between images,
enhancement values, technique factors and time to start the study must be set. The values
may be set as part of any protocol utilizing SmartPrep, or they may be set for individual
SmartPrep scans. Some values such as matrix and algorithm are not adjustable.

Scanning the Baseline Phase

The first phase is the Baseline Phase. In this phase a single unenhanced image is acquired in
the anatomy where the monitoring occurs and the Region(s) of Interest (ROI) is established.

Scanning the Monitor Phase

The second phase is the Monitor Phase. Using the same location as the Baseline Phase, up
to 40 low dose scans can be taken during the injection of IV Contrast. Using the established
ROI(s), the system displays a graph and the monitoring image to allow you to determine the
peak enhancement value.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 7-2

Scanning the Scan Phase

The third and last phase is the Scan Phase. This is the actual study as set in the scan
prescription. The Scan Phase is initiated by the operator when the IV enhancement,
determined by visual or preset Hounsfield unit, is achieved.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 7-3

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for Utilizing SmartPrep. Specifically, it
describes how to:
• Set the SmartPrep Parameters
• Scan the Baseline Phase
• Scan the Monitor Phase
• Scan the Scan Phase

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 7-4

Set the SmartPrep Parameters

Setting the SmartPrep Parameters does not need to be done each time SmartPrep is used.
The parameters can be included in any protocol using SmartPrep. The system holds the last
values entered if SmartPrep is activated for an individual study. SmartPrep parameters
allow for checking the IV enhancement both visually and graphically.
1. After setting the scan Rx, on the view/edit screen click [SmartPrep Rx].

A pop up window appears with several areas to input ranges.

2. From the pop up window click [Off].

The system toggles to ON and highlight the area in bright blue.

3. Click [Show Localizer].

This puts the scout image for your scan in the display monitor with a single line
annotated on the image.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 7-5

4. Set the Monitor Location.

This may be done graphically by clicking and dragging the red X on the line in the
scout image to the desired location.
The location can also be entered in the Monitor Location area once you have
determined the specific value. The value must have an S or I designation. (refer to
Report the Cursor Location and the Pixel Value on how to get value using cursor).
+ and - may be substituted for S and I. S equals + and I equals -.
NOTE: This location is very important as this is where the monitoring images are scanned
and where the ROI(s) are placed.
5. Enter the mA.
The system defaults to a low mA value.
a) To change the value select the mA area and enter the desired setting. You want to
use low mA to keep heat units to a minimum. The usual range is around 40 mA for
most studies.
6. Enter the Monitoring Delay.
Select the Monitoring Delay area and enter the desired value. This value determines
how long the delivery of IV contrast is allowed to take place prior to the monitoring
images being acquired. This is generally set to start well in advance of the expected
or average time of enhancement (10-15 seconds for arterial studies, 30-45 seconds
for venous/routine exams). The range is 0-60 seconds in 0.1 second increments.
7. Enter the Monitoring ISD (Interscan Delay).
This sets the time between monitor images being acquired. The range is 1-60
seconds in 0.1 second increments. Use less time between images for arterial studies
and more time for venous/routine studies. There are 40 images available for
monitoring images.
8. Enter the Enhancement Threshold.
Measured in Hounsfield units, this is the difference between the desired threshold
value and the pre monitoring threshold ROI. (i.e. pre monitoring ROI in a liver is 30
Hounsfield units and the desired contrast enhancement value is 70 units; the
Enhancement Threshold would be set to 40).
9. Enter the Diagnostic Delay.
This value allows time for the table to move into the Scan Phase Start Location and to
ready the system for the Scan phase. This is generally set to three seconds for arterial
studies and five seconds for venous/routine studies. The range is 3-60 seconds in 0.1
second increments.
The delay time selected needs to include time for the initial breathing instructions to
the patient.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 7-6

NOTE: Once the scan phase is initiated, the operator must give the first breathing instruction
to the patient. The system automatically gives all other instructions if AutoVoice has
been set for the study.
Figure 7-1

The diagnostic delay is updated at confirm to adjust for table movement between
the Monitor location and the Scan Phase Location. If the diagnostic delay is less than
the time required to move the table from the Monitor location to the Scan Phase
location, a dialog is posted at confirm indicating what the Diagnostic Delay will be.
10. Click [Continue] or [Cancel].
Selecting [Accept] confirms any changes to the SmartPrep parameters and returns
you to the view/edit screen.
Selecting [Cancel] returns you to the view/edit screen and closes the pop up window.
It does not cancel SmartPrep Rx.

Quick Steps: Set the SmartPrep Parameters

1. After setting the scan Rx, on the view/edit screen click [SmartPrep Rx].
2. From the pop up window click [Off].
3. Click [Show Localizer].
4. Set the Monitor Location.
5. Enter the mA.
6. Enter the Monitoring Delay.
7. Enter the Monitoring ISD (Interscan Delay).
8. Enter the Enhancement Threshold.
9. Enter the Diagnostic Delay.
10. Click [Continue] or [Cancel].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 7-7

Scan the Baseline Phase

The initial phase for SmartPrep is called the Baseline Phase. This phase is done prior to any
IV contrast injection in order to acquire a single image, that is used to establish the baseline
region of interest (ROI).
1. On the view/edit screen click [Confirm].

2. A warning message displays.

The diagnostic delay is updated at confirm to adjust for table movement between
the Monitor location and the Scan Phase Location. If the diagnostic delay is less than
the time required to move the table from the Monitor location to the prescribed Scan
Phase location, a dialog is included in the warning message pop-up at confirm
indicating what the Diagnostic Delay will be.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 7-8

3. Click [Continue].
The system displays the Scan Progress screen. The display shows the dynaplan for all
three phases, Baseline, Monitor, and Scan.
4. On the keyboard press [Move to Scan].
This takes the table to the Monitoring Location.
5. On the keyboard press [Start Scan].
This acquires the baseline image at the monitoring location.
When the image is reconstructed, you see a one on one display of the image on the
display monitor. To the left of the image is six SmartPrep display features available to
use on the image. These features are Zoom (2x), Display Normal, Ellipse ROI, Hide
Graphics (toggle to hide/show graphics), Erase, Explicit Mag (range 0.5-2.0).
6. Place Ellipse ROI in an area of interest.
You can now put up to three ROI’s on an area of interest by selecting the Ellipse ROI
feature from the SmartPrep display area. For example, if you are interested in
evaluating the liver parenchyma, put the ROI in the liver so that it is not touching any
vessels. If you are interested in evaluating a vessel, put the ROI on the vessel of
interest.

Quick Steps: Scan the Baseline Phase

1. On the view/edit screen click [Confirm].
2. A warning message displays.
3. Click [Continue].
4. On the keyboard press [Move to Scan].
5. On the keyboard press [Start Scan].
6. Place Ellipse ROI in an area of interest.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 7-9

Scan the Monitor Phase

The Baseline phase acquires one non contrast scan and allows you to establish an area to
monitor contrast enhancement. The Monitor phase acquires images at the monitoring
location during the delivery of intravenous iodinated contrast material and graphically
displays the images, charts the enhancement thresholds and displays a clock with the time
since monitoring began.
1. On the Scan Progress screen click [Monitor Phase].

2. On the keyboard press [Start Scan] and start the injection of IV contrast at the same time.
The system waits the time set in the Monitoring Delay area and then begin acquiring
images at the time set for the inter-scan delay (ISD).
NOTE: There is a maximum of 40 monitoring images available.
3. On the Display Monitor watch the four on one display for the monitoring activities.

The upper left quadrant shows the baseline image with the ROI(s).
The upper right quadrant shows the real time monitoring image as it reconstructs
along with the ROI(s).
The lower left quadrant shows a real time enhancement threshold graph comparing
the ROI’s of each monitoring scan versus the time from the start of the monitoring
delay.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 7-10

NOTE: On the graph is a horizontal line denoted by a “T”. This represents the numeric
enhancement threshold that was entered from the SmartPrep prescription. If an ROI
was not placed on the baseline image this line does not appear.
The lower right quadrant shows, in real time, the time that each monitoring scan was
acquired based on the beginning of the monitoring delay as well as showing the ROI
values for each scan.
The lower right quadrant also displays an elapsed time clock. This displays, in real
time, the time from when Start Scan was selected for the monitor phase until the
Scan Phase icon was selected. This is the inject to scan delay for this series of scans.
4. When the desired enhancement threshold is achieved click [Scan Phase].
The table moves to the scan prescription start location and, based on the Diagnostic
Delay selected, the scan prescription is started.
When the line representing the ROI of interest is close to or on the line denoting the
preset enhancement threshold value, you may click [Scan Phase] to initiate the scan
prescription.
You can also click [Scan Phase] based on your observation of the real time
monitoring images, if those images show adequate contrast in the area of interest.
NOTE: If all forty monitoring scans have been utilized it is necessary to use the Move To Scan
and Start Scan buttons on the keyboard to place the table in position and initiate the
scan prescription.

Quick Steps: Scan the Monitor Phase

1. On the Scan Progress screen click [Monitor Phase].
2. On the keyboard press [Start Scan] and start the injection of IV contrast at the same
time.
3. On the Display Monitor watch the four on one display for the monitoring activities.
4. When the desired enhancement threshold is achieved click [Scan Phase].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 7-11

Scan the Scan Phase

The Scan Phase is the start of the actual Scan Prescription following the Monitor Phase.
1. On the Scan Progress screen click [Scan Phase].

The table moves to the scan prescription start location and, based on the Diagnostic
Delay selected, the scan prescription is started.
The real time updating of information in the quadrants is stopped.
A screen save image of the quadrant is captured by the system for later review if
needed.
NOTE: The system places the baseline image, the monitoring images and the screen save
image with the exam in the browser. These images are denoted as series 200
prospective and screen save images. If an additional baseline image was acquired
these images are in series 201.
NOTE: The initial breathing instructions to the patient for the start of the exam scan
prescription must be delivered by the operator during the Diagnostic Delay. The
system then provides the rest of the breathing instructions if Auto Voice has been
selected.

Quick Steps: Scan the Scan Phase

1. On the Scan Progress screen click [Scan Phase].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 7-12

Chapter 8
VariSpeed (Option)

Introduction
This chapter explains the choices available in the purchasable option known as VariSpeed.
VariSpeed allows the system to operate at new sub-second rotation speeds. This chapter
contains step-by-step instructions to help you learn how to:
• Use VariSpeed

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 8-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concept necessary to understand VariSpeed utilization. The
concept you will need to understand is:
• VariSpeed

VariSpeed
VariSpeed is a purchasable option that allows the system to operate utilizing various
sub-second rotation times. The rotation times in this package are 0.5 seconds, 0.6 seconds,
0.7 seconds, and 0.9 seconds. The variability of the rotation times gives you the ability to
adjust the parameters for patient size and different applications. For scanning a medium or
average sized patient for an abdominal study, the 0.5 second rotation time provides
adequate mAs for image quality. For a larger patient you may need to use the 0.6 or 0.7
second rotation time. Both studies would be completed using sub-second rotation times
because of the flexibility in having the various rotation times.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 8-2

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for using VariSpeed. Specifically, it
describes how to:
• Use VariSpeed

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 8-3

Use VariSpeed
VariSpeed is a purchasable option that allows the system to operate using various
sub-second rotation times. The rotation times in this package are 0.5 seconds, 0.6 seconds,
0.7 seconds, and 0.9 seconds. The variability of the rotation times gives you the ability to
adjust the parameters for patient size and different applications.
1. From the view/edit screen, click [Scan Type].
A pop up window appears.

2. Select rotation time from options listed.

All times will be available for axial.
The two second, three second, and four second times will be gray text and not
available for both helical and cine.
3. Click [Accept] or [Cancel].
[Accept] will utilize the selected parameters.
[Cancel] closes the pop up window. Any parameters set within the protocol will be
utilized.

Quick Steps: Use VariSpeed

1. From the view/edit screen, click [Scan Type].
2. Select rotation time from options listed.
3. Click [Accept] or [Cancel].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 8-4

Chapter 9
Prospective Gating (SmartScore)
(Option)

Introduction
This chapter outlines the process for setting up a prospectively gated unenhanced
(non-contrast) acquisition for calcium scoring. It contains the step-by-step instructions to
help you learn how to:
• Set the Exam Prescription for Prospective Gating (SmartScore)
The procedure for using Prospective Gating (SmartScore) in conjunction with calcium
scoring includes the following operator and system actions:
– Patient and ECG monitor set up
– Cardiac exam prescription and confirmation
– Automatic system preparation
– Scanning initiation
– Image transfer to Advantage Windows workstation
– SmartScore on Advantage Windows workstation
The exam prescription is described here. Information on patient set up, ECG monitor set up,
image management, and scoring can be found in the separate SmartScore documentation.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 9-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concept necessary to understand the use of Prospective Gating
(SmartScore). The concepts you need to understand are:
• Prospective Gating (SmartScore)
• R to R interval
• ECG (or EKG) Waveform

Prospective Gating (SmartScore)

This feature is designed to acquire prospective ECG gating measurements, which provide
information that is valuable for scan timing. Using the measurements, the system
synchronizes the collection of data used for scoring with the cardiac cycle.
Specifically, prospective ECG gating measures the timing between patient heart
contractions in order to trigger scanning at moments of relaxation (diastolic phase of heart
action). Because the gating measurements determine scan timing, they improve the data
acquisition process. The quality of the resulting images is enhanced, and therefore fewer
images are required. Acquiring fewer images means less x-ray exposure for the patient.
Prospective Gating (SmartScore) requires the selection of cine scanning. Prospective gating
is not compatible with axial or helical scan types. It is limited to patients with a normal
resting heart rate of up to 90 beats per minute for best results with the calcium scoring
application. It also requires the use of an ECG monitor, which is connected to the LightSpeed
system.

R to R interval
Images used for Prospective Gating (SmartScore) are acquired during the R to R interval. The
R to R interval is the time between maximum patient heart contractions (R wave peaks). For
example, the R to R interval is 660 milliseconds for a resting heart rate of 90 beats per
minute. See below for more information on the cardiac cycle.

ECG (or EKG) Waveform

The ECG (or EKG) waveform represents the electrical activity of the heart that correlates to
heart motion:
• Cardiac contraction is called systole.
• Cardiac relaxation is called diastole.
Three waveform elements are critical to cardiac gating:

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 9-2

• P-wave
– Represents depolarization of the atria and results in contraction or systole of the
atria.
• QRS complex
– Represents depolarization of the ventricles and results in contraction or systole of the
ventricles.
– R-wave is used for triggering because of its strong electrical signal and correlation
of the muscle activity of the heart.
– The R-R interval is the time between the peak of one R-wave and the peak of the
next. Each R-R interval represents the length of one cardiac cycle.
• T-Wave
– Represents re-polarization of the ventricles and results in relaxation or diastole of the
ventricles.
Figure 9-1 ECG with Triggers

Figure 9-2 ECG without Triggers

• Ventricular systole extends from the R-peak to the T-Wave when the heart is contracting
and expelling blood.
• Ventricular diastole extends from the T-Wave to the R-peak. During diastole, the
ventricles fill with blood.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 9-3

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for using Prospective Gating
(SmartScore). Specifically, it describes how to:
• Set the Exam Prescription for Prospective Gating (SmartScore)

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 9-4

Set the Exam Prescription for Prospective Gating

(SmartScore)
1. Set up the patient and monitor, and place ECG leads in recommended location on the
patient.
For more information refer to: Patient Skin Preparation & Electrode Placement.
NOTE: The GE recommended electrodes are Dyna/Trace1500 by ConMed.
Make sure a good signal is detected on the ECG monitor in the scan room.
Electrodes should be radiolucent with silver/silver chloride gel, with fresh gel adhere
to the patient and be able to maintain good contact during table movement.
Use Dyna/Trace1500 electrodes by ConMed. Information of where to order these
electrodes is found on the top of the IVY monitor.
Use electrodes made for short term monitoring (e.g. exercise monitoring). Do not use
electrodes used for long term monitoring.
2. Enter patient information on the New Patient screen.
3. Prescribe a PA (180 degree) and Lateral (90 degree) scout scan.
4. To verify that the scanner is receiving the ECG signal, click [Gating Off] on the view/edit
screen.
Figure 9-3 Gating Off

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 9-5

If the system detects a valid ECG signal, the patient's heart rate in Beats Per Minute
(BPM is displayed on the Gating button. BPM displayed is a 3 cycle average of the
patient's heart rate. The ECG waveform for the patient can be displayed by clicking
on [ECG Trace] after a BPM is displayed.

If the system detects no signal from the ECG monitor, the button turns red and no
BPM value is displayed. In this scenario, reevaluate ECG connections to patient and
monitor to gain ECG signal before continuing.

5. Perform the scout scan.

NOTE: It is important to give the patient the same breathing instructions for the scout scans
as are given for the Cine Scan Type acquisition. The patient should be requested to
take several breaths in and out before holding breath while the actual scan is
acquired. This helps provide a more consistent heart rate during the acquisition of
the SmartScore images.
6. Prescribe the cine scan parameters.
Scan Type: Cine, Segmented, 0.4 second or 0.5 second
Start Location: Level of the carina
End Location: Base of the heart
Thick/Speed: 2.5mm/4i
Interval: 10.0
Cine Duration: System automatically update the value based on the number of
images per R to R and the time between images that is prescribed.
Gantry Tilt: S0
SFOV: Large
kV: 120
mA: Average patient 370, Large patient 390
Breath Hold: Set to No
Prep/Group Delay: 0.0 (only allowed if breath hold is set to No)
ISD (sec): 1.0 second

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 9-6

7. Click [Gating] to turn on Prospective Gating (SmartScore).

The SmartScore Pro (Prospective Gating (SmartScore)) screen is displayed.

8. On the SmartScore Pro pop up, click [Off] to turn gating on.

9. Review and/or change parameters on the SmartScore Pro pop up screen as necessary.
The R to R interval is displayed in BPM in the R to R Interval field.
The R to R interval is displayed in milliseconds directly below the BPM entry. The
R-to-R interval is updated based on an average over a period of 3 cardiac cycles.
The center R-Peak Delay (%) is defined as a percentage of time between 2
consecutive R-peaks. The default value is 70%, which should be in the diastolic phase
in order to minimize occurrence of cardiac motion. The time, in milliseconds,
displayed directly below the Center R-Peak Delay (%) identifies the amount of time

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 9-7

after the preceding R-peak that aligns with the Trigger Delay percent for the patient's
displayed heart rate.
Time Between Images is the temporal interval in milliseconds that is prescribed
between images generated at the same image location.
a) Select either [50] or [100] from the pop up menu.

Images per R-to-R Interval defines the number of images reconstructed per image
location for each heart cycle. You have a scan at that location that lasts X duration,
and out of that data you reconstruct images at a time interval of either 50 or 100
milliseconds.

b) Select either [1], [3], or [5] from the pop up menu.

The number of images that can be acquired depended upon the R to R Interval of the
patient.
The middle slice of the group is taken at the point of the Trigger Delay. The remaining
images, if more than one, are reconstructed at either 50ms or 100ms intervals before
and after the middle image.
If the point to begin data acquisition is too short for the hardware to start after the R
to R wave, the system skips one beat and begin in the next R to R wave.
10. Click [Accept] on the SmartScore Pro pop up menu to continue with Prospective Gating
(SmartScore) or click [Cancel].

NOTE: It is important to give the patient the same breathing instructions for the scout scans
as are given for the Cine Scan Type acquisition. The patient should be asked to take
several breaths in and out before holding breath while the actual scan is acquired.
This helps provide a more consistent heart rate during the acquisition of the
SmartScore images.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 9-8

Quick Steps: Set the Exam Prescription for Prospective Gating

(SmartScore)
1. Set up the patient and monitor, and place ECG leads in recommended location on the
patient.
2. Enter patient information on the New Patient screen.
3. Prescribe a PA (180 degree) and Lateral (90 degree) scout scan.
4. To verify that the scanner is receiving the ECG signal, click [Gating Off] on the view/edit
screen.
5. Perform the scout scan.
6. Prescribe the cine scan parameters.
7. Click [Gating] to turn on Prospective Gating (SmartScore).
8. On the SmartScore Pro pop up, click [Off] to turn gating on.
9. Review and/or change parameters on the SmartScore Pro pop up screen as
necessary.
10. Click [Accept] on the SmartScore Pro pop up menu to continue with Prospective Gating
(SmartScore) or click [Cancel].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 9-9

Chapter 10
Cardiac Imaging

Introduction
This chapter explains the cardiac imaging (CI) scanning process for LightSpeed Plus,
LightSpeed Ultra, and LightSpeed16 systems. It contains the step-by-step instructions to
help you learn how to:
• Set Up a Patient
• Scan the Patient
– Scout Scans
– Localizer Scan
– Timing Bolus Scans
– Enhanced Cardiac Scan
• Reconstruct Cardiac Scans
• Save ECG Trace
NOTE: For Cardiac Imaging on LightSpeed Pro16, refer to Cardiac Imaging for LightSpeed
Pro16 chapter.
NOTE: The maximum number of images in a series is 3000 for prospective and retrospective
series. How images are put in different series based on how they are reconstructed.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to successfully complete the cardiac imaging
process. Specifically you need to understand:
• Prior to Scanning
– Cardiac Helical
– SnapShot Segment
– SnapShot Burst
– SnapShot Burst Plus
– CardIQ SnapShot Window
– ECG signal clarity and integrity must be confirmed prior to performing ECG-gated
acquisitions. Items which may require adjustments of equipment settings or
positioning, or patient set-up include:-
– Auto Detection of Heart Rate
– Manual Detect Heart Rate
– Pitch
– Phase Location
– % R-Peak Value
– SnapShot Mode Usage
– ECG Modulated mA
• Scan Preparation
• Patient Preparation
– Patient Skin Preparation & Electrode Placement
– Alternate Electrode Positions for Signal Clarity
• ECG signal clarity and integrity must be confirmed prior to performing ECG-gated
acquisitions. Items which may require adjustments of equipment settings or positioning,
or patient set-up include:-
– Scout Scans
– Localizer Scan
– Timing Bolus Scans
– Enhanced Cardiac Scan
• Cardiac Series Retro Reconstruction Numbering
– Single Phase Image Set
– Multiphase Image Set
– Cardiac ECG Gated Images are annotated with either of the following:

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-2

Prior to Scanning
Before initiating a scan, it is extremely important to check the ECG trace on the scanner
console and ECG trigger monitor to make sure the waveform is clean and ECG-gating is
triggering properly. In cardiac imaging, there is a dependency on the patient specific heart
rate as input to ECG gated exam completion.
ECG-gating is considered correct if the R-peak is pronounced and clearly distinguishable
from the remainder of the waveform (i.e. no other elevated segments) and the red trigger
line is shown on the R-peak of the QRS complex on the ECG waveform.
If these conditions are not met, reposition the electrodes as per recommendations in the
Patient Skin Preparation & Electrode Placement section of this guide.

Figure 10-1 ECG Trace

The figures below demonstrate varying electrocardiograms (ECG) similar to the waveforms
that could be seen from connecting the leads of the cardiac trigger monitor to the patient
for an ECG-gated CT acquisition. These show an expected normal or typical waveform
(Figure 10-2), a suboptimal noisy waveform (Figure 10-3), a suboptimal elevation in T-Wave
amplitude (Figure 10-4), and an irregular spacing between the R-Peaks creating an
arrhythmia (Figure 10-5).

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-3

Figure 10-2 Normal ECG Trace

Figure 10-3 Noisy ECG Trace

Figure 10-4 ECG Trace with Elevated T-Waves

Figure 10-5 ECG Trace with Arrhythmia

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-4

If the waveform has elevated T-waves, as in Figure 1-7, do the following:

Confirm electrode placement, or
Try to place the electrodes more laterally on clavicles or on the arms, or
Use the Alternate Electrode Positions for Signal Clarity in Figure 10-15.
Refer to Patient Skin Preparation & Electrode Placement.
If this does not yield a more normal waveform (Figure 10-2), try changing the measurement
Lead on the ECG monitor from Lead 2 to Lead 1 or Lead 3.
Avoid scanning patients with known arrhythmias. If arrhythmias (including pre-ventricular
contractions, or extra systole), as seen in Figure 10-5, are seen when reviewing the ECG
trace prior to scanning, attempt to regulate the heart rhythm (e.g. practice breathing
instructions, calm the patient, or follow procedure established by your institution). It is not
advised to scan a patient with arrhythmias as image quality may be degraded.
If you do not see the RED line on the R-peak, but somewhere else, it is advised to make the
appropriate adjustments to the electrode placement, monitor settings and equipment to
ensure proper gating on the R-peak. The white area represents the Reconstruction window
of 75 % R to R interval used for the first set of images reconstructed.

CAUTION: If during the scan the heart rate drops significantly lower than the prescribed
heart rate, there is a potential for gaps in the gated image location. To avoid
image location gaps, a non-gated image is reconstructed for the period where
the patient heart rate dropped below the expected or confirmed heart rate
at the start of the exam. A non-gated image may have more motion and may
not be reconstructed at the prescribed phase.

Cardiac Helical
Cardiac Helical is a low-pitch ECG-gated helical acquisition mode where the pitch value is
set based on the patient's heart rate. The range of pitch values varies based on both the
gantry speed and the scanner configuration. The patient's heart rate must be within the
range of 40-120 BPM for the system to allow scan confirmation.
NOTE: If Start Scan times out or you need to pause scan and resume, make sure to review
the patient's heart rate before you resume/reconfirm the scan. The heart rate may
have changed from the value you originally confirmed and a different pitch might be
used for the scan. In cardiac scanning, confirm the acquisition only when you are
ready to proceed. Move to Scan is valid for 180 seconds while Start Scan is only valid
for 30 seconds before it times out.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-5

The pitch selected is based on the patients heart rate on the console at the time that the
"confirm" button is selected on the view/edit screen. Therefore it is very important to be
aware of what the pitch is set to prior to confirming the scan. If you want to use a smaller
pitch other than what the scanner is detecting for the HR, you will need to use the HR
override button located in the gating area.

SnapShot Segment
SnapShot Segment is an acquisition and reconstruction method used to generate
retrospectively ECG-gated images using data from one cardiac cycle in a half-scan
reconstruction technique.
The temporal resolution that results depends on the gantry speed used. For SnapShot
Segment single sector reconstruction, the fastest gantry speed available should be used in
order to optimize the temporal resolution.
Images acquired with SnapShot Segment are annotated SSEG.

SnapShot Burst
SnapShot Burst is a reconstruction method used to create retrospectively gated images
from two cardiac cycles within the same phase of the heart cycle. Burst imaging produces
images with improved temporal resolution due to the combining of data from 2 cardiac
cycles.
SnapShot Burst image reconstruction is recommended to be used for patient's whose heart
rate is higher than the SnapShot Segment range listed above. (Please see previous tables for
specific ranges at each scanner configuration.) The temporal resolution will vary depending
on the heart rate and scanner configuration. Please note, SnapShot Burst reconstruction will
optimize temporal resolution across the image set based on the scan acquisition
parameters. Resulting images will be annotated SSB2 indicating that data from 2 cardiac
cycles was used, or SSEG when resulting acquisition parameters yield single sector images.

SnapShot Burst Plus

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-6

SnapShot Burst Plus images will be annotated SSB4, SSB3, or SSB2 to indicate the number of
cardiac cycles that contributed to each image. Some images may be annotated SSEG if
parameters varied such that only one cycle was available.
NOTE: If the patient HR varies unexpectedly during the scan, and ungated images result,
these images will be annotated 'SEGM' on the axial images. In order to optimize
cardiac helical imaging results, always watch the patient heart rate during the
pre-scans and practice breath hold to ensure cardiac helical acquisition parameters
are optimized to meet the minimum expected heart rate.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-7

CardIQ SnapShot Window

When you click [Gating], the CardIQ SnapShot window opens.
Figure 10-6

Table 10-1 This table provides a description of each function in the CardIQ window.

Function Descriptions
This button toggles [On] or [Off]. This button defaults to [On] which allows
Heart Rate
the scanner to capture the ECG signal. This needs to be on in order to do a
Monitoring
cardiac scan.
This button toggles [On] or [Off]. This is defaulted to [Off]. If you click [On],
you can manually enter the patient’s heart rate which forces the system to
Heart Rate override the detected heart rate and set the pitch to the heart rate you
Override entered.
NOTE: This is defaulted [On] for SnapShot Burst Plus scanning.
R to R This displays the heart rate in beats per minute. This is updated based on
Interval the average of 2 R to R intervals.
This controls the cardiac phase location of a given reconstruction. It refers
R-Peak
to the center of the reconstruction window in terms of a percentage
Delay
distance between any two successive R-Peaks given from the ECG.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-8

Function Descriptions
Use this to manually enter a patient’s heart rate for patients whose heart
rates vary during breath holds. You can only enter a value when the Heart
Heart Rate
Rate Override button has been toggled [On]. This is a mandatory entry for
SnapShot Burst Plus scanning.
This accepts the parameters that you entered and returns you to the view
[Accept]
edit screen.
[Cancel] This closes the window without accepting any changes.

CAUTION: ECG signal clarity and integrity must be confirmed prior to performing
ECG-gated acquisitions. Items which may require adjustments of equipment
settings or positioning, or patient set-up include:-
- External Interference
- Atypical Patient ECG (e.g. elevated T-Waves, low ECG amplitude or signal
strength)
- Suboptimal Patient Connection
ECG lead placement should follow recommended guidelines to optimize
results.
If the ECG lead becomes disconnected during the scan, or the heart rate
drops below 40 BPM, the images will be reconstructed as non-gated
segment images. This is done to avoid inaccuracy of the z-location of images
where necessary.

CAUTION: A patient with any of the conditions listed below may require additional
attention. If patients are scanned with these conditions, the software may not
be able to detect the R-Peaks and the images therefore may be produced as
ungated segment images.
- Patients with multiple pre-contractions or extra systole (e.g. PVC, PAC)
- Patients with persistent or extreme arrhythmia
- Patients with bi-ventricular (dual chamber pacemakers)

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-9

CAUTION: Patient motion, respiration, beat-to-beat variability of heart rate, heart

ECG (or EKG) Waveform

The ECG (or EKG) waveform represents the electrical activity of the heart that correlates to
heart motion.
• Cardiac contraction is called systole.
• Cardiac relaxation is called diastole.
Three waveform elements are critical to cardiac gating.
• P-wave
– Represents depolarization of the atria and results in contraction or systole of the
atria.
• QRS complex
– Represents depolarization of the ventricles and results in contraction or systole of the
ventricles.
¾ R-wave is used for triggering because of its strong electrical signal and correlation
of the muscle activity of the heart.
¾ The R to R interval (Figure 10-7) is the time between the peak of one R-wave and
the peak of the next. Each R to R interval represents the length of one cardiac
cycle.
• T-Wave
– Represents repolarization of the ventricles and results in relaxation or diastole of the
ventricles.
Figure 10-7 ECG with Triggers

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-10

Figure 10-8 ECG without Triggers

• Ventricular systole extends from the R-Peak to the T-Wave when the heart is contracting
and expelling blood.
• Ventricular diastole extends from the T-Wave to the next R-Peak. During diastole, the
ventricles fill with blood.

CAUTION: There is a possibility that the ECG signal may not be detected by the scanner
due to improper lead placements or a lead falling off during the scan. It is
important to place new leads on the patient before the scan. Make sure the
leads are attached properly.

CAUTION: Ensure the ECG patches are not past expiration date and that the gel on the
pads is still moist for proper conduction of the ECG signal for successful
gating.
NOTE: The GE recommended electrodes are Dyna/Trace1500 by ConMed.

Auto Detection of Heart Rate

Automatic detection of heart rate can be performed in any ECG-gated scan mode, such as
cardiac helical or gated cine. When performing cardiac imaging, the scanner must be able
to detect the heart rate of the patient. This is accomplished by connecting the ECG monitor
to the scanner and applying ECG electrodes to the patient and enabling Gating on the
view/edit screen. Once the ECG monitor is on and the signal is being read from the patient,
the heart rate will be displayed on the scanner console and scan parameters, such as pitch
for helical will be optimized. The auto detect scanning method is used for patients with a
stable resting heart rate that is maintained during breath hold and contrast injection as
seen from the pre-scans, and is the default parameter for most cardiac exams. Under the
auto detection method, the Heart Rate Monitoring button is [On] and the Heart Rate
Override button is [Off].

Manual Detect Heart Rate

Manual detect Heart Rate is an optional monitoring feature where you can decide to
manually enter (override) the heart rate instead of using the auto detected heart rate. The
heart rate you enter is based on the heart rate observed during practicing of breath holds

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-11

and pre-scans. For instance, if the heart rate is at 65 BPM at rest then changes to 55 BPM
while the patient is holding their breath, manual detect would be recommended. To enable
manual detect you must click on [Gating] and then toggle Heart Rate Override [On]. Enter
the desired heart rate in the Heart Rate text box. The default heart rate value for manual
detect is 0 BPM. Heart Rate Override should be used If the heart rate increases or decreases
more than 10 BPM for a breath hold. This entry is compulsory in SnapShot Burst Plus
scanning mode.
The heart rate entered in Heart Rate Override should always be the minimum value in HR
Range for the lowest heart rate expected for the patient which was seen during breath hold
practice, scouts acquisitions, localizer acquisitions, normal breathing or test bolus contrast
injection.

Pitch
Pitch is the ratio of table travel per rotation divided by the detector Z collimation. With
cardiac scans, the movement of the cradle and the x-ray tube needs to be in sync with the
heart rate to avoid any gaps in the image data set. As the patient’s heart rate increases, the
pitch increases for SnapShot Segment and Burst Mode. If the patient’s heart rate decreases,
the pitch decreases. This is why it is very important to understand the heart rate of the
patient during a breath hold so the appropriate pitch is selected.

Phase Location
The cardiac phase is defined as a point or period in time in the cardiac cycle. The location of
the cardiac phase is defined in a percentage of how far it is between R-Peaks (% R-Peak
Delay).

% R-Peak Value
The percent R-peak parameter controls the cardiac phase location of a given reconstruction
(Figure 10-9). It refers to the center of the reconstruction window in terms of a percentage
distance between any two successive R-Peaks given from the ECG.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-12

Figure 10-9 % R-Peak Value

SnapShot Mode Usage

There are four different scanning modes you can choose from when scanning a cardiac
exam which are: SnapShot Segment, SnapShot Burst, and SnapShot Burst Plus.
You should be aware that a patient’s heart rate may change based on the breathing
instructions. It is important to hyperventilate the patient for all series including the scout and
timing bolus scan. The heart rate is displayed on the ECG monitor and the scanner once you
have clicked on [Gating].

ECG Modulated mA
NOTE: This feature is only available on LightSpeed 5.X, BrightSpeed and LightSpeed Pro16
systems.
ECG Modulation is a dose reduction feature that allows the user to specify a minimum and
maximum mA Range which is varied across the patient's cardiac cycle (R-to-R interval. A
phase percent range is specified for the Full mA range. ECG Modulation is only available in
cardiac helical modes (SnapShot Segment, SnapShot Burst and SnapShot Burst Plus).
In a stable heart rate this can lead to clinically relevant dose reduction for the patient by
implementing "full mA" for the useful portion of the cardiac cycle where images are to be
reconstructed and a reduced mA for the remainder of the cardiac cycle.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-13

Figure 10-10 Full mA

There are four parameters to set for ECG dose modulation.

– Start and End phase for full mA.
– Min and Max mA Setting.
Set the start phase for full mA to be delivered in the useful portion of the cardiac cycle for
imaging (example 70%).
Set the End Phase for full mA to be delivered in the useful portion of the cardiac cycle for
imaging (example 80%).
Set the Min mA to be used outside the above phase range (no less than 20% of full mA can
be set, 40% of Max mA is the default).
Set the Max mA to be used within the above phase range.
There will be ramp up time factored in for the Min mA to alter to Max mA & vice versa by the
software.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-14

Figure 10-11 mA Control Window

NOTE: For Heart Rates < 65 BPM, we recommend full mA range from 70 % to 80 %. For heart
rates > 65, we recommend full mA range from 40-80 %.

Scan Preparation
For single barrel injector's: Load with 80-100cc of contrast. (Please note: the total
volume and strength of contrast used is the site's discretion).
For dual barrel injector's: Load contrast syringe with 70-90cc of 300 to 350 strength
contrast media. (Please note: the total volume and strength of contrast used is the
site's discretion). Also load saline syringe with 50cc Saline.
Explain test to patient and have them sign a consent form if required at your site.
Have the patient lie supine on the table feet first.
Start IV line; make sure to explain the effects of the contrast to the patient. Even if the
patient has had a contrast injection before, reinforce how they will feel during the
scan. This step is CRITICAL as this will help minimize the patient's anxiety during the

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-15

injection of the contrast. Reassure them that what they will feel during the injection is
normal and they should try to remain relaxed during the scan.
Turn on the ECG machine, and ensure good connection to gantry and leads. To
confirm a good connection, check the upper right display area of the monitor, Figure
10-12.
Check that the Heart icon is illuminated on the gantry display.
Figure 10-12 ECG Machine showing connection to Gantry

ECG monitor showing valid

connection to the gantry on the
left and no connection on the right

If you do not have a good connection, check to make sure that the cable connecting
the ECG machine to the backside of the Gantry is plugged in properly, and the same
cable is connected to the ECG Machine. In case of low signal, please check electrode
placement and chose alternate position if needed. If there is "noise" within the ECG
wave, it is recommended that you DO NOT SCAN, until this condition is corrected.
Make sure excess IV tubing and excess ECG cable length is properly placed and
secured. Movement of the lead wires during scanning can degrade the gating signal.
To ensure patient safety and avoid disruption of the gating signal, any IV tubing and
the ECG cable length need to be secured properly.
Prior to the scan, have the patient practice the breathing instructions that will be
given during the exam. The scan time for the contrast enhanced cardiac gated
acquisition should be around 5-8 seconds to cover the entire heart. Recommended
breathing instructions include having the patient take a couple of breaths in and out
before holding their breath in order to increase their oxygen levels. Typical procedure
is to instruct the patient to take in one breath, blow it out, then take in another
breath, blow it out, then take in one more breath and hold their breath don't breathe.
Have the patient hold their breath for 20-30 seconds and then inform the patient to
breathe normally. Make sure to watch the ECG monitor during the breathing

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-16

instructions and take note of the patient's heart rate while they are holding their
breath. A patient's heart rate usually stabilizes a few seconds after they begin
holding their breath. Monitoring the heart rate during the breathing instructions
provides information of how long it takes to become stable and allows you to adjust
breathing instructions for the contrast enhanced acquisition to achieve as stable of
heart rate as possible during the contrast enhanced cardiac gated scan.
If the patient has difficulty holding their breath, you may place the patient on 2-4
liters of oxygen via nasal cannula (per a physician's orders, and the site's discretion).
Placing the patient on oxygen will also help to lower their heart rate.
It is recommended to have a cardiac voice programmed in the scanner to give
CONSISTENT breathing. When building this voice make sure to breathe your patient
SLOWLY. The breathing instructions should be no shorter than 10 seconds. When
recording the instructions, after you say take a breath in and hold it, make sure to
wait for 3-5 sec. (of silence) prior to clicking on the stop recording button. This will
give the patient enough time to hold their breath before the scan starts and for their
heart rate to stabilize before the scan, otherwise the patient may still be breathing in
during the first several slices which could lead to motion on your images.
The Preset Delay in Auto Voice can be used to program 1-7 seconds additional time
prior to x-ray on as needed for each patient to ensure the patient is holding their
breath.

Patient Preparation
Patient preparation is extremely important step in the production of gated cardiac images
due to the dependency on the patient's heart rate input via ECG monitor during the
acquisition of data. The procedure should be explained completely before the exam is
started. Inform the patient of the breathing instructions that you are giving and practice the
breathing instructions before the scan. Review the potential effects the patient may
experience as the contrast is being injected. Inform the patient of the four phases in the
exam and explain what will happen in each phase. This helps the patient understand what
to expect, what is expected of them and remain calm throughout the exam.
This keeps the heart rate at a normal rhythm if the patient is comfortable with what is
happening. If the heart rate changes drastically during the scan, the image quality is
compromised.
The heart rate stabilizes 2-7 seconds after a breath hold. To help alleviate issues at the
beginning of the scan, have the patients start to hold their breath 3-5 seconds prior to x-ray
On.
The key to success in cardiac imaging is a stable heart rate, ideally the heart rate variation
should be within 5 bpm during a scan. Heart rate should not vary over 10 bpm during a
scan.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-17

Patient Skin Preparation & Electrode Placement

It is recommended that the electrodes/pads NOT be placed over muscle, scar tissue (from
surgery such as bypass etc.), or hair. Proper placement of the electrode is over the clavicles
after the arms have been raised over the patient's head with the arms positioned on an
elevated surface, such as pillows or support sponge. The patient's arms should NOT be
placed flat on the table or placed on the gantry due possible vessel flow limitations or
arm/shoulder motion that can result from these positions.
It is very important to have good skin contact. If patient has used any lotion or oils prior to
the study, you may have to scrub the area until slightly pink with a 4 x 4 gauze pad to ensure
good contact.
1. If placed over muscle, the ECG can pick up the electrical activity of the muscle due to the
patient holding their arm over their head. Whenever possible let the patient relax their
arms, so their shoulder muscles do not get fatigued.
2. Scar tissue is denser and will be more difficult to get a good signal. If the patient has
scar tissue in shoulder area, place the electrode out onto the patients arm. In the chest
area, place the electrode in an area with no scar tissue.
3. Placing the electrodes over a very hairy area will not allow good contact to the skin. If
necessary shave the area where the electrode is to be positioned.
Follow Figure 10-14 for proper Lead Placement using the IVY ECG Monitor: First raise the
patient's arms above their head, and then place the leads on the patient as shown. (If the
leads are placed with the patient's arms down, the leads may move position when you have
them raise their arms above their head for the scan. This can cause a low/weak signal to the
ECG machine, which could cause cardiac gating issues.)
Place the two upper leads directly on the mid portion of the patient's clavicle. The electrodes
can be moved lateral if needed to provide better signal. Refer to Figure 10-13and Figure
10-14.
Figure 10-13 Invivo Lead placement diagram

(Left Chest direstly on mid-clavicle)

(Right Chest direstly on mid-clavicle)

(Left trunk below the rib angle)

(Right trunk below the rib angle)

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-18

Figure 10-14 IVY Monitor Recommended 3 Lead Placement

NOTE: Lead placement on the clavicles needs to be done with the arms over the head in
position to be used for scanning.

Alternate Electrode Positions for Signal Clarity

In case of low signal amplitude, undefined R-Peaks, or elevated P- or T-Waves indicating the
QRS peak is not noticeably stronger than the surrounding ECG waveform segments, these
alternate positions shown below may improve the ECG signal triggering.
Figure 10-15 Alternate Electrode Positions

Electrodes may be placed farther out on the arms or in this alternate position.
Check to ensure the electrodes are not the wrong type, expired or old
The electrodes need to be radiotranslucent with a fresh gel pad (not dried out) to maintain
good electrical contact with the skin surface during table movement. Do not use patient
monitoring electrodes that may be available from other departments in your facility as
these are not suitable for short term ECG triggering. Patient Monitoring electrodes are not
suitable for ECG triggering. Recommended electrodes are listed below.
NOTE: The GE recommended electrodes are Dyna/Trace1500 by ConMed.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-19

If a different type of electrode is used, there is a risk of errors in gating which could lead to
difficulties in gaining effective diagnosis from the cardiac exams or could even lead to
non-diagnostic results.

Scan Parameters Usage

Before scanning a patient, a cardiac protocol should be created. This saves time setting up a
patient for the cardiac scan. Once patient preparation is complete, there are four steps to
acquire data for CI.
1. Scout scan
2. Localizer scan
3. Timing bolus scan
4. Cardiac Helical scan

Scout Scan
First, you acquire two scouts with the patient in the feet first supine position at 0 and 90
degrees. Refer to Table 10-2 for the parameters.
Table 10-2 Scout Parameters

Action Parameters
Gating Check On
Start Location S60
End Location I300
mA 40
kV 120
Hyperventilation (You must record this before the
scan.) Have the patient take slow breaths in and
Auto Voice
out and one final breath in and hold it. This is
known as hyperventilation.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-20

Localizer Scan
Second, a series needs to be done to localize the heart to identify the level where the
coronary arteries originate and the base of the heart. (A Smart Score - coronary artery
calcium scoring - series can be done in place of the localizer scan.)
Table 10-3 Localizer Parameters

Action Parameters
Gating On
Scan Type Helical
Rotation Time 0.5
Rotation Length Full
Start Location One inch below the carina
End Location Apex of heart
Number of images 40
Thickness/Speed 3.75 mm/17.5
Pitch 1.75:1
Interval 0
Gantry Tilt 0
SFOV Large
kV 120
mA 150 (200 for large patient)
Prep Delay 5 seconds
ISD 1.2 seconds
Breath Hold Single Breath Hold
Breathe Time 0
Hyperventilation (You must record this before
Voice Lights Timer
the scan.)
DFOV 25

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-21

Timing Bolus Scan

Third, a series has to be done to determine the optimum prep delay for the contrast
injection. This is often referred to as a Timing Bolus injection. Refer to Table 10-4 for the
parameters.
Timing Bolus is the recommended method for determining patient specific contrast flow for
cardiac scanning due to the high degree of confidence needed to capture the arterial phase
imaging at the ideal point in the contrast injection duration. Timing Bolus should be used for
each cardiac exam in order to calculate the contrast arrival time for each individual patient.
GE does not recommend use of SmartPrep for routine use with clinical patient cardiac
scanning.
Table 10-4 Timing Bolus Parameters

Action Parameters
Gating On
Scan Type Axial
Rotation Time 0.8
Rotation Length Full
Start and End Location Aortic root near Left Main Artery Ostium
Number of images 12-15
5 mm in 1i mode for LightSpeed Plus systems
Thickness/Speed 10 mm in 1i mode for LightSpeed Ultra and
LightSpeed16 systems
Interval 0
Gantry Tilt 0
SFOV Large
kV 120
mA 80
Prep Delay 5 seconds
ISD 1.2 seconds
Breath Hold Single Breath Hold
Breathe Time 0
Hyperventilation (You must record this before
Voice Lights Timer
the scan.)
DFOV 25
Suggested Volume/Rate 15-20 cc at 4 cc per second

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-22

Cardiac Helical Scan

In the last step the main cardiac scan is acquired. Use one of the Cardiac scan modes
depending on heart rate and focus of the study. Refer to Table 10-5 for the parameters.
Table 10-5 Cardiac Helical Scan Parameters

SnapShot Burst SnapShot Burst Plus

SnapShot Segment
Action (Helical) (Helical)
(Helical) Parameters
Parameters Parameters
Gating On On On
Scan Type Cardiac Cardiac Cardiac
0.5 - 0.6 Heart rate
Rotation Time 0.5 0.5
dependant
One inch below One inch below One inch below
carina and adjust carina and adjust carina and adjust
Start Location
the scan time to the scan time to the scan time to
cover heart cover heart cover heart
End at the apex of End at the apex of End at the apex of
End Location
the heart the heart the heart
Thickness/Speed 0.625 / 1.25 0.625 / 1.25 0.625 / 1.25
This is automatically
selected by the
Pitch Fixed Pitch 0.3:1 Fixed Pitch 0.275:1
scanner based on
the heart rate.
Interval 0.625 / 1.25 0.625 / 1.25 0.625 / 1.25
Gantry Tilt 0 0 0
SFOV Large Large Large
kV 120 120 120
mA 300 / 370 300 / 370 300 / 370
20 seconds 20 seconds 20 seconds
This changes when This changes when This changes when
you set up the scan you set up the scan you set up the scan
after doing the after doing the after doing the
Prep Delay
timing bolus and get timing bolus and timing bolus and
actual peak time get actual peak get actual peak
based on MIROI time based on time based on
calculations. MIROI calculations. MIROI calculations.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-23

SnapShot Burst SnapShot Burst Plus

SnapShot Segment
Action (Continued) (Helical) (Helical)
(Helical) Parameters
Parameters Parameters
Single breath hold Single breath hold Single breath hold
approximately approximately approximately
Breath Hold 20-40 seconds 20-40 seconds 20-40 seconds
depending on depending on depending on
coverage coverage coverage
Hyperventilation Hyperventilation Hyperventilation
(You must record (You must record (You must record
Voice Lights Timer
this before the this before the this before the
scan.) scan.) scan.)
DFOV 25 cm adjustable 25 cm adjustable 25 cm adjustable
Algorithm Stnd Stnd Stnd
Suggested 100-150 cc at 4 cc 100-150 cc at 4 cc 100-150 cc at 4 cc
Volume/Rate per second per second per second

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-24

Cardiac Series Retro Reconstruction Numbering

Upon reviewing cardiac image series, or as routine processing, additional image sets may
be desired. These image sets can be generated from the existing cardiac scan file using the
Retro Recon option from the left monitor. In Retro Recon, you may adjust items such as the
cardiac phase location, recon location, slice thickness, recon kernel, recon filter, or recon
mode as applicable for the various acquisition types.

Single Phase Image Set

• Retro SnapShot Segment – Series 104 (100 + original series #)
• Retro SnapShot Burst-2 – Series 124 (120 + original series #)
• Retro Snapshot Burst Plus (3 or 4) - Series 144 (140 + original series #)
When retro reconstructing a multi phase (MP) data set to the acquired slice thickness the
series numbers are as follows if the original series number is 4.

Multiphase Image Set

• Retro SnapShot Segment – Series 504 (500 + original series #)
• Retro SnapShot Burst-2 – Series 524 (520 + original series #)
• Retro Snapshot Burst Plus (3 or 4) - Series 544 (540 + original series #)
If images are Retro Reconstructed with a thicker slice, the series number has an additional
50 added on.

Cardiac ECG Gated Images are annotated with either of the following:
• SSEG (SnapShot Segment – single sector image)
• SSB2 (SnapShot Burst – two sector image)
• SSB3, or SSB4 (Snapshot Burst Plus - up to three or four sector image)
• SEGM (Ungated segmented image reconstruction)

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-25

ECG Viewer Overview

The ECG Viewer option provides the capability to display the patient's ECG waveform on the
CT console during the scan acquisition. The [ECG Trace] button can used display or hide the
ECG waveform on the View/Edit screen and the size of the ECG Viewer window may be
adjusted by clicking on the arrow at the front of the trace.
The ECG waveform is read from the ECG trigger (IVY) monitor and requires an Ethernet
connection between the ECG monitor and console to be active to display the trace on the
console.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-26

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for cardiac imaging acquisitions.
Specifically, it describes how to:
• Set Up a Patient
• Scan the Patient
– Scout Scans
– Localizer Scan
– Timing Bolus Scans
– Enhanced Cardiac Scan
• Reconstruct Cardiac Scans
• Save ECG Trace

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-27

Set Up a Patient
Before bringing the patient in the scan room, make sure that you have everything ready. The
ECG monitor should be plugged in and connected to the gantry with the leads plugged into
the monitor. Have a supply of fresh unexpired ECG electrodes available. Make sure that the
cardiac protocol is built and ready to use. Have the injector loaded with contrast.
NOTE: Use electrodes made with silver/silver chloride (Ag/AgCl) gel on the pad. Do not use
other additional gels. We recommend using the electrodes that are shipped with the
system.
NOTE: The GE recommended electrodes are Dyna/Trace1500 by ConMed.
It is recommended to have the patient fast for ~4 hours prior to their appointment
due to the introduction of contrast media in this examination.
In addition the patient should be advised not to consume any caffeine containing
substances for 12 hours prior to the examination. These could raise the heart rate. An
example is coffee.
In order to keep the heart rate as low as possible the patient should also be advised
not to engage in any cardiovascular exercise prior to the examination.
Administration of Beta Blockers and/or Sublingual Nitroglycerin Spray can be used at
the sites discretion.
The key to cardiac imaging is a Stable Heart Rate, ideally less than 5 BPM variation,
but no more than 10 BPM variation for the most successful exams.
1. Load the injector.
For single barrel injector's: Load with 80-100cc of contrast.
NOTE: The total volume and strength of contrast used is the site's discretion.
For dual barrel injector's: Load contrast syringe with 70-90cc of 300 to 350 strength
contrast media.
The total volume and strength of contrast used is the site's discretion. Also, load
saline syringe with 50cc Saline. Explain the exam to the patient.
2. Position the patient supine feet first on the cradle.
3. Start an IV line for the contrast injection.
4. Prepare the patient for lead placement.
a) Place arms above patient’s head.
b) Gently scrub the location with cotton gauze until the skin is a healthy pink.
– Do not use alcohol.
c) If necessary, shave a four-square-inch area.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-28

5. Apply the ECG electrodes and leads to the patient.

Use new ECG electrodes for the cardiac exam. Do not use existing electrodes on the
patient.
Attach the electrodes no more than 5-10 minutes before the scan.
Do not use dry or expired electrodes. They do not properly conduct the signal which
may cause intermittent triggering.
To apply the leads, place them according to Figure 10-17. Try to keep the leads away
from the scan field of view.
Once the leads are connected to the patient, make sure you have a valid ECG wave
and the heart rate is between 30-200 BPM.
Figure 10-16 InVivo Lead placement diagram

(Left Chest direstly on mid-clavicle)

(Right Chest direstly on mid-clavicle)

(Left trunk below the rib angle)

(Right trunk below the rib angle)

Figure 10-17 IVY Monitor Recommended 3 Lead Placement

Alternate Electrode Positions for Signal Clarity for Ivy Monitors

In case of low signal or where QRS Peak is not noticeably stronger than the other ECG Wave
Segments, these alternate positions may improve ECG signal and detection.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-29

Figure 10-18 Alternate Electrode Positions

Electrodes may be placed farther out on the arms or in this alternate position.
Check to ensure the electrodes are not the wrong type, expired or old
The electrodes need to be radiolucent and have fresh gel (not dried out). They should be
sticky enough to maintain good electrical contact with the skin surface during table motion.
Do not use Patient Monitoring electrodes that may be available from other departments in
your facility. Patient Monitoring electrodes are not suitable for ECG triggering.
Recommended electrodes are listed below.
NOTE: The GE recommended electrodes are Dyna/Trace1500 by ConMed
If a different type of electrode is used, there is a risk of errors in gating which could lead to
difficulties in gaining effective diagnosis from the cardiac exams or could even lead to
non-diagnostic results.
6. Turn on the ECG machine. Make sure there is good connection from the patient to the
ECG monitor and to the gantry and console.
To confirm good gantry connection, check the upper right display area of the monitor
to make sure it indicates Connected.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-30

Figure 10-19 Monitor indicates it is connected

– If you do not have a good connection, check to make sure that the cable
connecting the ECG machine to the backside of the Gantry is plugged in properly,
and the same cable is connected to the ECG Machine. In case of low signal, please
check electrode placement and chose alternate position if needed. If there is
"noise" within the ECG wave, it is recommended that you DO NOT SCAN, until this
condition is corrected.
7. Practice hyperventilation breathing instructions with the patient.
A hyperventilation technique is used on all scans prior and during the cardiac scan.
During the practice breath hold, make sure to watch the ECG monitor to determine
the average heart rate during the breath hold.
NOTE: If the patient has difficulty holding their breath for 30 seconds, it may be useful to put
the patient on two liters of oxygen at the physician's discretion. Prior to the Cardiac
Helical scan, have them take in a couple breaths and then perform the
hyperventilation breathing for the scan. Oxygen may also help lower the heart rate.
NOTE: It is recommended to have a cardiac voice programmed in the scanner to give
CONSISTENT breathing. When building this voice make sure to breathe your patient
SLOWLY. The breathing instructions should be no shorter than 17 seconds. When
recording the instructions, after you say take a breath in, let it out, take a breath in,
let it out, take a breath in and hold it, make sure to wait for 3-5 seconds (of silence)
prior to clicking on the stop recording button. This will give the patient enough time
to hold their breath before the scan starts and for their heart rate to stabilize before
the scan, otherwise the patient may still be breathing in during the first several slices
which could lead to motion on your images. The Pre-Set Delay in Auto Voice can be
used to add 1-7 seconds additional time prior to x-ray on as need for each patient to
make sure the patient is holding their breath. Typically the patient's heart rate
stabilizes in 3 to 5 seconds.
8. Explain the contrast injection.
Explain to the patient that during the cardiac helical scan, they will be receiving an
injection of contrast material which may make them feel very warm. This warm
feeling is a normal response during the injection.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-31

NOTE: If patient’ are unaware that during the contrast injection they may feel very warm,
they may become anxious, causing the heart rate to increase beyond the ranges you
have prescribed the scan for.
The injector should only be used by trained personnel.
NOTE: Watch the ECG waveform for irregular heart beat patterns prior to acquiring the scan.
Irregular heart beat patterns can be the cause of degrade image quality.

Quick Steps: Set Up a Patient

1. Load the injector.
2. Position the patient supine feet first on the cradle.
3. Start an IV line for the contrast injection.
4. Prepare the patient for lead placement.
5. Apply the ECG electrodes and leads to the patient.
6. Turn on the ECG machine. Make sure there is good connection from the patient to the
ECG monitor and to the gantry and console.
7. Practice hyperventilation breathing instructions with the patient.
8. Explain the contrast injection.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-32

Scan the Patient

The following steps assume you have previously built a cardiac protocol. The parameters
were discussed earlier in the chapter. There are four scans series to do.
NOTE: The most accurate display of the heart rate is on the Operators Console.

Scout Scans
This series is scanned to localize the area that you need for scanning the cardiac series. This
description assumes you have selected the appropriate protocol based on the heart rate for
SnapShot Segment, SnapShot Burst, or SnapShot Burst Plus.
1. Landmark the patient at the sternal notch.
2. Click [New Patient] and enter the patient information.
3. Select the Cardiac protocol and accept it.
4. To verify that the scanner is receiving the ECG signal, click [Gating Off] on the view/edit
screen.
Figure 10-20

If the system detects a valid ECG signal, the patient’s heart rate average in Beats Per
Minute (BPM) is displayed on the Gating button. On the Console, the BPM is a 3 cycle
average of the R-R interval. On the ECG Monitor, the BPM value displayed is a 3 cycle
average for the IVY 3150-A or 3100-A with Ethernet. The BPM value for the IVY 3150
and 3100 with Ethernet is a 10 cycle average.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-33

5. To view the ECG waveform, click [ECG Trace].

If the system detects no signal from the ECG monitor, the button turns red and no
BPM value is displayed.

NOTE: Do not attempt to scan without a valid ECG trace.

6. [Confirm] the scout views, hyperventilate the patient.
NOTE: Watch the heart rate during the scan and note the lowest average heart rate.
It is important to give the patient the same breathing instruction for each series. The
patient should be requested to take two breaths in and out (hyperventilate) and to
hold the third breath before the actual scan is acquired. This helps provide a constant
heart rate during the cardiac scan.
7. Press Start Scan.

Quick Steps: Scan the Patient-Scout Scans

1. Landmark the patient at the sternal notch.
2. Click [New Patient] and enter the patient information.
3. Select the Cardiac protocol and accept it.
4. To verify that the scanner is receiving the ECG signal, click [Gating Off] on the view/edit
screen.
5. To view the ECG waveform, click [ECG Trace].
6. [Confirm] the scout views, hyperventilate the patient.
7. Press Start Scan.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-34

Scan the Patient

Localizer Scan
This series is used to find your starting and ending locations for the heart.
1. Click [Next Series] from the protocol.
2. Click [Show Localizer] and position the scans so you scan from approximately one inch
below the carina to the apex of the heart.
NOTE: Pay close attention to where the position of the scan is taken. It should cover the
complete heart.
3. Set up Low-Dose helical scan parameters.
120kV, 0.5 sec, 150 mA (200mA for large patients) 1.75:1 pitch 17.5 table speed.
4. Click [Accept].
5. Click [Confirm].
6. Give the patient the same breathing instruction that you have practiced with.
7. Press Move to scan.
8. Press Start Scan.

Quick Steps: Localizer Scan

1. Click [Next Series] from the protocol.
2. Click [Show Localizer] and position the scans so you scan from approximately one inch
below the carina to the apex of the heart.
3. Set up Low-Dose helical scan parameters.
4. Click [Accept].
5. Click [Confirm].
6. Give the patient the same breathing instruction that you have practiced with.
7. Press Move to scan.
8. Press Start Scan.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-35

Scan the Patient

Timing Bolus Scans
This scan series is scanned to figure out the contrast peak enhancement time.
1. Click [Next Series].
2. Place your localizer one centimeter below the carina and just above the base of the
heart.

3. Connect the injector to the patient and arm it.

NOTE: Make sure the injector is set to deliver 15-20 cc of contrast at a rate of 5 cc per second.
The injector should only be used by trained personnel.
4. [Confirm] the timing bolus scans, hyperventilate the patient.
5. Start the injector and press Start Scan at the same time.
NOTE: Watch the heart rate during the scan and note the lowest average heart rate.
When hyperventilating the patient for the timing bolus, it is recommended to instruct
the patient to breath in and out twice. Do not hyperventilate the patient too quickly
or this could raise the heart rate.
Press Start Scan and start the injector at the same time, and then have the patient
take a breath in and hold it.
6. Review the images and using MIROI find out where the peak enhancement occurred.
For more information on how to use MIROI, refer to the Measure Density Readings on
Multiple Images task.
Add 3-5 seconds to the peak enhancement to calculate the prep delay. Once you
have the time to peak enhancement value, add an additional 4 seconds to allow
filling of the distal coronary vessels. This number will be the Prep Delay for the
contrast enhanced cardiac scan.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-36

Figure 10-21 MIROI graph

Quick Steps: Timing Bolus Scans

1. Click [Next Series].
2. Place your localizer one centimeter below the carina and just above the base of the
heart.
3. Connect the injector to the patient and arm it.
4. [Confirm] the timing bolus scans, hyperventilate the patient.
5. Start the injector and press Start Scan at the same time.
6. Review the images and using MIROI find out where the peak enhancement occurred.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-37

Scan the Patient

Enhanced Cardiac Scan
This is the final scan before transferring the images to the Advantage Windows Workstation.
When the scan is complete, you may want to reserve the scan data until the images are
reconstructed and transferred to the workstation. For more information on how to reserve
scan data, refer to the Reserve/Release Scan Data task.
1. Click [Next Series] from the protocol.
NOTE: Confirm the ECG trace is strong and there are no arrhythmias.

2. Click [Show Localizer] and position the scans so you scan from approximately one inch
below the carina to the apex of the heart.
NOTE: Pay close attention to where the position of the scan is taken. It should cover the
complete heart. Be careful not to overscan the area.
3. Click [Gating] and the CardIQ window opens.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-38

Figure 10-22 Card IQ Window

The auto detect mode is the default pitch selection method for SnapShot Segment
and SnapShot Burst and automatically set the pitch based on the patient's heart rate
when the scan is confirmed. If you have found that the heart rate is different during
the breath holds, you should enable Heart Rate Override and manually enter a heart
rate value to the minimum hear rate for the HR Range that contains the observed
value.
NOTE: For information on which SnapShot mode to use, refer to SnapShot Mode Usage.
4. If you are going to manually enter the heart rate in SnapShot Segment mode, click [On]
in the Heart Rate Override box.
5. For Cardiac Helical modes, click in the Heart Rate box and type in the heart rate that you
want to use.
This is defaulted [On] in SnapShot Burst Plus mode.
6. If desired, click [Recon 2] and [Recon 3] to enter parameters for a second and third
prospective reconstruction for Cardiac Helical acquisitions.
7. Click the syringe icon and enter the contrast description and amount.
8. Click [Accept].
9. Enter the prep delay that you determined from the MIROI timing bolus scan.
10. Arm the injector with 4 cc per second for 100-150 cc.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-39

11. Click [Confirm].

12. Give the patient the same breathing instruction that you have practiced with.
13. Press Move to scan.
14. Start the injector and press Scan at the same time.

Quick Steps: Scan the Patient-Enhanced Cardiac Scan

1. Click [Next Series] from the protocol.
2. Click [Show Localizer] and position the scans so you scan from approximately one inch
below the carina to the apex of the heart.
3. Click [Gating] and the CardIQ window opens.
4. If you are going to manually enter the heart rate in SnapShot Segment mode, click
[On] in the Heart Rate Override box.
5. For Cardiac Helical modes, click in the Heart Rate box and type in the heart rate that
you want to use.
6. If desired, click [Recon 2] and [Recon 3] to enter parameters for a second and third
prospective reconstruction for Cardiac Helical acquisitions.
7. Click the syringe icon and enter the contrast description and amount.
8. Click [Accept].
9. Enter the prep delay that you determined from the MIROI timing bolus scan.
10. Arm the injector with 4 cc per second for 100-150 cc.
11. Click [Confirm].
12. Give the patient the same breathing instruction that you have practiced with.
13. Press Move to scan.
14. Start the injector and press Scan at the same time.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-40

Reconstruct Cardiac Scans

A cardiac scan is acquired throughout a patient’s R to R interval. This gives you the ability to
reconstruct the cardiac images at any phase of the R to R interval. If you would like to
reconstruct an image at different phase than what the image was acquired in, use the
following steps. To learn how to use Retro Recon, refer to the Managing Scan (Raw) Data
chapter.
1. Enter all the parameters for Retro Recon.
2. Click [Phase].

The phase window opens.

Figure 10-23 SnapShot Segment, SnapShot Burst, and SnapShot Burst Pulse Phase Percent

Phase Entry allows you to change the percentage of R-to-R interval by entering in a
start and end phase and the phase increment. The recommended reconstruction

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-41

phases are 70 and 80% (with a 5% increment), but you can change the phase from 0
to 99%.
NOTE: If you are doing a functional imaging exam to acquire the ejection fraction and wall
motion, you should prescribe phases from 5 to 95 in phase increments of 10%.
NOTE: If you are doing a functional study for wall motion or ejection fraction, you may want
to reconstruct the data as 1.25 mm thick images.
3. Check window level settings and filter settings in the Recon Options field.
For more information, refer to: Set Display Factors.
4. Click [Accept].
NOTE: Cardiac images are going to be produced routinely at 75% of the R to R interval. This
location displays the cardiac anatomy and vessels well. You might feel the right
coronary artery has too much motion at 75% and would like to reproduce the images
at end of systole (around 40% - 55% with 5% increments).

Quick Steps: Reconstruct Cardiac Scans

1. Enter all the parameters for Retro Recon.
2. Click [Phase].
3. Check window level settings and filter settings in the Recon Options field.
4. Click [Accept].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-42

Save ECG Trace

Use this feature if you wish to save the ECG trace to a CD.
NOTE: You can save a maximum of 500 ECG files to a CD.
1. Click on the Image Works desktop.
2. Click on [Save ECG Traces] from the tool chest area.
This is located in the upper right corner of the display monitor.

A message appears.

3. Insert a blank CD-Rom in the DVD drive.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-43

4. Click [OK].
Wait for the next message to pop-up.

5. Remove the disk from the drive.

Quick Steps: Save ECG Trace

1. Click on the Image Works desktop.
2. Click on [Save ECG Traces] from the tool chest area.
3. Insert a blank CD-Rom in the DVD drive.
4. Click [OK].
5. Remove the disk from the drive.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 10-44

Chapter 11
Cardiac Imaging for
LightSpeed Pro 16

Introduction
This chapter explains the cardiac imaging (CI) scanning process on the LightSpeed Pro16
system. It contains the step-by-step instructions to help you learn how to:
• Set Up a Patient
• Scan the Patient
– Scout Scans
– Localizer Scan
– Timing Bolus Scans
– Enhanced Cardiac Scan
• Reconstruct Cardiac Scans
NOTE: For Cardiac Imaging on LightSpeed Plus, LightSpeed Ultra, and LightSpeed16
systems, refer to Cardiac Imaging chapter.
NOTE: The maximum number of images in a series is 3000 for prospective and retrospective
series. How images are put in different series based on how they are reconstructed.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to successfully complete the cardiac imaging
process. Specifically you need to understand:
• Prior to Scanning
– Cardiac Helical
– SnapShot Segment
– SnapShot Burst
– SnapShot Burst Plus
– CardIQ SnapShot Window
– ECG (or EKG) Waveform
– Auto Detection of Heart Rate
– Manual Detect Heart Rate
– Pitch
– Phase Location
– % R-Peak Value
– SnapShot Mode Usage
– ECG Modulated mA
• Scan Preparation
• Patient Preparation
– Patient Skin Preparation & Electrode Placement
– Alternate Electrode Positions for Signal Clarity
• Scan Parameters Usage
– Scout Scan
– Localizer Scan
– Timing Bolus Scan
– Cardiac Helical Scan
• Cardiac Series Retro Reconstruction Numbering
– Single Phase Image Set
– Multiphase Image Set
– Cardiac ECG Gated Images are annotated with either of the following:

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-2

The figures below demonstrate varying electrocardiograms (ECG) similar to the waveforms
that could be seen from connecting the leads of the cardiac trigger monitor to the patient
for an ECG-gated CT acquisition. These show an expected normal or typical waveform
(Figure 11-2), a suboptimal noisy waveform (Figure 11-3), a suboptimal elevation in T-wave
amplitude (Figure 11-4), and an irregular spacing between the R-peaks creating an
arrhythmia (Figure 11-5).

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-3

Figure 11-2 Normal ECG Trace

Figure 11-3 Noisy ECG Trace

Figure 11-4 ECG Trace with Elevated T-Waves

Figure 11-5 ECG Trace with Arrhythmia

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-4

Figure 11-6 ECG Trace with Arrhythmia

If the waveform is noisy as shown in Figure 11-3 below, please refer to Patient Skin
Preparation & Electrode Placement to ensure the optimal conditions are being met.
Additionally, confirm all cables are properly connected and ECG monitor is positioned away
from the table and gantry.
If the waveform has elevated T-waves, as in Figure 1-7, do the following:
Confirm electrode placement, or
Try to place the electrodes more laterally on clavicles or on the arms, or
Use the Alternate Electrode Positions for Signal Clarity in Figure 11-16.
Refer to Patient Skin Preparation & Electrode Placement.
If this does not yield a more normal waveform (Figure 11-2), try changing the measurement
Lead on the ECG monitor from Lead 2 to Lead 1 or Lead 3.
Avoid scanning patients with known arrhythmias. If arrhythmias (including pre-ventricular
contractions, or extra systole), as seen in Figure 11-5, are seen when reviewing the ECG
trace prior to scanning, attempt to regulate the heart rhythm (e.g. practice breathing
instructions, calm the patient, or follow procedure established by your institution). It is not
advised to scan a patient with arrhythmias as image quality may be degraded.
If you do not see the RED line on the R-peak, but somewhere else, it is advised to make the
appropriate adjustments to the electrode placement, monitor settings and equipment to
ensure proper gating on the R-peak. The white area represents the Reconstruction window
of 75 % R to R interval used for the first set of images reconstructed.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-5

NOTE: If Start Scan times out or you need to pause scan and resume, make sure to review
the patient's heart rate before you resume/reconfirm the scan. The heart rate may
have changed from the value you originally confirmed and a different pitch might be
used for the scan. In cardiac scanning, confirm the acquisition only when you are
ready to proceed. Move to Scan is valid for 180 seconds while Start Scan is only valid
for 30 seconds before it times out.
The pitch selected is based on the patients heart rate on the console at the time that the
"confirm" button is selected on the view/edit screen. Therefore it is very important to be
aware of what the pitch is set to prior to confirming the scan. If you want to use a smaller
pitch other than what the scanner is detecting for the HR, you will need to use the HR
override button located in the gating area.
NOTE: If the heart rate varies more than 5 BPM, use Heart Rate Override in the CardIQ
SnapShot pop-up and enter the minimum value in the HR Range which covers the
lowest BPM expected to occur during the scan to ensure a low enough pitch is used
for the acquisition.

SnapShot Segment
SnapShot Segment is an acquisition and reconstruction method used to generate
retrospectively ECG gated images using data from one cardiac cycle in a half-scan
reconstruction technique.
SnapShot Segment image reconstruction is recommended with data acquired where the
patient’s heart rate is between 40-65 beats per minute (BPM) and the rotation speed is 0.4
seconds. This produces images where the temporal resolution is 200 ms.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-6

optimize temporal resolution across the image set based on the scan acquisition
parameters. Resulting images will be annotated SSB2 indicating that data from 2 cardiac
cycles was used, or SSEG when resulting acquisition parameters yield single sector images.

SnapShot Burst Plus

SnapShot Burst Plus is an acquisition and reconstruction method used to generate
retrospectively ECG-gated images using data from up to 4 consecutive cardiac cycles. Burst
Plus imaging yields improved temporal resolution for patients with high and stable heart
rates.
SnapShot Burst Plus imaging may be useful for patient's with heart rates elevated beyond
the SnapShot Segment and SnapShot Burst heart rate ranges. (Please see charts above for
each scanner configuration.) The gantry rotation speed will be automatically updated based
on the heart rate. For SnapShot Burst Plus imaging it is required to enter a value in the Heart
Rate Override button on the view/edit screen. The heart rate entered should be the lowest
heart rate expected to occur during the scan acquisition.
SnapShot Burst Plus images will be annotated SSB4, SSB3, or SSB2 to indicate the number of
cardiac cycles that contributed to each image. Some images may be annotated SSEG if
parameters varied such that only one cycle was available.
NOTE: If the patient HR varies unexpectedly during the scan, and ungated images result,
these images will be annotated 'SEGM' on the axial images. In order to optimize
cardiac helical imaging results, always watch the patient heart rate during the
pre-scans and practice breath hold to ensure cardiac helical acquisition parameters
are optimized to meet the minimum expected heart rate.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-7

CardIQ SnapShot Window

When you click [Gating], the CardIQ SnapShot window opens.
Figure 11-7

Table 11-1 This table provides a description of each function in the CardIQ window.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-8

CAUTION: ECG signal clarity and integrity must be confirmed prior to performing
ECG-gated acquisitions. Items which may require adjustments of equipment
settings or positioning, or patient set-up include:
- External Interference
- Atypical Patient ECG (e.g. elevated T-Waves, low ECG amplitude or signal
strength)
- Suboptimal Patient Connection
ECG lead placement should follow recommended guidelines to optimize
results.
If the ECG lead becomes disconnected during the scan, or the heart rate
drops below 40 BPM, the images will be reconstructed as non-gated
segment images. This is done to avoid inaccuracy of the z-location of images
where necessary.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-9

CAUTION: Patient motion, respiration, beat-to-beat variability of heart rate, heart

ECG (or EKG) Waveform

The ECG (or EKG) waveform represents the electrical activity of the heart that correlates to
heart motion.
• Cardiac contraction is called systole.
• Cardiac relaxation is called diastole.
Three waveform elements are critical to cardiac gating.
• P-wave
– Represents depolarization of the atria and results in contraction or systole of the
atria.
• QRS complex
– Represents depolarization of the ventricles and results in contraction or systole of the
ventricles.
¾ R-wave is used for triggering because of its strong electrical signal and correlation
of the muscle activity of the heart.
¾ The R to R interval (Figure 11-8) is the time between the peak of one R-wave and
the peak of the next. Each R to R interval represents the length of one cardiac
cycle.
• T-Wave
– Represents repolarization of the ventricles and results in relaxation or diastole of the
ventricles.
Figure 11-8 ECG with Triggers

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-10

Figure 11-9 ECG without Triggers

Auto Detection of Heart Rate

Manual Detect Heart Rate

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-11

% R-Peak Value
The percent R-peak parameter controls the cardiac phase location of a given reconstruction
(Figure 11-10). It refers to the center of the reconstruction window in terms of a percentage
distance between any two successive R-Peaks given from the ECG.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-12

Figure 11-10 % R-Peak Value

SnapShot Mode Usage

ECG Modulated mA
ECG Modulation is a dose reduction feature that allows the user to specify a minimum and
maximum mA Range which is varied across the patient's cardiac cycle (R-to-R interval. A
phase percent range is specified for the Full mA range. ECG Modulation is only available in
cardiac helical modes (SnapShot Segment, SnapShot Burst and SnapShot Burst Plus).
In a stable heart rate this can lead to clinically relevant dose reduction for the patient by
implementing "full mA" for the useful portion of the cardiac cycle where images are to be
reconstructed and a reduced mA for the remainder of the cardiac cycle.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-13

Figure 11-11 Full mA

There are four parameters to set for ECG dose modulation.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-14

Figure 11-12 mA Control Window

NOTE: For Heart Rates < 65 BPM, we recommend full mA range from 70 % to 80 %. For heart
rates > 65, we recommend full mA range from 40-80 %.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-15

injection of the contrast. Reassure them that what they will feel during the injection is
normal and they should try to remain relaxed during the scan.
Turn on the ECG machine, and ensure good connection to gantry and leads. To
confirm a good connection, check the upper right display area of the monitor, Figure
11-13.
Check that the Heart icon is illuminated on the gantry display.
Figure 11-13 ECG Machine showing connection to Gantry

ECG monitor showing valid

connection to the gantry on the
left and no connection on the right

If you do not have a good connection, check to make sure that the cable connecting
the ECG machine to the backside of the Gantry is plugged in properly, and the same
cable is connected to the ECG Machine. In case of low signal, please check electrode
placement and chose alternate position if needed. If there is "noise" within the ECG
wave, it is recommended that you DO NOT SCAN, until this condition is corrected.
Make sure excess IV tubing and excess ECG cable length is properly placed and
secured. Movement of the lead wires during scanning can degrade the gating signal.
To ensure patient safety and avoid disruption of the gating signal, any IV tubing and
the ECG cable length need to be secured properly.
Prior to the scan, have the patient practice the breathing instructions that will be
given during the exam. The scan time for the contrast enhanced cardiac gated
acquisition should be around 5-8 seconds to cover the entire heart. Recommended
breathing instructions include having the patient take a couple of breaths in and out
before holding their breath in order to increase their oxygen levels. Typical procedure
is to instruct the patient to take in one breath, blow it out, then take in another
breath, blow it out, then take in one more breath and hold their breath don't breathe.
Have the patient hold their breath for 10-15 seconds and then inform the patient to
breathe normally. Make sure to watch the ECG monitor during the breathing

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-16

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-17

Patient Skin Preparation & Electrode Placement

It is recommended that the electrodes/pads NOT be placed over muscle, scar tissue (from
surgery such as bypass etc.), or hair. Proper placement of the electrode is over the clavicles
after the arms have been raised over the patient's head with the arms positioned on an
elevated surface, such as pillows or support sponge. The patient's arms should NOT be
placed flat on the table or placed on the gantry due possible vessel flow limitations or
arm/shoulder motion that can result from these positions.
It is very important to have good skin contact. If patient has used any lotion or oils prior to
the study, you may have to scrub the area until slightly pink with a 4 x 4 gauze pad to ensure
good contact.
1. If placed over muscle, the ECG can pick up the electrical activity of the muscle due to the
patient holding their arm over their head. Whenever possible let the patient relax their
arms, so their shoulder muscles do not get fatigued.
2. Scar tissue is denser and will be more difficult to get a good signal. If the patient has
scar tissue in shoulder area, place the electrode out onto the patients arm. In the chest
area, place the electrode in an area with no scar tissue.
3. Placing the electrodes over a very hairy area will not allow good contact to the skin. If
necessary shave the area where the electrode is to be positioned.
Follow Figure 11-15 for proper Lead Placement using the IVY ECG Monitor: First raise the
patient's arms above their head, and then place the leads on the patient as shown. (If the
leads are placed with the patient's arms down, the leads may move position when you have
them raise their arms above their head for the scan. This can cause a low/weak signal to the
ECG machine, which could cause cardiac gating issues.)
Place the two upper leads directly on the mid portion of the patient's clavicle. The electrodes
can be moved lateral if needed to provide better signal. Refer to Figure 11-15and Figure
11-16.
Figure 11-14 InVivo Lead placement diagram

(Left Chest direstly on mid-clavicle)

(Right Chest direstly on mid-clavicle)

(Left trunk below the rib angle)

(Right trunk below the rib angle)

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-18

Figure 11-15 IVY Monitor Recommended 3 Lead Placement

NOTE: Lead placement on the clavicles needs to be done with the arms over the head in
position to be used for scanning.

Alternate Electrode Positions for Signal Clarity

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-19

Scan Parameters Usage

Before scanning a patient, a cardiac protocol should be created. This saves time setting up a
patient for the cardiac scan. Once the patient preparation is complete, there are four steps
to acquire data for a ECG-gated contrast enhanced cardiac exam.
1. Scout scan
2. Localizer scan
3. Timing bolus scan
4. Cardiac Helical scan

Scout Scan
First, you acquire two scouts with the patient in the feet first supine position at 90 and 180
degrees. Refer to Table 11-2 for the parameters.
Table 11-2 Scout Parameters

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-20

Action Parameters
Gating On
Scan Type Helical
Rotation Time 0.4
Rotation Length Full
Start Location One inch below the carina
End Location Apex of heart
Number of images 40
Thickness/Speed 3.75 mm/17.5
Pitch 1.75:1
Interval 0
Gantry Tilt 0
SFOV Large
kV 120
mA 150 (200 for large patient)
Prep Delay 5 seconds
ISD 1.2 seconds
Breath Hold Single Breath Hold
Breathe Time 0
Hyperventilation (You must record this before
Voice Lights Timer
the scan.)
DFOV 25

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-21

Timing Bolus Scan

Third, a series has to be done to determine the optimum prep delay for the contrast
injection. This is often referred to as a Timing Bolus injection. Refer to Table 11-4 for the
parameters.
Timing Bolus is the recommended method for determining patient specific contrast flow for
cardiac scanning due to the high degree of confidence needed to capture the arterial phase
imaging at the ideal point in the contrast injection duration. Timing Bolus should be used for
each cardiac exam in order to calculate the contrast arrival time for each individual patient.
GE does not recommend use of SmartPrep for routine use with clinical patient cardiac
scanning.
Table 11-4 Timing Bolus Parameters

Action Parameters
Gating On
Scan Type Axial
Rotation Time 0.8
Rotation Length Full
Start and End Location Aortic root near Left Main Artery Ostium
Number of images 12-15
Thickness/Speed 10 mm 1i mode
Interval 0
Gantry Tilt 0
SFOV Large
kV 120
mA 80
Prep Delay 5 seconds
ISD 1.2 seconds
Breath Hold Single Breath Hold
Breathe Time 0
Hyperventilation (You must record this before
Voice Lights Timer
the scan.)
DFOV 25
Suggested Volume/Rate 15-20 cc at 4 cc per second

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-22

Cardiac Helical Scan

In the last step the main cardiac scan is acquired. Use one of the Cardiac scan modes
depending on heart rate and focus of the study. Refer to Table 11-5 for the parameters.
Table 11-5 Cardiac Helical Scan Parameters

SnapShot Burst SnapShot Burst Plus

SnapShot Segment
Action (Helical) (Helical)
(Helical) Parameters
Parameters Parameters
Gating On On On
Scan Type Cardiac Cardiac Cardiac
0.4 - 0.5 Heart rate
Rotation Time 0.4 0.4
dependant
One inch below One inch below One inch below
carina and adjust carina and adjust carina and adjust
Start Location
the scan time to the scan time to the scan time to
cover heart cover heart cover heart
End at the apex of End at the apex of End at the apex of
End Location
the heart the heart the heart
Thickness/Speed 0.625 / 1.25 0.625 / 1.25 0.625 / 1.25
This is
This is automatically
automatically
selected by the
Pitch Fixed Pitch 0.24:1 selected by the
scanner based on
scanner based on
the heart rate.
the heart rate.
Interval 0.625 / 1.25 0.625 / 1.25 0.625 / 1.25
Gantry Tilt 0 0 0
SFOV Large Large Large
kV 120 120 120
mA 375 / 500 375 / 500 375 / 500
20 seconds 20 seconds 20 seconds
This changes when This changes when This changes when
you set up the scan you set up the scan you set up the scan
after doing the after doing the after doing the
Prep Delay
timing bolus and get timing bolus and timing bolus and
actual peak time get actual peak get actual peak
based on MIROI time based on time based on
calculations. MIROI calculations. MIROI calculations.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-23

SnapShot Burst SnapShot Burst Plus

SnapShot Segment
Action (Continued) (Helical) (Helical)
(Helical) Parameters
Parameters Parameters
Single breath hold Single breath hold Single breath hold
approximately approximately approximately
Breath Hold 20-40 seconds 20-40 seconds 20-40 seconds
depending on depending on depending on
coverage coverage coverage
Hyperventilation Hyperventilation Hyperventilation
(You must record (You must record (You must record
Voice Lights Timer
this before the this before the this before the
scan.) scan.) scan.)
DFOV 25 cm adjustable 25 cm adjustable 25 cm adjustable
Algorithm Stnd Stnd Stnd
Suggested 100-120 cc at 4 cc 100-120 cc at 4 cc 100-120 cc at 4 cc
Volume/Rate per second per second per second

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-24

Cardiac Series Retro Reconstruction Numbering

Single Phase Image Set

Multiphase Image Set

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-25

ECG Viewer Overview

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-26

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-27

Set Up a Patient
Before bringing the patient in the scan room, make sure that you have everything ready. The
ECG monitor should be plugged in and connected to the gantry with the leads plugged into
the monitor. Have a supply of fresh unexpired ECG electrodes available. Make sure that the
cardiac protocol is built and ready to use. Have the injector loaded with contrast.
NOTE: Use electrodes made with silver/silver chloride (Ag/AgCl) gel on the pad. Do not use
other additional gels. We recommend using the electrodes that are shipped with the
system.
NOTE: The GE recommended electrodes are Dyna/Trace1500 by ConMed.
It is recommended to have the patient fast for ~4 hours prior to their appointment
due to the introduction of contrast media in this examination.
In addition the patient should be advised not to consume any caffeine containing
substances for 12 hours prior to the examination. These could raise the heart rate. An
example is coffee.
In order to keep the heart rate as low as possible the patient should also be advised
not to engage in any cardiovascular exercise prior to the examination.
Administration of Beta Blockers and/or Sublingual Nitroglycerin Spray can be used at
the sites discretion.
The key to cardiac imaging is a Stable Heart Rate, ideally less than 5 BPM variation,
but no more than 10 BPM variation for the most successful exams.
1. Load the injector.
For single barrel injector's: Load with 80-100cc of contrast.
NOTE: The total volume and strength of contrast used is the site's discretion.
For dual barrel injector's: Load contrast syringe with 70-90cc of 300 to 350 strength
contrast media.
The total volume and strength of contrast used is the site's discretion. Also load saline
syringe with 50cc Saline.Explain the exam to the patient.
2. Load the injector.
For single barrel injector's: Load with 80-100cc of contrast.
NOTE: The total volume and strength of contrast used is the site's discretion.
For dual barrel injector's: Load contrast syringe with 70-90cc of 300 to 350 strength
contrast media.
The total volume and strength of contrast used is the site's discretion. Also, load
saline syringe with 50cc Saline. Explain the exam to the patient.
3. Position the patient supine feet first on the cradle.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-28

4. Start an IV line for the contrast injection.

5. Prepare the patient for lead placement.
a) Place arms above patient’s head.
b) Gently scrub the location with cotton gauze until the skin is a healthy pink.
– Do not use alcohol.
c) If necessary, shave a four-square-inch area.
6. Apply the ECG electrodes and leads to the patient.
Use new ECG electrodes for the cardiac exam. Do not use existing electrodes on the
patient.
Attach the electrodes no more than 5-10 minutes before the scan.
Do not use dry or expired electrodes. They do not properly conduct the signal which
may cause intermittent triggering.
To apply the leads, place them according to Figure 11-17. Try to keep the leads away
from the scan field of view.
Once the leads are connected to the patient, make sure you have a valid ECG wave
and the heart rate is between 30-200 BPM.
Figure 11-17 Lead placement diagram

Alternate Electrode Positions for Signal Clarity for Ivy Monitors

In case of low signal or where QRS Peak is not noticeably stronger than the other ECG Wave
Segments, these alternate positions may improve ECG signal and detection.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-29

Figure 11-18 Alternate Electrode Positions

Electrodes may be placed farther out on the arms or in this alternate position.
Check to ensure the electrodes are not the wrong type, expired or old
The electrodes need to be radiolucent and have fresh gel (not dried out). They should be
sticky enough to maintain good electrical contact with the skin surface during table motion.
Do not use Patient Monitoring electrodes that may be available from other departments in
your facility. Patient Monitoring electrodes are not suitable for ECG triggering.
Recommended electrodes are listed below.
NOTE: The GE recommended electrodes are Dyna/Trace1500 by ConMed
If a different type of electrode is used, there is a risk of errors in gating which could lead to
difficulties in gaining effective diagnosis from the cardiac exams or could even lead to
non-diagnostic results.
7. Turn on the ECG machine. Make sure there is good connection from the patient to the
ECG monitor and to the gantry and console.
To confirm good gantry connection, check the upper right display area of the monitor
to make sure it indicates Connected.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-30

Figure 11-19 Monitor indicates it is connected

– If you do not have a good connection, check to make sure that the cable
connecting the ECG machine to the backside of the Gantry is plugged in properly,
and the same cable is connected to the ECG Machine. In case of low signal, please
check electrode placement and chose alternate position if needed. If there is
"noise" within the ECG wave, it is recommended that you DO NOT SCAN, until this
condition is corrected.
8. Practice hyperventilation breathing instructions with the patient.
A hyperventilation technique is used on all scans prior and during the cardiac scan.
During the practice breath hold, make sure to watch the ECG monitor to determine
the average heart rate during the breath hold.
NOTE: If the patient has difficulty holding their breath for 10 seconds, it may be useful to put
the patient on two liters of oxygen at the physician's discretion. Prior to the Cardiac
Helical scan, have them take in a couple breaths and then perform the
hyperventilation breathing for the scan. Oxygen may also help lower the heart rate.
NOTE: It is recommended to have a cardiac voice programmed in the scanner to give
CONSISTENT breathing. When building this voice make sure to breathe your patient
SLOWLY. The breathing instructions should be no shorter than 17 seconds. When
recording the instructions, after you say take a breath in, let it out, take a breath in,
let it out, take a breath in and hold it, make sure to wait for 3-5 seconds (of silence)
prior to clicking on the stop recording button. This will give the patient enough time
to hold their breath before the scan starts and for their heart rate to stabilize before
the scan, otherwise the patient may still be breathing in during the first several slices
which could lead to motion on your images. The Pre-Set Delay in Auto Voice can be
used to add 1-7 seconds additional time prior to x-ray on as need for each patient to
make sure the patient is holding their breath. Typically the patient's heart rate
stabilizes in 3 to 5 seconds.
9. Explain the contrast injection.
Explain to the patient that during the cardiac helical scan, they will be receiving an
injection of contrast material which may make them feel very warm. This warm
feeling is a normal response during the injection.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-31

Quick Steps: Set Up a Patient

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-32

Scan the Patient

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-33

5. To view the ECG waveform, click [ECG Trace].

If the system detects no signal from the ECG monitor, the button turns red and no
BPM value is displayed.

NOTE: Do not attempt to scan without a valid ECG trace.

Quick Steps: Scan the Patient-Scout Scans

1. Landmark the patient at the sternal notch.
2. Click [New Patient] and enter the patient information.
3. Select the Cardiac protocol and accept it.
4. To verify that the scanner is receiving the ECG signal, click [Gating Off] on the view/edit
screen.
5. [Confirm] the scout views, hyperventilate the patient.
6. Press Start Scan.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-34

Scan the Patient

Localizer Scan
This series is used to find your starting and ending locations for the heart.
1. Click [Next Series] from the protocol.
2. Click [Show Localizer] and position the scans so you scan from approximately one inch
below the carina to the apex of the heart.
NOTE: Pay close attention to where the position of the scan is taken. It should cover the
complete heart.
3. Set up Low-Dose helical scan parameters.
120kV, 0.4 sec., 60 mA (100mA for large patients) 1.375:1 pitch 55 table speed.
4. Click [Accept].
5. Click [Confirm].
6. Give the patient the same breathing instruction that you have practiced with.
7. Press Move to scan.
8. Press Start Scan.

Quick Steps: Localizer Scan

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-35

Scan the Patient

3. Connect the injector to the patient and arm it.

NOTE: Make sure the injector is set to deliver 15-20 cc of contrast at a rate of 5 cc per second.
The injector should only be used by trained personnel.
4. [Confirm] the timing bolus scans, hyperventilate the patient.
5. Start the injector and press Start Scan at the same time.
NOTE: Watch the heart rate during the scan and note the lowest average heart rate.
When hyperventilating the patient for the timing bolus, it is recommended to instruct
the patient to breath in and out twice. Do not hyperventilate the patient too quickly
or this could raise the heart rate.
Press Start Scan and start the injector at the same time, and then have the patient
take a breath in and hold it.
6. Review the images and using MIROI find out where the peak enhancement occurred.
For more information on how to use MIROI, refer to the Measure Density Readings on
Multiple Images task.
Add 5-8 seconds to the peak enhancement to calculate the prep delay. Once you
have the time to peak enhancement value, add an additional 4 seconds to allow
filling of the distal coronary vessels. This number will be the Prep Delay for the
contrast enhanced cardiac scan.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-36

Figure 11-21 MIROI graph

Quick Steps: Scan the Patient-Timing Bolus Scans

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-37

Scan the Patient

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-38

Figure 11-22 Card IQ Window

The auto detect mode is the default pitch selection method for SnapShot Segment
and SnapShot Burst and automatically set the pitch based on the patient's heart rate
when the scan is confirmed. If you have found that the heart rate is different during
the breath holds, you should enable Heart Rate Override and manually enter a heart
rate value to the minimum hear rate for the HR Range that contains the observed
value.
NOTE: For information on which SnapShot mode to use, refer to SnapShot Mode Usage.
4. If you are going to manually enter the heart rate in SnapShot Segment mode, click [On]
in the Heart Rate Override box.
5. For Cardiac Helical modes, click in the Heart Rate box and type in the heart rate that
you want to use.
This is defaulted [On] in SnapShot Burst Plus mode.
6. If desired, click [Recon 2] and [Recon 3] to enter parameters for a second and third
prospective reconstruction for Cardiac Helical acquisitions.
7. Click the syringe icon and enter the contrast description and amount.
8. Click [Accept].
9. Enter the prep delay that you determined from the MIROI timing bolus scan.
10. Arm the injector with 5 cc per second for 75-100 cc.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-39

11. Click [Confirm].

12. Give the patient the same breathing instruction that you have practiced with.
13. Press Move to scan.
14. Start the injector and press Start Scan at the same time.

Quick Steps: -Enhanced Cardiac Scan

1. Click [Next Series] from the protocol.
2. Click [Show Localizer] and position the scans so you scan from approximately one inch
below the carina to the apex of the heart.
3. Click [Gating] and the CardIQ window opens.
4. If you are going to manually enter the heart rate in SnapShot Segment mode, click
[On] in the Heart Rate Override box.
5. For Cardiac Helical modes, click in the Heart Rate box and type in the heart rate that
you want to use.
6. If desired, click [Recon 2] and [Recon 3] to enter parameters for a second and third
prospective reconstruction for Cardiac Helical acquisitions.
7. Click the syringe icon and enter the contrast description and amount.
8. Click [Accept].
9. Enter the prep delay that you determined from the MIROI timing bolus scan.
10. Arm the injector with 5 cc per second for 75-100 cc.
11. Click [Confirm].
12. Give the patient the same breathing instruction that you have practiced with.
13. Press Move to scan.
14. Start the injector and press Start Scan at the same time.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-40

Reconstruct Cardiac Scans

The phase window opens.

Phase Entry allows you to change the percentage of R-to-R interval by entering in a
start and end phase and the phase increment. The recommended reconstruction
phases are 70 and 80% (with a 5% increment), but you can change the phase from 0
to 99%.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-41

NOTE: If you are doing a functional imaging exam to acquire the ejection fraction and wall
motion, you should prescribe phases from 5 to 95 in phase increments of 10%.
NOTE: If you are doing a functional study for wall motion or ejection fraction, you may want
to reconstruct the data as 1.25 mm thick images.
3. Check window level settings and filter settings in the Recon Options field.
4. Click [Accept].
NOTE: Cardiac images are going to be produced routinely at 75% of the R to R interval. This
location displays the cardiac anatomy and vessels well. You might feel the right
coronary artery has too much motion at 75% and would like to reproduce the images
at end of systole (around 40% - 55% with 5% increments).

Quick Steps: Reconstruct Cardiac Scans

1. Enter all the parameters for Retro Recon.
2. Click [Phase].
3. Check window level settings and filter settings in the Recon Options field.
4. Click [Accept].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-42

Save ECG Trace

A message appears.

3. Insert a blank CD-Rom in the DVD drive.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-43

4. Click [OK].
Wait for the next message to pop-up.

5. Remove the disk from the drive.

Quick Steps: Save ECG Trace

1. Click on the Image Works desktop.
2. Click on [Save ECG Traces] from the tool chest area.
3. Insert a blank CD-Rom in the DVD drive.
4. Click [OK].
5. Remove the disk from the drive.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 11-44

Chapter 12
Auto Applications (Option)

Introduction
This chapter explains how to perform some basic tasks for the Direct3D, DirectMPR, and/or
VariViewer options. Your system may have one or both of these options. It contains the
step-by-step instructions to help you learn how to:
• Set the Direct3D Parameters in the Scan Prescription
• Select Preset Curves for Direct3D
• Select Rendering Control Selections on the Direct3D Setup Screen
• View Direct3D in the Review Mode
• Set Up For VariViewer
• View VariViewer Images
• Set Up a VariViewer Batch Prescription
• Set the Direct MPR Parameters in the Scan Prescription

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents concepts necessary to understand ways to perform Direct3D, Direct
MPR and/or VariViewer. Some of the concepts you need to understand are:
• Direct3D
• Direct3D Curves
• VariViewer Interactive Review Window
• VariViewer Batch Prescriptions
• Direct 3D WorkArounds
• VariViewer WorkArounds
• Direct Multi Planar Reformat (DMPR) (Option)
• Scanning with DMPR
• DMPR Review Controller
• DMPR Manual Batch Prescriptions

Direct3D
The Direct3D feature automatically renders a 3D volume as it is being acquired. Direct3D
provides the ability to build protocols where a 3D volume can be automatically built using
pre-selected volume rendering curves which specify what information is extracted from the
volume. To implement this feature, you set Direct3D parameters along with the other scan
parameters in the scan prescription.
After scanning, the Direct3D images display in Exam Rx Autoview and Auto Review the same
way as 2D images. Display parameters, screen saves, networking, storing, and filming
options can be used with the images.

Direct3D Curves
Direct3D curves are settings for opacity and color intensity values which are applied to the
image set when building a Direct3D. The opacity level may be varied within a curve to shift
the center of the curve along the CT number scale. A maximum of five curves may be
selected for each Direct 3D session. The more curves that are selected initially, the more
flexibility you have when reviewing the Direct3D model.

VariViewer Interactive Review Window

The VariViewer Interactive Review window has all the parameters needed for setting up a
VariViewer viewing process. If your scan prescription contains multiple groups, VariViewer
can be done on each group separately or the groups can be combined into one VariViewer

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-2

session. To combine groups many parameters must be identical within each group including
the slice thickness, interval, SFOV, DFOV, scan type, rotation speed, image center, algorithm
and peristaltic on or off. Each group must also be consecutive. The maximum number of
images per VariViewer session is 1200.
NOTE: If DMPR (Direct Multi Planar Reformat) is installed on the system, the VariViewer option
will not be available.
Figure 12-1 VariViewer Interactive Review Window

Table 12-1 describes the functions of the VariView Interactive window.

Table 12-1 Interactive Review Functions

Function Icon Description

The default rendering mode is Average, meaning it
Average
provides the average density values of the slice
Projection
taken along lines perpendicular to it.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-3

Function Icon Description

If you click Min IP, meaning minimum intensity
Minimum
projection, the image changes to display the
Intensity
minimum density value of the slice taken along the
Projection
lines perpendicular to it.
If you click MIP, meaning maximum intensity
Maximum
projection, the image changes to display the
Intensity
maximum density value of the slice taken along lines
Projection
perpendicular to it.
This allows you to fit your images in the viewport by
making the images larger or smaller as needed.
Zoom Image Once you have made an image larger or smaller, all
of the images in the series are displayed in the same
adjusted size. This is a right mouse key function.
This function allows you to move the image around
in the viewport. Once an image is moved, all the
Roam Image
images in the series are displayed in the same
adjusted position.This is a right mouse key function.

Selecting this displays the full patient annotation on

Full Annotation
the image.

Partial Selecting this displays the patient ID number, Exam

Annotation number, Series number, Image number, and the date.

Selecting this removes all annotation from the

No Annotation
image.

Slice Thickness Selecting this pulls down a list of preset slice

Pull Down Menu thicknesses.

Selecting the arrows on either side allows you to

Slice Thickness
adjust the slice thickness as you desire. You can also
Field
enter the slice thickness in the text field.

Slice Interval Pull Selecting this pulls down a list of preset slice
Down Menu intervals.

Selecting the arrows on either side allows you to

Slice Interval Field adjust the slice interval as you desire. You can also
enter the slice interval in the text field.

Image Location By clicking on the arrows at each end of the image

Scroll Bar location bar, you can move through the image set.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-4

Function Icon Description

Selecting this allows you to save the current image to
a DICOM reformat image which is installed in the
image database with the series number to be 500 +
the prospective series number. The current setting of
Reformat Save
Window Width/Level is used to create the
Reformatted images. Measurements and other
graphic functions can be performed on this type of
image.
Selecting this allows you to screen save the current
image as a secondary captured image. The image is
installed in the image database with a series number
Screen Save 600 + the prospective series number. The current
Window Width/Level setting is used to create the
screen save image. No graphic functions can be
performed on this type of image.
Selecting this allows you to switch viewport display
Resize size from 512 X 515 matrix to 768 X 768 matrix and
vice-versa.
Selecting this will allow you to leave the Interactive
Review Mode and resume the Acquire Mode to
continue to accept new images. Interactive Review is
dismissed, a Button Labeled "Enter VariViewer
Review" button is re-posted on the Routine Display
Desktop. The current Window Width/Level setting in
Resume Acquire
Interactive Review Mode is used to show images in
the Acquire Mode. The image thickness is change to
the acquired image thickness during Acquire Mode.
However, if you enter the Interactive Review Mode
again, the system will display an image at the
previous selected thickness value.
Selecting the batch function allows you to set a
Batch Mode specified prescription of how you want the images
displayed in a review mode.
Selecting the Back button puts the Interactive
Review in the background allowing you to have
access to the Routine Display Desktop, yet
maintaining the Interactive Review mode. You can
Back still use all of the mouse functionalities for Interactive
Review. As Interactive Review is dismissed, [Continue
VariViewer Review] is re-posted on the Routine
Display desktop to regain access to Interactive
Review.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-5

Function Icon Description

Selecting Quit will exit the VariViewer Interactive

Quit
mode window.

VariViewer Batch Prescriptions

In the Batch Mode, the VariViewer viewport displays the latest scout image, which matches
the landmark of the current series (Figure 12-2). You can use the different controls by
clicking and dragging to adjust the batch range of interest. If the scout image is not
available, a blank image is displayed with no graphic cut lines. In this case, you can use the
Start/End Location text field and Number of image text field to prescribe the batch. When
the Scout images are available, the initial Window Width and Level is set and imbedded on
the image header. The Scout Window Width and Level will remain the same if you leave
Batch Mode and re-enter later.
Figure 12-2 Batch Scout

Position Control
Start Position
End Position

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-6

Figure 12-3 VariViewer Batch Rx Window

Selecting one of these buttons allows you to

move the image or to make it bigger or smaller.

In this area, you select the thickness of your batch

image. The minimum thickness available is the
scan thickness. The maximum thickness is 10
times the scanned thickness.

This area is where you select the interval of your

batch image. You can use the pull-down list or
enter your desired parameter.

In this area, you can set up specific image

location parameters. Enter the start and end
locations and the desired DFOV size.
If Graphic Rx is used, these fields update to
show the values defined graphically.

In this area, you can choose what rendering

mode you wish to use. Refer to Table 12-1 for
definitions of these options.

In this area, you choose which viewing format

you wish to use. The preview mode allows you
to view the images without saving them. The
Reformat Save mode saves the images to the
disk as a series. [Apply] executes the choice.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-7

Direct 3D WorkArounds
The Save State, which allows you to rebuild the Direct3D model on the AW using the
VR algorithm from D3D, does not work on the OC even if Volume Viewer is installed.
You will get an error message informing that the images are missing
Batch film may fail after a system reboot if the format selected is different than the
default film format on reboot. An error dialog will be posted informing you of the
error. You may have to select filming multiple times to successfully send the request.
768 image size may display split in 2 if resize is selected with the Auto View viewport
forward. Always have the D3D viewport forward when selecting resize. To recover
from this problem select resize twice.
If you resize the viewport in Direct3D, the image may not initially be displayed. Use
the Page Turner in the lower left corner of the viewport to toggle to the time.
The Direct3D model may not initially build properly. Enter Interactive Review and
re-render the model and then the model will build correctly.

VariViewer WorkArounds
Batch film may fail after a system reboot if the format selected is different than the
default film format on reboot. An error dialog will be posted informing you of the
error. You may have to select filming multiple times to successfully send the request.
If the scout is taken after the series used for a VariViewer operation, the system may
be unable to find the scout for graphic batch prescription. Manually enter the range
for the batch prescription.
Any zoom applied to a Variviewer image is not maintained as you page through the
images.
VariViewer session may not be able to be started if they're multiple Pause scans
during the acquisition of data.
VariViewer is not compatible with a gantry tilt.
Switching back from a 768 viewport is VariViewer causes the VariViewer viewport to
be forward instead of the Auto View viewport. Use the page turner to toggle back to
the auto view Viewport.

Direct Multi Planar Reformat (DMPR) (Option)

Direct Multi-Planar Reconstruction three-dimensional images are used in surgical planning,
assessment of trauma, and CT angiography. They supplement other diagnostic information
and are quite useful in presenting complex anatomy.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-8

Direct Multi-Planar Reformat provides capability to move from the usual 2D image review
mode to a prospective 3D image review mode in the axial, sagittal, coronal, and oblique
planes. DMPR provides opportunity to automatically create batch reformats using
predefined reformat protocols and network reformatted images to selected reading
location reducing total exam time and increasing technologist and radiologist productivity.
DMPR displays images in anatomical orientation where A is at the top, P is at the bottom, R is
on the left and L is on the right. For example, if you have a data set where the patient was
scanned prone, the image display will be automatically flipped to this orientation.
Direct Multi Planar Reformat (DMPR) allows reformat protocols to be prescribed
prospectively in a scan protocol. Productivity is improved by providing real time auto view
display of Oblique, Sagittal, and Coronal images in addition to the axial images. DMPR will be
beneficial for fast review of scan prescription. It can also be used with auto view for trauma
imaging and automated multiplanar reformat protocols. DMPR can be done on each group
separately or the groups can be combined into one DMPR session. To combine groups many
parameters must be identical within each group including:
– slice thickness
– interval
– SFOV
– DFOV
– scan type
– rotation speed
– image center
– algorithm
Each group must also be contiguous. DMPR sessions are limited to 2000 images. Additional
protocols can be added using Reformat application on the ImageWorks desktop.
NOTE: Any scans acquired after scanning has completed on the original scan group using
Add Group or One More Scan will not be added to the DMPR session, Please remember
to include all of the desired coverage area in the original scan prescription.

Session Setup Window

The Session Setup window is where you can set up the protocols you wish to use and the
parameters for filming. You can also turn Auto Batch, Auto Store, and Auto Transfer on or
off.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-9

Table 12-2 Session Window Parameters

Function Icon Description

Start New Click this to start a new DMPR session.

Combines the next group with the prior group. Parameters

Combine
for the groups to be combined are locked to the current
Current
group prescription.

Off Turns DMPR off for the series/group.

This area is where reformat protocols to be used in DMPR

are selected from list of available reformat protocols.
Up to 5 reformat protocols can be selected.
Use Next/Prior arrow buttons to move through the list of
available protocols.
Highlight protocol names and click OK to return to DMPR
Single Step Setup.
Protocols To remove a protocol from the DMPR Batch Protocol List,
highlight the protocol and then select [Remove Protocol].
NOTE: Remove Protocol only removes a protocol from the
Batch Protocol List, not from the system. Protocols
found in the Batch Protocol List can be modified
permanently in Reformat on Image Works.
This allows you to define camera, formats, and start
options for filming reformatted images to the Direct film
Composer.

Filming Setup

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-10

Function Icon Description

Automatically creates reformatted images based on the
Batch Protocol List once reconstruction is complete. In
Auto Batch, a special edge detection algorithm is used.
This edge detection algorithm detects the outer edge of
the anatomical structures and sets the reformat range
based on the object size and the window width (WW) and
Auto Batch window level (WL) of the images.
Set an appropriate WW and WL value for the image set.
Too narrow of a WW and WL may clip data and too wide
of a WW and WL may create blank images.
NOTE: You will not have the ability to set the localizer lines
on the reference image.
• Allows you to set up a protocol so the system will
automatically archive reformatted images to the default
archive device selected for the system after they are
created.
Auto Store • Select [On] to enable this feature or [Off] to disable the
feature.

Allows you to set up a protocol so the system will network

the formatted images to desired network location. Up to
four remote hosts can be selected. Use [Apply All] to copy
selected list of host to all the protocols prescribed.

Auto Transfer

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-11

Scanning with DMPR

Once DMPR setup is complete and confirm is selected, the DMPR session button will be
displayed in the display control area and the DMPR AutoView layout will become active after
4 images have been reconstructed. The DMPR layout will replace the currently selected
AutoView layout. The upper left viewport is used to display an Oblique image or the Auto
Film viewport accessed via the page turner (Figure 12-4).
In the DMPR AutoView layout display, an oblique image is displayed in the upper left
viewport, axial in the upper right viewport, sagittal in lower left viewport and coronal in the
lower left viewport.
During acquire mode for DMPR, you can interact with the oblique, sagittal and coronal
viewports using the crosshair cursor and left click and drag in the viewport or using the
review controller.
NOTE: You will not be able switch to another auto view layout until reconstruction for the
DMPR session is complete. To review images for another exam while images are being
reconstructed, go tot the Image Works desktop and use the Viewer.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-12

Figure 12-4 DMPR Viewer

Page Turner

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-13

To switch displays, click on Auto View or Review layout button, to switch back to DMPR click
on DMPR Icon.
AutoView
Review Layout
Buttons

DMPR Icon

DMPR Review Controller

The DMPR Review Controller provides means to interact with the DMPR model. The review
controller supports review and paging of the images, measurements and roam/zoom
capabilities. See Figure 12-5 for a description of all the icons.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-14

Figure 12-5 Review Controller

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1

Table 12-3 Review Controller Description

Function Icon Description

Clicking on this icon to minimize the review

1 Minimize
controller around the image viewport.

This allows you to fit your images in the

viewport by making the images larger or
smaller as needed. Once you have made an
2 Zoom image larger or smaller, all of the images in the
series are displayed in the same adjusted size.
NOTE: This is a right mouse key function.
This allows you to pan/roam your images in the
viewport by clicking and dragging. Once you
have made an pan/roam an image, all of the
3 Pan/Roam images in the series are displayed in the same
place.
NOTE: This is a right mouse key function.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-15

Function Icon Description

Clicking display normal icon to return the

4 Display Normal
image to the original scan parameters.

Clicking on the pull down menu. You can select

between Average, MIP, and Min IP render
modes.
• The default rendering mode is Average,
meaning it provides the average density
values of the slice taken along lines
perpendicular to it.
5 Render Mode • If you click MIP, meaning maximum intensity
projection, the image changes to display the
maximum density value of the slice taken
along lines perpendicular to it.
• If you click Min IP, meaning minimum
intensity projection, the image changes to
display the minimum density value of the
slice taken along the lines perpendicular to it.

Clicking on the pull down menu to select from

6 Measurements multiple tools in order to place measurements
on an image.

7 Screen Save

8 Screen Lock

This allows you to select the speed and

9 Cine Paging Speed
direction at which the images cine page.

Clicking Loop as the images play through the

cine loop they will start at the first image and
10 Loop
go to last image and continues to repeat in this
order until stopped.
Clicking Rock as the images play through the
cine loop. The images start at the first image
11 Rock and scroll through to last image and then from
the last image back to the first image. This
repeats back and forth until stopped.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-16

Function Icon Description

Clicking and dragging up and down on the
middle of the slider. The images will scroll within
the series.
12 Scroll Images
Click and drag on the outside bar of the slider
to change the slice thickness of the images
being displayed.

DMPR Manual Batch Prescriptions

Manual prescription of batch protocols can be done by not selecting auto batch. Once the
images have completed reconstruction click [Start Direct MPR Review] button at the
bottom of the left margin of the right monitor.
Figure 12-6 Enter DMPR Review

NOTE: Slider bar underneath represents the status of Auto Batch.

To toggle back to autoview, click on Autoview Layouts icon.
Figure 12-7 Autoview Layout Icon

NOTE: The right screen display can toggle between DMPR and 2D display. The focus outline
around the DMPR or Layout buttons will indicate the display which is currently active.
To toggle back to DMPR, click on [Continue Direct MPR Review].
Figure 12-8 Continue Direct MPR Review

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-17

Figure 12-9 Direct MPR BatchRx window

Protocol- preselected protocols from DMPR
setup in scan protocol will be listed here. *
Mode - Whether you have a cube on the oblique
viewport to move Oblique image or a Rotation
line on the axial, sagittal, and coronal images to
rotate the oblique image.
• Thickness - The slice thickness of the manual
batch protocol.
• Spacing between views - The interval of the
manual batch protocol.
• FOV - The field of view for the manual batch
protocol. The axial FOV is based off the DFOV
and the sagittal and coronal is based off the
Z-axis length.
• Number of Views - The number of images
that will be created in the manual batch
protocol.
Render mode:
• Average - average intensity pixel
• Min-IP - minimum intensity pixel
• MIP - maximum intensity pixel
• Preview - Ability to preview the images that
will be created in the manual batch protocol.
• Save - Ability to save the images that will be
created in the manual batch protocol to the
system disk
• Film - Ability to auto film that images that will
be created in the manual batch protocol.
• Store - Auto stores batch to MOD.
• Transfer - Auto Transfer images to Host
defined in DMPR set up.
• Show - Shows reference image of batch
building.
• Apply - Will initialize the preview, save, film of
the manual batch protocol.
• Pause - Will pause the preview of the batch
images.

NOTE: * The protocol name is used as the Series Description for any Batch and Auto Batch
DMPR series created.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-18

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for performing Auto Applications.
Specifically, it describes how to:
• Set the Direct3D Parameters in the Scan Prescription
• Select Preset Curves for Direct3D
• Select Rendering Control Selections on the Direct3D Setup Screen
• View Direct3D in the Review Mode
• Set Up For VariViewer
• View VariViewer Images
• Set Up a VariViewer Batch Prescription
• Set the Direct MPR Parameters in the Scan Prescription

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-19

Set the Direct3D Parameters in the Scan Prescription

The Direct3D feature allows automatic display of volume rendered images from the 2D
images obtained from an axial or helical series. To implement this feature, Direct3D
parameters are set along with the other scan parameters in the scan prescription.
If your scan prescription contains multiple groups, Direct3D can be done on each group
separately or the groups can be combined into one Direct3D session. To combine groups
many parameters must be identical within each group including the slice thickness, interval,
SFOV, DFOV, scan type, rotation speed, image center, algorithm and peristaltic on or off. Each
group must also be consecutive. The maximum number of images per Direct3D session is
500.
1. To set up Direct3D in the scan prescription, click the Recon tab on the view/edit screen,
then click [Off] under Auto Apps.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-20

2. If you have the VariViewer option installed on your system, a second pop up window
appears with Session Type choices. Click [Direct 3D], and [OK].

This turns Direct3D ON and opens a pop up window.

This selection must be made for each group of images in the scan prescription.
For each group, you may choose to start a new session or combine it to the previous
session.
After selecting Start New or Combine Current, the Preset Curve selection must be
made before continuing on to the next group.
3. Click [Start New] to start a new Direct3D session.
Select this for the first group in a scan prescription.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-21

4. For subsequent groups, you may choose [Combine Current] to add another group to
the current Direct3D session, or you may choose [Start New] again to start another new
Direct3D session.
You may choose to start another new session to have two separate Direct3D
sessions within one study (i.e., a dual phase study, that way you can have a separate
Direct3D of each phase).
5. To turn Direct3D off, click [Off].
NOTE: Direct3D can be turned ON and built into a protocol using Protocol Management.

Quick Steps: Set the Direct3D Parameters in the Scan Prescription

1. To set up Direct3D in the scan prescription, click the Recon tab on the view/edit screen,
then click [Off] under Auto Apps.
2. If you have the VariViewer option installed on your system, a second pop up window
appears with Session Type choices. Click [Direct 3D], and [OK].
3. Click [Start New] to start a new Direct3D session.
4. For subsequent groups, you may choose [Combine Current] to add another group to
the current Direct3D session, or you may choose [Start New] again to start another
new Direct3D session.
5. To turn Direct3D off, click [Off].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-22

Select Preset Curves for Direct3D

To perform Direct3D, volume rendering curves needs to be set prior to scanning. These
curves set opacity and color intensity values for rendering and there are specific curves that
can be used for each exam type or body part. The more curves that are selected initially, the
more flexibility you have when reviewing the Direct3D model.
1. On the Direct3D Setup screen, after selecting Start New or Combine Current, select one
of the Preset Curves or click [Unused].
Selecting [Unused] brings up the Direct3D Curves Selection screen.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-23

2. On the Direct3D Curves Selection screen, click the curve(s) desired for the current exam.
The name of the curve(s) you select transfers to the Preset Curves list on the setup
screen.

Up to five curves may be selected.

You may select curves that are designed for a specific anatomical area and each
area can have up to 14 different curves that can be applied to the volume.
3. If you wish to remove a curve you have selected, click on the Direct3D Setup screen. The
Curve Selection window opens, and click [Remove Curve].
4. Under the Default column heading, click the default box to the left of the curve on the
Direct 3D Setup screen that you would like to be the default curve.

The default curve is used for the initial render display in Direct3D Autoview.
5. Opacity Index allows you to shift the center of the Direct3D curve along the CT number
scale. To set the opacity index, click the box next to the name of the curve desired and
type in a value.
The valid range is -20 to 20. Least opaque is -20, which is used for viewing more soft
tissue structures.
The most opaque is 20, which is used for viewing high-density structures.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-24

Quick Steps: Select Preset Curves for Direct3D

1. On the Direct3D Setup screen, after selecting Start New or Combine Current, select
one of the Preset Curves or click [Unused].
2. On the Direct3D Curves Selection screen, click the curve(s) desired for the current
exam.
3. If you wish to remove a curve you have selected, click on the Direct3D Setup screen.
The Curve Selection window opens, and click [Remove Curve].
4. Under the Default column heading, click the default box to the left of the curve on the
Direct 3D Setup screen that you would like to be the default curve.
5. Opacity Index allows you to shift the center of the Direct3D curve along the CT number
scale. To set the opacity index, click the box next to the name of the curve desired and
type in a value.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-25

Select Rendering Control Selections on the Direct3D

Setup Screen
There are several rendering control selections (image display factors) which can be set for
Direct3D.

1. To set a Zoom Factor, click the box next to Zoom Factor and type in a value.
This factor allows you to preset the magnification level for display of the Direct3D
volume.
The range is 0.1 to 4.0 in steps of 0.1. Selecting 0.8 allows the entire volume to be
seen in the Direct3D viewport.
If FOV Auto Scale is set to Yes, Zoom Factor is disabled and cannot be set.
2. To set the Horizontal View Angle, click the box next to Horizontal View Angle and type
in a value.
This lets you specify the horizontal angle in degrees for display of the Direct3D
volume.
The valid range is -45 to 45.
A positive value views the volume from the right as it builds.
This view angle shifts the volume around the Y axis of the scanner.
3. To set the Vertical View Angle, click the box next to Vertical View Angle and type in a
value.
This lets you specify the vertical angle in degrees for display of the Direct3D volume.
The valid range is -45 to 45.
A positive value views the volume from above as it builds.
This view angle shifts the volume around the X axis of the scanner.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-26

4. To set the Resolution, click the button below the Resolution heading. The button is a
toggle between Enhanced or Standard.
Enhanced renders the volume in a 512 matrix.
Standard renders the volume in a 256 matrix.
NOTE: Enhanced Resolution needs to be used for data sets of 256-500 images.
5. To set FOV Auto Scale, click the button below the heading to toggle between Yes and
No.
This feature implements automatic scaling of the Direct3D volume field of view,
based on the volume geometry and view angle to fit the display viewport.
If this feature is active, Zoom Factor cannot be set.
6. To set the Bounding Box, click the button below the heading to toggle between Yes and
No.
This feature displays a box to assist in visualizing the extent of the volume.
If on, the box is included in any filmed or screen saved image.
7. To set the User Annotation Level, click [Full], [Partial] or [None].
This setting controls only the annotation level for the display or filming of the
Direct3D images from the Direct3D viewport. It does not affect the screen or film
annotation of the other ExamRx viewports.
8. When you are ready to leave the Direct3D Setup screen, click [OK] to register your
selections or [Cancel] to exit without changes.

Quick Steps: Select Rendering Control Selections on the Direct3D

Setup Screen
1. To set a Zoom Factor, click the box next to Zoom Factor and type in a value.
2. To set the Horizontal View Angle, click the box next to Horizontal View Angle and type
in a value.
3. To set the Vertical View Angle, click the box next to Vertical View Angle and type in a
value.
4. To set the Resolution, click the button below the Resolution heading. The button is a
toggle between Enhanced or Standard.
5. To set FOV Auto Scale, click the button below the heading to toggle between Yes and
No.
6. To set the Bounding Box, click the button below the heading to toggle between Yes
and No.
7. To set the User Annotation Level, click [Full], [Partial] or [None].
8. When you are ready to leave the Direct3D Setup screen, click [OK] to register your
selections or [Cancel] to exit without changes.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-27

View Direct3D in the Review Mode

Direct3D builds a volume rendered session as the 2D images that make up the Direct3D
volume are reconstructed. In ExamRx Autoview, you can view the Direct3D volume after at
least four slices from the scan have been reconstructed.
1. Click the page turner icon that is in the lower right corner of the upper right viewport.
This toggles between the Autoview image and the Direct3D image.
You may view your Direct3D volume at this time.
2. On the bottom of the ExamRx display screen, click [Start Direct3D Review].

Selecting Start Direct3D Review brings up the Interactive Review screen and stops
the Direct3D volume from building.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-28

The Interactive Review screen allows you to manipulate the Direct3D volume
currently displayed.

3. Change any desired parameters from the Interactive Review screen.

VR Curves lists the curves selected from the Direct3D Setup screen. This feature is
unavailable if MIP is selected.
The Opacity slider allows you to change the range of CT numbers being used for
rendering. This feature is unavailable if MIP is selected.
a) Moving the slider to the right enhances the display of bone and enhanced structures.
b) Moving the slider to the left enhances the display of soft tissue structures such as
liver, spleen and bowel.
Reset W/L resets the window/level to values defined in the curve.
VR (Volume Render) selects the volume rendering mode and applies the curve
selected in the VR Curves pull down menu.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-29

MIP (Maximum Intensity Projection) applies a maximum intensity projection

algorithm to the volume.
Home Position returns the volume rendering to its start or home position.
S,I,A,P,R,L selects the viewing direction (Superior, Inferior, Anterior, Posterior, Right or
Left) of the 3D volume rendering.
Rotational Arrows allows rotation around the vertical or horizontal axis of the
volume rendering by the incremental value defined in the center of the arrows.
Roam sets the right mouse button to scroll the volume within the Direct3D viewport.
Zoom sets the right mouse button to magnify the volume.
Clipping Sliders displays a screen to define volume clip planes in the R-L, A-P and S-I
direction.
Resize Viewport changes the viewport layout back and forth from four viewports to
a single viewport.
Screen Save saves what is currently displayed in the Direct3D viewport to the system
disc as a screen saved image into series number 400 plus the source series number
(i.e., if a screen save was created from series 3, the screen save images would be in
series 403).
Save State creates a file with the curve information in it to send to an Advantage
Windows 4.1 (or higher) Workstation. This allows rendering of the data on the AWW in
Volume Analysis using the same curve used on the scanner. Saved State images are
saved to series number 300 plus the source series number.
Auto Review provides five predefined batch protocols to generate a batch of screen
saved images of the model.
Back returns to the ExamRx Display Control Panel without ending the Direct3D
session.
Options displays a screen to select annotation level, brightness and lighting of the
volume, view volume with bounding box and resolution.
OK returns to the interactive screen.
Quit stops and exits the Direct3D session, but first a pop up appears to confirm that
you really want to quit the session.
NOTE: Once a session is quit, it cannot be restarted. Once the current session is ended, if
there is another Direct3D session in the queue it begins to build automatically.
Direct3D sessions remain in the queue until the session is Quit.
Status Bar indicates the status of the rendering being built.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-30

4. Selecting [Complete Model] from the Interactive Review screen returns the model to the
acquire mode and adds images to the model that have been reconstructed since the
interactive review session was started.
This is only available if the entire model is complete.

Quick Steps: View Direct3D in the Review Mode

1. Click the page turner icon that is in the lower right corner of the upper right viewport.
2. On the bottom of the ExamRx display screen, click [Start Direct3D Review].
3. Change any desired parameters from the Interactive Review screen.
4. Selecting [Complete Model] from the Interactive Review screen returns the model to
the acquire mode and adds images to the model that have been reconstructed since
the interactive review session was started.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-31

Set Up For VariViewer

The VariViewer mode is set up before you start to scan. The VariViewer mode is used for
cases where you are scanning thin slices but choose to view the slices in a thicker
presentation.
1. Set up all the scan and display parameters.
2. Click [Auto Apps] on the recon tab card.

NOTE: Selecting [Auto Apps] opens the Session Selection window only if the Direct 3D option
is installed on your system.

Click [VariViewer].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-32

3. Click [Start New] to start a new VariViewer session.

Selecting Start New gives you the ability to set up for filming.
For subsequent groups, you may choose [Combine Current] to add another group to
the current VariViewer session.
4. Click [Filming Setup] to select the parameters you desire.

The camera selection initially defaults to the same camera and format currently
selected for AutoFilm.
Select the Format, Destination, and amount of Copies you wish to use.
5. Click [OK].
6. Click [Confirm].
7. Press Move to Scan.
8. Press Start Scan.

Quick Steps: Set Up For VariViewer

1. Set up all the scan and display parameters.
2. Click [Auto Apps] on the recon tab card.
3. Click [Start New] to start a new VariViewer session.
4. Click [Filming Setup] to select the parameters you desire.
5. Click [OK].
6. Click [Confirm].
7. Press Move to Scan.
8. Press Start Scan.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-33

View VariViewer Images

The VariViewer images will begin to display in the appropriate layout and viewport.
Selecting the Start VariViewer button on the display desktop starts the VariViewer
interactive review mode and displays the interactive review window. At least 4 images must
be reconstructed before starting an interactive review session.
NOTE: The page turner must be toggled to view the VariViewer images.
1. Click (Start VariViewer Review).
This displays the VariViewer Interactive Review window.
2. Select the Render Mode.
Choose between Average, Min IP, or MIP.
3. Select the Navigation Mode if necessary.
4. Select the Annotation Level if necessary.
5. Select the Image Thickness you desire.
You can choose from the pull down list or enter the desired slice thickness.
6. Select the Image Interval you desire.
You can choose from the pull down list or enter the desired slice interval.
7. Select the desired Image Location range.
Click the arrows on either side to adjust the image location range.
Click and drag the scroll bar to change the location real time.
Press the Page Up or Page Down key to view the images.
8. Click [Resume Acquire] (if available).
This returns you to the Acquire mode to add any remaining images that were
reconstructed after entering Interactive Review session.

Quick Steps: View VariViewer Images

1. Click (Start VariViewer Review).
2. Select the Render Mode.
3. Select the Navigation Mode if necessary.
4. Select the Annotation Level if necessary.
5. Select the Image Thickness you desire.
6. Select the Image Interval you desire.
7. Select the desired Image Location range.
8. Click [Resume Acquire] (if available).

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-34

Set Up a VariViewer Batch Prescription

Selecting the Batch Rx mode allows you to set up a predefined prescription and save it to
the system disk for filming, archiving, and or to network the saved images to another review
station.
1. From the VariViewer interactive review window, click [Batch Rx].
This displays the VariViewer Batch Rx window.

2. Select the Scout Navigation.

Choose between Zoom or Roam.
3. Select the Image Thickness.
You can choose from the pull down list or enter the desired slice thickness.
4. Select the Image Interval.
You can choose from the pull down list or enter the desired slice interval.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-35

5. Enter the Batch Image Location or adjust the graphic lines on the scout.

6. Select the Render Mode you wish to use.

7. Click [Save], [Film], [Pause], [Stop], or [Preview].
Save saves the images as a series 500 plus the prospective number. It can then be
networked, archived and or filmed.
Preview allows you to view the images in a cine loop.
Film applies the filming parameters selected.
Pause temporarily pauses the loop of images from running.
Stop terminates the loop of images from running.
8. Click [Apply].
This starts the batch prescription plan.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-36

Quick Steps: Set Up a VariViewer Batch Prescription

1. From the VariViewer interactive review window, click [Batch Rx].
2. Select the Scout Navigation.
3. Select the Image Thickness.
4. Select the Image Interval.
5. Enter the Batch Image Location or adjust the graphic lines on the scout.
6. Select the Render Mode you wish to use.
7. Click [Save], [Film], [Pause], [Stop], or [Preview].
8. Click [Apply].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-37

Set the Direct MPR Parameters in the Scan Prescription

The DirectMPR (DMPR) feature allows automatic display of the images from a helical or axial
series in a 3D autoview format instead of a 2D autoview format. In DMPR, user can select a
set of reformat protocols to automatically or manually create reformatted images once
reconstruction is complete for the series.
If your scan prescription contains multiple groups, Direct MPR can be done on each group
separately or the groups can be combined into one DirectMPR session. To combine groups
many parameters must be identical within each group including the slice thickness, interval,
SFOV, DFOV, scan type, rotation speed, pitch, image center and algorithm. The maximum
number of images per DirectMPR session is 2000.
NOTE: Any scans acquired after scanning has completed on the original scan group using
Add Group or One More Scan will not be added to the DMPR session, Please remember
to include all of the desired coverage area in the original scan prescription.
1. Click on the Recon Tab.
The display parameters are shown in the light blue rectangle.
2. Click [Off] in the Auto Apps column.
Figure 12-10 Auto Apps

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-38

If you have the Direct3D option installed on your system, a session pop up window
appears with the Session Type choices.
3. Click [DMPR].
This turns DirectMPR ON and opens a pop up session parameter selection screen.
This selection must be made for each group of images in the scan prescription.
For each group, you may choose to start a new session or combine it to the previous
session.
After selecting Start New or Combine Current, the preset protocols must be made
before continuing on to the next group.
4. Click [OK].
Figure 12-11 DMPR Window

5. Click [Start New] to start a new DirectMPR session.

Select this for the first group for the first group in the scan prescription.
For subsequent groups, you may choose [Combine Current] to add another group to
the current DirectMPR session, or you may choose [Start New] again to start another
new DirectMPR session.
You may chose to start another new session to two separate DirectMPR sessions
within one study (i.e. a dual phase study, that way you can a separate DirectMPR for
each phase).

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-39

Figure 12-12 DMPR Protocol Window

6. Click [Unused].
The Batch Protocol List pop up window appears.
7. Click Next and Prior arrows to review all protocols in the list.
The list includes GE predefined reformat protocols and user created reformat
protocols. GE predefined protocols begin with CT.
User defined protocols are created in Reformat on the Image Works desktop (Figure
12-13).
Figure 12-13 Direct MPR Batch Protocol list

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-40

8. Click on the reformat protocols you wish to select.

Up to five protocols can be selected.
For Combined sessions, the same protocols are used the all the groups.
9. Click [OK].
The selected protocols are added to Batch Protocol in the order they are selected.
10. Click [Setup] to select the film composer format for filming.
The camera selection defaults to the same camera and format currently selected for
AutoFilm.
Select the Format, Destination, and number of Copies you wish to use.
11. Click [OK].
12. Click [Off] under Filming.
This button will toggle filming on or off for the protocol.
13. Click [Off] under Auto Batch.
This button will toggle Auto Batch on or off for the protocol.
Auto Batch automatically creates the reformat images once reconstruction is
complete.
System automatically applies an edge detection algorithm to limit the reformat
range n the sagittal and coronal planes to the size of the object.
Auto Batch images are displayed in an insert in the lower right corner of the
DirectMPR viewports.
To stop Auto Batch mode, click in the Auto Batch viewport and select [Cancel].
14. Click [Off] under Auto Store.
This button will toggle Auto Store on or off for the protocol.
The same Archive device is used as selected for Archive on the Image Works desktop.
15. Click [Off] under Auto Transfer.
Up to four network hosts can be selected for each protocol.
16. Click [OK].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-41

Quick Steps: Set the Direct MPR Parameters in the Scan Prescription
1. Click on the Recon Tab.
2. Click [Off] in the Auto Apps column.
3. Click [DMPR].
4. Click [OK].
5. Click [Start New] to start a new DirectMPR session.
6. Click [Unused].
7. Click Next and Prior arrows to review all protocols in the list.
8. Click on the reformat protocols you wish to select.
9. Click [OK].
10. Click [Setup] to select the film composer format for filming.
11. Click [OK].
12. Click [Off] under Filming.
13. Click [Off] under Auto Batch.
14. Click [Off] under Auto Store.
15. Click [Off] under Auto Transfer.
16. Click [OK].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 12-42

Chapter 13
Performed Procedure Step (PPS)
(Option)

Introduction
This chapter explains how to use the Performed Procedure Step (PPS) option. It contains the
step-by-step instructions to help you learn how to:
• Use Performed Procedure Step (PPS)

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 13-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concept necessary to understand Performed Procedure Step (PPS).
The concept you need to understand is:
• Performed Procedure Step (PPS) (Option)

Performed Procedure Step (PPS) (Option)

Performed Procedure Step is an OPTION. To use it you need a HIS/RIS system and PACS with
the Connect Pro option. It communicates to PACS and HIS/RIS that you have completed a
procedure. It improves transfer of data because it can provide a complete message when all
data has been transferred. The browser has a PPS column that lists the PPS status of each
exam. There are three states of exam status: COMP which means the exam is complete;
DISC which means the exam is discontinued and it cannot use PPS again; or INPR, which
means that the exam is still in progress.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 13-2

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for utilizing the Performed Procedure
Step (PPS) feature. Specifically, it describes how to:
• Use Performed Procedure Step (PPS)

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 13-3

Use Performed Procedure Step (PPS)

Performed Procedure Step is an OPTION. To use it you need a HIS/RIS system and PACS with
the Connect Pro option. It communicates to PACS and HIS/RIS that you have completed a
procedure. It improves transfer of data to PACS because it can provide a complete message
when all data has been transferred. The browser in Image Works has a PPS column that lists
the PPS status of each exam. There are three states of exam status: COMP, meaning the
exam is complete; DISC, meaning the exam is discontinued and it cannot use PPS again; or
INPR, which means that the exam is still in progress.
1. When an exam is completed, click [End Exam].
A pop up window appears.

2. Click [Complete], [Discontinue], or [Defer].

If you click Complete, a message is sent to PACS and HIS/RIS indicating that the
exam is complete and all images have been acquired.
If you click Discontinue, the request to PACS and HIS/RIS is cancelled and that exam
cannot use PPS again.
If you click Defer, you are saying that the exam is not completed. Once the exam is
complete, follow step #3 below.
3. If you chose to [Defer] the exam and the exam is completed, select the [Image Works]
desktop, select the exam from the browser list, then click [PPS] from the top of the
browser, and click [Complete] or [Discontinue] from the pop up window.
On the patient browser, there is a PPS column that lists the PPS status for each exam.
Three status designations are possible:
– Complete-Annotates as COMP and indicates that the procedure is complete.
– Discontinue- Annotates as DISC and indicates that the procedure has been
discontinued.
– Defer-Annotates as INPR and indicates that the procedure is incomplete; (i.e., still
in progress).

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 13-4

Quick Steps: Use Performed Procedure Step (PPS)

1. When an exam is completed, click [End Exam].
2. Click [Complete], [Discontinue], or [Defer].
3. If you chose to [Defer] the exam and the exam is completed, select the [Image Works]
desktop, select the exam from the browser list, then click [PPS] from the top of the
browser, and click [Complete] or [Discontinue] from the pop up window.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 13-5

Chapter 14
Exam Split (Option)

Introduction
This chapter explains how to use the Exam Split (Option). It contains the step-by-step
instructions to help you learn how to:
• Perform an Exam Split After a Scan is Completed
• Using ConnectPro with Exam Split

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 14-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concept necessary to understand Exam Split (Option). The concept
you need to understand is:
• Exam Split
– Virtual Mode
– Hard Mode

Exam Split
Provides you with the capability to "split" a series of patient images into separate groups.
These new smaller image groups can be networked to desired reading stations for multiple
"reads" and multiple billings on select patient exams.
Using the Exam Split option will allow for split images from a single acquisition and assign
them to a Requested Procedure ID or accession number retrospectively. On the ImageWorks
desktop using Exam Split, all the images of the scan will be loaded. Using left mouse key to
select the first image and shift, left mouse key simultaneously to choose the last image to
be sent to a specific exam procedure.
At scan time all Patient records that you wish to have available to split to must be selected
from the Patient Schedule when selecting New Patient. Your system will be configured in
one of two modes for Exam Split. The mode configured is dependent on the capabilities of
the system you are sending images to review.
Exam Split requires that the Connect Pro option be installed.

Virtual Mode
Your remote station must support Performed Procedure Step (PPS) and Gray Scale
Presentation State (GSPS). Images will be Auto Transferred to the Remote station. In Exam
Split ranges of images will be assigned to each accession number or procedure code and a
Gray Scale Presentation State (GSPS) object will be created and transferred when selected.

Hard Mode
Hard Exam Split will create a new series of images for each accession number or procedure
code ranges of images are assigned to. For this reason images will not be Auto Transferred
to the Remote Station.
Your GE Field Engineer will configure your site for the mode of Exam Split based on input
from your sites IT and PACS administration.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 14-2

Figure 14-1 Exam Split window

Screen Format choices

See bottom blue square

Window/Level choices

Add or Delete Series Select or Configure host

Comment Area

Hilight a range of images and click [Add], [Delete],

or [Delete All].
These layout buttons define how you want your
primary port displayed.

Procedure code list

Send or Click Browser to cancel and return to

Image Works

List of Requested Procedure ID or Accession Numbers

selected for the patient.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 14-3

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for utilizing the Exam Split (Option).
Specifically, it describes how to:
• Perform an Exam Split After a Scan is Completed
• Using ConnectPro with Exam Split

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 14-4

Perform an Exam Split After a Scan is Completed

Exam Split provides users with the capability to "split" a series of patient images into
separate groups and assign the groups of images to Requested Procedure ID or Accession
Numbers. These smaller groups of images can be used for multiple reads and multiple billing
for certain types of exams such as a Chest, Abdomen and Pelvis where there are multiple
procedures where multiple doctors will read a portion of the data.
1. Complete an exam with multiple Requested Procedure ID or Accession Numbers have
been selected.
2. Select the ImageWorks desktop.
3. Click on the exam you wish to split.
4. Select the series to split.
5. Click [Exam Split] from the side of the Browser.
The Exam Split menu will appear with the selected images displayed in the upper
viewports. The system may display every image or skip some images depending on
the total number of images selected.
If the exam you selected does not have Multiple Procedures, a dialog will be posted
and Exam Split will exit.
You must select all procedures you wish to split up front when scanning is done. You
cannot add them after the fact.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 14-5

6. Select the images to be grouped together for a procedure.

Click to select first image and shift and click on the last image for the desired range
of images per procedure code.

7. Select desired Requested Procedure ID or Accession Number from the available list
which reflects the procedures selected from Patient Schedule for New Patient.
This is from the list of exams registered to this patient from ConnectPro.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 14-6

8. Select the receiving host from the Host Config pull down.
Host Selection will show GSPS if configured in VES mode and HES if configured in HES
mode.
VES Mode

HES Mode

9. Adjust the Window Level if needed.

Set the window/level for the images using the mouse or W/L preference buttons.
10. Click [Add].
The images will be added to the procedure list.
11. Hilight the procedure or procedures you wish to send and click [Send].
Repeat until you have sent all procedures you have images added to.
The images are transferred to the desired host.
If the system is configured for VES, a GSPS object is sent to the remote station. If HES
mode is configured, a new series of images will be sent to the remote hosts.
You can select more than one procedure if you are sending them to the same
destination.
You can select the Browser to exit Exam Split before the images have completed
transferring. A pop up message will display after the transfer is complete.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 14-7

Quick Steps: Perform an Exam Split After a Scan is Completed

1. Complete an exam with multiple Requested Procedure ID or Accession Numbers have
been selected.
2. Select the ImageWorks desktop.
3. Click on the exam you wish to split.
4. Select the series to split.
5. Click [Exam Split] from the side of the Browser.
6. Select the images to be grouped together for a procedure.
7. Select desired Requested Procedure ID or Accession Number from the available list
which reflects the procedures selected from Patient Schedule for New Patient.
8. Select the receiving host from the Host Config pull down.
9. Adjust the Window Level if needed.
10. Click [Add].
11. Hilight the procedure or procedures you wish to send and click [Send].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 14-8

Using ConnectPro with Exam Split

Using the ConnectPro option will allow for split images from a single acquisition and assign
them to a Requested Procedure ID or accession number retrospectively.
NOTE: When multiple accession numbers are selected, the last accession number will be
displayed on the image.
1. Select [New Patient].
This is located at the bottom of the left monitor.
2. Click [Patient Schedule].

The patient schedule list is displayed.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 14-9

3. Select all of the patient exams.

You can do this by holding the ctrl key down while clicking on the different exams.
This will supply the accession numbers that is used for Exam Split after the images
have been reconstructed.
The last Patient record selected is the Exam Description displayed on the New Patient
Screen.
Up to 15 procedures can be selected.
4. Click [Select Patient].

Quick Steps: Using ConnectPro with Exam Split

1. Select [New Patient].
2. Click [Patient Schedule].
3. Select all of the patient exams.
4. Click [Select Patient].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 14-10

Chapter 15
SmartStep (Option)

Introduction
SmartStep is a mode of scanning designed for interventional procedures. The Radiologist or
Physician usually inserts a needle or catheters into a patient and then need to see images
showing the position of the catheter or needle.
This chapter explains the SmartStep imaging process. It contains the step-by-step
instructions to help you learn how to:
• Prepare for SmartStep
• Set Up SmartStep Mode
• Scan with SmartStep
• Display SmartStep Images
• Set Window/Level Presets for the HHC

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 15-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to successfully complete the Interventional
Imaging process. Specifically you need to understand:
• SmartStep
• Hand Held Controller (HHC)
• SmartStep Display

SmartStep
SmartStep is a mode of scanning designed to be use by the Radiologist or Physician during
interventional procedures. The SmartStep is accomplished by using the integrated Hand
Held Controller (HHC) and foot switch.
The available slice thicknesses of SmartStep are: 1.25 mm (on LightSpeed16), 2.5 mm, 5 mm,
and 7.5 mm. These are created from using a 4X detector configuration. Detector rows one
and two create image one. Detector rows two and three create image two. Detector rows
three and four create image three. The configuration for 2.5 mm slice thickness is the 4 x
1.25 detector configuration. The configuration for 5 mm slice thickness is the 4 x 2.5
detector configuration. The configuration for 7.5 mm slice thickness is the 4 x 3.75 detector
configuration.
Only the 0.8 second and 1 second full rotation scan times are available for SmartStep on
LightSpeed16 and Pro16 systems. All algorithms are available for reconstructions.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 15-2

NOTE: Other desktops are unavailable during SmartStep.

Hand Held Controller (HHC)

During needle biopsies, the Radiologist or Physician controls radiation with the foot switch,
and uses HHC to view images on an in-room monitor. The HHC also provides alignment
light, move-to-scan and cradle micro positioning controls. The Radiologist or Physician also
has the option to release HHC control of the cradle, and use the cradle handle to manually
position the patient in the scan field of view.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 15-3

Figure 15-1 Hand Held Controller

Prep Alignment Light

Move to Start Location

Cradle Move Out

Cradle Move In

Bump In Bump Out

Disabled Cradle Release

Change Focus

Prior Image Next Image

W/L Toggle

Table 15-1 Hand Held Controller Button Descriptions

Button Name Button Description

Prep Prepares the system for x-ray acquisitions.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 15-4

Button Name Button Description (Continued)

Alignment Light This button Enables the laser positioning lights.

This button positions the cradle to the start

Move to Start
location prescribed by you in the SmartStep
Location
View/Edit screen.

The Cradle Move In button moves the cradle in

Cradle Move In
towards the gantry.

The Cradle Move Out button moves the cradle

Cradle Move Out
away from the gantry.

This moves the cradle a pre-defined bump

Bump In distance towards the gantry. The bump distance is
pre-defined on the View/Edit screen.

This moves the cradle a pre-defined bump

Bump Out distance away from the gantry. The bump
distance is pre-defined on the View/Edit screen.

This button is disabled. It is not used for

Disabled
SmartStep.

This is a toggle button. It releases the cradle so it

Cradle Release can be moved using the cradle handle. Pressing
the button again latches the cradle.

This changes the primary focus window between

Change Focus
the interventional viewports and the free viewport.

This displays the next image in the sequence of

Next Image
images.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 15-5

Button Name Button Description (Continued)

This displays the prior image in the sequence of

Prior Image
images.

This toggles between six different window level

W/L Toggle
settings.

SmartStep Display
SmartStep display provides three viewports for interventional images on the top of the
display window with a free viewport at the bottom of the display window. The free viewport
allows you to choose any image to be displayed by clicking on [List/Select]. The three
interventional viewports automatically update each time an exposure is made with the foot
pedal.
Figure 15-2 SmartStep window

First Image Second Image Third Image

Free Viewport

NOTE: Images in the interventional viewport are displayed superior to inferior in location.
NOTE: For Xtream console with GRE recon, SmartStep images are displayed in
approximately 1.5 seconds after x-ray is turned off.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 15-6

NOTE: If images are not available after a step, the viewport will be blank. Use Prior image
on the Hand Held Control and then press Next image to display the missing images.
NOTE: For GOC1 and GOC2 systems the Recon plus option must be installed in conjunction
with SmartStep. If the option is not installed, the reconstruction time is too slow for
SmartStep display and results in a blank viewport during SmartStep display.
The Remaining time indicates how much time you have left in this series before you have to
go back to the View/Edit screen and click [Confirm] again. The Accumulative time indicates
how much time the patient has been exposed to radiation. This time will keep updating as
long as you stay in the same exam. Once you end the exam, the accumulative time resets to
zero.
NOTE: The total accumulated exposure time for all SmartStep scan groups and Series will
be displayed on the Dose Text page.

CAUTION: You can only expose the patient 90 seconds per confirm.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 15-7

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for using the SmartStep scan mode.
Specifically, it describes how to:
• Prepare for SmartStep
• Set Up SmartStep Mode
• Scan with SmartStep
• Display SmartStep Images
• Set Window/Level Presets for the HHC

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 15-8

Prepare for SmartStep

This section explains how to prepare for a SmartStep procedure. You must connect the foot
pedal and the Hand Held Control (HHC) devices to the gantry. These devices are used by the
Radiologist or Physician to prepare the system for exposures, make exposures, view images,
and to move the cradle.
Use this procedure to plug the HHC and foot pedal to the gantry in preparation for
SmartStep.
1. Locate on each side of the gantry the rear access plates to plug the switches into.

Foot Switch Outlet Hand Switch Outlet

2. Plug the foot switch into the foot switch outlet.

This is located on either side of the gantry’s rear base plate.
3. Plug the HHC into the hand switch outlet.
This is located on either side of the gantry’s rear base plate.
NOTE: It is best to plug the switches in on the same side of the patient where the Radiologist
or Physician will be doing the procedure from.
4. Position the in room display monitor so the doctors can view the images.
This display monitor is suspended from the ceiling and can be moved to either side of
the cradle.
5. Prepare the patient and supplies for the procedure.
Have your biopsy tray and other supplies ready for the Physician or Radiologist.
Prepare the patient for the procedure by creating a sterile area and explaining the
breathing instructions.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 15-9

Quick Steps: Prepare for SmartStep

1. Locate on each side of the gantry the rear access plates to plug the switches into.
2. Plug the foot switch into the foot switch outlet.
3. Plug the HHC into the hand switch outlet.
4. Position the in room display monitor so the doctors can view the images.
5. Prepare the patient and supplies for the procedure.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 15-10

Set Up SmartStep Mode

Once the patient has been prepared and set up for the interventional procedure, you can
proceed with setting up for image acquisition in the SmartStep mode.
1. Select SmartStep from the Dynaplan screen or by clicking [Create New Series].
This following windows appears.

2. Click [SmartStep].
3. Click [Scan Type] and select [0.8 sec] or [1.0 sec].
You can choose between the 0.8 second full rotation or the 1.0 second full rotation.

4. Click [Start Location] and enter the initial image location where you want to start.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 15-11

5. Click [Slice Thickness] and select the desired slice thickness.

For 4, and 8 slice scanners, 2.5 mm, 5 mm and 7.5 mm slice thicknesses are available.
For 16 slice scanners, 1.25 mm, 2.5 mm, 5mm and 7.5 mm slice thicknesses are
available.

6. Click [Gantry Tilt] and enter the desired tilt.

7. Click [SFOV] and enter the desired scan field of view.
8. Click [kV] and select the desired kV.
9. Click [mA] and select or enter the desired mA.
10. Click [Exposure Time] and enter the maximum exposure time.
This is a time that is entered before you have to reset the timer.
11. Click [Bump Distance] and enter the distance you want the cradle to bump in or out.
The default Bump Distance is half of the selected slice thickness.

12. Enter the display parameters for DFOV, R/L Center, A/P Center, and Recon Type.
All algorithms are available. If Edge is selected, the time to display the interventional
images will be increased.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 15-12

13. Click [Confirm].

A warning message appears.

14. Click [Continue].

The SmartStep dynaplan screen appears.

Quick Steps: Set Up SmartStep Mode

1. Select SmartStep from the Dynaplan screen or by clicking [Create New Series].
2. Click [SmartStep].
3. Click [Scan Type] and select [0.8 sec] or [1.0 sec].
4. Click [Start Location] and enter the initial image location where you want to start.
5. Click [Slice Thickness] and select the desired slice thickness.
6. Click [Gantry Tilt] and enter the desired tilt.
7. Click [SFOV] and enter the desired scan field of view.
8. Click [kV] and select the desired kV.
9. Click [mA] and select or enter the desired mA.
10. Click [Exposure Time] and enter the maximum exposure time.
11. Click [Bump Distance] and enter the distance you want the cradle to bump in or out.
12. Enter the display parameters for DFOV, R/L Center, A/P Center, and Recon Type.
13. Click [Confirm].
14. Click [Continue].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 15-13

Scan with SmartStep

This task explains the process of scanning with SmartStep. You must have the foot switch
and the hand held control devices plugged into the gantry.
NOTE: During SmartStep mode, filming, archive, and networking are not available.
SmartStep recon has the highest priority. Previously acquired recon queued images
are paused until SmartStep is complete.
1. Press the Prep button on the Hand Held Control (HHC) or click [Prep] on the dynaplan
screen.
The message area of the screen will indicate PRESS PREP.

Once the Prep button has been pressed or clicked, the screen will update to PREP IN
PROGRESS.
2. The system is ready for scans when the READY TO SCAN message indicator appears.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 15-14

3. Step on the foot pedal to make an exposure in the SmartStep scanning mode.
The XRAY ON message indicator appears.

4. Release the foot pedal when the exposure is finished.

If you keep your foot on the exposure pedal, the message below is displayed.
SmartStep is a single rotation for each time the foot pedal is pressed.

NOTE: After each rotation, you must release foot peddle before you scan again.
5. Repeat steps 1-4 as many times as necessary while scanning in the SmartStep mode.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 15-15

Quick Steps: Scan with SmartStep

1. Press the Prep button on the Hand Held Control (HHC) or click [Prep] on the dynaplan
screen.
2. The system is ready for scans when the READY TO SCAN message indicator appears.
3. Step on the foot pedal to make an exposure in the SmartStep scanning mode.
4. Release the foot pedal when the exposure is finished.
5. Repeat steps 1-4 as many times as necessary while scanning in the SmartStep mode.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 15-16

Display SmartStep Images

There are a few basic image review functions available in the SmartStep mode. For more
information on how to use these display functions, refer to Measuring Structures Within an
Image, Magnifying Images and Graphics, Text Pages and Commands.

WARNING: When scanning for interventional procedures using helical, axial, cine, or
Biopsy Mode with or without the boom in the room option, you should take
care when selecting the display format for Auto View of the images. A multi
image Auto View display such as the 4 on 1 or 2 on 1 Auto View layouts should
not be used for this type of study. These layouts do not display images in the
order the data was acquired and may cause confusion in determining the
relationship of the Superior to Inferior direction of the anatomy. Use a single
image Auto View display and review the images in a single image viewport
for interventional studies.
Refer to Select a Multiple Image Display for more information on how to set up the
desired viewing options.
Figure 15-3 Viewing options that should not be used

4 on 1 2 on 1

1. Change the primary focus to the free viewport.

Click on the free viewport
OR, using the HHC press the Change Focus button to activate the free viewport.
2. Click [List/Select] to display an image in the free viewport.
This opens a Browser for you to select an Exam, Series, and an Image.
3. Click [Accept].
This displays the selected image.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 15-17

4. Perform the display functions as needed.

Click [Roam] or [Zoom] to set the right mouse button function.
– Using the Right mouse key with [Roam] selected moves the image around the
screen.
– Using the Right mouse key with [Zoom] selected makes the image bigger or
smaller
Click [Explicit Magnify] to enter a specific magnification factor.
Click [Flip/Rotate] to change the image orientation.
Click [Measure Angle] to measure the angle between structures.
Click [Measure Distance] to measure from point to point.
Click [Display Normal] to return the image to it’s original state.
Click [User Annotation] to enter text on the screen.
Click [Erase] to remove any added text from the screen.
Click [Maintain] to maintain graphics from image to image.
Click [Grid On/Off] to display a grid or to turn the grid off. This is a toggle button.
Click [Screen Save] to capture the image with graphics added.
NOTE: Screen Saved images will not be added to the data base until the current SmartStep
series is ended. The images will not be listed in List/Select until you exit SmartStep.
Click [Forward 1] to advance the image viewports by one image.
Click [Backwards 1] to reverse the images displayed by one image.
Click [Last Image] to display the last exposed image.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 15-18

Figure 15-4 Display Functions

Quick Steps: Display SmartStep Images

1. Change the primary focus to the free viewport.
2. Click [List/Select] to display an image in the free viewport.
3. Click [Accept].
4. Perform the display functions as needed.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 15-19

Set Window/Level Presets for the HHC

The Hand Held Control device has a window/level button that toggles between six different
window/level presets. To set the presets to your desired levels you must follow the following
steps.
1. Click [Display Prefs] from the Exam RX display screen.
This opens the display preferences screen.
2. Click [SmartStep].
The SmartStep window level preset window appears.

3. Enter the desired window width and level for all six locations.
NOTE: Keep the mouse inside the text box while typing the parameter.
4. Click [Save as defaults] to save the values entered.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 15-20

Quick Steps: Set Window/Level Presets for the HHC

1. Click [Display Prefs] from the Exam RX display screen.
2. Click [SmartStep].
3. Enter the desired window width and level for all six locations.
4. Click [Save as defaults] to save the values entered.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 15-21

Chapter 16
SmartView™ (Option)

Introduction
SmartView is a mode of scanning designed for interventional procedures. The Radiologist or
Physician usually inserts a needle or catheters into a patient and then need to see images
showing the position of the catheter or needle.
This chapter explains the SmartView imaging process. It contains the step-by-step
instructions to help you learn how to:
• Prepare for SmartView
• Set Up SmartView Mode
• Scan with SmartView
• Display SmartView Images
• Set SmartView Layout Preference
• Set Window/Level Presets for the HHC
• Create New Images from SmartView Scan Data

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to successfully complete the Interventional
Imaging process. Specifically you need to understand:
• SmartView
• Integrated Hand Held Controller (HHC)
• SmartView Display

SmartView
SmartView is a real-time mode of scanning designed to be used by the Radiologist or
Physician during interventional procedures. The SmartView is accomplished by using the
integrated Hand Held Controller (HHC) and foot switch. SmartView is only available on
LightSpeed 5.X based 4 slice, 8 slice, or 16 slice systems and LightSpeed Pro16 systems.
These systems are designated as a HP gantry system in the configuration of the system.
You can make exposures in continuous (fluoro) mode or in step mode.
In continuous mode, images can be acquired in 1i mode with the image display at 12 frames
per second or in 3i mode with the image display at 8 frames per second per viewport or 24
images per second. Tap mode is a single rotation mode which displays 1 or 3 images
(depending on the layout you have selected) when pressing and releasing the foot switch.
The available slice thicknesses for SmartView are:
• 1.25 mm for LightSpeed16 and LightSpeed Pro16
• 2.5 mm, 5 mm, 7.5 mm, and 10 mm for all of the LightSpeed systems.
These are created from using a 4X detector configuration. In 1i mode all four rows are
combined to create a single image. In 3i mode, detector rows one and two create image
one. Detector rows two and three create image two. Detector rows three and four create
image three. The detector configurations are:
• LightSpeed16 or LightSpeed Pro16
– 4 X 0.625 1.25mm/3i
– 4 X 0.625 2.5mm/1i
• All LightSpeed Systems
– 4 X 1.25 2.5mm/3i
– 4 X 1.25 5mm/1i
– 4 X 2.5 5mm/3i
– 4 X 2.5 10mm/1i
– 4 X 3.75 7.5mm/3i

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-2

Prospectively Soft and Standard algorithm are allowed with Segment Recon mode and
reconstruction in a 340 image matrix. Retrospectively all algorithms are available when the
Full recon mode is utilized. Retrospective recon is in a 512 image matrix. Rotation times of
0.4 (LightSpeed Pro16), 0.5, 0.8 second and 1 second are available for SmartView.
SmartView scans can be built in a scan protocol as a new series. Most Recent protocols
containing SmartView series can be saved, copied and pasted as new protocols.
Other desktops are unavailable during SmartView.

Integrated Hand Held Controller (HHC)

During needle biopsies, the Radiologist or Physician controls radiation with the foot switch,
and uses HHC to view images on an in-room monitor. The HHC also provides alignment
light, move-to-scan, cradle micro positioning controls, and table automove controls. The
Radiologist or Physician also has the option to release HHC control of the cradle, and use the
cradle handle to manually position the patient in the scan field of view.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-3

Figure 16-1 Integrated Hand Held Controller

Prep Alignment Light

Move to Start Location

Cradle Move Out

Cradle Move In

Bump In Bump Out

Automove Cradle Release

Change Focus

Prior Image Next Image

W/L Toggle

Table 16-1 Hand Held Controller Button Descriptions

Button Name Button Description

Prep Prepares the system for x-ray acquisitions.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-4

Button Name Button Description (Continued)

Alignment Light This button Enables the laser positioning lights.

This button positions the cradle to the start

Move to Start
location prescribed by you in the SmartView
Location
View/Edit screen.

The Cradle Move In button moves the cradle in

Cradle Move In
towards the gantry.

The Cradle Move Out button moves the cradle

Cradle Move Out
away from the gantry.

This moves the cradle a pre-defined bump

Bump In distance towards the gantry. The bump distance is
pre-defined on the View/Edit screen.

This moves the cradle a pre-defined bump

Bump Out distance away from the gantry. The bump
distance is pre-defined on the View/Edit screen.

This places the table in Auto Move mode. While

auto move is enabled the table moves
Automove
automatically as the foot switch is pressed and the
direction of movement is selected.

This is a toggle button. It releases the cradle so it

Cradle Release can be moved using the cradle handle. Pressing
the button again latches the cradle.

This changes the primary focus window between

Change Focus
the interventional viewports and the free viewport.

This displays the next image in the sequence of

Next Image
images.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-5

Button Name Button Description (Continued)

This displays the prior image in the sequence of

Prior Image
images.

This toggles between six different window level

W/L Toggle
settings.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-6

SmartView Display
SmartView display provides single or multiple image displays for interventional images with
a free viewport on the side of the display window. The free viewport allows you to choose
any image to be displayed by clicking on [List/Select]. The interventional viewports
automatically update each time an exposure is made with the foot pedal.
Figure 16-2 SmartView window

Free Viewport

Interventional Viewport

Interventional Viewport
Interventional Viewport

The Remaining time indicates how much time you have left in this series before you have to
go back to the View/Edit screen and click [Confirm] again. The Accumulative time indicates
how much time the patient has been exposed to radiation. This time will keep updating as
long as you stay in the same exam. Once you end the exam, the accumulative time resets to
zero.
NOTE: The total accumulated exposure time for all SmartView scan groups and Series will
be displayed on the Dose Text page.

CAUTION: You can only expose the patient 90 seconds per session.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-7

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for using the SmartView scan mode.
Specifically, it describes how to:
• Prepare for SmartView
• Set Up SmartView Mode
• Scan with SmartView
• Display SmartView Images
• Set SmartView Layout Preference
• Set Window/Level Presets for the HHC
• Create New Images from SmartView Scan Data

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-8

Prepare for SmartView

This section explains how to prepare for a SmartView procedure. You must connect the foot
pedal and the Hand Held Control (HHC) devices to the gantry. These devices are used by the
Radiologist or Physician to prepare the system for exposures, make exposures, view images,
and to move the cradle.
Use this procedure to plug the HHC and foot pedal to the gantry in preparation for
SmartView.
1. Locate on each side of the gantry the rear access plates to plug the switches into.

Foot Switch Outlet Hand Switch Outlet

2. Plug the foot switch into the foot switch outlet.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-9

Quick Steps: Prepare for SmartView

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-10

Set Up SmartView Mode

Once the patient has been prepared and set up for the interventional procedure, you can
proceed with setting up for image acquisition in the SmartView mode.
1. Select SmartView.
SmartView can be selected from the following:
– from the Dynaplan screen.
– [Next Series] if you are using a preset protocol.
– Clicking [Create New Series].
¾ This following windows appears.

2. Click [Scan Type] and select [0.4]*, [0.5], [0.8 sec], or [1.0 sec].
* You can only select [0.4] with the 0.4 speed option.
Figure 16-3 .

3. Click [Start Location] and enter the initial image location where you want to start.
+ and - may be substituted for S and I. S equals + and I equals -.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-11

4. Click [Slice Thickness] and select the desired slice thickness.

For 4, and 8 slice scanners you can select from the following:
– 2.5 mm 3i
– 5 mm 3i
– 7.5 mm 3i
– 5.0 mm 1i
– 10 mm 1i
For 16 slice scanners you can select from the following:
– 1.25 mm 3i
– 2.5 mm 3i
– 5mm 3i
– 7.5 mm 3i
– 2.5 mm 1i
– 5.0 mm 1i
– 10 mm 1i
5. Click [Gantry Tilt] and enter the desired tilt.
6. Click [SFOV] and enter the desired scan field of view.
7. Click [kV] and select the desired kV.
8. Click [mA] and select or enter the desired mA.
9. Click [Exposure Time] and enter the maximum exposure time.
This is a time that is entered before you have to reset the timer.
10. Click [Bump Distance] and enter the distance you want the cradle to bump in or out.
The default Bump Distance is half of the selected slice thickness.

11. Enter the display parameters for DFOV, R/L Center, A/P Center, and Recon Type.
Soft and Standard algorithm are available prospectively and all algorithms are
available retrospectively if you have the Full recon mode selected.
+ and - may be substituted for A, P, and L. A equals + and P equals -. R equals + and L
equals -.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-12

12. Click [Confirm].

A warning message appears.

13. Click [Continue].

The SmartView dynaplan screen appears.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-13

Quick Steps: Set Up SmartView Mode

1. Select SmartView.
2. Click [Scan Type] and select [0.4]*, [0.5], [0.8 sec], or [1.0 sec].
3. Click [Start Location] and enter the initial image location where you want to start.
4. Click [Slice Thickness] and select the desired slice thickness.
5. Click [Gantry Tilt] and enter the desired tilt.
6. Click [SFOV] and enter the desired scan field of view.
7. Click [kV] and select the desired kV.
8. Click [mA] and select or enter the desired mA.
9. Click [Exposure Time] and enter the maximum exposure time.
10. Click [Bump Distance] and enter the distance you want the cradle to bump in or out.
11. Enter the display parameters for DFOV, R/L Center, A/P Center, and Recon Type.
12. Click [Confirm].
13. Click [Continue].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-14

Scan with SmartView

This task explains the process of scanning with SmartView. You must have the foot switch
and the hand held control devices plugged into the gantry.
NOTE: During SmartView mode, filming, archive, and networking are not available.
SmartView recon has the highest priority. Previously acquired recon queued images
are paused until SmartView is complete.
1. Press the Prep button on the Hand Held Control (HHC) or click [Prep] on the dynaplan
screen.
The message area of the screen will indicate PRESS PREP.

Once the Prep button has been pressed or clicked, the screen will update to PREP IN
PROGRESS.
2. The system is ready for scans when the READY TO SCAN message indicator appears.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-15

3. Step on the foot pedal to make an exposure in the SmartView scanning mode.
The XRAY ON message indicator appears.

4. Release the foot pedal when the exposure is finished.

As long as the foot pedal is pressed a continuous exposure will be made.
If you want single rotation or tap/quick check press and release the pedal.

5. Repeat steps 1-4 as many times as necessary while scanning in the SmartView mode.
If you use Repeat Series in SmartView, the Exposure time of the SmartView scan
group is the sum of all SmartView scans. This may be less than the 90 seconds
initially chosen.
Repeat SmartView always sets the exposure time to 90 seconds.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-16

Quick Steps: Scan with SmartView

1. Press the Prep button on the Hand Held Control (HHC) or click [Prep] on the dynaplan
screen.
2. The system is ready for scans when the READY TO SCAN message indicator appears.
3. Step on the foot pedal to make an exposure in the SmartView scanning mode.
4. Release the foot pedal when the exposure is finished.
5. Repeat steps 1-4 as many times as necessary while scanning in the SmartView mode.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-17

Display SmartView Images

There are a few basic image review functions available in the SmartView mode. For more
information on how to use these display functions, refer to Measuring Structures Within an
Image, Magnifying Images and Graphics, Text Pages and Commands.

4 on 1 2 on 1

1. Change the primary focus to the free viewport.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-18

4. Perform the display functions as needed.

Click [Roam] or [Zoom] to set the right mouse button function.
– Using the Right mouse key with [Roam] selected moves the image around the
screen.
– Using the Right mouse key with [Zoom] selected makes the image bigger or
smaller
Click [Explicit Magnify] to enter a specific magnification factor.
Click [Flip/Rotate] to change the image orientation.
Click [Measure Angle] to measure the angle between structures.
Click [Measure Distance] to measure from point to point.
Click [Display Normal] to return the image to it’s original state.
Click [User Annotation] to enter text on the screen.
Click [Erase] to remove any added text from the screen.
Click [Maintain] to maintain graphics from image to image.
Click [Grid On/Off] to display a grid or to turn the grid off. This is a toggle button.
Click [Screen Save] to capture the image with graphics added.
– Screen Saved images will not be added to the data base until the current
SmartView series is ended. The images will not be listed in List/Select until you
exit SmartView.
Click [Forward 1] to advance by one image.
Click [Backwards 1] to advance by one image.
Click [Page Forward] to initiate a forward paging loop.
Click [Page Backward] to initiate a backward paging loop.
Click [Last Image] to display the last exposed image.
Click [N/P Each VP] to shift the multi image display to one viewport to shift the multi
image display one viewport with each forward 1 image or backward 1 image.
– N/P Each VP provides the ability to move the superior or inferior image to the
center large viewport.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-19

Figure 16-5 Display Functions

Quick Steps: Display SmartView Images

1. Change the primary focus to the free viewport.
2. Click [List/Select] to display an image in the free viewport.
3. Click [Accept].
4. Perform the display functions as needed.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-20

Set SmartView Layout Preference

The display layout used during SmartView scanning is determined by the slice thickness
mode, 1i or 3i and the layout preference set in SmartView Preferences.
1. Click [Display Prefs] located on the Exam Rx desktop.
This opens the display preferences window.
2. Click [SmartView].
The SmartView preset window appears.
3. Select the desired format.
You can select the single or multiple viewport display.
4. Click [Save as Default].
This saves the selection that you made.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-21

Quick Steps: Set SmartView Layout Preference

1. Click [Display Prefs] located on the Exam Rx desktop.
2. Click [SmartView].
3. Select the desired format.
4. Click [Save as Default].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-22

Set Window/Level Presets for the HHC

The Hand Held Control device has a window/level button that toggles between six different
window/level presets. To set the presets to your desired levels you must follow the following
steps.
1. Click [Display Prefs] from the Exam RX display screen.
This opens the display preferences screen.
2. Click [SmartView].
The SmartView window level preset window appears.

3. Enter the desired window width and level for all six locations.
NOTE: Keep the mouse inside the text box while typing the parameter.
4. Click [Save as defaults] to save the values entered.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-23

Quick Steps: Set Window/Level Presets for the HHC

1. Click [Display Prefs] from the Exam RX display screen.
2. Click [SmartView].
3. Enter the desired window width and level for all six locations.
4. Click [Save as defaults] to save the values entered.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-24

Create New Images from SmartView Scan Data

The SmartView scan data contains all of the information gathered from each exposure. This
makes it possible to create images of the same anatomy presented in a different manner.
SmartView scan data may be reconstructed into a 512 matrix image and any recon
algorithm with Full recon mode. Image reconstruction is time based. A start and end time
must be specified. If 3i mode was used prospectively, Retro Recon will reconstruct the
images in 1i or 2i mode.
For more information on how to reconstruct images, refer to Create New Images From Scan
Data.
1. From the scan monitor, click [Retro Recon].

The Retro Recon list select screen appears. All images with available scan data are
listed.
2. From the Retro Recon list select screen, select the appropriate SmartView Exam.
3. Click [Select Series].
4. Click [Retro] for all groups or click [Y] for an individual group.
If you select [Retro], a pop up window appears. Choose [Yes] or [No]. You may also
click on the individual group and toggle between [Y] and [N].
The system assumes all available data is to be reconstructed. If there are multiple
groups, you must determine which group(s) has data you wish to reconstruct.
5. Select [Time].
The time range window appears.

6. Enter the desired Start and End times.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-25

7. Click [Recon Options].

The recon options screen appears.

8. Click [Full] from the Recon mode area.

9. Enter the desired Window Width and Level.
10. Click [OK].
11. As needed, click [Recon Type].
A pop up window appears with all of the available algorithms from which you can
choose the appropriate algorithm.
Soft and Standard are only available if Segment recon mode is selected.
Soft, Standard, Detail, Lung, Bone, Bone Plus and Edge are available if Full recon
mode is selected.
12. Click [Confirm] to generate images.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-26

Quick Steps: Create New Images from SmartView Scan Data

1. From the scan monitor, click [Retro Recon].
2. From the Retro Recon list select screen, select the appropriate SmartView Exam.
3. Click [Select Series].
4. Click [Retro] for all groups or click [Y] for an individual group.
5. Select [Time].
6. Enter the desired Start and End times.
7. Click [Recon Options].
8. Click [Full] from the Recon mode area.
9. Enter the desired Window Width and Level.
10. Click [OK].
11. As needed, click [Recon Type].
12. Click [Confirm] to generate images.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 16-27

Chapter 17
Scheduling Patients

Introduction
This chapter explains how to schedule patients. It contains the step-by-step instructions to
help you learn how to:
• Use the Bar Code Reader
• Update the Patient Schedule List
• Add a Patient to the Schedule
• Delete a Patient From the Schedule
• Set Up Preferences in the Schedule
• Edit a Patient Schedule
• Select a Patient from the Schedule
• Check the Status of a Patient
• View More Information About the Patient

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 17-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents concepts necessary to understand ways to use Patient Schedule.
Some of the concepts you need to understand are:
• Patient Schedule
• Connect Pro
• New Records and Completed Records

Patient Schedule
Patient Schedule is a feature which allows patient information and exam protocols to be
pre-programmed in advance of patient arrival. At scan time, you can either select from the
created list, enter the patient ID number, enter the Accession number or use the optional Bar
Code Reader to call up patient information. Patient information can be easily added or
deleted from this list.

Connect Pro
Connect Pro is a purchasable option which retrieves critical patient information from your
HIS/RIS using a DICOM connection and sends it to your scanner. Connect Pro pulls
information from HIS/RIS and put it into Patient Schedule.
Connect Pro can also be customized to fit your department’s needs by using "filters" to pull
only the information in which you are interested.
Connect Pro can collect more than just the standard demographic information about your
patients. It can also collect other information, such as allergies, pregnancy status, medical
alerts, or any other information about your patient.

New Records and Completed Records

In the patient schedule there is a column labeled Status. In the status column, an "N" or a "C"
is listed next to each patient entry. "N" stands for Not completed or New record. These are
exams that are scheduled in Patient Schedule, but are not yet completed. "C" stands for
Completed record. These exams were scheduled and have now been completed.
NOTE: If obtaining your patient using Connect Pro it is best to only have New Records in your
schedule list. Having Completed Records may cause inadvertent scanning of a
patients with the wrong accession number. Set Delete Completed Exams to 0 days in
the Connect Pro preferences. This setting assures that Completed Records are not
added to the Schedule List.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 17-2

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions to utilize the Schedule Patient feature.
Specifically, it describes how to:
• Use the Bar Code Reader
• Update the Patient Schedule List
• Add a Patient to the Schedule
• Delete a Patient From the Schedule
• Set Up Preferences in the Schedule
• Edit a Patient Schedule
• Select a Patient from the Schedule
• Check the Status of a Patient
• View More Information About the Patient

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 17-3

Use the Bar Code Reader

The Bar Code Reader, which is used with the Connect Pro option, is a simple way to get
patient information. The patient information must be in the Patient Schedule list before
using this feature.
1. Click [New Patient].

2. Aim the Bar Code Reader at the bar code for either Accession number or Patient ID on
the patient requisition.
The patient information is pulled from the Patient Schedule list and automatically fill
into the fields on the Patient Information screen.
Table 17-1 Patient Information

Field Name Parameters

Accession Number Up to 16 characters
Patient ID Up to 16 characters
Patient Name Up to 32 characters
Sex M (Male) or F (Female)
Birthdate Months, Weeks, Days
Age Years, Months, Weeks, Days
Weight Kgs or Pounds
Reference Physician Up to 32 characters
Radiologist Up to 32 characters
Operator Up to 3 characters
History Up to 60 characters
Exam Description Up to 22 characters
Protocol Number Up to 5 characters
Req. Proc. ID Up to 16 characters
Date Exam Date Month, Day, Year
Time Exam Time Hour, Minute

3. Select desired protocol and begin exam.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 17-4

NOTE: The Exam Description will be truncated to 22 characters when imported from a
HIS/RIS system. The Study description field (0008, 1030) in the DICOM header is
mapped to the Exam Description field on the Schedule Patient and New Patient
screens.
NOTE: When entering the Patient ID, if more than one record with the same Patient ID is
found in the Patient schedule list a dialog displays notifying you of this. Be sure when
selecting the patient record that you have selected the correct entry for the scan
being performed. To avoid having multiple Patient Records with the same Patient ID
make sure to set the Delete Completed Exams preference to zero. This will assure that
only new records are in the Patient Schedule list.

Quick Steps: Use the Bar Code Reader

1. Click [New Patient].
2. Aim the Bar Code Reader at the bar code for either Accession number or Patient ID on
the patient requisition.
3. Select desired protocol and begin exam.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 17-5

Update the Patient Schedule List

Update allows you to update your Patient Schedule list with information from HIS/RIS. The
Get Patient List For: section allows you to choose the system or systems you wish to pull
from the HIS/RIS schedule of patients. The With A Date Range: section allows you to pull
from certain dates.
1. Click [Patient Schedule].

2. Click [Update].

A pop up window appears.

3. Under Get Patient List For:, click [This System], [All CT Systems], or [All Systems].
This System pulls the patient schedule for the current scanner you are on.
All CT Systems pulls the patient schedule for all of the CT systems on the HIS/RIS
connection.
All Systems pulls the patient schedule for all the systems on the HIS/RIS connection.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 17-6

4. Select a Date Range.

Type in a From and To date. Be sure to follow the correct month/day/year format.
5. If desired, type the Requested Proc. ID or Accession Number information into the
correct fields.
This is an additional way to pull patient information.
6. If desired, type the patient’s name information into the correct field.
This is a quick way to search for a patient’s name.
7. If desired, type the patient’s ID information into the correct field.
8. Click [Continue Update] to continue or [Cancel Update] to cancel without saving any
new selections.

Quick Steps: Update the Patient Schedule List

1. Click [Patient Schedule].
2. Click [Update].
3. Under Get Patient List For:, click [This System], [All CT Systems], or [All Systems].
4. Select a Date Range.
5. If desired, type the Requested Proc. ID or Accession Number information into the
correct fields.
6. If desired, type the patient’s name information into the correct field.
7. If desired, type the patient’s ID information into the correct field.
8. Click [Continue Update] to continue or [Cancel Update] to cancel without saving any
new selections.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 17-7

Add a Patient to the Schedule

Patient information can easily be added manually to the Patient Schedule list.
1. Click [Patient Schedule].

2. Click [Add Patient].

The Patient Schedule information screen appears (it looks similar to the New Patient
screen).

3. Enter the patient information.

a) If desired, add the number of the specific protocol under Protocol Number.
b) If desired, type in the date and time in the appropriate fields.
4. Click [Accept] to save changes and add patient information to the schedule list.
5. Click [Cancel] to return to the main Patient Schedule screen.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 17-8

Quick Steps: Add a Patient to the Schedule

1. Click [Patient Schedule].
2. Click [Add Patient].
3. Enter the patient information.
4. Click [Accept] to save changes and add patient information to the schedule list.
5. Click [Cancel] to return to the main Patient Schedule screen.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 17-9

Delete a Patient From the Schedule

Patients can be deleted from the Patient Schedule list selectively or all at once.
1. Click [Patient Schedule].

2. Select the patient(s) to be removed.

a) For a single patient, click on patient name with left mouse.
b) For multiple patients in a row, use left mouse and click and drag to select patient
names.
c) For a more defined selection, press Control and click with left mouse on selected
patient names.
3. Click [Delete Selected] to delete the selected patient(s).

4. Click [Delete All] to delete all patients on the list.

Quick Steps: Delete a Patient From the Schedule

1. Click [Patient Schedule].
2. Select the patient(s) to be removed.
3. Click [Delete Selected] to delete the selected patient(s).
4. Click [Delete All] to delete all patients on the list.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 17-10

Set Up Preferences in the Schedule

The Preferences feature allows the sort order to be set along with the delete time for entries
in the Patient Schedule list.
There are also several choices for use if you have the Connect Pro option.
1. Click [Patient Schedule].

2. Click [Preferences].

A pop up window appears.

3. To sort exams, click [Date/Time], [Name], or [ID] to sort by.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 17-11

4. Set the number of days to delete exams.

Type in the number of days after which you would like the scanner to delete the
completed exams.
The number must be between 0-30.
A completed record is not added to the Patient Schedule list if number of days is set
to 0.
The system default is 3.
NOTE: It is important to set the Delete Completed Exams to zero when Patient Information
is updated from the HIS/RIS. This assures that Completed Accession numbers are
not inadvertently selected for scanning a second time causing Patient reconciliation
issues on the PACS system.
5. With the Connect Pro option, click [Yes] or [No] to Update Schedule Automatically.
Selecting Yes updates the schedule when you click Patient Schedule.
It updates based on the parameters selected in Update.
6. With the Connect Pro option, click [Yes] or [No] to Show Update Parameters.
Selecting Yes shows the Update screen every time the system starts to automatically
update.
This allows you to edit the Update parameters, if desired.
7. With the Connect Pro option, click [Yes] or [No] for Use Study UID?
Selecting Yes uses a study instance UID (Unique Identifier) from HIS/RIS.
By selecting No, the scanner assigns the study instance UID (Unique Identifier) to the
exam.
8. With the Connect Pro option, click [Yes] or [No] for Edit Modality Worklist?
Selecting [No] prevents you from editing any patient information from HIS/RIS.
Selecting [Yes] allows you to edit any patient information from HIS/RIS.
9. Click [OK] to accept entries, or [Cancel] to cancel out without accepting entries.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 17-12

NOTE: Preferences are not maintained between system software loads. Please update the
preferences after a software load has occurred.

Quick Steps: Set Up Preferences in the Schedule

1. Click [Patient Schedule].
2. Click [Preferences].
3. To sort exams, click [Date/Time], [Name], or [ID] to sort by.
4. Set the number of days to delete exams.
5. With the Connect Pro option, click [Yes] or [No] to Update Schedule Automatically.
6. With the Connect Pro option, click [Yes] or [No] to Show Update Parameters.
7. With the Connect Pro option, click [Yes] or [No] for Use Study UID?
8. With the Connect Pro option, click [Yes] or [No] for Edit Modality Worklist?
9. Click [OK] to accept entries, or [Cancel] to cancel out without accepting entries.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 17-13

Edit a Patient Schedule

Patient information may be edited if entered incorrectly in the Patient Schedule list.
1. Click [Patient Schedule].

The Patient Schedule appears.

2. Select the desired patient from the list.

3. Click [Edit Patient].

4. Change patient information as needed.

The patient record cannot be edited if it came from HIS/RIS and Edit Modality
Worklist is set to [No].
5. Click [Accept].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 17-14

Quick Steps: Edit a Patient Schedule

1. Click [Patient Schedule].
2. Select the desired patient from the list.
3. Click [Edit Patient].
4. Change patient information as needed.
5. Click [Accept].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 17-15

Select a Patient from the Schedule

Patient Schedule allows patients to be easily selected at scan time.
1. Click [New Patient].

2. Click [Patient Schedule].

The Patient Schedule appears.

3. Select the desired patient from the list.

4. Click [Select Patient].

All patient information fills into the New Patient screen.

5. Select the desired protocol to continue.
If a protocol was not previously chosen or if a different protocol is desired.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 17-16

6. Click [Enter] to begin.

NOTE: From the New Patient screen, you can also type in the patient ID, Accession number
or use the optional Bar Code Reader to select a patient. Make sure you have the
correct field selected for your entry.

Quick Steps: Select a Patient from the Schedule

1. Click [New Patient].
2. Click [Patient Schedule].
3. Select the desired patient from the list.
4. Click [Select Patient].
5. Select the desired protocol to continue.
6. Click [Enter] to begin.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 17-17

Check the Status of a Patient

Patients listed in the Patient Schedule has an "N" in the status column if the exam is NOT
completed indicating it is a New Record. A "C" in the status column indicates the exam IS
completed.
1. Click [Patient Schedule].

The schedule list appears and the far right column is labeled Status.

N stands for an exam which is a New Record or is Not Completed.

C stands for an exam that is Completed.
2. Use the [Next] or [Prior] buttons in the lower right of the screen to scroll from page to
page.

Quick Steps: Check the Status of a Patient

1. Click [Patient Schedule].
2. Use the [Next] or [Prior] buttons in the lower right of the screen to scroll from page to
page.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 17-18

View More Information About the Patient

Use this feature with the Connect Pro option to view other valuable information about a
patient such as allergies, pregnancy status, and medical alerts. This information is pulled
from the HIS/RIS using a DICOM connection.
1. Click [Patient Schedule].

The Patient Schedule appears.

2. Select a patient from the list.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 17-19

3. Click [View More Info].

A screen appears with additional patient information.

4. Click [Cancel] to exit this screen.

Quick Steps: View More Information About the Patient

1. Click [Patient Schedule].
2. Select a patient from the list.
3. Click [View More Info].
4. Click [Cancel] to exit this screen.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 17-20

Chapter 18
Biopsy Mode

Introduction
This chapter explains how to use the biopsy mode. The biopsy mode improves the efficiency
of setting up and acquiring slices during a biopsy.
This chapter contains the step-by-step instructions to help you learn how to:
• Use the Biopsy Mode

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 18-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to successfully use the Biopsy Mode. The
concepts you need to understand are:
• Biopsy Mode
• Biopsy Reference Scans

Biopsy Mode
The Biopsy Mode or Biopsy Rx improves the efficiency of setting up and acquiring slices
during a biopsy. All of the parameters required are available on one menu. You are able to
choose which direction the scanner acquires images from a centering point as well as how
many images to acquire. You can change slice thickness and/or interval. You can enter a
specific location for a slice and a gantry tilt, if required.
NOTE: AutomA is turned off when Biopsy Mode is entered. Review the Manual mA value
prescribed.

Biopsy Reference Scans

When you click [Biopsy Rx], you need to choose how the system scans based on the biopsy
location.
If you choose [Superior], the system makes the biopsy reference location the first scan, with
subsequent images acquired superiorly from that location.
If you choose [Centered], the system makes the biopsy reference location the center slice,
with the other images acquired above and below that location.
If you choose [Inferior], the system makes the biopsy reference location the first scan, with
subsequent images acquired inferiorly from that location.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 18-2

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for using the biopsy mode. Specifically, it
describes how to:
• Use the Biopsy Mode

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 18-3

Use the Biopsy Mode

The Biopsy Mode is a very useful function for routine biopsies. Prior to using the biopsy
mode, the scan type must be set. This determines the mode (Axial or Helical) for the biopsy
sequence.

WARNING: When scanning for interventional (biopsy) studies the scan mode, image
thickness, number of images per rotation and the display layout used affect
the display of the images. It is recommended to use the Biopsy Mode provided
on the system. If manually prescribing biopsy scans, Axial 1i scan mode or
Helical scan mode with a slice thickness greater than 2.5 mm must be used.
Do not use Cine scan mode for interventional (Biopsy) imaging. Do not use an
Auto view layout with more than one Auto View image viewport.
Refer to Select a Multiple Image Display for more information on how to set up the
desired viewing options.
Figure 18-1 Viewing options that should not be used

4 on 1 2 on 1

NOTE: Technical factors such as scan type, kV, mA and rotation time used is determined
based on the last group scanned. If the AutoVoice feature was used in the prior group,
it is still on for the biopsy scans.
Refer to Select a Multiple Image Display for more information on how to set up the
desired viewing options.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 18-4

Choose one of the following for the best auto view layouts

1. From the view/edit screen, click [Biopsy Rx].

A pop up window appears containing all of the Biopsy Rx Parameters.

2. Set the Biopsy Reference.

The Biopsy Reference tells the system how to acquire images based on the Biopsy
Location. Selecting [Superior] means all images are acquired from the Biopsy
Location, superiorly. Selecting [Centered] means the system acquires images above,
at, and below the Biopsy Location. Selecting [Inferior] means the images are
acquired from the Biopsy Location, inferiorly.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 18-5

NOTE: When using Centered, it is easier to program odd numbers of slices, i.e. 3,5,7, etc. This
allows the system to place even numbers above and below the reference location. If
you choose to use even numbers of slices, the system places the extra image in the
superior portion.
3. Enter Biopsy Location or click [Get Alignment Light Location].
If you have a specific location chosen from the localizer scans, you may enter that
location in the biopsy location field. Your other option is to move the table and center
the needle under the External or Internal laser light and then select the appropriate
designation in the Set Alignment Light selection depending on the laser used for
centering. This way is especially helpful once the needle or tube is placed.
4. Enter the Number of Images to be acquired for each pass.
You may enter any value.
5. Enter Gantry Tilt, if necessary.
6. Click [Thickness].
This sets the slice thickness for each image. Choose from 1.25 mm, 2.5 mm, 3.75 mm,
5.0 mm, 7.5 mm or 10 mm for the helical scans.
Axial thickness choices are 5/1i and 10/1i. This restriction for axial scans, is so that
the location on the gantry is the location of a slice.
7. Enter the Image Interval.
Image Interval is for helical scans only.This sets the distance between images.
Commonly for a biopsy, the interval is set to the same value as the slice thickness or
with minimal overlap.
8. Click [Confirm Biopsy Rx] or [Cancel].
Confirm Biopsy Rx activates the scan sequence to acquire images. Cancel cancels
the Biopsy Rx window and does not acquire images.
NOTE: The Biopsy Rx button is also available from the dynaplan screen. All of the steps
remain the same. It is very useful to utilize this button, especially if a series of biopsy
images have been acquired previously. This is because the biopsy images remains in
the same series number and there is no need to return to the view/edit screen.
NOTE: Biopsy Images are not AutoFilmed. If a previous scan group had AutoFilm on, it is now
turned off. Any subsequent scans done has to turn AutoFilm back on.
NOTE: Check the mA prescribed. AutomA is automatically turned off in Biospy Mode. Review
the mA value to ensure it is appropriate for the type of scan being performed. Return
to the view/edit screen and adjust mA as needed.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 18-6

Quick Steps: Use the Biopsy Mode

1. From the view/edit screen, click [Biopsy Rx].
2. Set the Biopsy Reference.
3. Enter Biopsy Location or click [Get Alignment Light Location].
4. Enter the Number of Images to be acquired for each pass.
5. Enter Gantry Tilt, if necessary.
6. Click [Thickness].
7. Enter the Image Interval.
8. Click [Confirm Biopsy Rx] or [Cancel].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 18-7

Chapter 19
X-Y Table Accuracy Procedure

Introduction
This chapter explains the procedure to determine X-Y Table Accuracy. It contains the
step-by-step instructions to help you learn how to:
• Recommended workflow for RT
• Clinical table lateral motion verification procedure for PET-CT RT and CT-RT
– Set Up
– Procedure
– Analysis of Results
• Clinical table elevation adjustment verification procedure for PET-CT RT and CT-RT
– Procedure
– Analysis

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 19-1

Recommended workflow for RT

1. Position patient on the table.
2. Cradle should be at the home position.
3. Select Internal landmark on the gantry controls.
4. After the patient is positioned on the table, drive the cradle between 890 mm to 850 mm
into the gantry bore and then back to the full-retracted position using the gantry
controls.
This centers the cradle.
Each in and out motion of the cradle is one cycle.
The cradle must cycle the number of times as determined in the Lateral Motion
Verification procedure.
NOTE: Determine the number of extension/retraction cycles needed based on testing.
5. Center a landmark on the RT tabletop using the sagittal room alignment laser line.
6. Using external room lasers position patient elevation as desired and place temporary
patient alignment marks on the skin.
7. Place radio-opaque fiducial markers on the temporary alignment marks.
8. Turn on CT gantry laser lights.
9. Move patient into the gantry such that the axial landmark location for imaging (For
example: sternal notch, ….) placed in step 7aligns with the axial internal gantry laser.
10. With the gantry lasers on, adjust the patient elevation until the gantry elevation laser
matches the patient alignment marks placed in step 7.
11. Establish the landmark as the scan reference with the gantry internal landmark button.
12. Conduct the CT exam with the landmark established in step 7.
13. Turn on the external room lasers.
14. Retract the patient and change elevation of table to match the patient alignment marks
placed in step 7.
15. Review the resulting images and confirm that the radio-opaque markers placed in step
7 align with the image coordinate iso-center.
16. Determine treatment Iso-center with simulation software such as Advantage Sim.
17. Shift room lasers as defined by simulation software.
18. Tattoo the patient for therapy.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 19-2

Quick Steps: Clinical table elevation adjustment verification

procedure for PET-CT RT and CT-RT
1. Position patient on the table.
2. Cradle should be at the home position.
3. Select Internal landmark on the gantry controls.
4. After the patient is positioned on the table, drive the cradle between 890 mm to 850
mm into the gantry bore and then back to the full-retracted position using the gantry
controls.
5. Center a landmark on the RT tabletop using the sagittal room alignment laser line.
6. Using external room lasers position patient elevation as desired and place temporary
patient alignment marks on the skin.
7. Place radio-opaque fiducial markers on the temporary alignment marks.
8. Turn on CT gantry laser lights.
9. Move patient into the gantry such that the axial landmark location for imaging (For
example: sternal notch, ….) placed in step 7aligns with the axial internal gantry laser.
10. With the gantry lasers on, adjust the patient elevation until the gantry elevation laser
matches the patient alignment marks placed in step 7.
11. Establish the landmark as the scan reference with the gantry internal landmark
button.
12. Conduct the CT exam with the landmark established in step 7.
13. Turn on the external room lasers.
14. Retract the patient and change elevation of table to match the patient alignment
marks placed in step 7.
15. Review the resulting images and confirm that the radio-opaque markers placed in
step 7 align with the image coordinate iso-center.
16. Determine treatment Iso-center with simulation software such as Advantage Sim.
17. Shift room lasers as defined by simulation software.
18. Tattoo the patient for therapy.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 19-3

Clinical table lateral motion verification procedure for

PET-CT RT and CT-RT
Set Up
The purpose of this procedure is to allow a clinical end-user to measure the amount of
lateral cradle motion between the room and gantry laser system and to determine how to
compensate for it in RT workflow for CT. This procedure should be done once by your site
physicist.

Requirements
One metric ruler (minimum 1.0 mm resolution)
RT tabletop
100 pounds of standard weights (25 pounds plates recommended)
Figure 19-1 Metric ruler aligned with laser on top of cradle top

Set Up Procedure
1. Install RT flat top on cradle.
2. If a PET/CT system, move table base to CT position.
3. Set elevation at 150 mm below ISO.
NOTE: When reading the metric scale, it is important to read to 0.5 mm.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 19-4

Quick Steps: Clinical table lateral motion verification procedure for

PET-CT RT and CT-RT
Set Up
1. Install RT flat top on cradle.
2. If a PET/CT system, move table base to CT position.
3. Set elevation at 150 mm below ISO.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 19-5

Clinical table lateral motion verification procedure for

PET-CT RT and CT-RT
Procedure
Determine the number of ½ cradle cycles required for cradle to be centered.
1. Move cradle to home - fully out of the bore.
2. Manually slide the front of the cradle to the left or right.
3. Apply four 25 pound weights to the RT flat top (refer to Figure 19-2) without moving the
cradle.
4. Place the metric ruler at the H2 location on the Flat Top.
5. Drive the cradle in using the gantry controls until ruler aligns with the overhead room
laser.
6. Center the ruler on a whole number - example Figure 19-1 shows the ruler center at
15cm.
This measurement will be called "Room 1" in the chart below and will equal 0.0 mm.
7. Define a ± coordinate system.
In figure 1 you can see a piece of paper which defines the left as positive, and right as
negative.
8. Turn on the gantry lasers and drive the cradle until the internal gantry laser aligns with
the long edge of the ruler.
9. Record the laser position on the ruler.
This measurement will be called "Scan Plane 1" in the chart below.
10. Drive the cradle out of the bore until the ruler aligns with the overhead room laser again.
11. Record the laser position on the ruler.
This measurement will be called "Room 2" in the chart below.
12. Drive the Cradle fully out - to the home position.
13. Repeat steps 5-10, two more times.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 19-6

Figure 19-2 Side view of table showing weight and ruler placement.

Results
Table 19-1 Use the chart below to record the results

Measurement Location _____________________

Weight _____________________

Room 1 _____________________ (mm)

Scan Plan 1 _____________________ (mm)
Room 2 _____________________ (mm)
Room 3 _____________________ (mm)
Scan Plane 2 _____________________ (mm)
Room 4 _____________________ (mm)
Room 5 _____________________ (mm)
Scan Plane 3 _____________________ (mm)
Room 6 _____________________ (mm)

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 19-7

Quick Steps: Clinical table lateral motion verification procedure for

PET-CT RT and CT-RT
Procedure
1. Move cradle to home - fully out of the bore.
2. Manually slide the front of the cradle to the left or right.
3. Apply four 25 pound weights to the RT flat top (refer to Figure 19-2) without moving the
cradle.
4. Place the metric ruler at the H2 location on the Flat Top.
5. Drive the cradle in using the gantry controls until ruler aligns with the overhead room
laser.
6. Center the ruler on a whole number - example Figure 19-1 shows the ruler center at
15cm.
7. Define a ± coordinate system.
8. Turn on the gantry lasers and drive the cradle until the internal gantry laser aligns with
the long edge of the ruler.
9. Record the laser position on the ruler.
10. Drive the cradle out of the bore until the ruler aligns with the overhead room laser
again.
11. Record the laser position on the ruler.
12. Drive the Cradle fully out - to the home position.
13. Repeat steps 5-10, two more times.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 19-8

Clinical table lateral motion verification procedure for

PET-CT RT and CT-RT
Analysis of Results
Below is a set of example data which will be used to discuss the interpretation of the results.
Table 19-2

Measurement Location H2
Weight 100 pounds

Room 1 0.0 mm
Scan Plan 1 -1.5 mm
Room 2 -3.5 mm
Room 3 -3.5 mm
Scan Plane 2 -2.5 mm
Room 4 -4.5 mm
Room 5 -4.5 mm
Scan Plane 3 -4.0 mm
Room 6 -5.5 mm

1. From "Room 6", it can be seen that the initial cradle lateral shift was 5.5mm, therefore if
the cradle were not cycled prior to scanning, the offset at the scan plane relative to the
room lasers could be this large.
2. After one cycle (extend between 890 mm to 850 mm, then retract) the offset at the scan
plane improves by 3.5mm (in this case) and therefore the actual offset is 2.0 mm
(5.5-3.5).
NOTE: One cycle equals a cradle in and out motion.
Some systems may only require one cycle, others may require three cycles.
3. After 2 cycles the offset at the scan plane improves by 4.5mm (in this case) and therefore
the actual offset is 1.0 mm (5.5-4.5).
4. Depending upon the desired level of offset, this method can be used to determine the
number of cycles needed.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 19-9

Quick Steps: Clinical table lateral motion verification procedure for

PET-CT RT and CT-RT
Analysis of Results
1. From "Room 6", it can be seen that the initial cradle lateral shift was 5.5mm, therefore if
the cradle were not cycled prior to scanning, the offset at the scan plane relative to the
room lasers could be this large.
2. After one cycle (extend between 890 mm to 850 mm, then retract) the offset at the
scan plane improves by 3.5mm (in this case) and therefore the actual offset is 2.0 mm
(5.5-3.5).
3. After 2 cycles the offset at the scan plane improves by 4.5mm (in this case) and
therefore the actual offset is 1.0 mm (5.5-4.5).
4. Depending upon the desired level of offset, this method can be used to determine the
number of cycles needed.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 19-10

Clinical table elevation adjustment verification

procedure for PET-CT RT and CT-RT
The purpose of this procedure is to allow a clinical end-user to verify that the RT workflow for
CT simulation with table elevation adjustment between the room and gantry laser system is
working. Proper re-adjustment of table elevation, independent of weight distribution, is
verified by generation of post-elevation-adjustment images with images with less than
1.0 mm distance between image center and the QA device feature.

Requirements
Medtec CT Simulation Laser QA device phantom or equivalent device (Figure 19-3,
requires 2 IPPS™ Lok-Bars)
RT tabletop
100 pounds of standard weights (25 pounds plates recommended)
Figure 19-3 LEFT - MedTec RT alignment device - RIGHT: CT orthogonal reformat image of
laser QA device (abdomen window level).

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 19-11

Clinical table elevation adjustment verification

procedure for PET-CT RT and CT-RT
Procedure
1. Position the weights and attach the QA device to notches near the center of the RT
cradle, as shown in Figure 19-4.
2. Set the table elevation such that the room sagittal laser light intersects the side
horizontal QA device lines and the room coronal laser light intersects the top QA device
lines. The sagittal laser light produces the line parallel to the RT tabletop on the side of
the device. An example of this alignment is shown in Figure 19-3 at left.
3. Initiate an Exam.
4. Acquire the scout over the range of the QA device.
5. Using the graphical Rx, set up an axial CT imaging scan which will produce between 10
and 20 mm of images at the thinnest slice width available.
6. Define the CT DFOV such that the pixels in the images produced are isotropic.
For example, with a scanner producing 0.625 mm slices, a 512x512 image with DFOV
32.0 cm will produce images with 0.6253 pixels.
The formula for pixel size is: Pixel size = DFOV in mm divided by 512.
7. Use the "Standard" CT recon filter.
8. Read and record the table elevation as reported on the gantry (Table 19-3).
9. Initiate the CT scan and image the QA device.
This image set represents the situation prior to elevation adjustment.
10. After the CT scanning is done, re-adjust the elevation of the table such that the gantry
sagittal laser lights align with the sagittal lines on the side of the QA device.
11. Read and record the table elevation in the results (Table 19-3).
12. Repeat the same CT scan series to produce the alignment-adjusted images.
Figure 19-4 Side view of QA device and weights placement.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 19-12

Quick Steps: Clinical table elevation adjustment verification

procedure for PET-CT RT and CT-RT
Procedure
1. Position the weights and attach the QA device to notches near the center of the RT
cradle, as shown in Figure 19-4.
2. Set the table elevation such that the room sagittal laser light intersects the side
horizontal QA device lines and the room coronal laser light intersects the top QA device
lines. The sagittal laser light produces the line parallel to the RT tabletop on the side of
the device. An example of this alignment is shown in Figure 19-3 at left.
3. Initiate an Exam.
4. Acquire the scout over the range of the QA device.
5. Using the graphical Rx, set up an axial CT imaging scan which will produce between 10
and 20 mm of images at the thinnest slice width available.
6. Define the CT DFOV such that the pixels in the images produced are isotropic.
7. Use the "Standard" CT recon filter.
8. Read and record the table elevation as reported on the gantry (Table 19-3).
9. Initiate the CT scan and image the QA device.
10. After the CT scanning is done, re-adjust the elevation of the table such that the gantry
sagittal laser lights align with the sagittal lines on the side of the QA device.
11. Read and record the table elevation in the results (Table 19-3).
12. Repeat the same CT scan series to produce the alignment-adjusted images.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 19-13

Clinical table elevation adjustment verification

procedure for PET-CT RT and CT-RT
Analysis
1. Load the non-adjusted axial CT image series into a viewing tool with zoom and distance
measuring capability.
2. Scroll to the image where the horizontal feature in the QA device is best visualized in the
center QA feature.
3. Magnify the images to the highest possible zoom to show (a) the cross-hairs
representing image center can be seen and (b) the horizontal feature can be seen.
See Figure 19-5 for an example.
4. Using the measurement tool, determine the distance from image center to the center of
the QA feature.
5. Record the number in the results as "Pre-adjustment distance" (Table 19-3)
6. Repeat steps 1-4 for the adjusted-elevation image set.
7. Record the measurement under "Post-adjustment distance" (Table 19-3).
Figure 19-5 Example of measurement of QA feature offset from image center (red
cross-hairs). LEFT: image prior to elevation adjustment using gantry sagittal laser; RIGHT:
image following elevation adjustment. Green lines represent line drawn using measurement
tool, numerical report out is shown in red.

Results
NOTE: Post adjustment QA distance represents the accuracy of table vertical position
achievable with the workflow recommended in section one.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 19-14

The post-adjustment image center to QA distance should be less than 1.0 mm, verifying that
the gantry lasers (with elevation adjustment) and room lasers both indicate image center,
using the QA feature location in the image as evidence.
Table 19-3

Table elevation - QA aligned to room laser _____________________ (mm)

Table elevation - QA re-aligned to gantry laser _____________________ (mm)
Image Center to QA pre-adjustment distance _____________________ (mm)
Image Center to QA post-adjustment distance _____________________ (mm)

Quick Steps: Clinical table elevation adjustment verification

procedure for PET-CT RT and CT-RT
Analysis
1. Load the non-adjusted axial CT image series into a viewing tool with zoom and
distance measuring capability.
2. Scroll to the image where the horizontal feature in the QA device is best visualized in
the center QA feature.
3. Magnify the images to the highest possible zoom to show (a) the cross-hairs
representing image center can be seen and (b) the horizontal feature can be seen.
4. Using the measurement tool, determine the distance from image center to the center
of the QA feature.
5. Record the number in the results as "Pre-adjustment distance" (Table 19-3)
6. Repeat steps 1-4 for the adjusted-elevation image set.
7. Record the measurement under "Post-adjustment distance" (Table 19-3).
NOTE: Post adjustment QA distance represents the accuracy of table vertical position
achievable with the workflow recommended in section one.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 19-15

Chapter 20
Patient Setup and Scout Scan

Introduction
This chapter explains setting up the patient and completing a localizer (Scout) scan. It
contains the step-by-step instructions to help you learn how to:
• Set Up Patient Information
• Position the Patient
• Selecting a Protocol
• Adjust the Localizer (Scout)
• Confirm the Localizer (Scout)

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 20-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to successfully set up a patient for scanning.
Some of the concepts you need to understand are:
• Using Protocols
• Using Contrast
• Setting Up a Patient without an ID#
• Emperor Era Birth Year Entry

Using Protocols
All parameters for scanning a patient can be set up in a protocol. This saves the technologist
time when prescribing scan parameters for each patient. When a new patient is to be
scanned, the technologist types in the patient information and chooses a protocol. The
protocol may be adjusted on a per patient basis without permanently altering the original
set of parameters. Once the parameters are set and the prescription is confirmed, scanning
can begin.
NOTE: For information on building protocols, refer to the Building Protocols chapter.

Using Contrast
When IV contrast is to be used, make sure the injector or syringes of contrast are set up
before performing the localizer (scout) scan. The contrast (syringe) icon on the lower right
corner of the view/edit screen must be selected. When the icon is selected, there is a “+C”
annotation on the images next to the image number, indicating that IV contrast was used
for that exam.

Setting Up a Patient without an ID#

The patient ID# is the minimum amount of information required by the scanner to perform a
patient scan. If the patient does not have an ID#, a "?" or the word "trauma" may be typed
into the ID# field. Once an ID# is assigned to the patient, the exam information may be
edited using the Edit Patient feature.
NOTE: For information on performing Edit Patient Information, refer to Managing Images.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 20-2

Emperor Era Birth Year Entry

Emperor year corresponds to a Japanese Emperor and year of his reign. Patients in Japan
may know their birth date only by this year format. Emperor year entry is available on your
system when it is configured in the yyyy/mm/dd date format. The Era codes are Heisel (H),
Showa (S), Taisho (T), Meiji (M). This information is entered in the birth date field on the New
Patient screen. For example, if your patient were born in the 26th year of Showa's reign you
would enter S26 for the year. This corresponds to a western year of 1951. The system will
store the converted birth year in the birth date field on the New Patient and Patient
Schedule screens and in the image header.

Preset Descriptions
The New Patient Screen has 3 different Preset selection that you can choose from. These
areas allow you to enter frequently used Physician, Radiologist, and Operator names and
initials. This is a feature to expedite data entry.
You can Add, Delete and change the information in this area.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 20-3

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for Setting Up A Patient And Completing
A Localizer (Scout) Scan. Specifically, it describes how to:
• Set Up Patient Information
• Position the Patient
• Selecting a Protocol
• Adjust the Localizer (Scout)
• Confirm the Localizer (Scout)

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 20-4

Set Up Patient Information

Use this procedure each time you start a new patient exam. It is best to setup the patient
information before you get the patient on the table. This reduces the amount of time the
patient has to be on the table, possibly in a difficult position. When entering the patient
information, the only field required for scanning is the patient ID. This task describes the
manual input of the data. The data can also be input by using Patient Schedule or a bar code
reader.
NOTE: For more information on Patient Schedule or a Bar code reader refer to Scheduling
Patients.
1. From the scan monitor, click [New Patient].

The Patient Information screen appears automatically displaying the new Exam
Number.
NOTE: The system assigns the exam number automatically. The maximum Exam number
for patient scanning is 49,999. The exam number will need to be reset by your Field
Engineer when the system reaches the maximum number
Table 20-1 Patient Information Screen

Field Name Parameters

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 20-5

Field Name Parameters

Date Exam Date Month, Day, Year
Time Exam Time Hour, Minute

2. From the Patient Information area, enter data into the appropriate fields.
You must enter the Patient ID to continue. The Protocol Selection area does not
become active until the Patient ID is entered.
When you are typing the patient’s name, for DICOM users, you have to type the last
name, first name, and middle initial with a "^" between names and initials.
NOTE: The Exam Description will be truncated to 22 characters when imported from a
HIS/RIS system. The Study description field (0008, 1030) in the DICOM header is
mapped to the Exam Description field on the Schedule Patient and New Patient
screens.
NOTE: If you have a network set up to transfer images and the protocol using the DICOM
language then you need to type in the information as described above.

CAUTION: When entering Patient ID information the system may contain multiple
instances of the same Patient ID. Multiple schedule records can be due to
multiple procedures being ordered under separate accession numbers or
New and Completed records in the Patient schedule for the same Patient ID.
When entering the Patient ID verify that the correct Accession number and
Exam Description selected is what is desired. Scanning with an incorrect
accession number may cause problems reconciling exams on a PACS system.
Please see the Schedule Patients chapter for more information.
Make sure that you keep the mouse over the New Patient screen when typing.
Once you have entered data into a field, you can press Enter to go to the next text
box or you can click in the text box you wish to input data.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 20-6

3. Click the preset buttons and select the desired information. Or, click on the field and
enter desired information.
If you click Referring Physician, Radiologist, or Operator, a preset menu will appear
allowing you to select which preset you wish to use.
To change a name from the list, click Referring Physician, Radiologist, or Operator,
select the name, enter new information, and click [Change].
To add a name to the list, click Referring Physician, Radiologist, or Operator, type
the name and click [Add].
To delete a name from the list, click Referring Physician, Radiologist, or Operator,
select the name and click [Delete].
These Presets are saved across software loads from Save System State.

4. When all of the desired patient information is completed, select the desired protocol
from the Anatomical Selector area.
You can select a protocol by either selecting a default protocol or by choosing a
specific body part, then selecting the protocol.
If you know the number of the protocol, you can type the number in at the bottom of
the patient information screen.
The protocol area is broken down into 10 adult protocols and 10 infant protocols.
Protocols 1-10 are adult protocol areas and 11-20 are infant protocol areas. In each
protocol area, you can have up to 90 different protocols for that area.
NOTE: It is important to set the Delete Completed Exams to zero when Patient Information
is updated from the HIS/RIS. This will assure that Completed Accession numbers are
not inadvertently selected for scanning a second time causing Patient reconciliation
issues on the PACS system.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 20-7

NOTE: For more information on protocols, refer to Building Protocols.

Quick Steps: Set Up Patient Information

1. From the scan monitor, click [New Patient].
2. From the Patient Information area, enter data into the appropriate fields.
3. Click the preset buttons and select the desired information. Or, click on the field and
enter desired information.
4. When all of the desired patient information is completed, select the desired protocol
from the Anatomical Selector area.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 20-8

Position the Patient

It is best to prepare the scan room before bringing the patient into the room. Make sure that
you have all the necessary supplies and accessories.
1. Attach the head holder or foot extender to the end of the cradle towards the gantry.
2. Lay the patient on the table.
Always use the head holder straps with the head holder to immobilize the patient’s
head to prevent motion. When doing body scans, make sure that you have the body
straps connected to the cradle and wrapped around the patient.

CAUTION: The patient positioning straps provided with the system do not support the
full weight of the patient. Patient positioning straps should be used to aid in
patient positioning and are not meant to fully restrain the patient.
3. Press the buttons on the gantry to raise the table up and in.
Always make sure that nothing is close to the table that may interfere with table
movement.
4. Position the laser lights so that they are lined up with the desired anatomical reference
and centered to the desired anatomy.

CAUTION: Make sure that you instruct the patient to look away from the laser lights. The
laser beam used for positioning can cause eye injury.
Do not position the patient with the laser lights in their eyes.
NOTE: Landmark setting for Patient Position Sensitive Study Types. When using the external
laser alignment light for patient positioning purposes, be aware that the patient’s
elevation may be slightly lower with the cradle extended than with the cradle fully
retracted. This is because the cradle may bend slightly under a patient’s weight.
NOTE: This difference should be taken into consideration for applications where patient
position information is critical, such as radiation therapy planning. To minimize these
affects, after using the external laser alignment system to position the patient,
advance the patient to the CT scan plane. Turn on the CT alignment lights to
determine if they line up with the markers on the patient. If necessary, compensate
for the bend in the cradle by elevating the table. When the CT alignment lights line
up with the markers, re-set the landmark for the scan using the Internal laser
alignment light.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 20-9

5. Press the desired landmark button (Required).

If you do not press the landmark button, confirm remains gray (unselectable) until the
landmark button has been pressed.

Quick Steps: Position the Patient

1. Attach the head holder or foot extender to the end of the cradle towards the gantry.
2. Lay the patient on the table.
3. Press the buttons on the gantry to raise the table up and in.
4. Position the laser lights so that they are lined up with the desired anatomical reference
and centered to the desired anatomy.
5. Press the desired landmark button (Required).

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 20-10

Selecting a Protocol
Selecting a protocol saves you a lot of time while maintaining a quality exam. It keeps exams
consistent because the exam is done the same way each time.
1. On the left monitor, place the mouse over the area that you want to scan and click on it.
A list of all the protocols that you built in this area of the protocol manager appears.
2. From the list, select the protocol that you want to use by clicking on it.

Figure 20-1 Protocol Selector

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 20-11

Quick Steps: Selecting a Protocol

1. On the left monitor, place the mouse over the area that you want to scan and click on
it.
2. From the list, select the protocol that you want to use by clicking on it.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 20-12

Adjust the Localizer (Scout)

Setting a landmark is very important. The landmark sets a known anatomical reference for
the radiologist which he/she correlate the anatomy. The landmark sets the zero location.
When scanning towards the patient’s head, you are scanning superior to the zero location.
When scanning towards the patient’s feet, you are scanning inferior to the zero location.
You should set the zero location to known anatomy. For example, when scanning a head,
the landmark or zero location is typically the orbital meatal line.
1. The orientation of the patient at the top of the screen should be the same as the
orientation of the patient that you are scanning.
Click on the body at the head or feet to change Head/Feet first orientation.
Click on the table or above the body to rotate the body at 90 degree increments.
2. Check the start/end locations, kV, mA and autovoice (if applicable).
Click on the box that you want to make changes to and type in the new parameter.
3. For systems with Smart Score Pro and Prospective Gating, when performing a Smart
Score exam, click [Gating].
The gating check button verifies that the scanner is receiving the ECG monitor signal.
Before this is possible you must set up the patient monitor.

If the button is red that means no signal has been detected by the system. The
system pops up a message instructing you to check the connection. Check to make
sure all of the ECG leads are connected to the patient and that power is on to the
monitor. Click [OK] to close the message box when you have checked everything. If
the gating check button is light blue you can proceed.
NOTE: For more information about gating and instructions on prescribing an exam that
includes gating measurements, refer to Prospective Gating (SmartScore) (Option) or
Cardiac Imaging chapter.

Quick Steps: Adjust the Localizer (Scout)

1. The orientation of the patient at the top of the screen should be the same as the
orientation of the patient that you are scanning.
2. Check the start/end locations, kV, mA and autovoice (if applicable).
3. For systems with Smart Score Pro and Prospective Gating, when performing a Smart
Score exam, click [Gating].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 20-13

Confirm the Localizer (Scout)

Now you are ready to scan the patient. Before you press the start scan button make sure
that no one is in the room.
1. On the left monitor, click [Confirm].
2. On the top of the keyboard, press [Move to Scan].
The button is flashing green.
If you need to stop the table movement, press [Stop Move].
3. Press [Start Scan].
The button is flashing green.
If you need to stop the scan, press [Stop Scan].
If you need to pause the current scan, press [Pause Scan]. This finishes the current
scan, then pause the next scan.
If you pause the scan a resume key pops up on the screen. Click [Resume] when you
are ready to scan.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to take the second scout.

Quick Steps: Confirm the Localizer (Scout)

1. On the left monitor, click [Confirm].
2. On the top of the keyboard, press [Move to Scan].
3. Press [Start Scan].
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to take the second scout.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 20-14

Chapter 21
Scan Series Setup

Introduction
This chapter explains how to setup for the scan series. It contains the step-by-step
instructions to help you learn how to:
• Set Scan Parameters
• Adjusting Graphic Rx
• Set Timing Parameters
• Set Display Factors
• Repeat a Series

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to successfully set up the scan series.
Concepts you need to understand are:
• Adjusting a Protocol
• Setting Scan Field of View and Display Field of View
• Using a Breath Hold Delay
• Working with the Optimizer

Adjusting a Protocol
Once a specific protocol is selected from the protocol manager, any of the parameters may
be modified on a per patient basis. This can be done without permanently altering the
original protocol.

Setting Scan Field of View and Display Field of View

Scan Field of View (SFOV) is the parameter that determines how much anatomy is scanned.
The SFOV should always be larger than the circumference of the patient, regardless of what
part is being imaged.
Display Field of View (DFOV) is the parameter that determines how much of the SFOV is
reconstructed into an image. DFOV can be less than or equal to the SFOV but cannot be
more than the SFOV. Within the DFOV a image center must be set. The center determines
upon which anatomy the DFOV is centered. The center is set using two parameters, R-L
center and A-P center. The R-L value centers the DFOV on the right and left axes of the
patient. The A-P value centers the DFOV on the anterior and posterior axes of the patient.
Entering a value other than zero off centers the image. This is most often referred to as
targeting the image. Off centering is used most on spine studies or for minor adjustments to
imperfections in centering the patient on the table. If large adjustments are needed, then
you should consider re-positioning the patient on the table.

Using a Breath Hold Delay

The Breath Hold parameter is the amount of time in seconds that your patient can hold their
breath. For better registration of the patient’s anatomy on the scan, use a longer Breath
Hold time. It is important that you practice with your patient to determine how long they can
hold their breath. Breath Hold, along with another parameter, Breathe Time, automatically
divides all of your prescribed scans into Breath Hold scanning clusters.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-2

Breathe Time is the amount of time, in seconds, you allow your patient to breathe in
between breath hold clusters. Typical Breath Hold and Breathe Times are 12 seconds and 12
seconds or 10 seconds and 10 seconds. But, again, practice with your patient.

Working with the Optimizer

If the system cannot complete the entire scan prescription with the technical parameters
that you have selected, the Optimize icon is highlighted in red. At this point, you can select
the Optimize icon to open the technique optimize screen.
The optimize screen calculates and displays in real time up to three factors that can be
changed to allow the system to continue.
One factor that can be changed is the up front delay, which can be changed by the amount
shown in the up front delay column. Remember, the up front delay is the time before you can
proceed with scanning. The start scan button does not light up until the up front delay
expires. The second factor is a change in the mA to what is displayed in the mA column. If
you choose this reduction, you may be reducing image quality. Make sure that you always
use enough mA to get the best image quality. The third potential change is to the group
delay. Again the valid parameter is shown in the group delay column. You need only to
select one of the parameters to continue. The selection is made by simply selecting the
parameter that you feel is best for that prescription.
If multiple groups are prescribed, the optimize screen updates for each group, allowing you
to make choices for each group.
Once you have made the choices which satisfy the system, without compromising image
quality, you then get a message that tube cooling is no longer needed and the Optimize in
Progress icon is highlighted in blue. You can select the icon to leave the technique optimize
screen and continue.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-3

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for setting up the scan series.
Specifically, it describes how to:
• Set Scan Parameters
• Adjusting Graphic Rx
• Set Timing Parameters
• Set Display Factors
• Repeat a Series

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-4

Set Scan Parameters

Setting the scan parameters is a very important part of the scan. The screen on which you
input all of these parameters is called the View Edit screen. Remember that you have to
adjust the parameters according to the patient’s size and the anatomy that you are
scanning. These parameters determines the Image Quality that you achieve. Always make
sure that you remove any objects that might cause artifacts. The scout is a good place to
view objects that might cause artifacts.
1. From the scan monitor, click [Next Series].
This is located at the bottom of the scan monitor screen.
The screen on which you input all of these parameters is called the View Edit screen.
Next and prior series moves you around in the protocol. There may be times that you
want to skip a series in the protocol. For example, a series involving a patient that
was scanned for contrast only and your current series is built for no contrast.
2. The orientation of the patient at the top of the monitor should be the same as the scout.
If not, click on the picture of the patient.
There may be times that you change the patient’s position from the way that the
protocol was built. In that case, you have to change the patient’s orientation on the
screen each time you click [Next Series].
3. To set the scan parameters, start at the left side of the screen and work your way to the
right.
This enables you to check all of the parameters without skipping any.
4. Select the [Scan type] and choose Axial, Helical, Cardiac, or Cine scan mode.
There are three scan types on the system.
– Axial is a step and shoot method.
– Helical (sometimes called spiral) is continuous table movement while exposing the
patient. When scanning in the interleaved mode 3,480 to 4,740 views are
reconstructed.
– The interleaved mode gets the best image quality. When scanning in the
interspaced mode 2,584 to 4,008 views are reconstructed.
– Cine Full is continuous exposure which supports table moves equal to the beam
collimation or no table move where the scans are taken at one table position.
Cine Segment is continuous exposure which supports table movement.There are five
Rotation Times on the system.
– The times are: 0.8, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0.
NOTE: The LightSpeed RT support gantry rotation times of 1 second, 2 seconds, 3 seconds,
or 4 seconds.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-5

NOTE: If you have the VariSpeed option, the times will be 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0.
There are two Rotation Lengths on the system.
– The Rotation Lengths are Segment and Full.
– Full Rotation is used most often.
– Segment rotation is good for Cardiac scans.
NOTE: For more information on these scan types, rotation, and lengths, refer to Building
Protocols.
5. Click [Thick Speed] and choose the thickness and images per rotation that you want.
This contains selections for thickness, images per rotation, and high resolution mode.
It also lists the slice thickness that is available for reconstructions.
The system comes with .63 mm, 1.25 mm, 2.5 mm, 3.75 mm, 5 mm, 7.5 mm, and 10
mm selections.
In the axial mode the number of images per rotation can be 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16. The
choice for one determines the choices for the other. Some combinations are not
allowed. The choices you make for thickness and images per rotation determine the
available reconstruction thicknesses.
In the axial mode the High Resolution mode is available with 1.25 mm thickness with
one image per rotation and .63 mm thickness with two images per rotation. No other
thickness can be reconstructed prospectively or retrospectively.
In the helical mode, the pitches are 1:1, 0.75:1, 1.5:1, 0.625:1, 0.875:1, 1.35:1, or
1.675:1. The pitch is the table travel in millimeters per rotation divided by the beam
collimation.
NOTE: LightSpeed16, LightSpeed Pro16, LightSpeed RT16, and LightSpeed Xtra helical pitches
are, 0.563:1, 0.938:1, 1.375:1, 1.750:1, 0.625:1, 0.875:1, 1.350:1, and 1.675:1.
– 2 Row is good for thin slice work. It uses the small focal spot only.
– 4 Row Interleaved provides a 40 % mAs reduction, and is 1.5 to 3 times faster than
single slice helical and has minimal helical artifacts, but interleaved pitch 0.75:1
provides only half the coverage compared to interspaced mode.
– 4 Row Interspaced provides data acquisition 2 to 6 times faster than single slice
helical, but requires more interpolation, more helical artifact, and only a 20 % mAs
reduction.
NOTE: For more information on 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, or 64 row modes and multi detectors, refer to:
Multi-Detector Information.
The smaller the slice thickness, the more technique you need to use.
Thinner slice thickness gives you better detail.
For more information on multi detectors, refer to Multi-Detector Information.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-6

6. Click [Interval mm] and type in the interval that you want.
In the Helical mode, the table moves in mm., while exposing the patient.
In the Axial mode the interval or spacing defaults to equal the number of images per
rotations multiplied by the slice thickness. The interval for axial scanning can be zero,
equal to, or greater than the width of the detector configuration. Typical intervals
used are 10, 20, or 30 mm. With no gantry tilt, the Z axis increment is equal to the
slice thickness. With a gantry tilt, the z axis increment is greater than the slice
thickness because the distance between slice centers is elongated.
Axial interval with skip refers to a gap between scan groups. This can be useful, for
example, when performing a survey exam, such as a high resolution chest exam.
NOTE: For more information on axial interval with skip, refer to Multi-Detector Information.
In the Cine mode, for an interval greater than zero, scans is created at several
locations, and the end location changes. For an interval of zero, all images is taken at
the same location. For the single slice High Resolution Chest Mode, the minimum
scanning interval between slices is 5 mm. The usual interval is 10, 20, or 30 mm. You
can change the interval when setting up prospective multiple recons.
In Helical, the image interval defaults to equal the slice thickness. The interval
maximum is twice the slice thickness.
7. Click [Gantry Tilt] and enter the desired tilt.
The Gantry Tilt can be set manually to a maximum of 30 degrees in half degree
increments.
Type C' to enter the "current degree" in tilt field on the view edit table instead typing
the value of current degree.
NOTE: You may adjust the gantry to the desired tilt and type C in the gantry tilt field. This
updates the tilt with the current gantry tilt. This is useful when scanning head studies
without taking a scout scan.
8. Click [SFOV] and choose which field of view that you want.
The system comes with four scan field of views.
a) [Ped Head] is a field of view that is particularly useful for infants 18 months or less in
age. It allows you to enter up to a 25 cm field of view.
b) The [Head] scan field of view is for adult head scanning.
c) The [Small] scan field of view is particularly useful for extremities and the QA
phantom.
NOTE: If the scan type is Cardiac Helical dose is calculated from a 32 cm phantom. Retro
recon allows up to 35 cm DFOV.
d) The [Large] scan field of view is particularly useful for all body work. If you measure
the anatomy that you are scanning and it measures over 25 cm, you need to use the
large scan field of view. It allows you to enter up to a 50 cm display field of view.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-7

9. Click [kV] and choose which kV station that you want to use.
The system comes with four different kV stations.
These are examples for you to go by.
a) The 80kV station is particularly useful for Bone Mineral Densitomery and Perfusion
imaging in the brain.
b) The 100kV station is particularly useful for pediatric imaging.
c) The 120kV station is particularly useful for routine imaging of the chest, abdomen,
and pelvis areas.
d) The 140kV station is particularly useful for Posterior Fossa area, thick areas, and
heavy patients.
10. Click [mA] and type in the mA selection that you want to use.
The system allows you to type in increments of 10mA up to 440 mA for Performix
tubes and 800 mA for Performix Power tubes.

Quick Steps: Set Scan Parameters

1. From the scan monitor, click [Next Series].
2. The orientation of the patient at the top of the monitor should be the same as the
scout. If not, click on the picture of the patient.
3. To set the scan parameters, start at the left side of the screen and work your way to
the right.
4. Select the [Scan type] and choose Axial, Helical, Cardiac, or Cine scan mode.
5. Click [Thick Speed] and choose the thickness and images per rotation that you want.
6. Click [Interval mm] and type in the interval that you want.
7. Click [Gantry Tilt] and enter the desired tilt.
8. Click [SFOV] and choose which field of view that you want.
9. Click [kV] and choose which kV station that you want to use.
10. Click [mA] and type in the mA selection that you want to use.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-8

Adjusting Graphic Rx
Adjusting the scan series graphically is the fastest way to set up for a scan series. If your
protocol is set up correctly, you do not have to make many changes; just adjust the lines
representing the series and confirm.
NOTE: Restart Show Loc in the Tool Bar can be used to restart Graphic Rx in the situation
where the Scout image has been reconstructed but does not appear in Show
Localizer.
1. Click [Show Localizer].
This shows the scout with the graphic lines for you to adjust.

2. While holding the shift key down, click and drag the center red X to position the lines
over the anatomy you wish to cover.
This allows you to move the lines up and down on a lateral scout, as well as from side
to side on a AP scout. By moving the lines, you are adjusting the start and end
location, and the RAS (Right, Anterior, and Superior) coordinates.
3. Click and drag the solid box to the starting position.
This changes the starting point.
4. Click and drag the empty box to the ending position.
This changes the ending point.
If you hold the shift key down and drag either the solid or empty box, it adjusts both
the starting and ending locations at the same time.
5. Click and drag the diamond key to set the display field of view.
If you hold the shift key down and drag on the diamond key, it adjusts both sides of
the lines.
6. Click and drag the circle to adjust the tilt if needed.
If you tilt and change your mind, hold the shift key down and click on the circle. This
returns the tilt parameter to 0 degrees.
7. Select [Show] or [Hide] from the control panel.
If Hide Slices is visible then graphic mode is to show a a line for each image
reconned.
– Hide Slices is the default at system boot up. Once you change the mode, it will
remain through all exams until a system restart or shutdown is performed.
If Show Slices visible then graphic mode is to show a transparent area of coverage,
no lines displayed for slices.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-9

Figure 21-1 Graphic Options

Quick Steps: Adjusting Graphic Rx

1. Click [Show Localizer].
2. While holding the shift key down, click and drag the center red X to position the lines
over the anatomy you wish to cover.
3. Click and drag the solid box to the starting position.
4. Click and drag the empty box to the ending position.
5. Click and drag the diamond key to set the display field of view.
6. Click and drag the circle to adjust the tilt if needed.
7. Select [Show] or [Hide] from the control panel.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-10

Set Timing Parameters

Timing is a very important part of setting up the scan. The patient’s condition has a large
effect on timing. Make sure that you know how long the patient can hold his/her breath. This
helps when working with the Auto Voice.
It is very important to utilize injection delays. You can only inject once and you must get it
right the first time. Different anatomy enhances at different times. Check with your
radiologist for the right injection delays.
1. If the (Timing) card is not showing on top, select it. This is the card that looks like a stop
watch.

2. Click [Prep Group] and type in a injection delay if needed.

This can be used for giving contrast with a timed delay.
This can change to accommodate auto voice.
Valid ranges are:
– Group 1 can be from 0 to 90 seconds.
– Group 2 throughout the scan can be from 1 to 600 seconds, depending on scan
modes. Helical requires a 5 second delay and Cine requires a 1 second delay.
If you are using the Smart Prep option, this field is replaced with SP.
For more information on Smart Prep, refer to Smart Prep.
3. If scanning in the axial mode, click [ISD] (interscan delay) and type in a scan delay
between each axial scan.
This is the amount of time that you want to wait between each scan.
This can be useful when the optimizer is red. You can increase the ISD to allow for
more tube cooling.
4. Click [Breath Hold] and type in how long you want the patient to hold his/her breath.
Try to make this time as long as you can to avoid misregistration of anatomy.
5. Click [Breathe Time] and type in how long you want to give the patient to breathe in
between groups of scans.
Make sure that the patient can breathe but do not make the time gap between
breaths too long otherwise you loses the IV contrast.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-11

6. Click [Voice Lights Timer] and select which commands you want to use for breathing
instructions.
Three pre recorded voices are available in 9 languages. Which are user selectable.
Figure 21-2

NOTE: The Auto Voice language displayed at the time the systems is booted up is the
defaulted language set by your Field Engineer initially.
If the Auto Voice language is changed for the current exam, the system will return to
the default language once you have clicked End Exam.
NOTE: The Auto Voice language setting is a global setting and not protocol specific. Once
changed the language will be maintained across exams until changed. After a system
reboot the language selection defaults to the language setting in reconfig.
You can record an additional 17 voice instructions. For more information on Auto
Voice, refer to the Record a Personalized AutoVoice section of this guide.
You can choose to select AutoVoice preset delay. For more information refer to:
Change Pre-Set Delay for AutoVoice.
You can choose to select Breathing lights and/or a timer.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-12

Figure 21-3 .

A pale yellow color window with a "N" indicates the breathing lights are selected only.
No auto voice is selected.
A pale yellow color window with a "T" in it indicates that the breathing lights are
selected with a countdown timer.
A pale yellow color window with a number and a "T" indicates that auto voice,
breathing lights, and the countdown timer are selected.

Figure 21-4

A blue color window with a number indicates that auto voice only is selected. No
breathing lights or delays will come on.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-13

7. Click [Preview].
The preview function allows you to view graphically how the combination of breath
hold and breathe time affects your system.

Here is an example of the preview screen. In the beginning, you can see that there is
a 45 second prep delay, followed by a axial cluster of six scans. At the end of the axial
cluster, there is a 10 second breathe time and the helical clusters begin.
If your exam’s preview graph exceeds the width of the screen, you can use the scroll
keys at the bottom of the screen.

Preview also displays a summary of all your scan groups.

8. To get out of the preview mode and start scanning, click Confirm.

If you want to go back to view edit and make changes, click [View Edit].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-14

Quick Steps: Set Timing Parameters

1. If the (Timing) card is not showing on top, select it. This is the card that looks like a stop
watch.
2. Click [Prep Group] and type in a injection delay if needed.
3. If scanning in the axial mode, click [ISD] (interscan delay) and type in a scan delay
between each axial scan.
4. Click [Breath Hold] and type in how long you want the patient to hold his/her breath.
5. Click [Breathe Time] and type in how long you want to give the patient to breathe in
between groups of scans.
6. Click [Voice Lights Timer] and select which commands you want to use for breathing
instructions.
7. Click [Preview].
8. To get out of the preview mode and start scanning, click Confirm.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-15

Set Display Factors

Most of these parameters are already set from the protocol, and from the adjustments that
you make with the graphic lines on the scouts.
When setting the display factors, it is important to know why you are scanning the patient
and what you are looking for. If you are looking for fractures, you might want to use certain
parameters instead, if you were looking for a mass, you would want to use a different set of
parameters.
You can reconstruct images three different ways and film images nine different ways.
NOTE: For more information on filming, refer to: Automatic Filming
1. Select the Display card.

This is the card that has a image of a chest on it.

This shows all of the display parameters.
2. Click [DFOV] and type in the patient’s measurements.
This can also be adjusted by utilizing the diamond keys on each side of the graphic
lines on the scout.
If you want to type in a measurement, measure the patient at the widest point and
add 2 cm. This shows all the anatomy and the soft tissue around the anatomy.
3. Click [R/L Center] and type the R/L (right/left) coordinates.
This can be adjusted on the scout by dragging the diamond keys in or out on an AP
scout.
This can also be found by placing the mouse over the image and looking at the R or L
read out at the bottom of the image.
NOTE: + may be used for R values and - may be used for L values for faster data entry using
the ten key pad.
4. Click [A/P Center] and type the A/P (anterior/posterior) coordinates.
This can be adjusted by dragging the diamond keys up and down on an lateral scout.
This can be found by placing the mouse over the image and looking at the A or P read
out at the bottom of the image.
NOTE: + may be uses for A values and - may be used for P values for faster data entry using
the ten key pad.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-16

5. Click [Recon Type] and then select which algorithm you want to use.
The system comes with seven different algorithms.
a) Soft is particularly useful for tissues with similar densities, but not useful for
un-enhanced scans.
b) Std, short for standard, is particularly useful for routine exams like chest, abdomens,
and pelvis scans.
c) Lung is particularly useful for interstitial lung pathology.
d) Detail is particularly useful for post myelograms, where hybrid tissue detail and bone
edges are important.
e) Bone is particularly useful for High resolution exams and sharp bone detail.
f) Edge is particularly useful for small bone work in the head, as well as high resolution
scans.
g) Chest is particularly useful for when medium and lung detail are desired.
6. The [Matrix Size] for LightSpeed CT images is always 512 matrix.
The 512 matrix size gives the best image resolution.
7. Click [Recon Option].
If the scan type is Helical, the Recon Mode options are [Full] or [Plus]. For all other
scan modes, the Recon Mode is set to [Full] with no other options.
NOTE: Full and Plus modes are only on 8 and 16 slice systems.
Window Width and Window Levels entered here is also added to Film Set 1.
If you are in the Cardiac Helical scan mode, the Cardiac Filters are available. Select
the filter you wish to use.
An “E” is added to the annotation on the left side of the image to indicate IQ Enhance
was enabled.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-17

NOTE: For Head and Ped Head only Plus mode is allowed prospectively for 0.625 and 1.25mm
slice thickness.

8. If you want a second reconstruction, click [Show Recon 2], click [Recon Enabled] and
click [Yes].
You are able to change your start and end locations as long as they do not exceed
Recon 1.
You can also change the slice thickness, interval, DFOV, R/L, A/P, and Recon Type to a
different value than Recon 1.
If you want a different Series Description than Recon 1 enter the desired description
in the Series description field. If the description is blank, it will use the same
description as Recon 1 and add Recon 2 or Recon 3 to the beginning of the
description.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-18

9. If you want a third reconstruction, click [Show Recon 3], click [Recon Enabled] and click
[Yes].
You are able to change your start and end locations as long as they do not exceed
Recon 1.
You can also change the slice thickness, interval, DFOV, R/L, A/P and Recon Type to a
different value than Recon 1 and turn it on.

10. Click [Series Auto Transfer] if you want to transfer Recon 2 and Recon 3 to another
workstation.
A Host window will pop-up.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-19

• Up to four locations can be selected.

11. Select which Host you wish to network Recon 2 and Recon 3 to.
12. Click [OK].

The button will update to show the first host name.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-20

Quick Steps: Set Display Factors

1. Select the Display card.
2. Click [DFOV] and type in the patient’s measurements.
3. Click [R/L Center] and type the R/L (right/left) coordinates.
4. Click [A/P Center] and type the A/P (anterior/posterior) coordinates.
5. Click [Recon Type] and then select which algorithm you want to use.
6. The [Matrix Size] for LightSpeed CT images is always 512 matrix.
7. Click [Recon Option].
8. If you want a second reconstruction, click [Show Recon 2], click [Recon Enabled] and
click [Yes].
9. If you want a third reconstruction, click [Show Recon 3], click [Recon Enabled] and click
[Yes].
10. Click [Series Auto Transfer] if you want to transfer Recon 2 and Recon 3 to another
workstation.
11. Select which Host you wish to network Recon 2 and Recon 3 to.
12. Click [OK].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-21

Repeat a Series
Repeat Series now allows you to choose any series that has been scanned. When more than
one series has been scanned, a list of all scanned series will be displayed. Click on the series
that you wish to repeat. If only one series has been scanned, Repeat Series will not display
the Repeat Series pop-up. The state of Show Localizer on or off is remembered by the
system. If Show localizer state is on, it will be automatically displayed when you return to the
ViewEdit screen.
1. Click [Repeat Series].
This is located at the bottom of the View Edit screen.
The Series List window appears.

2. Select which series you want to repeat from the Series List.

3. Click [OK].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-22

Quick Steps: Repeat a Series

1. Click [Repeat Series].
2. Select which series you want to repeat from the Series List.
3. Click [OK].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-23

Enter Contrast Descriptions

If you are using IV or GI contrast, you can enter the descriptions or select from a list of preset
descriptions.
When IV contrast is to be used, make sure the injector or syringes of contrast are set up
before performing the localizer (scout) scan. The contrast (syringe) icon on the lower right
corner of the view/edit screen must be selected. When the icon is selected, there is a “+C”
annotation on the images next to the image number, indicating that IV contrast was used
for that exam.
1. Click the Syringe or GI icon.

The IV contrast window appears.

2. Select the desire contrast selection or enter your own.

3. Click on the IV or Oral contrast text field and add the descriptions.
4. Click [Change], [Add], or [Delete].
Change allows you to edit the current selected description.
Add allows you to add new descriptions.
Delete removes the selected description.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-24

5. If you desire to enter a description that is not a preset description, click the text box area
and type the desired contrast description.
The text entered into this description area will not be saved as a preset.
6. Click [OK].

Quick Steps: Enter Contrast Descriptions

1. Click the Syringe or GI icon.
2. Select the desire contrast selection or enter your own.
3. Click on the IV or Oral contrast text field and add the descriptions.
4. Click [Change], [Add], or [Delete].
5. If you desire to enter a description that is not a preset description, click the text box
area and type the desired contrast description.
6. Click [OK].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 21-25

Chapter 22
Automatic Filming

Introduction
This chapter explains how to perform some basic tasks for auto filming. It contains the
step-by-step instructions to help you learn how to:
• Set the Film Parameters for Automatic Filming
• Set the Image Parameters for Automatic Filming
• Use the Filming Buttons on the Autofilm Viewport
• Manually Add an Image to the AutoFilm Composer

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 22-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents concepts necessary to understand ways to autofilm images. Some of
the concepts you need to understand are:
• Automatic Filming
• Autostart
• Image Filters
• Gray Scale Enhancement

Automatic Filming
Automatic filming is a feature in which the scanner automatically films an exam. Values for
filming like format, number of copies, W/L, etc., can be set up ahead of time, in a protocol.
The system can be set up to start filming once images are taken and reconstructed or when
prompted by the user.

Autostart
Autostart is a feature used in automatic filming where the filming can be set to start as soon
as images are taken and reconstructed. This is selected in autofilm setup and can be turned
on or off for each film set. The choices of No Autostart, Autostart New Sheet, and
Autostart Same Sheet are available. No Autostart tells the system not to auto start the
filming of the film set. Autostart New Sheet tells the system to auto start the film set using
a new sheet of film. Autostart Same Sheet tells the system to auto start the film set using
the existing sheet of film. If Autofilm is turned ON and No Autostart is selected, then
AutoFilm has to be started manually by the user from the AutoFilm viewport. Having
Autostart ON adds to maximum AutoFilm efficiency.

Image Filters
There are several different display enhancement filters available on the system. The Edge
Enhancement filters are useful for filming bone windows, as they sharpens the image. There
are six levels of Edge Enhancement, E1, E21, E2, E22, E23, and E3. E1 applies the least
amount of enhancement and E3 applies the most. When these filters are used, the image is
annotated with E1, E2, E21, E22, E23, or E3.
The Lung Enhancement filter is designed specifically to use when filming lung windows.
When the Lung enhancement filter is applied, the image is annotated with the word Lung.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 22-2

There are also five Smoothing filters, S1,S11, S2, S22 and S3, which are used when filming
soft tissue windows to decrease the appearance of noise in an image or enhance low
contrast areas. S1 applies the least amount of smoothing and S3 applies the most. When
these filters are used, the images is annotated with S1, S11, S2, S22 or S3.

Gray Scale Enhancement

Gray Scale Enhancement (GSE) is a display feature that changes the slope and gamma
curve of an image. It can be used in head studies to improve the bone/brain interface which
helps with gray/white matter differentiation. There are three levels of Gray Scale
Enhancement, G1, G2 and G3. G1 applies the least amount of enhancement and G3 applies
the most. When a filter is applied, the images is annotated with G1, G2, or G3 just above the
vertical tick mark scale on the right side of the image.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 22-3

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for using autofilming. Specifically, it
describes how to:
• Set the Film Parameters for Automatic Filming
• Set the Image Parameters for Automatic Filming
• Use the Filming Buttons on the Autofilm Viewport
• Manually Add an Image to the AutoFilm Composer

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 22-4

Set the Film Parameters for Automatic Filming ce)

Referen

Automatic filming is a feature in which the scanner automatically films an exam. Values for
filming like format, number of copies, W/L, etc., can be set up ahead of time in a protocol by
using the AutoFilm Setup button from the view/edit screen.
1. Click [AutoFilm Setup].

A pop up window appears.

2. Select the desired camera or printer.

a) Under Destination, select the up and down arrow buttons to make your selection.

– If only one camera is installed, there are not any additional entries.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 22-5

3. Select the desired film format from the choices listed.

Your choice in the protocol determines the format of the AutoFilm composer.
The formats available are determined by the camera configured with the system.
4. Set the expose direction for the images.
Click the arrow under Film Direction to toggle the arrow up or down.

Images can be filmed top to bottom or bottom to top.

– Top to bottom is standard. Bottom to top is useful if the patient is being scanned
inferior to superior, and you would like the images filmed in superior to inferior
order.
5. Set the size of the image frame on film.
Click [Normal] or [Slide].

– Normal is the default setting. Slide size (35mm) is useful for teaching files and
presentations.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 22-6

6. Set the number of film copies.

Click the up or down arrows under Copies to increase or decrease the number of
copies desired, or click in the numeric box and type in the desired value.

– The number of copies that can be printed range from 1 to 99.

7. Set the autostart parameters.
Click [Auto Start].

– A pop up window appears.

From the Auto Start Film Sets window, click [No Autostart], [Autostart New Sheet]
or [Autostart Same Sheet] for each film set, then click [Accept] or [Cancel].
NOTE: For more information on autostart please refer to the Autostart concept section of
this chapter.
8. Set the auto print parameters.
Auto print automatically prints a page when it is full.
Auto print automatically prints a sheet of film once the exam is done filming, whether
or not the page is full.
– Under Auto Print, click the button to toggle Auto Print to [Yes] or [No].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 22-7

9. Set the display for the film composer.

You may choose to have the AutoFilm Composer display either the image being
filmed, or the annotation of the exam, series and image number being currently
filmed.
– Under Auto Film Composer, click or .
10. Set parameters to place scoutview image on film.
A scout can be set to automatically film at the end of a study.
Under Scout, click the [Yes] or [No] toggle button.

– A pop up window appears.

Click [Yes] if you would like to autofilm a scout.

Fill in the Scout Series Number, the Scout Number, the Magnification Factor, and
the desired WW/WL for the scout.
Click [Accept].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 22-8

11. Set parameters to place scoutview image with reference lines on film.
A scout with cross reference lines may also be chosen to automatically film at the
end of a study.
Under X-Ref Scout, click the [Yes] or [No] toggle button.

– A pop up window appears.

Click [Yes] or [No].

Fill in the Scout Series Number, the Scout Number, the Magnification Factor, and
the desired WW/WL for the scout to be filmed.
Click the Image Range, either [All] or [First/Last].
Click [Accept].
12. Set parameters to place exam and/or series information on film.
The exam page is used to film the exam text information and the series page is used
to film the series text information for the current exam.
Selecting either of these allows them to be autofilmed at the end of an exam.
– Under Exam Page or Series Page, click the appropriate button to toggle from [No]
to [Yes].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 22-9

13. Set parameters to film the grayscale.

Turning this feature on allows a gray scale to be filmed next to each image.
This can only be used on systems configured with an Analog DASM interface. The
button is insensitive if your system does not meet this requirement.
– Under Show Grayscale, click the button to toggle the [No] to [Yes].

14. Set parameters to film the dose report information.

Turning this feature on allows a dose report to be filmed at the end of each series.
– Under Dose Report, click the appropriate button to toggle from [No] to [Yes].

NOTE: The Dose Report will not automatically film. Start New Sheet or Continue Same Sheet
must be selected in order for the Dose Text Page to be auto filmed.
15. When done with all parameters, click [OK] or [Cancel] on the bottom of the AutoFilm
Setup window.
Selecting [OK] accepts all parameters you’ve chosen.
Selecting [Cancel] cancels out of the AutoFilm Setup screen without selecting the
parameters you’ve chosen.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 22-10

Quick Steps: Set the Film Parameters for Automatic Filming

1. Click [AutoFilm Setup].
2. Select the desired camera or printer.
3. Select the desired film format from the choices listed.
4. Set the expose direction for the images.
5. Set the size of the image frame on film.
6. Set the number of film copies.
7. Set the autostart parameters.
8. Set the auto print parameters.
9. Set the display for the film composer.
10. Set parameters to place scoutview image on film.
11. Set parameters to place scoutview image with reference lines on film.
12. Set parameters to place exam and/or series information on film.
13. Set parameters to film the grayscale.
14. When done with all parameters, click [OK] or [Cancel] on the bottom of the AutoFilm
Setup window.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 22-11

Set the Image Parameters for Automatic Filming

To use the AutoFilm feature, parameters must be set in AutoFilm Setup and then filming
must be turned on. This is done on the AutoFilm tab card, from the view/edit screen. If
AutoFilming is not turned on, autofilming does not occur.
1. On the view/edit screen, click the AutoFilm tab card.

2. Turn autofilming ON.

Click the [AutoFilm] column heading, and click the [Yes] or [No] toggle to turn
autofilming to Yes for the entire exam, or you may select only a specific series.
Autofilming does not occur if the toggle is not set to Yes.
3. Set the frame format for each film space.
This feature designates the number of images that are placed on each frame of the
film.
The available selections are 1 on 1, 2 on 1 horizontal, 2 on 1 vertical and 4 on 1.
Click the [Frame Format] column heading.
– A pop up window appears listing the four format choices.

Click the desired format. You may do this for the entire exam, or click the format icon
buttons below the [Frame Format] column heading to select a specific series.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 22-12

4. Set the interval of the images to be filmed.

Use this feature to select which images are to be filmed. Setting the interval to 1 films
every image. Setting the interval to 2 selects every other image. Setting the interval
to 3 films every third image and so on.
Click the [Interval] column heading.
– A pop up window appears.

Type the desired interval.

5. Set parameters to flip image on film.
Click the [Flip] column heading.
– A pop up window appears listing the flip choices.

– You may choose from [FTB] flip top to bottom, [FTB/FLR] flip top to bottom and
left to right, [FLR] flip left to right or [None] for no flip.
Select the desired flip. You may do this for the entire exam, or click the icon buttons
below the [Flip] column heading to select a specific series.
– For example, you may choose to automatically flip an image [FTB] if your protocol
is for prone coronal sinuses.
6. Set parameters for window width and level.
Window widths and window levels can be defined in the Recon Tab.
The last entry whether it was entered in the Recon tab or the Filming tab is applied to
the images during reconstruction.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 22-13

7. Set parameters to magnify images to be filmed.

Click the [Mag Factor] column heading.
– A pop up window appears.

Type in the desired magnification factor. The valid range is .5 to 2. Typing it here mags
the images for the entire exam, or click the buttons below the [Mag Factor] column
heading to type in a mag factor for a specific group of images.
8. Set parameters to rotate images on film.
Click the [Rotate] column heading.
– A pop up window appears with four choices.

– The choices are rotate left 90 degrees, rotate right 90 degrees, rotate right 180
degrees or none.
Click the desired rotation. Selecting it here rotates the images for the entire exam, or
click the buttons below the [Rotate] column heading to select rotation for a specific
group of images.
9. Add annotation to images to be filmed.
Click the [User Anno] column heading.
– A pop up window with a large box appears.

With your mouse cursor over the large box, type the annotation that you would like
to appear on all of the images.
– The annotation appears in the center of the frame above the image.
If you want annotation only for a specific group of images, click the buttons below
the [User Annot] column heading.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 22-14

10. Add image filters to images to be filmed.

Click the [Filter] column heading.
– A pop up window appears with the filter choices.

– For an explanation of the filters, refer to the Image Filters concept section of this
chapter.
Click the desired filter. Selecting it here applies the filter to the entire exam, or click
the buttons below the [Filter] column heading to select filters for specific group of
images.
11. Add grayscale enhancement to images to be filmed.
Click the [GSE] column heading.
– A pop up window appears with the grayscale enhancement choices.

– For an explanation of grayscale enhancement, refer to the Gray Scale

Enhancement concept section of this chapter.
Click the desired enhancement. Selecting it here applies it to the entire exam, or click
the buttons below the [GSE] column heading to select enhancement for specific
group of images.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 22-15

Quick Steps: Set the Image Parameters for Automatic Filming

1. On the view/edit screen, click the AutoFilm tab card.
2. Turn autofilming ON.
3. Set the frame format for each film space.
4. Set the interval of the images to be filmed.
5. Set parameters to flip image on film.
6. Set parameters for window width and level.
7. Set parameters to magnify images to be filmed.
8. Set parameters to rotate images on film.
9. Add annotation to images to be filmed.
10. Add image filters to images to be filmed.
11. Add grayscale enhancement to images to be filmed.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 22-16

Use the Filming Buttons on the Autofilm Viewport

There are several buttons you may need to use for autofilming which are located on the
AutoFilm viewport once scanning begins. These buttons allow you to further customize
autofilming.
When the first reconstructed image appears in the AutoFilm viewport, adjust the WW/WL as
needed.
1. Click [Start New Sheet] (if no autostart was selected in AutoFilm setup).

If AutoFilm is turned on for the series, but No Autostart was selected from AutoFilm
Setup, Start New Sheet must be used to start autofilming with a new sheet of film
and to apply the settings prescribed in AutoFilm Setup. Filming uses the format which
was selected from AutoFilm Setup.
2. To pause filming during AutoFilm, click [Pause Filming].

This temporarily pauses autofilming, which allows you to adjust the WW/WL or
perform display features such as ROI and measure distance.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 22-17

3. To restart autofilming after using [Pause Filming], click [Continue Same Sheet].
This continues filming where you left off, on the same sheet of film.
You can also use Continue Same Sheet to start AutoFilm initially, instead of using
Start New Sheet. The only difference is that filming continues on the same sheet of
film that is already on the film composer, instead of using a new one.
Also, this keeps all of the settings used in the previous exam for autofilming.
4. Click [Cancel Film Series] to delete a series from filming.
This would be useful if there was a lot of patient motion and you did not want the
current series to be filmed.
5. Click [Cancel Film Exam] to delete an entire exam from filming.

Quick Steps: Use the Filming Buttons on the Autofilm Viewport

1. Click [Start New Sheet] (if no autostart was selected in AutoFilm setup).
2. To pause filming during AutoFilm, click [Pause Filming].
3. To restart autofilming after using [Pause Filming], click [Continue Same Sheet].
4. Click [Cancel Film Series] to delete a series from filming.
5. Click [Cancel Film Exam] to delete an entire exam from filming.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 22-18

Manually Add an Image to the AutoFilm Composer

There are times when you may want to manually add images to the AutoFilm composer. For
example, if you wanted to add an image with special graphics or a particular WW/WL, or if
you wanted to add a multiple image display (MID).
1. When AutoFilm is either paused or finished, place the mouse cursor on the image or MID
to be filmed.
2. Press F12 on the keyboard to place a single image onto the AutoFilm composer.
3. Press Shift F3 to place an MID onto the AutoFilm composer.
4. Repeat as necessary.

Quick Steps: Manually Add an Image to the AutoFilm Composer

1. When AutoFilm is either paused or finished, place the mouse cursor on the image or
MID to be filmed.
2. Press F12 on the keyboard to place a single image onto the AutoFilm composer.
3. Press Shift F3 to place an MID onto the AutoFilm composer.
4. Repeat as necessary.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 22-19

Chapter 23
Manually Filming Images

Introduction
This chapter explains Manually Filming Images. It contains the step-by-step instructions to
help you learn how to:
• Set Window Width and Window Level Preset Keys
• Set Manual Film Composer Parameters
• Place Images in the Manual Film Composer
• Set Print Series Parameters
NOTE: In this chapter the feature that is utilized for filming is called a “Film Composer” and
has the designation of Auto or Manual Film Composer. These features are set as icons
on the display monitor. The icons do not need to be selected for the feature to operate.
It is beneficial in the early use of your system to select these icons and see how they
look when in operation.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 23-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to successfully manually film images. Some of
the concepts you need to understand are:
• Using the F Keys
• Setting Film Series Parameters
• Setting Window Width and Level Presets
• Setting Film Composer Parameters
• Differences Between Auto Film and Manual Film Composers

Using the F Keys

The top row of the computer keyboard is composed of keys labeled F1-F12. The system has
preset functions built for filming images in the F1-F4 keys. The F1 key allows you to place a
single image in the manual film composer. The F2 key allows you to have the composer
automatically adjust to whatever format you are viewing images in and film those images
as a page. The F3 key allows you to film multiple images in a single cell of the composer. The
F4 allows you to film all the images in any one series. All of the images must be filmed in the
same window width and level when using this key. The F5-F11 keys are used for adjusting
the appearance of images by changing window widths and window levels (gray scale and
contrast). The F12 key is utilized with the auto film composer for transferring an image. Use
of the F Keys helps save time for the person doing manual filming.

Setting Film Series Parameters

When utilizing the F4/Film Series function you are able to film any or all of the designated
series by setting parameters in a pop up window that appears.

Setting Window Width and Level Presets

The F5-F11 keys may each be programmed for a different window width and window level
setting. This gives the system a wide variety of appearances for specific image types. The
system comes with settings for each key already set. However, these may be easily adjusted
and programmed into the system according to your facility’s preferences. This allows you to
use a single key to adjust window widths and levels. The widths and levels may be
programmed to follow a template on the keyboard or set to any image type you choose.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 23-2

Setting Film Composer Parameters

There are several options available in the film composer including, but not limited to, format
and number of copies. When you select these options they are set in the system but may be
adjusted at any time.

Differences Between Auto Film and Manual Film Composers

The main differences in the two composers are that the F1, F2 and F4 keys work only with
the Manual Film Composer, and Manual Filming can be done from any viewport in Exam Rx
or Image Works. The F3 key works for both composers, but you must use the shift key when
utilizing for the Auto Film composer. Auto Filming is generally done from the Auto Film
Viewport in Exam Rx. Using the F12 key or the drag and drop method it is possible to
manually add images to the auto film composer in Exam Rx and by using the F12 key in
Viewer/ Image works.The most obvious physical difference in the composers (especially
when opened side by side) is that all of the format and options buttons are shown on the
Manual Film Composer and these buttons are not shown on the Auto Film Composer. All of
the options for Auto Film can be adjusted from the Auto Film Setup portion of the View Edit
Screen (refer to Set the Film Parameters for Automatic Filming for auto film setup details).

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 23-3

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for manually filming images. Specifically,
it describes how to:
• Set Window Width and Window Level Preset Keys
• Set Manual Film Composer Parameters
• Place Images in the Manual Film Composer
• Set Print Series Parameters

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 23-4

Set Window Width and Window Level Preset Keys

The F5-F11 keys along the top of the computer keyboard are used to adjust window width
and level settings by simply touching the appropriate key. These window widths and levels
represent different gray scale and contrast values to better demonstrate the different types
of anatomy in a scan. These keys are set with values that may be adjusted as needed for
your facility.
1. On the display monitor, double click one of the lower viewports.
You see that viewport outlined in a blue border. This viewport is where an image is
placed to view and adjust window width and level settings.
NOTE: If the scanner is very busy, it is better to use the lower left viewport to display and
film images as the lower right is linked to any exam in progress. You may manually
film while the scanner is autofilming.
2. From the display monitor, click [List Select].

A pop up window appears.

3. From the pop up window select an exam and an image.

Any image works. This image is used to view window width and level settings.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 23-5

4. Enter the window width setting in the Accelerator Command Bar (gray bar in the lower
left corner of display screen, i.e. WW 400).
You notice the image with the blue border changes to a window width of 400. This is
annotated on the image in the lower left corner of the viewport.
5. Enter the window level setting in the Accelerator Command Bar (i.e. WL 35).
You notice the image with the blue border changes to a window level of 35. This is
annotated on the image in the lower left corner of the viewport next to the window
width annotation.
6. Hold down [Shift] and press any F5-F11 key.
This sets the window width and window level in the system to whichever key you
choose.
7. Repeat Steps 4, 5 and 6 to set any of the F5-F11 key settings.

Quick Steps: Set Window Width and Window Level Preset Keys
1. On the display monitor, double click one of the lower viewports.
2. From the display monitor, click [List Select].
3. From the pop up window select an exam and an image.
4. Enter the window width setting in the Accelerator Command Bar (gray bar in the lower
left corner of display screen, i.e. WW 400).
5. Enter the window level setting in the Accelerator Command Bar (i.e. WL 35).
6. Hold down [Shift] and press any F5-F11 key.
7. Repeat Steps 4, 5 and 6 to set any of the F5-F11 key settings.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 23-6

Set Manual Film Composer Parameters

Several settings are available on the Manual Film Composer and must be set by the user.
Once these settings are established the system retains them until changed by the user and
then the new settings are in the system. Any of the settings may be changed prior to the
actual printing of the images in the composer.
1. Click [Manual Film Composer].,

Located in the lower left corner of the display monitor, this opens the Manual Film
Composer.
2. Select Format.

On the left side of the composer are the formats and options supported by your
camera. Choose from 1 on 1 up to 24 on 1 for your format choice.
NOTE: Not all formats are supported by all cameras. The left side of the composer shows
the valid formats.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 23-7

3. Click [Options].

A pop up window appears with all available options.

If your camera supports making slide images (for presentations, teaching slides, etc.),
this option has a drop down menu when you select it for Off or On.
If your camera supports the Grey scale feature this option has a drop down menu for
Off or On. Only systems where the camera interface is an analog DASM, the grey
scale be shown.
Auto Printing, when selected, has a drop down menu for Off or On. When turned on
this automatically send the images to print only when the composer cells are filled.
Auto Clear Page, when selected, has a drop down menu for Off or On. When turned
on, this automatically clears the composer cells of all images when the images are
sent to print, whether by Auto Print or manually.
Icon Labels, when selected, has a drop down menu of Image or ESI. When Image is
selected a picture of the image being filmed is displayed in the composer cell. There
are no annotations indicating exam, series or image number displayed although they
are on the filmed image. When ESI is selected each cell of the composer on the
monitor lists the exam, series, and image number being filmed. Most users find it
easier to follow and/or replace images in the composer when the ESI label is used.
Expose Order, when selected, has a drop down menu of Left/Right Top/Bottom and
Right/Left Bottom/Top. The system is defaulted to Left/Right Top/Bottom. This means
the composer is filming the images starting in the upper left corner of the film, going
to the right, and continuing in this pattern to the bottom of the sheet of film. This is
the most widely-used pattern for filming. The other option films images starting in
the lower right corner of the sheet, going to the left, and continuing this pattern
towards the top of the sheet of film. This is helpful if a patient is scanned from the
bottom up but you wish to film top to bottom.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 23-8

4. Select No. of Copies.

You may enter any value from 1-99 in the gray box or use the arrow keys next to the
box to set the number of copies up or down.
NOTE: When more than one copy is selected, that number appears in parenthesis next to
the word print in the print button on the film composer.
5. Click [Done].

Quick Steps: Set Manual Film Composer Parameters

1. Click [Manual Film Composer].,
2. Select Format.
3. Click [Options].
4. Select No. of Copies.
5. Click [Done].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 23-9

Place Images in the Manual Film Composer

All images to be filmed must be placed in a composer for transfer to the camera. This may
be done automatically or manually. This section deals with the Manual Film Composer.
Images may be placed in the composer individually or in series. See the note at the end of
this section for using the F2 key.
1. On the display monitor, double click in one of the lower viewports.
If the exam you wish to film has an image in one of the lower viewports, click in that
viewport and skip steps 2 and 3.
You notice a blue border around the viewport. This indicates in which viewport
selected images is displayed.
2. From the display monitor, click [List Select].

A pop up window appears.

3. From the pop up window, select an Exam, Series and Image.

You generally start with the first image of an axial series but you may choose any
series or image from the menu. This image appears in the blue highlighted viewport
previously selected.
4. Click [Accept] or [Cancel].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 23-10

5. Click [Manual Film Composer].

This is located in the lower left corner of the display monitor. Check format.
In Image works, if you are using Viewer or Mini Viewer, the Manual Film Composer is
accessed by clicking on the film composer button located in the upper left corner of
the tools area.
6. Place cursor in the image to be filmed.
7. Click and drag the image or use F1 key.
Click and drag allows you to take a single image and place it in any available cell on
the composer (you do not see the image move, only the cursor moving).
F1 key places a single image in the next available cell in the composer. When using
F1key leave cursor in the image and use the Page Up/Page Down keys on the
keyboard to advance images.
NOTE: When in Image Works after you select a format for viewing images, using the F2 key
allows you to film that format as a page of images. An example would be to set the
viewing format to 12 on 1, place the cursor in an image and select the F2 key. All 12
images would be transferred to the manual film composer and sent to print. The
composer automatically adjusts to the view format.

Quick Steps: Place Images in the Manual Film Composer

1. On the display monitor, double click in one of the lower viewports.
2. From the display monitor, click [List Select].
3. From the pop up window, select an Exam, Series and Image.
4. Click [Accept] or [Cancel].
5. Click [Manual Film Composer].
6. Place cursor in the image to be filmed.
7. Click and drag the image or use F1 key.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 23-11

Set Print Series Parameters

Any portion of a series may be filmed using the Print Series (F4) key. This is a great time
saving feature if, for example, films are lost, duplicate copies are needed, or if auto filming
was not utilized. All images need to be filmed in the same window width and level. If multiple
window widths and levels are needed (i.e. soft tissue and bone) the Print Series can be used
for each window width and level.
1. On the display monitor, click in one of the lower viewports.
If the series to be filmed is already displayed in the viewport, select that one and skip
Steps 2 and 3.
You notice a blue border around the viewport. This indicates where the images is
displayed.
2. From the display monitor, click [List Select].

A pop up window appears.

3. Select an Exam, Series and Image.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 23-12

4. Click Manual Film Composer icon.

Check or select desired format. This is an important step and should be done every
time Print Series is used.
5. Place the cursor in the image/series to be used for Print Series.
6. Press the F4 (Print Series) key.
A pop up window appears.
7. Set Print Series Parameters.

The system defaults to Use Film Composer. This is why it is important to open and
check the Manual Film Composer prior to selecting Print Series. If you are using
Viewer in Image works and are using the format you want to film (i.e. 12 on 1), you
may select Viewer Format and the system automatically changes the format of the
film composer to 12 on 1. The Image Selection defaults to all images in the series. If
you wish to modify the selection range, click and drag the arrows at the beginning or
end of the selection area to the correct image number.
The Interval allows you to film every image in a series, every other image in a series
(1/2), or every third image in a series (1/3). The most common selection is for every
image to be filmed. If you have done an exam with 50% or more overlap in the image
interval you may consider filming every other or every third image.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 23-13

The Current Print Job feature is unavailable when you first select Print Series (F4), as
no images have been programmed. It becomes available after you select Print Series.
The Print Last Sheet feature toggles between Yes and No. With Yes selected, the
system automatically sends the images to print when the last image selected is
placed in the composer regardless if the composer is filled. With No selected, the
system places the last image in the composer and wait for you to send the images to
print by selecting Print on the composer. This gives you the opportunity to place
additional images on the same sheet of film (such as measurements) or to discard
images (if there is only one image on a sheet of film) as necessary.
8. Click [Print Series].
This initiates the Print Series sequence. The system automatically closes the pop up
window.
9. To cancel a Print Series request, Press the F4 key and [Cancel] from Current Print Job.
You must use this feature to cancel Print Series if you need to stop for any reason.
Place your cursor in the image it was in when you started and press the F4 key again.
The pop up window appears and Current Print Job has a button for Cancel All. Click
this button and Print Series is cancelled.
NOTE: The Cancel button at the bottom of the menu closes the pop up window with no
filming being queued.

Quick Steps: Set Print Series Parameters

1. On the display monitor, click in one of the lower viewports.
2. From the display monitor, click [List Select].
3. Select an Exam, Series and Image.
4. Click Manual Film Composer icon.
5. Place the cursor in the image/series to be used for Print Series.
6. Press the F4 (Print Series) key.
7. Set Print Series Parameters.
8. Click [Print Series].
9. To cancel a Print Series request, Press the F4 key and [Cancel] from Current Print Job.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 23-14

Chapter 24
Managing Images

Introduction
This chapter explains the process of managing Images. It provides step-by-step instructions
to learn how to:
• Set up a Remote Host
• Select an Archive Node
• Set an Access to a Local Host and Set Up a Custom Search
• Select an Archive Device
• Prepare a New Storage Media for Use
• Save Exam/Series/Images to a Storage Media
• Retrieve Exams/Series/Images From a Storage Media
• Save Exam/Series/Images using CD/DVD Interchange Option
• Transfer Exams/Series/Images to Another Computer
• Retrieve Exams/Series/Images From Another Computer
• Check Network History File
• Edit Patient Information
• Remove Patient Information From an Exam
• Delete Exams/Series/Images From the System
• Compose a Report in Data Export
• Save a Report to CD-R
• FTP a Report
• View a Report on a PC

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to successfully complete the process of
managing image data. Specifically you need to understand:
• Feature Status Area
• Anonymous Patient
• Archive
• Network
• Performed Procedure Step (PPS)
• WorkArounds
• Data Export
• CD/DVD Interchange (Option)

Feature Status Area

The Feature Status Area displays the date, time and available system disk space. System
disk space availability is always on your console in the Feature Status Area. It reports how
many 256 x 2562 matrix and 512 x 5122 matrix images it can hold.
NOTE: It is recommended that you delete images when the image space falls below 200
images. This will ensure there is room on the system disk to confirm scans and to
install reconstructed images.

In the middle of the Feature Status Area is a row of icons. From top to bottom, the icons are
for image reconstruction, archive, network, and filming functions. To the right of these icons
is the current status.
• Image Reconstruction Status
– Text to the right of this icon indicates the percent completed for the exam, series, and
image range being reconstructed.
• Archive Status
– Text to the right of this icon indicates status of the images being archived.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-2

• Network Status
– Text to the right of this icon indicates the status of the system’s networking functions.
• Filming Status
– Text to the right of this icon indicates filming status of the images being filmed

Anonymous Patient
There may be times when you would want the name of a patient to be kept confidential. This
is when you want to create an Anonymous Patient. An Anonymous Patient can be created
by exam, series, or even a single image.
A few good reasons for using Anonymous patient would be:
• Your radiologist wants to take the films to a conference.
• You have scanned a test patient or volunteer and do not want the name displayed.
• Anytime you do not want the patient’s name on films. For example, films that are in a
display or would be put in a show.
• Anytime you send images to GE.
• Anonymous Patient changes Patient Name, Patient ID, Exam Number, Exam Description
and Series Description.

Archive
Archive is an off-line filing system for images. The archive feature allows you to save and
restore images to and from a media storage device or remote host. The archive system uses
a Magnetic Optical Disk (MOD) for storage. Images stored on an MOD are "off-line" meaning
that in order to display the images you must first restore them to the system disk. The MOD
is considered a local archive device. Communication from your system to the MOD is in a
DICOM format, so that the MOD listed in the archive window as a DICOM_MOD.
The archive function can read from and write to Maxoptix archive media. This is the
standard drive.
In addition to the Maxoptix MOD, images can be archived to a remote network host
providing the host is a Storage Commitment Class Provider.

Archive verifies the integrity of the data by performing a hardware check in the media drive.

Network
Networks link image acquisition systems and workstations together. By connecting these
compatible devices, you have the ability to transfer images between your scanner and
workstations and/or other image acquisition systems, quickly and easily.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-3

Common situations for networking are:

• To take advanced image manipulations such as 3D and reformatting images offline.
• To provide a quick way for a radiologist to view films.
In order to understand the networking process, a few key terms are explained below.

Networking Terms
In the chart below you will find some terms that are associated with the process of
networking.

Term Definition
Image acquisition system or workstation connected to the
Remote Host
network. Each host has its own network address.
Transfer Moving of imaging data between stations.
Transmit/Send Sending images from one station to another.
Transmit/Receive Retrieving images from another station.
Auto Transfer by Exam Automatic image transfer of a newly completed exam.
Automatic image transfer of images queued in groups of 50
Auto Transfer by Image
images.

Performed Procedure Step (PPS)

Performed Procedure Step is part of ConnectPro OPTION. To use it you need a HIS/RIS
system and PACS with the Connect Pro option. It sends communication back to PACS and
HIS/RIS that you have completed a procedure. It improves transfer of data because it can
provide a complete message when all data has been transferred. The browser will have a
PPS column that will list the PPS status of each exam. There are three states of exam status:
COMP, meaning the exam is complete; DISC, meaning the exam is discontinued and it
cannot use PPS again; or INPR, meaning that the exam is still in progress.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-4

WorkArounds
Images archived on an Advantage Windows 4.0 or 4.1 system may fail to restore on
the LightSpeed system. Use Network to transfer images from the Advantage
Windows to the scanner.
Even though the Sony MOD drive states that it is a 5.3 gb drive. The archive software
only supports a maximum size of 2.3 gb. 2.3 gb 512 bytes per sector is the preferred
archive media size to utilize on the system.
– Archive may fail and slow the system when more than 200 images are queued by
image. To avoid this, try to archive by series if possible.
– The system may report that the media is full even though the media has just been
labeled when Save by image is selected. To avoid this, Try selecting a smaller
range of images.
The feature status area or the browser may report an Exam has saved even though
all images have not been saved to MOD. Scroll through the images in the image
window. Highlight the images listed as Archive N and re-save them.
Restoring Exam, Series or images that already exist on the system disk will not post a
message that the images are restored or that they already exist. If you have restored
images, but get no message that they have been restored, verify that they don't
already exist on the system disk.
When the archive media gets close to being full, the system will always look to see if
the exam, series or image can fit on the MOD, if it is desired to have exams
sequentially on a MOD, place a new MOD in the drive when first notified the disk may
be full.
If Label is selected in Archive, finish the Label process; don't select cancel on the
Label pop up. Archive will be non functional, a system reboot will be necessary to
recover.
It's best to resolve any paused queue entry as soon as possible.
To minimize corruption of MODs, it is extremely important the MOD media be
detached and removed from the MOD drive before doing a shutdown or recycling
power to the system.
When restoring from a MOD, it is recommended to write protect the media before
placing it in the drive. If the system is unable to read the media, remove the write
protect and see if the system is able to perform a recovery of the media to access the
data.
If the MOD can not be detached or will not eject from the drive, do a shutdown and
eject the MOD once the message "Hit any key to start the system" is seen. Do not use
the screw to eject the disk.
If you get a time-out message when trying to access the MOD, the MOD drive may no
longer recognized by the system. Perform a shutdown to re-establish
communication between the system and the MOD drive.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-5

Data Export
Data Export allows you to either store or FTP CT images as JPEG, PNG, AVI, MPEG or MOV
formats. The files can only be burned to a CD-R and only one report can be burned at a time.
Once a CD-R has been burned, you cannot add more reports at a later time. It is not a
rewritable process.
The model for the DVD/CD-R drive in the media tower must be Matshita Model: DVD-RAM
SW-9572 Rev. F100 Type: CD-ROM or equivalent. Your service representative will check
system configuration to determine if the drive will support Data Export.
The JPEG, PNG, AVI, MPEG or MOV images can be viewed from a PC or laptop with a
Windows™ 2000 or XP operating system using Internet Explorer 5.5 or later.
There are two tabs on the Data Export window:
Compose tab allows you to define the compression factor, annotation level, W/L,
Zoom, scroll, and output format for the series you want to export.
Export tab allows you to view a list of all the examinations and series you have in the
Data Export program.
– You can compose a series and then export it to either a CD or FTP site at a later
date.
– Examinations and series stay in the Export program until they are actively deleted.
Figure 24-1 Data Export Window

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-6

Figure 24-2 Compose Tab

8
2

5 10

9
4 6
Table 24-1 Compose Tab Descriptions

# Selection Description
Displays patient name, examination and series number, number of images in the series,
Selection file size of the images with current compression selection, and matrix size.
1 Allows you to select the image format for the currently selected data set. Format
Conversion choices include: JPEG, PNG, AVI, MPEG, and MOV. AVI, MPEG, and MOV are all movie type
Format formats. Choose the format that is compatible with the movie player on your PC or
laptop.

Compression Only applies to JPEG and MPEGs. The lower the number, the less compression, the
higher the image quality but the larger the file. Image/Sec. is movie play back speed
Factor and therefore it is only applicable for MPEG, AVI or MOV files.
2
Frame per Allow you to set how many frame to play per second. This option is only available when
Second you have selected a MPEG, AVI or MOV conversion format.

Allows you to select the images you want to place in the designated folder. For example,
if you have a multi-phase series selected and all you want is the first phase in the MPEG,
Image Range then select the range of images representing phase 1 of your data set. The ability to
3 select a subset of images from the selected series is particularly important if you are
Selection plan to FTP the files rather than burn a CD.
You can enter a interval to create a movie file of a specific interval of images. The valid
range for the interval is one minus the maximum number of images in the series.
Allows you to set the level of annotation for the images: none, full, partial (a subset of
4 Annotation the full annotation) or custom which activates the [Customize] button that allows
specific annotation options.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-7

# Selection Description
Allows you to apply the image manipulations (W/L, zoom, scroll) you have performed on
5 Propagate all images forward from the currently displayed image.
Click the [Play] button to preview the MPEG, AVI, or MOV file. Click the [Stop] button to
6 Play/Stop quit playing the movie.
7 Quit Closes the Data Export window.
Displays the current images by scrolling through them in a cine loop. Use the keyboard
Page Up and Page Down keys to move through the images manually.
8 Image Area
NOTE: You must click on the image window and put it in focus before next/prior
will function.
Appears at the top of the report once you execute the data export. It also appears in the
Report Name Export data list. Typically the patient’s name and type of file are entered as the Report
Name. There can be no spaces or characters other than AlphaNumeric.
9 The name of the folder to which you want to file the Report Name. From the Export tab,
you can view the data listed within each folder. The data within a folder is sorted by file
Folder Name type. For example, if you added 10 JPEGs from the T1 series and 20 JPEGs from the T2
series you will see a list of 30 JPEGs in that folder. If you want these JPEGs separated,
you must place them in separate folders.
The images added to the report will have the patient’s name replaced with Anonymous
Anonymous and the examination number.

Save State Saves the image orientation, w/l values, roam and zoom values of a range of
10 images that you select.
Adds the current data set to the report from which you can either burn the information
Add to to a CD-R or FTP it to an IP address. A Data Conversion progress window appears once
Report you click the [Add to Report] button. Click the [Cancel] button if you want to stop the
data conversion.
11 +/- Series This navigates through the series.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-8

Figure 24-3 Export Tab

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-9

Table 24-2 Export Tab Descriptions

# Selection Description
1 Report Name Lists all the report names in the data base.
List
2 Delete Icon Select an item in any of the list displays (Report, Folder, or Type) and click the Delete icon
to remove the item from the list. Items remain on the list after you Quit Data Export until
they have been deleted through this method.
3 Folder Name Lists all the folders associated with the report name. Note the file size to make sure you
List can FTP the file or store it on a single CD-R.
4 Move to Allows you to move the currently highlighted item to a destination of your choice. For
example, you can highlight an item in the Type list and add it to a particular folder in the
Folder list. The size of the data that comprises each folder is listed.
5 Type Name Lists the item types. If, for example, you added 20 T1 JPEG images to Folder 1 and then
List added another 20 T2 JPEG images to Folder 1, the number of JPEGs in folder 1 is 40. The
quantity and size of each data type is listed.
6 Quit Closes the Data Export window.
7 Report Name The name of the report that you are going to export. Select the report from the menu.
8 Comment Allows you to type in a comment that appears on the report. Do not apply a carriage
return when typing. The text wraps automatically when appropriate for the finished
report.
9 Conversion Select one of the radio buttons to determine the file type. Typically select HTML.
Formats
10 [Create CD] Click [Create CD] to start burning the report to the CD-R that is currently in your system’s
CD/DVD drive. The following message appears once the system is ready to write to the
CD-R: CD writing operation cannot be cancelled after start,
Start CD Write Continue?
Click [OK] to continue. Once the write process is active the following prompt appears:
CDWriting is going on ...
When the system has successfully written the CD, the following prompt
appears: CD Writing successfully completed.
[Send FTP] Click [Send FTP] to open the FTP window. Enter the information for all the text boxes. The
User Name, Password, and IP Address are for the FTP destination site. Selecting Save the
Settings only saves the Target Directory information. There must be a target directory at
the IP address to successfully transfer files.

CD/DVD Interchange (Option)

The Interchange option is used to write data to CD-R and DVD-R; or recall images from CD-R
or DVD-R in a Dicom format. CD/DVD cannot be selected as the default archive device.
Exam, series, or images will not be marked as archived. A DICOM viewer is stored on the
media so the images can be viewed on a PC. The media is write once and all selections must
be queued at the same time. Approximately 7000 images can be stored to a 4.7 gb DVD-R.
NOTE: If your FE is trying to load this option, it is listed in the options list as “Copy Composer”.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-10

NOTE: CD/DVD Interchange feature is available for recording DICOM images onto below
media, but so far CD/DVD Interchange is not be considered as a way for long-term
images storage.
NOTE: Please pay attention to the following declarations about Media requirements and
Operation requirements when you use the CD/DVD Interchange function.

Media Requirements:
Only support single layered CD-R and DVD-R media. No other media types are
supported, including but not limited to DVD-RW.
Also, dual layered CD-R and DVD-R media are not supported.
Only support 650MB single layer CD-R media
Only support 4.7GB single layer DVD-R media
GEHC recommends using the following media brands have been qualified by GEHC
FCT:
– Verbatim 4.7GB 4X commercial DVD-R media
– Maxell 4.7GB 1X-4X Compatible DVD-R
– SONY 650M CD-R
– SONY 1X-4X Compatible 4.G media
– TDK 4.7GB commercial DVD-R media
Other high quality CD-R and DVD-R media may also work but GEHC FCT has only
qualified the media types listed above.

Operation Requirements:
DVD-R only support single-session write mode, not support multi-session mode, can’t
append write data on DVD-R have been burned.
DVD Interchange are NOT INTENDED for archive or backup purposes! These features
make only "temporary copies" for interchange purposes. GEHC requires cartridge
media for archive like MOD or future solutions. GEHC will not "recover" any
interchange media (it should just be burned again if necessary using patient data
restored from authorized/provided archive media).
Advise customer not to write DVD/CD during scan operations.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-11

Figure 24-4 CD/DVD Interchange Window

1 2 10

3 4

5 6

7 8

Table 24-3 Interchange Descriptions

Button Number Description

1 Add Exam - Add Exam adds all exams selected.
2 Add Series - Add Series adds all series selected.
3 Copy - moves the files to the cd or DVD disk.
4 Eject - opens the DVD or CD tray.
5 Stop - quits the current process.
6 Option - opens the options window.
7 Restore - moves files from the DVD or CD to the local disk.
8 Quit - closes the CD/DVD interchange window.
9 List - Give a list of exams, series, and images to store or restore.
10 Clear - deletes the selected selection.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-12

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for Managing Images. Specifically, it
describes how to:
• Set up a Remote Host
• Select an Archive Node
• Set an Access to a Local Host and Set Up a Custom Search
• Select an Archive Device
• Prepare a New Storage Media for Use
• Save Exam/Series/Images to a Storage Media
• Retrieve Exams/Series/Images From a Storage Media
• Restore Exam/Series/Images using CD/DVD Interchange Option
• Save Exam/Series/Images using CD/DVD Interchange Option
• Transfer Exams/Series/Images to Another Computer
• Retrieve Exams/Series/Images From Another Computer
• Check Network History File
• Edit Patient Information
• Remove Patient Information From an Exam
• Delete Exams/Series/Images From the System
• Compose a Report in Data Export
• Save a Report to CD-R
• FTP a Report
• View a Report on a PC

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-13

Set up a Remote Host

Your Field Engineer will usually have this set up for you. If you need to add additional remote
hosts to your system, you will need to have the network IP address provided by your site’s
network administrator.
1. Click Network > Select Remote Host.
A pop up window will appear.
2. Click [Add].
The Remote Host Parameters table will appear.

3. Enter the Host name.

The Host name to be entered is the name of the device. If the device is DICOM, the
name must match exactly to the name given to the device.
4. Enter the Network Address.
You can get this information from you site’s Network Administrator.
5. Select the Network Protocol.
The Network protocol consists of two choices: Advantage NET or DICOM. If the
LightSpeed is sending to this device, the device must be able to receive DICOM
images and the DICOM network protocol must be selected.
NOTE: PC based systems only allow DICOM network protocol.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-14

6. Enter the Port number.

For the HiSpeed CT/i, ZX/i, LX/i, FX/i, DX/i, Advantage Windows, and LightSpeed
systems the port number is 4006.
If you are adding a 3rd party workstation or PACS system, your site’s Network
Administrator can provide you with the port number.
A port number is only required when using a DICOM protocol.
7. Enter the AE Title.
The AE Title is unique to the device. If the device is an Advantage Windows
workstation or another GE Healthcare system, the AE Title is the same as the Host
name.
8. Enter Comments.
The comment field allows you to input a comment.

Quick Steps: Set up a Remote Host

1. Click Network > Select Remote Host.
2. Click [Add].
3. Enter the Host name.
4. Enter the Network Address.
5. Select the Network Protocol.
6. Enter the Port number.
7. Enter the AE Title.
8. Enter Comments.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-15

Select an Archive Node

You will have to select if your current remote host is an archive node.
1. From Image Works, click Network > Select Remote Host.
A pop up window will appear.

2. Under Archive Node click [Auto], [Yes], or [No].

If [Auto] is selected, the system will automatically check if the device is a Storage
Commitment Provider.
If [Yes] is selected, the device is responsible for archiving the images. When the
device has received and saved the images, a notification message is displayed on
the scanner console and the Archive status for the exam is "A" for archived.
If [No] is selected, the device will not be responsible for archiving.
NOTE: At system start up a check is done to assure that devices designated as Storage
Commitment devices are sending a storage commitment response. If no response is
received the Archive node setting will be disabled.

Quick Steps: Select an Archive Node

1. From Image Works, click Network > Select Remote Host.
2. Under Archive Node click [Auto], [Yes], or [No].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-16

Set an Access to a Local Host and Set Up a Custom

Search
With this function you can lock out other systems so that they cannot send, query, or receive
images from your system.
1. Under Access to local host, click [Yes] or [No].
Click Yes if you want the device to be able to send to and/or query and receive
images from the scanner.

2. Select from the custom search window [On] or [Off].

This allows you to customize your patient listing on any remote browser to make it
easier when searching for specific patient types. When this feature is on and you
access the remote browser, the custom search entry box will initially display to allow
you to perform a custom search. This will eliminate the need of having to go into
Custom Search every time you manually network. This feature will default to off.
3. Click [Save] or [Cancel].
Do this when you are done entering all of the parameters on the remote host table.
[Save] will save the parameters and [Cancel] will close out this function.

Quick Steps: Set an Access to a Local Host and Set Up a Custom

Search
1. Under Access to local host, click [Yes] or [No].
2. Select from the custom search window [On] or [Off].
3. Click [Save] or [Cancel].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-17

Select an Archive Device

Before saving or restoring image data, the archive device needs to be selected. To save
images, the archive device can be the local MaxOptics MOD or a DICOM networked remote
device. To restore images the selected archive device must be a local device, such as the
MaxOptics MOD.
1. Click [Archive].
Archive can be accessed from the Image Works browser.

2. Click [Selected Archive Device].

This will open the Archive Device Selection window.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-18

3. Select the Archive Destination.

Select from the list which device you want to use.
To select the default device, simply select the desired host/device, then click [Set
Default Device]. You will then see the default label in parenthesis next to that device.
4. Select Local or Remote.
This will show a list of local or remote devices.
5. Click [OK].
This will enable your selection.
Click [Cancel] to close the pop up window and disregard any changes made.

Quick Steps: Select an Archive Device

1. Click [Archive].
2. Click [Selected Archive Device].
3. Select the Archive Destination.
4. Select Local or Remote.
5. Click [OK].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-19

Prepare a New Storage Media for Use

Brand new MOD’s must be labeled before they are able to store image data. Also, use this
procedure to re-label a MOD that contains data that is no longer needed. When an MOD is
re-labeled, all existing data on it is permanently lost.
1. Insert the MOD into the MOD drive.
2. Select the [Image Works] desktop.
This is located in the upper left corner of the display monitor.
3. Click [Archive].
Archive can be accessed from the Image Works browser.

4. From the Archive menu, click [Label].

A window titled, "Format Window" pops up.
– The archive device name is shown in the upper left corner of the Format Window.
The name reflects the MaxOptics MOD drive. This is set up during installation and
requires no intervention from you.
5. Enter media ID number by clicking on the text field and entering a value.
This value is the MOD label.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-20

6. Click on the Comment field and enter comments from the keyboard.
Typically, information about the type of images, MOD side, or pertinent information is
entered.
– The text in this field will appear at the bottom of the Archive Browser and the
Image Works browser.
– The maximum number of characters allowed in this field is 160.
7. Click [Label].
This begins the labeling process.
A confirmation window pops up and asks you to "Please refer to the Operator Manual
for limitations regarding archive media exchange between GE Products".
8. Click [OK].
This will acknowledge the message.
Selecting [Cancel] in the Format Window will abort the labeling process.

Quick Steps: Prepare a New Storage Media for Use

1. Insert the MOD into the MOD drive.
2. Select the [Image Works] desktop.
3. Click [Archive].
4. From the Archive menu, click [Label].
5. Enter media ID number by clicking on the text field and entering a value.
6. Click on the Comment field and enter comments from the keyboard.
7. Click [Label].
8. Click [OK].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-21

Save Exam/Series/Images to a Storage Media

The archiving feature allows you to save large amounts of image data onto the local MOD or
remote archiving hosts. When saving/writing to archive media, the system makes a copy of
the image data and does not remove the image data from the main system disk. The ability
to save images depends on the archive device type and the initial source of the images.
1. With the desired MOD in the drive, select the [Image Works] desktop.
This is located in the upper left corner of the display monitor.
2. Select the exam(s), series, or image(s) to be saved to the disk.
To aid in this, Sort and Selection menu on the browser can be used.
3. Click [Archive].
Archive can be accessed from the Image Works browser.
4. Click [Save Examination], [Save Series], or [Save Images].

All items selected on the browser for saving are written onto the media in the
selected archive device.
Items being saved cannot be deleted from the system disk until the save process is
complete. This is indicated by the gray Remove menu title on the browser whenever
items being saved are selected.
5. Click [Detach].
To eject the MaxOptics MOD from the MOD drive, it must first be "detached" via
[Detach] in the Archive menu on the browser.
NOTE: If the MaxOptics MOD fails to detach and cannot be ejected, Click on [Shutdown] in
the upper right corner of the right monitor. When you see "OK to power off the system"
message, press the eject button on the MOD drive. The MOD will now eject.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-22

Quick Steps: Save Exam/Series/Images to a Storage Media

1. With the desired MOD in the drive, select the [Image Works] desktop.
2. Select the exam(s), series, or image(s) to be saved to the disk.
3. Click [Archive].
4. Click [Save Examination], [Save Series], or [Save Images].
5. Click [Detach].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-23

Retrieve Exams/Series/Images From a Storage Media

When restoring/reading from archive media, the system makes a copy of the image data
and does not remove the image data from the archive media. Images must be restored to
be viewed. You cannot view images directly from archive media.
1. Insert the MOD into the MOD drive.
Determine which side of the MOD contains the images to be restored (side A or side
B) and insert into the MOD drive accordingly.
NOTE: You may refer to your GE logbook or other list to determine which side of the MOD
contains the images.
2. Click [Archive].
Verify that the selected archive device is the device needed for restoring.
NOTE: For additional information about selecting the device, refer to the "Selecting the
Archive Device" section earlier in this chapter.
3. Click [Restore].
An Archive browser appears on the screen. It displays the exams, series, and images
on the media of the selected device.

4. Select the exam(s), series, or image(s) to be restored from the disk.

To aid in this, Sort and Selection menu on the Archive browser can be used.
5. Click [Restore examination], [Restore series], or [Restore images].
The selection choice depends on what is to be restored.
6. Click [OK].
This will start the restoring process.
7. Click [Application].
This opens a pull down menu.
8. Click [Quit].
This will quit the Archive browser window.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-24

NOTE: You do not have to wait for the restore to be complete before quitting the Archive
browser window.
NOTE: Remember to [Detach] and replace the storage media when you are done restoring
a patient’s images.

Quick Steps: Retrieve Exams/Series/Images From a Storage Media

1. Insert the MOD into the MOD drive.
2. Click [Archive].
3. Click [Restore].
4. Select the exam(s), series, or image(s) to be restored from the disk.
5. Click [Restore examination], [Restore series], or [Restore images].
6. Click [OK].
7. Click [Application].
8. Click [Quit].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-25

Restore Exam/Series/Images using CD/DVD Interchange

Option
This is used to write or recall images from a CD-R or DVD-R in a Dicom format. CD/DVD
cannot be selected as the default archive device. Exam, series, or images will not be marked
as archived. A DICOM viewer is stored on the media so the images can be viewed on a PC.
The media is write once and all selections must be queued at the same time. Approximately
7000 images can be stored to a 4.7 gb DVD-R.
Only CD -R or DVD -R media can be used for CD/DVD Interchange. For CD -R write speed
should be at least 4X and storage size of 700 mb.
1. With the desired CD/DVD in the drive, select the [Image Works] desktop.
This is located in the upper left corner of the display monitor.
2. Click [CD/DVD].
The CD/DVD composer window appears.
3. Click [Restore].
The Restore window appears.
Figure 24-5 CD/DVD Restore Window

4. Select the exam(s), series, or image(s) to be restored to the disk.

5. Click [Local Disk].
This copies the images onto your system’s disk.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-26

6. Click [Quit].
This closes the restore window.
7. Click [Eject].
8. To eject the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD drive.

Quick Steps: Restore Exam/Series/Images using CD/DVD Interchange Option

1. With the desired CD/DVD in the drive, select the [Image Works] desktop.
2. Click [CD/DVD].
3. Click [Restore].
4. Select the exam(s), series, or image(s) to be restored to the disk.
5. Click [Local Disk].
6. Click [Quit].
7. Click [Eject].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-27

Save Exam/Series/Images using CD/DVD Interchange

Option
This is used to write or recall images from a CD-R or DVD-R in a Dicom format. CD/DVD
cannot be selected as the default archive device. Exam, series, or images will not be marked
as archived. A DICOM viewer is stored on the media so the images can be viewed on a PC.
The media is write once and all selections must be queued at the same time. Approximately
7000 images can be stored to a 4.7 gb DVD-R.
Only CD -R or DVD -R media can be used for CD/DVD Interchange. For CD -R write speed
should be at least 4X and storage size of 700 mb.
1. With the desired CD/DVD in the drive, select the [Image Works] desktop.
This is located in the upper left corner of the display monitor.
2. Select the exam(s), series, or image(s) to be saved to the disk.
To aid in this, Sort and Selection menu on the browser can be used.
To save an individual series, hilight the series you wish to save and click [Add Series].
3. If the whole exam is desired, then click [Add Exam].
4. Click [CD/DVD].
The CD/DVD composer window appears.
Select the exams, series, and images you wish to copy to the disk.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-28

5. Click [Add Exam], [Add Series], or [Clear].

[Add Exams] adds all of the exams that are selected.

[Add Series] adds all of the series that are selected.
[Clear] deletes all selections.
6. Click [Copy] or [Restore].
[Copy] burns the images into the disk.
[Restore] copies the images from the disk onto the systems disk.
7. Click [Yes] on the copy or restore confirmation window.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-29

8. The Interchange Media Browser appears.

This shows the selections and progress of storage.

A window appears stating “Restore or Copy completed successfully”.

9. Click [Ok].
10. Click [Eject].
To eject the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD drive.

Quick Steps: Save Exam/Series/Images to a Storage Media

1. With the desired CD/DVD in the drive, select the [Image Works] desktop.
2. Select the exam(s), series, or image(s) to be saved to the disk.
3. If the whole exam is desired, then click [Add Exam].
4. Click [CD/DVD].
5. Click [Add Exam], [Add Series], or [Clear].
6. Click [Copy] or [Restore].
7. Click [Yes] on the copy or restore confirmation window.
8. The Interchange Media Browser appears.
9. Click [Ok].
10. Click [Eject].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-30

Transfer Exams/Series/Images to Another Computer

This is the way you can send exams/series/images to another computer. This is known as
sending images from one viewing station to another.
1. Select the [Image Works] desktop.
This is located in the upper left corner of the display monitor.
2. Select the exams/series/images from the browser that you wish to send.
To select individual exams, series, or images you must hold down the Ctrl key on your
keyboard as you select the images with left mouse.
3. Click [Network].
A list of choices will appear.

4. Click [Select remote host:].

This will pop-up a list of hosts to which the system can send images. Select the host
to which you want to send the images.
You will have to do this every time you start the system.
5. Click [OK].
Now that you have selected the remote host, you have the ability to ping the DICOM
host. This only functions when using the DICOM protocol. This can be done to make
sure your remote host and scanner can communicate. A box will pop up and if the
host you have selected is connecting with your system you will see a message that
says the host is "alive". If you get a message that there is a "connection error" it

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-31

means that your system cannot communicate with the selected remote host. To ping
the DICOM host, Click Network > Ping DICOM Host.

6. Click [Network].
You will have to select this again.
7. Click [Send examination], [Send series], or [Send image].
This depends on what is to be sent.

Quick Steps: Transfer Exams/Series/Images to Another Computer

1. Select the [Image Works] desktop.
2. Select the exams/series/images from the browser that you wish to send.
3. Click [Network].
4. Click [Select remote host:].
5. Click [OK].
6. Click [Network].
7. Click [Send examination], [Send series], or [Send image].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-32

Retrieve Exams/Series/Images From Another Computer

In this section you will learn to get selected images from another system. This is known as
receiving images to your system.
1. Select the [Image Works] desktop.
This is located in the upper left corner of the display monitor.
2. Click [Network].
A list of choices will appear.
3. Click [Select remote host:].
This will bring up a list of all the host connected to your system.
4. Select the host from which you want to receive images.
From the list select the host from which you want to receive images.

5. Click [OK].
This will return you to the browser.
6. Click [Network].
A list of choices will appear.
7. Click [Receive].
A remote browser will pop-up showing you what is on the system disk of the station
from which you want to receive exams/series/images.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-33

8. Click Search > Change Search Parameters.

This feature allows you to apply a filter in order to narrow down your patient list. You
may search by patient name, ID number, exam number, accession number, or exam
date.

9. Select exams/series/images from the browser that you wish to get.

To select individual exams, series or images, you must hold down the Ctrl key on your
keyboard as you select the images with left mouse.
10. Click [Get].
This will give you choices.
11. Click [Get examination], [Get series], or [Get images].
This will tell the system to go to that computer and get the selected images and copy
them to your disk. It will not remove the images from that disk.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-34

Quick Steps: Retrieve Exams/Series/Images From Another Computer

1. Select the [Image Works] desktop.
2. Click [Network].
3. Click [Select remote host:].
4. Select the host from which you want to receive images.
5. Click [OK].
6. Click [Network].
7. Click [Receive].
8. Click Search > Change Search Parameters.
9. Select exams/series/images from the browser that you wish to get.
10. Click [Get].
11. Click [Get examination], [Get series], or [Get images].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-35

Check Network History File

The network history feature provides a listing of successful DICOM image transfers to
network hosts. The listing may be sorted by Exam, Date, or Host Name.
1. Select the [Image Works] desktop.
This is located in the upper left corner of the display monitor.
2. Click [Network].
A list of choices will appear.
3. Select [Network History].

A window displays a list of entries of network transfers. Entries are listed how the job
was queued for transfer. If by Exam then only the exam number is listed. If by Series
the exam and series are listed. If by Image the exam, series, and image are listed.

4. If you want check for a specific transfer, enter the Exam, Exam and Series or Exam Series
Image in the search field.
Entries are added to the list at the level they were queued for transfer.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-36

5. A results window is displayed.

6. Click [End Search] to go back to the first screen.

Quick Steps: Check Network History File

1. Select the [Image Works] desktop.
2. Click [Network].
3. Select [Network History].
4. If you want check for a specific transfer, enter the Exam, Exam and Series or
Exam Series Image in the search field.
5. A results window is displayed.
6. Click [End Search] to go back to the first screen.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-37

Edit Patient Information

Edit Patient is a function that allows you to edit certain patient information once the exam
has been completed. There are some things to keep in mind regarding Edit Patient. You can
only edit exams that were created on your system. You cannot edit contrast or weight. It
takes about one minute and 45 seconds to update a 100 image exam. Exams can be edited
multiple times.
NOTE: Make sure that you do any retrospective reconstructions before editing and do any
archiving, networking, and filming after editing the patient information.
There are some things that Edit Patient will not do. These things are:
– Update scan data files
– Update completed patient information
– Edit contrast
– Edit weight
You also need to remember that you cannot access Edit Patient if the exam you want to edit
is currently in use. An exam is currently in use if New Patient, Network Send, Archive Save,
3D, Reformat, Denta Scan, Navigator, Viewer, or Mini Viewer is active. Also, you cannot use
Edit Patient if the exam displayed is in a free or Autofilm viewport in the Exam RX desktop. If
you try to use Edit Patient when an exam is currently in use, which means the exam is on the
archive, film or network queue, the following message will appear.

About 3D and Edit Patient, there are a couple of things to remember. If you edit an exam
that has a saved 3D model, the 3D model are deleted from the exam. Also, if you want to edit
an exam, but you have the 3D model selected when you choose Edit Patient, you will not be
able to edit the exam.
1. Click [Image Works].
This is located in the upper left corner of the display monitor.
2. Select the exam number.
From the Image Works browser, highlight the exam to update.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-38

3. Click [Edit Patient].

This is located on the right side of the browser.

4. Click [Edit Patient Images].

When the menu pops up, you can click [View Edit Log] or click [Edit Patient Images].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-39

5. Click [Accept].
This is a warning message to remind you of all the things that will happen.

If any of the things are of concern, click on [Cancel] and resolve the concern before
proceeding.
6. Click [Accept].
This is an additional reminders warning, letting you cancel if you need to.

7. Enter the patient information.

You may now edit any of the fields.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-40

NOTE: You must enter at least three characters in the Edited By field to continue.

If you changed a field but wish to change it back to its original value, highlight the
field and click [Reset Selected Value].
If you have edited multiple fields but wish to change them back to their original
values, click [Reset All Original Values].
Click [Cancel] will cancel Edit Patient.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-41

8. Click [Accept].
The following menu will appear.

9. Click [Accept].
The old exam will now be removed and the new edited exam is created.
As the old exam is being removed and the new exam is being created, a percentage
countdown menu will appear. The closing Application portion of the countdown is
when the Edit Patient feature is being closed and the Patient Information Edit Log is
being updated.
NOTE: After the editing is complete, the new edited exam is listed on the browser. You can
distinguish edited exams from originals by looking at the description area on the
browser. Edited exams will show the letter "e" plus a number identifying how many
times the exam has been edited. "e+1" means the exam has been edited once. Also,
with edited exams, any description for that exam is pushed to the right on the browser
list to make room for the editing information.

Quick Steps: Edit Patient Information

1. Click [Image Works].
2. Select the exam number.
3. Click [Edit Patient].
4. Click [Edit Patient Images].
5. Click [Accept].
6. Click [Accept].
7. Enter the patient information.
8. Click [Accept].
9. Click [Accept].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-42

Remove Patient Information From an Exam

You are able to change the patient name to Anonymous by exam, series, or image. The level
of annotation for Anonymous Patient is controlled by Anonymous Patient Level in the Tool
Bar on Image Works desktop. This is done after the patient has been scanned, thus you
must enter a name when you start a [New Patient].
1. Select the [Image Works] desktop.
This is located in the upper left corner of the display monitor.
2. From the browser, select the patient you want to be anonymous.
If you want only specific series or images to be anonymous, carefully select only
those series or images desired.
3. Click [Utilities].
A pull down menu will appear. This pull down menu will list three ways for creating an
anonymous patient, by exam, series, or image.

4. Click [Create anonymous patient by exam], [Create anonymous patient by series], or

[Create anonymous patient by image].
This will tell the machine which way you want to create the anonymous patient.
5. Click [OK] to start the create process.
Selecting [Cancel] will stop the process.

Quick Steps: Remove Patient Information From an Exam

1. Select the [Image Works] desktop.
2. From the browser, select the patient you want to be anonymous.
3. Click [Utilities].
4. Click [Create anonymous patient by exam], [Create anonymous patient by series], or
[Create anonymous patient by image].
5. Click [OK] to start the create process.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-43

Delete Exams/Series/Images From the System

Eventually, you will want to remove an image, series, or entire exam from the system image
disk to make room for others.
1. Select the [Image Works] desktop.
This is located in the upper left corner of the display monitor.
2. Select the exams/series/images from the browser that you wish to remove.
To select individual exams, series or images you must hold down the [Ctrl] key on
your keyboard as you select them with the left mouse.
3. Click [Remove].
It is important to confirm that examinations to be removed have been archived by
checking the status in the browser. Check under the examination area which should
have a "Y" in the archived column by the patients name meaning that the exam has
been Archived.
This will give you three choices.
4. Click [Remove examination], [Remove series], or [Remove image].
This depends on what is to be removed.

5. Click [OK].
This will cause a pop-up window to come up and ask you Are you sure?
6. Click [Yes].
NOTE: It is recommended that you delete images when image space falls below 10,000
images. This will ensure there is room on the system disk to confirm scans and to
install reconstructed images.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-44

Quick Steps: Delete Exams/Series/Images From the System

1. Select the [Image Works] desktop.
2. Select the exams/series/images from the browser that you wish to remove.
3. Click [Remove].
4. Click [Remove examination], [Remove series], or [Remove image].
5. Click [OK].
6. Click [Yes].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-45

Compose a Report in Data Export

1. From the Browser, select the exam you wish to export.
All series in the exam will be loaded into Data Export .
Only one series can be exported at a time.
2. Click [Data Export] from the Browser.
3. Select the Compose tab if that tab is not already selected.
See Figure 24-2 for more information.
4. Review the images in the Compose viewport.
Middle-click and drag to adjust W/L
Right-click and drag to adjust zoom factor.
Click and drag to scroll.
Click on the image to put in focus, then press the Page Up or Page Down keys on the
keyboard to navigate through the images.
Click [Play] to view the images in a cine loop.
Select the +/- Series buttons to navigate through all the series.
5. Once you are satisfied with the image appearance, display the first image in the series
and click Propagate Image Operations box.
6. Select the conversion format from the pull-down menu.
Selections include JPEG, PNG, AVI, MPEG, and MOV.
7. Select the desired image range.
If you want a subset of the images, click the Custom radio button and type the range
in the text box.
8. Select a compression factor.
The smaller the number, the higher the image quality and the larger the file size.
9. Select an Annotation option.
If you want the patient name to be displayed as Anonymous with the examination
number, click the Anonymous radio button.
10. Enter a name for both the report and the folder.
Use no spaces or characters other than alphanumeric.
11. Click [Add to Report].
If you change your mind and decide not to add the data to the report, click [Cancel]
from the progress bar window.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-46

12. Click [Quit] to exit the Data Export application.

Quick Steps: Compose a Report in Data Export

1. From the Browser, select the exam you wish to export.
2. Click [Data Export] from the Browser.
3. Select the Compose tab if that tab is not already selected.
4. Review the images in the Compose viewport.
5. Once you are satisfied with the image appearance, display the first image in the series
and click Propagate Image Operations box.
6. Select the conversion format from the pull-down menu.
7. Select the desired image range.
8. Select a compression factor.
9. Select an Annotation option.
10. Enter a name for both the report and the folder.
11. Click [Add to Report].
12. Click [Quit] to exit the Data Export application.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-47

Save a Report to CD-R

1. Click [Data Export] from the Browser.
2. Click the Export tab.
See Figure 24-3 for more information.
3. Select the desired report from the Export Report Name pull-down menu.
4. Select the desired data set from the Type Name list.
5. Optional: type a message in the Comment text box. Do not press carriage return while
entering your text, the system adjusts the text for the final report.
6. Select a Conversion format, typically html.
7. To burn the report to a CD, place a CD-R in the system CD/DVD drive.
NOTE: This is not the drive housed in the computer cabinet but rather the box that houses
the MOD and CD/DVD drive located on the desk.
The only compatible media for Data Export is CD -R 700 mb with at least 4X write
speed. DVD-R is not supported. If DVD -R is placed in the drive, the system will write
to this media, but the integrity of the data cannot be guaranteed and the time for the
system to recognize the media will be excessive.
NOTE: Care must be taken when placing the CD media in the drive. Place the media squarely
in the drive. Wait until the drive has sensed the media and the drive light goes off
before clicking Create CD. If you click Create CD too quickly after placing the media
in the drive you will get a message no media in the drive.
8. Click [Create CD].
9. Click [Ok] to start the writing process.
A message displays while the CD is written.
When the CD writing step is complete, the CD ejects from the drive.
10. Click [Ok] to the CD Written Successful prompt.
11. Click [Quit] to exit Data Export.

Quick Steps: Save a Report to CD-R

1. Click [Data Export] from the Browser.
2. Click the Export tab.
3. Select the desired report from the Export Report Name pull-down menu.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-48

Quick Steps: Save a Report to CD-R

4. Select the desired data set from the Type Name list.
5. Optional: type a message in the Comment text box. Do not press carriage return while
entering your text, the system adjusts the text for the final report.
6. Select a Conversion format, typically html.
7. To burn the report to a CD, place a CD-R in the system CD/DVD drive.
8. Click [Create CD].
9. Click [Ok] to start the writing process.
10. Click [Ok] to the CD Written Successful prompt.
11. Click [Quit] to exit Data Export.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-49

FTP a Report
1. Click [Data Export] from the Browser list.
2. Click the Export tab.
See Figure 24-3 for more information.
3. Select the desired report from the Export Report Name pull-down menu.
4. Select the desired data set from the Type Name list.
5. Optional: type a message in the Comment text box. Do not press carriage return while
entering your text, the system adjusts the text for the final report.
6. Select a Conversion format, typically html.
7. Click [Send FTP] to send the data to an IP address.
8. Complete all the text boxes on the FTP window and click [OK].
9. Click [OK] to the Successful File transfer prompt.
10. Click [Quit] to exit Data Export.

Quick Steps: FTP a Report

1. Click [Data Export] from the Browser list.
2. Click the Export tab.
3. Select the desired report from the Export Report Name pull-down menu.
4. Select the desired data set from the Type Name list.
5. Optional: type a message in the Comment text box. Do not press carriage return while
entering your text, the system adjusts the text for the final report.
6. Select a Conversion format, typically html.
7. Click [Send FTP] to send the data to an IP address.
8. Complete all the text boxes on the FTP window and click [OK].
9. Click [OK] to the Successful File transfer prompt.
10. Click [Quit] to exit Data Export.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-50

View a Report on a PC
1. Place the CDROM in the CD drive of a PC or laptop running Windows 2000 or XP.
The CD launches automatically. If it does automatically start, open the CD by clicking
on your My Computer icon and open your CD drive. Click INDEX to open the file.
The report is opened and displayed from an Internet Browser.
2. Place the cursor over an image and click to magnify the image.
3. Click the Back arrow on your Internet Browser menu bar to return to the report.
4. When finished viewing the report, close your Internet Browser by clicking File > Close
from the menu bar.
5. Remove the CD-ROM from the CD drive and store it.

Quick Steps: View a Report on a PC

1. Place the CDROM in the CD drive of a PC or laptop running Windows 2000 or XP.
2. Place the cursor over an image and click to magnify the image.
3. Click the Back arrow on your Internet Browser menu bar to return to the report.
4. When finished viewing the report, close your Internet Browser by clicking File > Close
from the menu bar.
5. Remove the CD-ROM from the CD drive and store it.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 24-51

Chapter 25
Viewing Images

Introduction
This chapter explains how to view images. It contains the step-by-step instructions to help
you learn how to:
• View a List of Scanned Patients
• View a Patient’s Scan
• Advance One Exam/Series/Image At a Time in Image Works
• Scroll Through A Set of Images
• View Images in a Cine Loop
• Compare Exams/Series/Images
• View a Reference Image

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 25-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to successfully set up images for viewing.
Some of the concepts you need to understand:
• List/Select
• Paging
• Viewer and Mini-Viewer
• Performed Procedure Step (PPS)

List/Select
The List/Select function is located in the Exam RX desktop. Selecting this function gives you a
listing of exams and other information about the exams. This list is known as the Browser.
The Browser is broken down into examinations, series, and images. The exam listing
includes the exam number, patient name, date, description of the exam, modality image
format, pps information, and the archive status by exam. The series area lists the series that
comprise the exam. The series number is listed here as well as the scan type, number of
images for that scan type, a description, what modality the images came from, pps
information, and the manufacturer of the system. The image list box contains all the
information related to images that comprise the highlighted series. In the list box, the
images numbers, table location, thickness and spacing, gantry tilt, RAS coordinates, Scan
field of view, Display field of view, Resolution, Matrix size, Mid scan time in seconds, and
Archive status are listed. This function provides a list of all the exams on the system disk for
viewing.

Paging
Paging allows you to rapidly view images at up to 60 frames per second. This function is
good for viewing scans taken at the same location with contrast to track flow or with motion
such as flexing a Elbow. There are two viewing choices in Paging. Temporal displays the
images in a loop from start to end location all the time as paging continues. Spatial goes
from the starting location to the ending location, then from the ending location to the
starting location, and continues the sequence.

Viewer and Mini-Viewer

The Viewer and Mini-Viewer are located on the Image Works desktop. This is the place from
which you can view images. All of the routine display functions are located here. The
difference between the Viewer and Mini-Viewer is a few functions. The Viewer has all the
same functions as the Mini-viewer. The Viewer, however, has the following additional
features: Compare, Film Series, Save Screen, and User Preferences.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 25-2

Performed Procedure Step (PPS)

Performed Procedure Step is an OPTION. To use it you need a HIS/RIS system and PACS with
the Connect Pro option. It communicates to PACS and HIS/RIS that you have completed a
procedure. It improves transfer of data because it can provide a complete message when all
data has been transferred. The browser has a PPS column that lists the PPS status of each
exam. There are three states of exam status: COMP, meaning the exam is complete; DISC,
meaning the exam is discontinued, and it cannot use PPS again; or, INPR, meaning that the
exam is still in progress.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 25-3

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for Viewing Images. Specifically, it
describes how to:
• View a List of Scanned Patients
• View a Patient’s Scan
• Advance One Exam/Series/Image At a Time in Image Works
• Scroll Through A Set of Images
• View Images in a Cine Loop
• Compare Exams/Series/Images
• View a Reference Image

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 25-4

View a List of Scanned Patients

Use this procedure to update your log book and to keep track of all the patients that have
been scanned on the system.
1. From the Display monitor, click [Exam RX].

This button is located in the upper left corner of the Display monitor.
2. From the left side of the screen, click [List/Select].

This brings up a list of all the patients that are on the system disk.
NOTE: You can sort the way the list is displayed. For more information on sort, refer to: Sort
Examinations and Images.

Quick Steps: View a List of Scanned Patients

1. From the Display monitor, click [Exam RX].
2. From the left side of the screen, click [List/Select].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 25-5

View a Patient’s Scan

The List/Select button is used for displaying a patient and manipulating the images for
image review or filming.
1. From the Display Monitor, click [Exam RX].

This button is located in the upper left corner of the Display monitor.
2. From the left side of the screen, click [List/Select].

This brings up a list of all the patients that is on the system disk.
3. Select the patient name that you want to view.
The names are listed in the order by which they are sorted.
4. Select the series that you want to view.
There may be several series. You can click on the first one that you want to view.
The first series is automatically highlighted. If that is the one you want, you do not
have to select it again.
5. Select the image that you want to view.
The first image is highlighted already. If that is the series you would like to view, you
do not have to select it again.
There may be several images. You can click on the first one that you want to view.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 25-6

6. Click [Accept].
a loading pop up box displays the percentage until completion.
A prompt may be displayed that all of the images in the series have not been loaded.
You may:
a)Select Continue and only display the images currently indicated.
b)Select Try again later and reselect the series from the browser.
c)Wait until the images loaded match the total number of images in the Series
before selecting Continue.

Quick Steps: View a Patient’s Scan

1. From the Display Monitor, click [Exam RX].
2. From the left side of the screen, click [List/Select].
3. Select the patient name that you want to view.
4. Select the series that you want to view.
5. Select the image that you want to view.
6. Click [Accept].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 25-7

Advance One Exam/Series/Image At a Time in Image

Works
There are a lot of different ways in which you can move from one exam, series, or image to
another.
The Accelerator Bar can be used to move from one exam, series, or image to another.
For more information on the Accelerator Line Commands, refer to the Appendix of this
manual.
In the [Image Works] desktop, the Page Up and Page Down keys work, but the Bright Box
does not. It is designed only for the Exam RX desktop.
1. Select from the Browser the Exam, Series and Image that you want to page through.
You do not have to select all of the images, just the first one is good.
2. Click [Viewer] or [Mini Viewer].
3. In [Image Works] you can move from one exam to another by selecting Exam [+] or [-].
This moves you up or down the patient list, displaying each exam.
4. You can move from one Series to another by selecting Series [+] or [-].
If [Next/Prior] Series is on you automatically advance from one series to the next
while in the same exam.
5. You can move from one image to another by selecting Image [+] or [-], or Clicking and
Dragging the scroll bar.
This moves you through the images one at a time, just as the Page Up and Page
Down keys do.
You can also Click on the number and type the new image number in.
NOTE: For more information on Next/Prior Series refer to: Image Display Viewing Area.

Quick Steps: Advance One Exam/Series/Image At a Time in Image

Works
1. Select from the Browser the Exam, Series and Image that you want to page through.
2. Click [Viewer] or [Mini Viewer].
3. In [Image Works] you can move from one exam to another by selecting Exam [+] or [-].
4. You can move from one Series to another by selecting Series [+] or [-].
5. You can move from one image to another by selecting Image [+] or [-], or Clicking and
Dragging the scroll bar.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 25-8

Scroll Through A Set of Images

The Bright Box is a white box that can be moved around anywhere on the console. It has a
trackball in the middle of it, page up and page down button on each side, and a paging
button at the top of the trackball. This is a great way for the radiologist to view the images
on the screen. It is fast and requires little work for him/her. This feature only works in the
Exam RX desktop.
1. Double Click on the desired image for paging.
Place you mouse over the image that you want to page through and double click.
2. Using the Bright Box, Double Click on the top button.
This puts the blue frame into a manual paging mode and move the blue frame to
another viewport.
This mode puts a Blue P in the bottom right of the image.
3. Roll the Trackball up and down to scroll through the images.
Rolling the trackball up, moves through the next images and rolling the trackball
down moves through the prior images.
4. Click on the top button and change the window level by moving the trackball.
This changes the Blue P to a Blue WL.
Roll the trackball side to side to change the window width and up and down to
change the window level.
5. Click on the top button and change back to paging mode.
This changes the Blue WL to a Blue P.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 25-9

6. To get out of this mode, Double Click on the top button.

The P disappears.
You have to Click with the mouse, on the viewport to make it in primary focus.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 25-10

Quick Steps: Scroll Through A Set of Images

1. Double Click on the desired image for paging.
2. Using the Bright Box, Double Click on the top button.
3. Roll the Trackball up and down to scroll through the images.
4. Click on the top button and change the window level by moving the trackball.
5. Click on the top button and change back to paging mode.
6. To get out of this mode, Double Click on the top button.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 25-11

View Images in a Cine Loop

This function allows you to view images up to 60 frames per second. This function is good for
viewing scans taken at the same location with contrast to track flow or with motion such as
flexing a elbow. This feature is found in the Image Works desktop.
1. Select from the Browser the Exam, Series and Image that you want to page through.
You do not have to select all of the images, just the first one is sufficient.
2. Click [Viewer] or [Mini Viewer].
3. Click on the viewport that you want to use for paging.
This makes the frame the primary focus.
4. Click [Paging].

5. Click and Drag the scroll bar by Start and change the starting image number.
You can also delete the existing number and type in the new number that you want
to start with.
6. Click and Drag the scroll bar by End and change the ending image number.
You can also delete the existing number and type in the new number that you want
to end with.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 25-12

7. Click and Drag the scroll bar by FPS (Frames Per Second) and change the FPS number.
You can also delete the existing number and type in the new number to set the speed
for the image loop.

8. Select Temporal or Spatial.

There are two viewing choices in Paging. Temporal displays the images in a loop from
starting to ending location all the time as paging continues. Spatial goes from the
starting location to the ending location, then from the ending location to the starting
location, and continues the sequence.
9. Click [Go].
This starts the paging loop.
10. Click [Stop].
This stops the paging loop.
11. If you want to page a new series, and you are in the viewer, click [Select Series].
A pop up message appears stating "On the browser, select the examination, series,
and images which you wish to load into the selected viewport. Select the ’Viewer’".
You can click [Viewer] or click on the [Cancel Series Selection] button.
On the Browser, select another series, then click on [Viewer], and click [Go].
12. Click [Cancel].
This cancels you out of the paging feature.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 25-13

Quick Steps: View Images in a Cine Loop

1. Select from the Browser the Exam, Series and Image that you want to page through.
2. Click [Viewer] or [Mini Viewer].
3. Click on the viewport that you want to use for paging.
4. Click [Paging].
5. Click and Drag the scroll bar by Start and change the starting image number.
6. Click and Drag the scroll bar by End and change the ending image number.
7. Click and Drag the scroll bar by FPS (Frames Per Second) and change the FPS number.
8. Select Temporal or Spatial.
9. Click [Go].
10. Click [Stop].
11. If you want to page a new series, and you are in the viewer, click [Select Series].
12. Click [Cancel].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 25-14

Compare Exams/Series/Images
The compare function allows you to compare images from the same series or a different
series from the current exam, or compare another exam to the current one displayed. This
feature is only available in the image works viewer.
1. Select the first Exam, Series, and Image that you want to compare on the screen.
Highlight the Exam/Series/Image that you want to compare
2. Click [Viewer].
This s displays the first exam.
3. Click [Compare].

The Browser appears with the following message, describing how to use Compare.

4. From the Browser, select the second Exam/Series/Image.

This is the other Exam/Series/Image that you want to be able to compare with the
first set of images.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 25-15

5. Click [Viewer].

The Display screen is now divided into a four on one format, with the original exam
on the left half of the viewer, and the new Exam/Series/Images on the right side.
The monitor is divided into two viewers. If you want to make changes to the first
exam, click on that side to make that image the primary viewport. Make your
changes, then click on the other side to make it the primary viewport and make the
changes to that side.
In the compare mode, the system always default to a four on one format, regardless
of the format that you have chosen.
6. Select the Left Series or Right Series Up and Down arrows to move through the image
set.
If you want to move both series at the same time, use the Page Up or Page Down
keys.

7. When you are finished comparing the Exams/Series/Images, click [Cancel Compare].
This cancels Compare and revert back to viewing the first exam/series/image that
you had selected as the primary before canceling.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 25-16

Quick Steps: Compare Exams/Series/Images

1. Select the first Exam, Series, and Image that you want to compare on the screen.
2. Click [Viewer].
3. Click [Compare].
4. From the Browser, select the second Exam/Series/Image.
5. Click [Viewer].
6. Select the Left Series or Right Series Up and Down arrows to move through the image
set.
7. When you are finished comparing the Exams/Series/Images, click [Cancel Compare].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 25-17

View a Reference Image

Selecting the reference image button in image works only, allows you to place a reference
image on a selected viewport or all viewports. The reference image is displayed in the lower
right of the viewport or viewports. For the reference image to be displayed, the viewport
display must be 5122 x 5122 or larger.
1. Select from the Browser the Exam, Series and Image that you want to display a
reference image on.
You do not have to select all of the images, just the first one is sufficent.
2. Click [Viewer] or [Mini Viewer].
3. Click on the Viewport that you want to use for a reference image.
This makes the frame the primary focus.
4. Click [Reference Image].
Once you select the reference image button, a listing of three choices appear.
5. Click All, Selected, or Off.
One option is to select All to have the reference image displayed on all viewports.
Another option is to select Selected to have the reference image displayed only in the
active viewport. A third option is to select Off to remove the reference image from the
viewport or viewports.
NOTE: When using Print Series with Reference image on, make sure you have All selected
so all the images are filmed with reference image on.
NOTE: If a screen save is done with Reference image on, the Reference image will be saved
with the same WW and WL as the main image, regardless of the WW and WL
displayed on the Reference Image.

Quick Steps: View a Reference Image

1. Select from the Browser the Exam, Series and Image that you want to display a
reference image on.
2. Click [Viewer] or [Mini Viewer].
3. Click on the Viewport that you want to use for a reference image.
4. Click [Reference Image].
5. Click All, Selected, or Off.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 25-18

Chapter 26
Image Display Viewing Area

Introduction
This chapter explains Setting up the Viewing Area for Image Display. It contains the
step-by-step instructions to help you learn how to:
• Select a Single Image Display
• Select a Multiple Image Display
• Set Viewports for Images to Come Up in Order
• Set Viewports for Automatic Display of the Next Series
• Set a Primary Viewport
• Set a Secondary Viewport

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 26-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to successfully set up a viewing area for
image display. Some of the concepts you need to understand:
• Autoview
• Auto Link
• Primary Viewport
• Secondary Viewport
• Viewport

Autoview
Auto View is used to automatically display the images on the screen as the images are
reconstructed by the computer. You have a choice between 8 Autoview layouts.
NOTE: If you are in the one on one layout or any of the multiple viewport layouts, you notice
a folded corner, in the top right corner. This allows you to see what is auto filming. It
toggles the screen each time you click on the folded corner. The folded corner is not
available on the autoview layouts that defaults to filming.

Auto Link
While reconstruction is active, and if you have a autoview port selected with auto link, the
lower right viewport automatically displays the first image of the series being currently
reconstructed. The viewport is annotated with "AL" at the bottom right corner of the image
to indicate that Auto Link is active. All display features and next/prior can be used with Auto
Link.

Primary Viewport
A viewport becomes active or receives primary focus by clicking on it. At that point, the
border around the image turns blue. When a viewport has received the primary focus, you
can choose List/Select and choose which exam you want to view. Also, you can window
level, magnify, and preform other image manipulation functions without effecting other
images currently displayed on the screen.

Secondary Viewport
When you click on another viewport and the border turns blue, the viewport that was
previously in focus receives secondary focus and has a yellow box around it. In effect, these
two viewports are linked together. A change in one of the viewports is reflected in the other

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 26-2

viewport. For example, changing the window width and window level in the primary image
also changes the window width and window level in the secondary focused image. To return
a single viewport in focus, double click on the viewport of interest, or to put all the images in
focus, triple click on a viewport.

Viewport
The screen can be divided into many different viewing areas. These viewing areas are called
Viewports.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 26-3

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for Setting up a Viewing Area for Image
Display. Specifically, it describes how to:
• Select a Single Image Display
• Select a Multiple Image Display
• Set Viewports for Images to Come Up in Order
• Set Viewports for Automatic Display of the Next Series
• Set a Primary Viewport
• Set a Secondary Viewport

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 26-4

Select a Single Image Display

You can choose between two one on one displays. The first one is a 1024 x 1024 matrix.
Keep in mind, if you select this layout, the entire screen is filled with the image. You notice
the image is annotated with a magnification factor of 2.0. This annotation is a result of the
change going from a 5122 matrix to a 10242 matrix. When the image is filmed, it is filmed in
a 512 matrix and no magnification factor is shown.

The second one on one display is a 768 x 768 matrix. The image covers 768 x 768 of the
entire display screen, but in effect, the entire screen is used.

Both of these formats can be chosen in either the Autoview Layout and/or the Review
Layout.
1. Click the [Exam RX Desktop].
This is located in the upper left corner of the Display Monitor.
2. Click [Autoview Layout] or [Review Layout] to switch between desktops.
This is done by clicking on the switch located above the Autoview and Review layout
icons.
3. Click the [Autoview Layout] or [Review Layout] icon to change the screen format.
This is done by clicking on the icon that looks like multiple images.
4. Click the one on one choice that you want to display.
This is done by clicking on the image layout that looks like what you want your
display layout to look like.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 26-5

Quick Steps: Select a Single Image Display

1. Click the [Exam RX Desktop].
2. Click [Autoview Layout] or [Review Layout] to switch between desktops.
3. Click the [Autoview Layout] or [Review Layout] icon to change the screen format.
4. Click the one on one choice that you want to display.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 26-6

Select a Multiple Image Display

There are six choices in Autoview Layout to choose from.
The first Layout allows you to display the scout with the cross reference of the current
autoviewed image in the upper left viewport. In the upper right viewport is the autoviewed
image and then there are two open viewports at the bottom. In the open viewports, you may
choose to view the current exam or other exams that are on the system disk. While
reconstruction is active, the lower right viewport automatically displays the first image of
the series being currently reconstructed. The viewport is annotated with "AL" to indicate
that Autolink is on.

The next Layout selection has the autofilm viewport in the upper left viewport, the
autoviewed image in the upper right viewport and two open viewports at the bottom. While
reconstruction is active, the lower right viewport automatically displays the first image of
the series being currently reconstructed. The viewport is annotated with "AL" to indicate
that Autolink is on.

The next Autoview Layout selection has the scout with the crossed reference of the current
autoviewed image in the upper left viewport, the autoviewed image in the upper and lower
right viewports, and an open viewport in the lower left viewport.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 26-7

The next Autoview Layout selection displays the autoviewed images in the top two
viewports, the scout with the cross reference of the current autoviewed image in the bottom
right viewport and an open viewport in the bottom left viewport.

The next Autoview Layout selection displays the last four autoviewed images with the most
current in the upper left and the oldest in the lower right viewport. There are no open
viewports with this selection.

CAUTION: This format should not be used for display of images during an interventional
study because it does not allow for quick review of images in a free viewport.
The final Autoview Layout selection displays two autoviewed images in the upper two
viewports and two open viewports in the bottom viewports to display the current exam or
other exams that are on the system disk.

CAUTION: This format should not be used for display of images during an interventional
study because it does not allow for quick review of images in a free viewport.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 26-8

There are three choices in Review Layout to choose from.

The first choice displays the four on one selection. This allows you to view an exam in a four
on one layout or view a different exam in each viewport.

The next Review Layout choice displays a two on one horizontal display. This allows you to
view an exam in a two on one layout or to view a different exam in each viewport.

The final Review Layout choice displays a two on one vertical layout which allows you to
view a different exam in a two on one format or view an exam in each viewport.

1. Click the [Exam RX Desktop].

This is located in the upper left corner of the Display Monitor.
2. Click [Autoview Layout] or [Review Layout] to switch between desktops.
This is done by clicking on the switch located above the Autoview and Review layout
icons.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 26-9

3. Click [Autoview Layout] or [Review Layout] icon.

This is done by clicking on the icon that looks like multiple images.
4. Click the Layout choice.
This is done by clicking on the image layout that looks like what you want your
display layout to look like.

Quick Steps: Select a Multiple Image Display

1. Click the [Exam RX Desktop].
2. Click [Autoview Layout] or [Review Layout] to switch between desktops.
3. Click [Autoview Layout] or [Review Layout] icon.
4. Click the Layout choice.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 26-10

Set Viewports for Images to Come Up in Order

The Next/Prior Each Viewport function is used in conjunction with a multiple image display.
This function determines how the images are sequenced when the Page up or Page down
buttons are used. For example with a 4 on 1 MID display, if the Next/Prior Each Viewport is
selected, each viewport advances one image. With this function off, the next 4 images
displays.
The function default is off.
1. Click the [Exam RX] Desktop.
This is located in the upper left corner of the display monitor.
2. Click [Display Preferences].
This opens up another menu.

3. Click [Next/Prior Each Viewport].

This is a toggle switch. If it is a dark blue, it is not selected; if it is a light blue color, it is
selected which means the feature is on.

4. Click [Back].
This returns you to the Exam RX screen.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 26-11

Quick Steps: Set Viewports for Images to Come Up in Order

1. Click the [Exam RX] Desktop.
2. Click [Display Preferences].
3. Click [Next/Prior Each Viewport].
4. Click [Back].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 26-12

Set Viewports for Automatic Display of the Next Series

The Next/Prior Series Binding function is on, it takes you to first image of the next series or
prior series within an exam, if you reach the end of a series using the next or prior image
functions. With the Next/Prior Series Binding function off, when you reach the end of a
series, selecting the next image returns you to the first image of that series.
1. Click the [Exam RX] Desktop.
This is located in the upper left corner of the display monitor.
2. Click [Display Preferences].
This opens up another menu.

3. Click [Next/Prior Series Binding].

This is a toggle switch. If it is a dark blue, it is not selected; if it is a light blue color, it is
selected which means the feature is on.

4. Click [Back].
This returns you to the Exam RX screen.

Quick Steps: Set Viewports for Automatic Display of the Next Series
1. Click the [Exam RX] Desktop.
2. Click [Display Preferences].
3. Click [Next/Prior Series Binding].
4. Click [Back].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 26-13

Set a Primary Viewport

When a viewport has received primary focus, you can choose List/Select and choose which
exam you want to view. Also, you can window level, magnify, and perform other image
manipulation functions without affecting other images currently displayed on the screen.
1. Click the [Exam RX] Desktop.
This is located in the upper left corner of the display monitor.
2. Double Click on the image that you want in primary focus.
This is done by placing the mouse pointer over the image that you want in primary
focus and clicking twice quickly.

Quick Steps: Set a Primary Viewport

1. Click the [Exam RX] Desktop.
2. Double Click on the image that you want in primary focus.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 26-14

Set a Secondary Viewport

The secondary viewport has a yellow frame around it. In effect, the blue and yellow
viewports are linked together. A change in one of the viewports is reflected in the other
viewport. For example, changing the window width and window level in the primary image
also changes the window width and window level in the secondary focused image.
1. Click the [Exam RX] Desktop.
This is located in the upper left corner of the display monitor.
2. Double Click on the image that you want in secondary focus.
The frame is blue, indicating primary focus, but turns yellow after completing the
next step.
3. Single Click on the image that you want to link to.
This image now has primary focus and the previously selected image has secondary
focus.

Quick Steps: Set a Secondary Viewport

1. Click the [Exam RX] Desktop.
2. Double Click on the image that you want in secondary focus.
3. Single Click on the image that you want to link to.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 26-15

Chapter 27
Sort Examinations and Images

Introduction
When working with a list of examinations or images, it can be helpful to sort the list by a
particular criteria, such as the scan date or a number. This chapter explains the process of
sorting examinations and images. It contains the step-by-step instructions to help you learn
how to:
• Sort Examinations by:
– Number
– Patient name
– Scan date
– Modality
– Archived status
• Sort Images by:
– Image number
– Table location
– Echo (MR images)
– Trigger (MR images)
– Scan time (MR images)

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 27-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to successfully sort examinations and images.
The concepts you need to understand are:
• Sorting Examinations
• Sorting Images

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 27-2

Sorting Examinations
When you look at the patient list on the browser, you want to know what examinations have
been completed. If you spend time looking for a patient to view, you may want to organize
your list to help you find examinations quickly. The list can be organized in many different
ways. The most common method is to sort the examinations by date.

Sort Examinations by Examination Number

This option sorts the examinations by number. The oldest exam is listed at the top and the
most recent exam is listed at the bottom of the Examination window.

Sort Examinations by Patient Name

This option sorts the examinations by patient name. The patients are listed in alphabetical
order, starting with A at the top of the list.

Sort Examinations by Date

This option sorts the examinations by the date and time on which they were scanned. This
method is used most often since it always lists the most recent patient scanned at the top of
the list. All of the other patients are listed in the order in which they were scanned.

Sort Examinations by Modality

This option sorts the list by modality. It arranges the examinations in alphabetical order by
the modality in which they were scanned.

Sort Examinations by Archived Status

This option sorts the examinations by the archived status. It may be useful to arrange the
patient list so that all of the archived examinations are at the top of the list and the
unarchived examinations are at the bottom of the list.

Sorting Images
Image organization is very important to the doctor when reviewing the exam. It may be
helpful to find out the order in which each doctor wants to view the images. The most
common method is to sort the images by their number, so the images are displayed in order
that they were acquired.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 27-3

Sort Images by Image Number

This option sorts the images by image number and is used most often. The image list places
the lowest number at the top of the list and the highest number at the bottom of the list.

Sort Images by Location

This option sorts the images by the table location. This is a good method to use when you
scan out of order and you want to sort the images by the location that was scanned.

Sort Images by Echo

This method is used for MR images that have more than one echo.

Sort Images by Trigger

This method sorts the MR images by trigger delay.

Sort Images by Scan Time

This option sorts the MR images in a series by the scan time. The most recent scan time is at
the top of the list.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 27-4

How Do I... Anchor

This section provides the step-by-step instructions for sorting examinations and sorting
images. Specifically, it describes how to:
• Sort Examinations by:
– Number
– Patient name
– Scan date
– Modality
– Archived status
• Sort Images by:
– Image number
– Table location
– Echo (MR images)
– Trigger (MR images)
– Scan time (MR images)

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 27-5

Sort Examinations
Use this procedure when you want to change the order in which the examinations are listed
on your system.
1. Select Sort from the display monitor.
This is located at the top of the browser on both Exam Rx and Image Works.
2. Select the desired sort option from the Sort list.
Sort examinations by exam number
Sort examinations by patient name
Sort examinations by date
Sort examinations by modality
Sort examinations by archived status

Quick Steps: Sort Examinations

1. Select Sort from the display monitor.
2. Select the desired sort option from the Sort list.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 27-6

Sort Images
Use this procedure when you want to change the order in which the images are listed on
your system.
1. Select Sort from the display monitor.
This is located at the top of the browser on both Exam Rx and Image Works.
2. Select the desired sort option from the Sort list.
Sort images by image number
Sort images by location
Sort images by echo
– This applies to MR images only.
Sort images by trigger
– This applies to MR images only.
Sort images by scan time
– This applies to MR images only.

Quick Steps: Sort Images

1. Select Sort from the display monitor.
2. Select the desired sort option from the Sort list.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 27-7

Chapter 28
Image Manipulations

Introduction
This chapter explains how to manipulate image data. The chapter is divided into two parts.
The first part lists how to perform all applicable functions from the Exam Rx desktop. The
second part lists how to perform all applicable functions from the Image Works desktop. It
contains the step-by-step instructions to help you learn how to:
In the Exam Rx desktop:
• Change the Orientation of an Image
• Make Images Sharper or Smoother
• Improve the Brain/Bone Interface
• Restore an Image to its Original State
• Reverse the Video
• Apply Mattes to an Image
In the Image Works desktop:
• Change the Orientation of an Image
• Make Images Sharper or Smoother
• Improve the Brain/Bone Interface
• Restore an Image to its Original State
• Apply Mattes to an Image
• Create a Gray Scale Presentation State Object (GSPS)
• View a Gray Scale Presentation State Object (GSPS)

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents concepts necessary to understand ways to manipulate images. Some
of the concepts you need to understand are:
• Gray Scale Enhancement
• Using Proview or Image Filters
• DICOM Gray Scale Presentation State Object (GSPS)

Gray Scale Enhancement

Gray Scale Enhancement is a display feature which changes the slope and gamma curve of
an image. It can be used in head studies to improve the bone/brain interface which helps
with gray/white matter differentiation. There are three levels of Gray Scale Enhancement,
G1, G2 and G3. G1 applies the least amount of enhancement and G3 applies the most.
When a filter is applied, the images are annotated with G1, G2, or G3 just above the vertical
tick mark scale on the right side of the image.

Using Proview or Image Filters

There are several different display enhancement filters (called Proview in the Exam Rx
desktop or Image Filters in the Image Works desktop) available on the system. The Edge
Enhancement filters are useful for filming bone windows, as they sharpen the image. There
are six levels of Edge Enhancement, E1, E2, E21, E22, E23, and E3. E1 applies the least
amount of enhancement and E3 applies the most. When these filters are used, the image is
annotated with E1, E2, E21, E22, E23, or E3.
The Lung Enhancement filter is designed specifically to use when filming lung windows.
When the Lung enhancement filter is applied, the image is annotated with the word Lung.
There are also five Smoothing filters, S1, S11, S2, S22, and S3, which are used when filming
soft tissue windows to decrease the appearance of noise in an image or enhance low
contrast areas. S1 applies the least amount of smoothing and S3 applies the most. When
these filters are used, the images is annotated with S1, S11, S2, S22, or S3.

DICOM Gray Scale Presentation State Object (GSPS)

DICOM Gray Scale Presentation State (GSPS) is a DICOM object which saves a range of
images, WW, WL, roam, zoom, image flip, and graphic annotations such as image
annotation and measurement graphics. This object is then sent to a review station along
with the source images. When the object is viewed, images are presented in the form that
was displayed on the scanner. GSPS object can only be viewed on systems that support
DICOM GSPS objects.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-2

How Do I...

This section provides the step-by-step instructions for manipulating images in the Exam RX
desktop. Specifically, it describes how to:
• Change the Orientation of an Image
• Make Images Sharper or Smoother
• Improve the Brain/Bone Interface
• Restore an Image to its Original State
• Reverse the Video
• Apply Mattes to an Image
NOTE: All of these features are also available from the Accelerator Line Commands refer to
Appendix A.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-3

Change the Orientation of an Image

Use this procedure to flip an image left to right, top to bottom, or both at the same time. You
can also rotate to the right or to the left 90 degrees.
The flip or rotate selected is applied to all images in the series.
1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Routine Display].

3. Click [Flip/Rotate].

A pop up window appears.

4. Click [FLR] to flip image left to right, click [FTB] to flip image top to bottom or click
[FTB/FLR] to flip image both top to bottom and left to right.
Flip left to right is useful when the patient is lying prone on the table for the exam.
5. Click [RR] to rotate image to the right (clockwise) or click [RL] to rotate image to the left
(counter-clockwise).
The rotate feature is useful if the patient is lying on their side on the table, as in a
biopsy procedure.
6. Click [Cancel] to cancel out of flip/rotate pop up window.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-4

7. Click [Display Normal] to return images to their original orientation.

Quick Steps: Change the Orientation of an Image

1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Routine Display].
3. Click [Flip/Rotate].
4. Click [FLR] to flip image left to right, click [FTB] to flip image top to bottom or click
[FTB/FLR] to flip image both top to bottom and left to right.
5. Click [RR] to rotate image to the right (clockwise) or click [RL] to rotate image to the left
(counter-clockwise).
6. Click [Cancel] to cancel out of flip/rotate pop up window.
7. Click [Display Normal] to return images to their original orientation.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-5

Make Images Sharper or Smoother

Using Proview is a great way to enhance anatomical structures without adding additional
reconstruction time.
The Edge Enhancement filters sharpen the image. There are seven levels of Edge
Enhancement, E1, E2, E21, E22, E23, E3 and Lung. E1 applies the least amount of
enhancement and E3 and Lung apply the most.
There are also five Smoothing filters, S1, S11, S2, S22, and S3, which are used when filming
soft tissue windows to decrease the appearance of noisy images or enhance low contrast
areas. S1 applies the least amount of smoothing and S3 applies the most. When these filters
are used, the images is annotated with S1, S11, S2, S22, or S3.
The Proview filter selected is applied to all images in the series when next and prior image
are used from the keyboard.
1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Routine Display].

3. Click [Proview].

A pop up window appears.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-6

4. Click [E1, E2, E21, E22, E23, or E3] for edge enhancement.
Edge enhancement is useful when filming bone windows.
5. Click [Lung] for lung enhancement.
This is designed specifically to use when filming lung windows.
6. Click [S1,S11, S2, S21, or S3] for smoothing.
The smooth enhancements are used for filming soft tissue windows when there is a
need to decrease the appearance of noise in an image.
Enhances low contrast areas.
This feature is useful when scanning larger patients whose images have a grainy
appearance.
Also may be useful when there are bone artifact streaks on an image such as in the
hip and shoulder areas.
7. Click [Off] to turn enhancement off.

8. Click [Cancel] to cancel out of Proview pop up window.

Quick Steps: Make Images Sharper or Smoother

1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Routine Display].
3. Click [Proview].
4. Click [E1, E2, E21, E22, E23, or E3] for edge enhancement.
5. Click [Lung] for lung enhancement.
6. Click [S1,S11, S2, S21, or S3] for smoothing.
7. Click [Off] to turn enhancement off.
8. Click [Cancel] to cancel out of Proview pop up window.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-7

Improve the Brain/Bone Interface

Using Gray Scale Enhancement (GSE) is a great display tool to improve the brain/bone
interface which helps with gray/white matter differentiation without adding additional
reconstruction time.There are three levels of Gray Scale Enhancement, G1, G2 and G3. G1
applies the least amount of enhancement and G3 applies the most.
The GSE filter selected is applied to all images in the series when the next or prior image is
selected.
1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Routine Display].

3. Click [GSE].

A pop up window appears.

4. Click [G1, G2 or G3].

Start with G1. If you want more enhancement, try G2 or G3.
There should be a noticeable difference between the gray and white matter of the
brain.
5. Click [Off] to turn enhancement off.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-8

6. Click [Cancel] to cancel out of GSE pop up window.

Quick Steps: Improve the Brain/Bone Interface

1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Routine Display].
3. Click [GSE].
4. Click [G1, G2 or G3].
5. Click [Off] to turn enhancement off.
6. Click [Cancel] to cancel out of GSE pop up window.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-9

Restore an Image to its Original State

Display Normal can be used to reset the image display to its original size and orientation.
This feature removes all filters, magnification factors, flip/rotate and graphics such as User
Annotation from selected images.
1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Routine Display].

3. Click [Display Normal].

Quick Steps: Restore an Image to its Original State

1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Routine Display].
3. Click [Display Normal].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-10

Reverse the Video

Inverse Video changes the blacks to white, creating a negative image.
This is applied to all viewports.
1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Display Preferences].

3. Click [Inverse Video].

Inverse video changes the bone and contrast to black and air to white.
4. Click [Inverse Video] again to turn feature off.

Quick Steps: Reverse the Video

1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Display Preferences].
3. Click [Inverse Video].
4. Click [Inverse Video] again to turn feature off.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-11

Apply Mattes to an Image

The Matte function eliminates unwanted information on or around an image. There are two
types of matte, rectangular and elliptical. The size can be easily adjusted.
In Exam Rx, this feature can only be accessed from the Accelerator Line.
1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. On the Accelerator Line, type ematte for an elliptical matte or rmatte for a rectangular
matte and click Enter.
An elliptical or rectangular matte appears on the image in primary focus.

Quick Steps: Apply Mattes to an Image

1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. On the Accelerator Line, type ematte for an elliptical matte or rmatte for a rectangular
matte and click Enter.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-12

How Do I...

This section provides the step-by-step instructions for manipulating images in the Image
Works Desktop. Specifically, it describes how to:
• Change the Orientation of an Image
• Make Images Sharper or Smoother
• Improve the Brain/Bone Interface
• Restore an Image to its Original State
• Apply Mattes to an Image
• Create a Gray Scale Presentation State Object (GSPS)
• View a Gray Scale Presentation State Object (GSPS)
NOTE: These features can be accessed from either the Viewer or Mini Viewer in the Image
Works desktop, or the Accelerator Line Commands refer to Appendix A.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-13

Change the Orientation of an Image

Use this procedure to flip an image left to right, top to bottom, or both at the same time. You
can also rotate to the right or to the left 90 degrees.
The flip or rotate selected is applied to all images in the series.
1. While in the viewer or mini-viewer, put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Flip/Rotate].

A pop up window appears with four choices.

3. Select the first set of arrows to flip image left to right, select the second set of arrows to
flip image top to bottom.
Flip left to right is useful when the patient is lying prone on the table for the exam.
4. Select the third arrow to rotate image counter-clockwise or select the bottom arrow to
rotate image clockwise.
The rotate feature is useful if the patient is lying on their side on the table, as in a
biopsy procedure.
5. Click [Display Normal] to return images to their original orientation.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-14

Quick Steps: Change the Orientation of an Image

1. While in the viewer or mini-viewer, put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Flip/Rotate].
3. Select the first set of arrows to flip image left to right, select the second set of arrows
to flip image top to bottom.
4. Select the third arrow to rotate image counter-clockwise or select the bottom arrow to
rotate image clockwise.
5. Click [Display Normal] to return images to their original orientation.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-15

Make Images Sharper or Smoother

Using the Image Filters feature is a great way to enhance anatomical structures without
adding additional reconstruction time.
The Edge Enhancement filters sharpen the image. There are four levels of Edge
Enhancement, E1, E2, E3 and Lung. E1 applies the least amount of enhancement and E3 and
Lung apply the most.
There are also three Smoothing filters, S1, S2 and S3, which are used when filming soft
tissue windows to decrease the appearance of noisy images or enhance low contrast areas.
S1 applies the least amount of smoothing and S3 applies the most. When these filters are
used, the images is annotated with S1, S2 or S3.
The filter selected is applied to all images in the series when next and prior image are used
from the keyboard.
1. While in the viewer or mini-viewer, put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Image Enhance].

A pop up menu appears with all of your enhancement choices.

3. Under Filters, click [E1, E2 or E3] for edge enhancement.

Edge enhancement is useful when filming bone windows.
4. Under Filters, click [Lu] for lung enhancement.
This is designed specifically to use when filming lung windows.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-16

5. Under Filters, click [S1, S2 or S3] for smoothing.

The smooth enhancements are used for filming soft tissue windows when there is a
need to decrease the appearance of noise in an image.
It also may be useful when there are bone artifact streaks on an image such as in the
hip and shoulder areas.
Enhance low contrast areas.
6. Click [Display Normal] to turn enhancement off.

Quick Steps: Make Images Sharper or Smoother

1. While in the viewer or mini-viewer, put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Image Enhance].
3. Under Filters, click [E1, E2 or E3] for edge enhancement.
4. Under Filters, click [Lu] for lung enhancement.
5. Under Filters, click [S1, S2 or S3] for smoothing.
6. Click [Display Normal] to turn enhancement off.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-17

Improve the Brain/Bone Interface

Using Gray Scale Enhancement (GSE) is a great display tool to improve the brain/bone
interface which helps with gray/white matter differentiation without adding additional
reconstruction time.There are three levels of Gray Scale Enhancement, G1, G2 and G3. G1
applies the least amount of enhancement and G3 applies the most.
The GSE filter selected is applied to all images in the series.
1. While in the viewer or mini-viewer, put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Image Enhance].

A pop up menu appears with all of your enhancement choices.

3. Under Gray Scale Enhancements, click [G1, G2 or G3].

Start with G1. If you want more enhancement, try G2 or G3.
There should be a noticeable difference between the gray and white matter of the
brain.
4. Click [Display Normal] to turn enhancement off.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-18

Quick Steps: Improve the Brain/Bone Interface

1. While in the viewer or mini-viewer, put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Image Enhance].
3. Under Gray Scale Enhancements, click [G1, G2 or G3].
4. Click [Display Normal] to turn enhancement off.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-19

Restore an Image to its Original State

Display Normal can be used to reset the display to the normal or original size and
orientation.
1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Display Normal].

Quick Steps: Restore an Image to its Original State

1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Display Normal].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-20

Apply Mattes to an Image

The Matte function eliminates unwanted information on or around an image. There are two
types of matte, rectangular and elliptical. The size can be easily adjusted.
1. While in the viewer or mini-viewer, put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Rect. Matte].

A rectangular matte appears on your image.

3. Click and drag on the blue crosshair in the upper left corner of the matte to resize it.
4. Click and drag anywhere outside of the matte to re-position it.
Type Prop A on the Accelerator Line to place the matte on all images in the current
series.
5. Click [Erase All] to remove the matte.

NOTE: Using the accelerator line, you may type the command ematte and press Enter to
use an elliptical matte instead of rectangular.

Quick Steps: Apply Mattes to an Image

1. While in the viewer or mini-viewer, put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Rect. Matte].
3. Click and drag on the blue crosshair in the upper left corner of the matte to resize it.
4. Click and drag anywhere outside of the matte to re-position it.
5. Click [Erase All] to remove the matte.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-21

Create a Gray Scale Presentation State Object (GSPS)

GSPS saves image range, WW, WL, Roam, Zoom, rotate, Image Flip and Image graphics such
as Measure distance, ROI, Image Annotation. The GSPS object can then be networked to a
remote host that supports DICOM GSPS. GSPS Objects can also be displayed on the CT
scanner. GSPS object can only be created and viewed in the Image Works desktop.
This feature can only be accessed from the Accelerator Line.
1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Adjust the image to the desired presentation.
a) Set WW and WL
b) Image Roam
c) Image Zoom
d) Image Flip
e) Set rotate
f) Add graphics such as ROI, Measure distance and Image annotation
3. On the Accelerator Line, type ss and click Enter.
This saves the presentation of the image.
A GSPS object is now stored to the Image data base.
The GSPS series is 10,000 plus the original series.
Figure 28-1

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-22

Quick Steps: Create a Gray Scale Presentation State Object (GSPS)

1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Adjust the image to the desired presentation.
a) Set WW and WL
b) Image Roam
c) Image Zoom
d) Image Flip
e) Set rotate
f) Add graphics such as ROI, Measure distance and Image annotation
3. On the Accelerator Line, type ss and click Enter.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-23

View a Gray Scale Presentation State Object (GSPS)

1. Hilight the GSPS object in the Browser
2. Select [Viewer].
a) The CPI (Consistent Presentation of Images) viewer is displayed.
b) Use page up and down to page through the images.

c) No further manipulations can be done on the GSPS object.

3. Use the pull down to change the viewer format.
4. Select the ± CPI object buttons to view additional GSPS objects in the series.
A new GSPS object will be created for each different rotation.

Quick Steps: View a Gray Scale Presentation State Object (GSPS)

1. Hilight the GSPS object in the Browser
2. Select [Viewer].
3. Use the pull down to change the viewer format.
4. Select the ± CPI object buttons to view additional GSPS objects in the series.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 28-24

Chapter 29
Image Addition/Subtraction

Introduction
This chapter explains how to set up image addition and subtraction. It contains the
step-by-step instructions to help you learn how to:
• Add Images Together to Create a New Image
• Subtract Images to Create a New Image
• Combine Images from Different Series to Create a New Series
• Use Existing Images to Create a New Image Using Only the Maximum CT Number
• Use Existing Images to Create a New Image Using Only the Minimum CT Number

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 29-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to successfully complete image addition and
subtraction. Some of the concepts you need to understand are:
• Image Addition
• Image Subtraction
• Maximum Pixel Value Extraction
• Minimum Pixel Extraction
• Binding Series
• Accept Negative Pixels
• The Difference Between "Proc" and "Comb"
• Ratio Slider Bar

Image Addition
Image Addition is an operation that consists of adding image intensity values pixel by pixel.
This would be useful for adding thin slices together to get a thicker slice.

Image Subtraction
Image Subtraction is an operation that consists of subtracting image intensity values pixel
by pixel. This could be useful to evaluate contrasted vessels. Remember, patient movement
and breathing between the images can affect the quality of the subtraction.

Maximum Pixel Value Extraction

Maximum Pixel Value Extraction is an operation that consists of finding maximum image
intensity values pixel by pixel. This could be useful for contrasted vessels or calcifications.

Minimum Pixel Extraction

Minimum Pixel Value Extraction is an operation that consists of finding minimum image
intensity values pixel by pixel. This could be useful to evaluate soft tissue.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 29-2

Binding Series
Binding Series is a new series that can be created which consists of copies of selected
images from one or more existing series. This could be useful if you had images in two
separate series and wanted to have them in one series to perform 3D or Reformat.
NOTE: Save State information is not maintained in the new series generated with Binding
Series.

Accept Negative Pixels

The Accept Negative Pixels function is available for either type of subtraction. This function,
when enabled, allows negative pixel values in the resulting image. If this function is not
enabled, all negative pixel values are set to zero.

The Difference Between "Proc" and "Comb"

The series resulting from operations in the Image Combination command window are
distinguished from other series in the browser via one of the following two indications in the
browser series list type column:
• "Proc" appears in the browser series list type column if the images in the series are the
result of processing pairs of images have identical locations in the patient’s body.
• "Comb" appears in the browser series list type column if the images in the series are the
result of a combination of images have different locations in the patient’s body.
NOTE: Since "Proc" series contains images resulting from processing pairs of images having
identical locations in the patient’s body, such series can be used like any other series
of acquisition images, i.e., geometrical measurements, reformatting, 3D
reconstructions, etc.
NOTE: Since "Comb" series contains images resulting from a combination of images having
different locations in the patient’s body, the absolute anatomical coordinates
accompanying these series (shown both in the browser and on the displayed images)
are not accurate. Only relative geometrical measurements (i.e., distance, angle, or
area) made within a resulting image are accurate.

Ratio Slider Bar

The Ratio Slider Bar is available during addition and subtraction when both of the Select Set
buttons are used. Dragging the slider bar to the left increases the pixel weighting of the
image or images on the left Select Set button. Dragging the slider bar to the right increases
the pixel weighting of the image or images on the right Select Set button. The Slider Bar
defaults to the middle to apply equal weighting.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 29-3

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for image addition and subtraction.
Specifically, it describes how to:
• Add Images Together to Create a New Image
• Subtract Images to Create a New Image
• Combine Images from Different Series to Create a New Series
• Use Existing Images to Create a New Image Using Only the Maximum CT Number
• Use Existing Images to Create a New Image Using Only the Minimum CT Number
NOTE: The Add/Sub feature can be accessed through the Image Works desktop from the
browser or from [Image Analysis] in the Viewer or Mini Viewer. The detailed steps in
this chapter assume that [Add/Sub] is accessed from the browser.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 29-4

Add Images Together to Create a New Image

These steps assume you are using the browser in Image Works. This also assumes that you
are using both Select Set buttons.
If only one set is selected, each operation performed produces ONE resulting image.
If two sets are selected, images in the two sets are paired according to physical location in
the patient’s body. Unpaired images in either set are ignored. Each operation performed
produces ONE resulting image PER PAIR.
The images resulting from each operation are generated in the exam defined by the left
Select Set button.
1. From the display monitor, click [Image Works].
This is located in the upper left corner of the display monitor.
2. On the right side of the browser, click [Add/Sub].
This opens the Image Combination menu.

3. From the browser, select the image or images you want to use.
You can do this by clicking and dragging over a range of images for multiple images
or just clicking on one image for a single image.
4. Select from the Image Combination menu, [Select Set] on the left.
The [Select Set] button changes to annotate the exam/series/image or images that
you selected.
To clear the selection and make changes, use [Clear Selection].
5. Again, from the browser, select the image or images you want to use.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 29-5

6. Click [Select Set] on the right.

The [Select Set] button changes to annotate the exam/series/image or images that
you selected.

To clear the selection and make changes, use [Clear Selection].

7. Click [+].
This tells the program that you want to add the series or images together.
8. In the Save Series Box, type in the new series number.
Place your mouse in the area and type the new number.
You can also just click [New Save Series] and the number increases by one each
time.
Make sure you do this before you click the equal sign.

9. Click [=].
This performs the function.
The new series is located on the browser.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 29-6

Quick Steps: Add Images Together to Create a New Image

1. From the display monitor, click [Image Works].
2. On the right side of the browser, click [Add/Sub].
3. From the browser, select the image or images you want to use.
4. Select from the Image Combination menu, [Select Set] on the left.
5. Again, from the browser, select the image or images you want to use.
6. Click [Select Set] on the right.
7. Click [+].
8. In the Save Series Box, type in the new series number.
9. Click [=].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 29-7

Subtract Images to Create a New Image

These steps assume you are using the browser in Image Works. This also assumes you are
using both Select Set buttons.
If only one set is selected, each operation performed produces ONE resulting image.
If two sets are selected, images in the two sets are paired according to physical location in
the patient’s body. Unpaired images in either set are ignored. Each operation performed
produces ONE resulting image PER PAIR.
The images resulting from each operation are generated in the exam defined by the left
Select Set button.

1. From the display monitor, click [Image Works].

This is located in the upper left corner of the display monitor.
2. On the right side of the browser, click [Add/Sub].
This opens the Image Combination menu.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 29-8

6. Click [Select Set] on the right.

The [Select Set] button changes to annotate the exam/series/image or images that
you selected.

To clear the selection and make changes, use [Clear Selection].

7. Click [-].
This tells the program you want to subtract the images.
8. Click [Accept Negative Pixels].
This function, when enabled, allows negative pixel values in the resulting image. If
this function is not enabled, all negative pixel values are set to zero.
9. In the Save Series Box, type in the new series number.
Place your mouse in the area and type the new number.
You can also just click [New Save Series] and the number increases by one each
time.
Make sure you do this before you click the equal sign.

10. Click [=].

This performs the function.
The new series is located on the browser.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 29-9

Quick Steps: Subtract Images to Create a New Image

1. From the display monitor, click [Image Works].
2. On the right side of the browser, click [Add/Sub].
3. From the browser, select the image or images you want to use.
4. Select from the Image Combination menu, [Select Set] on the left.
5. Again, from the browser, select the image or images you want to use.
6. Click [Select Set] on the right.
7. Click [-].
8. Click [Accept Negative Pixels].
9. In the Save Series Box, type in the new series number.
10. Click [=].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 29-10

Combine Images from Different Series to Create a New

Series
These steps assume you are using the browser in Image Works. This also assumes that you
are using both Select Set buttons.
1. From the display monitor, click [Image Works].
This is located in the upper left corner of the display monitor.
2. On the right side of the browser, click [Add/Sub].
This opens the Image Combination menu.

3. From the browser, select the series you want to use.

4. Select from the Image Combination menu, [Select Set] on the left.
The [Select Set] button changes to annotate the exam/series/image or images that
you selected.
To clear the selection and make changes, use [Clear Selection].
5. Again, from the browser, select the second series you want to use.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 29-11

6. Click [Select Set] on the right.

The [Select Set] button changes to annotate the exam/series/image or images that
you selected.

To clear the selection and make changes, use [Clear Selection].

7. Click [Bind].
This tells the program you want to combine the series.
8. In the Save Series Box, type in the new series number.
Place your mouse in the area and type the new number.
You can also just click [New Save Series] and the number increases by one each
time.
Make sure you do this before you click the equal sign.

9. Click [=].
This performs the function.
The new series is located on the browser.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 29-12

Quick Steps: Combine Images from Different Series to Create a New

Series
1. From the display monitor, click [Image Works].
2. On the right side of the browser, click [Add/Sub].
3. From the browser, select the series you want to use.
4. Select from the Image Combination menu, [Select Set] on the left.
5. Again, from the browser, select the second series you want to use.
6. Click [Select Set] on the right.
7. Click [Bind].
8. In the Save Series Box, type in the new series number.
9. Click [=].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 29-13

Use Existing Images to Create a New Image Using Only

the Maximum CT Number
These steps assume you are using the browser in Image Works. This also assumes that you
are using both Select Set buttons.
1. From the display monitor, click [Image Works].
This is located in the upper left corner of the display monitor.
2. On the right side of the browser, click [Add/Sub].
This opens the Image Combination menu.

3. From the browser, select the images you want to use.

4. Select from the Image Combination menu, [Select Set] on the left.
The [Select Set] button changes to annotate the exam/series/image or images that
you selected.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 29-14

To clear the selection and make changes, use [Clear Selection].

5. Click [Max].
This is an operation that consist of finding maximum image intensity pixel by pixel.
This could be useful for contrasted vessels or calcifications.
6. In the Save Series Box, type in the new series number.
Place your mouse in the area and type the new number.
You can also just click [New Save Series] and the number increases by one each
time.
Make sure you do this before you click the equal sign.

7. Click [=].
This performs the function.
The new series is located on the browser.

Quick Steps: Use Existing Images to Create a New Image Using Only
the Maximum CT Number
1. From the display monitor, click [Image Works].
2. On the right side of the browser, click [Add/Sub].
3. From the browser, select the images you want to use.
4. Select from the Image Combination menu, [Select Set] on the left.
5. Click [Max].
6. In the Save Series Box, type in the new series number.
7. Click [=].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 29-15

Use Existing Images to Create a New Image Using Only

the Minimum CT Number
These steps assume you are using the browser in Image Works. This also assumes that you
are using both Select Set buttons.
1. From the display monitor, click [Image Works].
This is located in the upper left corner of the display monitor.
2. On the right side of the browser, click [Add/Sub].
This opens the Image Combination menu.

3. From the browser, select the images you want to use.

4. Click from the Image Combination menu, [Select Set] on the left.
The [Select Set] button changes to annotate the exam/series/image or images that
you selected.

To clear the selection and make changes, use [Clear Selection].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 29-16

5. Click [Min].
This operation consists of finding minimum image intensity pixel by pixel.
This could be useful to evaluate soft tissue.
6. In the Save Series Box, type in the new series number.
Place your mouse in the area and type the new number.
You can also just click [New Save Series] and the number increases by one each
time.
Make sure you do this before you click the equal sign.

7. Click [=].
This performs the function.
The new series is located on the browser.

Quick Steps: Use Existing Images to Create a New Image Using Only
the Minimum CT Number
1. From the display monitor, click [Image Works].
2. On the right side of the browser, click [Add/Sub].
3. From the browser, select the images you want to use.
4. Click from the Image Combination menu, [Select Set] on the left.
5. Click [Min].
6. In the Save Series Box, type in the new series number.
7. Click [=].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 29-17

Chapter 30
Magnifying Images

Introduction
This chapter explains Magnifying Images. It contains the step-by-step instructions to help
you learn how to:
• Move the Image Around on the Screen in Exam Rx
• Make the Image Smaller or Larger Real Time in Exam Rx
• Specify a Zoom Factor in Exam Rx
• Auto Enlarge and Auto Minify
• Move the Image Around the Screen in Image Works
• Make the Image Smaller or Larger Real Time in Image Works
NOTE: Because the features Roam, Zoom and Mag Factor are located in Exam Rx and
Images works. This chapter details their use in each area separately beginning with
Exam Rx.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 30-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to successfully change the image size in a
viewport using magnify. Some of the concepts you need to understand are:
• Auto Enlarge
• Auto Minify

Auto Enlarge
Auto Enlarge is always on and cannot be turned off. This allows the system to automatically
display an image acquired in a 256 matrix the same size as one acquired in a 512 matrix.
The reconned matrix size of an image specifies the number of pixels, which represent the
image. Images can be reconstructed in a 256 or 512 matrix, but the image can be displayed
in a variety of viewport sizes. When the image recon matrix size is different than the
viewport matrix size the image is automatically minified or enlarged to “fit the image to the
viewport”.

Auto Minify
Auto Minify is always on and cannot be turned off. This allows the system to automatically
size images being used in a multiple image display to fit in the selected format. Viewport
size determines the number of pixels utilized to display the image. The system has a variety
of viewport matrix sizes 1024, 768, 512, 256 and 128. If the viewport size differs from the
images recon matrix size the system automatically minifies the image to fit the viewport.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 30-2

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for magnifying images in Exam Rx.
Specifically, it describes:
• Move the Image Around on the Screen in Exam Rx
• Make the Image Smaller or Larger Real Time in Exam Rx
• Specify a Zoom Factor in Exam Rx
• Auto Enlarge and Auto Minify

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 30-3

Move the Image Around on the Screen in Exam Rx

Your system has a feature which allows you to keep images centered in a viewport for
filming or viewing purposes. This means that if a patient has an anatomical variance i.e.
scoliosis, has moved slightly, or if offset values were incorrectly entered, you are able to
move the image within the viewport. Once an image is moved, all the images in the series is
displayed in the same adjusted position. You must set the right mouse key for this function
to work.
1. On the display monitor, click on the viewport where the image is located.
You see that viewport outlined in a blue border.
2. On the display monitor, click [Routine Display].

A pop up window appears.

3. From the pop up window, click [Roam].

This changes the right mouse key function to Roam.

4. Click and drag on the image with the right mouse and place the image in the desired
location.
NOTE: If the Roam button is already highlighted in blue, the right mouse key is set for Roam
and you do not need to reselect it.

Quick Steps: Move the Image Around on the Screen in Exam Rx

1. On the display monitor, click on the viewport where the image is located.
2. On the display monitor, click [Routine Display].
3. From the pop up window, click [Roam].
4. Click and drag on the image with the right mouse and place the image in the desired
location.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 30-4

Make the Image Smaller or Larger Real Time in Exam Rx

Your system has a feature that allows you to fit your images in the viewport by making the
images larger or smaller as needed. Once you have made an image larger or smaller, all of
the images in the series are displayed in the same adjusted size. You must set the right
mouse key for this function to work.
1. On the display monitor, click on the viewport where the image is located.
You see that viewport outlined in a blue border.
2. On the display monitor, click [Routine Display].

A pop up window appears.

3. From the pop up window, click [Zoom].

This changes the right mouse key function to Zoom.

4. Click and drag the right mouse in the image to set the desired size. The magnification
factor is annotated on each image in the upper right side with the initials MF (Mag
Factor) and the value from 0.5 up to 8.0.
NOTE: If the Zoom button is already highlighted in blue, the right mouse key is set for Zoom
and you do not need to reselect it. Once you have made the image larger or smaller,
you can click on Roam and re-center the image if needed.

Quick Steps: Make the Image Smaller or Larger Real Time in Exam Rx
1. On the display monitor, click on the viewport where the image is located.
2. On the display monitor, click [Routine Display].
3. From the pop up window, click [Zoom].
4. Click and drag the right mouse in the image to set the desired size. The magnification
factor is annotated on each image in the upper right side with the initials MF (Mag
Factor) and the value from 0.5 up to 8.0.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 30-5

Specify a Zoom Factor in Exam Rx

Any image can be magnified after it has been reconstructed. In addition to using the Zoom
button, you can enter a specific magnification value to be applied to your image(s). Once a
magnification has been applied, all of the images in the series retains that magnification.
1. On the display monitor, click in the viewport with the image to be magnified.
You see that viewport outlined with a blue border.
2. From the display monitor, click [Routine Display].

A pop up window appears.

3. From the pop up window, click [Explicit Magnify].

A pop up window appears with preset magnification factors and an area where a
factor can be entered.
4. From the pop up window, select or enter the desired magnification factor.
The system displays magnification factors of 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, and 2.0. There is also a
space where any value within the range of 0.5 up to 8.0 may be entered in 0.1
increments. The image is annotated in the upper right corner with MF (Mag Factor)
and the value used, i.e., MF1.5.

Quick Steps: Specify a Zoom Factor in Exam Rx

1. On the display monitor, click in the viewport with the image to be magnified.
2. From the display monitor, click [Routine Display].
3. From the pop up window, click [Explicit Magnify].
4. From the pop up window, select or enter the desired magnification factor.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 30-6

Auto Enlarge and Auto Minify

The Auto Enlarge and Auto Minify features are always on and cannot be turned off. You can
see the Auto Enlarge and Auto Minify buttons to verify their active status.
1. On the display monitor, click [Display Preferences].

A pop up window appears with the Auto Enlarge and Auto Minify buttons highlighted
in blue.
NOTE: The functionality (On/Off) of these buttons is not implemented on the system. The
functions of Auto Enlarge and Auto Minify are implemented in the system. refer to the
What Do I Need to Know About... section of this chapter.

Quick Steps: Auto Enlarge and Auto Minify

1. On the display monitor, click [Display Preferences].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 30-7

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for magnifying images in Image Works.
Specifically, it describes:
• Move the Image Around the Screen in Image Works
• Make the Image Smaller or Larger Real Time in Image Works

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 30-8

Move the Image Around the Screen in Image Works

Your system has a feature which allows you to keep images centered in a viewport for
filming or viewing purposes. This means that if a patient has an anatomical variance i.e.
scoliosis, has moved slightly, or if offset values were incorrectly entered, you are able to
move the image within the viewport. Once an image is moved, all the following images are
displayed in the same adjusted position. You must set the right mouse key for this function
to work.
1. On the display monitor, click [Image Works].
This opens the browser menu unless the Viewer or Mini Viewer has been used
previously and not closed. If the Viewer or Mini Viewer is open, skip to step 3.
2. Next to the Browser Menu, click [Viewer] or [Mini Viewer].

The Viewer or Mini Viewer opens. There is a tools area along the left hand side of the
screen.
3. From the tools, select the button with the moving hand symbol.

This changes the right mouse key function to Roam.

4. Click and drag the right mouse in the image and place it in the desired location.
NOTE: If the button is already depressed, the right mouse key is already set for Roam and
you do not need to reselect it.

Quick Steps: Move the Image Around the Screen in Image Works
1. On the display monitor, click [Image Works].
2. Next to the Browser Menu, click [Viewer] or [Mini Viewer].
3. From the tools, select the button with the moving hand symbol.
4. Click and drag the right mouse in the image and place it in the desired location.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 30-9

Make the Image Smaller or Larger Real Time in Image

Works
Your system has a feature which allows you to fit your images in the viewport by making the
images larger or smaller as needed. Once you have made an image larger or smaller, all of
the following images are displayed in the same adjusted size.
1. On the display monitor, click [Image Works].
This opens the browser menu unless the Viewer or Mini Viewer has been used
previously and not closed. If the Viewer or Mini Viewer is open skip to step 3.
2. Next to the Browser Menu, click [Viewer] or [Mini Viewer].

The Viewer or Mini Viewer opens. There is a tools area along the left hand side of the
screen.
3. Click in the viewport with the image to be magnified.
You see the viewport highlighted in blue.
4. Choose from three options for magnification of images. Enter value, click and drag the
slide bar, or click on the arrowheads on either side of the bar.

The range for magnification is 0.5 up to 8.0 in 0.1 increments. The image is annotated
in the upper right corner with MF (Mag Factor) and the value used i.e. MF1.5.

Quick Steps: Make the Image Smaller or Larger Real Time in Image
Works
1. On the display monitor, click [Image Works].
2. Next to the Browser Menu, click [Viewer] or [Mini Viewer].
3. Click in the viewport with the image to be magnified.
4. Choose from three options for magnification of images. Enter value, click and drag the
slide bar, or click on the arrowheads on either side of the bar.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 30-10

Chapter 31
Measuring Structures Within an
Image

Introduction
This chapter explains how to measure structures within an image. It contains the
step-by-step instructions to help you learn how to:
In Exam Rx:
• Get Density Readings
• Measure From Point to Point
• Overlay a Grid
• Report the Cursor Location and the Pixel Value
• Measure Density Readings on Multiple Images
In Image Works:
• Get Density Readings
• Measure From Point to Point
• Overlay a Grid
• Extended CT Number Range
– Enable Extended CT Number Range
– Disable Extended CT Number Range
NOTE: Most of the features listed here are available for use in the Exam Rx and the Image
works desktops. Because of this, the chapter is divided into two parts. The first part
lists how to perform all applicable functions from the Exam Rx desktop. The second
part lists how to perform all applicable functions from the Image Works desktop.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 31-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents concepts necessary to understand ways to manipulate images. Some
of the concepts you need to understand:
• ROI
• Expanded CT Number Range
• MIROI

ROI
ROI stands for Region of Interest. It is a measuring tool that allows you to measure
Hounsfield units (HU) and report a mean and standard deviation. This measurement is an
average of all pixels in the defined area. The area (size) of the ROI is also reported. The size of
the ROI can be adjusted, as well as the location.
The images has a minimum CT number of -1024 HU and a maximum CT number of +3071
HU.

Expanded CT Number Range

The expanded range could allow, for example, a physician to choose a window level to
better image/view the structures near metal implants of post surgical patients. A more
accurate rendering of the CT number value may improve dose calculations in area where
metal is present for radiation treatment planning.
The maximum pixel values for Extended CT Number Range is +/- 31,743.
NOTE: This feature can be enabled or disabled. For information on how to do this refer to:
Enable Extended CT Number Range or Disable Extended CT Number Range.

MIROI
MIROI stands for Multiple Image Region of Interest. It is a tool that allows you to graphically
represent density changes in a single area over time. This tool is useful for graphing a
change in contrast enhancement over time through a designated area.
MIROI requires multiple images from a single series with the same location, gantry tilt, pixel
size, and DFOV center. Once these scans are taken, the MIROI feature can be used.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 31-2

How Do I...

This section provides the step-by-step instructions for measuring structures within an image
in Exam RX desktop. Specifically, it describes how to:
• Get Density Readings
• Measure From Point to Point
• Overlay a Grid
• Report the Cursor Location and the Pixel Value
• Measure Density Readings on Multiple Images
NOTE: Some of these features are also available from the Accelerator Line Commands.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 31-3

Get Density Readings

Use this feature to get a CT number reading. The reading, along with an area measurement,
reports out on the bottom right corner of the image.
Once the ROI is selected, it is applied to the image in primary focus.
Any number of measurements can be made and displayed on the image, but only the last
three results are displayed on the screen in the lower right corner. If you wish to see
information for all measurements, display the Text Page ROI by typing TPR on the
Accelerator Line.
1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Measurements].

3. Click [Box ROI], [Ellipse ROI], or [Trace ROI].

The selected ROI appears on the primary image.

Box ROI is a square, Ellipse ROI is a circular shape, and Trace ROI allows you to trace
the exact shape you want.
The ROI that appears is blue, meaning that it is active. If another ROI is selected, the
cursor that appears is active and the first cursor turns white. Selecting the white
cursor makes it active again.
4. For Box ROI or Ellipse ROI, skip to Step 5. For Trace ROI, move the solid blue box to the
point you would like to start the trace. Press and hold Shift and then click and drag with
the left mouse key to define the area for the trace.
5. To change the size of the ROI, click and drag on the small box in the upper right corner of
the ROI. You may also click in the center of the ROI and drag it to a different location.
The mean, standard deviation and area of the ROI is reported in the lower right
corner of the image.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 31-4

6. Click [Erase] to erase the active (blue) ROI.

If there is more than one ROI on the image, continue selecting Erase.
NOTE: Ellipse ROI may also be selected from Routine Display.

Quick Steps: Get Density Readings

1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Measurements].
3. Click [Box ROI], [Ellipse ROI], or [Trace ROI].
4. For Box ROI or Ellipse ROI, skip to Step 5. For Trace ROI, move the solid blue box to the
point you would like to start the trace. Press and hold Shift and then click and drag
with the left mouse key to define the area for the trace.
5. To change the size of the ROI, click and drag on the small box in the upper right corner
of the ROI. You may also click in the center of the ROI and drag it to a different location.
6. Click [Erase] to erase the active (blue) ROI.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 31-5

Measure From Point to Point

Measure Distance calculates the linear distance between two points on an image. It is used
to measure any anatomy or pathology on an image, and it also lists the angle of the line
from vertical.
Any number of measurements can be made and displayed on the image, but only the last
three results is displayed on the screen in the lower right corner. If you wish to see
information for all measurements, display the Text Page ROI by typing TPR on the
Accelerator Line.
1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Routine Display] or [Measurements].

Measure Distance can be selected from either Routine Display or Measurements.

3. Click [Measure Distance].

A blue line with two small boxes on each end appears on the image in primary focus.
The line is blue, meaning that it is active. If Measure Distance is selected again, the
line that appears is active and the first line turns white. Selecting the white line
makes it active again.
4. Click and drag with the left mouse key on either of the small boxes and move them to
the desired start and end points.
Once the start and end points are set, there is a real time readout of the distance and
angle in the lower right corner of the image.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 31-6

5. Click [Erase] to erase the active (blue) Measure Distance line.

If more than one line is on the image, continue selecting erase.

Quick Steps: Measure From Point to Point

1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Routine Display] or [Measurements].
3. Click [Measure Distance].
4. Click and drag with the left mouse key on either of the small boxes and move them to
the desired start and end points.
5. Click [Erase] to erase the active (blue) Measure Distance line.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 31-7

Overlay a Grid
When the Grid function is selected, a grid is displayed. It can be used to measure anatomy or
pathology on an image. it can also be used to check the patient’s relationship to isocenter
which is useful for BMD studies. The grid measurements are in centimeters and the size of
the grid changes with the display field of view.
1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Routine Display] or [Measurements].

3. Click [Grid On/Off].

A grid appears on the primary image.

4. To move the grid, click and drag from the center point.
5. To remove the grid, click [Grid On/Off] again or [Erase].

Quick Steps: Overlay a Grid

1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Routine Display] or [Measurements].
3. Click [Grid On/Off].
4. To move the grid, click and drag from the center point.
5. To remove the grid, click [Grid On/Off] again or [Erase].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 31-8

Report the Cursor Location and the Pixel Value

When Continuous Report Cursor is turned on, your mouse crosshair cursor continuously
reports specific values from the image in real time. It reports the Right/Left and
Anterior/Posterior locations of the cursor as well as the Superior/Inferior location and the
Value (Hounsfield Unit) of the one exact pixel underneath the cursor.
1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Display Preferences].

3. Click [Continuous Report Cursor].

As the mouse cursor is moved around the image, the values for that cursor is
reported on the image.
You see an R or L for the Right/Left location, an A or P for the Anterior/Posterior
location, an S or I for the Superior/Inferior location, and a V for the value of the
Hounsfield Unit at the cursor location.
S-I is reported differently for tilted and non-tilted images.
Non-tilted images report S-I at isocenter, which is the same location reported on the
image.
For tilted images, S-I is reported as the center of the image which changes based on
where the cursor is located on the image. S-I only is equal to the image annotation if
the cursor is at isocenter.
This cannot be filmed.
4. To turn off, click [Continuous Report Cursor] a second time.

Quick Steps: Report the Cursor Location and the Pixel Value
1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Display Preferences].
3. Click [Continuous Report Cursor].
4. To turn off, click [Continuous Report Cursor] a second time.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 31-9

Measure Density Readings on Multiple Images

MIROI stands for Multiple Image Region of Interest. It is a tool that allows you to graphically
represent density changes in a single area over time. This tool is useful for graphing a
change in contrast enhancement over time through a designated area.
MIROI requires multiple images from a single series with the same location, gantry tilt, pixel
size, and DFOV center. Once these scans are taken, the MIROI feature can be used.
1. Perform the test scans at one location with a small bolus of contrast.
20cc of contrast is an average dose. Also use a mini- prep delay of 5-10 seconds.
2. Click [Measurements].

3. Click [MIROI].

A pop up window appears.

4. For "Image Range" click [All], or type in the range of images desired for monitoring.
5. For "Scale for HU", click [Absolute] or [Relative].
Selecting Absolute gives you an actual Hounsfield Unit # for each ROI plotted on the
graph.
For Relative, the ROI measured for the first image is set to zero and then the change
from zero is plotted for the rest of the images.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 31-10

6. For "Define Region," select the type of ROI you would like to use (box, ellipse or trace).
Place the selected ROI over region of interest on image.
7. Click [OK].
A graph appears and shows a peak where the maximum contrast enhancement took
place.

8. To determine the prep delay needed for the actual exam, look at the peak on the graph.
You need to count the number of images it took get to that peak, the inter-scan delay
between each image, and the mini-prep delay used. Add those three things together to
determine the actual prep delay needed to produce images with maximum
enhancement.
9. Now set up images for the exam as needed, using the prep delay from the MIROI test.
The injection rate used for the exam should be the same as the one used for the
small test bolus.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 31-11

Quick Steps: Measure Density Readings on Multiple Images

1. Perform the test scans at one location with a small bolus of contrast.
2. Click [Measurements].
3. Click [MIROI].
4. For "Image Range" click [All], or type in the range of images desired for monitoring.
5. For "Scale for HU", click [Absolute] or [Relative].
6. For "Define Region," select the type of ROI you would like to use (box, ellipse or trace).
Place the selected ROI over region of interest on image.
7. Click [OK].
8. To determine the prep delay needed for the actual exam, look at the peak on the
graph. You need to count the number of images it took get to that peak, the inter-scan
delay between each image, and the mini-prep delay used. Add those three things
together to determine the actual prep delay needed to produce images with
maximum enhancement.
9. Now set up images for the exam as needed, using the prep delay from the MIROI test.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 31-12

How Do I...

This section provides the step-by-step instructions for measuring structures within an image
in the Image Works desktop. Specifically, it describes how to:
• Get Density Readings
• Measure From Point to Point
• Overlay a Grid
NOTE: Some of these features are also available from the Accelerator Line Commands.
NOTE: These features can be accessed from either the Viewer or Mini Viewer in the Image
Works desktop.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 31-13

Get Density Readings

A pop up window appears.

3. Click [Box ROI] which is the square, [Ellipse ROI] which is the circle, or [Trace ROI] which
is either one of the half circles.
The selected ROI appears on the primary image.
Box ROI is a square, Ellipse ROI is a circular shape, and Trace ROI allows you to trace
the exact shape you want.
The ROI that appears is blue, meaning that it is active. If another ROI is selected, the
cursor that appears is active and the first cursor turns white. Selecting the white
cursor makes it active again.
4. For Box ROI or Ellipse ROI, skip to Step 5. For Trace ROI, move the solid blue box to the
point you would like to start the trace. Press and hold Shift and then click and drag with
the left mouse key to define the area for the trace.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 31-14

5. To change the size of the ROI, click and drag on the small box in the upper right corner of
the ROI. You may also click in the center of the ROI and drag it to a different location.
The mean, standard deviation and area of the ROI is reported in the lower right
corner of the image.
6. Click [Erase All] to erase all annotation.

Quick Steps: Get Density Readings

1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Measure].
3. Click [Box ROI] which is the square, [Ellipse ROI] which is the circle, or [Trace ROI] which
is either one of the half circles.
4. For Box ROI or Ellipse ROI, skip to Step 5. For Trace ROI, move the solid blue box to the
point you would like to start the trace. Press and hold Shift and then click and drag
with the left mouse key to define the area for the trace.
5. To change the size of the ROI, click and drag on the small box in the upper right corner
of the ROI. You may also click in the center of the ROI and drag it to a different location.
6. Click [Erase All] to erase all annotation.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 31-15

Measure From Point to Point

Measure Distance calculates the linear distance between two points on an image. It is used
to measure any anatomy or pathology on an image, and it also lists the angle of the line
from vertical.
Any number of measurements can be made and displayed on the image, but only the last
three results are displayed on the screen in the lower right corner. If you wish to see
information for all measurements, display the Text Page ROI by typing TPR on the
Accelerator Line.
1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Measure].

A pop up window appears.

3. Select the line with the boxes on either end.

A blue line with two small boxes on each end appears on the image in primary focus.
The line is blue, meaning that it is active. If Measure is selected again, the line that
appears is active and the first line turns white. Selecting the white line makes it active
again.
4. Click and drag with the left mouse key on either of the small boxes and move them to
the desired start and end points.
Once the start and end points are set, there is a real time readout of the distance and
angle in the lower right corner of the image.
The system displays up to three measurement results at a time.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 31-16

5. Click [Erase All] to erase all annotation.

Quick Steps: Measure From Point to Point

1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Measure].
3. Select the line with the boxes on either end.
4. Click and drag with the left mouse key on either of the small boxes and move them to
the desired start and end points.
5. Click [Erase All] to erase all annotation.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 31-17

Overlay a Grid
When the Grid function is selected, a grid is displayed. It can be used to measure anatomy or
pathology on an image. It can also be used to check the patient’s relationship to isocenter,
which is useful for BMD studies. The grid measurements are in centimeters and the size of
the grid changes with the display field of view.
1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click (Grid).
A grid appears on the primary image.
3. To move the grid, click and drag from the center point.
4. To remove the grid, click (Grid) again.

Quick Steps: Overlay a Grid

1. Put the image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click (Grid).
3. To move the grid, click and drag from the center point.
4. To remove the grid, click (Grid) again.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 31-18

Extended CT Number Range

Enable Extended CT Number Range
Use this feature to turn the expanded CT number range on.
NOTE: Extended CT Number Range should not be used for CT Perfusion studies unless your
version is CT Perfusion is 2.6.6.
NOTE: Extended CT number range should not be used for BMD studies.
1. From the Image Works desktop, click [Turn On Extend HU] located on the Tool Chest.

2. Click [OK] on the Attention pop-up window.

NOTE: The system will automatically shutdown and restart after you click [OK].

Quick Steps: Enable Extended CT Number Range

1. From the Image Works desktop, click [Turn On Extend HU] located on the Tool Chest.
2. Click [OK] on the Attention pop-up window.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 31-19

Extended CT Number Range

Disable Extended CT Number Range
Use this feature to turn the expanded CT number range off.
1. From the Image Works desktop, click [Turn Off Extend HU] located on the Tool Chest.

2. Click [OK] on the Attention pop-up window.

NOTE: The system will automatically shutdown and restart after you click [OK].

Quick Steps: Disable Extended CT Number Range

1. From the Image Works desktop, click [Turn Off Extend HU] located on the Tool Chest.
2. Click [OK] on the Attention pop-up window.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 31-20

Chapter 32
Graphics, Text Pages and
Commands

Introduction
This chapter explains how to perform some basic tasks using graphics, text pages and other
commands. It contains the step-by-step instructions to help you learn how to:
• Annotate the Scout With Scan Lines
• Type Text on the Image
• Display the Exam Information
• Display the Parameters of a Scan Mode
• Hide or Show Graphics
• Remove Graphics From the Image
• Save an Image Screen
• Type in Specific Accelerator Line Commands
NOTE: Most of the features listed here are available for use in the Exam Rx and the Image
Works desktops. Because of this, the chapter is divided into two parts. The first part
lists how to perform all applicable functions from the Exam Rx desktop. The second
part lists how to perform all applicable functions from the Image Works desktop.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents some of the concepts necessary to understand ways to use graphics,
text pages and commands. Some of the concepts you need to understand are:
• Cross-referencing
• Screen Save
• Accelerator Line
• User Preferences

Cross-referencing
Cross-referencing is a feature which is used to correlate scanned locations on the scout.
You may select a scoutview and then choose to display lines on it which represent
previously scanned locations. This is useful to see which anatomy was covered in a
particular exam.

Screen Save
Screen Save is an electronic photograph of an image. Screen Save saves everything that is
on the image in primary focus. This includes any zoom, cursors, measurements, flip, or
annotation. You can use Screen Save to save images when anatomy or pathology has been
measured. The screen saved images are listed on the patient list browser as series number
99, and called SSave for the series type. When a screen saved image is displayed, the
window width and window level can be changed, but information cannot be removed.

Accelerator Line
The Accelerator Line, also known as the Command Line, allows commands to be typed
which can perform certain display functions. Typing these commands can act as a shortcut
to opening additional menus to access a function.

User Preferences
User Preferences is available for use in the Image Works desktop only. It allows you to
choose customized settings for annotation, tick marks, grid, right mouse button use, series
binding, square viewports and window/level presets. You may choose to apply your
selection for the present exam only, or you may choose to save your selection as a default.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-2

How Do I...

This section provides the step-by-step instructions for using graphics, text pages and
commands in the Exam RX desktop. Specifically, it describes how to:
• Annotate the Scout With Scan Lines
• Type Text on the Image
• Display the Exam Information
• Display the Parameters of a Scan Mode
• Hide or Show Graphics
• Remove Graphics From the Image
• Save an Image Screen
• Type in Specific Accelerator Line Commands
NOTE: These features can also be accessed from the accelerator line. For more information,
refer to: Accelerator Line Commands.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-3

Annotate the Scout With Scan Lines

Cross-referencing is a feature which is used to correlate scanned locations on the scout.
You may select a scoutview and then choose to display lines on it which represent
previously scanned locations. This is useful to see which anatomy was covered in a
particular exam.
1. Put the scoutview image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Routine Display].

3. Click [Cross Reference].

A pop up window appears which is titled Post Reference Lines.

4. On the pop up window, select which series to post on the scout by typing in the series
number.
5. Select which images to post.
Type in a range (i.e. 1-10). To use a range, you must deselect [All] and [First/Last].
Click [All] for all images in a series.
Click [First/Last] for the first and last images in a series.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-4

6. Next, type in the increment of the lines to be displayed if you selected a range of images
or [All] above.
Typing in 1 displays every line, 2 displays every other line, 3 displays every third line,
and so on.
Leaving the increment blank defaults to every line.
7. When all the fields are completed, click [OK] or [Cancel].
8. To erase the cross reference lines, click [Erase].

Quick Steps: Annotate the Scout With Scan Lines

1. Put the scoutview image of interest in primary focus.
2. Click [Routine Display].
3. Click [Cross Reference].
4. On the pop up window, select which series to post on the scout by typing in the series
number.
5. Select which images to post.
6. Next, type in the increment of the lines to be displayed if you selected a range of
images or [All] above.
7. When all the fields are completed, click [OK] or [Cancel].
8. To erase the cross reference lines, click [Erase].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-5

Type Text on the Image

The User Annotation feature allows you to type annotation on an image. This is useful for
typing things such as contrast type, needle gauge and injection rate.
1. Put the image that you want to type annotation on into primary focus.
2. Click [Routine Display].

3. Click [User Annotation].

A blue box with an arrow attached to it appears on the primary image.

4. Place mouse cursor over the image you are typing text onto.
5. Type the desired text and it appears in the blue box.
The box expands to fit text.
Pressing Enter allows an additional line for text.
6. Adjust the box and attached arrow as needed.
You may click on the blue box and drag it to a different location. You may also click
on the arrow head and drag it to point to a specific structure, or you can drag it into
the box to make it disappear.
7. Click [User Annotation] again to add additional annotation.
8. Click [Erase] to erase the primary (blue) annotation.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-6

Quick Steps: Type Text on the Image

1. Put the image that you want to type annotation on into primary focus.
2. Click [Routine Display].
3. Click [User Annotation].
4. Place mouse cursor over the image you are typing text onto.
5. Type the desired text and it appears in the blue box.
6. Adjust the box and attached arrow as needed.
7. Click [User Annotation] again to add additional annotation.
8. Click [Erase] to erase the primary (blue) annotation.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-7

Display the Exam Information

This feature is used to bring up a text page with exam information on it. This text page can
be filmed.
1. Click [Routine Display].

2. Click [Exam Page].

A text page box appears.

3. Click [Manual Film] or [Auto Film] to select the film composer you would like the exam
page to go to.
4. Click [Quit].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-8

Quick Steps: Display the Exam Information

1. Click [Routine Display].
2. Click [Exam Page].
3. Click [Manual Film] or [Auto Film] to select the film composer you would like the exam
page to go to.
4. Click [Quit].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-9

Display the Parameters of a Scan Mode

This feature brings up a text page with series information. This can be filmed.
1. Click [Routine Display].

2. Click [Series Page].

A text page box appears.

If there is more than one page, click the Up or Down arrows to display the next page.
3. Click [Manual Film] or [Auto Film] to select the film composer you would like the series
page to go to.
4. Click [Quit].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-10

Quick Steps: Display the Parameters of a Scan Mode

1. Click [Routine Display].
2. Click [Series Page].
3. Click [Manual Film] or [Auto Film] to select the film composer you would like the series
page to go to.
4. Click [Quit].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-11

Hide or Show Graphics

This feature allows you to temporarily hide graphics without erasing them. This applies to
graphics that you put on the image yourself, such as ROIs, user annotation, etc.
1. With added graphics on the image, click [Routine Display].

2. Click [Hide Graphics].

The added graphics are temporarily hidden.

When this button is selected, it toggles to become [Show Graphics].
3. Click [Show Graphics] to show the hidden graphics.

NOTE: Hide/Show Graphics can also be found under [Measurements].

Quick Steps: Hide or Show Graphics

1. With added graphics on the image, click [Routine Display].
2. Click [Hide Graphics].
3. Click [Show Graphics] to show the hidden graphics.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-12

Remove Graphics From the Image

2. Click [Erase].

This erases only the active (blue) annotation.

Keep selecting this button to erase all added annotation.
NOTE: Erase can also be found under [Measurements].

Quick Steps: Remove Graphics From the Image

1. Click [Routine Display].
2. Click [Erase].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-13

Save an Image Screen Turning

Graphics On
and Off (Hide)
Screen Save is an electronic photograph of an image. Screen Save saves everything that is
on the image in primary focus. This includes any zoom, cursors, measurements, flip, or
annotation. You can use Screen Save to save images when anatomy or pathology has been
measured. The screen saved images are listed on the patient list browser as series number
99, and called SSave for the series type. When a screen saved image is displayed, the
window width and window level can be changed, but information cannot be removed.
1. Click [Routine Display].

2. Click [Screen Save].

NOTE: Screen Save can also be found under [Measurements].

Quick Steps: Save an Image Screen

1. Click [Routine Display].
2. Click [Screen Save].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-14

Type in Specific Accelerator Line Commands

The Accelerator Line, also known as the Command Line, allows commands to be typed
which can perform certain display functions. Typing these commands can act as a shortcut
to open additional menus to access a function. When a command is typed, it is applied to all
of the viewports in focus.
1. To see a list of applicable commands, refer to Appendix A or type ? on the Command
Line and click Enter.

When a ? is typed on the Command Line, the Help Command Line menu is displayed
listing available commands.
2. Once you have decided on a command, type the command on the Accelerator Line and
press Enter.

Quick Steps: Type in Specific Accelerator Line Commands

1. To see a list of applicable commands, refer to Appendix A or type ? on the Command
Line and click Enter.
2. Once you have decided on a command, type the command on the Accelerator Line
and press Enter.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-15

How Do I...

This section provides the step-by-step instructions for using graphics, text pages and
commands in the Image Works desktop. Specifically, it describes how to:
• Type Text on the Image
• Display the Exam Information
• Display the Parameters of a Scan Mode
• Hide or Show Graphics
• Remove Graphics From the Image
• Save an Image Screen
• Type in Specific Accelerator Command Lines
NOTE: These features can also be accessed from the accelerator line. For more information,
refer to: Accelerator Line Commands.
NOTE: All of these features can be accessed from the Viewer in the Image Works desktop.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-16

Type Text on the Image

The User Annotation feature allows you to type annotation on an image. This is useful for
typing things such as contrast type, needle gauge and injection rate. This feature can also
be accessed from the Mini-Viewer.
1. Put the image that you want to type annotation on into primary focus.
2. Click (Annotation).
A blue box with an arrow attached to it appears on the primary image.
3. Place the mouse cursor over the active viewport.
4. Type the desired text and it appears in the blue box.
5. Once the text is typed, you may click on the blue box and drag it to a different location.
You may also click on the arrow head and drag it to point to a specific structure, or you
can drag it into the box to make it disappear.
6. Click (Annotation) again to add additional annotation.
7. Click (Erase Annotation) to erase the primary (blue) annotation.

Quick Steps: Type Text on the Image

1. Put the image that you want to type annotation on into primary focus.
2. Click (Annotation).
3. Place the mouse cursor over the active viewport.
4. Type the desired text and it appears in the blue box.
5. Once the text is typed, you may click on the blue box and drag it to a different location.
You may also click on the arrow head and drag it to point to a specific structure, or you
can drag it into the box to make it disappear.
6. Click (Annotation) again to add additional annotation.
7. Click (Erase Annotation) to erase the primary (blue) annotation.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-17

Display the Exam Information

This feature brings up a text page with exam information on it. This can be filmed and/or
saved. This page can also be accessed from the Mini-Viewer.
1. Click [Text Page].

A pull down window appears.

2. Click [Exam Page].

The exam page appears on the screen.

3. Click [Manual Film] or [Screen Save].

Click [Manual Film] to place exam page on the manual film composer.
Click [Screen Save] to save this as a image so you can network and/or archive this
information.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-18

4. Click [Quit].
This closes the window.

Quick Steps: Display the Exam Information

1. Click [Text Page].
2. Click [Exam Page].
3. Click [Manual Film] or [Screen Save].
4. Click [Quit].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-19

Display the Parameters of a Scan Mode

This feature brings up a text page with series information. This can be filmed. This page can
also be accessed from the Mini-Viewer.
1. Click [Text Page].

A pull down window appears.

2. Click [Series Page].

The series page appears on the screen.

3. Click [Manual Film] to place series page on the manual film composer, or click [Quit].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-20

Quick Steps: Display the Parameters of a Scan Mode

1. Click [Text Page].
2. Click [Series Page].
3. Click [Manual Film] to place series page on the manual film composer, or click [Quit].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-21

Hide or Show Graphics

This feature allows you to temporarily hide graphics without erasing them. This applies to
graphics that you put on the image yourself, such as ROIs, user annotation, etc. This can also
be accessed from the Mini-Viewer.
1. With added graphics on the image, click [Hide].

The added graphics are temporarily hidden.

When this button is selected, it toggles to become [Show].
2. Click [Show] to show the hidden graphics.

Quick Steps: Hide or Show Graphics

1. With added graphics on the image, click [Hide].
2. Click [Show] to show the hidden graphics.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-22

Remove Graphics From the Image

This feature allows you to selectively erase annotations or graphics. When annotation is
initially selected it is active (blue). When a second annotation is selected, the newly selected
annotation is active and the first one becomes inactive (white). To activate the inactive
(white) annotation, just click on it. the Erase All feature can also be accessed from the
Mini-Viewer.
1. Click [Erase All].

This erases all annotation.

Quick Steps: Remove Graphics From the Image

1. Click [Erase All].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-23

Save an Image Screen

Screen Save is an electronic photograph of an image. Screen Save saves everything that is
on the image in primary focus. This includes any zoom, cursors, measurements, flip, or
annotation. You can use Screen Save to save images when anatomy or pathology has been
measured. The screen saved images are listed on the patient list browser as series number
99, and called SSave for the series type. When a screen saved image is displayed, the
window width and window level can be changed, but information cannot be removed.
1. Click [Screen Save].

Quick Steps: Save an Image Screen

1. Click [Screen Save].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-24

Type in Specific Accelerator Command Lines

The Accelerator Line, also known as the Command Line, allows commands to be typed
which can perform certain display functions. Typing these commands can act as a shortcut
to open additional menus to access a function. When a command is typed, it is applied to all
of the viewports in focus. The Accelerator Line can also be accessed from the Mini-Viewer.
1. To see a list of applicable commands, refer to Appendix A or type ? on the Command
Line and click Enter.

Quick Steps: Type in Specific Accelerator Command Lines

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-25

How Do I Edit Default Settings in the

Image Works Desktop
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for using graphics, text pages and
commands in the Image Works desktop. Specifically, it describes how to: edit the default
setting for all the graphics on the image.
• Edit Default Settings for Annotation
• Edit Default Settings for Grid Preferences
• Edit Default Settings for W/L Presets
• Edit Default Settings for Right Mouse Button
• Edit Default Settings for Tick Marks
• Edit Default Settings for Series Binding
• Edit Default Settings for Square Viewports

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-26

Edit Default Settings for Annotation

The Annotation Level feature allows you to decide which annotation are included on your
image. There are 4 levels of annotation to choose from. This can be set separately for the
screen and for the film.
1. Click [User Prefs].

A pop up window appears.

2. Click [No Annotation].

This takes ALL annotation off of the image.
3. Or click [Partial Annotation].
Selecting this displays ONLY patient name, exam date, exam/series/image numbers,
center coordinates, and window/level.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-27

4. Or click [Custom Annotation].

Use this to customize which annotation to take off the image.
5. When you select custom, you must also click [Customize...].
A list appears with all available annotation groups.
6. Select which specific information you would like.
A bright blue box indicates that the information is included on the image.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-28

7. Click [Customize Large Font] if you wish to change the font size.
For Patient ID greater than 41 characters with Customize Large Font selected, no
Patient ID will be displayed on the screen.
For Patient Name greater than 46 characters with Customize Large Font selected,
no Patient Name will be displayed on the screen.

8. Select the desired selections.

9. When done with your selection, click [OK].
10. On the main User Prefs screen, click [Apply] or [Save as defaults].
Selecting Apply applies selected annotation to the current exam. Selecting Save as
defaults sets the selected annotation as a default in this desktop and in Exam Rx as
well.

Quick Steps: Edit Default Settings for Annotation

1. Click [User Prefs].
2. Click [No Annotation].
3. Or click [Partial Annotation].
4. Or click [Custom Annotation].
5. When you select custom, you must also click [Customize...].
6. Select which specific information you would like.
7. Click [Customize Large Font] if you wish to change the font size.
8. Select the desired selections.
9. When done with your selection, click [OK].
10. On the main User Prefs screen, click [Apply] or [Save as defaults].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-29

Edit Default Settings for Grid Preferences

Use this feature to customize the size and spacing of a grid.
1. Click [User Prefs].

A pop up window appears.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-30

2. Under Grid Prefs, click [Customize....].

A pop up window, called Grid Preferences appears.

3. For Matrix Lines, click [ON] or [OFF].

ON shows the matrix lines throughout the grid. OFF shows just the two center rulers
of the grid.
4. For Line Style, click [Dotted] or [Solid].
5. Type in the numeric value for grid spacing (in mm).
6. Type in the numeric value for tick spacing (in mm).
This is the space between each tick mark.
7. Type in the numeric value for tick length (in mm).
This is the length of each tick mark.
8. Click [OK] to make changes, or [Cancel] to cancel.
9. On the main User Prefs screen, click [Apply] or [Save as defaults].
Selecting Apply applies grid preferences to the current exam. Selecting Save as
defaults sets the grid preferences as a default in this desktop and in the Exam Rx
desktop as well.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-31

Quick Steps: Edit Default Settings for Grid Preferences

1. Click [User Prefs].
2. Under Grid Prefs, click [Customize....].
3. For Matrix Lines, click [ON] or [OFF].
4. For Line Style, click [Dotted] or [Solid].
5. Type in the numeric value for grid spacing (in mm).
6. Type in the numeric value for tick spacing (in mm).
7. Type in the numeric value for tick length (in mm).
8. Click [OK] to make changes, or [Cancel] to cancel.
9. On the main User Prefs screen, click [Apply] or [Save as defaults].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-32

Edit Default Settings for W/L Presets

Preset W/L settings can be selected for CT and MR images. These presets can be used from
the Viewer or Mini-Viewer.
1. Click [User Prefs].

A pop up window appears.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-33

2. Click either [CT] or [MR].

The modality selection is a toggle switch. If the modality you would like is not
showing, just select the modality that is there and it switches.
3. To change the title of a preset, type in the space for that title and type new title.
4. To change a value for w/width or w/level, type in the new value(s).
5. Click [Set current] to change the settings you just selected.
6. Click [Save as defaults].
Selecting Save as defaults sets the selected W/L settings as a default in this desktop
and in Exam Rx as well.
NOTE: To Save Window Level presets for the Function Keys, refer to: Set Window Width and
Window Level Preset Keys

Quick Steps: Edit Default Settings for W/L Presets

1. Click [User Prefs].
2. Click either [CT] or [MR].
3. To change the title of a preset, type in the space for that title and type new title.
4. To change a value for w/width or w/level, type in the new value(s).
5. Click [Set current] to change the settings you just selected.
6. Click [Save as defaults].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-34

Edit Default Settings for Right Mouse Button

Use the Right Mouse Button feature to change the functionality of the right mouse button.
1. Click [User Prefs].

A pop up window appears.

2. Click [Scrolling] to set the right mouse button to scroll.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-35

3. Click [Magnify glass] to set the right mouse button to give you a magnified area at a set
factor when that button is pressed.
4. Click [Apply] or [Save as defaults].
Selecting Apply applies your choice for the current exam. Selecting Save as defaults
sets your choice as a default in this desktop and in Exam Rx as well.

Quick Steps: Edit Default Settings for Right Mouse Button

1. Click [User Prefs].
2. Click [Scrolling] to set the right mouse button to scroll.
3. Click [Magnify glass] to set the right mouse button to give you a magnified area at a
set factor when that button is pressed.
4. Click [Apply] or [Save as defaults].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-36

Edit Default Settings for Tick Marks Editing

Default
Settings in the
Use this feature to show or hide both horizontal and vertical tick marks on an image. Image Works
Desktop (User
1. Click [User Prefs].
Preferences)
for Tick Marks

A pop up window appears.

2. Click Vertical to show the side tick marks.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-37

3. Click Horizontal to show the bottom tick marks.

4. Deselect Vertical and/or Horizontal to hide the tick marks.
5. Click [Apply] or [Save as defaults].
Selecting Apply applies your choice for the current exam. Selecting Save as defaults
sets your choice as a default in this desktop and in Exam Rx as well.
NOTE: Another way to set individual tick marks is to use the Accelerator Line and type TMV
ON or TMV OFF to turn the vertical tick mark ONLY on or off, or type TMH ON or TMH
OFF to turn the horizontal tick mark ONLY on or off.

Quick Steps: Edit Default Settings for Tick Marks

1. Click [User Prefs].
2. Click Vertical to show the side tick marks.
3. Click Horizontal to show the bottom tick marks.
4. Deselect Vertical and/or Horizontal to hide the tick marks.
5. Click [Apply] or [Save as defaults].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-38

Edit Default Settings for Series Binding

Use Series binding to customize the way you page through images in an exam.
1. Click [User Prefs].

A pop up window appears.

2. Click [Series binding ON] to page through ALL series in an exam.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-39

3. Click [Series binding OFF] to page through ONLY the current series in an exam.
4. Click [Apply] or [Save as defaults].
Selecting Apply applies your choice for the current exam. Selecting Save as defaults
sets your choice as a default in this desktop and in Exam Rx as well.

Quick Steps: Edit Default Settings for Series Binding

1. Click [User Prefs].
2. Click [Series binding ON] to page through ALL series in an exam.
3. Click [Series binding OFF] to page through ONLY the current series in an exam.
4. Click [Apply] or [Save as defaults].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-40

Edit Default Settings for Square Viewports

Square viewports is used to visualize a magnified image on film. With this feature turned on,
what you see in the viewport is what you get when the image is filmed.
1. Click [User Prefs].

A pop up window appears.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-41

2. Click [Square viewports ON] to see the entire magnified image on film.
With this feature turned on, what you see in the viewport is what you get when the
image is filmed.
3. Click [Square viewports OFF] and the magnified image is only be partially seen on film.
With this feature turned off, the image does not film as you see it in the viewport.
4. Click [Apply] or [Save as defaults].
Selecting Apply applies your choice for the current exam. Selecting Save as defaults
sets your choice as a default in this desktop and in Exam Rx as well.

Quick Steps: Edit Default Settings for Square Viewports

1. Click [User Prefs].
2. Click [Square viewports ON] to see the entire magnified image on film.
3. Click [Square viewports OFF] and the magnified image is only be partially seen on film.
4. Click [Apply] or [Save as defaults].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 32-42

Chapter 33
Managing Scan (Raw) Data

Introduction
This chapter explains how to manage your scan data. It contains the step-by-step
instructions to help you learn how to:
• Create New Images From Scan Data
• Look for Images that are not Reconstructed
• Pause Images From Reconstructing
• Resume Image Reconstruction
• Remove Images From the Reconstruction List
• Update the Reconstruction List
• Save/Restore Scan Data to/from a Disk
• Complete an Anonymous Scan Data Save
• Reserve/Release Scan Data

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 33-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to manage scan data. Some of the concepts
you need to understand are:
• Scan (Raw) Data
• Suspended Entries
• Saving Scan Data
• Restoring Scan Data
• Reserving Scan Data
• Releasing Scan Data
• WorkArounds

Scan (Raw) Data

With each rotation of the gantry, x-rays are emitted that pass through a portion of anatomy
and strike the detectors. The signal from the detector is converted by the DAS to an analog
signal that is then part of the scan file. This information is known as the scan or raw data. It
contains all of the information gathered during an exposure.

Suspended Entries
Sometimes the system for a variety of reasons may not be able to complete the
reconstruction of a particular image. This data is then automatically placed in a queue,
where you can attempt to reconstruct it again or delete it.

Saving Scan Data

It may be necessary on occasion to retain the scan data for reconstruction at a later time or
for a diagnostic inspection of the system components. This is usually done if the scan data
must be kept for an indefinite period of time or if the scan data is being sent elsewhere for
diagnostic review.
The media scan data is saved to is dependent on your operator console type. Octane based
system save scan data to MOD media. PC based systems save scan data to DVD-RAM
media. The scan data can be stored to a DVD-RAM - 9.4GB dual side cartridge.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 33-2

Restoring Scan Data

Scan data that has been stored on a MOD or DVD-Ram can be placed back onto the system
disk. Once on the system disk, the scan data can be reconstructed using any of the scan
parameters, i.e., image interval (if acquired helically), DFOV, A/P and R/L centers, or
algorithm.

Reserving Scan Data

The system temporarily saves the scan data in an electronic queue. These entries are
written over in order, with the earliest scans being written over first. Prior to this occurring,
you can have the system place a lock on a given scan file. The system then goes to the next
unlocked scan file to write over. It is important to note that when the scan data files are
reserved, the remaining files are reduced by the number of files saved.

Releasing Scan Data

Scan data files that have been reserved may replaced in the system by releasing the lock set
by reserving scan data. Releasing the files increases the available scan data files
accordingly. The scan data files are written over in the usual manner.

WorkArounds
Scan File save is not complete even though the Saved File message has been posted.
It takes time to transfer the file from the system to the DVD and unmount the DVD. It
can take up to an hour for the file to completely transfer. Do not try to eject the DVD
or MOD until the light has gone out on the DVD or MOD drive.
Scan files from LightSpeed 4/8 or 16 slice systems cannot be restored on LightSpeed
Pro32/VCT Select or LightSpeed VCT/VCT XT systems.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 33-3

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for managing scan data. Specifically, it
describes how to:
• Create New Images From Scan Data
• Look for Images that are not Reconstructed
• Pause Images From Reconstructing
• Resume Image Reconstruction
• Remove Images From the Reconstruction List
• Update the Reconstruction List
• Save/Restore Scan Data to/from a Disk
• Complete an Anonymous Scan Data Save
• Reserve/Release Scan Data

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 33-4

Create New Images From Scan Data

The scan data contains all of the information gathered from each exposure, making it
possible to create images of the same anatomy presented in a different manner. Changes in
scan parameters and possibly reducing artifact due to motion are possible. These changes
take place after the original data is reconstructed and are known as retro recons.
1. From the scan monitor, click [Retro Recon].

The Retro Recon list select screen appears. All images with available scan data are
listed.
2. From the Retro Recon list select screen, select the appropriate patient, exam, and series.
The most recently scanned examination are at the top of the list.
The Retro Recon view/edit page appears, showing all of the scan parameters
available for retro reconstruction.
Figure 33-1 Retro Recon screen

3. Click [Select Series].

4. Type a new series description in the Series Description area if desired.
5. Click [Retro] for all groups or click [Y] for an individual group.
If you select [Retro], a pop up window appears. Choose [Yes] or [No]. You may also
click on the individual group and toggle between [Y] and [N].
The system assumes all available data is to be reconstructed. If there are multiple
groups, you must determine which group(s) has data you wish to reconstruct.
6. As needed, enter Retro Start and Retro End locations.
The locations must fall within the range of the selected group and must have S or I
designation.
Cine scans use the time range for the start and end locations and do not require the
S or I designations.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 33-5

7. As needed, click [Image Thickness].

If you select [Image Thickness], a pop up window appears where you can then enter
the thickness. This changes the thickness in all groups. If there is only one group in
which you wish to change the thickness, or only one of multiple groups, you may
select the thickness area for that group.
The original detector configuration at which the patient was scanned affects how
you can change the slice thickness. The thickness in black is available for
reconstruction.
NOTE: For more information on detector configurations, refer to Multi-Detector Information
chapter.
8. As needed, click [Image Interval].
If you select [Image Interval], a pop up window appears where you can then enter
the interval. This changes the interval in all groups. If there is only one group in which
you wish to change the interval, or only one of multiple groups, you may select the
interval area for that group.
Interval is dependent on scan type of the group. Helical is image interval and Cine is
time interval. Axial does not apply and is insensitive.
9. As needed, click [DFOV].
System defaults to the DFOV used in the original prescription.
Select top button to change all groups or select an individual group.
Enter desired value.
10. As needed, click [R/L Center].
Select top button to change all groups or select an individual group.
You are setting the value for Right/Left offset of the image. Right or left value can be
determined by placing the real time cursor in image and the value are displayed in
upper left corner of the image. You may also choose List/Select to highlight the
correct exam and series. All of the values for that series are displayed in the browser
menu.
11. As needed, click [A/P Center].
Same as above step. You are setting the value for anterior or posterior centering.
12. As needed, click [Recon Type].
A pop up window appears with all of the available algorithms from which you can
choose the appropriate algorithm.
For more information on Recon Options, refer to: Set Display Factors.
13. The [Matrix] is shown here for informational purposes only. You cannot change the
matrix size.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 33-6

14. As needed, click [Recon Mode].

A pop up window appears.
System defaults either full or segment based on the prescription.
NOTE: Segmenting uses 225 degrees of data from different times within the rotation. Helical
scans using 225 degrees of data, can be segmented. This is useful in segmenting out
Aortic dissection artifact caused by the pulsation of the vessel. Cine scans using 225
degrees of data creates images with a shorter temporal resolution. This is useful in
following contrast through a tumor.
15. Click [Confirm] to generate images.

Quick Steps: Create New Images From Scan Data

1. From the scan monitor, click [Retro Recon].
2. From the Retro Recon list select screen, select the appropriate patient, exam, and
series.
3. Click [Select Series].
4. Type a new series description in the Series Description area if desired.
5. Click [Retro] for all groups or click [Y] for an individual group.
6. As needed, enter Retro Start and Retro End locations.
7. As needed, click [Image Thickness].
8. As needed, click [Image Interval].
9. As needed, click [DFOV].
10. As needed, click [R/L Center].
11. As needed, click [A/P Center].
12. As needed, click [Recon Type].
13. The [Matrix] is shown here for informational purposes only. You cannot change the
matrix size.
14. As needed, click [Recon Mode].
15. Click [Confirm] to generate images.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 33-7

Look for Images that are not Reconstructed

Occasionally for a variety of reasons, the system may fail to complete the reconstruction of
an image. The data is not lost, and you may have the system retry the reconstruction of the
image.
1. From the scan monitor, click [Recon Management].
The recon management page opens. If there is an unreconstructed image, it are
listed in the Suspended Entries window.
2. Select the suspended image(s).

The image(s) is listed by Patient ID, Exam, Series and Image number.
The system highlights selection(s).
3. Click [Delete Suspended Entries] or [Unsuspend Entries].
[Delete Suspended Entries] deletes the image(s) without attempting to reconstruct
the data. Use this if you do not wish the image(s) to be reconstructed.
[Unsuspend Entries] retries the reconstruction of the data. If successful, the system
places the image(s) in the correct exam and series.
a) The [Delete Suspended Entries] button has a pop up window to confirm or cancel
deletion. From the Attention Box, click [OK] to delete the selected entry. Click [Cancel]
to close the pop up window only; this does not cancel entry.
4. Click [Update List].
This allows the system to add any additional suspended entries that may have
occurred while using this feature.

Quick Steps: Look for Images that are not Reconstructed

1. From the scan monitor, click [Recon Management].
2. Select the suspended image(s).
3. Click [Delete Suspended Entries] or [Unsuspend Entries].
4. Click [Update List].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 33-8

Pause Images From Reconstructing

Images being prospectively reconstructed cannot be paused. Images being produced
retrospectively can be paused.
1. From the scan monitor click [Recon Management].
The recon management page opens.
2. Click [Pause Queue].

Button is highlighted in blue.

Images in queue are listed in the window next to the pause button.
Images are listed by Patient ID, Exam, Series and Image numbers.
All image reconstruction are paused, prospective and retrospective. However, several
images from the series may have already completed reconstruction. This is indicated
by the images appearing on the display monitor in the autoview viewport.

Quick Steps: Pause Images From ReconstructingPause Images From

Reconstructing
1. From the scan monitor click [Recon Management].
2. Click [Pause Queue].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 33-9

Resume Image Reconstruction

It is very important to restart the image queue if it has been paused for any reason. When
the queue is restarted, the images automatically begins reconstruction and be displayed on
the display monitor.
1. From the scan monitor, click [Recon Management].
The recon management page opens.
2. Click [Restart Queue].

The system automatically starts reconstruction of any images in the reconstruction

queue.

Quick Steps: Resume Image ReconstructionResume Image

Reconstruction
1. From the scan monitor, click [Recon Management].
2. Click [Restart Queue].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 33-10

Remove Images From the Reconstruction List

If any of the parameters selected for retro reconstruction of data are incorrect or if the
images are not needed, they may be paused and then deleted from being reconstructed.
1. From the scan monitor, click [Recon Management].
The recon management page opens.
2. Click [Pause Queue].
This stops the reconstruction of data. Some images may have completed
reconstruction.
3. Click [Delete Retro Entries].
At the bottom of the list, several options buttons are available.
4. Select entries to be removed.

You may select individual images by clicking on them or clicking and dragging over
more than on image to highlight groups of images.
Selection(s) are highlighted.
5. Click [Delete Retro Entries].
At the bottom of the list, several options buttons are available.
6. Click [Delete Selected] or [Delete All].
Use the [Delete Selected] if you want only the images highlighted to be deleted from
the list.
Use the [Delete All] if you want all of the images in the list deleted.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 33-11

7. Click [Restart Queue].

This automatically starts any remaining images to reconstruct.
If there are no images in retro recon this allows images being scanned to reconstruct
and be displayed.

Quick Steps: Remove Images From the Reconstruction ListRemove

Images From the Reconstruction List
1. From the scan monitor, click [Recon Management].
2. Click [Pause Queue].
3. Click [Delete Retro Entries].
4. Select entries to be removed.
5. Click [Delete Retro Entries].
6. Click [Delete Selected] or [Delete All].
7. Click [Restart Queue].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 33-12

Update the Reconstruction List

If you wish to see any images that may have been added to the reconstruction queue while
utilizing this function, it is necessary to update the reconstruction list.
1. From the scan monitor, click [Recon Management].
The recon management page opens.
2. Click [Update List].

The system updates the reconstruction list.

NOTE: If you exit the recon management screens and return, the list is updated
automatically.

Quick Steps: Update the Reconstruction List

1. From the scan monitor, click [Recon Management].
2. Click [Update List].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 33-13

Save/Restore Scan Data to/from a Disk

Occasionally, it may be necessary for diagnostic analysis to place all of the information
contained in the scan data onto a DVD-Ram or MOD. You may also wish to place special or
difficult studies on a disk to allow reconstruction of the images in different formats at a later
time. If you have placed scans on a disk and wish to restore them to the system disk, the
steps are exactly the same as saving except you use the restore buttons.
NOTE: If saving scanfiles for troubleshooting, always select Save Selected Anonymous Data
to remove patient identification to comply with HIPAA regulations.
Place DVD-Ram or MOD media in the drive.
1. From the scan monitor, click [Recon Management].
The recon management page opens.
2. Click [Save Scan Data].

The Save Scan Data screen appears with all the currently available scan files listed
with the first scanfile in the list highlighted.
Use the up/down arrows to move up/down through the pages of available scan files.
The data is listed in three parts: exam, series, and scans.
Available exams are shown in upper left window, series and scans for the selected
exam (s) in the lower left window and selected scanfiles in the window on the right.
3. Select the exam you wish to save in the Exam window.
Make sure no scanfiles are initially highlighted. Select only the exam you want to
save.
NOTE: Depending on the size of the scan data file, only one scan file may be saved per side
of the DVD-RAM or MOD. Select only the files you want to save and save them one at
a time.
4. Select the individual scanfiles for the series you wish to save in the series window.
Select individual series if you wish to save data from a specific series.
5. Click [Select All Scanfiles Listed] or select individual scan(s).
Click [Select All scanfiles Listed] if you want all listed files saved
Select individual scans if you want specific scan(s) saved.
6. Click [Save Selected Scanfiles].
All selected exam(s), series or scan(s) is saved to the disk.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 33-14

NOTE: Make sure the selected scanfiles does not exceed the space available on the
DVD-RAM. One helical scanfile will fit on one side of the DVD-RAM, most CINE full scan
types can not be saved to DVD-RAM, for Axial scan types 12 scanfiles will fit on one
side of a DVD-RAM.
NOTE: It is very important to note that you cannot scan once you have selected [Save
Selected Scanfiles]. The system only allows scanning when the save is complete. If
you accept and then choose cancel the system only cancels when the current scan
save is finished. A scan could be a 60 second helical acquisition and could take up to
30 minutes to complete the save process.
NOTE: Make sure to wait till the light is no longer illuminated on the media drive before trying
to eject the media.
7. Click [Quit] to exit.

Quick Steps: Save/Restore Scan Data to/from a Disk

1. From the scan monitor, click [Recon Management].
2. Click [Save Scan Data].
3. Select the exam you wish to save in the Exam window.
4. Select the individual scanfiles for the series you wish to save in the series window.
5. Click [Select All Scanfiles Listed] or select individual scan(s).
6. Click [Save Selected Scanfiles].
7. Click [Quit] to exit.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 33-15

Complete an Anonymous Scan Data Save

The system has the ability to save scan data with patient identifying information removed.
This has been added to address HIPAA concerns. Raw data saved anonymously and then
restored will reconstruct with patient identifying information removed. The Patient Name
and ID will be anonymized.
1. Place media in the drive, MOD for Octane based systems and DVD-RAM for PC based
systems. Click [Recon Management].
2. Click [Save Scan Data].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 33-16

Quick Steps: Complete an Anonymous Scan Data Save

1. Place media in the drive, MOD for Octane based systems and DVD-RAM for PC based
systems. Click [Recon Management].
2. Click [Save Scan Data].
3. Click [Save Selected Annon. Data].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 33-17

Reserve/Release Scan Data

You may have the system protect selected scan files from being reused. Essentially, you
place a lock, or reserve, around the scan file that the system then bypasses and uses the
next unlocked or released scan file. When the scans are no longer needed, they may be
unlocked, or released, to the system for use. The steps to release are exactly the same as
reserving, except you use the release buttons.
1. From the scan monitor, click [Recon Management].
The recon management page opens.
2. Click [Reserve Scan Data].

The Reserve Scan Data screen appears with all currently available scans listed.
The data is listed in three parts: exam, series and scans.
3. Click [Reserve All Scanfiles], [Select All Exams Listed] or select individual exam(s).
Click [Reserve All Scanfiles] if you wish to reserve all of the data from all of the scans.
Click [Select All Exams Listed] if you wish to see a listing of the different series in
each exam and choose specific series to be reserved.
Select individual exam(s) if you wish to reserve data from specific exam(s) and series.
NOTE: If you wish to reserve by exam(s), click [Reserve Selected Scanfiles] and skip to step
7. If you wish to save by series or image(s), proceed to next step.
4. Click [Select All Series Listed] or select individual series.
Click [Select All Series Listed] if you wish to reserve all of the listed series.
Select individual series if you wish to reserve data from a specific series.
NOTE: If you wish to reserve by series, click [Reserve Selected Scanfiles] and skip to step 7.
If you wish to reserve individual scan(s), proceed to next step.
5. Click [Select All Scanfiles Listed] or select individual scan(s).
Click [Select All Scanfiles Listed] if you want all listed files reserved.
Select individual scans if you want specific scan(s) reserved.
6. Click [Reserve Selected Scanfiles].
All selected exam(s), series, or scan(s) is reserved to the system disc.
7. Click [Quit] to exit.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 33-18

Quick Steps: Reserve/Release Scan DataReserve/Release Scan Data

1. From the scan monitor, click [Recon Management].
2. Click [Reserve Scan Data].
3. Click [Reserve All Scanfiles], [Select All Exams Listed] or select individual exam(s).
4. Click [Select All Series Listed] or select individual series.
5. Click [Select All Scanfiles Listed] or select individual scan(s).
6. Click [Reserve Selected Scanfiles].
7. Click [Quit] to exit.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 33-19

Chapter 34
Reformat (Octane System)

Introduction
The Reformat software is located in the Image Works desktop. It generates reconstructed
cut planes on CT images.
This chapter explains the process of using reformat. It provides step-by-step instructions to
learn how to:
• Select and Build an Image Set
• Move the Orthogonal View Locations
• Adjust the Oblique View Angle
• Edit with the Active Annotation
• Adjust the Cross-Reference Image
• Use the Main on View Menu Features
• Create Measurements
– Measure Distance
– Measure an Angle
– Measure an Area
• Adjust Display Preferences
– Choose Graphic Options
– Choose Ruler Styles
– Reverse Black and White Display
– Set Up Film Options

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-1

• Create Different View Types

– Create a Curved View Type
– Create a Profile View Type
– Create a Histogram View Type
– Create an X Section View Type
– Prescribe a Multi Projection Volume Reformation (MPVR)
• Create and Save a Batch Protocol
– Set Up a Rotation Prescription
– Set Up an Oblique Prescription
– Set Up a Manual Prescription Using First and Last Views
– Select the Output Device
– Apply the Batch Prescription
• Save and Load a Model
– Save a Protocol
– Use a Protocol
– Delete a Protocol

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-2

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to successfully complete the process of
creating and managing image sets for reformat. Specifically you need to understand:
• Reformat Detail and Reformat Standard
• Reformat Layout
• Cursor Controls
• Plane Orientation Indicator
• View Types
• Render Modes
• Batch
• Main On View Menu

Reformat Detail and Reformat Standard

Reformat Detail employs 512 x 512 matrix and generates higher resolution. Reformat
Standard uses 256 x 256 matrix with lower resolution but takes up less memory capacity
than Reformat Detail, there by enabling the quicker referencing of images.
Certain requirements need to be met to have a valid image set in order to perform reformat.
They are as follows:
• Field of View
• Matrix Size
• Display Center
• Orientation
• Gantry Tilt
(The above requirements need to be the same for all images in the set.)
• There must be at least four images selected before selecting reformat.
• Tilt acquisitions are not supported for right and left decubitus patient orientation.
• You cannot have two images with identical locations.
• Spacing must be less than 10 millimeters and the set should include only axial, sagittal
or coronal images.

Reformat Layout
Once the model is built, a 4 on 1 display appear with the main control window on the left
side of the images. The images always display an oblique image in the upper left quadrant,
an axial in the upper right quadrant, a sagittal in the lower left quadrant, and a coronal in

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-3

the lower right quadrant. If you would like to change the display, you can use the four
quadrant plane buttons in the middle of the Main Command Window. When you place the
mouse over a button, a message tells you where the image plane is displayed. You can place
the mouse over any of the buttons on the Main Command Window below Batch and Display
Preferences to get a message about that button.
NOTE: There may be a small delay before the message comes up.

Cursor Controls
Reformat uses the 3D cursor, trackball cursor and tilt cursor. The 3D cursor appears as a red
crosshair and identifies the same point on each view. If the 3D cursor is repositioned on one
view, the other connected views updates based on the change. The trackball cursor appears
on the oblique view when the rotate icon is selected. The trackball cursor can be used to
rotate the oblique view by clicking and dragging the four corner handles. The tilt cursor
appears on the primary view when the tilt icon is selected. On the orthogonal views, the tilt
cursor can be used to adjust the angle of the oblique view by adjusting the solid line cursor.
On the oblique view, the tilt cursor can be used to update the associated orthogonal view.

Plane Orientation Indicator

Reformat provides a plane orientation indicator in the lower right corner of each view. The
indicator cross-references the reformatted plane to the original (acquisition) plane image.

View Types
There are several different view types in reformat. They are No View, Axial, Sagittal, Coronal,
Oblique, Curved, Profile, Histogram, and X Section.
• Selecting No View simply blanks out the corresponding viewport. This could be useful if
you only want to view specific view types.
• An axial is an image representing a cross-sectional slice of anatomy.
• A sagittal is a lengthwise plane dividing the body into left and right portions.
• A coronal is a lengthwise plane through the body, dividing it into anterior and posterior
portions.
• An oblique plane is a coronal or sagittal plane that has been tilted through the body
rather than following the long axis. It can look like a axial image.
• Curved image allows the definition of a complex, curved view. The curved view does not
need to lie along a single orthogonal or oblique plane but can follow anatomical lines.
• Profile is a graph showing CT number intensity across a location.
• The Volume Histogram View provides a variety of information, including the ability to
display a histogram showing the percentage of occurrence of each voxel intensity value
in an object. It also provides numerical statistics about the voxel intensity values in a

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-4

object plus the total object volume. Also, it automatically determines boundaries around
a class of similar voxel intensities and can hilight pixel values. This function is typically
used when you have 3D data; otherwise, the volume statistics are not valid.
• An X Section view displays a Histogram showing the percentage of occurrence of each
pixel intensity value in a user defined surface area on a reformatted slice. It also
provides numerical statistics about the pixel intensity values in this same surface area
plus the calculations of this area. It automatically determines boundaries around the
class of similar pixel intensity values in this area.

Render Modes
Render modes consist of Surface, HD MIP, MIP, Min IP, Ray Sum, and Integral.
Table 34-1 Reformat Render Modes

Mode Description
Exists only if the model was built using volume or surface mode and is used to
Surface
display the surface of a model.
Displays the model using the High Definition Maximum Intensity Projection mode.
HD MIP The mode is identical to the MIP mode as described below, except that image
definition is greater but the system speed is slower.
Displays the model using the Maximum Intensity Projection mode. In this mode,
MIP the density of each point on the screen is the maximum density along a line
perpendicular to the screen.
Displays the model using the minimum Intensity Pixel mode. In this mode, the
Min IP density of each point on the screen in the minimum density along a line
perpendicular to the screen.
Displays the model by summing the model’s intensity along lines perpendicular to
Ray Sum
the screen. This mode simulates conventional radiography images.
Displays only the surface of the model, but the density of each surface point is
Integral equal to the sum of densities along a shallow depth below the displayed surface
point.

Batch
The Batch command allows you to set up filming prescriptions or a movie loop on
reformatted images.

Main On View Menu

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-5

view. The options on this menu are: Screen save, Clear last point, Clear trace, Enlarge,
Clear reference images, Lock orientation, and Reset pointer. Screen Save allows you to
save the view for future display. Clear last point exists only if a trace is present and allows
you to clear the last point entered on the trace. Clear trace exists only if a trace is present
and allows you to clear all points from the trace, enabling you to restart trace entry. Enlarge
allows you to zoom in by a factor of two. This option then becomes Reset size for returning
to the normal view. This does not exist on Profile, Histogram, or X Section views. Clear
reference images removes the cross-reference image the quadrant and replace it with a
cube reference. Lock orientation allows you to lock an oblique view orientation, i.e., to
prevent rotation. This option then becomes Unlock orientation for restoring rotation ability.
Reset pointer allows you to center the 3D cursor in the reformat field of view. This does not
exist on Profile, Histogram, or X Section views.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-6

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for creating Reformatted Images.
Specifically, it describes how to:
• Select and Build an Image Set
• Move the Orthogonal View Locations
• Adjust the Oblique View Angle
• Edit with the Active Annotation
• Adjust the Cross-Reference Image
• Use the Main on View Menu Features
• Create Measurements
– Measure Distance
– Measure an Angle
– Measure an Area
• Adjust Display Preferences
– Choose Graphic Options
– Choose Ruler Styles
– Reverse Black and White Display
– Set Up Film Options
• Create Different View Types
– Create a Curved View Type
– Create a Profile View Type
– Create a Histogram View Type
– Create an X Section View Type
– Prescribe a Multi Projection Volume Reformation (MPVR)
• Create and Save a Batch Protocol
– Set Up a Rotation Prescription
– Set Up an Oblique Prescription
– Set Up a Manual Prescription Using First and Last Views
– Select the Output Device
– Apply the Batch Prescription
• Save and Load a Model
– Save a Protocol
– Use a Protocol
– Delete a Protocol

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-7

Select and Build an Image Set

When Selecting an Image Set, keep in mind that you have to have a valid image set.
1. From the display monitor, click [Image Works].

From the Browser, check all of the parameters to make sure that you have a valid
image set.
2. Select the Exam/Series/Images that you want to Reformat.
You can select an exam and series, and all the images are included if you do not
select any images.
If you want a selected range of images, you have to select the first image that you
want to include. Then find the last image in the range and, while holding down Shift,
select the last image. You could also click on the first image and drag through the
range of images.
To select specific images, you must hold down Ctrl on your keyboard as you click the
desired images.
You have to select at least four images for Reformat to work.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-8

3. Click [Rfmt Detl] or [Rfmt Stnd].

4. Click [Build Model] and from the pull-down list, select which protocol you want to use.

Quick Steps: Select and Build an Image Set

1. From the display monitor, click [Image Works].
2. Select the Exam/Series/Images that you want to Reformat.
3. Click [Rfmt Detl] or [Rfmt Stnd].
4. Click [Build Model] and from the pull-down list, select which protocol you want to use.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-9

Move the Orthogonal View Locations

Once you have selected [Rfmt Detl] or [Rfmt Stnd], the model builds. Once it is built, a
4-on-1 display appears depending on which protocol was selected with the Main Control
Window on the left side of the images. The images usually display with a oblique image in
the upper left quadrant, an axial image in the upper right quadrant, a sagittal image in the
lower left quadrant, and a coronal image in the lower right quadrant. When the images are
displayed, the oblique image is in primary focus. Primary focus in reformat is red. The other
images are linked by green.
The Orthogonal View Locations can be adjusted several ways:
1. Place the mouse cursor over the area desired and press Shift.
The 3D cursor (a red dot, arrow, or X) is deposited at the mouse cursor location.
2. Click and drag the 3D cursor to where you want to place it.
This updates all of the views that are linked in green frames.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-10

3. Enter an increment value in the mm text box and click the arrows around the text box.
This moves the image in all of the green frames to the new location.
The red 3D cursor in the red frame move.

4. Position the mouse cursor on the red slice location annotation.

Click to increase the location.
Right-click to decrease the location.
Middle-click and drag right to increase and left to decrease the slice location.

Quick Steps: Move the Orthogonal View Locations

1. Place the mouse cursor over the area desired and press Shift.
2. Click and drag the 3D cursor to where you want to place it.
3. Enter an increment value in the mm text box and click the arrows around the text box.
4. Position the mouse cursor on the red slice location annotation.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-11

Adjust the Oblique View Angle

The oblique mode button can be used to move and rotate plane traces of reformatted views
on all views except oblique, curved, histogram, x-section, and profile. Either the Tilt/Rotate
button or the Oblique Mode button is active during reformat.
1. Click the [Oblique Mode] button.

You must have an axial, sagittal, or coronal image in the primary frame.
2. Click and drag the 3D cursor to the desired location.
This moves the dotted lines.
They represent the location.
You can also place the mouse cursor where you want the location to be and press
shift.
3. Click and drag the solid yellow line to the desired angle.
The oblique view updates automatically.
4. You can also change the angle by typing in the degree of angle, and clicking on the
arrows.
This is located at the bottom of the Main Command Window.
5. Click on the [Tilt/Rotate] button to exit the oblique mode.

The tilt rotate button can be use to rotate the image. It can move in any direction by
clicking on the corner of the red tilt rotate box and dragging.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-12

Quick Steps: Adjust the Oblique View Angle

1. Click the [Oblique Mode] button.
2. Click and drag the 3D cursor to the desired location.
3. Click and drag the solid yellow line to the desired angle.
4. You can also change the angle by typing in the degree of angle, and clicking on the
arrows.
5. Click on the [Tilt/Rotate] button to exit the oblique mode.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-13

Edit with the Active Annotation

Any of the red annotated areas can be changed. If you place the mouse over a red
annotated area, a description of the button flashes.The following explains the function of all
of the red annotations.
1. Edit the image number.
On the axial image, place your mouse over the red image number, type in the image
number, and press Enter.
As you type, the number is displayed in a gray pop-up box. You must press Enter
before the computer accepts the new number.
Click to increase the image number.
Right-click to decrease the image number.
Middle-click and drag right to increase and left to decrease the image number.
2. Edit the DFOV number.
On the Axial, Sagittal, Oblique and Coronal images, place your mouse over the red
DFOV number, type in the Display Field of View number, and press Enter.
As you type, the number is displayed in a gray pop-up box. You must press Enter
before the computer accepts the new number.
This magnifies or minifies the image.
Click to decrease the DFOV.
Right-click to increase the DFOV.
Middle-click and drag right to increase and left to decrease the DFOV.
NOTE: You cannot increase more than the original DFOV. Changing the magnification only
affects the quadrant that you are in.
3. Roam the image.
On the Sagittal, Oblique, and Coronal images, place your mouse over the red RAS
coordinates, then click and drag to roam the image.
When you release the mouse button, the image is deposited at that point.
The other planes that are linked in green frames updates to the deposited point.
NOTE: Roam is not available on the original DFOV scanned axial image. It is available on a
magnified axial image or a scan that is longer in millimeters than the DFOV.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-14

4. Hide or show the patient’s name.

On any view, place your mouse over the red patient’s name, click and hold the right
button, and click [Hide] to hide the patient’s name.
To show the patient name again, click and hold the right button over the red asterisks
and click [Show] to show the patient’s name.
This affects all quadrants.
5. Edit the Window Width or Window Level numbers.
On any view, place your mouse over the red Window Width or Window Level
numbers. Type the new number and press Enter.
As you type, the number is displayed in a gray pop-up box. You must press Enter
before the computer accepts the new number.
Click to increase the Window Width or Level.
Right-click to decrease the Window Width or Level.
Middle-click the button and drag right to increase and left to decrease the Window
Width or Level.
NOTE: Remember you can always use the middle mouse button to change the window width
and level.
Middle-click and drag from side to side to change the window width.
Middle-click and drag up and down to change the window level.
The slice thickness and rendering mode red annotations are covered in Prescribe a Multi
Projection Volume Reformation (MPVR).

Quick Steps: Edit with the Active Annotation

1. Edit the image number.
2. Edit the DFOV number.
3. Roam the image.
4. Hide or show the patient’s name.
5. Edit the Window Width or Window Level numbers.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-15

Adjust the Cross-Reference Image

The cross-reference area defaults to an axial image. To change to another orientation, you
have to change the cross-reference image. If the cross-referenced image is over the
anatomy of interest, you can relocate it.
1. Place the mouse cursor over the cross-reference image, right-click and select the plane
of interest.
You can choose Axial, Sagittal, or Coronal.

2. Place the mouse cursor over the cross-reference image, right-click and select the
location of interest.

Northeast would move the image to the upper right corner of the screen.
Southwest would move the image to the lower left corner of the screen.
Northwest would move the image to the upper left corner of the screen.
Southeast would become available only if the cross-reference image was moved
from its original location.

Quick Steps: Adjust the Cross-Reference Image

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-16

Use the Main on View Menu Features

If you click and hold the right button (right-click) anywhere on the quadrant, except the red
annotations points, the Main on View menu displays. You can drag the mouse to the desired
function and release the button. This task defines how to use each of these features.

1. Right-click anywhere on the quadrant, except the red annotation points, and select the
desired feature.
Screen save
– If you click screen save, the view is saved on the hard disk for future display. It is
placed on the Browser for the exam under a Reformat Type. If you recall the
image from the Browser, the cross-reference image and 3D cursor is not on the
image. If the oblique image is screen saved, the rotation box is not on the image.
Clear last point
– This option appears only if you have created a trace and if the trace is active.
– Clear point clears the last deposited point on the trace.
– You can keep selecting clear last point to keep removing points.
Clear trace
– This option appears only if you have created a trace.
– Clear trace erases the entire trace.
Enlarge
– If you click Enlarge, the image enlarges to the full viewing area. The option then
becomes Reset size to return to the normal view.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-17

NOTE: This function does not exist on Profile, Histogram, or X Section views.
Clear reference images
– This removes the cross-reference image from the quadrant and replace it with a
cube reference. The option then becomes Reference images to restore the
reference image to the quadrant.
Lock orientation
– Lock orientation is only available on the oblique view. When selected, the image is
locked in its current rotation. The rotation box disappears and the manual rotation
buttons does not function. This option becomes Unlock orientation to return the
rotation capabilities.
– This is a good tool if you have it rotated correctly and you do not want it to
change.
Reset pointer
– Reset pointer returns the 3D cursor to the center of the viewport on all viewports.
This function does not exist on Profile, Histogram, or X Section views.

Quick Steps: Use the Main on View Menu Features

1. Right-click anywhere on the quadrant, except the red annotation points, and select
the desired feature.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-18

Create Measurements
When you click on the Graphics Menu, the following options are displayed: Distance, Angle,
Area, and User Annot/Trace. Please note that when any of the graphic functions are
selected, the measurements is applied to the viewport in primary focus.

CAUTION: Note that the measurements are accurate only if the trace segments are
longer than the slice interval.

Measure Distance
1. Click Graphics > Distance.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-19

When you click distance, a line appears, as well as the Graphics Command Window.

2. Press and hold the ALT key, click and drag the red box on the line to the starting position.
When you release the mouse button, the red box on the line is deposited there.
3. Press and hold the ALT key, click and drag the other red box on the line to the ending
position.
When you release the mouse button, the red box on the line is deposited there.
NOTE: The distance readout appears in yellow annotation automatically. You can move this
annotation around by clicking and dragging the annotation to a new location.
4. To move the line, click and drag the [Drop to Rotate Trace] box from the Graphics
Command Window over the red line.

A box appears over the line.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-20

5. Click and drag the center point to the new location.

When you release the mouse button, the line trace is deposited to the new location.
You can also change the start and end location of the line by clicking and dragging
the [Drop to Edit Trace] box over the trace line and then adjust the start and end
points to a new location.
6. Click [Close].
This closes the window.
This also removes the [Drop to Rotate Trace] box.

Quick Steps: Create Measurements-Measure Distance

1. Click Graphics > Distance.
2. Press and hold the ALT key, click and drag the red box on the line to the starting
position.
3. Press and hold the ALT key, click and drag the other red box on the line to the ending
position.
4. To move the line, click and drag the [Drop to Rotate Trace] box from the Graphics
Command Window over the red line.
5. Click and drag the center point to the new location.
6. Click [Close].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-21

Create Measurements
Measure an Angle
1. Click Graphics > Angle.
When you click angle, a three point trace appears, as well as the Graphics Command
Window.

2. Press and hold the ALT key, click and drag the red box on the line to the starting position.
When you release the mouse button, the red box on the line is deposited there.
3. Press and hold the ALT key, click and drag the other red box on the line to the middle
position.
When you release the mouse button, the red box on the line is deposited there.
4. Press and hold the ALT key, click and drag the other red box on the line to the ending
position.
When you release the mouse button, the red box on the line is deposited there.
NOTE: The angle readout appears in yellow annotation automatically. You can move this
annotation around by clicking and dragging the annotation to a new location.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-22

5. To move the angle, click and drag the [Drop to Rotate Trace] box from the Graphics
Command Window over the red line.

A box appears over the line.

6. Click and drag the center point to the new location.
When you release the mouse button, the angle trace is deposited to the new location.
You can also change the start and end location of the line by clicking and dragging
the [Drop to Edit Trace] box over the trace line and then adjust the start and end
points to a new location.
7. Click [Close].
This closes the window.
This removes the [Drop to Rotate Trace] box.

Quick Steps: Create Measurements-Measure an Angle

1. Click Graphics > Angle.
2. Press and hold the ALT key, click and drag the red box on the line to the starting
position.
3. Press and hold the ALT key, click and drag the other red box on the line to the middle
position.
4. Press and hold the ALT key, click and drag the other red box on the line to the ending
position.
5. To move the angle, click and drag the [Drop to Rotate Trace] box from the Graphics
Command Window over the red line.
6. Click and drag the center point to the new location.
7. Click [Close].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-23

Create Measurements
Measure an Area
1. Click Graphics > Area.
When you click area, a closed four point trace appears, as well as the Graphics
Command Window.

2. Press and hold the ALT key, click and drag the red box on the line to the starting position.
When you release the mouse button, the red box on the line is deposited there.
3. Press and hold the ALT key, click and drag the next red box on the line to the next
position.
When you release the mouse button, the red box on the line is deposited there.
4. Press and hold the ALT key, click and drag the next red box on the line to the next
position.
When you release the mouse button, the red box on the line is deposited there.
5. Press and hold the ALT key, click and drag the last red box on the line to the ending
position.
When you release the mouse button, the red box on the line is deposited there.
NOTE: The area readout appears in yellow annotation automatically. You can move this
annotation around by clicking and dragging the annotation to a new location.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-24

6. To move the area, click and drag the [Drop to Rotate Trace] box from the Graphic
Command Window over the red line.

A box appears over the line.

7. Click and drag the center point to the new location.
When you release the mouse button, the area trace is deposited to the new location.
8. Click [Close].
This closes the window.
This removes the [Drop to Rotate Trace] box.

Quick Steps: Create Measurements-Measure an Area

1. Click Graphics > Area.
2. Press and hold the ALT key, click and drag the red box on the line to the starting
position.
3. Press and hold the ALT key, click and drag the next red box on the line to the next
position.
4. Press and hold the ALT key, click and drag the next red box on the line to the next
position.
5. Press and hold the ALT key, click and drag the last red box on the line to the ending
position.
6. To move the area, click and drag the [Drop to Rotate Trace] box from the Graphic
Command Window over the red line.
7. Click and drag the center point to the new location.
8. Click [Close].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-25

Adjust Display Preferences

The Display Modes function allows you to change display preferences while in Reformat.
When you click Display Modes, the display preferences pull-down menu appears. For the
ease of your learning, the display preferences have been arranged into groups according to
their function.
• Choose Cursor Annotations includes Show Annotations, Cursor Icon, Cursor Lock to
Trace, and XY Lock.
• Choose Graphic Options includes Apply To, Show Graphics, Graphic on Reformatted
Views, and Free Hand Trace
• Choose Ruler Styles
• Set up Film Options

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-26

Choose Cursor Annotations

Show Annotations
1. Click [Display Pref].

The cursor/annotations card is always forward.

2. Click Show Annotations > Yes or No.

Click Yes to display all of the annotation on the selected views.
Click No to remove all of the annotation on the selected views.
3. Click [Close].
This closes the window.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-27

Quick Steps: Adjust Display Preferences-Show Annotations

1. Click [Display Pref].
2. Click Show Annotations > Yes or No.
3. Click [Close].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-28

Choose Cursor Annotations

Cursor Icon Function

The Cursor Icon function allows you to choose from three 3D cursor types. The default is the
dot.
1. Click [Display Pref].
2. Click Cursor Icon > Dot.
This opens a pull-down menu of all three cursor types: Dot, Crosshair or Arrow.
3. Select the cursor style you want.
4. Click [Close].
This closes the window.

Lock Cursor to Trace

The Lock Cursor to Trace function locks the 3D cursor to the traced line. You can still move
the 3D cursor along the line.
1. Click [Display Pref].
2. Set Lock Cursor to Trace to lock or unlock.
The Lock Cursor to Trace function uses an on/off toggle button.
a) Select the button next to the Lock Cursor to Trace function.
– The button highlights.
– This locks the 3D cursor to the trace.
b) Select the button again and the button un-highlights.
– This unlocks the 3D cursor from the trace.
3. Click [Close].
This closes the window.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-29

Quick Steps: Choose Cursor Annotations

Cursor Icon Function
1. Click [Display Pref].
2. Click Cursor Icon > Dot.
3. Select the cursor style you want.
4. Click [Close].
Lock Cursor to Trace
1. Click [Display Pref].
2. Set Lock Cursor to Trace to lock or unlock.
3. Click [Close].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-30

Choose Cursor Annotations

XY Lock
The XY Lock function restricts the 3D cursor movement to the XY axis. When activated, the
3D cursor becomes the point of intersection for the two lines. It can still be moved as you
would move the 3D cursor if it were a dot.
1. Click [Display Pref].
The cursor/annotations card is always forward.
2. Set XY Lock to lock or unlock.
The XY Lock function uses an on/off toggle button.
a) Select the button next to the XY Lock function.
– The button highlights.
– The 3D cursor becomes the point of intersection for the two lines.
b) Select the button again and the button un-highlights.
– This unlocks the 3D cursor from the XY axis.
3. Click [Close].
This closes the window.

Quick Steps: Choose Cursor Annotations-XY Lock

1. Click [Display Pref].
2. Set XY Lock to lock or unlock.
3. Click [Close].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-31

Adjust Display Preferences

Choose Graphic Options

Apply To
The Apply To functions have a specific use in Reformat views. If you draw a trace on an
image to perform scalpeling, with all views on, the scalpeling is applied to all the views in the
display. If you have Selected Views selected, the scalpeling is applied to the view that you
are working on. For best results, leave Apply To functions at All Views and All Traces.
1. Click [Display Pref].
The cursor/annotation card is always be forward.
2. Click the [Graphics Option] tab card.

3. Click Apply to > All Views or Selected Views.

4. Click All Traces or Selected Traces.
5. Click [Close].

Show Graphics
The Show Graphics function allows you to either show or not show any graphics that are
done on a view. This includes traces and measurements. You normally want to click Yes.
1. Click [Display Pref].
Click the [Graphics Option] tab card.
2. Click Show Graphics > Yes or No.
This turns Show Graphics on or off.
3. Click [Close].
This closes the window.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-32

Quick Steps: Adjust Display Preferences-Choose Graphic Options

Apply To
1. Click [Display Pref].
2. Click the [Graphics Option] tab card.
3. Click Apply to > All Views or Selected Views.
4. Click All Traces or Selected Traces.
5. Click [Close].
Show Graphics
1. Click [Display Pref].
2. Click Show Graphics > Yes or No.
3. Click [Close].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-33

Choose Graphic Options

Graphics on Reformatted Views

The Graphics on Reformatted Views allows you to specify the way you want traces to be
displayed on cut plane views.
1. Click [Display Pref].
The cursor/annotation card is always forward.
2. Click the [Graphics Option] tab card.
This moves that card forward.
3. Click Intersection or Projection.
Click Intersection if you want to display only the part of the trace that intersects the
cut plane.
Click Projection if you want the projection of the entire trace to be seen on the cut
plane.
4. Click [Close].
This closes the window.

Free Hand Trace

The Free Hand Trace function determines how you can create the trace. If Free Hand Trace
is turned off, you create a trace by depositing individual points. If you turn Free Hand Trace
on, you can draw a continuous trace line.
1. Click [Display Pref].
The cursor/annotation card is always forward.
2. Click the [Graphics Option] tab card.
3. Click Free Hand Trace > On or Off.
If you click Off, then to create a trace, you need to hold the Shift key down, and click
to deposit a point. Then move the mouse, and click again. Continue this process until
you have completed your trace.
If you click On, to create a trace, hold the Shift key down, then click once and drag
until your trace is completed.
4. Click [Close].
This closes the window.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-34

Quick Steps: Adjust Display Preferences-Choose Graphic Options

Graphics on Reformatted Views
1. Click [Display Pref].
2. Click the [Graphics Option] tab card.
3. Click Intersection or Projection.
4. Click [Close].
Free Hand Trace
1. Click [Display Pref].
2. Click the [Graphics Option] tab card.
3. Click Free Hand Trace > On or Off.
4. Click [Close].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-35

Adjust Display Preferences

Choose Ruler Styles
The Ruler Style function allows you to choose from a grid or tick ruler.
1. Click [Display Pref].
2. Click the [Identify mm, slices] tab card.
3. Click Identify slices > On or Off.
This button allows you to turn slice cross-reference markings on or off the primary
focus except the axial viewport.
4. Click Ruler style > None or Grid or Tick.
If you click Grid, a grid ruler appears on the primary view image. You can change the
spacing by placing your mouse cursor in the spacing box, back spacing through the
value, and type in the new value. Press Enter.
If you click Tick, a tick ruler appears on the primary view image. You can change the
spacing and range by placing your mouse cursor in the box, back spacing through
the value, and typing in the new value. Press Enter.
5. Click [Close].
This closes the window.

Quick Steps: Adjust Display Preferences-Choose Ruler Styles

1. Click [Display Pref].
2. Click the [Identify mm, slices] tab card.
3. Click Identify slices > On or Off.
4. Click Ruler style > None or Grid or Tick.
5. Click [Close].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-36

Adjust Display Preferences

Reverse Black and White Display
When you select the Color/Window tab card, you can choose the type of density window.
Click Linear to keep bone white, and air black. Click Negative to reverse the black and white.
1. Click [Display Pref].
The cursor/annotation card is always be forward.
2. Click the [Color/Window] tab card.
3. This moves this card forward.
Click Linear or Negative.
4. Click [Close].
This closes the window.

Quick Steps: Adjust Display Preferences-Reverse Black and White

Display
1. Click [Display Pref].
2. Click the [Color/Window] tab card.
3. This moves this card forward.
4. Click [Close].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-37

Adjust Display Preferences

Set Up Film Options
The tab card allows you to set up where you want your images to be filmed and how you
want to save your images in the Batch mode.
1. Click [Display Pref].
2. Click the [Film] tab card.
3. Click Show Cursor on Saved Images > Hide or Show.
This button is used to specify whether the cursor is visible on saved images.
4. In the Default FOV on magnification (mm.) text box, type the FOV you want to use.
This field is used to specify the default FOV used when a magnification or reduction is
performed.
This value should normally be set to the width of the film slot as determined by the
Image Works selected format on the film composer and the hard copy output device
being used.
This feature is used a lot when setting up the DentaScan option. The Service Engineer
can print out a file with a ruler on it and you can measure it and determine the FOV
from the measurement.
5. Next to Printer Selected, click [Laser Camera] and select the name of the camera you
want to use.
A listing of all the printers that are connected or networks to your machine appears.
You have to select this printer each time you use reformat batch filming.
6. Click [Close].
This closes the window.

Quick Steps: Adjust Display Preferences-Set Up Film Options

1. Click [Display Pref].
2. Click the [Film] tab card.
3. Click Show Cursor on Saved Images > Hide or Show.
4. In the Default FOV on magnification (mm.) text box, type the FOV you want to use.
5. Next to Printer Selected, click [Laser Camera] and select the name of the camera you
want to use.
6. Click [Close].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-38

Create Different View Types

When you click Reformat, an Oblique, Axial, Sagittal and Coronal image are displayed in a 4
on 1 format. This section is going to explain the other view types including: Curved, Profile,
Histogram, and X Section.
Create a Curved View Type
The curved function is very useful for displaying a reformat of curved or tortuous vessels or
organs. The first thing you need to do is display the anatomy on which you wish to trace in
one of the other viewports.
1. From the display monitor, click [Image Works].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-39

3. Click [Rfmt Detl] or [Rfmt Stnd].

Reformat Detail is a 512 x 512 matrix. You get better image quality using this mode.
Reformat Standard is a 256 x 256 matrix and builds faster.
4. Click View Type > Curved by clicking on the button of the viewport you wish to change.

The following list should appear.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-40

This changes the viewport to a blue color.

5. Start tracing along the anatomy of interest.

You can trace on an axial, sagittal or coronal image.
To create a trace, place the mouse cursor at the starting point, press and hold the
shift key as you deposit points along the anatomy.
As you are tracing, the curved image updates automatically.
You can change the location of the reference images by clicking on the image
number or image location and continuing your trace on the next image.
6. To exit, Click File > Quit.
A pop up message ask you if you are sure.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-41

7. Click [Yes].
This takes you back to the Browser.

Quick Steps: Create Different View Types-Create a Curved View Type

1. From the display monitor, click [Image Works].
2. Select the [Exam/Series/Images] that you want to reformat.
3. Click [Rfmt Detl] or [Rfmt Stnd].
4. Click View Type > Curved by clicking on the button of the viewport you wish to change.
5. Start tracing along the anatomy of interest.
6. To exit, Click File > Quit.
7. Click [Yes].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-42

Create Different View Types

Create a Profile View Type
Profile provides a gray scale graph along a trace. First create a trace on an axial, sagittal,
coronal or oblique view, then select Profile from the view type buttons.
1. From the display monitor click [Image Works].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-43

3. Click [Rfmt Detl] or [Rfmt Stnd].

Reformat Detail is a 512 x 512 matrix. You get better image quality using this mode.
Reformat Standard is a 256 x 256 matrix and builds faster.
4. Trace the anatomy of interest.
Create a trace on an axial, sagittal, coronal or oblique view.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-44

5. Click View Type > Profile by clicking on the button of the viewport you wish to change.

The following list should appear.

You now see the Profile view. It gives the intensities of the pixels along the trace that
you created. The horizontal axis of the profile view is the position in millimeters along
the trace and the vertical axis is the pixel intensity value as a function of that position.
If you lock the cursor to the trace from the cursor/annotations tab card under Display
Preferences button, as you move your mouse over that view and hit shift, you notice
the pixel intensity reference line on the graph. This line gives you the pixel intensity
from the location of the 3D cursor.
You can move the line by clicking and dragging the line itself or by placing the mouse
cursor on the desired position along the trace, then selecting the shift key on the
keyboard.
The value for the pixel intensity reference line can be seen below the position in
millimeter values on the horizontal axis.
At the bottom of the profile view are the pixel statistics of the trace. These values
represent the mean and standard deviation.
6. To exit, Click File > Quit.
A pop up message ask you if you are sure.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-45

7. Click [Yes].
This takes you back to the Browser.

Quick Steps: Create Different View Types-Create a Profile View Type

1. From the display monitor click [Image Works].
2. Select the [Exam/Series/Images] that you want to reformat.
3. Click [Rfmt Detl] or [Rfmt Stnd].
4. Trace the anatomy of interest.
5. Click View Type > Profile by clicking on the button of the viewport you wish to change.
6. To exit, Click File > Quit.
7. Click [Yes].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-46

Create Different View Types

Create a Histogram View Type
The volume Histogram view provides a variety of information. This information includes the
ability to display a histogram showing the percentage of occurrence of each voxel intensity
value in an object. It also provides numerical statistics about the voxel intensity value in an
object plus the total object of an volume. Also, it automatically determines boundaries
around the class of similar voxel intensities. This function is typically used when you have
3D data. Otherwise, the volume statistics are not valid. Please keep this in mind on the
following descriptions of volume and class volume. Please note that the tolerance for error
in the total volume measurements is directly proportional to the surface area of the object.
1. From the display monitor, click [Image Works].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-47

3. Click [Rfmt Detl] or [Rfmt Stnd].

Reformat Detail is a 512 x 512 matrix. You get better image quality using this mode.
Reformat Standard is a 256 x 256 matrix and builds faster.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-48

4. Click View Type > Histogram by clicking on the button of the viewport you wish to
change.

The following list should appear.

The Volume Histogram then appears giving the statistics of the object in primary
focus.
The Vertical Axis displays the percentage of occurrence of the pixel values that are on
the horizontal axis. The horizontal axis displays the pixel value range of the object in
the viewport.
The statistics at the bottom of the histogram are referring to the voxel in the primary
view. The statistics in the upper right are referring to the class of voxel in a specific
area of the object defined by the two dotted green lines on the graph. These lines are
referred to as the voxel class boundary lines. The solid white line corresponds to the
intensity of the voxel at the 3D cursor location in the object.
Remember, the voxel reference line references the voxel intensity at the 3D cursor.
The voxel class boundary lines reference the minimum and maximum intensities
around the 3D cursor.
5. If you place the mouse cursor on the voxel reference line and either click and hold the
left key or hold the shift key, the image displays green enhancement.
This represents the range between the voxel class boundary lines. You can change
the range by clicking and dragging one or both of the boundary lines to display the

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-49

desired range. If the voxel reference line is not visible, simply place the mouse cursor
anywhere along the horizontal axis and press the shift key.
The smoothing value is used to calculate the percentage of occurrence in relation to
the voxel intensity values. The default is 10, which means a range of plus or minus 10
is taken around each voxel intensity point on the horizontal axis. The greater the
smoothing value, the greater the smoothing effect on the histogram curve.
6. To exit, click File > Quit.
A pop up message ask you if you are sure.
7. Click [Yes].
This takes you back to the Browser.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-50

Quick Steps: Create Different View Types-Create a Histogram View

Type
1. From the display monitor, click [Image Works].
2. Select the [Exam/Series/Images] that you want to reformat.
3. Click [Rfmt Detl] or [Rfmt Stnd].
4. Click View Type > Histogram by clicking on the button of the viewport you wish to
change.
5. If you place the mouse cursor on the voxel reference line and either click and hold the
left key or hold the shift key, the image displays green enhancement.
6. To exit, click File > Quit.
7. Click [Yes].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-51

Create Different View Types

Create an X Section View Type
The cross section histogram view provides to you a variety of information, including the
percentage of occurrence of each pixel intensity value in a user-defined surface area on a
reformatted slice. It also provides numerical statistics about the pixel intensity values in the
same surface area plus the calculation of this area. Also, it automatically determines
boundaries around a class of similar pixel intensity values in these areas. The tolerance for
error in the total area measurement is directly proportional to the perimeter of the object.
1. From the display monitor click, [Image Works].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-52

3. Click [Rfmt Detl] or [Rfmt Stnd].

Reformat Detail is a 512 x 512 matrix. You get better image quality using this mode.
Reformat Standard is a 256 x 256 matrix and builds faster.
4. Create a closed trace around the area of interest.
To create a trace, place the mouse cursor at the starting point and press and hold the
shift key as you deposit points along the anatomy.
You need to define at least three points.
Make sure that the view is in primary focus.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-53

5. Click View Type > X Section by clicking on the button of the viewport you wish to
change.

The following list should appear.

The Cross Section View appears.

The vertical axis displays the percentage of occurrence of each pixel intensity value
in the traced area. The horizontal axis displays the intensity values in the traced area.
The statistics at the bottom reference the entire defined area. The pixel class
statistics at the upper right reference a specified area within the defined area.
The pixel class boundary lines (the green dotted lines) represent the minimum and
maximum pixel intensity values that are part of the pixel class statistics.
The pixel reference line (the white line) corresponds to the intensity of the pixel at the
3D cursor location. The numeric value for this line can be seen to the right of the line
just above the horizontal axis. The pixel reference line can be moved by placing the
mouse cursor on the line, then clicking and dragging, or by placing the mouse cursor
on the graph and pressing the shift key. If you move the 3D cursor on the image, this
moves the pixel reference line also.
The smoothing value is used to calculate the percentage of occurrence in relation to
the pixel intensity values. The default is 10, which means a range of plus or minus 10
is taken around each pixel intensity point on the horizontal axis. The greater the
smoothing value, the greater the smoothing effect on the cross section curve.
6. To exit, click File > Quit.
A pop up message ask you if you are sure.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-54

7. Click [Yes].
This takes you back to the Browser.

Quick Steps: Create Different View Types-Create an X Section View

Type
1. From the display monitor click, [Image Works].
2. Select the [Exam/Series/Images] that you want to reformat.
3. Click [Rfmt Detl] or [Rfmt Stnd].
4. Create a closed trace around the area of interest.
5. Click View Type > X Section by clicking on the button of the viewport you wish to
change.
6. To exit, click File > Quit.
7. Click [Yes].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-55

Create Different View Types

Prescribe a Multi Projection Volume Reformation (MPVR)
Multi Projection Volume Reformation can be defined as a thick slab reformatted image. You
can change the rendering mode to Average, Mip or Min IP. You can also change the
thickness of the slab that you want to display. MPVR can be used to see vessels in CTA scans.
1. From the Browser, select the exam, series and images that you want to include in your
model.
2. Click [Rfmt Detl] or [Rfmt Stnd].
3. Click Build Model > MPVR.
The model builds with the mip view in the upper left corner.
4. Click [Oblique Mode].

5. Select the axial, sagittal or coronal image and rotate the yellow line by clicking and
dragging it into the desired position.
6. Change the slice thickness in the oblique viewport to the desire thickness.
Place the mouse cursor over the red thickness annotation and type in the desired
thickness and press Enter.
7. Change the rendering mode.
Place the mouse over the red annotation word mip and while holding down the right
mouse button, select which mode you desire.
MIP is used most often in CTA models to demonstrate all the voxels that have the
most intensity like calcium.
8. To quit, click File > Quit.
A pop-up window appears, click [Yes].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-56

Quick Steps: Create Different View Types-Prescribe a Multi Projection

Volume Reformation (MPVR)
1. From the Browser, select the exam, series and images that you want to include in your
model.
2. Click [Rfmt Detl] or [Rfmt Stnd].
3. Click Build Model > MPVR.
4. Click [Oblique Mode].
5. Select the axial, sagittal or coronal image and rotate the yellow line by clicking and
dragging it into the desired position.
6. Change the slice thickness in the oblique viewport to the desire thickness.
7. Change the rendering mode.
8. To quit, click File > Quit.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-57

Create and Save a Batch Protocol

Batch is used to set up a series of reformatted images. This can be used for cine rotations of
reformatted images or a rapid way to save or film a series of reformatted images.
1. Click on the reformatted image to make it the primary view.
This puts a red frame around the image.
2. Click [Batch].

This opens the Movie command window.

From this command window, you can choose to set up batch filming or a movie loop
on reformatted images.
The system default is to Graphic Rx.
The Graphic Rx button allows you to do a graphic prescription for previewing, printing
and or saving reformatted images.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-58

Quick Steps: Create and Save a Batch Protocol

1. Click on the reformatted image to make it the primary view.
2. Click [Batch].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-59

Create and Save a Batch Protocol

Set Up a Rotation Prescription
Set Up a Rotation Prescription is used to set up a reformatted cine loop. This is the preferred
method or the easiest way to set up a defined prescription.
1. Click [Rotation].

2. Click on the yellow arrow over the reformatted image to select which way you want the
model to rotate.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-60

3. Set the Number of views.

Place your mouse in the Number of views text box, back space to delete the current
value, type in the new value and press Enter.
When you make any changes to any of the numerical text boxes and press Enter, all
of the other text boxes update.

4. Set the desired Field of view for the batch being prescribed.
Place your mouse in the Field of view text box, back space to delete the current value,
type in the new value and press Enter.
Remember, the smaller the number, the greater the magnification to the reformatted
image.
5. Set the Angle between views.
Place your mouse in the Angle between views text box, back space to delete the
current value, type in the new value and press Enter.

Quick Steps: Create and Save a Batch Protocol-Set Up a Rotation

Prescription
1. Click [Rotation].
2. Click on the yellow arrow over the reformatted image to select which way you want
the model to rotate.
3. Set the Number of views.
4. Set the desired Field of view for the batch being prescribed.
5. Set the Angle between views.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-61

Create and Save a Batch Protocol

Set Up an Oblique Prescription
1. Click on the reference image to make it the primary view.
This puts a red frame around the image.
2. Click [Oblique].

You see a display of green lines appear on the image.

3. Click on the center green box and drag the green lines over the anatomy of interest.
4. Click and drag the green box on either end line to adjust the tilt and number of slices.
On the command window, you can manually input the number of slices.
5. Place your mouse completely in the number of views field, back space to delete the
current value, type in the new value and press the Enter key.
When you make any changes to any of the numerical fields and press Enter, all of the
other fields update.
6. Place your mouse completely in the slice thickness field, back space to delete the
current value, type in the new value and press the Enter key.
The maximum thickness cannot exceed 50 voxels.

The maximum thickness value is the minimum times 50. For example, if the minimum
was 6 then the maximum thickness would be 30.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-62

7. Click over the word Average, and click MIP or Min IP.
The default rendering mode is Average, meaning it provides the average density
values of the slice taken along lines perpendicular to it.
If you click MIP, meaning maximum intensity pixel, the image changes to display the
maximum density value of the slice taken along lines perpendicular to it.
If you click Min IP, meaning minimum intensity pixel, the image changes to display the
minimum density value of the slice taken along the lines perpendicular to it.
This render mode is applied to the batch images.
NOTE: This is only active if you select a slice thickness of two or more voxels.
8. Place your mouse completely in the Field of View field, back space to delete the current
value, type in the new value and press the Enter key.
This is used to set the desired field of view for the batch being prescribed.
Remember, the smaller the number, the greater the magnification to the reformatted
image.
9. Place your mouse completely in the mm. between views field, back space to delete the
current value, type in the new value and press the Enter key.
This is used to set the spacing between slices.

Quick Steps: Create and Save a Batch Protocol-Set Up an Oblique

Prescription
1. Click on the reference image to make it the primary view.
2. Click [Oblique].
3. Click on the center green box and drag the green lines over the anatomy of interest.
4. Click and drag the green box on either end line to adjust the tilt and number of slices.
5. Place your mouse completely in the number of views field, back space to delete the
current value, type in the new value and press the Enter key.
6. Place your mouse completely in the slice thickness field, back space to delete the
current value, type in the new value and press the Enter key.
7. Click over the word Average, and click MIP or Min IP.
8. Place your mouse completely in the Field of View field, back space to delete the
current value, type in the new value and press the Enter key.
9. Place your mouse completely in the mm. between views field, back space to delete the
current value, type in the new value and press the Enter key.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-63

Create and Save a Batch Protocol

Set Up a Manual Prescription Using First and Last Views
Selecting the First View/Last View button allows you to set up a manual start and end
location for a batch prescription or movie loop.
1. Click [First View/Last View].

2. Move and/or rotate the view or place the 3D cursor in the desired position.
Make sure the view you want is in primary focus.
3. Click [First View].

Make sure that the view you want is still in primary focus.
4. Move and/or rotate the view or place the 3D cursor in the desired final position.
5. Click [Final View].
6. Set the Angle between views.
Place your mouse in the Angle between views text box, back space to delete the
current value, type in the new value and press Enter.
7. Set the Number of views.
Place your mouse in the Number of views text box, back space to delete the current
value, type in the new value and press Enter.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-64

Quick Steps: Create and Save a Batch Protocol-Set Up a Manual

Prescription Using First and Last Views
1. Click [First View/Last View].
2. Move and/or rotate the view or place the 3D cursor in the desired position.
3. Click [First View].
4. Move and/or rotate the view or place the 3D cursor in the desired final position.
5. Click [Final View].
6. Set the Angle between views.
7. Set the Number of views.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-65

Create and Save a Batch Protocol

Select the Output Device
This function allows you to preview the batch sequence and to save and/or print the images.
1. Click [Preview], [Printer], or [Save].
Use [Preview], which is the default, to view the batch sequence on the monitor.
Use [Printer] to send the batch to the laser imager.
Use [Save] to store the batch on the system disk. It resides on the Browser under a
new series. The way the image is saved depends on the filming setup under Display
Modes. If it is a screen save image, nothing can be changed. If it is a reformat type
save, you can do all of the graphic measurements and annotations.
If you click both [Save] and [Printer], the images are filmed and saved to the system
disk.

2. Click [6x4] to change the filming format. Click on the desired format.
When you choose the printer as the output mode, the format button becomes
available, and the Number of copies text box appears.
The first number is the vertical layout and the second number is for the horizontal
layout.
3. Set the Number of copies of film.
Place your mouse in the Number of copies text box, back space to delete the current
value, type in the new value, and press Enter.
10 copies is the maximum that you can enter.

Quick Steps: Create and Save a Batch Protocol-Select the Output

Device
1. Click [Preview], [Printer], or [Save].
2. Click [6x4] to change the filming format. Click on the desired format.
3. Set the Number of copies of film.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-66

Create and Save a Batch Protocol

Apply the Batch Prescription
This function applies all of the parameters you have defined in the batch protocol.
1. Click [Apply].
This starts the batch sequence.
The batch is sent to the selected output mode.
A window appears.

2. Select Loop mode > Rock or Loop.

The default is Loop, which means that the images are displayed in a continual loop
from the first image to the last.
If Rock is selected, the images are displayed from the first to the last image, then
from the last to the first image, and continue in a back and forth mode.
3. Adjust the display speed.
Click and drag the Display speed slider to the desired location.
You can change the display speed from 1 to 20 images per second.
The default is 10 images per second.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-67

4. To manually change the Image index, click [Pause].

When [Pause] is selected, it changes to [Restart].
The Image index area is used to visualize or adjust what images are being viewed.
You can click and drag the Image index slider or click [Step] to go to the next image.
5. To restart the movie loop, click [Restart].
6. Click [Stop].
This stops the movie loop and return to the Batch window.
7. Click [Close].
This returns you to reformat.

Quick Steps: Create and Save a Batch Protocol-Apply the Batch

Prescription
1. Click [Apply].
2. Select Loop mode > Rock or Loop.
3. Adjust the display speed.
4. To manually change the Image index, click [Pause].
5. To restart the movie loop, click [Restart].
6. Click [Stop].
7. Click [Close].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-68

Create and Save a Batch Protocol

Save a Protocol
1. Click [Add Protocol].

Selecting add protocol allows you to save the current graphic Rx batch parameters
for future use.
This opens a Store as window.

2. Place the mouse cursor in the field and type in the name of the protocol.
3. Click [OK].
The protocol is now saved.
Use a Protocol
1. Click [Get Protocol].
This allows you to pick from a list of saved protocols.
2. Select the protocol of interest.
The parameters appears on the image.
Delete a Protocol
1. Click [Delete Protocol].
Use this only if you want to get rid of a protocol.
A pull down menu displays listing the protocols available to delete.
A message stating "Do you really want to delete protocol name?" appears.
2. Click [Yes] or [No].
Select Yes to get rid of the protocol.
Select No to return to the batch window. This does not delete the protocol.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-69

Quick Steps: Create and Save a Batch Protocol

Save a Protocol
1. Click [Add Protocol].
2. Place the mouse cursor in the field and type in the name of the protocol.
3. Click [OK].
Use a Protocol
1. Click [Get Protocol].
2. Select the protocol of interest.
Delete a Protocol
1. Click [Delete Protocol].
2. Click [Yes] or [No].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-70

Save and Load a Model

This operation is use for saving a model for use later. You cannot archive this model or
transfer it to a different station.
1. While the model is on the screen, click File > Save Model.
This saves the model as a reformat series.
2. From the pop-up menu, name the model whatever you desire.
3. To load a saved model, select the reformat series then click [Rfmt Detl] or [Rfmt Stnd].

Quick Steps: Save and Load a Model

1. While the model is on the screen, click File > Save Model.
2. From the pop-up menu, name the model whatever you desire.
3. To load a saved model, select the reformat series then click [Rfmt Detl] or [Rfmt Stnd].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 34-71

Chapter 35
Reformat (PC Based System)

Introduction
The Reformat software is located in the Image Works desktop. It generates reconstructed
cut planes on CT images.
This chapter explains the process of using reformat. It provides step-by-step instructions to
learn how to:
• Select and Build an Image Set
• Using Layout Presets
– Create a Layout Preset
– Modify or Delete Layout Presets
• Move the Orthogonal View Locations
• Adjust the Oblique View Angle
• Edit with the Active Annotation
• Adjust the Cross-Reference Image
• Use the Main On-View Menu Features
• Create Measurements
– Measure Distance
– Measure an Angle
– Measure an Area

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-1

• Adjust Display Preferences

– Show Annotations
– Trace
– Choose Ruler Styles
– Identify Slices
– 3D Cursor
– Reference Image
– Paging Mode
• Set Up Film Options
• Set Up a Batch Protocol
– Use a Protocol
– Delete a Protocol
• Create and Save a Movie Protocol
– Set Up a Manual Prescription Using Steps
– Apply the Movie Prescription
• Create Different View Types
– Create a Curved View Type
– Create a Profile View Type
– Create a Histogram View Type
– Create an X Section View Type
• Prescribe a Multi Projection Volume Reformation (MPVR)

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-2

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to successfully complete the process of
creating and managing image sets for reformat. Specifically you need to understand:
• Requirements for Reformat
• Main Control Panel
– Layout Presets
– Tools
– Rotate Translation
– Close
• Review Controller
• Reformat Layout
• What are the Cursor Controls?
• What is the Plane Orientation Indicator?
• What are View Types?
• What are Render Modes?
• What is Batch?
• What is the Main On View Menu?
• WorkArounds

Requirements for Reformat

Certain requirements need to be met to have a valid image set in order to perform reformat.
They are as follows:
• Matrix Size
• Display Center
• Orientation
(The above requirements need to be the same for all images in the set.)
• There must be at least four images selected before selecting reformat.
• Tilt acquisitions are not supported for right and left decubitus patient orientation.
• You cannot have two images with identical locations.
• Spacing must be less than 10 millimeters and the set should include only axial, sagittal
or coronal images.
Different Display Field Of Views (DFOV) and Gantry Tilts can be loaded however you have to
select between different sources of images to view them. The source annotation is located
in the upper left corner of the image (Figure 35-1). You can change between sources by
clicking on the red annotation.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-3

Figure 35-1 source Annotation

Main Control Panel

The principal controls in the Main Control Panel (Figure 35-2) are:
Figure 35-2 Main Control Panel

Layout
Presets

Tools

Rotation
Translation

Display
Tools

Filming Tools

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-4

Layout Presets
You are able to store a specific layout context, allowing you to recreate it without having to
independently set each of the parameters again.
The following settings can be saved in the Layout Presets:
Screen / Image layout (axial, coronal, sagittal...)
Field of View (FOV) settings
Window Width and Window Level (W/L)
Slice Thickness Display Algorithm (MIP, MinIP...)
Motion lock
Orientation

Tools
Tilt Rotate Mode
In the Tilt/ Rotate mode, as soon as you move the mouse pointer onto the
oblique view, a red "cube" symbol with "handles" in the corners and on the sides
appears on the view.
You can use two different methods to rotate the oblique plane. To rotate and tilt the oblique
plane in any direction:
• Click on one of the corners of the cube. If the view wasn't selected before, it is now
selected.
• Click and drag the mouse around. The oblique plane will start to rotate with mouse
movement. Keep holding down the mouse button until the oblique plane has rotated to
the new position. When the desired orientation is reached, release the mouse button.
To constrain the rotation of the oblique plane to an axis parallel to one of the edges of the
cube:
• Click and drag the rotation marker in the middle of the edge of the cube parallel to the
axis around which you want to rotate the oblique plane. If the view wasn't selected
before, it is now selected.
• Still holding the mouse button down, drag the mouse around. The oblique plane will
start to rotate with mouse movement, but it will rotate only around the axis parallel to
the selected edge. Keep holding down the mouse button until the oblique plane has
rotated to the new position. When the desired orientation is reached, release the mouse
button.

Oblique Mode
The oblique view is aligned so as to be perpendicular to the primary view. A
solid line on the primary view indicates the intersection with the oblique view.
Thin dotted lines indicate the intersection with the baseline views.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-5

You can now rotate the oblique plane around the 3D cursor (i.e., around an axis
perpendicular to the baseline view) by clicking and dragging the solid line on the primary
view. The oblique view is updated at the same time.
NOTE: The software rotates the oblique view so it is as close as possible to one of the baseline
orientations. This means that the view may jump when it is halfway between two
orientations.
In oblique mode, you cannot perform two or more successive rotations in different
planes by first selecting one baseline view, then another. As soon as you select
another baseline view in oblique mode, the oblique plane is realigned to be
perpendicular to that baseline view, and you lose your previous settings.
If you want to perform rotations in different planes, you can either use Oblique mode for the
first alignment and then switch to Tilt/ Rotate mode, or create a second oblique view.

Rotate Translation
You can use Rotate/Translate to change the orientation of
the oblique plane or move the 3D cursor in precise steps. You
can also return the oblique plane to one of the baseline
orientations.
Select the oblique view by clicking on the red border. To
rotate the oblique plane in steps, select [Rotate/Translate] > [By deg] (Figure 35-3). In the
numerical entry field, enter the required angle step in degrees. Click on the arrow button
corresponding to the desired direction of rotation. To move the 3D cursor in steps, select
[Rotate/Translate] > [By mm]. In the numerical entry field, enter the required distance step
in millimeters. Click on the arrow button corresponding to the desired direction of
translation. If after repeated rotations you want to rapidly return the oblique view to a
known baseline orientation, use the [S] [I] [A] [P] [L] [R] buttons on the main control panel.
Figure 35-3 Rotate Translate

NOTE: To return the 3D cursor to the initial position at the center of the image, select [Reset
pointer] in the on view menu.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-6

Close
The [Close] button allows you to close the Reformat application and return to the Image
Works Browser.
NOTE: When you close the application, any work in progress that has not yet been filmed or
saved will be lost.

Review Controller
One of the new features of Reformat is the existence of a Review Controller (Figure 35-4),
which allows you an on-view operation of the main controls provided for the software. Table
35-1 describes the functions of each of these controls.
Figure 35-4 Review Controller

Using the Review Controller is the easiest way to view

images. All the viewing tools are in the margins for
easy access.
11

NOTE: These tools are available if you have the

viewport selected or if your cursor is over the
view.

10 12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 13
14

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-7

Table 35-1 Review Controller Description

Number Icon Name Description

Job Shuttle starts paging at selected speeds in a selected
1 Job Shuttle
direction. This is useful with Auto Loop and Auto Rock.
Auto Loop allows you to have the views appear in a continuous
forward mode, in a loop movement. When the system reaches
2 Auto Loop
the last view, it starts up again with the first one. Click to start
and stop.
Auto Rock allows you to have the views appear in a continuous
forward to backward movement. When the system reaches the
3 Auto Rock
last view in a forward movement, it starts up again backwards
and vice versa. Click to start and stop.

Report Pixel gives you the houndsfield measurements for one

4 Report Pixel
pixel value.

Distance Selecting Distance Tool opens a panel that allows you to

6
Tool execute distance measures for straight or curved lines.
Selecting Annotation Tool opens a panel that allows you to use
Create
7 predefined annotations on the views. You can also create new
Annotation
annotations here.
Selecting Scalpel opens up a panel that allows you to define
8 Scalpel
any kind of cut of the view you may need.
Selecting Enlarge makes the current view take up the entire
Enlarge/
9 viewing area. The icon then becomes Split Views for returning
Split Views
the view to its normal size.
Hide
10 Hides the controller.
Controller
Image location slider: The slider is used to review images. Click
and drag the Location Slider to move within the different slices.
Clicking once on the center bar of slider, or pressing the Control
keyboard key, will link the Location Slider to the mouse cursor.
Scroll to You can then move within the slices just by moving the mouse
11
Select Image up and down. Clicking again on the Location Slider, or releasing
the Control keyboard key, then unlinks the Location Slider from
the mouse cursor.
Slice Thickness: Click and drag the outer bars to change the
slice thickness of the images within the active viewport.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-8

Number Icon Name Description

Scroll to
Shows the next bookmarked image. A bookmark leaves a red
12 Next
annotation on the image.
Bookmark

Scroll to
13 Shows the previous bookmarked image.A bookmark leaves a
Prior
red annotation on the image.
Bookmark

Display Tools
The Display Tools menu (Figure 35-5) is where all the tools are located for measuring and
manipulating the images. Table 35-2 describes the functions located in the menu.
Figure 35-5 Display Tools

Table 35-2 Display Tools

Icon Name Description

View Color Use this to apply colors to a structure.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-9

Icon Name Description

Report Cursor This reports where the cursor is.

Use this to add annotation to an image. You can

Annotate
choose from the different styles listed.

These are preset annotations that are used often. You

Preset Annotation
can create new annotations here.

Measure Distance Use this to measure the distance between two points.

Measure Angle Use this to measure the angle of a structure.

Measure Area Use this to measure the area of a structure.

Measure Volume Use this to measure the volume of a structure.

Preferences Use this to set up display preferences.

Reformat Layout
Once the model is built, a 4-on-1 display appears with the main control panel on the left side
of the images. The images always display an oblique image in the upper left quadrant, an
axial in the upper right quadrant, a sagittal in the lower left quadrant, and a coronal in the
lower right quadrant. If you would like to change the default layout, you can use the
[Display Tools] and [View Layout] buttons near the bottom of the Main Control Panel. On
the display tools you can place your mouse over any button and a message about that
button appears.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-10

NOTE: There may be a small delay before the message comes up.

What are the Cursor Controls?

Reformat uses the 3D cursor, trackball cursor, and tilt cursor. The 3D cursor appears as a red
crosshair and identifies the same point on each view. If the 3D cursor is repositioned on one
view, the other connected views update based on the change. The trackball cursor appears
on the oblique view when the Tilt/Rotate icon is selected. The trackball cursor can be used
to rotate the oblique view by clicking and dragging the four corner or side handles. A solid
line cursor appears on the primary view when the oblique mode icon is selected. On the
orthogonal views the line cursor can be centered and angled adjusting the oblique views.

What is the Plane Orientation Indicator?

Reformat provides a plane orientation indicator in the lower right corner of each view. The
indicator cross-references the reformatted plane to the original (acquisition) plane image.

What are View Types?

There are several different view types in Reformat. They are No View, Axial, Sagittal, Coronal,
Oblique, Curved, Profile, Histogram, and X Section.
• Selecting No View simply blanks out the corresponding viewport. This could be useful if
you only want to view specific view types.
• An axial is an image representing a cross-sectional slice of anatomy.
• A sagittal is a lengthwise plane dividing the body into left and right portions.
• A coronal is a lengthwise plane through the body, dividing it into anterior and posterior
portions.
• An oblique plane is a coronal or sagittal plane that has been tilted through the body
rather than following the long axis. It can look like a axial image.
• A Curved image allows the definition of a complex, curved view. The curved view does
not need to lie along a single orthogonal or oblique plane but can follow anatomical
lines.
• Profile is a graph showing the CT number intensity across a location.
• The Volume Histogram view provides a variety of information, including the ability to
display a histogram showing the percentage of occurrence of each voxel intensity value
in an object. It also provides numerical statistics about the voxel intensity values in a
object plus the total object volume. Also, it automatically determines boundaries around
a class of similar voxel intensities and can hilight pixel values. This function is typically
used when you have 3D data; otherwise, the volume statistics are not valid.
• An X Section view displays a histogram showing the percentage of occurrence of each
pixel intensity value in a user-defined surface area on a reformatted slice. It also

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-11

provides numerical statistics about the pixel intensity values in this same surface area
plus the calculations of this area. It automatically determines boundaries around the
class of similar pixel intensity values in this area.

What are Render Modes?

Render modes consist of Surface, HD MIP, MIP, Min IP, Ray Sum, and Integral (Table 35-3).
Table 35-3 Reformat Render Modes

Mode Description
Exists only if the model was built using volume or surface mode and is used to
Surface
display the surface of a model.
Displays the model using the High Definition Maximum Intensity Projection mode.
HD MIP The mode is identical to the MIP mode as described below, except that image
definition is greater but the system speed is slower.
Displays the model using the Maximum Intensity Projection mode. In this mode,
MIP the density of each point on the screen is the maximum density along a line
perpendicular to the screen.
Displays the model using the Minimum Intensity Pixel mode. In this mode, the
Min IP density of each point on the screen in the minimum density along a line
perpendicular to the screen.
Displays the model by summing the model’s intensity along lines perpendicular to
Ray Sum
the screen. This mode simulates conventional radiography images.
Displays only the surface of the model, but the density of each surface point is
Integral equal to the sum of densities along a shallow depth below the displayed surface
point.

What is Batch?
The Batch command allows you to set up filming prescriptions or a movie loop on
reformatted images.

What is the Main On View Menu?

This menu is accessed by pressing and holding the right mouse button anywhere on a view
except on the red trackball control points, the 3D cursor or any of the red annotations. The
contents on this menu depends on the view type and whether traces are present on the
view. The options on this menu are: Save Image, Show Less Annotation, Hide Annotations,
Hide reference image, Create trace, Enlarge, and Reset pointer. Lock orientation, Center
on FOV, Center on Object, and Center on cursor only exists on oblique views. Save Image
allows you to save the view for future display. Show Less Annotation removes all the
information about the image except the patient’s name. Show All Annotation is available if

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-12

you have previously selected Show Less Annotation or Hide Annotation. This displays all of
the hidden or removed annotation. Hide Annotations removes all annotation from the
screen. Clear last point exists only if a trace is present and allows you to clear the last point
entered on the trace. Clear trace exists only if a trace is present and allows you to clear all
points from the trace, enabling you to restart trace entry. Enlarge allows you to zoom in by a
factor of two. This option then becomes Reset size for returning to the normal view. This
does not exist on Profile, Histogram, or X Section views. Hide reference image removes the
cross-reference image from the quadrant. Lock orientation allows you to lock an oblique
view orientation, i.e., to prevent rotation. This option then becomes Unlock orientation for
restoring rotation ability. Reset pointer allows you to center the 3D cursor in the reformat
field of view. This does not exist on Profile, Histogram, or X Section views.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-13

WorkArounds
Reformat may hang the system and then crash when selecting a camera in Film
Save Options if more than 12 cameras are installed on the system. Install less than 12
cameras to avoid this situation.
Sagittal images created from prone direct coronal position are distorted
Reformat will only allow filming in Batch to the first 30 cameras in the list. If another
camera is desired save the batch images to disk and use Print Series to film the
images.
Images saved from batch mode may appear to have jagged edges or not have
optimal Image Quality. Manually save the images to improve image quality.
Large image series may fail to load when using Reformat detail. This can be caused
by a small spacing interval between images or image sets greater than 1,000
images. Select a sub set of images if this occurs or use Reformat Standard to build
the model.
A series that has more than 1 group with 0.625mm slice thickness will fail to load for
reformat or will fail in Volume rendering on the AW. This is due to a mismatch in the spacing
between the groups. To avoid this, use only one scan group at a time if possible, otherwise
selectively highlight the images from the first group for Volume Analysis.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-14

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for creating Reformatted images.
Specifically, it describes how to:
• Select and Build an Image Set
• Using Layout Presets
– Create a Layout Preset
– Modify or Delete Layout Presets
• Move the Orthogonal View Locations
• Adjust the Oblique View Angle
• Edit with the Active Annotation
• Adjust the Cross-Reference Image
• Use the Main On-View Menu Features
• Create Measurements
– Measure Distance
– Measure an Angle
– Measure an Area
• Adjust Display Preferences
– Show Annotations
– Trace
– Choose Ruler Styles
– Identify Slices
– 3D Cursor
– Reference Image
– Paging Mode
• Set Up Film Options
– Set Up a Batch Protocol
– Set Up a Batch Protocol
– Use a Protocol
– Delete a Protocol
• Create and Save a Movie Protocol
– Set Up a Manual Prescription Using Steps
– Apply the Movie Prescription

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-15

• Create Different View Types

– Create a Curved View Type
– Create a Profile View Type
– Create a Histogram View Type
– Create an X Section View Type
• Prescribe a Multi Projection Volume Reformation (MPVR)

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-16

Select and Build an Image Set

When Selecting an Image Set, keep in mind that you have to have a valid image set.
1. From the display monitor, click [Image Works].

From the Browser, check all of the parameters to make sure that you have a valid
image set.
2. Select the Exam/Series/Images that you want to reformat.
You can select an exam and series. All the images are included if you do not select
any images.
If you want a selected range of images, you have to select the first image that you
want to include. Then find the last image in the range and, while holding down Shift,
select the last image. You could also click on the first image and drag through the
range of images.
To select specific images, you must hold down Ctrl on your keyboard as you click the
desired images.
You have to select at least four images for Reformat to work.
3. Click [Reformat].
The series selected is automatically displayed.

Quick Steps: Select and Build an Image Set

1. From the display monitor, click [Image Works].
2. Select the Exam/Series/Images that you want to reformat.
3. Click [Reformat].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-17

Layout Presets
The Layout Preset panel always contains a Layout Preset, which has the name of the
protocol initially used at software startup. This preset cannot be modified or deleted.
Using Layout Presets
This allows you to reverse to the parameters of the original protocol after having modified
some of them or applied a different Layout Preset, without having to leave the software or
to restore them manually.
1. Click on the name of the Layout Preset you want to apply to the currently displayed
exam.
If the name of the layout you want to apply does not appear in the Layout Presets
window of the Control Panel, click the [Options/More] button to open up a pull-down
menu containing a list of all the created layouts.
By clicking on the preset name in the list layout you wish to use, it is automatically
applied to the displayed images.
Create a Layout Preset
1. Click [Option/More] on the Layout Presets panel.
A pull-down menu opens up on the right of the panel.
2. Click [Save Layout].
The Save new layout preset panel is displayed on the bottom left viewport.
3. Enter the name of the Preset.
Naming the type of exam generally works.
Parameters can be set for each of the four views.
4. Click on the view you wish to modify.
5. Select all of the choices you desire.
6. Click on [Save] or [Cancel].
Select [Save] to save the layout.
Select [Cancel] to close the panel.
The new Layout Preset is created on the window of the Layout Preset panel.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-18

Quick Steps: Layout Presets

Using Layout Presets
1. Click on the name of the Layout Preset you want to apply to the currently displayed
exam.
Create a Layout Preset
2. Click [Option/More] on the Layout Presets panel.
3. Click [Save Layout].
4. Enter the name of the Preset.
5. Click on the view you wish to modify.
6. Select all of the choices you desire.
7. Click on [Save] or [Cancel].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-19

Layout Presets
Modify or Delete Layout Presets
1. Click the [Option/More] button of the Layout Preset panel.
A pull-down menu opens up on the right of the panel.
2. Click [Modify Layout].
The Preset Manager panel is displayed on the bottom left viewport.
3. Click [Click for Details] image to access to the Current Settings panel.
You can select or deselect the layout details you want to store in this particular
layout, by selecting the corresponding box. This can be done for each of the four
views.
4. Click on the view you wish to modify.
5. Click [Close] to close the sub-panel when you are finished.
6. Click [Rename] if you want to rename a layout.
A dialog window pops up allowing you to modify the name of the selected layout.
7. Click [Delete] if you want to remove a layout.
A message window pops up asking you to confirm if you want to delete the selected
layout.
8. Click [Close] to close the panel.

Quick Steps: Layout Presets-Modify or Delete Layout Presets

1. Click the [Option/More] button of the Layout Preset panel.
2. Click [Modify Layout].
3. Click [Click for Details] image to access to the Current Settings panel.
4. Click on the view you wish to modify.
5. Click [Close] to close the sub-panel when you are finished.
6. Click [Rename] if you want to rename a layout.
7. Click [Delete] if you want to remove a layout.
8. Click [Close] to close the panel.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-20

Move the Orthogonal View Locations

Once you have selected Reformat, the model builds. Once it is built, a 4-on-1 display
appears. The images usually display with a oblique image in the upper left quadrant, an
axial image in the upper right quadrant, a sagittal image in the lower left quadrant, and a
coronal image in the lower right quadrant. When the images are displayed, the oblique
image is in primary focus. Primary focus in Reformat is red. The other images are linked by
green.
The Orthogonal View Locations can be adjusted several ways:
1. Place the mouse cursor over the area desired and press Shift.
The 3D cursor (a red dot, arrow, or X) is deposited at the mouse cursor location.
2. Click and drag the 3D cursor to where you want to place it.
This updates all of the views that are linked in green frames.

3. Click [Rotate/Translate].

4. Click [By mm] and enter an increment value in the mm text box and click the arrows
around the text box.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-21

This moves the appropriate green frame to the new location.

The red 3D cursor in the red frame always moves.

5. Position the mouse cursor on the red slice location annotation.

Click to increment one slice location in one direction.
Right-click to increment one slice location in the other direction.
Middle-click and drag right or left to page through the image set.

Quick Steps: Move the Orthogonal View Locations

1. Place the mouse cursor over the area desired and press Shift.
2. Click and drag the 3D cursor to where you want to place it.
3. Click [Rotate/Translate].
4. Click [By mm] and enter an increment value in the mm text box and click the arrows
around the text box.
5. Position the mouse cursor on the red slice location annotation.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-22

Adjust the Oblique View Angle

The oblique mode button can be used to move and rotate planes of reformatted views on all
views except oblique, curved, histogram, X Section, and profile. The [Tilt/Rotate] button is
the default for Reformat.
1. Click the [Oblique Mode] button.

You must have an axial, sagittal, or coronal image in the primary frame.
2. Click and drag the 3D cursor to the desired location.
This moves the dotted lines, which represents the location.
You can also move the mouse cursor to the desired location and press shift.
3. Click and drag the solid yellow line to the desired angle.
The oblique view updates automatically.
4. Click on the [Tilt/Rotate] button to exit the oblique mode.

The [Tilt/Rotate] button can be use to rotate the image. You can move in any
direction by clicking and dragging on the corner or sides of the red Tilt/Rotate box.

Quick Steps: Adjust the Oblique View Angle

1. Click the [Oblique Mode] button.
2. Click and drag the 3D cursor to the desired location.
3. Click and drag the solid yellow line to the desired angle.
4. Click on the [Tilt/Rotate] button to exit the oblique mode.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-23

Edit with the Active Annotation

Any of the red annotated areas can be changed. If you place the mouse over a red
annotated area, a description of the button flashes.The following explains the function of all
of the red annotations.
1. Edit the image number.
On the axial image, place your mouse over the red image number, type in the image
number, and press Enter.
As you type, the number is displayed in a pop-up box. You must press Enter before
the computer accepts the new number.
Click over the red image number to increase the image number.
Right-click over the red image number to decrease the image number.
Middle-click and drag right over the red image number to increase and left to
decrease the image number.
2. Edit the Display Field of View (DFOV) number.
On the axial, sagittal, oblique and coronal images, place your mouse over the red
DFOV number type in the DFOV number, and press Enter.
As you type, the number is displayed in a pop-up box. You must press Enter before
the computer accepts the new number.
This magnifies or minifies the image.
Click the red DFOV number to decrease the DFOV.
Right-click the red DFOV number to increase the DFOV.
Middle-click and drag right the red DFOV number to increase and left to decrease the
DFOV.
NOTE: You cannot increase more than the original DFOV. Changing the magnification only
affects the quadrant that you are in.
3. Roam the image.
On the sagittal, oblique, and coronal images, place your mouse over any red Right
Anterior Superior (RAS) coordinates, then click and drag to roam the image.
When you release the mouse button, the image is deposited at that point.
The other planes that are linked in green frames updates to the deposited point.
NOTE: Roam is not available on the original DFOV scanned axial image. It is available on a
magnified axial image or a scan that is longer in millimeters than the DFOV.
4. Hide or show the patient’s name.
On any view, place your mouse over the red patient’s name, click and hold the right
button, and click [Hide] to hide the patient’s name.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-24

To show the patient name again, click and hold the right button over the red asterisks
and click [Show] to show the patient’s name.
This affects all quadrants.
5. Edit the Window Width or Window Level numbers.
On any view, place your mouse over the red Window Width or Window Level
numbers. Type the new number and press Enter.
As you type, the number is displayed in a pop-up box. You must press Enter before
the computer accepts the new number.
If you click on the Window Width or Window Level numbers a list of presets appears.
Select the one you desire.
Middle-click the red Window Width or Window Level numbers and drag right to
increase and left to decrease the Window Width or Level.
NOTE: Remember you can always use the middle mouse button to change the window width
and level.
Middle-click and drag from side to side to change the window width.
Middle-click and drag up and down to change the window level.
6. Click on the red annotation of the view type to change to a different view type.
The slice thickness and rendering mode red annotations are covered in Prescribe a Multi
Projection Volume Reformation (MPVR).

Quick Steps: Edit with the Active Annotation

1. Edit the image number.
2. Edit the Display Field of View (DFOV) number.
3. Roam the image.
4. Hide or show the patient’s name.
5. Edit the Window Width or Window Level numbers.
6. Click on the red annotation of the view type to change to a different view type.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-25

Adjust the Cross-Reference Image

2. Place the mouse cursor over the cross-reference image, right-click and select the
location of interest.

North East would move the image to the upper right corner of the screen.
South West would move the image to the lower left corner of the screen.
North West would move the image to the upper left corner of the screen.
South East would become available only if the cross-reference image was moved
from its original location.
3. Place the mouse cursor over the cross-reference image, right-click and select [Reset
Focal Point] to change the reference image to the location of the 3D cursor.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-26

Quick Steps: Adjust the Cross-Reference Image

1. Place the mouse cursor over the cross-reference image, right-click and select the
plane of interest.
2. Place the mouse cursor over the cross-reference image, right-click and select the
location of interest.
3. Place the mouse cursor over the cross-reference image, right-click and select [Reset
Focal Point] to change the reference image to the location of the 3D cursor.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-27

Use the Main On-View Menu Features

If you click and hold the right button (right-click) anywhere on the quadrant, except the red
annotations points, the Main On-View menu displays. You can drag the mouse to the desired
function and release the button. This task defines how to use each of these features.

1. Right-click anywhere on the quadrant, except the red annotation points, and select the
desired feature.
Save Image
– If you select Save Image, the view is saved on the hard disk for future display. It is
placed on the Browser for the exam under a Reformat Type. If you recall the
image from the Browser, the cross-reference image and 3D cursor is not on the
image. If the oblique image is screen saved, the rotation box is not on the image.
Save Image As
– If you select Save Image As, the system will prompt you to name the image and
then the view is saved on the hard disk for future display. It is placed on the
Browser for the exam under a Reformat Type. If you recall the image from the
Browser, the cross-reference image and 3D cursor is not on the image. If the
oblique image is screen saved, the rotation box is not on the image.
Screen Save
– Selecting this allows you to screen save the current image as a secondary
captured image. The image is installed in the image database with a series
number 100 + the prospective series number. The current Window Width/Level
setting is used to create the screen save image. No graphic functions can be
performed on this type of image.
Show Less Annotation
– Selecting this removes all the information about the image except the patient’s
name.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-28

Show All Annotation

– This is available if you have previously selected Show Less Annotation or Hide
Annotation.
– This displays all of the hidden or removed annotation.
Hide Annotations
– This removes all annotation from the screen.
Reference image
– This allows you to select a cross-referenced image.
Create trace
– Selecting this allows you to draw a trace line.
Clear last point
– This option appears only if you have created a trace and if the trace is active.
– Clear last point clears the last deposited point on the trace.
– You can keep selecting Clear last point to keep removing points.
Clear trace
– This option appears only if you have created a trace.
– Clear trace erases the entire trace.
Enlarge
– If you click Enlarge, the image enlarges to the full viewing area. The option then
becomes Reset size to return to the normal view.
NOTE: This function does not exist on Profile, Histogram, or X Section views.
Hide reference images
– This removes the cross-reference image from the quadrant. The option then
becomes Reference images to restore the reference image to the quadrant.
Lock orientation
– Lock orientation is only available on the oblique view. When selected, the image is
locked in its current rotation. The rotation box disappears and the manual rotation
button does not function. This option becomes Unlock orientation to return the
rotation capabilities.
– This is a good tool if you have it rotated correctly and you do not want it to
change.
Reset pointer
– Reset pointer returns the 3D cursor to the center of the viewport on all viewports.
This function does not exist on Profile, Histogram, or X Section views.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-29

Quick Steps: Use the Main On-View Menu Features

1. Right-click anywhere on the quadrant, except the red annotation points, and select
the desired feature.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-30

Create Measurements
When you click on Display Tools, the measuring options are displayed. Please note that
when any of the display functions are selected, the measurement is applied to the viewport
in primary focus.

CAUTION: Note that the measurements are accurate only if the trace segments are
longer than the slice interval.

Measure Distance
1. Click Display Tools > Measure Distance.

A pop up menu appears.

2. Place your mouse cursor at the starting point of the measurement and click.
This deposits a point.
3. Place your mouse cursor at the ending point of the measurement and click.
This deposits a point.
NOTE: The distance readout appears in red annotation automatically. You can move this
annotation around by clicking and dragging the annotation to a new location.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-31

4. Click [Close].

Quick Steps: Create Measurements-Measure Distance

1. Click Display Tools > Measure Distance.
2. Place your mouse cursor at the starting point of the measurement and click.
3. Place your mouse cursor at the ending point of the measurement and click.
4. Click [Close].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-32

Create Measurements
Measure an Angle
1. Click Display Tools > Measure Angle.

A pop up menu appears.

2. Place your mouse cursor at the starting point of the measurement and click.
This deposits a point.
3. Place your mouse cursor at the middle point of the measurement and click.
This deposits a point.
4. Place your mouse cursor at the ending point of the measurement and click.
This deposits a point.
NOTE: The distance readout appears in red annotation automatically. You can move this
annotation around by clicking and dragging the annotation to a new location.
5. Click [Close].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-33

Quick Steps: Create Measurements-Measure an Angle

1. Click Display Tools > Measure Angle.
2. Place your mouse cursor at the starting point of the measurement and click.
3. Place your mouse cursor at the middle point of the measurement and click.
4. Place your mouse cursor at the ending point of the measurement and click.
5. Click [Close].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-34

Create Measurements
Measure an Area
1. Click Display Tools > Measure Area.

A pop up menu appears.

2. Place your mouse cursor at the starting point of the measurement and click.
This deposits a point.
3. Place your mouse cursor at the next point of the measurement and click.
This deposits a point.
4. Continue until the area is closed.
5. Place your mouse cursor at the ending point of the measurement and right click.
This deposits a ending point.
NOTE: The area readout appears in red annotation automatically. You can move this
annotation around by clicking and dragging the annotation to a new location.
6. Click [Close].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-35

Quick Steps: Create Measurements-Measure an Area

1. Click Display Tools > Measure Area.
2. Place your mouse cursor at the starting point of the measurement and click.
3. Place your mouse cursor at the next point of the measurement and click.
4. Continue until the area is closed.
5. Place your mouse cursor at the ending point of the measurement and right click.
6. Click [Close].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-36

Adjust Display Preferences

The Preferences button allows you to change display preferences while in Reformat. When
you click Display Tools > Preferences, the Display Preferences menu appears.

Show Annotations
1. Click Display Tools > Preferences.

When you click [Preferences], a window appears.

2. Select Show Annotations.

Select to display all of the annotation on the selected views.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-37

Deselect to remove all of the annotation on the selected views.

3. Click [Close].
Trace
The Trace function determines how you can create the trace.
1. Click Display Tools > Preferences.
2. Select the Trace mode you wish to use.

Click on the image to deposit each point of the trace.

Click on the image and free hand draw the trace
Click each point on the image to develop a smooth trace.
3. Click [Close].
Choose Ruler Styles
The Ruler Style function allows you to choose from a grid or tick ruler.
1. Click Display Tools > Preferences.
2. Click Ruler style > None or Grid or Tick.

If you click Grid, a grid ruler appears on all active views. You can change the spacing
by clicking in the spacing box, back spacing through the value, and type in the new
value. Press Enter.
If you click Tick, a tick ruler appears on all active views. You can change the spacing
and range by clicking in the box, back spacing through the value, and typing in the
new value. Press Enter.
3. Click [Close].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-38

Quick Steps: Adjust Display Preferences

Show Annotations
1. Click Display Tools > Preferences.
2. Select Show Annotations.
3. Click [Close].
Trace
1. Click Display Tools > Preferences.
2. Select the Trace mode you wish to use.
3. Click [Close].
Choose Ruler Styles
1. Click Display Tools > Preferences.
2. Click Ruler style > None or Grid or Tick.
3. Click [Close].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-39

Adjust Display Preferences

Identify Slices
1. Click Display Tools > Preferences.
2. Click [Identify slices].

This button allows you to turn slice cross-reference markings on or off the primary
focus except the axial viewport.
3. Click [Close].
3D Cursor
1. Click Display Tools > Preferences.
2. Select which 3D cursor you wish to use.

This is the cursor you move around and deposit.

3. Click [Close].
Reference Image
1. Click Display Tools > Preferences.
2. Click [Reference Image].

This displays a cross-referenced image.

3. Click [Close].
Paging Mode
1. Click Display Tools > Preferences.
2. Click [Paging Mode].

3. Select Continuous or Contiguous.

The default is Continuous, which means that the images are displayed in a continual
loop from the first image to the last.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-40

If Contiguous is selected, the images are displayed from the first to the last image,
then from the last to the first image, and continue in a back and forth mode.
4. Click [Close].

Quick Steps: Adjust Display Preferences

Identify Slices
1. Click Display Tools > Preferences.
2. Click [Identify slices].
3. Click [Close].
3D Cursor
1. Click Display Tools > Preferences.
2. Select which 3D cursor you wish to use.
3. Click [Close].
Reference Image
1. Click Display Tools > Preferences.
2. Click [Reference Image].
3. Click [Close].
Paging Mode
1. Click Display Tools > Preferences.
2. Click [Paging Mode].
3. Select Continuous or Contiguous.
4. Click [Close].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-41

Set Up Film Options

The button allows you to set up where you want your images to be filmed and how you want
to save your images in the Batch mode.
1. Click [Filming Tools].
2. Click the [Film/Save Options].

3. Click [Printer] and select the name of the camera you want to use.
A listing of all the printers that are connected or networks to your machine appears.
Verify which printer you have selected each time you use reformat batch filming.
4. Click [Hide Cursor on Copies].
If this button is selected, the cursor is invisible on the filmed images.
5. Click [Color Save].
If this button is selected, the colors all be saved when you save the image.
6. Click [Image Type for Reformat].
Select the format you wish for the saved images.
Use Save to store the images on the system disk. It resides on the Browser under a
new series. If it is a Screen Save Image, nothing can be changed. If it is a Reformat
Type Save, you can do all of the graphic measurements and annotations.
7. Click [Name Batch Series].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-42

If this button is selected you will be prompted when you save you batch protocols to
name them.
Figure 35-6 Series window

8. Click [OK].
NOTE: Once [OK] is selected the Batch prescription starts.

Quick Steps: Set Up Film Options

1. Click [Filming Tools].
2. Click the [Film/Save Options].
3. Click [Printer] and select the name of the camera you want to use.
4. Click [Hide Cursor on Copies].
5. Click [Color Save].
6. Click [Image Type for Reformat].
7. Click [Name Batch Series].
8. Click [OK].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-43

Set Up a Batch Protocol

This opens the Modify Batch window.

Figure 35-7 Modify Batch Window

3. Click on the center red box and drag the green lines over the anatomy of interest.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-44

4. Click and drag the red box on either end line to adjust the tilt.

5. Click an drag the red arrows to adjust the number of slices.

6. Click [Accept].

Quick Steps: Set Up a Batch Protocol

1. Click on the reformatted image to make it the primary view.
2. Click Filming Tools > Batch Film.
3. Click on the center red box and drag the green lines over the anatomy of interest.
4. Click and drag the red box on either end line to adjust the tilt.
5. Click an drag the red arrows to adjust the number of slices.
6. Click [Accept].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-45

Set Up a Batch Protocol

Set Up an Oblique Prescription
1. Click on the reference image to make it the primary view.
This puts a red frame around the image.
2. From the Modify Batch window, click [Oblique] (Figure 35-7).
You see a display of green lines appear on the image.
3. Click on the center red box and drag the green lines over the anatomy of interest.
4. Click and drag the red box on either end line to adjust the tilt.
On the command window, you can manually input the number of slices.
5. Click and drag the red arrows to adjust the number of slices.
6. Click in the Number of Views field, backspace to delete the current value, type in the
new value and press the Enter key.
When you make any changes to any of the numerical fields and press Enter, all of the
other fields update.
7. Click in the Spacing Between Views field, back space to delete the current value, type in
the new value and press the Enter key.
This is used to set the spacing between slices.
8. Click in the FOV field, backspace to delete the current value, type in the new value and
press the Enter key.
This is used to set the desired field of view for the batch being prescribed.
Remember, the smaller the number, the greater the magnification to the reformatted
image.
9. Click in the Slice Thickness field, backspace to delete the current value, type in the new
value and press the Enter key.
10. Click [Render Mode] and select Average, MIP, or Min IP.
The default rendering mode is Average, meaning it provides the average density
values of the slice taken along lines perpendicular to it.
If you click MIP, meaning maximum intensity pixel, the image changes to display the
maximum density value of the slice taken along lines perpendicular to it.
If you click Min IP, meaning minimum intensity pixel, the image changes to display the
minimum density value of the slice taken along the lines perpendicular to it.
This render mode is applied to the batch images.
NOTE: This is only active if you select a slice thickness of two or more voxels.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-46

Quick Steps: Set Up a Batch Protocol-Set Up an Oblique Prescription

1. Click on the reference image to make it the primary view.
2. From the Modify Batch window, click [Oblique] (Figure 35-7).
3. Click on the center red box and drag the green lines over the anatomy of interest.
4. Click and drag the red box on either end line to adjust the tilt.
5. Click and drag the red arrows to adjust the number of slices.
6. Click in the Number of Views field, backspace to delete the current value, type in the
new value and press the Enter key.
7. Click in the Spacing Between Views field, back space to delete the current value, type
in the new value and press the Enter key.
8. Click in the FOV field, backspace to delete the current value, type in the new value and
press the Enter key.
9. Click in the Slice Thickness field, backspace to delete the current value, type in the new
value and press the Enter key.
10. Click [Render Mode] and select Average, MIP, or Min IP.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-47

Set Up a Batch Protocol

Select the Output Device
This function allows you to preview the batch sequence and to save and/or print the images.
1. From the Modify Batch window, click [Preview] or [Output] (Figure 35-7).
Use Preview to view the batch sequence on the monitor.
Use Output to choose where to send the images.
Use Save to store the batch on the system disk. It resides on the Browser under a
new series. The way the image is saved depends on the filming setup under Display
Preferences. If it is a Screen Save Image, nothing can be changed. If it is a Reformat
Type Save, you can do all of the graphic measurements and annotations.
If you click [Film] the images are sent to the printer to be filmed.
If you click both [Film] and [Save] the images are filmed and saved to the system
disk.
2. Click [Format] to change the filming format. Click on the desired format.

When you choose the printer as the output mode, the [Format] button becomes
available, and the Number of copies text box appears.
The first number is the vertical layout and the second number is for the horizontal
layout.
3. Click [Accept] button to save and/or print the images.

Quick Steps: Set Up a Batch Protocol-Select the Output Device

1. From the Modify Batch window, click [Preview] or [Output] (Figure 35-7).
2. Click [Format] to change the filming format. Click on the desired format.
3. Click [Accept] button to save and/or print the images.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-48

Set Up a Batch Protocol

Save a Protocol
1. From the Modify Batch window, click [Protocol] (Figure 35-7).
Selecting Save Protocol allows you to save the current graphic Rx batch parameters
for future use.
This opens the Save Filming Protocol window.
2. Click in the field and type in the name of the protocol.
3. Select how the current protocol is to be used.
With current loading protocol will add the protocol to the protocol list for future use.
As new loading protocol will add the protocol to the Volume Analysis List or the
Volume Viewer.

4. Click [Save].
Use a Protocol
1. From the Modify Batch window, click [Protocol].
This allows you to pick from a list of saved protocols.
2. Select the protocol of interest.
3. Click [Open].
You can double click on the protocol name to use it.
The parameters appears on the image.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-49

Delete a Protocol
1. From the Modify Batch window, click [Protocol].
Use this only if you want to get rid of a protocol.
A list displays listing the protocols available to delete.
2. Click to highlight the protocol you wish to delete.
3. Click [Delete].
A message stating "Do you really want to delete this protocol?" appears.
4. Click [Yes] or [No].
Select Yes to get rid of the protocol.
Select No to return to the batch window. This does not delete the protocol.

Quick Steps:
Save a Protocol
1. From the Modify Batch window, click [Protocol] (Figure 35-7).
2. Click in the field and type in the name of the protocol.
3. Select how the current protocol is to be used.
4. Click [Save].
Use a Protocol
1. From the Modify Batch window, click [Protocol].
2. Select the protocol of interest.
3. Click [Open].
Delete a Protocol
1. From the Modify Batch window, click [Protocol].
2. Click to highlight the protocol you wish to delete.
3. Click [Delete].
4. Click [Yes] or [No].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-50

Create and Save a Movie Protocol

Set Up a Manual Prescription Using Steps
Selecting the [Add a step] icon allows you to set up a manual rotation for a batch
prescription or movie loop.
1. Click Filming Tools > Movie.
Figure 35-8 Movie Window

Add a new step

Modify a step

Delete a step

Preview current step

2. Move and/or rotate the view or place the 3D cursor in the desired position.
Make sure the view you want is in primary focus.
3. Click [Add a step].
4. Move and/or rotate the view or place the 3D cursor in the desired position.
5. Click [Add a step].
Move and/or rotate the view or place the 3D cursor in the desired position.
Continue this process until all of you desired steps are entered.
6. Enter the Stage duration.
7. Click [Export] to send the images to the selected output device.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-51

Quick Steps: Create and Save a Movie Protocol-Set Up a Manual

Prescription Using Steps
1. Click Filming Tools > Movie.
2. Move and/or rotate the view or place the 3D cursor in the desired position.
3. Click [Add a step].
4. Move and/or rotate the view or place the 3D cursor in the desired position.
5. Click [Add a step].
6. Enter the Stage duration.
7. Click [Export] to send the images to the selected output device.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-52

Create and Save a Movie Protocol

Apply the Movie Prescription
This function applies all of the parameters you have defined in the batch protocol.
Figure 35-9 Movie Viewer

Stop Pause

Step
Toggle from Loop to Rock

1. Click [Preview] to see the images you have prescribed (Figure 35-8).
This starts the movie definition.
The batch is sent to the selected output mode.
A window appears.
2. Select Loop.
The default is Loop, which means that the images are displayed in a continual loop
from the first image to the last.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-53

If Rock is selected, the images are displayed from the first to the last image, then
from the last to the first image, and continue in a back and forth mode.
3. Adjust the display speed.
Click and drag the display speed slider to the desired location.
You can change the display speed from 1 to 20 images per second.
The default is 10 images per second.
4. To manually change the image index, click [Pause] and [Step].
When [Pause] is selected, it changes to [Restart].
The Image index area is used to visualize or adjust what images are being viewed.
You can click and drag the image index slider or click [Step] to go to the next image.
5. To restart the movie loop, click [Restart].
6. Click [Stop].
This stops the movie loop and return to the Movie Definition window.
7. Click [Close].
This returns you to reformat.

Quick Steps: Create and Save a Movie Protocol-Apply the Movie

Prescription
1. Click [Preview] to see the images you have prescribed (Figure 35-8).
2. Select Loop.
3. Adjust the display speed.
4. To manually change the image index, click [Pause] and [Step].
5. To restart the movie loop, click [Restart].
6. Click [Stop].
7. Click [Close].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-54

Create Different View Types

When you click Reformat, an oblique, axial, sagittal and Coronal image are displayed in a
4-on-1 format. This section is going to explain the other view types including: curved, profile,
histogram, and X Section.
Create a Curved View Type
The curved function is very useful for displaying a reformat of curved or tortuous vessels or
organs. The first thing you need to do is display the anatomy on which you wish to trace in
one of the other viewports.
1. From the display monitor, click [Image Works].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-55

Figure 35-10 Curved Reformat Viewport

5. If the curved image does not display then click the red annotation in the upper left
corner of the viewport and select [Curved].
6. Start tracing along the anatomy of interest.
You can trace on an axial, sagittal, or coronal image.
To create a trace, place the mouse cursor at the starting point, press and hold the
Shift key as you deposit points along the anatomy.
As you are tracing, the curved image updates automatically.
You can change the location of the reference images by clicking on the image
number or image location and continuing your trace on the next image.
7. To exit, click [Close].
A pop-up message asks you if you are sure you want to quit.
8. Click [Yes].
This takes you back to the Browser.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-56

Quick Steps: Create Different View Types-Create a Curved View Type

1. From the display monitor, click [Image Works].
2. Select the [Exam/Series/Images] that you want to reformat.
3. Click [Reformat].
4. Select the Curved Reformat Layout preset if available.
5. If the curved image does not display then click the red annotation in the upper left
corner of the viewport and select [Curved].
6. Start tracing along the anatomy of interest.
7. To exit, click [Close].
8. Click [Yes].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-57

Create Different View Types

Create a Profile View Type
Profile provides a grayscale graph along a trace. First create a trace on an axial, sagittal,
coronal or oblique view, then select Profile from the view type buttons.
1. From the display monitor click [Image Works].

From the Browser, check all of the parameters to make sure that you have a valid
image set.
2. Select the [Exam/Series/Images] that you want to reformat.
You can select an exam and series, all the images are included if you do not select
any images.
If you want a selected range of images, you have to select the first image that you
want to include then find the last image in the range and while holding the Shift key
down select the last image. You could also click on the first image and drag through
the range of images.
To select specific images you must hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard as you
select the images with the left mouse.
You have to select at least four images for reformat to work.
3. Click [Reformat].
4. Select the Profile Layout preset if available.
5. If the Profile image does not display then click the red annotation in the upper left corner
of the viewport and select [Profile].
6. Trace the anatomy of interest.
Create a trace on an axial, sagittal, coronal, or oblique view.
You now see the Profile view (Figure 35-11). It gives the intensities of the pixels along
the trace that you created. The horizontal axis of the profile view is the position in
millimeters along the trace and the vertical axis is the pixel intensity value as a
function of that position.
You can move your mouse over the Profile View and press Shift. Notice the pixel
intensity reference line on the graph. This line gives you the pixel intensity from the
location of the 3D cursor.
You can also move the line by clicking and dragging the line itself.
The value for the pixel intensity reference line can be seen at the bottom right of the
white line.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-58

At the bottom of the profile view are the pixel statistics of the trace. These values
represent the mean and standard deviation.
7. To exit, click [Close].
A pop-up message asks you if you are sure you want to quit.
8. Click [Yes].
This takes you back to the Browser.
Figure 35-11 Profile View

Quick Steps: Create Different View Types-Create a Profile View Type

1. From the display monitor click [Image Works].
2. Select the [Exam/Series/Images] that you want to reformat.
3. Click [Reformat].
4. Select the Profile Layout preset if available.
5. If the Profile image does not display then click the red annotation in the upper left
corner of the viewport and select [Profile].
6. Trace the anatomy of interest.
7. To exit, click [Close].
8. Click [Yes].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-59

Create Different View Types

Create a Histogram View Type
The Volume Histogram View provides a variety of information. This information includes the
ability to display a histogram showing the percentage of occurrence of each voxel intensity
value in an object. It also provides numerical statistics about the voxel intensity value in an
object plus the total object of an object. Also, it automatically determines boundaries
around the class of similar voxel intensities. This function is typically used when you have
3D data. Otherwise, the volume statistics are not valid. Please keep this in mind on the
following descriptions of volume and class volume. Please note that the tolerance for error
in the total volume measurements is directly proportional to the surface area of the object.
1. From the display monitor, click [Image Works].

From the Browser, check all of the parameters to make sure that you have a valid
image set.
2. Select the [Exam/Series/Images] that you want to reformat.
You can select an exam and series, all the images are included if you do not select
any images.
If you want a selected range of images, you have to select the first image that you
want to include, then find the last image in the range, and while holding down the
Shift key, select the last image. You could also click on the first image and drag
through the range of images.
To select specific images, you must hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard as you
select the images with the left mouse.
You have to select at least four images for Reformat to work.
3. Click [Reformat].
4. Select the Histogram Layout preset if available.
5. If the histogram image does not display then click the red annotation in the upper left
corner of the viewport and select [Histogram].
The Volume Histogram then appears giving the statistics of the object in primary
focus (Figure 35-12).
The Vertical Axis displays the percentage of occurrence of the pixel values that are on
the horizontal axis. The horizontal axis displays the pixel value range of the object in
the viewport.
The statistics at the bottom of the histogram are referring to the voxel in the primary
view. The statistics in the upper right are referring to the class of voxel in a specific
area of the object defined by the two dotted green lines on the graph. These lines are

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-60

referred to as the voxel class boundary lines. The solid white line corresponds to the
intensity of the voxel at the 3D cursor location in the object.
Remember, the voxel reference line references the voxel intensity at the 3D cursor.
The voxel class boundary lines reference the minimum and maximum intensities
around the 3D cursor.
6. If you place the mouse cursor on the voxel reference line and either click and hold the
left key or hold the Shift key, the image displays green enhancement.
This represents the range between the voxel class boundary lines. You can change
the range by clicking and dragging one or both of the boundary lines to display the
desired range. If the voxel reference line is not visible, simply place the mouse cursor
anywhere along the horizontal axis and press the Shift key.
The smoothing value is used to calculate the percentage of occurrence in relation to
the voxel intensity values. The default is 10, which means a range of plus or minus 10
is taken around each voxel intensity point on the horizontal axis. The greater the
smoothing value, the greater the smoothing effect on the histogram curve.
7. To exit, click [Close].
A pop-up message asks you if you are sure you want to quit.
8. Click [Yes].
Figure 35-12 Histogram View

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-61

Quick Steps: Create Different View Types-Create a Histogram View

Type
1. From the display monitor, click [Image Works].
2. Select the [Exam/Series/Images] that you want to reformat.
3. Click [Reformat].
4. Select the Histogram Layout preset if available.
5. If the histogram image does not display then click the red annotation in the upper left
corner of the viewport and select [Histogram].
6. If you place the mouse cursor on the voxel reference line and either click and hold the
left key or hold the Shift key, the image displays green enhancement.
7. To exit, click [Close].
8. Click [Yes].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-62

Create Different View Types

Create an X Section View Type
The Cross-section Histogram View provides a variety of information, including the
percentage of occurrence of each pixel intensity value in a user-defined surface area on a
reformatted slice. It also provides numerical statistics about the pixel intensity values in the
same surface area plus the calculation of this area. Also, it automatically determines
boundaries around a class of similar pixel intensity values in these areas. The tolerance for
error in the total area measurement is directly proportional to the perimeter of the object.
1. From the display monitor click, [Image Works].

From the Browser, check all of the parameters to make sure that you have a valid
image set.
2. Select the [Exam/Series/Images] that you want to reformat.
You can select an exam and series, all the images are included if you do not select
any images.
If you want a selected range of images, you have to select the first image that you
want to include, then find the last image in the range, and while holding down the
Shift key, select the last image. You could also click on the first image and drag
through the range of images.
To select specific images, you must hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard as you
select the images with the left mouse.
You have to select at least four images for Reformat to work.
3. Click [Reformat].
4. Select the X Section Layout preset if available.
If the X Section image does not display then click the red annotation in the upper left
corner of the viewport and select [X Section].
5. Create a closed trace around the area of interest.
To create a trace, place the mouse cursor at the starting point and press and hold the
Shift key as you deposit points along the anatomy.
You need to define at least three points.
Make sure that the view is in primary focus.
The Cross Section View appears.
The vertical axis displays the percentage of occurrence of each pixel intensity value
in the traced area. The horizontal axis displays the intensity values in the traced area.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-63

The statistics at the bottom reference the entire defined area. The pixel class
statistics at the upper right reference a specified area within the defined area.
The pixel class boundary lines (the green dotted lines) represent the minimum and
maximum pixel intensity values that are part of the pixel class statistics.
The pixel reference line (the white line) corresponds to the intensity of the pixel at the
3D cursor location. The numeric value for this line can be seen to the right of the line
just above the horizontal axis. The pixel reference line can be moved by placing the
mouse cursor on the line, then clicking and dragging, or by placing the mouse cursor
on the graph and pressing the Shift key. If you move the 3D cursor on the image, this
moves the pixel reference line also.
The smoothing value is used to calculate the percentage of occurrence in relation to
the pixel intensity values. The default is 10, which means a range of plus or minus 10
is taken around each pixel intensity point on the horizontal axis. The greater the
smoothing value, the greater the smoothing effect on the cross-section curve.
6. To exit, click [Close].
A pop-up message asks you if you are sure you want to quit.
7. Click [Yes].
Figure 35-13 X Section View

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-64

Quick Steps: Create Different View Types-Create an X Section View

Type
1. From the display monitor click, [Image Works].
2. Select the [Exam/Series/Images] that you want to reformat.
3. Click [Reformat].
4. Select the X Section Layout preset if available.
5. Create a closed trace around the area of interest.
6. To exit, click [Close].
7. Click [Yes].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-65

Create Different View Types

Prescribe a Multi Projection Volume Reformation (MPVR)
Multi Projection Volume Reformation can be defined as a thick slab reformatted image. You
can change the rendering mode to Average, Mip or Min IP. You can also change the
thickness of the slab that you want to display. MPVR can be used to see vessels in CTA scans.
1. From the Browser, select the exam, series and images that you want to include in your
model.
2. Click [Reformat].
3. Select the MPVR Layout preset if available.
If the MPVR image does not display then click the red annotation in the upper right
corner of the viewport and select [3D] or [MIP].
4. Click [Oblique Mode].

5. Select the axial, sagittal, or coronal image and rotate the yellow line by clicking and
dragging it into the desired position.
6. Change the slice thickness in the oblique viewport to the desire thickness.
Place the mouse cursor over the red thickness annotation and type in the desired
thickness and press Enter.
7. Change the rendering mode.
Place the mouse over the red annotation word MIP and while holding down the right
mouse button, select which mode you desire.
MIP is used most often in CTA models to demonstrate all the voxels that have the
most intensity like calcium.
8. To quit, click [Close].
A pop-up window appears, click [Yes].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-66

Quick Steps: Create Different View Types-Prescribe a Multi Projection

Volume Reformation (MPVR)
1. From the Browser, select the exam, series and images that you want to include in your
model.
2. Click [Reformat].
3. Select the MPVR Layout preset if available.
4. Click [Oblique Mode].
5. Select the axial, sagittal, or coronal image and rotate the yellow line by clicking and
dragging it into the desired position.
6. Change the slice thickness in the oblique viewport to the desire thickness.
7. Change the rendering mode.
8. To quit, click [Close].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 35-67

Chapter 36
Mobile CT

Introduction
The LightSpeed Plus Mobile Startup and Shutdown procedure provides the capability for you
to change the site name as part of the start up procedure and ready the system for
transport as part of the shut down procedure. The LightSpeed Plus Mobile Startup and
Shutdown procedures will need to be followed each time the mobile is moved to a new
location.
This chapter explains the Mobile CT start up and shutdown process. It contains the
step-by-step instructions to help you learn how to:
• Start Up the Mobile System
• Shut Down the Mobile System
• Add Site Information
• Change Site Information
• Remove Site Information
• Search For Sites

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 36-1

What Do I Need to Know About ...

This section presents the concepts necessary to understand the Mobile CT process.
Specifically you need to understand:
• Mobile CT Systems
• Transport

Mobile CT Systems
The mobile CT system can be moved from site to site and is used in areas where a
permanent scanner is not available. The scanner is located in a coach or trailer and is
moved to a flat surface where the special power connections can be made. Your Service
Engineer can let you know the mobile site requirements for your scanner.
It is possible to create a mobile site list which can be customized with your site names and
information. This saves time when moving from site to site. It has all the information on the
scans for that particular site.

Transport

CAUTION: Make sure the shutdown for transport procedure is followed before the
scanner is moved to a new location. Failure to do so could cause system
damage. Always make sure before the scanner is transported that you have
secured all loose items that could move around during transport. Make sure
that all the cabinets are properly closed and secured with all the accessories
located in the cabinets. Make sure that all items that are not stored in cabinets
are secured in a position that will not allow the item to be thrown around
during transport.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 36-2

How Do I...
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for Mobile CT set up and shutdown
procedures. Specifically, it describes how to:
• Start Up the Mobile System
• Shut Down the Mobile System
• Add Site Information
• Change Site Information
• Remove Site Information
• Search For Sites

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 36-3

Start Up the Mobile System

Use this procedure to start the Mobile CT system. This procedure is used each time you
move the Mobile CT system to a different location in order to scan patients.
1. Complete the van manufactures instructions for powering up and leveling the CT mobile
van on the mobile pad.
Make sure the siting criteria is met.
2. Insure the system power to the CT scanner is turned on.
Two green lights on the main power panel should be illuminated. If not, follow the
"Start-Up" instructions posted on the Power Distribution panel.
3. Press the Power On switch on the console to begin the start up process.
In a few minutes, the CT Mobile Site Setup screen will be displayed to provide
selection of site information.
If there is only one site listed on the Mobile site list, the system will automatically
complete the start up procedure.
If there are multiple site names listed in the Mobile site list, the Mobile site list pop-up
displays.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 36-4

4. Enter the Site Information.

Enter the site name in Site Name text box.
OR enter the network name in Hostname text box.
OR select the desired site name from the site list text box and click [Select].
OR, if you cannot find the site in the list, click [Search] to find a site by Hospital or
Hostname.
– Click [Done] to exit Search mode.

5. Click [OK] to confirm the Mobile Site confirmation pop-up.

The site name and network information will be entered and the system start up will
continue.
As the system starts up, there is a series of screens that appear. Please wait till you
see the "Reference cradle and elevation drives." message in the current message area

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 36-5

and the "OC Initializing" message disappears before continuing. These messages
indicate the system is now ready for use.
Click [Cancel] to return to the Mobile Site Setup screen if you need to make changes.
6. Remove the Table Transport Pole from under the table. Store the pole in cabinet until
needed to ready the system for transport.
7. Press the Table Down button to lower the table to reference elevation.
Lower the cradle until the system recognizes the table height.
8. Press together the Tilt Backward and Tilt Forward buttons to bring the gantry to zero
degree position.
After completion of cradle reference, the system is ready.
9. Perform a Tube Warm Up.
For more information on Tube Warm Up, refer to Perform Tube Warm-Up.
10. Perform Fast Cals every day.
Perform a Tube Warm Up if Fast Cals have already been done that day.
For more information on Fast Cal, refer to Perform Air Calibrations (Fast Cals).

Quick Steps: Start Up the Mobile System

1. Complete the van manufactures instructions for powering up and leveling the CT
mobile van on the mobile pad.
2. Insure the system power to the CT scanner is turned on.
3. Press the Power On switch on the console to begin the start up process.
4. Enter the Site Information.
5. Click [OK] to confirm the Mobile Site confirmation pop-up.
6. Remove the Table Transport Pole from under the table. Store the pole in cabinet until
needed to ready the system for transport.
7. Press the Table Down button to lower the table to reference elevation.
8. Press together the Tilt Backward and Tilt Forward buttons to bring the gantry to zero
degree position.
9. Perform a Tube Warm Up.
10. Perform Fast Cals every day.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 36-6

Shut Down the Mobile System

Use this procedure every time you are going to move the Mobile CT from one location to
another. This will place the system in a mode ready for transport.
1. Remove all accessories from the cradle and store them in a cabinet during system
transport.
2. Click [Shutdown] from the desktop selection area.

A pop-up attention box appears asking if you are sure you want to shut the system
down.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 36-7

3. Click [OK] to start the shutdown procedure.

Click [Cancel] to return without starting shutdown process.
If [OK] is selected, a pop-up attention box appears for selection of shutdown to
prepare for mobile transport or shutdown to restart the system.

4. Click [YES] to shut the system down for mobile transport.

Click [No] to shut the system down for a system restart or to power the console off.
A pop-up attention box is displayed instructing you to move the gantry and table to
the transport position.

5. Press the Gantry Home button on the gantry control panel.

The gantry will automatically be placed in a full backward tilt position (S 30 degrees)
and the table moved to full up position.
The gantry and table must be set to these positions to ensure proper transport state.
When the system detects that it is in the proper transport position, a pop-up
attention box will be displayed instructing you to install the table transport support
pole

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 36-8

6. Continue to hold the Gantry Home button until the other control button become
inactive. This may require holding the button for an additional five seconds after the
gantry reaches the S30 position.

7. Click [OK] after the Table Transport Support Pole has been placed at the foot end of the
table.
The system will automatically complete the shut down process.
A series of messages will appear as the system shuts down. This will take a few
minutes.
The system will display the following message when it is okay to turn power off at the
operation console.

8. Verify that the red "Transport Warning Lamp" located outside the coach on the drivers
side of the coach near the front of the van is not illuminated.

CAUTION: If this light is illuminated, it means the gantry is not in the proper transport
position. Restart the system and perform another shutdown for transport and
ensure the gantry is tilted the full 30 degrees back.
9. Turn power off to the operator console.
10. Make sure the keyboard, mouse, trackball and chair are secured for transport with
appropriate restraints.
11. Make sure the Injector is secured.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 36-9

12. If your system has Cardiac Scoring option with SmartScore Pro, make sure the ECG
monitor is secured for transport.

Quick Steps: Shut Down the Mobile System

1. Remove all accessories from the cradle and store them in a cabinet during system
transport.
2. Click [Shutdown] from the desktop selection area.
3. Click [OK] to start the shutdown procedure.
4. Click [YES] to shut the system down for mobile transport.
5. Press the Gantry Home button on the gantry control panel.
6. Continue to hold the Gantry Home button until the other control button become
inactive. This may require holding the button for an additional five seconds after the
gantry reaches the S30 position.
7. Click [OK] after the Table Transport Support Pole has been placed at the foot end of
the table.
8. Verify that the red "Transport Warning Lamp" located outside the coach on the drivers
side of the coach near the front of the van is not illuminated.
9. Turn power off to the operator console.
10. Make sure the keyboard, mouse, trackball and chair are secured for transport with
appropriate restraints.
11. Make sure the Injector is secured.
12. If your system has Cardiac Scoring option with SmartScore Pro, make sure the ECG
monitor is secured for transport.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 36-10

Add Site Information

Use this procedure to add site names where you will be performing scans. This saves time
when you start up at your new location.
1. Click [Service] on the desktop selection area.

The Service Web Browser appears.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 36-11

2. Click [Utilities].
The utilities desktop appears.

3. Click the [Tools] folder.

4. Click [CT Mobile].
The CT Mobile Site Setup screen is displayed.

5. Click [Add] to add a new site to the mobile site list.

6. Enter the site information.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 36-12

7. Click [Add] to add the site.

8. Click [Done] to exit the CT Mobile Site Setup screen.
A pop up window appears.

9. Click [Yes] to exit and return to the Utilities tab in the Service Web Browser.
Click [No] to cancel and return to the CT Mobile Site Setup screen.

Quick Steps: Add Site Information

1. Click [Service] on the desktop selection area.
2. Click [Utilities].
3. Click the [Tools] folder.
4. Click [CT Mobile].
5. Click [Add] to add a new site to the mobile site list.
6. Enter the site information.
7. Click [Add] to add the site.
8. Click [Done] to exit the CT Mobile Site Setup screen.
9. Click [Yes] to exit and return to the Utilities tab in the Service Web Browser.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 36-13

Change Site Information

Use this procedure if needed to change information about a site. Sometimes sites will
change some information. This may be a site name or IP address, but it will affect the way
the scanner is set up.
1. Click [Service] on the desktop selection area.

The Service Web Browser appears.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 36-14

2. Click [Utilities].
The utilities desktop appears.

3. Click the [Tools] folder.

4. Click [CT Mobile].
The CT Mobile Site Setup screen is displayed.

5. Select the site you wish to change.

6. Click [Change].

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 36-15

7. Enter the new site information.

8. Click [Change] to enter corrected information.
9. Click [Done] to exit the CT Mobile Site Setup screen.
A pop up window appears.

10. Click [Yes] to exit and return to the Utilities tab in the Service Web Browser.
Click [No] to cancel and return to the CT Mobile Site Setup screen.

Quick Steps: Change Site Information

1. Click [Service] on the desktop selection area.
2. Click [Utilities].
3. Click the [Tools] folder.
4. Click [CT Mobile].
5. Select the site you wish to change.
6. Click [Change].
7. Enter the new site information.
8. Click [Change] to enter corrected information.
9. Click [Done] to exit the CT Mobile Site Setup screen.
10. Click [Yes] to exit and return to the Utilities tab in the Service Web Browser.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 36-16

Remove Site Information

Use this procedure to remove site information you no longer need.
1. Click [Service] on the desktop selection area.

The Service Web Browser appears.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 36-17

2. Click [Utilities].
The utilities desktop appears.

3. Click the [Tools] folder.

4. Click [CT Mobile].
The CT Mobile Site Setup screen is displayed.

5. Select the site where you wish to remove information.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 36-18

6. Click [Remove].
A pop up menu appears.

7. Click [YES] to confirm removal of the site from the list.

Click [No] to exit removal mode without removing the site.
8. Click [Done] to exit the CT Mobile Site Setup screen.
A pop-up window appears.

9. Click [Yes] to exit and return to the Utilities tab in the Service Web Browser.
Click [No] to cancel and return to the CT Mobile Site Setup screen.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 36-19

Quick Steps: Remove Site Information

1. Click [Service] on the desktop selection area.
2. Click [Utilities].
3. Click the [Tools] folder.
4. Click [CT Mobile].
5. Select the site where you wish to remove information.
6. Click [Remove].
7. Click [YES] to confirm removal of the site from the list.
8. Click [Done] to exit the CT Mobile Site Setup screen.
9. Click [Yes] to exit and return to the Utilities tab in the Service Web Browser.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 36-20

Search For Sites

Use this procedure to search for a site by the hospital name or the network host name. This
makes it easy to locate sites by searching for specific names.
1. Click [Service] on the desktop selection area.

The Service Web Browser appears.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 36-21

2. Click [Utilities].
The utilities desktop appears.

3. Click the [Tools] folder.

4. Click [CT Mobile].
The CT Mobile Site Setup screen is displayed.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 36-22

5. Click [Search] to find a site on the mobile site list by hospital name or network
hostname.
A search by window opens.

6. Enter hospital name or network hostname and click [Search].

Click [Done] to exit Search screen.
7. Click [Done] to exit the CT Mobile Site Setup screen.
A pop-up window appears.

8. Click [Yes] to exit and return to the Utilities tab in the Service Web Browser.
Click [No] to cancel and return to the CT Mobile Site Setup screen.

Quick Steps: Search For Sites

1. Click [Service] on the desktop selection area.
2. Click [Utilities].
3. Click the [Tools] folder.
4. Click [CT Mobile].
5. Click [Search] to find a site on the mobile site list by hospital name or network
hostname.
6. Enter hospital name or network hostname and click [Search].
7. Click [Done] to exit the CT Mobile Site Setup screen.
8. Click [Yes] to exit and return to the Utilities tab in the Service Web Browser.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) 36-23

Introduction
The Accelerator Line will allow commands to be typed which can perform certain functions.
The accelerator line appears as a rectangular text box at the bottom of different desktops. A
flashing I- beam cursor will appear when the mouse cursor is placed in this area. Typing
commands can act as a shortcut to opening additional menus to access a function. When a
command is typed, and Enter is selected from the keyboard, that command will be applied
to all viewports in focus. As next and prior images are selected, the command will be applied
to all those images as well.
These commands are listed in two sections. First there is a list for commands that are valid
in Exam Rx. Next, there is a list of commands that are valid in Image Works.
For each command, the command name is listed first, under that is what should be typed
on the Accelerator line, and under that is an explanation, if needed.

Exam Rx

angle
ang
Creates an angle type measurement cursor by explicitly describing the end points of the
lines that make up the cursor.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-1

annotation full
af
Restores full annotation to the image displayed.

annotation groups
agp <on/off> <N> -where N is a group number
With this feature, you can selectively turn off or on specific image annotations on the
screen. The N number corresponds to the annotation in the customize setting for annotation
in User Preferences. For example, to turn off right marker, type agp off 10. You can type more
than one number at a time.

annotation none
an
Removes all annotation from the image displayed.

annotation partial
ap
Applies partial annotation to the image displayed as defined by Display Preferences
dialogue box on Exam Rx screen.

blank viewport
blank
Removes image from the selected viewport, similar to a user text page.

cross reference
xr <series number> <image set>: <interval>
series number: an appropriate series number to be cross referenced.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-2

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
image set: a consecutive group of image numbers within the series.
interval: the interval of images to be filmed: 2 equals every other image, 3 equals
every third image, etc.
(i.e. xr s2 1-40:3)
Display cross referenced scan plane lines on a scout image. This command allows explicit
description of lines to be posted and their interval. The above examples will post every third
slice line between images one and forty in series two, beginning with image one.

cross reference append

xra <series number> <image set>: <interval>
Used to add additional cross referenced groups or series to a scout which already has a
cross reference on it.
series number: an appropriate series number to be cross referenced.
image set: a consecutive group of image numbers within the series.
interval: the interval of scan plane lines to be displayed: 2 equals every other
image, 3 equals every third image, etc.

cross references off

noxr
Removes cross reference lines from the image display.

display normal or normal

no
Restores the image display to normal orientation and zoom.

distance
dist
A measure distance line will appear on the screen.

ellipse
el
Creates an ellipse type measurement cursor.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-3

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
elliptical image matte
ematte
Displays an elliptical black matte or mask around the image. Size is adjustable with the
mouse by a left click and drag on the blue crosshair. Position is adjustable by a click and
drag on the edge of the matte.

erase all graphics

eag
Removes all graphics from the selected image.

erase graphics
eg
Removes selected graphics from the selected image.

exam
e <examination number>
examination number: the desired exam number as indicated on the system
disk.
(i.e. e 4578)
Displays the first image of the specified exam (4578) in the selected viewport.

exam series image

e <exam number> s <series number> i <image number>
<exam number> <series number> <image number>
exam, series and image numbers: As per system disk image numbering system.
(i.e. e 34 s2 i47

or 34 2 47)
Displays the image explicitly requested in the selected viewport. The first example displays
exam 34, series 2, image 47 in the selected viewport. The display command may be entered
without typing the e s i characters. By entering the numeric data, separated by spaces, in
the specified order, the image specified will display in the selected viewport. In the second
syntax example above, the same image will be displayed as in the first example.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-4

film annotation full

faf
Restores full annotation to the images being filmed.

film annotation groups

fagp <on/off> <N> -where N is a group number
With this feature, you can selectively turn off or on specific image annotations for filming.
The N number corresponds to the annotation in the customize setting for annotation in User
Preferences. For example, to turn off right marker, type agp off 10. You can type more than
one number at a time.

film annotation none

fan
Removes all annotation from the images being filmed.

film annotation partial

fap
Applies partial annotation to the images being filmed as defined by Display Preferences
dialogue box on Exam Rx screen.

filter
fi <filter name>
filter names: e1; e2; e21; e22; e23; e3; lung; (for edge enhancement) s1; s11;
s2; s21; s3; (for smoothing filters) and off.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-5

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
(i.e. fi e1, fi e2, fi e3, fi lung, fi s1, fi s2, fi s3, fi off)
Apply/remove edge enhancement and smoothing filters on selected image(s). Edge
enhancement filter names are, from least sharpening to most: e1, e2, e3, lung; smoothing
filters are named s1, s2, s3. Entering the command fi e1 applies the least image
sharpening,; entering fi lung applies the most.

flip left right

flr
Flips the image horizontally.

flip top bottom

ftb
Flips the image vertically.

gray scale enhancement

gse <filter name>
filter names: g1; g2; g3; off
(i.e. gse g1, gse g2, gse g3, gse off)
Gray scale enhancement increases the apparent contrast of the image without changing
the window/ level settings. Useful for enhancing low contrast structures.

grid
grid <on> or <off>

(i.e. grid on, grid off)

Displays or removes a ruled grid on the image.

hide graphics
hg
Hides all graphics on the selected image. The undo function is show graphics.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-6

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
image
i <image number>
image number: the desired image number from within the displayed series.
(i.e. i 27 or 27)
Displays the specified image (27) of the current series in the selected viewport.

invert video
inv
Reverses the black’s and white’s on the image.

mouse mode roam

mmr
Turns the right mouse button drag action into scrolling (pan, roam) of the image.

mouse mode zoom

mmz
Turns the right mouse button drag action into zooming (magnification) of the image.

next exam
ne
Displays the first image of the next exam in the selected viewport, next determined by the
sort function applied to the List Select browser.

next series
ns
Displays the first image of the next series from the displayed exam in the selected viewport.

previous exam
pe
Displays the first image of the previous exam in the selected viewport, previous determined
by the sort function applied to the List Select browser.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-7

print series
prs
Opens the print series dialogue box for the selected viewport, which is in turn satisfied by
mouse commands. By specifying options in the print series box, a sequence of images may
be sent automatically to the printer, or current print jobs may be cancelled by the operator.
Desired image parameters must be set before calling the print series command - zoom,
window level, annotations etc. cannot be altered after the print series dialogue box is
opened.

propagate
prop <range>
range: a= all images in series; s = series; i = image range (1-15)
(i.e prop a

or prop i 1-15)
Displays selected graphics on the specified images. The “i” is lower case sensitive. In the first
example, the graphic will display on all images called into the viewport until cleared by
another command (such as erase graphics) or a different series is displayed in the viewport.
In the second example the graphic will be applied only to images 1 through 15 in the current
series.

rectangular image matte

rmatte
Displays a rectangular black matte or mask around the image. Size is adjustable with the
mouse by a left click and drag on the blue crosshair. Position is adjustable by a left click and
drag on the edge of the matte.

rectangle
rect
Creates an rectangle type measurement cursor. Used for ROI.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-8

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
report pixel
rp
Opens a Report Pixels dialogue box, and displays an ROI box cursor on the image that is
positioned on the area of interest by a left click and drag of the mouse. Size is not adjustable.
Once in position, clicking ‘OK’ in the dialogue box creates a pixel report consisting of density
values for individual pixels within the area delineated by the box cursor.

rotate left
rl
Rotates the image ninety degrees counter-clockwise.

rotate right
rr
Rotates the image ninety degrees clockwise.

screen save
scnsave
Captures the selected image exactly as it is displayed, and creates a new image with a
series number of 99 on the system disk that includes all graphics and display factors applied
to the image and/or viewport at the time of capture.

series
s <series number>
series number: the desired series number from within the displayed exam.

(i.e. s 2)
Displays the first image of the specified series (2) of the current exam in the
selected viewport.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-9

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
series binding
sb <on> <off>
Turns series binding on or off. With series binding on, the next image is defined as the next
image in the entire exam; at the end of any particular series, the next image is the first
image of the next series. At the end of the exam, a ‘next’ command will loop back to the first
image of the exam. With series binding off, at the end of a particular series, a ‘next’
command will loop back to the first image of the current series.

set initial windowing

siw
Applies default window width and level setting to the display.

show graphics
sg
Shows, or re-displays all graphics on the selected image which were hidden with the hide
graphics command.

text page exam

te
Displays text page for the exam in the primary viewport.

text page region of interest

tpr
Displays a text page for the image in the primary viewport which lists all the ROI cursors and
their statistics.

text page series

ts
Displays text page for the exam/series in the primary viewport.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-10

(i.e. tm on, tm off)

Displays or removes both horizontal and vertical tick marks (rulers) along the border of the
image.

tick marks horizontal

tmh <on> or <off>

(i.e. tmh on, tmh off)

Displays or removes horizontal tick marks (rulers) only, along the border of the image.

tick marks vertical

tmv <on> or <off>
(i.e. tmv on, tmv off)
Displays or removes vertical tick marks (rulers) only along the border of the image.

user annotation
ua
Displays specified text in a user annotation text box on the image.

user text page

utp
Removes image from the selected viewport, creating a blank viewport for user annotation
or graphics.

window level
wl <desired level>

(i.e. wl 65)
Applies specified window level setting to the display.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-11

(i.e. ww 350)
Applies specified window width setting to the display.

zoom
zo <factor>
factor: magnification factor
(i.e. zo 1.5)
Magnifies the image by the factor specified. In the above example the image is displayed
one and one half times as large as its display normal size, or 150% larger in appearance.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-12

angle
ang
Creates an angle type measurement cursor by explicitly describing the end points of the
lines that make up the cursor.

annotation custom
ac
Applies custom annotation to the image displayed as defined by Display Preferences
dialogue

annotation full
af
Restores full annotation to the image displayed.

annotation none
an
Removes all annotation from the image displayed.

annotation partial
ap
Applies partial annotation to the image displayed as defined by Display Preferences
dialogue box on Exam Rx screen.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-13

(i.e. arrow on)

Displays or removes an arrow cursor from a text annotation box for user annotation.

cross reference
xr <series number> <image set>: <interval>
series number: an appropriate series number to be cross referenced.
image set: a consecutive group of image numbers within the series.
interval: the interval of images to be filmed: 2 equals every other image, 3 equals
every third image, etc.
(i.e. xr s2 1-40:3)
Display cross referenced scan plane lines on a scout image. This command allows explicit
description of lines to be posted and their interval. The above examples will post every third
slice line between images one and forty in series two, beginning with image one.

cross reference append

cross references off

noxr
Removes cross reference lines from the image display.

display normal or normal

no
Restores the image display to display normal mode: removes all zoom, filter, pan,
annotations etc. applied to the viewport. Displays the image from the disk as created.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-14

ellipse
el
Creates an ellipse type measurement cursor.

elliptical image matte

ematte
Displays an elliptical black matte or mask around the image. Size is adjustable with the
mouse by a left click and drag on the blue crosshair. Position is adjustable by a left click and
drag on the edge of the matte.

erase all graphics

eag
Removes all graphics from the selected image.

erase graphics
eg
Removes selected graphics from the selected image.

exam
e <examination number>
examination number: the desired exam number as indicated on the system disk.
(i.e. e 4578)
Displays the first image of the specified exam (4578) in the selected viewport.

exam series image

e <exam number> s <series number> i <image number>
<exam number> <series number> <image number>

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-15

(i.e. e 34 s2 i47

film annotation custom

fac
Applies custom annotation to the images filmed as defined by Display Preferences dialogue
box on Exam Rx screen.

film annotation full

faf
Restores full annotation to the images being filmed.

film annotation groups

film annotation none

fan
Removes all annotation from the images being filmed.

film annotation partial

fap
Applies partial annotation to the images being filmed as defined by Display Preferences
dialogue box on Exam Rx screen.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-16

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
filter
fi <filter name>
filter names: e1; e2; e3; lung; (for edge enhancement) s1; s2; s3; (for smooth-
ing filters) and off.
(i.e. fi e1, fi e2, fi e3, fi lung, fi s1, fi s2, fi s3, fi off)
Apply/remove edge enhancement and smoothing filters on selected image(s). Edge
enhancement filter names are, from least sharpening to most: e1, e2, e3, lung; smoothing
filters are named s1, s2, s3. Entering the command fi e1 applies the least image
sharpening,; entering fi lung applies the most.

flip left right

flr
Flips the image horizontally.

flip top bottom

ftb
Flips the image vertically.

format
fo <rows>< columns>
rows, columns: rows across and columns down the display screen.
(i.e. fo 4 3)
Format the display screen as specified by rows and columns. The above example displays
images across the screen in 4 rows and 3 columns, or common “twelve-on-one”.

freehand
freehand
Displays a small solid blue box that can be used to draw a freehand trace for an ROI. You
must click and drag the box to where you would like to start the trace. Then select the blue
box while holding Shift on the keyboard and move the mouse cursor around the screen to
draw the trace.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-17

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
gray scale enhancement
gse <filter name>
filter names: g1; g2; g3; off
(i.e. gse g1, gse g2, gse g3, gse off)
Gray scale enhancement increases the apparent contrast of the image without changing
the window/ level settings. Useful for enhancing low contrast structures.

grid
grid <on> or <off>

(i.e. grid on, grid off)

Displays or removes a ruled grid on the image.

hide graphics
hg
Hides graphics on the selected image. The undo function is show graphics.

image
i <image number>
image number: the desired image number from within the displayed series.
(i.e. i 27 or 27)
Displays the specified image (27) of the current series in the selected viewport.

invert video
inv
Reverses the black and white on the image.

mouse mode magglass

mmg
Turns the right mouse button drag action into zooming (magnification) of the image.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-18

next exam
ne
Displays the first image of the next exam in the selected viewport, next determined by the
sort function applied to the List Select browser.

next series
ns
Displays the first image of the next series from the displayed exam in the selected viewport.

paging
pa [<start> <end>] [<rate>]
Activates cine paging. For the start and end values, enter the first and last images you want
to page thru. For rate, enter the number of images per second to page through, with the
maximum being 60.

paging interval
pi <interval>
Allows you to set the interval for paging. The pa command must be used prior to setting
paging interval.

paging interval all

pia <interval>
Allows you to set the interval for paging. The pa command must be used prior to setting
paging interval.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-19

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
paging mode
pm <spatial/temporal>
Allows you to change the mode for paging. Selecting temporal will display the imagesin a
“loop” mode. Spatial will display images in a “back and forth” mode.

previous exam
pe
Displays the first image of the previous exam in the selected viewport, previous determined
by the sort function applied to the List Select browser.

previous series
ps
Displays first image of the previous series of the displayed exam in the selected viewport.

print page
pp
Sends the entire current display screen to the film composer and sets the film composer
format to that of the current display format.

propagate
prop <range>
range: a= all images in series; s = series; i = image range (1-15)
(i.e prop a

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-20

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
or prop i 1-15)
Displays selected graphics on the specified images. The “i” is lower case sensitive. In the first
example, the graphic will display on all images called into the viewport until cleared by
another command (such as erase graphics) or a different series is displayed in the viewport.
In the second example the graphic will be applied only to images 1 through 15 in the current
series.

quit
quit
Close the Viewer application and return to the Image Works browser.

rectangular image matte

rectangle
rect
Creates an rectangle type measurement cursor. Used for ROI.

reference image
ri
Puts a reference image on the selected image.

reference image all

ria
Puts a reference image on all images.

reference image all off

noria
Takes reference image OFF all images

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-21

report cursor
rc
Displays (reports) current mouse cursor location in pixel coordinates, and a single pixel ROI
reading.

report pixel
rp
Opens a Report Pixels dialogue box, and displays an ROI box cursor on the image that is
positioned on the area of interest by a left click and drag of the mouse. Size is not adjustable.
Once in position, clicking ‘OK’ in the dialogue box creates a pixel report consisting of density
values for individual pixels within the area delineated by the box cursor.

reset
rs
Reset image to initial display parameters.

rotate left
rl
Rotates the image ninety degrees counter-clockwise.

rotate right
rr
Rotates the image ninety degrees clockwise.

save state
ss [<first image> <last image>]
Saves the image orientation, w/l values, graphics, and filter and gse values of a range of
images that you can set. Typing ss by itself will save settings for the entire series.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-22

screen save
scnsave
Captures the selected image exactly as it is displayed, and creates a new image with series
number of 99 on the system disk that includes all graphics and display factors applied to the
image and/or viewport at the time of capture.

series
s <series number>
series number: the desired series number from within the displayed exam.
(i.e. s 2)
Displays the first image of the specified series (2) of the current exam in the selected
viewport.

series binding
sb <on> <off>
Turns series binding on or off. With series binding on, the next image is defined as the next
image in the entire exam; at the end of any particular series, the next image is the first
image of the next series. At the end of the exam, a ‘next’ command will loop back to the first
image of the exam. With series binding off, at the end of a particular series, a ‘next’
command will loop back to the first image of the current series.

set initial windowing

siw
Applies default window width and level setting to the display.

show graphics
sg
Shows, or re-displays graphics on the selected image which were hidden with the hide
graphics command.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-23

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
spline
spline
Deposits a small open blue box for creating a trace. Deposit blue box where you want the
trace to start. Then hold down the Shift key on the keyboard and click with the left mouse to
deposit points. All the points will connect to create a trace.

text page exam

te
Displays text page for the exam in the primary viewport.

text page region of interest

tpr
Displays a text page for the image in the primary viewport which lists all the ROI cursors and
their statistics.

text page series

ts
Displays text page for the exam/series in the primary viewport.

tick marks
tm <on> or <off>

(i.e. tm on, tm off)

Displays or removes both horizontal and vertical tick marks (rulers) along the border of the
image.

tick marks horizontal

tmh <on> or <off>

(i.e. tmh on, tmh off)

Displays or removes horizontal tick marks (rulers) only, along the border of the image.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-24

(i.e. tmv on, tmv off)

Displays or removes vertical tick marks (rulers) only along the border of the image.

user annotation
ua
Displays a user annotation text box. Place mouse cursor over the box and type desired
annotation.

user preferences
up
Brings up the user preferences pop up window.

user text page

utp
Removes image from the selected viewport, creating a blank viewport for user annotation
or graphics.

window level
wl <desired level>

(i.e. wl 65)
Applies specified window level setting to the display.

window width
ww <desired width>

(i.e. ww 350)
Applies specified window width setting to the display.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-25

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
zoom
zo <factor>
factor: magnification factor
(i.e. zo 1.5)
Magnifies the image by the factor specified. In the above example the image is displayed
one and one half times as large as its display normal size, or 150% larger in appearance.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) A-26

System
Run Shutdown and Restart daily.
The system may fail to start if system disk space needs to be recovered from unused
system files.
The following message will be posted in the Disk Management shell window:
“The purpose of storelog is to recover system disk space by archiving and then removing core,
log, and data files that have been saved for their system troubleshooting diagnostic value.
Now they may be taking up too much space for the system to run properly. Removing
these”system log” files does not add image space, but should allow the application to start.”
You are then directed to answer the following questions (be patient for the messages
to display):
Place the mouse cursor inside the black Disk Management window
1. Do you want to save system log files to removable media?
– Type n and press the enter key
2. Do you want to remove the system log files?
– Type y and press the enter key.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) B-1

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
You will then see a message ”Please be patient, the system is now removing unwanted files.”
The system then starts normally.
If the system fails to startup completely, select [Unix Shell] from the tool chest menu
in the upper right of the Scan Monitor place your cursor in the blue shell and type st.
If mouse selections fail, press the Escape key to clear backlogged requests.
The system may not show typed information on the New Patient or Viewedit screen.
The system will update after a short time.
The system may be slow to respond to keyboard entry and mouse clicks. If the
system fails to respond stop and let the events catch up.
The dynaplan screen may fail to update if Priority Recon is selected during scanning.
If you can no longer type in a field, move the cursor to the field and try clicking the
middle mouse to restore functionality. If this does not work, then a system shutdown
will be required.
The cursor may not move between the left and right screen. Wait a few seconds
without moving the cursor and try again.
Pressing the Space Bar after selecting all fields in New Patient, locks the patient
information fields and all the patient information fields become insensitive. Only the
delete and backspace key will be active.
– Press the delete key to recover from this situation.
Entering \ and pressing the Enter key in the New Patient can cause the fields to
become insensitive.
Under heavy system operation, the message “Unable to install image in the database”
may be seen. Recon for the series will take longer due to unsuccessful install of
images to the database.
To install a SMPTE pattern, BRH or Quality assurance images for viewing, select the
following. Once installed the images will be available for viewing from the Image Works
browser or List Select in Exam RX. Both will be listed as Exam 1000, the patient name will
reflect if it is a QA image or a SMPTE pattern.
1. Click Service Desktop.
2. Click [Diagnostics].
3. Click [Display Processing].
4. Select [Install SMPTE Image].
In general, wait for a screen transition to take place before making another selection.
If the console becomes unresponsive for 2 minutes or more, shutdown the system
using the pink shutdown button and restart the system. If you cannot select the pink

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) B-2

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
shutdown button, turn off the console power switch, wait 10 seconds, then turn the
console power switch back on. The system should come up normally.
The system will lock up if the mouse becomes hung on the left monitor. The only
known recovery is to cycle power to the console.
You may see a pink warning dialog posted indicating the system has low disk space.
This is due to a partition on the system disk getting too full. This can be caused by
archive, network or film queues containing too many entries. Make sure that the
entries are processed. If the queue is paused, resume it or delete entries as needed.
Protocol Management may not be selectable. Check that retro recon is selectable. If it
is not then the system will need to be rebooted.
Pop-up screens and menus may appear on the wrong monitor or may be displayed
split between the two monitors.
Windows such as the Film Composer that normally are restrained to the right or left
monitor can be dragged to the other monitor. Be careful not to get a Film Composer
hidden behind some screen if you move it to the other monitor.
If a blank viewport is seen where image annotation is displayed and W/L is
interactive but no image is seen, shutdown the system, recycle power and reboot the
system to clear this display issue.
If corrupted images are seen after applying an image filter such as enhance, smooth,
lung or gray scale, try rebooting the system and see if the image can be displayed
correctly. If not contact your GE service representative.

Tube Warm Up/Fast Cal

Run Tube Warm up after 2 hours of non-use. It is best to warm the tube as close as
possible to the time the next patient will be scanned. Don’t warm the x-ray tube and
then wait 30 minutes without scanning.
Always check that the beam is clear when doing Fast Cal. In Fast Cal, the system
checks cleanliness of the Mylar Window. If the system suspects the Mylar Window
may be dirty to the point that it may cause a beam obstruction, a pop-up message
will be displayed. The operator will be instructed to clean the Mylar Window and
select [Retry].
Fast Cal must be run once every 24 hours.
Complete all portions of Fast Cal, Warm Up I, Warm Up 2, Gen Cal, Clever Gain, and
Fast Cal. This assures that the Air calibration and generator calibrations are up to
date on the system. Scan aborts may occur during Axial or Helical scanning. Always
be aware of the scan progress during an Exam and select Resume as soon as it is
posted to continue.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) B-3

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Tube Warmup and Fast Cal LightSpeed 5.X based systems
Gantry balance may fail to update if Fast Cal is exited without taking a scan.
Complete Fast Cal scans before quitting out of the Daily Prep menu.
The pause button on the Tube warmup screen does not function. Use the stop scan
button on the SCIM.

Scan
Scan aborts may occur during Axial or Helical scanning. Always be aware of the scan
progress during an Exam and select Resume as soon as it is posted to continue.
Scan may fail to confirm posting a message that not enough image space exists,
even though the image space shown in the Feature Status Area indicates there is
enough space. This is due to the fact that images are stored on the system disk in
more than one partition. Remove consecutive exams to free up image space for
confirm to proceed.
The system does not verify that the Pediatric protocol number typed in the Protocol
number field matches the Patient weight entered on New Patient. When typing in the
protocol number always verify that you are entering the correct protocol for the
weight category desired.
If Direct3D or VariViewer are enabled in DirectVIS under the Recon tab, Add Group will
display some fields as insensitive as it will be combined with the current Direct3D or
VariViewer session. Turn Direct3D or VariViewer off for the added group if you no
longer wanted it to be included as part of the Direct3D or VariViewer session. This will
allow changes to any of the acquisition parameters.
Auto mA should not be used with Gating and Cine acquisitions even though it can be
selected. This includes scans that are done for Cardiac Scoring using Cine Segment.
The gating button may turn red when the patient experiences a big jump in heart
rate such as in a PVC. The system usually will recover and read the signal. Sometimes
you may have to toggle the gating button Off/On to get the heart rate signal synched
again. Care should be taken in starting the scan if the patient continues to have
PVC’s.
When using the IVY monitor the heart rate posted may jump to over 200 after
confirming a scan and moving the table into the gantry. This may be caused by the
cables from the ECG monitor touching the gantry cover.
Always try to position cables for the ECG monitor away from the gantry.
To terminate an Insite connection on your system. Select [New Patient] a message
will be posted informing you that the scan hardware resource is not available. Wait 3
minutes and select [New Patient] again to begin scanning
In general, if a scan fails and a [Resume] is posted, click [Resume] to continue. Try
[Resume] again if the first [Resume] fails. If a failure still occurs, reset the scanning

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) B-4

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
hardware through System Resets in the Service desktop. If scan still fails to restart,
shutdown and Restart the system.
Auto Voice may fail to function, especially during system simultaneity. Make sure that
you can hear the Auto Voice to recognize if Auto Voice has quit, manually breathe the
patient when this occurs.
The Show Localizer scout image may fail to display or images may fail to recon and
may become suspended if scanning is started while remove images is in progress. To
avoid this don’t remove images while an exam is in progress or scanning is active.
Remove images when the system is idle.
The Dynaplan screen may report incorrect status (i.e. a scan is removed before it is
actually scanned) when stop scan is selected. The screen will reset correctly after
Resume or back to view edit is selected.
Scan groups will not be contiguous if you switch from 2 or more Helical scan groups
column or row edit and the scan type is changed to Axial. If this change is made, then
verify the Start and End locations of each of your scan groups and adjust if needed.
The Cine time between images may change when other parameters are modified
within a protocol. Check the Cine time between images prior to confirming the scan
to verify it is the value you wish.
Tilt handles will not be visible on the screen if the DFOV is larger than 48. Use a DFOV
smaller than 48 to assure that the tilt handles are visible.
Show Localizer may fail to display the scout image if the Next Series is selected
before the scout images are reconstructed. Wait until the scout images are
reconstructed before selecting Next Series. If Next Series has already been selected,
toggle Show Localizer off and then on again.
Quickly changing desktops when Show Localizer has been selected for the next
series can cause a partial display of the scout in the Graphic Rx window to occur.
If Page Up or Page Down fails to change the displayed Show Localizer.
Try the following in order:
1.Turn Show Localizer button off then on.
2.Move the cursor off the image window and back on to the image to refresh
the screen if both of these fail then verify that you have a valid scout for
Show Localizer.
If an R, L or A, P value is more than half of the Display Field of View in mm. The image
annotation will not annotate R and L or A and P on the images. For example if the
DFOV is 10cm and the R value is 56mm then the image annotation will show R R. Use
a R-L or A-P value which is less than half of the DFOV in mm to avoid this.
A protocol may fail to display. The following message will be posted to the message
line on the lower center of the scan monitor ”Can’t read selected protocol, please

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) B-5

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
choose another protocol”. If this occurs the protocol is corrupt and will need to be
rebuilt. Delete the protocol and rebuild it.
The patient history field may be missing the last 9 characters when all 60 characters
have been entered and the patient record is either selected as a completed exam or
the Patient ID is entered and the system matches a completed exam.
Even weights entered in Patient Schedule may be rounded up to the next odd pound.
This occurs because weights are stored as kilogram units then converted back to
pounds.
During the acquisition of large data sets (1000-1500), there may be Auto film and
reconstruction performance issues. If either stops, check the queues and restart to
continue.
When selecting the Auto Voice field, the selected Auto Voice will be deselected. You
must reselect the desired Auto Voice message before exiting the Auto Voice screen.
When entering birth dates on the New Patient or Schedule Patient screens the
following rules apply:
– 2 digit years can only be entered if the birth year is in the current century for the
21st century - for the year 2000 forward.
– Birth dates from any other century must be entered as 4 digits for example for the
year 1899 –1999 all four digits must be entered.
– Birth dates can only be entered for 150 years (Current year minus 150 years).
If InSite is running the “Remote Safety” test, New Patient will not open. New Patient
can be made available by either:
1.Calling InSite and request they abort the test.
2.Going to the Service Desktop and selecting |CleanUp| option to cancel the
test in progress.
PMR images may fail to recon if disk space is low. To recon the images, remove
images and restart the recon queue in Recon Management.
You may get the message “Duplicate Scan Key”, if a Scout Scan is aborted within the
first 20 to 75 mm of table travel or if a the prescribed length of the Scout is less than
75 mm. In order to proceed, an End Exam must be done and new exam started.
It may be possible to prescribe a recon range that is outside the recon 1 boundary.
This may occur is the start location is dragged below the recon end location in recon
2 or 3.
If a large number of scan files are reserved and there is a large recon queue, you may
see the message: “Duplicate Scan Key – unable to allocate scan file.” There will be a

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) B-6

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Resume at Start Scan. Either wait a few minutes for the recon queue to decrease or
release some of the reserved scan files.
Bands and lines may be seen in scout images if there is a tube spit or the reference
channel is blocked during the acquisition of a scout scan.
A zero interval axial series, if paused, will add another group equal to the remaining
number of images. Make sure to return to the View/Edit screen to delete this group to
avoid acquiring additional images.
Biopsy is not valid for a Thin Twin helical acquisition mode. If Biopsy is selected, the
Biopsy window does not open; however a group is added to the series at an
inadvertent location. Do not select Biopsy mode with Thin Twin helical scan mode.
If the message “Can not read Cal Database”, select [End Exam] and re-enter patient
information.
The table will take 10 mm to stop if the table is running at 100 mm/sec. when a patient
weighing 450 lbs. is on the table.

Scan LightSpeed RT
The following protocols for LightSpeed RT have the Max mA for automA set to 350mA:
Abdomen - protocol 14, 15, 16
Chest - protocol 13, 14
Head - protocol 12
Lower Extremity - protocol 8
Neck - protocol 8
Upper Extremity - protocol 6
The Max mA could be set to 380 if desired.

Scan H1 Systems
On H1 systems the gating button may be red even though a heart rate signal is seen
on the ECG monitor. Toggle the Gating button On/Off to get the ECG monitor and the
ViewEdit screen in synch.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) B-7

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Patient Schedule
Close the preferences screen before switching between Patient Schedule and New
Patient.
The Patient Name, Patient ID, Accession Number and Requested Procedure ID can
only be edited if “Allow to Edit MWL” is set to yes in the Preference window.
The Patient Schedule button may not display the Work List from the HIS/RIS server if
the network is slow. Try again.

ConnectPro (Purchased Option)

Bar Codes will fail to be read by the Bar Code reader if the HIS/RIS system the bar
code was created on has a different language keyboard than the CT system. For
example, if your CT system has a French language keyboard then your HIS/RIS must
have a French language keyboard. If it is not possible to have the same language
keyboard on each system, then manually enter the Accession or Patient ID number
or select the desired patient from the Patient Schedule list to display the patient
information on the New Patient screen.
Patients selected from Modality Work List will be displayed with ^ (carets) to define
different DICOM fields. The carets are not displayed on the images.

Performed Procedure Step (part of connect pro option)

PPS will post the message “Failed to Start” if the remote server is down.
Screen Save images created in ExamRx or in the Viewer on the Image Works desktop
are not PPS aware in this release of software. Also, images created in Reformat, 3D,
and Navigator are not PPS aware. For these image types, “INPR” will be posted in the
PPS column in the Browser even though PPS is not enabled.
Complete PPS status for series in the order the series were created. PPS update will
fail if done in a different order.
The PPS server may stop and fail to send the request. You may have to select
Complete multiple times to get the series to update to the complete state.
Add Sub does not update images for PPS correctly

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) B-8

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Protocol Management
Protocols, which contained a SmartStep series, cannot be selected or copied from
the Most Recent selector.
There is no default protocol for Pediatric areas Neck, Upper Extremity, Chest,
Abdomen, Spine, Pelvis, and Lower Extremity.
If the weight of a child is at the cross over point of a weight category, due to rounding
errors the correct weight category might not be selected. Please check the weight
based category selected against the label and the patient’s weight.

Reconstruction
If images fail to recon the following should be used in order:
– Select [Recon Management], [Unsuspend Queue].
If the image still fails to recon
– Select [Recon Management], [Restart Queue]
If this still fails Shutdown and reboot the system.

Lung Algorithm
Provides edge enhancement between structures with large density differences, such
as calcium and air.
Enhances the contrast of small objects. For best viewing and film quality, select a
window width of 1000 to 1500 and a window level of -500 to -600.
Increases CT number values at the edge of high contrast objects. When planning to
take CT number measurements of vessels or nodules in the lung, please check and
compare your results with Standard algorithm images. (ROI and Histogram functions
use CT numbers.)
The edge enhancement provided by Lung Algorithm may not be appropriate in some
clinical cases. Please take individual viewing preferences into account when you
choose Lung algorithm.
Image recon may fail and then shutdown.
– If images fail to recon the following should be used in order:
¾ Select [Recon Management], [Unsuspend Queue].
¾ If the image still fails to recon

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) B-9

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
¾ Select [Recon Management], [Restart Queue].
If this still fails Shutdown and reboot the system.
The dynaplan screen may fail to update if Priority Recon is selected during scanning
Retro recon may not be able to get the same image locations as prospective recon.
This is due to rounding in the start and end location. To avoid this mismatch prescribe
start and end locations that are even numbers.
Retro recon may show more images when using PMR than that recon’d during
prospective recon if Recon 2 or 3 with a slice thickness greater than Recon 1 is used.
This is due to the extra data acquired for recon of the thicker slices.
Retro recon list service exams from Fast Cal. Do not attempt to recon this data, the
SRU will shut down. These exams are listed with exams numbers that begin with
50,000.
SmartStep series are listed in Retro Recon but cannot be selected.

3000 Image Series

Display
Paging and image review with next prior may slow when reviewing large series.

Archive
An image series of 3,000 images can only fit on one side of a 2.3 gb MOD.
Auto Store will not save the exam if the media size attached is 1.2 gb.
If a 1.2 gb media is used for image archive and the image series is greater than 1,500
images archive will need to be queued by image. Select a range of images 1,500 or
less when archiving to 1.2 gb media.
If greater than 2,000 images are queued to save by image you may see the browser
disappear and reappear. While this is occurring it will be impossible to access the
browser. To avoid this queue less images at a time when saving by image.
Images may fail to save if saving large groups of images. Verify that all desired
images are saved before deleting them from the system disk.

Network
The network queue list will be slow to access. This is typically seen when 200 or more entries
exist.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) B-10

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
DentaScan/Add/Subtract
These applications can only load 1,000 images. Hi-light the desired image range of 1,000
images by selecting the first image desired, hold the shift key down and hi-light the last
image desired then select the desired range.

Retro Recon
Two decimal points cannot be entered, i.e. 3.75 for image interval if column edit is
used. Edit each scan group (row) if an interval with 2 decimals is required.
If a 1 rotation 4i or 2i axial scan is prescribed using add group in ViewEdit with a
Superior to Inferior scan direction is retro reconned, the resulting images will be
reconned Inferior to Superior. The image locations are correct, but the image
numbers will not match the prospective images.
If you delete queued Retro images the image space reserved for those retro recons is
not given back. You will not get the space back until you reboot the system.
Only start Retro Recon when scanning is complete. Do not delete queued retros while
scanning is active, scanning could stop.
If maximum A-P or R-L offset is selected in Retro Recon, one image may fail to
reconstruct. Select an offset that is 0.5mm less than the maximum value allowed.
The start/end locations of a retro reconstruction may be different from Recon 1 and 2
and 3 when a PMR with a thicker slice than Recon 1 is prescribed for the series.
Retro Recon may hang and core. If the Retro recon screen fails to display or queue
retrospective images, retro recon has cored. Reboot the system to recover.
If an R, L or A, P value is more than half of the Display Field of View in mm. The image
annotation will not annotate R and L or A and P on the images. For example if the
DFOV is 10cm and the R value is 56 mm then the image annotation will show R R. Use
a R-L or A-P value which is less than half of the DFOV in mm to avoid this.
It may be possible to confirm a retro recon prescription with an invalid recon start
and end location that results in a recon suspend. To avoid this change image
thickness before changing image locations.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) B-11

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Recon Management
Scout queue entries can be selected in Delete Retro queue entries. Only select Scout
queue entries to delete if you are sure you do not need the scout image
reconstructed.
Before saving or restoring scan data make sure the system is idle and no Archive,
Network or Filming is active. No other features should be accessed until the save or
restore is complete.
Recon Management may hang while trying to display the menu. Finish the current
exam if scanning and shutdown and restart the system to correct the problem.
If you wish to cancel a Save or Restore scan data, the cancel button will cancel only
after the current scan file is saved or restored. A helical scan file contains a large
amount of data even though it is one scan file, that file can take up to 30 minutes or
more to save. You are unable to scan patients while saving or restoring Scan Data.
Make sure that you have ample time to complete the save or restore before
beginning.
Scan data save or restore is active when the dialog message indicating saving or
restoring scan file is displayed.
If saving scan data, after the save is complete select Restore Scan Files to verify the
data is stored.

Volume Viewer (Option)

The system may get extremely slow when saving a 3D or VR model using Save/Recall
Save Model. This could cause disruption to scanning. Do not start a model save
unless you have 10-20 minutes of free time.
Volume Viewer may not display on the ExamRx desktop. This will occur if you switch
back to the ExamRx desktop quickly after launching Volume Viewer
Volume Viewer may get hung up. This occurs due to a error dialog that is hidden. To
avoid this don’t switch desktops until you start to see the model build in Volume
Viewer.
A 3D model may be missing data when it is initially displayed. Slightly rotate the
model to re-display all of the 3D data.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) B-12

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
CT Perfusion 2, 3 or Neuro on OC – Purchased Option
Saving TIFF files of the graph and images is not supported because there is no floppy
drive hardware available on the OC.
The CT Perfusion Control Panel may be displayed on the current desktop if CT
Perfusion is launched from the Browser and the desktop is changed before CT
Perfusion screens are completely displayed.
Do not use data acquired with Expanded CT HU ON on a Advantage Windows
Workstation. The results will be lower than expected. Turn the Extended CT HU range
to OFF for all studies that will be used for processing CT Perfusion studies.
ROI number increments by 2 for ROIs saved and reloaded to the exam
When filming from a split screen viewport, the image being filmed will be shown
briefly in a full viewport. This is done to preserve the resolution of the image for
filming.
If ROIs are saved as part of the exam and then the exam is edited, the ROIs will not be
valid to be loaded into the exam.
Saving TIFF files of the graph and images is not supported because there is no floppy
drive hardware available on the OC.
Set the color ramp to gray scale for screen saves images if you are going to network
the images to another station such as PACS to improve quality of the screen save.

CT Colon (Option)
Rotate and translate is missing in the CTC and Virtual Dissection protocols

SmartScore PRO – Purchased Option

Only 0.8 and 0.5 second rotation speeds are valid for Prospective Gating.
A back slash ( / ) in the Patient ID for SmartScore exams will cause the patient report
to fail to print or be stored to floppy.
If the Confirm button is not available, select the Gating button and turn gating off and
click on Accept. Select Gating button, again, and turn gating on and click on Accept.
The Confirm button should now be available. Contact your local service
representative if you experience this issue for further investigation.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) B-13

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Advanced Vessel Analysis (Option)
AVA defaults to inferior view instead of Anterior after processing AVA. Use the
anatomical buttons to change the view to Anterior
AVA lumen view may show wavy lines while rotating. When the rotation is stopped
the display will update.

Dentascan
Do not use Extended CT Number range for images that will be processed in Dentascan. This
application does not support Extended CT Number range.

BMD
Do not use Extended CT Number range for images that will be processed in BMD on an
Advantage Windows or Mindways system. These applications do not support Extended CT
Number range.

CardIQ Snapshot – Purchased Option

If a lead falls off during acquisition, the heart rate annotation will be inaccurate for
the portion of the acquisition after the lead falls off. Images reconstructed for the
complete acquisition using Snapshot Segment will initially display correct BPM for the
period of time the leads were connected, and then ungated images will be displayed

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) B-14

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
followed by images annotated with abnormally high heart rate where the leads have
fallen off.
If the Gating button is displayed in red and heart rate is seen, this is most likely due to
loose connection of the cable at the connection to the ECG monitor or the scanner.
Make sure you see a heart rate before you begin the scout scan.
CardIQ Snapshot Segment annotation is not displayed on the images displayed on
the Advantage Windows workstation. The average heart rate and the percent of R-R
interval will not be seen. The Cardiac Helical scan type will be annotated as Axial.
Snapshot Segment images can be networked to a PACS system, however due to an
error in the DICOM header, they can be retrieved from the GE PathSpeed PACS system
but the image annotation is wrong.
Multiphase protocols of Vessel Analysis and Heart MP do not load the images
correctly. Load the images first using the Tree MP protocol and then select new
protocol and change to the desired protocol.
The Lumen view may display ‘Hit space bar to display high resolution view” This will
be needed with views 15mm or less.
WW and Wl of screen saved MIP views may not have correct contrast. Adjust the WW
and WL to improve the image.
Batch film will not film images in the Cardiac Short Axis protocol. The images will
need to be manually filmed.
Layout protocols must be created with single phase cardiac data sets. Once saved
they can be used with multiphase cardiac data sets.

Auto Transfer
A series may fail to Auto Transfer if [Next Series] then [Create New Series] is selected after a
scout scan is prescribed, but not scanned, i.e.; pause and return to view edit is selected.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) B-15

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Display (Applies to ExamRx Display and Image Works)
The Exam Rx List Select and Image Works browsers may in some cases not list an
exam, series or image. This may be seen after an interruption of power to the system
or the database may be updating slowly. The patient does not need to be rescanned.
Verify the following:
– Type the Exam, Series, Image on the accelerator line to display the image,
– Select another exam in the browser this will cause the browser to update,
– The browser may update after a slight delay,
– Reboot the system,
– A second reboot may be needed if a power fail has occurred.
The browser may update slowly to reflect Screen Save images created in an exam. If
the Screen Save images is not listed in the browser wait for them to appear. The time
to appear may be up to 15 minutes if the Automatic Database check and recovery is
in progress when the Screen Save images are created.
In general, wait for a display action to complete before entering in another
command.
With the system configured in French or German language, if a comma is entered in
explicit magnify, i.e. 2,3 the comma will not be interpreted as a decimal. The
magnification factor is applied without the decimal. In the example shown, 2,3 the
image would only be magnified 2X not 2.3X. Always enter a period to designate a
decimal and have the correct magnification applied.
Cross Reference lines will post incorrectly if sort by image location is selected. Make
sure that sort by number is selected before posting Cross Reference lines.
Cross Reference lines may not post with some combinations of DFOV and RAS center.
RAS centers at the edge of the DFOV and small DFOV’s will exhibit the problem. Retro
reconstruct the images to a larger DFOV if posting of the cutlines is desired.
Image annotation may overlap or not be fully shown if a 32 character patient name
is entered for 3D, Navigator, Reformat, MID formats, DentaScan images.
Text and Series pages only display 24 characters for Patient Name.
Text pages will not show foreign characters entered using the ALT GR key.
ROI and STD deviation numbers may be reported as zero after a Zoom is applied to
an image with a ROI posted. This is due to partial pixel contained in the ROI. Adjust
the size of the ROI to include full pixels and recalculate the ROI.
No text will be entered in the accelerator line if the mouse cursor is over the film
composer.
Some combinations or E/S/I will fail to display an image, if cap locks are on. To select
an exam series and image from the accelerator line use the following format when

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) B-16

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
cap locks is on: For example to select Exam 576 Series 2 image 3 type E576 2 3 on
the accelerator line.
Selection of an exam series or image may fail a second time after an exam series or
image is displayed. If the desired exam series or image does not display then select
the desired images from the browser.
Image location seen on the scanner may differ from that seen on an AW 3.1 system
for tilted images. LightSpeed reports the image location as iso-center of the image.
AW 3.1 reports image location as the image center for the image. With tilted images
there will be a difference in the location numbers proportional to the off center
distance times the sin of the tilt angle. The image location can be reported as image
center on LightSpeed by using the Report Cursor function.
Plus recon mode is not annotated on the Series Text Page. Refer to the image
annotation for the Plus recon mode annotation.
An active user annotation graphic will not film the box or arrow that is displayed on
the screen.

Exam Rx Display
Display may reset it’s self after a software problem. You may see display stop or not
accept your mouse input. Wait for a few seconds and display will automatically
reset. You will have to re-display the images you wish to work on.
The MIROI pop up may display but will not function. This will occur if an Auto View or
Cross reference viewport is in primary focus (blue border) MIROI is not in these
viewport types. Place a Free or Auto Link viewport in primary focus and reselect the
MIROI button to continue.
Any Report Pixel or MIROI chart that is not screen saved, but is filmed will show the
Exam Series and Image as 1000/1/1 on the film composer icon if E/S/I is selected.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) B-17

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
This is the exam/series/image number the system assigns to this chart display The
patients exam number is listed correctly on the filmed image.
Image selection from the accelerator line will not function if the primary viewport
contains a MIROI plot or Report Pixels chart. Use List Select to display a new image.
Any accelerator commands entered for Series Binding, Annotation levels for display
or filming will be saved as defaults
ExamRx Display may hang. In some cases switching to the Image Works desktop and
back to Exam Rx display may clear the problem. If this doesn’t work then perform a
system shutdown and reboot the system.
Display may post the Print Series dialog and hang when switching layouts and using
the trackball. This may lock the cursor. A system power cycle will be needed to
recover.
The Trackball may fail to initialize properly at system reboot. Try rebooting the
system again to recover.
Images recon’d with Priority recon are not available in the Auto Link viewport.
Re-display the series to access these images.
MIROI may fail to produce a graph if next prior is selected while doing MIROI.
Re-display the series and begin again.
With paging active (P in the lower left corner of the image) the trackball may adjust
window width and window level in other viewports, verify the image has the correct
window level before filming the image.
The right mouse may fail to roam even when the state is set to roam. A system
shutdown may be required to clear this problem.
Display may crash when selecting a 3D object from the list select browser. When a 3D
object is selected, 3D should be selected from the browser.
Images may not be displayed after a switch between Auto View or Image Review
layouts. This is due to a restart in the display process. Re-display the desired images
in the viewport to continue.

Image Works Display

WW and WL adjustments will only be maintained on individually selected images if
the middle mouse button is used. If the accelerator line or Presets are used all images
will update regardless of primary or secondary focus of the images.
Any accelerator commands entered for Series Binding, Annotation levels for display
or filming will be applied and not held if the viewer is closed. Use User Preferences in
the viewer to save the settings as a default if desired.
Reference Image may select the wrong scout series, i.e. not the scout series the
images were prescribed from, if one or more scout series exists. If the wrong scout is

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) B-18

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
selected place the Reference Image viewport in primary focus and enter the scout
series number desired on the accelerator line.
Window/Level does not display stored value set in the Viewer when +/- series is used.
The W/L used is the same as the last series displayed.
Images created in Add/Sub are displayed with value of WW 4098 and WL 1024.
If paging is selected while the system is in Compare Mode, the upper left viewport is
left blank. Return to the Browser and select the desired series for paging and restart
the Viewer.
Accelerator Command Line entries for E/S/I do not act properly. The first image in the
series is always displayed instead of the requested image within the series.
Cross Reference line numbering along the top of a sagittal scout may be listed in
offset manor.
The new features in User Preferences on the Image Works desktop are not
translated.
The primary focus may change if the space bar is selected multiple times when
entering accelerator line commands. Verify that primary focus is on the image
desired.

Edit Patient Data

The system may hang if Edit Patient is started while the following operations are in
progress:
– Network Receive
– Prospective or Retrospective reconstruction is active
– Archive Restore
To avoid this, confirm Edit Patient during idle times in network receive, active recon or
archive restore.
Patient age may be seen as zero in Edit Patient Data even though a birth date is
entered. Enter the birth date again and patient age will be calculated.
If duplicate accession numbers exist, Edit Patient Data will not allow the exam to be
modified.
If there is a space at beginning or end of the hospital, Edit Patient Data will fail.
Contact your field engineer to update the hospital name correctly in the system
reconfiguration.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) B-19

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
FILMING
Images or Auto Film control buttons may fail to display in the AutoFilm viewport. This
may occur after a switch between desktops. To display the images change to a
different AutoView layout, then switch back to your desired layout.
Don’t let the auto film viewport back up with images to be filmed. Start Auto Film as
soon as possible to keep caught up on filming.
Any of the Auto Film control buttons may be activated when the cursor is over the
button and the space bar is selected. Place the cursor in the Auto Film viewport only
when needed to avoid this problem.
Auto Film may fail to film. This may occur when the Auto Film viewport selection
shows active and the Auto Film status shows paused. Toggle the [Pause] button in
the Auto Film viewport and select [Start New Sheet] or [Continue Same Sheet] to
restart filming.
Image settings such as WW WL and flip rotate, zoom, roam are not maintained
across all images when imitating F4 print series from a MID Viewport format. Use a
512 size viewport to initiate F4 Print Series.
Auto Film may stop and the Continue Same Sheet button will be displayed. The
Continue Same Sheet button will be active, but when selected will not restart filming.
Use Manual Film to complete filming the exam and reboot the system before starting
the next exam
If the F1 key is used to film the Text Page ROI, Exam Text Page and Series Text Page,
the text pages will be filmed to the film composer last selected in the pop-up for text
page. Use the filming selections in the text page screens to film the information
displayed.
The message “Film formatting in progress. Please retry.” May be seen when filming to
the Manual Film composer when the system is busy with other simultaneous
operations such as recon, network, auto film and scanning. Retry manual filming
when the system is less busy. A system reboot may be required to recover.
Auto Film may fail to display images if recon is having trouble reconstructing the
image or if images have failed to install in the database. This may also occur if a large
exam has not reconstructed all images and scanning is started on a new exam. The
following dialog will be posted if Auto Film cannot display images:
–Exam 100
–Series 2
–Cannot find 10 images
–Skip Missing imagesContinueCancel Film Series
You are presented with 3 choices:
1.Skip Missing images will skip the images that Auto Film cannot find. For
example if Auto Film had filmed images 1-10 and you then got the

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) B-20

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
message that 10 images were missing and selected Skip Missing Images,
Auto Film would then start filming again with image 21.
2.Continue will look for the images again, if they are not found then the
dialog will be posted again. Before selecting continue verify that recon is
active, that the images have been reconstructed, the missing images are
not suspended or paused in the Recon Queue and the images are able to
be displayed. If the images are suspended or paused in the recon queue,
then unsuspend or restart recon to reconstruct the images before
selecting Continue.
3.Cancel Film Series will cancel Auto Film for the series currently being Auto
Filmed. The images will then need to be manually filmed.
If you get this dialog because you have begun an exam while the previous exam still
has images to reconstruct, then Select Continue and select Pause Auto Film, resume
Auto Film when the Exam Series and Images from the previous exam have
reconstructed.
When prescribing Mag factor for auto film, scout images if the scout is longer than
500 mm then use a magnification factor less than 1 to display the entire scout.
The manual film composer may display when confirm is selected for scanning if the
composer had been closed by selecting iconify in the upper right corner of the
composer.
It’s best to run Print Series from only one desktop at a time.
It’s best to resolve any paused queue entry as soon as possible.
Print Series may pause automatically under heavy system load.
If Anonymous Patient is selected for an exam where Auto Film is in progress, the
system may fail to cross reference the slices on the scout. If Anonymous Patient is
required for series that are still active in Auto Film, wait till Auto Film is complete for
the series before proceeding with Anonymous Patient.
To install a SMPTE pattern select the following. Once installed the images will be
available for viewing from the Image Works browser or List Select in Exam RX. And
will be listed as Exam 1000. The patient Name will be listed as SMPTE.
– Click Service Desktop.
– Click [Diagnostics].
– Click [Display Processing].
– Click [Install SMPTE Image].
Full Annotation instead of partial annotation will be filmed when using F3 (Film MID)
in the Image Works desk top when full annotation is selected.
The format built in a protocol may be changed when the protocol is used with a
message that the format was changed due to an invalid format, even though the

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) B-21

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
format is valid. Verify in Auto Film set up is the format you desire before confirming
scan.
For Multi-Image Display (MID) in AutoFilm, filters, gray scale and orientation
selections are applied only to the image in the upper left viewport. If there are an odd
number of images in the series, the filters, gray scale and image orientation is
applied to the first group only.

Network
LightSpeed images will not transfer if Advantage Net protocols is used. Always use
DICOM protocol to send LightSpeed images.
LightSpeed images cannot be sent to a HiLight Advantage, HiSpeed Advantage or CT
Independent console. These systems do not support DICOM receive.
Some 3rd party workstations may fail to receive LightSpeed scout images. This is due
to the matrix size of the scout image. These stations do not support receiving matrix
sizes greater than 512. Some LightSpeed scouts images have matrix sizes greater
than 512. If it is desired to have the scout image on the workstation, Screen Save the
scout and then transfer the screen save image to the workstation.
If you query a LightSpeed system from a CT/I or Advantage Windows system in
Advantage Net, only Advantage format image exams will be displayed, No
LightSpeed exams will be shown. Always query a LightSpeed system using DICOM
protocol.
Lateral scouts displayed on an AW 3.1 system will initially display with zero rotation;
they should display with a 270-degree rotation. Rotate the image in the left direction
using the rl command on the command line to display the scout in the desired
format.
Images networked to a Advantage Windows 3.1 workstation running software
versions prior to 3.1_07 will display a DFOV less than what is displayed on the

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) B-22

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
scanner. This is due to the AW not taking in account the pixels under the focus border
of the viewport.
Images networked to a AW 3.1 will have the following annotation missing:
– Accession number,
– Date of Birth,
– 4i, 2i or 1i recon mode on Axial, Retro Axial or Axial Reformatted images,
– Series type on Retro images,
– Table Speed on Helical images,
– Images are annotated +C when Oral Contrast is used. View the Series Text Page to
see if IV contrast was used.
– CardIQ annotation for BPM and percent of R-R interval and scan type will
displayed as Axial.
The number of images indicated in a series may be incorrect on the remote browser
when a query is made from an AW or CT/I station.
Series types may be listed differently when images are networked to an Advantage
Windows 1.2, 2.0 or 3.1 system than that shown on the LightSpeed system
Exams with Swedish, German or French characters in any Patient Info field will not be
transferred to an Advantage Windows.
When using DICOM protocol, the entered host name must match in spelling and case
sensitive, otherwise a connection error message will be displayed.
It’s best to resolve any paused queue entry as soon as possible.

Image management
Don’t let image space fall below 200 images on a single disk system (130,000-image
storage). This will ensure there is room on the system disk to confirm scans and to
install reconstructed images.
Remove images when scanning is idle. This will assure that all images are
reconstructed, displayed and installed into the database.
Exams that contain SmartStep may fail to remove. Reboot the system to remove the
lock on the SmartStep series.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) B-23

Introduction
This appendix lists user messages that are posted to the user interface. These message are
displayed in one or more of the following areas
Figure C-1 Attention pop up dialog

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) C-1

Real Time
Information
Area

Figure C-3 OC message bar on the View Edit screen of the left monitor

OC Message Bar

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) C-2

Message Area

The following table list the messages.

Table C-1 Warning Messages

Operator Message
Your patient orientation has changed from the previous series. Please verify or change
the orientation if needed.
Tube Warm-up has been cancelled or skipped.
Maximum mA allowed will be limited for this exam.
Small focal spot will be limited to 250 mA.
Large focal spot will be limited to 500 mA.
Select End Exam and run Tube Warm-up from Daily Prep to enable the full mA range
capability.
The table landmark has been changed. This changes the location of all scans you have
prescribed. Double check all scans locations before you start scanning.

WARNING: This series contains one or more groups with multiple scans at the same
tomographic plane, i.e. same location. Minimum diagnostic delay is seconds
± the time of a monitor scan.
Do you wish to continue?

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) C-3

WARNING: This series contains one or more groups with multiple scans at the same
tomographic plane, i.e. same location. Temporal interval for images exceeds
3 seconds. Use of this data for processing of CT Perfusion maps may contain
errors in the functional information.
Do you wish to continue?
Biopsy has disabled automA. Please verify or change the mA as needed.
The dose for the new scan is greater than the maximal possible value. Do you wish to
continue?
Unrecognized tube in use - Dose may vary. The reported dose information is calculated
based on empirical observations of systems with GE Medical Systems tubes.
GE cannot assure the accuracy of reported dose information for any configurations that
include tubes other than GE Medical Systems tubes.
The detector is not at the proper temperature please allow approximately minutes for the
detector to come to temperature.
If you wish to proceed with this scan select the "OK" button, however IQ maybe degraded
including image artifacts.
AutoMa has been disabled. It can be enabled again once patient orientation matches
with that of the last scout series.
The prescribed mAs for Group % is greater than mAs limit for this tube, decrease mA to
mA.
The scan database is corrupted.
If you continue to use the system you might propagate the corruption.
Please shutdown and restart the system in order to automatically recover the database.
Please confirm that there is no beam obstruction.
The Daily Image Quality Check Test has detected a condition that may result in an image
with unacceptable image quality.
Please call GE Service and request a more thorough evaluation of your system's
condition.
Multiple patient entries are found. Please select the appropriate patient from the Select
Schedule Patient screen.
Failed to Acquire Scan Hardware.
This is probably because:
• New Patient is started in the ExamRx screen, or
• Some other tool is already scanning, or
• The application firmware is not downloaded to SBC, or
• Some other problem with the scan hardware.
Please correct the problem and try again.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) C-4

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Operator Message
Held Control Communication Failure:
There has been some communication error detected for the Hand Held Control Unit.
Please Check the Connection and reconfirm Rx.
Firmware reset occurred. Please wait until reset is completed.
To continue, you may have to reset the landmark. However, the new landmark could be
different from the previously set landmark.
Firmware reset occurred during scanning. The current exam cannot be completed. You
may obtain information on completed scans by returning to view/edit.
Please select end-exam when ready. New-patient button will be available when the
firmware reset is complete.
Recon Self Test detected reconstruction errors.
You will not be able to scan because no calibration information is available.
Try pressing |End Exam| followed by |New Patient|. This will cause ScanRx to attempt to
read the calibration database again.
Cardiac hardware is malfunctioning and has been disabled.
Please check the connections and re-enable gating on the View/Edit screen.
Can't perform cardiac gated scan.
Cardiac hardware is malfunctioning and has been disabled.
Please check the connections and re-enable gating on the View/Edit screen.

WARNING: Please remove any obstruction in the path of the beam.

WARNING: Converter boards have changed. Please first run DAS Gain Cal before
running Collimator Cal.

WARNING: Collimator Cal failed but scanning can be done with the pre-existing valid
calibration.
If this error repeats over several days call service. Fast Cal continues

WARNING: Clever Gain Air Calibration failed to get tracking Statistics. Tracking may
have been turned off.
Exit Fastcal and try again. If this problem persist, call service.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) C-5

WARNING: Fastcal may not have been performed within the last 24 hours.
Image generation has been delayed! SmartPrep cannot continue.
Monitor phase scanning has been paused.
Please proceed to the scan phase by selecting the "Scan Phase" button at your discretion.
The SmartPrep clock continues to show the elapsed time since the contrast injection
began. Use this clock to determine when to proceed to the scan phase.
The Mylar Window check has detected that the window is not clean.
A dirty mylar window may affect the calibration and cause Image Artifacts. Please clean
the mylar window.
Hit Continue to go on with FastCal without repeating the check or hit Retry to repeat the
check and confirm that the mylar window is clean.
The DAS Gain Calibration has not been run since the DAS Converter boards were
changed.
Please call the FE or GE Cares center for more information and help.
It has been over 96 hours since the fastcal was done.
Zslope calibration fails robustness test. Please call service.
Unable to determine if need to run auto mode Zslope Calibration due to access to the
FastCal.cfg has failed.
Press the [OK] button to continue the Fastcal.
Please call service for Fastcal configure file problem.

WARNING: Scan Manager Configuration Has Non-Patient Scanning Options Enabled!

WARNING: Scan Manager Configuration Has Beam Tracking Disabled! Scanner Is In

High Dose Mode.

WARNING: Gantry Balance Check must be performed.

Pressing OK will cause 2 automatic gantry rotations with 1 minute
separations.
Make sure Gantry is clear of all obstructions and click OK.
The Gantry Balance check process will take about 4 minutes.
Gantry Balance Check is executing. This process will take about 1 or 2 minutes.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) C-6

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Operator Message
Gantry Imbalance Condition Detected.
Image Quality May Be Compromised.
Perform Gantry Balance or Call GE Service
Gantry is out of Balance.
Calibration is Aborted.
Call Service.
Software has detected an invalid DAS configuration. Please reconfig to correct. If
condition persists after Reconfig call GE Cares.
Reconstruction process has stopped.
Scanning is possible but no images will be made.
Restart the system.
Please contact GE service.
Reconstruction times will be slower.
Scanning can continue.
Please contact GE service.
None of the Image Generation nodes are functioning. The system is still operational.
However, recon performance may be degraded.
All of the images from a scan that is currently being reconstructed are suspended.
The Scanning Hardware is not available; please wait for the hardware reset successful
status posted in the feature status area on the right monitor.
If the hardware reset fails, then reset the scan hardware from the Service Desktop
System Resets button.
A scan disk array failure was detected.
Please call GE Service to schedule repair of the scan disk array.
To continue scanner operation now, you may rebuild the scan disk array with less storage
capacity.
If you rebuild the scan disk array, all scan data on the current disk array will be lost.
Are you sure you want to rebuild the scan disk array?
Unable to verify system functionality on startup.
Please power cycle the console.
If the system fails to startup after the power cycle, then please call GE Service.
Protocol file is corrupted. Please correct using method below or contact your GE Service
Representative.
• Restore protocols - this will replace all protocols in "User"
• Using the most up to date copy of the Protocol DVD disk or System State disk
• From Service Desktop select "Utilities" then "System State"
• Now select "Protocols" and then "Restore".

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) C-7

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Operator Message
An unrecognized X-Ray tube has been installed on the system.
• GE Medical Systems cannot assure that the system performance will conform to
specifications.
• Advisory messages will be posted to the operator about an unrecognized tube during
tube warm-up, during Fast Calibration, and in the dose report.
The system has been configured to recognize a GE Medical Systems Tube. A %s-day
period from the date of tube installation has been granted to allow time to manually
verify the tube identity. Please call GE Medical Systems to dispatch a Field Service
Engineer (FSE) to verify the tube configuration. Please allow a minimum of 10 days for the
FSE to schedule verification. Verification should take no more than 30 minutes. If a GE
Medical Systems FSE does not verify the tube identity within %s days, the system will
revert to an "unrecognized tube" status, resulting in the following:
• GE Medical Systems cannot assure that the system performance will conform to
specifications.
• Advisory messages will be posted to the operator about an unrecognized tube during
system startup, during tube warm-up, during Fast Calibration, and in the dose report.
Scan disk array performance is degraded by one or more hard drive failures. Your scan
data storage is reduced because of this.
Please contact GE service to have the disk array repaired as soon as possible.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) C-8

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Operator Message
New software updates are available and ready to be installed on your scanner. These
software updates provide system enhancements and corrections to ensure optimal
system performance and security. All updates have been developed and validated
specifically for your hardware and software configuration. By downloading these
software updates, you agree to and are bound by the Terms and Conditions of Sale for GE
Medical Systems Products. The updates are expected to take approximately to install. For
additional information regarding the updates: Contact your Customer Service Center or
choose "Install Later" (you will be prompted on subsequent re-boots with this dialog), go
to iLinq, Under Software Updates review data for updates.

If you have questions or concerns, please contact your local Service Engineer or
Customer Service Center. Do you want to install software updates now?
The following patch(es): require a system reboot after install. The reboot will occur in 10
seconds.
2005 General Electric Company

Installing Software Updates...

Please wait while the system updates are installed... Estimated time required to install
updates is approximately

The software update installation started at __.

Update Installation Failed!

The following updates failed to install.

Please restart your system and initiate software update again, or notify the GEHC
On-Line Center that the install failed.
Revert back to the original configuration, skip installation and notify GEHC On-Line
Center that the install failed and create dispatch for FE follow-up.
Automatic Software Download & Install Capability Exists for your
scanner! This GE exclusive capability leverages the power of your Insite Broadband
connection to deliver the latest software updates to your system as soon as they are
released. The updates are downloaded automatically and the option to automatically
install them is provided during system start-up. Only GEHC developed and validated
updates are distributed via this tool. For an overview of this capability, Please review the
Software Download Topic on iLinq.

Automatic Software Updates

Continue (time out after 20 seconds)

Try Again

Skip Install

please wait ....

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) C-9

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Operator Message
The detector is not at the proper temperature. If you wish to proceed with this scan select
the "OK" button, however IQ maybe degraded including image artifacts.
Please contact GE Service.
The detector is too hot.
No scanning allowed.
Please contact GE Service
A system communication failure has occurred which will prevent scanning.
Please contact GE Service.
System has detected that firmware is down.
This will prevent scanning.
ScanRx could not be started because it could not communicate with scan database. The
system has to be shut down and restarted.
Please contact GE service.
Patient placements in series are different.
The landmark is not set.
Patient orientation now differs from when last scanned.
A localizer(s) is invalid for this prescription.
Unable to locate existing Patient Information.
Failed to enable Hand Held Control Unit. Please Check connections.
Exposure Time was changed to System Maximum Allowable value.
Exposure Time was changed to Tube Cooling Maximum Allowable value
Tube has reached the highest allowable temperature, Tube Cooling Optimization is
required.
Table height has changed - No timing graph will be displayed in SmartPrep.
The SmartPrep timing graph will not display due to a mismatch between the system and
reconstruction engine clocks. After the exam is complete, contact service to synchronize
the clocks.
System rounded Patient Weight in pounds to the closest value in kilograms.
System adjusted patient weight to be within allowable weight range.
Scan Request is not possible due to tube cooling. No up front delay is possible.
The system will apply an up front delay prior to scanning.
Scan Request is not possible due to tube cooling. Lower mA or kV to enable scan.
Start/End location(s) were changed due to landmark position.
More than 2 hours have elapsed since the last scan. Tube needs warming.
The Smart Prep Baseline image failed. Please try again.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) C-10

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Operator Message
Can not start Monitor Phase while interacting with the Baseline image.
Unable to set Alignment location. Landmark not set or table needs to be referenced.
Dose information database is uninitialized. Please see Error Log for Details.
Detector Temperature Is High. Image quality may be affected.
Detector Temperature Is Low. Image quality may be affected.

WARNING: Backup Timer stopped scan. X-ray stayed on longer than prescribed.
kV out of range. Potential for degraded image quality.
AutoVoice Malfunction:
AutoVoice is disabled
until scanning is stopped.
Gantry Controls Horizontal In button is non-functional.
Unlatch cradle to position patient.
Gantry Controls Horizontal Out button is non-functional.
Unlatch cradle to position patient.
Gantry Controls Internal Landmark button is non-functional.
Use the External Landmark button.
Gantry Controls External Landmark button is non-functional.
Use the Internal Landmark button.
Gantry Controls Landmark buttons are non-functional.
Scanning cannot continue.
Gantry Controls Stop Scan button is non-functional.
Use the Console Stop Scan button.
Gantry Controls Start Scan button is non-functional.
Use the Console Start Scan button.
AutoVoice and Breathing lights are disabled due to operator intervention until scanning
is stopped.
Cradle is released.
Gantry Controls Cradle Release button is non-functional.
Prep Delay: __ Seconds Remaining
Interscan Delay: __ Seconds Remaining
Tube Cooling Delay: Seconds Remaining
Operator Paused Scan
Operator Stopped Scan

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) C-11

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Operator Message
Scanner Hardware Paused Scan
Scanner Hardware Stopped Scan
X-ray off scan is in progress. Press [Stop Scan] to stop scanning
Prep Delay after [Start Scan] will be __ Seconds
Cradle is released. Latch the cradle to scan.
Table is below the scanning minimum.
Raise the table to scan.
Remote Tilt is Disabled due to Touch Sensor Collision.
Scan position prescribed is no longer valid. Please re-prescribe.
Cradle is released.
Cannot bring tube rotor up for __ seconds.

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) C-12

A B
Accelerator Line 32-2 Backwards 1 15-18, 16-19
Accelerator Line Commands 32-15 Bar Code Reader 17-4
Accept Negative Pixels 29-3 Batch 34-5, 35-12
Active Annotation 34-14, 35-24 Batch Protocol 34-69, 35-49
Add Images Together 29-5 Bind Series 29-3
Addition 29-2 Biopsy Location 18-6
Adjust Graphic Rx 21-9 Biopsy Mode 18-2
Adjust the Localizer 20-13 Biopsy Reference 18-5
Adjusting a Protocol 21-2 Biopsy Reference Scans 18-2
Adjusting the Cross-Reference Image 34-16, Biopsy Rx 18-2, 18-5
35-26 Blue Frame 26-14
AE Title 24-15 Brain/Bone Interface 28-8
Analysis 19-14 Brain/Bone Interface in Image Works 28-18
Analysis of Results 19-9 Breath Hold 21-11
Anatomical Selector 6-25 Breath Hold Delay 21-2
Annotate Image 32-6 Breathe Time 21-11
Annotate the Scout With Scan Lines 32-4 Bright box 3-23
Anonymous Patient 24-3 Build or Edit a Protocol 6-28
Archive 24-2, 24-3 Building an Image Set 34-8, 35-17
Archive Device 24-18 Building Protocol 6-5
Archive Exams/Series/Images 24-22, 24-26,
24-28 C
Archive Node 24-16 Calibrations 4-3
Auto 24-4 Cancel Compare 25-16
Auto Detect 10-11, 11-11 Cancel Film Exam 22-18
Auto Enlarge 30-2 Cancel Film Series 22-18
Auto Film 23-3 Cancel Series Selection 25-13
Auto Link 26-2 Cardiac Helical 11-5
Auto mA 6-7 Cardiac Helical Scan 10-23, 11-23
Auto Minify 30-2 Channel Utilization Table - Plus Modes 5-46
Auto Print 22-7 Check Network History 24-36
Auto Start 22-7 Choosing Ruler Styles 34-36
Auto Voice 21-12 Cine 6-2, 25-12
AutoFilm Setup 22-5 Cine Loop 25-12
Automatic Filming 22-2 Clear Last Point 34-6, 35-13
Autostart 22-2 Clear Reference Image 34-6
Autoview 26-2 Clear Trace 34-6, 35-13
Axial 6-2 Clinical table elevation adjustment verification
Axial Detector Configurations 5-5, 5-20, 5-34 procedure for PET-CT RT and CT-RT 19-11,

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) Index-1

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
19-12, 19-14 A Protocol 34-69, 35-50
Analysis 19-14 Density readings (See also ROI) 31-4
Procedure 19-12 Destination 22-5
Clinical table lateral motion verification Detector Configurations 5-3, 5-17
procedure for PET-CT RT and CT-RT Detector/Data Acquisition System 3-12
Analysis of Results 19-9 DFOV 21-16
Comb 29-3 Differences between Auto Film and Manual
Comments 24-15 Film 23-3
Compare Direct Visualization 12-1
Exams/Series/Images 25-15 Direct3D 12-2
Complete an Anonymous Scan Data Save Curves definition 12-2
33-16 Curves selection 12-23
Completed Records 17-2 Display factors 12-26
Confirm Biopsy Rx 18-6 Review mode 12-28
Confirm the Localizer (Scout) 20-14 Selecting curves 12-23
Connect Pro 17-2 Set parameters 12-20
Continue Same Sheet 22-18 Setup 12-20
Contrast 20-2 Display
Copies 22-7 Exam Information 32-8
Copy and Paste Protocols 6-54 Parameters of a Scan Mode 32-10
Copy Protocols 6-54 Display Factors 21-16
Create 24-43 Display Field of View 21-16
Create a New Image Display Normal 28-10
Using Only the Maximum CT Number 29-14 Display Normal in Image Works 28-20
Using Only the Minimum CT Number 29-16 Display Preferences 26-11, 26-13
Create Anonymous Patient 24-43 Dose 2-9
Create New Images from Scan Data 33-5 Accumulated Exam DLP 2-9
Cross Reference 32-2 Dose Length Product 2-9
CT Safety 2-5 Projected Series DLP 2-9
CTDIw 2-9 Drop to Edit Trace 34-21
Cursor Annotations 34-26 Drop to Rotate Trace 34-20, 34-21
Cursor Controls 34-4, 35-11
Cursor Icon Function 34-29 E
Curved View Type 34-39, 35-55 ECG 10-9, 11-10
Custom Search 24-17 ECG Waveform 9-2
Edit 24-39
D Edit a Patient Schedule 17-14
Default FOV 34-38 Edit Patient Information 24-38
Delete a Protocol 6-57 Edited by Field 24-41
Delete an AutoVoice 6-53 Editing Protocols 6-6
Delete Exams/Series/Images From the EKG 10-10, 11-10
System 24-44 EKG Waveform 9-2
Deleting Emergency stop 3-8

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) Index-2

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Enlarge 34-6, 34-17, 35-13, 35-29 H
Era Year Entry 20-3 Hand Held Controller (HHC) 15-3, 16-3
Exam Prescription for Prospective Gating 9-5 Hand Held Controller Button Descriptions
Exam Rx 3-18 15-4, 16-4
Hardware Components 5-2, 5-16, 5-33
F HD MIP Render Mode 34-5, 35-12
F Keys 23-2 Head SFOV 21-7
Fast Cals 4-7 Helical 6-2
Feature Status Area 24-2 Helical Configurations
Feature status area 3-18 2 and 4 Row Mode Interleaved 5-9, 5-25,
Film Composer Parameters 23-3 5-42
Film Direction 22-6 4 Row Mode Interspaced 5-11, 5-26
Film Series Parameters 23-2 8 Row Mode 5-27
Filming 24-3 Helical Pitch and Scan Mode Definitions 5-9,
First/Last View 34-64, 35-51 5-24, 5-41
Flip 22-13 HHC 15-3, 16-3
Flip/Rotate 28-4 Hide or Show Graphics 32-12
Flip/Rotate in Image Works 28-14 Host 24-14
FLR 22-13 How to 3D Images 34-7, 35-15
Forward 1 15-18, 16-19
Frame Format 22-12 I
Free Hand Trace 34-34, 35-38 iLinq 3-18
FTB 22-13 Image 24-2
FTB/FLR 22-13 Addition 29-2
Full System Calibrations 4-3 Matte 28-12
Sharp 28-6
G Smooth 28-6
Gantry controls 3-3, 3-8 Subtraction 29-2
Gantry display 3-7, 3-10 Image Filters 22-2, 28-2
Gating Check 20-13 Image in Image Works
Get 24-34 Matte 28-21
Get Alignment Light Location 18-6 Sharp 28-16
Get Examination 24-34 Smooth 28-16
Get Images 24-34 Image Magnification 30-6
Get Series 24-34 Image Orientation 28-4
Graphic conventions 1-2 Image Orientation in Image Works 28-14
Graphic Options 34-32, 34-34 Image Works 3-18
Graphic Rx 21-9 Auto Enlarge and Auto Minify 30-7
Gray Scale Enhancement 22-3, 28-2 Density Readings 31-14
Grid 31-8, 34-36, 35-38 Grid 31-18
GSE 22-15 Make the image smaller or larger 30-10
Guidelines For mAs 5-13, 5-29, 5-45 Measure from Point to Point 31-16
Mesure Distance 31-16

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) Index-3

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Move the image around the screen 30-9 Manual Film Composer 23-3
Overlay a Grid 31-18 Manual Film Composer Parameters 23-7
ROI 31-14 Manually Add an Image to the AutoFilm
Scroll 30-9 Composer 22-19
Zoom 30-10 Matrix Size 6-40
Integral Render Mode 34-5, 35-12 Matte
Interactive Review Window 12-2 ematte 28-12, 28-21
Interscan Delay (ISD) 21-11 rmatte 28-12, 28-21
Intersection 34-34 Maximum Pixel Value Extraction 29-2
Interval 22-13 Measure Density Readings on Multiple Images
Interventional / Biopsy Scanning 2-22 31-10
Inverse Video 28-11 Measure Distance 31-6
IPPS™ Lok-Bars 19-11 Measure from Point to Point 31-6
IVY Monitor Recommended 3 Lead Placement Measuring an Angle 34-22, 35-33
10-19, 11-19 Measuring an Area 34-24, 35-35
Measuring Distance 34-19, 35-31
K MedTec RT alignment device 19-11
kV 21-8 Min IP Render Mode 34-5, 35-12
Minimum Pixel Extraction 29-2
L Mini-Viewer 25-2
Label an MOD 24-20 MIP Render Mode 34-5, 35-12
Large SFOV 21-7 MIROI 31-2, 31-10
Laser alignment light 3-6, 3-10 Modality 27-6
Lateral Motion Verification 19-2 Monitors 3-16
Lead placement diagram 10-18, 10-29, 11-18, Mouse 3-22
11-29 Moving the Orthogonal View Locations 34-10,
Left Series 25-16 35-21
Limited Access Room Configuration MPVR 34-56
2-28 Multiple Image Display 26-7
List/Select 25-5
Localizer 20-13 N
Lock Orientation 34-6, 35-13 Negative Pixels 29-3
Lock to Trace 34-31 Network 24-3, 24-14, 24-31, 24-32, 24-33, 24-36
Look for Images that are not Reconstructed Network History 24-36
33-8 Networking Terms 24-4
Loop 34-67, 35-53 New Records 17-2
Next/Prior
M Each Viewport 26-11
mA 21-8 Series Binding 26-13
Main on View Features 34-17, 35-28 No Autostart 22-17
Main On View Menu 34-5, 35-12 Normal 22-6
Managing Images 24-1
Manual Detect 10-11, 11-11

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) Index-4

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
O 23-5
Optimizer 21-3 Primary Viewport 26-14
Overlay a Grid 31-8 Print Series 23-12
Printer Selected 34-38, 35-42
P Proc 29-3
Page Down 25-8 Procedure 19-6, 19-12
Page Up 25-8 Projection 34-34
Paging 25-2 Prospective Gating 9-1, 9-2
Patient Information 20-5 Concepts 9-2
Patient Preparation 10-9 Setup exam prescription 9-5
Patient Schedule 17-2 Prospective Multiple Reconstructions 6-3
Add a Patient to the Schedule 17-8 Protect/Unprotect Scan Data 33-18
Check the Status of a Patient 17-18 Protocol Management 6-28, 6-54, 6-57
Delete a Patient From the Schedule 17-10 Protocols 20-2
Edit a Patient Schedule 17-14
Select a Patient from the Schedule 17-16 R
Set Up Preferences in the Schedule 17-11 R to R interval 9-2
Update Patient Schedule 17-6 Ratio Slider Bar 29-3
View More Information About the Patient Raw Data 33-2
17-19 Ray Sum Render Mode 34-5, 35-12
Pause Filming 22-17 Recommended workflow for RT 19-2
Pause Images from Reconstructing 33-9 Reference Image 25-18
Ped SFOV 21-7 Reference Images 34-18, 35-29
Perform Air Calibrations 4-7 Reformat
Perform Tube Warm-Up 4-5 Creating a Histogram View Type 34-47,
Performed Procedure Step 13-2, 24-4, 25-3 35-60
Performed Procedure Step (PPS) 13-1, 14-1 Creating an X Section View Type 34-52,
Phase Location 10-12, 11-12 35-63
Ping 24-32 Creating and Saving a Batch Protocol
Pitch 10-12, 11-12 34-58
Pixel Value 31-9 Creating Measurements 34-19, 35-31
Place Images in the Manual Film Composer Releasing Scan Data 33-3
23-10 Remote 24-4
Plane Orientation Indicator 34-4, 35-11 Remove Graphics From the Image 32-13
PMR 6-3 Remove Images from the Reconstruction List
Port Number 24-15 33-11
Position the Patient 20-9 Remove Patient Information from an Exam
Power Distribution Unit 3-3 24-43
PPS 13-2, 24-4 Render Modes 34-5, 35-12
Prep Delay 21-11 Repeat a Series 21-22
Prepare a storage media for use 24-20 Report Pixel Value 31-9
Prerequisite Skills 1-1 Requirements 19-11
Preset Window Width and Window Level Keys Reserving Scan Data 33-3

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) Index-5

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Reset 24-41 Exam, Series, Image 24-32
Reset Pointer 34-6, 35-13 Send images to the Manual Film Composer
Reset Size 34-6, 34-17, 35-13, 35-29 23-10
Restore 24-24 Series Binding 29-11
Restoring Raw Data 33-3 Set an Access to a Local Host 24-17
Restoring Scan Data 33-3 Set Batch/Movie Loop 34-58, 35-44
Results 19-7, 19-14 Set the Direct3D Parameters in the Scan
Resume Image Reconstruction 33-10 Prescription 12-20
Retrieve Exams/Series/Images 24-24 Set up a Remote Host 24-14
Retrieve Exams/Series/Images from Another Set Viewports
Computer 24-33 Automatic display of next series 26-13
Retro Recon 16-25, 33-5 Images to display in order 26-11
Right Series 25-16 Set Window/Level Presets for the HHC 15-20,
Rock 34-67, 35-54 16-23
ROI 31-2 Setting Scan Field of View and Display Field of
Rotate 22-14 View 21-2
Rotation 34-60 Setting Up a Patient without an ID# 20-2
R-Peak Value 10-12, 11-12 Setup Patient Information 20-5
SFOV 21-7
S Show Annotations 34-27, 35-37
Safety 2-1 Show Graphics 34-27, 35-37
Safety Notices 1-4 Show Localizer 21-9
Save an Image Screen 32-14 Show Recon 3 21-19
Save Model 34-71 Shutdown 3-38, 3-39
Save/Restore Scan Data 33-14 Side view of QA device and weights placement
Saving Raw Data 33-2 19-12
Saving Scan Data 33-2 Side view of table 19-7
Scan Slice Profiles 5-14, 5-30, 5-46
Baseline Phase 7-8 Slide 22-6
Monitor Phase 7-10 Small SFOV 21-7
Scan Phase 7-12 SmartPrep 7-2
Scan Data 33-2 Baseline Phase 7-2
Scan Parameters 10-9, 10-13, 11-13, 11-20, 21-5 Monitor Phase 7-2
Scan Type 21-5 Scan Phase 7-3
Scout 20-13 SmartPrep Parameters 7-2, 7-5
Screen Save 32-2, 34-6, 35-12 SmartStep 15-1, 16-1
Scroll Through A Set of Images 25-9 Backwards 1 15-18, 16-19
Secondary Viewport 26-15 Display 15-6, 16-7
Select a Protocol 20-11 Display SmartStep Images 15-17, 16-18
Select an Archive Device 24-18 Forward 1 15-18, 16-19
Selecting an Image Set 34-8, 35-17 Hand Held Controller (HHC) 15-3, 16-3
Selecting the Output Device 34-66, 35-47 Hand Held Controller Button Descriptions
Send 15-4, 16-4

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) Index-6

© 2007 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Last Image 15-18, 16-19 Use VariSpeed 8-4
Prepare for SmartStep 15-9, 16-9 User Interface
Scan with SmartStep 15-14, 16-15 Axial 5-7, 5-22, 5-38
Set Window/Level Presets for the HHC Helical 5-12, 5-28, 5-44
15-20, 16-23 User Preferences 32-2
SmartStep 15-2, 16-2 Users conventions 3-24
SnapShot Segment 11-6
Sort 27-6, 27-7 V
Sort Examinations 27-6 VariSpeed 8-2
Archived Status 27-6 VariViewer
Date 27-6 Set Up 12-32
Exam number 27-6 Set Up Batch Mode 12-35
Patient Name 27-6 View Images 12-34
Sorting 27-3 VariViewer Batch Prescriptions 12-6
Spatial 25-13 Video Reverse 28-11
Specify a Zoom Factor 30-6 View Edit 21-5
Start New Sheet 22-17 View Types 34-4, 35-11
Startup 3-38, 3-39 Viewer 25-2
Subtract Images 29-8 Viewing Protocols 6-6
Subtraction 29-2
Surface Render Mode 34-5, 35-12 W
Suspended Entries 33-2 Window Level 25-9
System Options 6-6 Window Width and Level Presets 23-2

T X
Table 3-15 X-Ref Scout 22-9
Temporal 25-13 XY Lock 34-31
Tick 34-36, 35-38
Tilt Correction 5-8, 5-23, 5-40 Y
Timing Bolus Scan for cardiac scanning 10-22, Yellow Frame 26-15
11-22
Timing Parameters 21-11 Z
Transfer 24-4 Zoom 30-5
Transfer Exams/Series/Images 24-31
Transmit 24-4
Tube and collimator 3-12
Tube Warm-Up 4-2
Type Text on the Image 32-6

U
Unlock Orientation 34-6, 34-18, 35-13, 35-29
Update the Reconstruction List 33-13
Use Performed Procedure Step 13-4, 14-5

LightSpeed™ Series 2369740-1EN Rev. 10 (10/07) Index-7

01Mx16CourseIntroCTC Rev04Nov2010
No ratings yet
01Mx16CourseIntroCTC Rev04Nov2010
21 pages
CT Tips
No ratings yet
CT Tips
50 pages
07MW11-10 SP Installation Guide After LFC 1
No ratings yet
07MW11-10 SP Installation Guide After LFC 1
3 pages
02Mx16Safety Rev03
No ratings yet
02Mx16Safety Rev03
14 pages
Technical Publications: Direction 2402692
No ratings yet
Technical Publications: Direction 2402692
253 pages
O-Scan Image Quality and Sequences Manual R04 EVO20
No ratings yet
O-Scan Image Quality and Sequences Manual R04 EVO20
132 pages
1.5T Scanner Software V3.x Reinstallation Guide Operating Documentation
No ratings yet
1.5T Scanner Software V3.x Reinstallation Guide Operating Documentation
26 pages
05Mx16GhostGPC System10
No ratings yet
05Mx16GhostGPC System10
37 pages
GEHC-DICOM-Conformance LightSpeedVCT72VCTSelect DOC1200461 Rev3
No ratings yet
GEHC-DICOM-Conformance LightSpeedVCT72VCTSelect DOC1200461 Rev3
185 pages
5430728-1EN Rev01 Manual, Operator, WiSP
No ratings yet
5430728-1EN Rev01 Manual, Operator, WiSP
2 pages
Calibration Idt
No ratings yet
Calibration Idt
34 pages
Lity Dicom Surgery Gehc Dicom Conformance Brivooec715 785 865 Vwks1 XX Doc1188156 Rev3 PDF
No ratings yet
Lity Dicom Surgery Gehc Dicom Conformance Brivooec715 785 865 Vwks1 XX Doc1188156 Rev3 PDF
4 pages
GE Digital Activating Licenses Offline Using The GE Cloud License Server
No ratings yet
GE Digital Activating Licenses Offline Using The GE Cloud License Server
10 pages
Helical CT Scanner: No. MPDCT0256EAB
No ratings yet
Helical CT Scanner: No. MPDCT0256EAB
12 pages
Productos CT de Siemens: Somatom
100% (1)
Productos CT de Siemens: Somatom
67 pages
DX-D Retrofit System - SB 15 - Software Update NX 2.0.8800 - 3.0.8800 SU1 Available
No ratings yet
DX-D Retrofit System - SB 15 - Software Update NX 2.0.8800 - 3.0.8800 SU1 Available
15 pages
Technical Publication: Direction 2296441-100 Revision 06 Ge Medical Systems Lightspeed 3.X - Schematics and Boards
100% (2)
Technical Publication: Direction 2296441-100 Revision 06 Ge Medical Systems Lightspeed 3.X - Schematics and Boards
380 pages
Esaote C Scan Brochure
100% (1)
Esaote C Scan Brochure
12 pages
Lightspeed Web Service Developer Guide
No ratings yet
Lightspeed Web Service Developer Guide
41 pages
工作站
No ratings yet
工作站
50 pages
Mri Ge Profile Brochure
No ratings yet
Mri Ge Profile Brochure
6 pages
Brilliance CT: 6-Slice, 10-Slice, 16-Slice, 16 Power Configurations
No ratings yet
Brilliance CT: 6-Slice, 10-Slice, 16-Slice, 16 Power Configurations
147 pages
Operator Manual - MAMMOMAT Revelation TiCEM VC20 SAPEDM XPW7-340G.621.22.04.02 MamRev VC20 TiCEM
No ratings yet
Operator Manual - MAMMOMAT Revelation TiCEM VC20 SAPEDM XPW7-340G.621.22.04.02 MamRev VC20 TiCEM
23 pages
Hispeed Cte Dual PDF 1
100% (10)
Hispeed Cte Dual PDF 1
16 pages
CT Scan Pricing for Tacloban Hospital
No ratings yet
CT Scan Pricing for Tacloban Hospital
12 pages
Mobile X-Ray System for Hospitals
No ratings yet
Mobile X-Ray System for Hospitals
15 pages
OEC Workstation For FlexiView
100% (1)
OEC Workstation For FlexiView
262 pages
Brivo OEC850 Quick Start en Rev.5
No ratings yet
Brivo OEC850 Quick Start en Rev.5
2 pages
VB 21
No ratings yet
VB 21
134 pages
Revolution Maxima Brochure
No ratings yet
Revolution Maxima Brochure
16 pages
BV Endura & Pulsera Update
100% (1)
BV Endura & Pulsera Update
15 pages
NeuViz 16 Classic Configuration Guide
100% (1)
NeuViz 16 Classic Configuration Guide
12 pages
PET-CT BIOGRAPH MCT
No ratings yet
PET-CT BIOGRAPH MCT
9 pages
SPB7-330 843 03 02 02
No ratings yet
SPB7-330 843 03 02 02
18 pages
Intera 1 5t 2009
No ratings yet
Intera 1 5t 2009
16 pages
HiSpeed ZXi Operator Manual
No ratings yet
HiSpeed ZXi Operator Manual
418 pages
GT Table Can Not Be Raised - Shorted Motor Cable
No ratings yet
GT Table Can Not Be Raised - Shorted Motor Cable
4 pages
Definium 6000 I/II/III System: GE Healthcare
No ratings yet
Definium 6000 I/II/III System: GE Healthcare
2 pages
PM Access Dual
No ratings yet
PM Access Dual
58 pages
GE Healthcare MRI Site Preparation Guide
No ratings yet
GE Healthcare MRI Site Preparation Guide
12 pages
Philips Azurion Dicom 2.1
No ratings yet
Philips Azurion Dicom 2.1
96 pages
License Move (MR) - MR00-000.816.90.02.02
No ratings yet
License Move (MR) - MR00-000.816.90.02.02
86 pages
8 Slice Ge Lightspeed Ultra Specs
No ratings yet
8 Slice Ge Lightspeed Ultra Specs
3 pages
Rws Service PDF
No ratings yet
Rws Service PDF
288 pages
Cios Flow Replace Part
0% (1)
Cios Flow Replace Part
25 pages
Philips
No ratings yet
Philips
7 pages
5497970-1en Book 3
No ratings yet
5497970-1en Book 3
524 pages
AIRIS II Standard Details
No ratings yet
AIRIS II Standard Details
20 pages
Somatom PDF
No ratings yet
Somatom PDF
590 pages
Mpdct0248eab - AsteionSuper4 48kW TSX-021B5
No ratings yet
Mpdct0248eab - AsteionSuper4 48kW TSX-021B5
16 pages
Optima XR
No ratings yet
Optima XR
128 pages
GE OEC-9900-Elite-C-Arm 5538466-1EN-03
No ratings yet
GE OEC-9900-Elite-C-Arm 5538466-1EN-03
14 pages
1.1 SIGNA Explorer Brochure
100% (1)
1.1 SIGNA Explorer Brochure
16 pages
Technical Publication: Hispeed Dual, Prospeed Fii Installation
No ratings yet
Technical Publication: Hispeed Dual, Prospeed Fii Installation
158 pages
CT02-025 816 01 02 02
No ratings yet
CT02-025 816 01 02 02
34 pages
Lightspeed 5.x Plus Installation Manual - Im - 5117716-100 - 4
No ratings yet
Lightspeed 5.x Plus Installation Manual - Im - 5117716-100 - 4
260 pages
03 MX 16 Layoutand Architecture 07
No ratings yet
03 MX 16 Layoutand Architecture 07
26 pages
LS Series Quick Step Guide - English - UM - 5119787-100 - 8
No ratings yet
LS Series Quick Step Guide - English - UM - 5119787-100 - 8
237 pages
LS16 Learning Reference Guide - English - UM - 5827100-1EN - 1
No ratings yet
LS16 Learning Reference Guide - English - UM - 5827100-1EN - 1
996 pages
5.X LS Pro16 - LS 16 App Tips & Work-Arounds - UM - 2349192-100 - 01
No ratings yet
5.X LS Pro16 - LS 16 App Tips & Work-Arounds - UM - 2349192-100 - 01
46 pages
DOC0527788r1 E4879certified 2X-4X A
No ratings yet
DOC0527788r1 E4879certified 2X-4X A
12 pages
Service Pack 2 Common Software Addendum - English - UM - 5265325-1en - 2
No ratings yet
Service Pack 2 Common Software Addendum - English - UM - 5265325-1en - 2
29 pages
DOC0589821 - CT 2X-4X Installation
No ratings yet
DOC0589821 - CT 2X-4X Installation
7 pages
Lung Cancer Screening Option User Manual - Technical Reference Manual - UM - 5694019-1en - 4
No ratings yet
Lung Cancer Screening Option User Manual - Technical Reference Manual - UM - 5694019-1en - 4
46 pages
Matrix Manual - English UM 5231794-1en 4
No ratings yet
Matrix Manual - English UM 5231794-1en 4
18 pages
DOC0527858r1 ScheduleB PM Report
No ratings yet
DOC0527858r1 ScheduleB PM Report
5 pages
DOC0527865r2 ScheduleD PM Report
No ratings yet
DOC0527865r2 ScheduleD PM Report
7 pages
PM Schedule B - VCT - HD
No ratings yet
PM Schedule B - VCT - HD
6 pages
VCT HDAS (HALO) DAS/Detector Block Diagram: ISO Center
No ratings yet
VCT HDAS (HALO) DAS/Detector Block Diagram: ISO Center
1 page
Approved Document - 5272833SCH - r6.pdf Page 2 of 2
No ratings yet
Approved Document - 5272833SCH - r6.pdf Page 2 of 2
1 page
DOC0527785 - CT 5X Certified
No ratings yet
DOC0527785 - CT 5X Certified
9 pages
Epsilon
No ratings yet
Epsilon
2 pages
PM Report Schedule B VCT
No ratings yet
PM Report Schedule B VCT
5 pages
LS5.X HP60 Technical Reference Manual - UM - 5478900-1EN - 6
No ratings yet
LS5.X HP60 Technical Reference Manual - UM - 5478900-1EN - 6
296 pages
LightSpeed Reference Protocol Guide - UM - 5445004-1EN - 1
No ratings yet
LightSpeed Reference Protocol Guide - UM - 5445004-1EN - 1
134 pages
Amc Configuration Tool - Im - 5146896 - 1
No ratings yet
Amc Configuration Tool - Im - 5146896 - 1
24 pages
LightSpeed Series Technical Reference Manual - UM - 5478900-2-1EN - 3
No ratings yet
LightSpeed Series Technical Reference Manual - UM - 5478900-2-1EN - 3
316 pages
LightSpeed Series Learning and Reference Guide - UM - 5478901-1EN - 2
100% (1)
LightSpeed Series Learning and Reference Guide - UM - 5478901-1EN - 2
850 pages
Lightspeed 5.X Software Installation Procedures - Im - 2349183-100 - 1
No ratings yet
Lightspeed 5.X Software Installation Procedures - Im - 2349183-100 - 1
38 pages
Netiquette: A Guide To Using IM at Work
No ratings yet
Netiquette: A Guide To Using IM at Work
3 pages
Homework Unit 1
No ratings yet
Homework Unit 1
1 page
Nielsen Norman Group Usability Services
No ratings yet
Nielsen Norman Group Usability Services
1 page
NWM CH 12
No ratings yet
NWM CH 12
55 pages
Term Paper Mill Definition
100% (1)
Term Paper Mill Definition
5 pages
Part 2 Introduction To ML
No ratings yet
Part 2 Introduction To ML
13 pages
Gen 9 Vs Hana 2.0
No ratings yet
Gen 9 Vs Hana 2.0
5 pages
PPP English Form 1 P1
No ratings yet
PPP English Form 1 P1
11 pages
APC - April 2024 AU
No ratings yet
APC - April 2024 AU
116 pages
CA Module 13
No ratings yet
CA Module 13
30 pages
Comprehensive Data Science Learning Plan
No ratings yet
Comprehensive Data Science Learning Plan
4 pages
Data Communication Encoding Techniques Lab
No ratings yet
Data Communication Encoding Techniques Lab
9 pages
i.MX DSP User Guide for Audio Codecs
No ratings yet
i.MX DSP User Guide for Audio Codecs
21 pages
Nykaa - Digital Marketing
No ratings yet
Nykaa - Digital Marketing
24 pages
Lab 1 Introduction To Python Programming
No ratings yet
Lab 1 Introduction To Python Programming
11 pages
Epp - Tle Ict 7
No ratings yet
Epp - Tle Ict 7
6 pages
Project Data Analysis 2025
No ratings yet
Project Data Analysis 2025
2 pages
Globalprotect App User Guide
No ratings yet
Globalprotect App User Guide
178 pages
Google Form Templates For Education
No ratings yet
Google Form Templates For Education
2 pages
MySQL Admin Guide for Beginners
No ratings yet
MySQL Admin Guide for Beginners
19 pages
Cs3353c Programming and Data Structures
No ratings yet
Cs3353c Programming and Data Structures
385 pages
Credential Dumping Techniques Guide
No ratings yet
Credential Dumping Techniques Guide
157 pages
OOP Paper Analysis
No ratings yet
OOP Paper Analysis
67 pages
CUDA String Matching Algorithms
No ratings yet
CUDA String Matching Algorithms
10 pages
Complaint Management System
83% (36)
Complaint Management System
18 pages
Resume Lisa Pang
No ratings yet
Resume Lisa Pang
1 page
Statement of Purpose for Master's in IS
No ratings yet
Statement of Purpose for Master's in IS
2 pages
Test Case Specification 1.0.0aaaa
No ratings yet
Test Case Specification 1.0.0aaaa
13 pages
Wireless & Mobile Communication Exam
No ratings yet
Wireless & Mobile Communication Exam
16 pages
Transitioning from SAP ECC to S/4HANA
100% (1)
Transitioning from SAP ECC to S/4HANA
12 pages